Kierkegaard's Journals and Notebooks, Volume 6: Journals NB11 - NB14 9781400845330

Citation preview

KIERKEGAARD’S JOURNALS AND NOTEBOOKS

BRU CE H. KIRM MSE A ND K. BRIAN SÖDERQUIST G EN E RA L EDITORS

KIERKEGAARD’S JOURNALS AND NOTEBOOKS VOLUME 6 Journals NB11–14

Volume Edited by Niels Jørgen Cappelørn, Alastair Hannay, Bruce H. Kirmmse, George Pa�ison, Joel D. S. Rasmussen, Vanessa Rumble, and K. Brian Söderquist

Published in cooperation with the Søren Kierkegaard Research Centre Copenhagen

Princeton University Press Princeton and Oxford

KIERKEGAARD’S

JOURNALS and NOTEBOOKS Editorial Board Niels Jørgen Cappelørn, Alastair Hannay, David Kangas, Bruce H. Kirmmse, George Pa�ison, Joel D. S. Rasmussen, Vanessa Rumble, and K. Brian Söderquist in cooperation with the Søren Kierkegaard Research Centre, Copenhagen Volume 6, Journals NB11–NB14 Originally published under the titles Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er: 22 Journalerne NB11–NB14 and Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er: K22 Kommentarer til Journalerne NB11–NB14 © 2005 by the Søren Kierkegaard Research Centre Foundation, Copenhagen The Søren Kierkegaard Research Centre Foundation at Copenhagen University has been established with support from the Danish National Research Foundation. English translation Copyright © 2012 by the Søren Kierkegaard Research Centre Foundation, Copenhagen, and the Howard and Edna Hong Kierkegaard Library, St. Olaf College, Northfield, Minnesota Requests for permission to reproduce material from this work should be sent to Permissions, Princeton University Press Published by Princeton University Press, 41 William Street, Princeton, New Jersey 08540 In the United Kingdom: Princeton University Press, 6 Oxford Street, Woodstock, Oxfordshire OX20 1TW press.princeton.edu All Rights Reserved Library of Congress Control Number 2011925169 ISBN: 978-0-691-15553-1 British Library Cataloging-in-Publication Data is available The publication of Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks is supported by grants from the Danish Ministry of Culture, the United States National Endowment for the Humanities, and Connecticut College. Any views, findings, conclusions, or recommendations expressed in this publication do not necessarily reflect those of the National Endowment for the Humanities. Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks is based on Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er, which is published with the support of grants from the Danish National Research Foundation and the Danish Ministry of Culture. Except as otherwise noted, all photographs have been provided by the photographic studio of the Royal Danish Library. This book has been composed in Palatino and Optima by K.Nun Design, Copenhagen, Denmark Text design by Bent Rohde Printed on acid-free paper. ∞ Printed in the United States of America

CO NTENTS

Introduction

........................

vii

Journal NB 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

Journal NB 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

141

Journal NB 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

271

Journal NB 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343

Notes for Journal NB 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes for Journal NB 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

443

Notes for Journal NB 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes for Journal NB 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

579

.............................

687

.......................... Concordance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

693

Maps

Calendar

495 619

699

vii

Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks Introduction to the English Language Edition Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks is based on Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er (herea�er, SKS) [Søren Kierkegaard’s Writings] (Copenhagen: Gad, 1997–), which is a Danish scholarly, annotated edition of everything wri�en by Søren Kierkegaard (1813–1855). When completed, SKS will comprise fi�y-five volumes. SKS divides the entirety of Kierkegaard’s output into four categories: 1) works published by Kierkegaard during his lifetime (e.g., such well-known titles as Either/Or, Fear and Trembling, and The Sickness unto Death); 2) works that lay ready―or substantially ready―for publication at the time of Kierkegaard’s death, but which he did not publish in his lifetime (e.g., titles such as The Book on Adler, The Point of View for My Work as an Author, and Judge for Yourself!); 3) journals, notebooks, excerpts, and loose papers, collectively titled Kierkegaard’s “journals and notebooks”; and 4) le�ers and biographical documents. Clearly, Kierkegaard was not only a prolific author, he was also a prolific writer, and his literary activity found expression not only in his published works but also in the mass of writings that were not published in his lifetime. It is these writings, the third category listed above, titled Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks (herea�er, KJN) that constitute the material of the present English language edition. For a detailed account of previous Danish and English language editions of Kierkegaard’s unpublished writings, see pp. vii–xii of the “Introduction to the English Language Edition” in volume 1 of KJN.

I. Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks Based as it is on the new Danish edition of SKS, the present English language edition of Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks employs the SKS principle of organization by archival unit: journals, notebooks, and loose papers. The materials constituting the present edition of KJN consist of the documents mentioned above as the third category of materials included in SKS as volumes 17 through 27. The eleven volumes of KJN contain the translated text of these eleven SKS volumes,

viii

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS

AND

N OTEBOOKS

plus most of the explanatory notes contained in the eleven SKS commentary volumes that accompany SKS 17–27. Specifically, the textual materials constituting KJN consist of the following documents: a) a set of ten journals to which Kierkegaard affixed labels designating them “AA” through “KK” (as “I” and “J” are identical in the classical Roman alphabet, there is no journal titled “II”); b) fi�een notebooks, designated “1” through “15” by the editors of SKS, sequenced according to the dates on which Kierkegaard first made use of them; Kierkegaard himself assigned titles to four of these notebooks, and the editors retain these titles in parentheses; c) a series of thirty-six quarto-sized, bound journal volumes to which Kierkegaard affixed labels designating them journals “NB,” “NB2,” “NB3,” through “NB36”; and d) a great variety of materials―a large number of individual folio sheets, pages, slips, and scraps of paper―which the editors of KJN, following the editors of SKS, title “loose papers.” There is a good deal of chronological back-and-forth in Kierkegaard’s posthumous papers. Kierkegaard o�en made use of several of the first twenty-four documents―the ten journals designated “AA” through “KK” and the notebooks “1” through “14”― simultaneously, and there is thus much temporal overlap among these journals and notebooks. (Indeed, it was only a�er they had been in use for some time, probably in mid- or late 1842, that Kierkegaard assigned the designations “AA” through “KK” to the journal volumes bearing those labels.) Nonetheless, the abovementioned archival units do fall into several broad temporal categories, and these twenty-four journals and notebooks can be collectively assigned to the period 1833–1846. Notebook 15, however, which is entirely devoted to Kierkegaard’s relationship to Regine Olsen, his onetime fiancée, stems from 1849. The journals titled “NB” through “NB36” were assigned their numbered titles in chronological order by Kierkegaard himself and stem from the period 1846–1855, though here, too, these journals contain additions and emendations, some of which stem from later periods, disrupting the general chronological sequence of the journals. The final group of materials, the “loose papers,” spans the entire period 1833–1855.

I NTRODUCTION

TO THE

E NGLISH L ANGUAGE E DITION

KJN follows the editors of SKS in the choice of a two-column format, which best reflects Kierkegaard’s practice when keeping his journals and notebooks. Like many of his contemporaries, Kierkegaard’s usual custom with his journals and notebooks was to crease the pages lengthwise (vertically) so that each page had an inner column for the main text and a somewhat narrower outer column for subsequent reflections and additions. In this way, further reflections could be―and very o�en were―added later, sometimes much later, o�en on several subsequent occasions, e.g., when Kierkegaard read or thought of something that reminded him of something he had wri�en earlier. As has been noted above, a certain degree of chronological organization is present in the documents themselves, but a strictly chronological presentation of all the material is neither possible nor, perhaps, desirable. A strict and comprehensive chronological organization of the material is impossible, for while we can o�en detect the sequence in which Kierkegaard altered and emended an original passage in a notebook or journal, it is frequently not possible to ascertain when these alterations and emendations took place―though in his earlier entries Kierkegaard o�en dated his marginal additions. Furthermore, there are also cases in which the very sequence of such changes cannot be determined with certainty. Finally, even if it could be established, a rigorously chronological sequencing of all the material would not necessarily be desirable, because such a serial presentation would render it more difficult to see the manner in which Kierkegaard could return to a passage on multiple subsequent occasions, adding to, deleting, and altering what he had originally wri�en. (It is hoped that upon completion of all eleven volumes of KJN it will be possible to produce an electronic edition of the entire series; this would make it possible for readers to organize and search through the materials in a variety of ways.)

II. The Format and Organization of the Present Edition 1. Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks (KJN) and Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er (SKS) As already noted, KJN is a translation of Kierkegaard’s journals, notebooks, and loose papers, using the text as established by the editors of SKS. The great majority of the materials included in the present volumes is taken from Kierkegaard’s surviving manuscripts, but some manuscripts were lost in the production of the

ix

x

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS

AND

N OTEBOOKS

first published selection of Kierkegaard’s papers, H. P. Barfod’s nine-volume edition of Af Søren Kierkegaards E�erladte Papirer (herea�er, EP). Thus, particularly in the early volumes of KJN, our only source for a number of Kierkegaard’s journal entries is the version originally published in EP. When this is the case, KJN indicates that the source is the published version from EP by employing justified right-hand margins, while most of the text of KJN, taken as it is from the surviving manuscripts, employs a ragged right-hand margin. In addition, there are a number of cases, typically involving short or fragmentary entries or lines, in which the only surviving source is Barfod’s catalogue of Kierkegaard’s manuscripts, while in still other cases material in the original manuscripts deleted by Kierkegaard has been deciphered and restored by the editors of SKS; both these sorts of material are reproduced in KJN without text-critical commentary. Scholars interested in these source details are referred to the text-critical apparatus of SKS. In addition, there are some cases in which Kierkegaard’s original manuscript cannot be read meaningfully, and the editors of SKS suggest a proposed reading of the passage in question. KJN has adopted all such proposed readings without comment. In some cases Kierkegaard’s spelling is erroneous or inconsistent or there is missing punctuation. On rare occasions the editors of SKS have corrected errors of this sort silently, while in other cases missing punctuation has been supplied (but placed within square brackets to indicate that this is the work of the editors of SKS), and in still other cases Kierkegaard’s errors of spelling or punctuation have been allowed to stand because they are indicative of the hasty and informal style that o�en characterizes his unpublished materials. Where they do not cause significant difficulties for English language readers, the editors of KJN have followed the editors of SKS in allowing a number of Kierkegaard’s spelling errors (e.g., of proper names) and punctuation lapses to remain. On the other hand, where the retention of Kierkegaard’s errors might cause significant difficulties for English language readers, the editors of KJN have absorbed without annotation the corrections made by the editors of SKS (both the silent and the bracketed corrections), and have occasionally corrected instances of erroneous spelling and missing punctuation that have been permi�ed to remain in SKS. Here―as in the above-mentioned cases involving materials that have their source in Barfod’s catalogue or in text deleted by Kierkegaard and restored by the editors of SKS―scholars who require access to the entire text-critical apparatus of SKS should consult that edition.

I NTRODUCTION

TO THE

E NGLISH L ANGUAGE E DITION

2. Two-Column Format in the Main Text As already noted, a two-column format is employed where necessary in order to emphasize the polydimensionality of the original documentary materials; thus, for example, providing a spatial representation of a dra�’s character as a dra� with multiple alterations. 3. Typographical Conventions in the Main Text a) In Kierkegaard’s time, both “gothic” and “latin” handwriting were in common use among educated people. Generally, when writing Danish and German (which of course accounts for the bulk of his journals and notebooks) Kierkegaard used a gothic hand, while when writing Latin or French (which he did much less frequently than Danish or German) Kierkegaard used a latin hand. Following the editors of SKS, the editors of KJN have sought to preserve this feature by using ordinary roman type to represent Kierkegaard’s gothic hand, and a sans serif typeface to represent Kierkegaard’s latin hand. Greek and Hebrew appear in their respective alphabets. b) As in SKS, italic and boldface are used to indicate Kierkegaard’s degrees of emphasis. Italic indicates underlining by Kierkegaard. Boldface indicates double underlining by Kierkegaard Boldface italic indicates double underlining plus a third, wavy underlining by Kierkegaard. 4. Margins in the Main Text a) The SKS pagination of the journals appears in roman type in the margins of the present edition. This permits the reader to refer to SKS, which contains the entire apparatus of text-critical markers and notes concerning the manuscripts, including indications of Kierkegaard’s own pagination of his journals and notebooks. b) Two separate italic line counters are included in the inner and outer margins in order to facilitate specific line references to each of the two columns. c) The boldface entry numbers in the margins are not Kierkegaard’s own but have been added by the editors of SKS in order to facilitate reference to specific entries. Each journal or notebook has its own entry numbering in arabic numerals, e.g., “AA:1,” “DD:8,” “Not3:2,” etc., which refer to the first entry in Journal AA, the eighth entry in Journal DD, the second entry in Notebook 3, etc.

xi

xii

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS

AND

N OTEBOOKS

Kierkegaard’s marginal additions to journal or notebook entries are indicated with lowercase alphabet le�ers, e.g., “AA:23. b,” which refers to Kierkegaard’s second marginal addition to the twenty-third entry in Journal AA. If a marginal addition itself has a marginal addition, this is also indicated by another layer of lowercase alphabet le�ers, e.g., “DD:11.a.a,” which refers to the first marginal note to the first marginal note to the eleventh entry in Journal DD. When Kierkegaard le� a reference mark in his main text referring to a marginal note, the marginal note referred to is preceded by a lowercase alphabet le�er, set in roman, with no enclosing brackets, e.g. “a.” When Kierkegaard did not leave a reference mark in his main text for a marginal note, but the editors of SKS are not in doubt about the point in Kierkegaard’s main text to which the marginal note refers, the reference symbol (a lowercase alphabet le�er) preceding that marginal note is set in roman and is enclosed within roman square brackets, e.g., “[a].” When Kierkegaard did not leave a reference mark in his main text for a marginal note, and the editors of SKS could not determine with certainty the point in Kierkegaard’s main text to which the marginal note refers, the reference symbol (a lowercase alphabet letter) preceding that marginal note is set in italic and is enclosed within italic square brackets, e.g., “[a].” In these cases, the editors of KJN, following the usage of the editors of SKS, have situated Kierkegaard’s marginal additions approximately where they are found on the pages of Kierkegaard’s own journal manuscripts, which, as noted, employed a two-column format. If more specific reference than this is necessary, the system of KJN volume number, page number, and line number on the appropriate line counter is employed, e.g., “KJN 1, 56:11,” referring to a passage in the first volume of KJN, page 56, line 11 on the line counter for the inner column. If a marginal note (thus, a note in the outer column of the page) is referred to in this manner, the reference is in the format “KJN 9, 56m:3,” referring to a marginal note found in volume 9 of KJN, page 56, line 3 on the marginal or outer column line counter. 5. Footnotes in the Main Text a) Kierkegaard’s own footnotes are indicated by superscript arabic numerals, both in the main text and at the beginning of the footnote itself, and are numbered consecutively within a journal entry, with the numbering beginning at “1” for each new journal

I NTRODUCTION

TO THE

E NGLISH L ANGUAGE E DITION

entry. Kierkegaard’s footnotes appear at the bo�om of the text column or at the end of the entry to which they pertain, whichever comes first, but always above the solid horizontal line at the foot of the page. When the source for a footnote by Kierkegaard is Barfod’s EP rather than an original manuscript, the placement in the main text of the superscript reference number for that footnote is of course not known from Kierkegaard, but only from EP; in such cases, Kierkegaard’s footnote will appear at the bo�om of the page (though above the solid line) as with all other footnotes by Kierkegaard, but the superscript reference number preceding the footnote will be followed by a close-parenthesis, e.g., “1).” b) Translator’s footnotes appear below the solid horizontal line at the foot of the page. 6. Foreign Language in the Main Text Foreign (non-Danish) words, expressions, and quotations that appear in Kierkegaard’s text are le� in the original language. English translations of foreign language text are provided in translator’s footnotes at the foot of the page, below the solid horizontal line. In the event that extreme length or some other technical difficulty makes it impossible to accommodate a translation of a foreign language passage at the foot of the page, it will appear in the explanatory notes at the back of the volume. English translations of the titles of foreign language books, articles, poems, etc. are always in the explanatory notes, not in the translator’s footnotes. 7. Photographs of Original Manuscripts Selected photographs of original manuscript material are included in the main text. 8. Orthography of Classical Names The orthographical standard for all ancient Greek and Roman names and place names is The Oxford Classical Dictionary. 9. Material Included at the Back of Each Volume a) A brief “Critical Account of the Text” gives a description of the physical appearance, provenance, and whatever chronological information is known concerning a document. If the document is

xiii

xiv

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS

AND

N OTEBOOKS

related to others―for example, in the cases where Kierkegaard is known to have used one of the journals in the AA–KK group in tandem with one or more of the notebooks numbered 1–14, which stem from the same period―this is also indicated. b) Each journal or notebook is accompanied by “Explanatory Notes.” In some cases, notes included in SKS have been shortened or omi�ed in KJN. In a number of cases, notes that do not appear in SKS have been added to KJN; typically, these serve to explain geographical or historical references that are obvious to Danes but are not likely to be known by non-Danes. Notes are keyed by page and entry number to specific lemmata; that is, to key words or phrases from the main text that appear in boldface at the beginning of each note. The running heads on each page of notes indicate the journal or notebook and entry number(s) to which the notes on that page refer, while the numbers in the margins of each column of notes indicate the page and line number in the main text where the lemma under discussion is found. When the text of a note mentions a lemma explained in another note for the same journal or notebook, an arrow (→) accompanied by a large and a small number–e.g., →110,22―serves as a cross-reference, indicating the page and line number (in this case, page 110, line 22) where that lemma occurs in the main text. Each journal or notebook is treated as a separate unit with respect to explanatory notes; thus the notes for a given journal or notebook contain no cross-references to notes for other journals or notebooks. (The explanatory notes for Notebooks 9 and 10 constitute an exception to this rule because those two notebooks are so closely connected that they should perhaps be considered a single document.) The notes are usually confined to clarifying historical, biographical, geographical, and similar information not readily available in a standard English language desk reference volume. Notes do not engage in critical interpretation or in discussions of the scholarly literature. As noted under 6 above, on some occasions―which presumably will be very infrequent, if they occur at all―it may not be possible to translate foreign language passages in translator’s footnotes at the foot of the main text page, and in such cases the translated passage will appear in an explanatory note at the end of the volume. There are no markers in the main text denoting the existence of an explanatory note pertaining to a particular word or passage. c) Maps of nineteenth-century Copenhagen, Denmark, etc., are provided where appropriate. d) Calendars of the years covered in the volume, indicating days of the week, holidays, etc., are provided.

I NTRODUCTION

TO THE

E NGLISH L ANGUAGE E DITION

e) Illustrations referred to in Kierkegaard’s text are reproduced. f) A concordance to the Heiberg edition of the Papirer is provided in order to facilitate using the present edition in conjunction with works, including previous translations of Kierkegaard’s posthumous papers, that refer to the Papirer. 10. Abbreviations a) Abbreviations used in the main text In the main text an a�empt has been made to preserve something of the feel of the original documents, in which Kierkegaard made liberal use of a great many abbreviations, shortening words in accordance with the common usage of his times. Naturally, many of these abbreviations cannot be duplicated in English, but where it has seemed appropriate a number of commonly used (or easily decipherable) English abbreviations have been employed in order to provide a sense of Kierkegaard’s “journal style.” b) Abbreviations used in “Critical Accounts of the Texts” and in “Explanatory Notes”

ASKB

The Auctioneer’s Sales Record of the Library of Søren Kierkegaard, ed. H. P. Rohde (Copenhagen: The Royal Library, 1967)

B&A

Breve og Aktstykker vedrørende Søren Kierkegaard [Letters and Documents Concerning Søren Kierkegaard], 2 vols., ed. Niels Thulstrup (Copenhagen: Munksgaard, 1953–1954)

B-cat.

H. P. Barfod, “Fortegnelse over de e�er Søren Aabye Kierkegaard forefundne Papirer” [Catalogue of the Papers Found a�er the Death of Søren Aabye Kierkegaard]

Bl.art.

S. Kierkegaard’s Bladartikler, med Bilag samlede e�er Forfa�erens Død, udgivne som Supplement til hans øvrige Skri�er [S. Kierkegaard’s Newspaper Articles, with an Appendix Collected a�er the Author’s Death, Published as a Supplement to His Other Works], ed. Rasmus Nielsen (Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel, 1857)

d.

Died in the year

xv

xvi

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS

AND

N OTEBOOKS

EP

Af Søren Kierkegaards E�erladte Papirer [From Søren Kierkegaard’s Posthumous Papers], 9 vols., ed. H. P. Barfod and H. Go�sched (Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel, 1869–1881)

Jub.

G.W.F. Hegel, Sämtliche Werke [Complete Works]. Jubiläumsausgabe, 26 vols., ed. Hermann Glockner (Stu�gart: Friedrich Frommann Verlag, 1928–1941)

KA

The Kierkegaard Archive at the Royal Library in Copenhagen

KJN

Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks, 11 vols., ed. Niels Jørgen Cappelørn, Alastair Hannay, David Kangas, Bruce H. Kirmmse, George Pa�ison, Joel D.S. Rasmussen, Vanessa Rumble, and K. Brian Söderquist (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2007–)

KW

Kierkegaard’s Writings, 26 vols., ed. Howard V. Hong and Edna H. Hong (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1978–2000) Occasionally, the explanatory notes will employ different English translations of the titles of Kierkegaard’s works than those used in KW. For example, Kierkegaard’s En literair Anmeldelse, which is translated Two Ages in KW, may appear in the explanatory notes as A Literary Review. All such departures from the English titles as they appear in KW will be explained in the explanatory notes in which they appear. Generally, however, the English titles used in KW will be used; these titles have been assigned standard abbreviations as follows: AN BA C CA CD CI COR CUP

“Armed Neutrality” in KW 22 The Book on Adler in KW 24 The Crisis and a Crisis in the Life of an Actress in KW 17 The Concept of Anxiety in KW 8 Christian Discourses in KW 17 The Concept of Irony in KW 2 The “Corsair” Affair; Articles Related to the Writings in KW 13 Concluding Unscientific Postscript in KW 12

I NTRODUCTION EO 1 EO 2 EPW

TO THE

E NGLISH L ANGUAGE E DITION

Either/Or, part 1 in KW 3 Either/Or, part 2 in KW 4 Early Polemical Writings: From the Papers of One Still Living; Articles from Student Days; The Ba�le Between the Old and the New SoapCellars in KW 1 Eighteen Upbuilding Discourses in KW 15 EUD FPOSL From the Papers of One Still Living in KW 1 FSE For Self-Examination in KW 21 FT Fear and Trembling in KW 6 JC “Johannes Climacus or De omnibus dubitandum est” in KW 7 JFY Judge for Yourself! in KW 21 LD Le�ers and Documents in KW 25 M “The Moment” and Late Writings: Articles from Fædrelandet; The Moment, nos. 1–10; This Must Be Said, So Let It Be Said; What Christ Judges of Official Christianity; The Changelessness of God in KW 23 NA “Newspaper Articles, 1854–1855” in KW 23 NSBL “Notes on Schelling’s Berlin Lectures” in KW 2 OMWA On My Work as an Author in KW 22 P Prefaces in KW 9 PC Practice in Christianity in KW 20 PF Philosophical Fragments in KW 7 PV The Point of View for My Work as an Author in KW 22 R Repetition in KW 6 SLW Stages on Life’s Way in KW 11 SUD The Sickness unto Death in KW 19 TA Two Ages: The Age of Revolution and the Present Age, A Literary Review in KW 14 TDIO Three Discourses on Imagined Occasions in KW 10 UDVS Upbuilding Discourses in Various Spirits in KW 15 WA Without Authority: The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air; Two Minor EthicalReligious Essays; Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays; An Upbuilding Discourse; Two Discourses at the Communion on Fridays in KW 18 Works of Love in KW 16 WL WS “Writing Sampler” in KW 9

xvii

xviii

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS

AND

N OTEBOOKS

NKS

Ny Kongelige Samling [New Royal Collection], a special collection at the Royal Library in Copenhagen

NRSV

Holy Bible: New Revised Standard Version with Apocrypha (see part c below)

NT

New Testament

OT

Old Testament

Pap.

Søren Kierkegaards Papirer [The Papers of Søren Kierkegaard], 2nd ed., 16 vols. in 25 tomes, ed. P. A. Heiberg, V. Kuhr, and E. Torsting (Copenhagen: Gyldendal, 1909–1978)

SKS

Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er [Søren Kierkegaard’s Writings], 28 text volumes and 27 commentary volumes, ed. Niels Jørgen Cappelørn, Joakim Garff, Je�e Knudsen, Johnny Kondrup, and Alastair McKinnon (Copenhagen: Gad, 1997–) The 28 text volumes of SKS are referred to as SKS 1 through SKS 28. The 27 commentary volumes that accompany the text volumes are referred to as SKS K1 through SKS K28. (The reason there are 27 rather than 28 commentary volumes is that a single commentary volume, SKS K2–3, accompanies the two text volumes SKS 2 and SKS 3, which together comprise the massive two-volume work Enten―Eller [Either/ Or].)

SV1

SV2

Søren Kierkegaards Samlede Værker [Søren Kierkegaard’s Collected Works], 1st ed., 14 vols., ed. A. B. Drachmann, J. L. Heiberg, and H. O. Lange (Copenhagen: Gyldendalske Boghandel, Nordisk Forlag, 1901–1906) Søren Kierkegaards Samlede Værker [Søren Kierkegaard’s Collected Works], 2nd ed., 15 vols., ed. A. B. Drachmann, J. L. Heiberg, and H. O. Lange (Copenhagen: Gyldendalske Boghandel, Nordisk Forlag, 1920–1936)

I NTRODUCTION

TO THE

E NGLISH L ANGUAGE E DITION

c) The Bible. All biblical quotations are from the following English translations: Holy Bible: New Revised Standard Version with Apocrypha (New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989) (Standard for references to the authorized Danish translation of the New Testament from 1819 and used for many other biblical references.) The Bible: Authorized King James Version with Apocrypha (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1997) (O�en used for references to the authorized Danish translation of the Old Testament and the Apocrypha from 1740 and occasionally used for other biblical references.) Occasionally, in order to help the reader understand the text of a journal entry, the translators of KJN may make minor modifications to one of the above Bible translations. Books of the Bible are abbreviated in accordance with the abbreviations used in the NRSV:

O�� T�������� Gen Ex Lev Num Deut Josh Judg Ruth 1 Sam 2 Sam 1 Kings 2 Kings 1 Chr 2 Chr Ezra Neh Esth Job Ps Prov

Genesis Exodus Leviticus Numbers Deuteronomy Joshua Judges Ruth 1 Samuel 2 Samuel 1 Kings 2 Kings 1 Chronicles 2 Chronicles Ezra Nehemiah Esther Job Psalms Proverbs

Eccl Song Isa Jer Lam Ezek Dan Hos Joel Am Ob Jon Mic Nah Hab Zeph Hag Zech Mal

Ecclesiastes Song of Solomon Isaiah Jeremiah Lamentations Ezekiel Daniel Hosea Joel Amos Obadiah Jonah Micah Nahum Habakkuk Zephaniah Haggai Zechariah Malachi

xix

xx

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS

AND

N OTEBOOKS

A��������� B���� Tob Jdt Add Esth Wis Sir Bar 1 Esd 2 Esd Let Jer Song

Tobit Judith Additions to Esther Wisdom Sirach (Ecclesiasticus) Baruch 1 Esdras 2 Esdras Le�er of Jeremiah Prayer of Azariah

of Thr Sus Bel 1 Macc 2 Macc 3 Macc 4 Macc Pr Man

and the Song of the Three Jews Susanna Bel and the Dragon 1 Maccabees 2 Maccabees 3 Maccabees 4 Maccabees Prayer of Manasseh

N�� T�������� Mt Mk Lk Jn Acts Rom 1 Cor 2 Cor Gal Eph Phil Col 1 Thes 2 Thes

Ma�hew Mark Luke John Acts of the Apostles Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians Colossians 1 Thessalonians 2 Thessalonians

1 Tim 2 Tim Titus Philem Heb Jas 1 Pet 2 Pet 1 Jn 2 Jn 3 Jn Jude Rev

1 Timothy 2 Timothy Titus Philemon Hebrews James 1 Peter 2 Peter 1 John 2 John 3 John Jude Revelation

11. Variants While KJN does not include the full text-critical apparatus of SKS, a number of textual variants, deemed by the editors of KJN to be of particular interest, are included in the explanatory notes for each journal or notebook. The notation used to indicate different types of variants is explained below. (A list of selected variants for KJN 1 is included in volume 2, immediately following the explanatory notes for Journal KK.)

I NTRODUCTION first wri�en:

TO THE

E NGLISH L ANGUAGE E DITION

changes determined by the editors of SKS to have been made in the manuscript at the time of original writing, including: (a) replacement variants placed in the line, immediately following deleted text; (b) replacement variants wri�en directly on top of the original text; and (c) deletions

changed from: changes determined by the editors of SKS to have been made in the manuscript subsequent to the time of original writing, including: (a) deletions with replacement variants wri�en in the margin or on top of the original text, and (b) deletions without replacement text added:

additions determined by the editors of SKS to have been made to the manuscript subsequent to the time of original writing

12. Symbols []

enclose the KJN editors’ supplements to the SKS text; also enclose reference symbols, added by the editors of SKS, to marginal annotations or footnotes for which Kierkegaard did not leave a symbol, but whose placement is beyond doubt

[]

enclose reference symbols, added by the editors of SKS, to marginal annotations for which Kierkegaard did not clearly assign to a specific locus in a specific main entry

Acknowledgments We are happy to acknowledge the support for Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks that has been provided by the United States National Endowment for the Humanities, the Danish National Research Foundation, the Danish Ministry of Culture, and Connecticut College. Bruce H. Kirmmse and K. Brian Söderquist, General Editors, for the Editorial Board of Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks.

xxi

JOURNAL NB11

JOURNAL NB11 Translated by George Pa�ison and K. Brian Söderquist Edited by K. Brian Söderquist

Text source Journal NB11 in Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er Text established by Finn Gredal Jensen and Kim Ravn

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 1

7

1

1849

NB11 May 2, 1849.

3

4

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 2

1849

8

The decisive place in this journal is No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the decisive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

p. 126. pp. 217 and ff. p. 235. p. 236. pp. 240 and ff. pp. 251 and ff.

2

5

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 3–5

1849

9

3

Luther’s sermon on the gospel for Epiphany is worth reading again and again, especially the first part.

4

“Wer ist, der sich wider den Herrn gesetzt hat, und der Ruhe hat haben können?” Job 9:4, quoted in Fenelon 2nd vol. p. 66.

5

And while things are so ridiculously pe�y that I―who have yet to be seriously reviewed in Danish literature―become prey to the mob, authors a[nd] o[thers] plagiarize me, all the same. They’re a hit that way, but they don’t name me; no, they even delight a bit in my persecution by the mob. In truth, it’s the greatest punishment God could devise for anyone: to make him an extraordinary figure―in a market town. The ma�er satisfies me religiously; I can never thank God enough for the unbelievable good he has bestowed upon me, so much more than I could have expected.

10

15

5 Wer ist … haben können] German, Who has resisted the Lord, and found peace?

5

6

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 6

1849

10

If anything is to be said about my activity as an author, it could be done in such a way that a third person is created, the author, who would be a synthesis of myself and the pseudonym, and he could speak directly about it. In that case, only an introduction would be needed in which this author were introduced, and then he could say everything in �rst person. The introduction would point out that the whole authorship is a unit; but I wouldn’t be the pseudonym, nor the pseudonym me; this “author” would thus be a synthesis of the pseudonym and me.

6

5

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 7

1849

11

7

5

All hum. religiosity, including Jewish religiosity, culminates in the words of Solomon (or David): I have been young, and have become old, but never have I seen the righteous abandoned by God. Merciful God. And then there’s Xt, who says: My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me; and it’s Christianity that makes this entire earthly existence into suffering, crucifixion. How can one then find a mild ethic in Christianity!

7

8

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 8

1849

12

May 4. NB. There has indeed been a terrible degree of melancholia in all the thoughts with which I’ve plagued myself recently concerning my activities as an author. But the thing is, I wanted to be so terribly clever―rather than relying on faith and prayer. I wanted to secure a comfortable future and sit somewhere remote―and write. O, alas! No, God takes care. And another “poet” is certainly not what the age needs. And if I became a poet, I’d be forgetting to seek God’s kingdom �rst. First, a living, a post (which I might not even be good at)―and then writing. That’s why I’ve suffered so terribly. It’s my punishment. I’ve also suffered because I wouldn’t commit, because I wanted to remain free, because I wanted to shy away from the crucial decision. All the hypochondriac nonsense about whether I might have positioned myself too highly, which is foreign to my soul, stems from this. And where should I go? My life is indeed characterized by the fact that it is fruitless to attempt to be forgotten. And if I were to go abroad, I would be plagued by the thought that travel was an escape, cowardice. The moment has arrived―I can let it pass, but then I’ll have an eternity to feel remorse over the fact that I let it pass; and then I’d be weakened so much that I wouldn’t be a human being any longer. Now the two essays are being published: [“D]oes a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?[”] and [“]The Difference between a Genius and an Apostle[”]―though they will be published anonymously. Today, May 5th, they were sent to Gjødvad. It was easier for me earlier, but this time prudence has played some nasty tricks on me. That’s understandable; my life is getting harder and harder―my economic situation is especially distressful. If I let this “moment” pass, the entire point and posture of the production will be lost; the second edition of Either/Or will overwhelm everything. But I wanted to play lord, decide for myself, justify myself before God with hypochondriacal evasion and thus take everything that has been given to me as little more than a simple pleasure.

8

5

10

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 9–11

1849

9

13

9

5

10 10

15

11 20

25

Deuteronomy 33:9―“who said of his father and mother, ‘I regard them not’; he ignored his kin, and did not acknowledge his children.” Here, indeed, we find a religiosity that corresponds to Christianity: to hate one’s father and mother for Xt’s sake. I was made aware of this passage in Luther’s sermon on the gospel about the marriage in Cana.

“Faith made us masters; love made us servants,” says Luther in the sermon on the gospel for the third Sunday a�er Epiphany. In the same gospel (about the leper), we read that Xt says to the leper: Go, show yourself to the priests as a witness to them. In the last phrase there is a real ambiguity, which Luther also emphasizes. “As a witness to them,” i.e., that they may witness it, but also, that it may be a witness against them given that they themselves ought to believe in Xt.

The collision presented in the essay (“Does a Hum. Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?”) is an intellectual/ethical collision. Another ma�er is whether, e.g., a person can force another to commit a crime, to do something illegal, etc. The collision is that of a thinker against the world and against hum. beings; and in order to show the intellectual aspect most clearly, it is presupposed that a pers. has the right to let himself be put to death for the truth if the conflict is heathen vs. Xn. But if it is Xn vs. Xn, where both parties have the fundamental truth in common, where the difference in intellect is set more strongly in relief: then the essay indicates that he does have the right to do so.

[a]

NB. Something about the essay: Does a Hum. Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth? [b]

This

1

5

10

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 12–13

1849 14

1

5

[a] NB. Something about the essay: Does a Hum. Being Have the Right to Let Himself be Put to Death for the Truth?

If the essay (“Does a Hum. Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?”) were to end in a totally and unconditionally humoristic way, then this remark would be added to H.H.’s last words: And concerning the question that causes or caused that pers. so much trouble, my answer is: [“]Well, hell no, a hum being doesn’t have the right![”]

12

5

10 [a]

Di�o.

[b]

10

15

In a way, this is an exaggeration, it’s too rigorous; in addition, this pseudonym would be too reminiscent of the older ones, without being like them. The whole passage can therefore be deleted. If something like that is to be included, it should only be a few words, and they shouldn’t be humoristic, but unambiguously passionate.

It’s for the sake of seriousness that the li�le humoristic flourish by H.H. at the end of the essay (“Does a Hum. Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?”) ought to remain. Literary pieces imagine that they’re serious and seek to give that impression to the reader―that’s just what makes them less serious. The humoristic conclusion shows that the piece is conscious of the fact that a work of literature is never serious―only reality is. It’s more or less a joke to write about seriousness; it is seriousness is to be serious.

13

15

20

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 14

1849

11

15

14

5

10

15

O, alas, alas. Because of the fear of danger, my hypochondria, and a lack of trust in God, I’ve wanted to regard my own person as inferior to the gi�s that I’ve been given, as if taking ownership of those gi�s would defraud the truth, and as if viewing myself as inferior weren’t in fact an act of defrauding God and the truth. And yet it seemed to me so humble. O, hypochondria, hypochondria! Hmnly speaking, there’s certainly nothing fun or pleasant about being the extraord. one in these pe�y circumstances we have in Denmark; it’s becoming painful. But God has overwhelmed me with kindness, granted me so indescribably much more than I expected; and he (both by means of the abundance he has granted me during the past year―and its sufferings) has led me to understand my destiny (true enough, it’s different from what I had originally imagined, but the path had already begun to change early on: the entire religious production, indeed, the entire production that followed Either/Or, is not what I had originally imagined and I certainly couldn’t have understood everything all at once); If I were fail now, it would be because I prudently retracted it all out of fear about my income; in that case, I’d become a poet, i.e., religiously understood, a deceiver. No, no, nor had I originally imagined that I would have had to choose between becoming an auth., in character, or becoming a priest out in the countryside, never again u�ering a word as poet or auth. It looks dark out, and yet I’m very much at peace. This day, my birthday, will be an unforge�able day for me!

12

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 15–16

1849

16

What stupidity! In a li�le article about the propensity of hum. beings to heed warnings, which I found while thumbing through Jens Møller’s periodical (it’s found in the 6th volume, pp. 118ff.), I see that he says that the drawing of lots has been sanctioned in a protestant congregation, namely the Moravian Brethren. Aber. The Moravians do this, among other reasons, just to cool off the flesh and blood. Marriage is thus decided by lot. With regard to eros, it’s impossible to imagine a crueler or more shocking method, or a method be�er calculated to destroy romantic dreaming. However, I think that in a certain sense the Moravians have chosen the Christian way. It is precisely Christian to reduce eros to a ma�er of indifference and to make marriage a duty. Thus, it doesn’t ma�er at all what girl you end up with. It is your duty to get married.

15

This, too, was doubly cowardly of Goldschmidt: If there had been even the hint of an idea in his newspaper, he would have first and foremost have taken aim at me. But he didn’t. No, he was far too cowardly for that: he fla�ered me―and he knew how vacuous his paper was. And when he got a chance to a�ack me, he did it. It’s a new case of cowardice that that kind of paper would defend itself by saying: He asked for it himself. In truth, for G. to look like a respectable pers. again, a public apology would have to be demanded, and it would have to be of such a kind that it could be republished in the newspaper every eighth day for an entire year. And one could also rightfully demand that he make an a�empt to repay the blood money he’s earned and donate it to charity―even Judas was that honest: he gave the money back.

16

7 Aber] German, But.

5

10

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 17–19

1849

17

17

Hum. beings, we hum. beings, are like that: it’s so satisfying to find a new and ingenious expression for hum. depravity, selfishness, etc. But to be unselfish, well, we’re happy to postpone that.

18

Hmnly speaking, it’s possible to say that if there were no God, it would be easy; for in that case, you could rely on your own intelligence. But God forces you to do just the opposite. How o�en I’ve said to myself that it would be smartest to simply put down my pen, travel, and enjoy myself in order to show everyone that I don’t give a damn about them. Then I’d be appreciated. The crazy thing is to continue as an auth.; hum. beings are children and they get bored with you if you don’t treat them like children. That’s rlly what Heiberg does; but it doesn’t quite work when I’m standing at his side saying just the opposite. I’ve discovered that this is the right method. There were a couple of peop. I really liked, but I was worried that they’d misunderstood me. I thought they treated me coldly and badly. I visited them more o�en, took care of them. [It] didn’t help. Then I changed my method: I became more distant, visited them less, conversed with them in a distinguished way―that helped. They became the model of a�entiveness. O hmnity!

10

15

20

19 25

30

There are excellent things in Luther’s sermon on the gospel reading in which Xt boards the boat; among other things, his ref[erence] to the delusion of a piteous a�itude completely occupied with “peace,” a piety that seeks proof of the fear of God therein. Bishop Mynster’s leadership is, in general, neither more nor less than worldly prudence; and as far as that goes, he’s done great harm.

13

14

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 20

1849 18

All those thoughts about running the risk of being put to death, etc., were just hypochondria, and yet something that hypochondria came up with because I was getting tired and wanted to act prudently. But it’s true that my lot is a sad one: To be the object of the envy of a few distinguished people (who nonetheless express themselves rather crudely at times) and then the daily insults from the mob on top of it. And then the fact that if someone earnestly lives for that sake of an idea in this world, he appears to be something like a wrecked subject. Humanly speaking, there is something pleasant about having secure employment, comfort; there is something agreeable about working for a living.―And then there are only two classes of people who come together in the opposite kind of life. Wrecked subjects, fallen persons―and those who seriously and truly live for an idea. Ah, and in the eyes of the world, it’s far too easy to confuse the two. I’m again about to publish, and it’s true that this time I bear a greater burden than ever before. I’m also more solemn and ceremonious, but perhaps also more essentially resolute than before. It’s true, the burden, the weight is greater; but the production is also richer than ever. That’s how Governance coaxes me forward bit by bit. When I shouldered the weight of vulgar insults, the production was also much richer. Now that an even heavier weight―worry about my income―has been added to the previous one, the production has never been as rich. In the material about to be published, there are things so decisive for Christianity, that it is nothing less than a discovery. But I had to get that close to the thought of stopping before I picked up momentum again. I had wanted so much a quiet life in which I could thank God for all the good he has done for me; but perhaps I’ll only �nd this quiet situation in eternity. Now―this life is also a time of work. I hope to God that I can thank him in this life through the obedience with which I endure my work.

20

5

10

15

20

25

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 21

1849

15

15

21

5

10

Above all, I must watch out for a distressed spirit. It looks―or looked―so sensible[:] I could just as well take a post out in the countryside, in tranquil security, and at the same time, as poet, work qua an auth. But the question is whether or not it would have ended in a complete paralysis if I’d done it, as punishment that I’d withdrawn in prudence and cowardice, and had reduced the price. Neither in this case will God be mocked. And, humanly speaking, the position I’m taking with this step, as auth., is not absolutely de�nitive, and it’s also possible that, humanly speaking, fortune will smile upon me right now, qua auth. I stick closely to the notion of being a poet and dialectician; I claim neither to be an extraord. Christian, nor even less an apostle or something of that sort, not even remotely (I, who �ght to give “the apostle” his due). But I don’t avoid the danger of reality. I point out that I am [“]more[”] than a poet, but that [“]more[”] belongs to my essence. If I am to become a civil servant, I must essentially cease to be an auth.

16

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 22–25

1849 20

1

a

for the time being as well as

I had once considered le�ing the essay “Come unto Me, All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden” accompany the second edition of Either/Or. In that case, the “Preface” that is now in “Three Godly Discourses” would have been used. Only a few lines would have been added[:] “― ― it will remind him of it, but it will also let him sense and understand that this time is a second time of edification.”

22

A preface to A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Essays, a book that never existed because it was divided into smaller parts[:] This book was wri�en before 48. This, by the way, is insignificant compared with the degree to which it contains a truth that is equally significanta for all time. For either it contains some truth, in which case it is insignificant that is was wri�en before 48; or it contains no truth, in which case it is equally insignificant that it was wri�en before 48―unless the year 48 inverted everything so inhumanly and to such a degree that what was previously considered wisdom is now folly, and even the greatest folly is now wisdom, whether it was said before or a�er that remarkable year, 48, which, in its “great commotion,” brought about a rambling discussion among an entire militia disguised as “thinkers,” and gave the “thinkers” a chance to go on vacation.

23

Christianly speaking, it is a plain duty to seek suffering, in the same sense that, strictly hmnly speaking, it is a duty to seek pleasure.

24

When all is said and done, a play like The World Wants to Be Deceived―or even the existence of such a play―is an appalling judgment against the age, a confession of the corruption of the age. Corrupt ages have been seen before, and every age is more or less corrupt. But then there was also someone or other who perceived, more deeply, the corruption of the age―and he emancipated himself from it, fought against it, perhaps became the

25

5

15

20

30

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 25 1849

21 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

victim, eh bien, but that was also a sign of the fact that there was still some truth le�. But that fact that the perceptive, authentic, thoroughly realistic understanding of the corruption of the age is expressed not in a penitentiary sermon, but rather in a wi�y theatrical piece, guided by the fundamental thought that this is just how the world is, this is how we are, no one is be�er than anyone else, let’s just forget everything and have a good time. Good God, how horrific! And then a society like that is allowed to call itself Christian. It’s obvious, though. Like the rest of it, it’s a lie (as Scribe says) that everyone repeats and that no one is deceived by, because everyone knows it’s a lie. It is a lie. The only truth is that priests make a living. O, that I could be so weighted down by melancholia that I, out of fear of God, out of fear that I would arrogate something to myself, that I wanted to be―a poet. A poet! Really, yet another poet[?] That is just as insane as the person who decided to get married at the same moment, the very same moment, that his house was on fire. A poet, now[?] Now, when what we really need are martyrs, thousands of them if possible, the real rescue crew. I’ve been afraid of aiming too high, and then doing damage later on because I was unable live up to it. But that’s melancholia. I can handle the mistreatment, even more mistreatment―and I don’t need anything more than that, either. How easy it would have been if I, too, had just thrown myself into the same disgusting rut by just taking care of myself, by living in respectable obscurity―truly a respectable obscurity when one disrespectfully uses obscurity to avoid dangers. Thus, whatever the cost, I thank my God again and again that I became a�entive to it, that nastiness was my first caretaker and that it made sure that I wouldn’t arrive in eternity only to figure out that I’d thrown my life away―in respectable obscurity. At times, when I think about Bishop Mynster, I’m almost gripped with anxiety and fear on his behalf. He’s 72 years old now. He will soon be on his way―to be judged. And what harm he’s done to Christianity by conjuring up a false appearance―so that he could sit there and rule. His sermons are just what they ought to be―but in eternity he won’t preach―he’ll be judged. I think constantly of only one thing: that I never become so busy that I forget to sorrow over my sins and reflect on how I have transgressed. O, it is so difficult for a penitent to move forward resolutely, because he continually feels paralyzed by the thought that he is a penitent. 1 eh bien] French, fine.

17

18

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 26

1849 22

It can’t really be said that the world lacks knowledge of the good; indeed, it is precisely peop. of the world who most o�en have a highly developed eye for genuine generosity, selflessness, etc. As soon as they notice someone who―they must admit― strives for excellence, then envy focuses the powers of observation on judging him as harshly as possible; indeed, they a�empt to put every possible obstacle in his way so he might stumble in self-interest, etc. For they say, Why should he be be�er than us? They don’t rlly hate the good, but in envy, they don’t want anyone to be what they themselves are not. This is more or less Scribe’s frame of mind: he doesn’t hate the good; to the contrary, he presumably respects it quite highly, even with a certain abstract enthusiasm, but he doesn’t want anyone to be good; his enviousness doesn’t want it because he doesn’t live well himself. When the angels see a pers. who sincerely wills the good, even in weakness, they hasten to help him forward. God help the pers. who is discovered by the world to really be willing the good, or at least is still struggling to do so.

26 5

10

15

20

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 27 23

27

5

10

15

1849

19

NB. This is the world-movement, if you will, the con�ict between two notions that my authorship takes account of: the interesting―the simple. The age was, and is, lost in the interesting; the movement should be toward the simple. I was therefore in eminent possession of the interesting (that’s what the age demanded). There is hardly an auth.―absolutely none in Denmark―who in any way could challenge my rank as the only essential one of his kind: to be, qua auth., the interesting [itself]. If I’d falsi�ed my mission, I would have become the hero and idol of the times; in that case I would have abandoned a development toward the simple and converted all my energy into the interesting, into the times. I remained, eternally understood, faithful to my mission and became the martyr of the times, and this is precisely proof that I remained true to my mission. God be praised; I owe it all to him. For my part, there is absolutely nothing meritorious in any of it. In part, I have worked as a genius, often only understanding that I’d done the right thing after the fact. In part, I’ve been bound, as if in the service of a higher power, by a congenital melancholia and an excruciating thorn in the �esh, as well as by the fact that I am, personally, a penitent.

20

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 28–29

1849 24

Perhaps it would be best sometime to write a book titled:

28

The Life of Xt portrayed by S. Kierkegaard Johan. de cruce,

5

An Eyewitness.

Maybe it doesn’t work so well to use a pseudonym here.

Precisely when the religious is at its truest, it’s almost as if the understanding must, in a sense, smile at it―and refrain from believing. What Luther says about prayer is so refreshing and rejuvenating: one should be bold in prayer, really implore and pester God―he likes it, it really pleases him. Here the understanding might say: Yes, that’s fine, but it is still dangerous to pray like that if it’s really my primary desire to get something; a�er all, if it pleases God, he could just refuse to give me what I ask for simply in order that I become more and more pleasing to him, inasmuch as my imploring becomes more and more fervent. To this must be answered: Drivel. One of Luther’s immortal contributions, and the surest testimony of how tried and tested he was, is this: he invented the category of drivel as the only reply to doubt―unless one prefers to say with Hamann: Bah! But I prefer Luther’s way, who quite differently expresses the inertia of striving, which in fear and trembling refuses to hear any drivel. Hamann’s way is more humorous, but also more carefree and thus less serious. Perhaps one thinks it’s a joke to say [“]Drivel[”] to doubt―O, in truth, the one who has had to defend himself with this reply, he knows what seriousness is. To get involved with doubt, that’s a joke; to entertain it a li�le bit, that’s also a joke; but to say nothing but [“]Drivel[”] shows that the issue is serious, and that one takes it seriously.

29 10

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 30–32

1849

25

30

5

Somewhere I must have wri�en an aphorism that goes something like this: The fact that there are so many words in language such as drivel, crock, boloney, gab, blather, cha�er, etc., is really a kind of consolation. If there weren’t any words like that in the language, one would have to worry that everything was cha�er. It’s not alarming that there are so many words in language for that kind of thing; it would be alarming if there weren’t a single one.

10

31

15

32 20

25

30

“But these things are wri�en for our consolation, that we might know: where one devil tempts us, there are many angels that minister to us.” Luther, in the sermon on the gospel account of the temptations of Xt.

The earthliness of earthly goods. The proof that they aren’t goods in and of themselves lies in the fact that they only become goods when others consider them to be goods. The first indication of spiritual goods, by which they’re recognized as goods in and of themselves, is the fact that it doesn’t ma�er if others consider them to be good or not. Take money, take any earthly good whatsoever[:] if you live in a country where it isn’t considered valid, if there were nowhere you could travel to where it were valid, then the money isn’t valid. That’s how it is with all earthly goods. If someone who possesses an earthly good, si ita dicere licet, lives in an area where no one considers it to be a good, he’s taken to be mad and, in fact, he is mad. It’s quite different for someone who possesses a spiritual good that no one considers to be a good. It is nonetheless a good in the fullest sense; he’s taken to be mad, but he’s the wisest.

27 si ita dicere licet] Latin, if this may be said.

21

22

1

[a]

Something about the first essay in Two Ethical-Religious Essays

b

, as they are these days,

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 33

1849

The didactic treatment of the life of Xt―dividing the life of Christ into paragraphs, the systematic treatment and everything that belongs with it―is nonsense. A new path may be, and must be, blazed. To that end, I’ve thought it best to use the poetic. I think that hum. analogies―when, please note, the qualitative difference betw. God-Man and hum. is respected―can help illustrate it, can help give a more vital impression of the gospel again. Xnty, or the gospel, has become trivial to peop.b because it’s been familiar to them for such a long time and they’ve learned it by rote. If peop. were to judge the lives of Xt and the apostles impartially, they would rlly have to say that they were all objects of fantasy. It’s really a ma�er of doing something to make the life of Xt present and intimate. This, I think, is the merit of the li�le essay. Artistically, and with the help of hum. analogies, possibility has replaced facticity. And possibility is precisely what awakens. The li�le essay also discovers and brings to light the sympathetic collision, without which Xt is taken in vain and made hum. The concepts are “responsibility,” “sacrifice,” and several others that are emphasized. Finally, the li�le essay contains an indirect proof for the claim that Xt is God. Eminent reflection and its corresponding eminent consciousness in a human being demand that he protest against being put to death. Only God-Man could bear to be conscious, from the outset, of the fact that it would end with his being put to death, without that consciousness becoming a hindrance. In a sense, being put to death is one of those things that must be done right away. Most hum. beings who have been put to death have therefore also lacked this infinite consciousness. Only in God-Man is this infinite consciousness united with absolute knowledge and absolute resolve. In gnrl, however, one can assume that those who have been put to death have best imitated Xt insofar as hum. beings can do so. But it must also be remembered that this is only the case for immed[iacy]. In

26

33

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 33

27 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

reflection, the highest expression of human likeness to God-Man is the admission that no hum. being has the right to allow himself to be put to death. In that essay, there are crucial new thoughts; the entire problem has been presented in a completely original way.

If anyone thinks that there is an allusion to my existence as an author in the li�le essay, the answer is as follows: 1) I do indeed have the right to present things like this in a poetic way: and if my life happens to have some similarities to it, it is nothing but modesty to present it as fiction rather than asserting that I really am such a person. It is immodest for a pers. to fictionalize himself as something more than he is. It is modest, however, to present what he perhaps really is, as fiction. If I’d given 10 rd to the poor, it would be immodest to create a character (if some exchange were possible) that had given 1000 rd. But if someone really had given 1000 rd, it would be modest to present it as fiction rather than saying: I’ve really done it. But none of this ma�ers, for I’m completely within my right to create fiction, and it’s stupidity if a reader wants to start cha�ering about who the auth. is and what he thinks of himself. Moreover, in the preface, H. H. has noted that the book will only be of real interest to theologians, so the emphasis has been placed on the theological content. And finally, a passage in the second essay contains the most crucial evidence that proves that I have continually been on guard against the pretension that I am the extraordinary one. I am “without authority,” I am a genius―not an apostle, and even less am I, in a deranged way, something infinitely higher than an apostle. But such a person may be presented. I have made great efforts to avoid this finite drivel. But peop. might nonsensically find their way into it nonetheless.

1849

23

24 1

5

10

[c]

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 33–35

Thus, this li�le essay itself does what it talks about: One ought to give some ground, make some concessions―here by removing the doubly reflective humoristic part that makes the message ambiguous. It wasn’t in the original manuscript but was added later, and then removed again in the end. I myself gave a bit of ground in my auth. project by only producing straightforward religious pieces a�er the Concl. Postscript.

1849

I would also like to add a humoristic twist at the end; that would make me most happy. But I’ll accommodate by refraining. For peop. are rather foolish, and I must be careful when using the humorous unity of jest and seriousness so that I don’t confuse them.

5

28

Christ says to Paul: I’ll show you how much you’ll suffer for my sake. That’s how it always is in immediacy. But it’s different with reflection. With reflection, peop. are removed from an immed. relation to God, and that’s why another movement of reflection is required first, which takes them so far out that Governance can get a real grip on them. In our day, peop. remain in first reflection, in the reflection in which they remain outside an immed. relationship to God; God and humnty don’t come into contact with each other at all. It goes without saying that when I name Paul, one must always remember the paradoxical distinction that distinguishes him from other hum. beings: the fact that he is an apostle.

34

A Word about Essay No. 1 in Two Ethical-Religious Essays. And about a Companion Piece to It. In truth, there isn’t the slightest bit of information about my life. The point with my life is this: I am a penitent, who believes that this kind of suffering is a form of penance and believes that only a penitent is rlly cruel enough and tough enough to serve the truth, because, otherwise, an exalted purity is required that it is surely rare among hum. beings. But being a penitent is inspiring. An account like that could be a counterpart to this kind of essay: A penitent like that (that is, in one sense as far from purity and perfec[tion] as possible), who voluntarily serves the truth until he is sacrificed.

35

10

15

20

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 35–38

5

1849

25

But such a piece can’t be done poetically. Seriousness requires that if there is to be talk like this, it must be done straightforwardly and in my own name, and it must straightforwardly admit: this is my life. That’s always how I’ve thought about it, and that’s how I’ve done it in all the straightforward pronouncements about my work as an auth. that are now finished.

29

36

15

37 20

25

38 30

35

That true humility and pride are identical can also be seen in the fact that there’s something very prideful in saying: I fear only God―and nothing else. And yet only this is fear of God. For it isn’t genuine fear of God to fear God and something else as well.

The Relationship betw. the Two Essays by H. H. To let oneself be put to death for the truth is the expression of possessing absolute truth; corresponding to this is a qualitative difference from other peop.―there we have the apostle. Nonetheless, no hum. being has the right to do so―there we have the genius. Authority is exactly what is required, but the genius has no authority.

The Conclusion of the First of the Two Essays was included, but it was so�ened so that the humoristic part and the double reflection with which the auth. of the piece distances himself from it, were removed. It’s now mild and simple. For a moment, I considered adding: If he had lived in 48, he would have understood clearly thata “awakening” isn’t exactly what’s

[a]

or as it is called in the second essay, a specific qualitative difference.

a

hmnly speaking

1

26 1

5

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 38–41

1849

[b]

This was also included: But it’s true, I’ve already said one thing about him: that he’s dead―it says right on the title page “posthumous.[”] So he’s dead―unless one prefers to say that he’s never existed―for it says right on the title page “poetic experiment.”

needed right now. He could have then sat down―if he hadn’t already answered the question, presumably exhaustively―and wondered if a hum. being has the right to let himself be put to death―in order to stop the wild rebellion. I le� this out, for it detracts from the dogmatic content: does a hum. being [have the right to be put to death], which is a purely dogmatic or religious problem that can be solved just as well in 48 or 47. The whole problem is rlly posed in order to shed light on God-Man.

5

10

30

[a]

But no, let it stand.

How wi�y a typographical error can be! In the second of the two essays, instead of [“]the gi� of working miracles,[”] it read [“]the nuisance [of working miracles.”]

39

The entire postscript to essay no. 1 (in two ethicalreligious ess.) is best le� out. For it rlly gets tangled up in nonsense. If I call it a “poetic experiment,” I don’t have the right to say right a�erward that the novelistic, poetic part doesn’t ma�er; and if I say right a�erward that I’m essentially a thinker, then I have problems with the poetic form. It’s enough that it’s on the title page: poetic experiment―the posthumous work of a solitary pers.

40

The first essay (of the two small essays) is poetic, but in the same sense as a Platonic dialogue. In order to avoid pure abstraction, the didactic element, [and] in order to bring out personality, a personality of that kind is created. But no more than

41

15 gi� … nuisance] See explanatory note.

15

20

25

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 41–44

5

that. The novelistic in him, incidentally, is of no value, only his thought gehalt. A work like this corresponds to the unity of “thinker” and “poet.” Such a figure is therefore different from abstract thinkers in that he has a poetic element at his service, but he also differs from a poet in that he essentially stresses the content of thought.

42

A good comic figure would be:

10

An Undertaker,

31

because of the objectivity with which he deals with other peop.’s most vulnerable subjective moments, e.g., death, weddings, etc.

15

43

20

25

44 30

The instruments of vulgarity knew very well that even with all their writing, they wouldn’t manage to change a single opinion among those who were well informed. But they knew that there is another class in society―simple, good-natured peop. who are naturally unacquainted with literature. It’s these peop. who are used by vulgarity, or who are abused contra naturam. The instrument of vulgarity knows very well that it’s all a lie and an abomination, but it makes money off these peop.―by deceiving and abusing them. It’s no wonder, then, that states demoralize.

In the most ancient of times, judges and prophets watched over a country’s ethos. Later it was traditional for the clergy to do it. Then, because of worldliness, the church doubted―and the “newspapers”―and the public became

2 gehalt] German, content. 23 contra naturam] Latin, contrary to nature.

1849

27

28

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 44–47

1849

ethical authorities! Finally, the most degraded part of the daily press, under the name of satire, kept a watch over ethics! [T]his is something like sending a young girl to a brothel―to safeguard her innocence. 5

My Misfortune, Hmnly Speaking is simply that I’ve been a genius, that I’ve had a strict upbringing in Xnty, that I’ve had money. Without the first, naturally I couldn’t have begun with an enormous burst but would have gradually muddled my way toward my goals; without the second I wouldn’t have had the notion of suffering, which directed me to act contrary to prudence; without the third I wouldn’t have been able to position myself. All three of these things, the first two of which are real goods, have become my misfortune, for peop. think truth and piety are pride and vanity.

R. Nielsen’s book is out. Just as I suspected, even though he has an impression of the wrong I’ve suffered in the interest of truth and of my superiority with regard to the circumstances, he nonetheless thought that if he just used me as a crutch, then he could pull it off[:] he could still become important, perhaps even be a success. That was enthusiasm for the justness of my cause. In truth, he did come to the right one. His writings plunder in a myriad of ways, mostly from the pseudonyms, whom he never cites, perhaps with deliberate cunning because they are the least read. And then my conversations!

45

10

32 15

46 20

25

30

Even here we can see how true it is that a Xn had to suffer for his faith right from the start. Take a poor pers. who really earnestly believes in the miracle of the 5 loaves and the 2 small fish and imagine he lives accordingly: he’ll be laughed at by his neighbors and acquaintances; and if he falls short, he’ll be taunted and ridiculed.

47

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 47–49

5

1849

The thing is, peop. like it if a pers. lives in happy immediacy and thinks [“]Don’t worry, it’ll all work out with God’s help[”] (here just a figure of speech). But if there’s someone who understands just what a livelihood means, understands it be�er than anyone, if he has faith―and he only has “faith” if he does understand it―that’s laughable madness.

33

48

To impart truth is to suffer―if you don’t suffer, you aren’t imparting truth.

10

49

15

20

25

Hmnly speaking, it would be of some comfort if a witness to truth dared to say to his loved ones at his death: See, I’ve suffered―now you’ll have an easy life. But, no, he must say: Now it’s your turn. And that’s how it must be, and shall be, as long as this world continues. This world is the world of untruth, of lies, and to live Christianly in it means to suffer. One of the most difficult movements, therefore, is this: from “poet” to Xn; for the poet is stuck in this world even though he suffers in it. In this respect, a poet can endure much. The only thing he can’t do is let go of the world as Xnty demands. The poet can become more and more miserable but, via imagination, he continues to orient himself toward the world―he never rlly rejects it. Ah, in many ways it’s as if this had been wri�en about me. But there might still be enough of the good in me that I at least dare venture far enough out there that Governance can get hold of me.

29

30

1

5

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 50–51

[a] Christ thus makes them completely free. He doesn’t require them to praise him at all; to the contrary, he offers the opposite route by which they can avoid the danger of praising him when he lets them say “he ordered us to be silent”; in this way, it became quite apparent what was going on inside them.

1849

Christ commanded those he’d healed not to talk about it; but the more he forbade them, the more they did it.―This truth we find in Christ: he didn’t want a sensation. But we also find truth in the others [who were healed]; for it was dangerous to spread words of praise. If those who’d been healed (9 of the lepers for whom this was the case, for example) had been cowardly and prudent, they would have said: The Lord himself forbids it―ergo we’ll remain silent, for that’s his will, a�er all. Such collisions still frequently happen in life. It might be someone’s duty, in the denial of self-interest, to remain silent―but it doesn’t follow that it isn’t contemptible to take advantage of it, claiming that it’s his will.

50

R. Nielsen’s Book

51

hasn’t gained any ground; to the contrary, ground has been lost. He doesn’t have enough dialectical skill, insight, or sound judgment to steer the rapids. The position in question is the unqualified passion with which faith understands itself to be a secret and understands that it must be and must remain a secret; and thus faith must not, for anything in the world, exchange even a single word with doubt or allow itself to be placed opposite doubt; it must have nothing to do with going into particulars. For ge�ing into particulars is nothing but doubt. That’s the secret of the Christian tactic. But R. N., who is a mediocre tactician, comes up with the idea of placing doubt and faith in juxtaposition and then starts the debate. Ah, he’s confused like all the others; [it is] a kind of vanity to believe that one should be able to give highly rational grounds, etc.―instead of admi�ing that the self-denying ethical project is to say: it is incomprehensible―and not a word more. How do you keep a secret? The simplest and surest way is to keep it ethically. If you do it that way, you won’t have anything to do with prudence,

5

10

34

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 51

5

35

15

20

25

30

35

40

but will instead say: It’s a secret, entrusted to me as a secret; it is my ethical duty to keep it; at the threat of death, I will keep it. I’m not saying this to provoke you to put me to the test to see if I indeed have the courage to remain silent until death, no, I ask you rather to let me go in peace―but if it must be, in the name of God, I will remain silent.―The other path is that of prudence. You act like the wise man, who knows how to hide it so extraord. cleverly. That is, you’re cheated of the secret. In principle, prudence is always cheated. For prudence is only the wisdom of finitude, but eternally speaking, the wisdom of finitude is deception. It can happen at times that you’re smarter than others―but conceptually speaking, prudence is always cheated. The position is, and remains, the absolute qualitative passion with which faith understands this as its ethical duty: at any price, to refrain from having anything to do with the a�empt to understand it. It [this position] says: Because faith abhors speaking blasphemously, God forbid that these words ever pass my lips: [“]I can understand it.[”] But what does R. N. do? Relying on me and my dialectic, trusting that it has exerted enough pressure, he runs back and forth ina�entively and sometimes in a foolhardy way. A�er si�ing and ruminating a great deal about particular details, he thinks he’s capable of challenging doubt―and he gets involved with particular details. Now the position is lost. And I, a born dialectician, haven’t even a�empted such a thing―and he thinks he can do it. Ah, the thing is, he is neither a dialectician nor does he have the concept of the passion of faith. No more essentially than Mag. Adler had given up Hegel has R. N. rid himself of his old ways. It might look like it, but with my eye of the police investigator, I instantly detected the counterfeit. His entire position lacks absolute dialectical passion―and the result will be that he has supplied a bunch of ecclesiastical cha�erheads with a new apparatus for cha�ering up a storm about one thing and then another.

1849

31

32

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 51–53

1849

I’m tempted to say to him in print: “If you do that again, I’ll be forced to outflank you and a�ack―be�er yet, I think I’ll do it right now.”

5

It’s really true. If you want to reduce the speed of infinity, if you’re afraid that it’s taking you off course, then take on just one disciple; with each single disciple you accept, you reduce the speed more and more. Finitely, the opposite applies; peop. think their cause gains more and more momentum the more disciples they acquire―that’s also true, but that sort of increase in momentum is restricted to the moment―ultimately inertia, not acceleration―and is so far from rlly increasing momentum that it is, in fact, resistance. And in the same way, hum. hustle and bustle exerts resistance.

The Whole Production Supplemented with the Two Essays by H. H. The authorship conceived as a whole (as found in “A Note Concerning My W[ork] as an Auth.,” “Three Notes Concerning My W[ork] as an Auth.,” and The Point of View for My W[ork] as an Auth.), points definitively to Discourses at Friday Communion. The same applies to the whole structure. The “3 Godly Discourses” come later and are supposed to accompany the second edition of Either/Or and mark the distinction betw. what is offered with the le� hand and what is offered with the right. The Two Ethical-Religious Essays do not belong to the authorship in the same way; they are not an element within it, but a point de vüe. If I’m to stop, they will be like a viewpoint one projects in advance in order to have a stopping place. They also contain an apparent and an actual eminence: a martyr, yes, an apostle―and a genius. But insofar as one might search for any information about me in the essays, this is it: that I’m a genius―not an apostle, not a martyr. The apparent eminence is included in order to all the more accurately define the actual one. For most peop., the defining category “genius” is so indiscriminate that it can mean anything at all; for just that reason, it was important to define the concept, as the two essays do by defining that which is infinitely qualitatively higher. 28 point de vüe] French, properly “point de vue,” viewpoint.

36

52

10

15

53

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 53–55

5

37

10

15

54

20

1849

Thus the two small essays appropriately have the character of a signal. But it’s dialectical. It could mean: Here’s the stopping place; and it could mean: Here’s the beginning―but always in such a way that, above all, I’m careful not to cause any conceptual confusion and that I remain true to myself as no more and no less than a genius, or a poet and thinker with a quantitative [“]more[”] with regard to being what the poet and thinker writes and thinks about. A quantitative [“]more,[”] not a qualitative [“]more,[”] for the qualitative [“]more[”] is the witness to the truth, the martyr―which I’m not. And even qualitatively higher is the apostle, which I haven’t imagined myself to be any more than I imagine that I’m a bird. I ought to guard myself against blasphemy and against profanely introducing confusion into the religious sphere, which I, to my utmost and with the fear of God, try to uphold and protect against prostitution by confused and presumptuous thinking.

There’s a beautiful verse that concludes each station of the socalled Kreuzweg-Andacht by A. Liguori (pp. 654ff.): Süßer Jesus, um zu sterben, Gehst Du hin, aus Lieb’ zu mir; Um das Leben zu erwerben, Laß mich sterben, Herr! mit Dir! and then differently from the 12th station on:

25

Süßer Jesus, schon gestorben Bist Du nun, aus Lieb’ zu mir: Hast das Leben mir erworben, Ach laß sterben mich mit Dir.

30

55

The reason that preaching about the worries of poverty is so rare is no doubt because speaking about it is embarrassing to those who suffer under it, and also because the way the gospel speaks of it seems to them too harsh. Poetically (i.e., when one’s own livelihood is secure), what the gospel says is indescribably 20 Süßer Jesus … Herr! mit Dir!] German, Sweet Jesus, you go forth to die for love of me; may I die with you, Lord, that I might gain life. 25 Süßer Jesus … sterben mich mit Dir.] German, Sweet Jesus, you have died for love of me, you have gained life for me, Ah! may I die with you.

33

34

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 55–58

1849

upli�ing. But when it truly becomes a serious ma�er, that is, when someone is in want and need and is then supposed to be upli�ed by the carefree ways of the lilies and the birds, or by the div. exaltation of Xt―that’s too exalted, and, hmnly speaking, too severe.

5

38

Xt was wrapped in rags and laid in a manger, but he was buried in a new grave. (And in a grave that belonged to another man, which Luther sees as an allusion to something symbolic: Xt died for us.) But burial in that way is, in a sense, an exception to degradation. Burial in the new grave, with the greatest possible care, has to do with the resurrection. Imagine, e.g., that Xt’s body had been cremated―he was a criminal, a�er all―and the ashes strewn to the four winds. Yes, of course this doesn’t ma�er, because the resurrection is essentially still the same miracle, but that would indeed be offensive to the weaker ones.

56

It ought to be remembered that Xt didn’t turn Nicodemus away; he tolerated him―but he never became a real disciple, even though John calls him a secret disciple; but where? I can’t remember the place; I know I’ve read Luther’s reference to it in the gospel text for Good Friday.

57

10

15

25

The fact that almost all communication happens via the press has confused everything. Everything has become impersonal. An inorganic dregs has gathered at the bo�om of states, an enormous dregs: the masses, which no one is involved with because the instructors are not persons but auths., who, hidden from everyone’s view, send thoughts out into the world. The conflict with the government has been the only one, because the government can condemn the press; but the real conflict of truth, the conflict with the masses, the public, the abstractions (evil, the stronghold of lies) seems to be completely forgo�en.

58

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 59–61

59

39

60 10

1849

Bishop Mynster has taken upon himself a great responsibility, both to me and to our relationship, by si�ing there and acting like nothing has happened concerning a phenomenon that he cannot manage at all. In honesty and with love of the truth, he ought to have emphasized my work as an auth.[;] in that case he would have at least taken care of his responsibilities.

If you fear that the speed of the infinite within you will carry you away too violently, then heed this advice: take on a disciple, feed him, make him believe that he is nonetheless independent― then he’ll repeat what you say, and you’ll be so disappointed by it that you won’t want to see it. The parody (not the combative parody of the a�acker, but that of the admiring imitator) is tiring.

15

61

20

25

30

35

Mynster’s sermons are a deception. Today, e.g., (the Sunday a�er Ascension Day), he said: Out there on the streets, it wouldn’t help to preach this message, no; but here, in a place of holiness, in this place, in this quiet place, here I will proclaim it for all who will hear, etc. What boldness―assisted by prudence― to simply eliminate Xt, the apostles, and all the witnesses to truth, who were so imprudent―or fanciful―that they preached on the streets, i.e., they took proclamation seriously. In truth, I’m dumbfounded. Today, in Xndom, where everyone is Xn, no one dares proclaim it on the streets; but when everyone was Jewish or pagan, they dared. Now they don’t dare; no, that’s stating it too mildly. It would have been all right if Mynster had said I lack the faith, courage, and strength to do it. But that’s not how he speaks. In dignified prudence, he speaks about what is highest as if it were rashness. And fraud (like his sermon in the quiet place, where everything is theatrical) becomes the highest thing. And yet when all is said and done, I think that Mynster doesn’t understand what he himself is saying; he’s become so entrenched that it doesn’t even dawn on him that what he dishes up so pretentiously is blasphemy.―And the audience, yes, of course they think this kind of speech is excellent; they don’t know the difference, they confuse Christian preaching with an art exhibition, which naturally insists on this comforting quiet and security.

35

36

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 62–63

1849

40

Immediacy can indeed be regained―but the drivel of the “system” is found in the notion that it can be regained without a break. Immediacy is only regained―ethically; immed. itself becomes the project―you shall regain it. In the middle of the most highly developed period of the most intellectual of peoples, Socrates a�ained ignorance (ignorance, with which one begins in order to know more and more). But how? [B]y understanding absolutely ethically that his mission was to maintain his ignorance, so that no earthly temptation could con him into confessing―and so that no inner temptation could con him into confessing to himself―that he indeed knew something, he, who in a different sense, did know something. Peop. who have no concept of spirit say things like this: Once immediacy is lost, it can never be recovered. And to illustrate it (thus also revealing how they confuse the spiritual and the sensuous), they add: A girl can lose her innocence, but she can never recover it. But spiritually speaking, this is the problem: if I can’t recover innocence, then all is lost from the beginning. For this the starting point: I, like everyone, have lost my innocence. If I, for a moment, ignore all the particular dogmatic descriptions concerning the assistance of spirit, etc., I can define rebirth like this: it is immediacy regained ethically. Ethics or, be�er, the ethical, is the turning point and from there the movement is toward the dogmatic.

62

In the sermon on the gospel for Easter Monday, in the final passage, Luther makes this distinction: You have the right to argue about the Bible, but you don’t have the right to argue about the Holy Scriptures. This is the old view that one thing can be true in philosophy that isn’t true in theology. The Bible and Holy Scriptures are the same book, of course, but the perspective from which it’s viewed makes all the difference. Here, as everywhere, one must be careful with the qualitative leap and make sure there’s no direct transition (e.g., from reading and studying the Bible as an ordinary hum. book―to accepting it as God’s word, as Holy Scripture), but everywhere a µεταβασις εις αλλο γενος, a leap, whereby I break the chain of reasoning and define a qualitative newness, but a αλλο γενος.

63

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

37 µεταβασις εις αλλο γενος] Greek, transformation to another kind. (See also explanatory note.) 39 αλλο γενος] Greek, another kind.

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 64–67

1849

41

64

5

10

65

15

66

25

67

30

The Li�le Book by H. H. was just as it should be. But it’s not possible for someone to immediately take that extremely difficult position, which is so loaded with responsibility. So you play an invite in order to make your contemporaries your partner. If someone stumbles over this li�le book, he lets out a colossal cry for help―and he’s right, for it’s a highly unusual li�le book. But then it’s he who cried out; we switch places. That’s why this li�le book had to be published―either in my own name, indicated [as my own] as strongly as possible, or as it so happened.

Lessing’s entire piece “On Fables” must be read again. Like everything by him, it’s a masterpiece. It’s found in Samtl. W. 18th vol. Esp. on pp. 204, 205ff., there’s something about Aristotle’s understanding of actuality and possibility, as well as Lessing’s understanding of the same. It is consistent with what I have developed in several pseudonymous works, which is why I prefer “the experiment” more than the historical-actual.

People have more or less accused Xt of irresponsibility for entrusting a pers. like Judas, who had thieving inclinations, to be a treasurer. One could rather say: What trust and love on the part of Xt, for the boldest and best way to save such a pers. is to show him unconditional confidence; if that doesn’t help, then there’s probably no way to help him.

I’ve o�en said that a person ought to do his best to appear genial and friendly, even if he’s suffering inwardly, for the result is that others are genial, and sometimes this will also temper his own suffering; but when someone looks irritated he makes others irritated. That’s true enough, but it shouldn’t be forgo�en that the very feeling of impotence that comes from failing to appear genial and happy while suffering can make a pers. look irritated.

4 invite] French, invitation. (See also explanatory note.)

37

38

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 68–69

1849

To “deceive” requires an infinite virtuosity in deception. Someone is convinced he’s discovered the deception and that next time he’ll certainly catch the deceiver―but he isn’t prepared for the fact that next time the deception will be different. He’s just the opposite of Stupid Go�lieb; sometimes it seems as if Stupid Go�lieb will catch him. Dutifully, faithfully, and obediently, Stupid Go�lieb always does exactly what he was told to do earlier. Peop. are like Stupid Go�lieb in relation to the deceiver; they think that he’ll do the same thing next time―and they’re deceived. In terms of the idea, this is the maieutic, which serves to develop the other.

Faith’s conflict with the world is not a ba�le of thought against doubt, thought against thought. This was the confusion that finally ended in the madness of the system. Faith, the faithful person’s conflict with the world, is a ba�le of character. Hum. vanity lies in the desire to comprehend, the vanity of refusing to obey as a child, of wanting, like an adult, to comprehend, and of refusing to obey what he can’t comprehend; i.e., he essentially won’t obey. The faithful person is a pers. of character who, unconditionally obedient to God, grasps it as duty of character that he must not insist upon comprehension. Now comes the conflict. To be willing to believe something one can’t comprehend is blind obedience, obscurantism, stupidity, etc. This means that the world will make the believer anxious with the fear of other hum. beings, and instill in him the vanity that he’ll also be able to comprehend it. There’s the conflict. It’s a project for the person of character. Or [it can happen] another way: this pers. of faith is perhaps also a highly gi�ed mind. The world becomes aware of him and perceives clearly enough that if anyone is capable of comprehending it, it’s him. So the world construes his simple faith as irony, rages at him to make him anxious and afraid so that he’ll be compelled to say: Yes, of course I can comprehend it―i.e., I fear hum. beings more than God. These, and all similar conflicts, are the conflicts of faith. That’s my understanding.

42

68

5

10

69 15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 70–72

1849

39

43

70

5

71

10

15

20

25

72 30

35

What does it mean to have faith? It means, with the fear of God and with unconditional obedience, to be willing (which you shall and because you shall) to defend yourself against the vain thought of wanting to comprehend, and against the vain delusion of being able to comprehend.

The phrase [“]woman was given to man as a companion[”] certainly doesn’t mean that a man’s relationship to a woman is nothing more than that of a companion; it no doubt refers to family relationships, offspring, and in this elemental sense it is said that the woman is companionship and that she brings companionship along with her. What’s implied in the idea of “companionship”? It’s not an association of several people of the same age; it’s rather a unit that, in the most intimate of relationships, also displays differences according to age, like this: grandparents, husband and wife, children of various ages―this is rlly companionship. This is “companionship” as well as a beautiful unity. Each age has its own eccentric possibility―different ages thus provide a corrective for each other. Isn’t the child-adult corrective beneficial in this respect by restraining a person from becoming pure spirit or from becoming too serious, etc.[?] It would be a nice project, even a moving project, for a psychologist to calculate and tabulate the possible combinations of ways in which one age group essentially provides a supplement and corrective for the other.

In his sermon on the gospel for the second Sunday a�er Easter (“I am the good shepherd”), Luther very movingly treats the way the true Xn becomes unrecognizable, as it were, through all the persecution and mistreatment, etc., he suffers―but Xt still knows him and recognizes him as his own. What Luther says in the same sermon about “the journeyman” deserves to be reprinted. It’s highly appropriate―and it was said by someone who has passed away.

[a]

A definition of faith, that is, of the Christian conception of faith.

1

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 73–75

1849 44

What De la Mo� says of Aesop’s fables is superb: his treatment is especially precise; he doesn’t waste time on summaries but gets right to the point, and every word hastens toward a conclusion; he knows no alternative between the necessary and the useless. Quoted by Lessing in [“]On Fables,” Stl. W., 18th vol., p. 242.

73

5

10

1

that is, by publishing the Wolfenbü�el Fragments

a

The last and most impressive idea for keeping human beings under control―if concrete consequences and punishments don’t work―is immortality; and this has been made problematic, made into something that has to be proven. It’s like li�ing a cane to beat someone and saying: Now you’re going to get a serious caning, that is, if this thing in my hand really is a cane; and then, instead of striking a blow, giving 3 proofs that it is a cane and then an Amen, i.e., [it’s like] forge�ing to strike. O, what nonsense―but that’s what we hear in sermons.

74

Both are equally meaningless in the end: either to employ all one’s acumen to show the unreasonableness of a miracle (even Lessinga does this) and then, on that basis (that it is unreasonable), conclude ergo, it is not a miracle. (But would it be a miracle if it were reasonable[?])―or to employ all one’s profundity and acumen to understand the miracle and make it comprehensible (and this is the wisdom of speculation), and then conclude that ergo, it is a miracle because it is comprehensible―but in that case it isn’t a miracle. No, let a miracle be what it is[:] an object of faith. The great catastrophe is that, quite smoothly, Xnty has become a thought project for shrewd minds and speculators who have absolutely nothing

75

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 75–77 45

5

10

15

20

76 25

30

77

essential to do with Xnty. It is no longer solace for a suffering that no hum. wisdom can alleviate, solace for the anguish and pain of the consciousness of sin, solace that is only meant for―those who suffer. What would we think of a medicine if, by some strange mistake, it were made the object of analysis of a chemist rather than a remedy for an ill person for whom it was intended[?] And what if the chemist then discovered that it wasn’t a remedy at all―and he even made the mistake of saying: I myself am not sick. It’s a deep fall from grace that they’ve allowed Xnty to be analyzed and treated in this way, and that faith rlly died off long ago, the faith that would defend itself in a life-and-death struggle. But what is this soulless Xndom all about[?] And it’s noteworthy too that missionary efforts amount to nothing these days. Why? [B]ecause Xnty itself doesn’t exist anymore. I found this observation on missionary work in the Wolfenbü�el Fragments, and I agree with it.

If I were asked how I was educated to be the author that I am, apart from my relationship to God, I would answer: By an old man, to whom I owe the most thanks, and by a young girl, to whom I am most indebted―the result of which was a unity of age and youth, of the harshness of winter and the mildness of summer, which must also have resided within me as possibility―; the former educated me with his noble wisdom, the la�er with her lovable foolishness.

That It’s Impossible for a True Xn to Become Something Great in the World It’s one thing to be born great, e.g., a prince, a count, a millionaire, etc.―it’s something else to become something great. The former category can

1849

[b]

41

It is just as inconceivable that missions could secure adherents to Xnty as it is that an old man could have procreative powers.

1

42

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 77–79

1849

well be consistent with being a Xn; for in truth, he inherits greatness―and becomes Xn. But if someone isn’t born into greatness and is Xn, then it’s impossible to become something great. For in order to become great in this world, a person must collaborate with worldliness in all kinds of ways, and that will be hindered by being Xn. My father thought Mynster was greatly edifying―but my father was an insignificant simple man, one of the quiet people who lived in anonymity. But Mynster, who has become great― how o�en he’s had to do something unchristian in order to a�ain it. When one must live in the public eye, and be Xn, and there’s some question [about what one shall become], then by becoming Xn, one becomes nothing less than great in the world. This, then, is the deception heard in sermons: sometimes the Xn becomes something great in this world and enjoys honor and respect, and sometimes he’s persecuted.―A sheer lie, because he won’t u�er words that commit himself. No, if you begin as nothing (that is, if you haven’t inherited greatness, like something you have without working for it) and you’re Xn―then it’s impossible to become something great in this world. Priests therefore always make use of the Old Testament as if it were the N.T., as if Xt’s own life, those of the apostles, all of them, weren’t just the opposite. But the priests make a mess. They take one kind of so�ness from the N.T., another kind from the Old [Testament] and everything becomes u�er so�ness―and drivel.

46

The conclusion of Luther’s sermon on the gospel “I am the good shepherd” deserves to be republished in order to stop, once and for all if possible, all the drivel about the idea that there are pure Xns, and consequently that Xnty can give up the fight.

78

Something about “The Sisters in Kinnekullen”

79

In the preface, the auth. says that the idea isn’t based on a fairy tale―but neither is it his own. That’s a strange form of integrity; perhaps it’s even disingenuous. It shows integrity to admit that it isn’t his own; it’s dishonest to say nothing more

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 79 47

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

1849

than that. For if he had indicated his source and all the pertinent information about it, it might be the case―who knows―it might be the case that he both owed the other more than he imagines and that he perhaps used the borrowed material incorrectly. Instead of ge�ing married, a girl falls in love with money―she sits inside a mountain and spins gold―we see her 25 years later at her sister’s silver wedding (incidentally, it would have been clever to make it 50 years, the golden wedding). And the sorcerer explains that it’s not only this girl, but countless others, who are lost in something abstract (or something like that), who don’t rlly live but just waste their lives. The idea is that living in an abstract way is a wasted life. Fine. That must be what was borrowed, the part about the abstract life. What has the poet done with it? He’s taken a particular example; and which one? Greed. How thoughtless. If you want to illustrate the abstract life more profoundly, you have to select something innocent in and of itself. The greedy maiden’s defect is not the abstract life―but greed. So the author has picked the wrong example. He’s made a univ[ersal] of the particular, as they say, [and puts it] in the mouth of the sorcerer. But that’s not what was illustrated in the example because the example was erroneously selected. On the other hand. If you want to validate the concrete life in contrast to the abstract life, you have to make sure you don’t go too far. For the authentic religious life―in contrast to what peop. genrlly understand by concretion and what this poet understands by it―is an abstract life: it means suffering, being “sacrificed.” The author doesn’t have the remotest sense for that. He hasn’t grasped how the problem should be correctly placed in relation to the ethical, which forbids not only sin but also an abstract life; nor has he grasped how that stands in contrast to the religious, which affirms the abstract life in a completely different sense. From a categorical point of view, the author’s work is confused in every respect; he’s mixed up his categories. Now think about the pseudonyms[:] Convinced that the way most peop. “live” their lives, the way they live them concretely, is a concrete waste of life, the pseudonyms fight here for the legitimate abstract life. To that end, I’ve used these[:] a) eccentric aestheticisma and b) the ethicist, but in such a way that he again points toward the religious. This process is the aim of the entire pseudonymous production.

43

a

whose defect is the wrong kind of abstract life, without it being patently sinful

1

44

1

5

10

15

[b]

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 79–80

or an “Anna” (patience in expectancy) in order to show that the abstraction of religious life is the true life. Here, the great contribution of Quidam of the psychological experiment is to show that “the wish” must be preserved in suffering. The ethicist rightfully condemns wishful fantasy and a wasted life as aesthetic eccentricity; but behind the ethical, the religious emerges again: to live abstractly (ideally) is to live. In this sense, only one hum. being has lived absolutely ideally abstractly: God-Man. O, but what do they know, these poets who assume the posture of profundity!

1849

But it’s clear that such a grand project has to be about an abstract life. It’s more concrete to take a single thought in a muddled, categorically confused way and do everything in completely the wrong way, confusing all the spheres―and for the “moment” become a big hit as a profound thinker. If I were to take a particular example from the pseudonyms, I could take the passage in Either/Or where the aesthete divides peop. into two classes[:] those who work in order to live and those who don’t have to; and then he shows that it’s a contradiction to say that the purpose of life is to work in order to live because the purpose of living can’t be to produce the conditions necessary for living. And the piece could be based on that. But then the piece would also have to point toward the religious. For the ethicist in Either/Or, life culminates in marriage; but that entire work is also just one element in the project. Obviously there should have been 3 sisters, a third, a Christian “Mary”; then perhaps the piece would have been worth something.

48

This is the sad part about preaching the Christian message: You must first be hard on yourself. Good Lord, we’re flesh and blood and we’d like to enjoy ourselves. But from a Christian perspective, life’s vocation is to suffer. And when you’ve been hard on yourself, and continue to be hard on yourself, you’ll be hated, almost damned by oth[ers], a torment to them. Naturally they don’t want to hear anything about suffering. It would be a consolation, though, if, in one’s own suffering, one were allowed to be gentle with others; Ah, but that’s not the case with Xnty.

80

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 80–82 Oh, Mynster, Mynster, where did you get the right to transform Xnty to such serene tenderness! 49

81 5

It’s also certain that Xt never used distinguishing terms like orthodox―or heterodox―but said by their deeds shall you know them. I read this someplace in the Wolfenb[ü�el] Fragments, [“]Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger,[”] §. 6. end.

10

82

15

20

25

30

Where in The Book of Wisdom do we find the words that the unrighteous say about the righteous[?]: Lasset uns den armen Gerechten uberwältigen, lasset uns der Wi�wen nicht schonen, noch für des Alten graue Haare uns schämen. Laßt uns auf den Gerechten lauren, denn er ist uns verdrieslich: er giebt für, daß er Go� kenne, und nennet sich Gottes Knecht oder Kind. Wohlan lasset uns sehen, ob seine Worte wahr seyn, und versuchen, wie es mit ihm ein Ende nehmen will. Denn so der Gerechte Go�es Sohn ist, so wird er sich sein annehmen und ihn erre�en von der Hand der Widersacher. Wir wollen ihn zum schandlichen Tod verdammen; dann es wird eine Aufsicht auf ihn geschehen nach seinen Worten. Found in the Wolf. Fragments, [“V]on dem Zwecke der Lehre Jesu[”] § 10 end. I can’t remember reading these words. But they’re excellent, a fine expression of the world’s understanding of the good. The world doesn’t hate the good, but is envious of the good, wants to hear that no one is really any be�er than anyone else.

14 Lasset uns … seinen Worten] German, Let us oppress the righteous poor, let us not spare the widow, nor regard the gray hairs of the old. Let us lie in wait for the righteous for we are repelled by him: he professes to know God and calls himself God’s servant or child. Well, then, let us see whether his words are true and see how he will bear himself at the end of his life. For if the righteous one is God’s son, then he will take care of his own and rescue him from the hand of the enemy. By condemning him to a shameful death we will see how what happens to him fits with his words.

1849

45

46

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 83–84

1849

It’s always been difficult for me to portray Xnty in all its true harshness because I’ve imagined that it was only harsh for me, and harsh for me because I’ve sinned more than others. I’ve always wanted to be hard on myself and lenient with others. But this is indeed a misunderstanding. For it was harshest with the Holy One himself. But just as a parent doesn’t think his child’s tiny bit of guilt is worth mentioning, so too have other peop. always seemed innocent compared with me.

83

This is another way it’s apparent that to be a Christian is to be a martyr and a sacrifice: other peop. soon discover that the religious person is commi�ed in a different way than they are: he doesn’t dare get angry, argue, take revenge, or repay like with like, because he is before God, who could immediately do to him what he did to another. Others take advantage of it. By being before God, the religious person is, hmnly speaking, abandoned and suffers every kind of injury, injustice, degradation, and deception at the hands of the others, who couldn’t care less about God, who just don’t give a damn. Indeed, hmnly speaking, to be imprisoned isn’t nearly as painful and agonizing―if you still maintain the right to defend yourself and use hum. prudence and might―as to be the religious one in this world, the religious one, who, because he’s before God, is defenseless when others harass and torment him and, moreover, who also constantly suffers the agony (because he is before God) of wondering whether he’s good enough to others, whether he’s indeed repaying all the evil done unto him with all the good he can think of―for if not, God might just wash his hands of him.

84

5

50 10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 85–87 85

5

51

86

As soon as the religious leaves the existential present, where it is fully active, it immediately becomes milder. The fact that it becomes milder, and thus less true, is directly recognizable when the religious becomes a doctrine. As soon as it becomes doctrine, the religious is no longer absolutely urgent.a In Christ, the religious is completely present tense; in Paul, it is already on its way to becoming doctrine. Just imagine! And the total misunderstanding of the religious begins with this trend to transform it essentially to doctrine―and this trend has been going on for God knows how many centuries.

This is the Christian definition of sin that Xt himself gives: the Holy Spirit shall prove the world wrong about sin, about not believing in me. Sin is not having faith. That’s also how it’s presented in The Sickness unto Death.

20

87

25

30

35

It’s a bit sad to hear Mynster (as today, at Pentecost vespers), who has been allied with worldliness as much as anyone, begin with the text about the li�le flock to whom the Father is pleased to grant the kingdom, etc. It’s really no different than when Heiberg, the caretaker of the public, became polemical because he got into a skirmish with the public. In the same sermon, the tone was set by the idea that he had been consistent by joining the minority in parliament. But Good Lord, is that something to call a�ention to, silently associating with the biggest names[?] No, Mynster has never had the slightest idea what Christian polemic is; he’s coddled, and he’s coddled because he’s an orator. Perhaps nothing else coddles or corrupts a pers. more. To stand at the pulpit and speak passionately―instead of taking action in the real world―and then to have it seem to the individual himself and the audience as

1849

47

Note There’s more and more deferral before I get around to doing it, and in the end (when the religious has been completely transformed to doctrine) it’s all deferral.

a

1

5

48

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 87–91

1849

if the man had taken action! Yes, Plato and Socrates were right: banish the poets from the state―and the orators as well. The Greek concept of philosopher (i.e., a thinker in ethical character) is on the whole far more suited to the communication of Christianity than this pitiful concept: the orator, the bombastic rhetorician rather than responsible agent.

5

52

This is exactly why I’m an unlikable phenomenon for Mynster: The fact that someone outside the profession has been able produce something excep[tional]; no, that won’t be tolerated. It must be made clear that a layman is a dreamer, bordering on ruin. The only serious thing is to join the establishment, be a full-time employee, to have a position― otherwise, being the supreme commander doesn’t mean anything. The egoism of the distinguished, qua distinguished, naturally demands that the only serious move is to join the establishment.

88

The world doesn’t hate the exceptional person; no, no, but the world’s envy will accompany anyone who wants to be the exceptional one.

89

15

20

25

To pray it out of you like you weep it out of you, as they say. And when you’ve prayed it out of you completely, then there’s only one thing le�: Amen.

90

30 1

5

[a]

The comic is always so close to the highest form of pathos; here, one might think of Peer Degn, who could once recite the whole litany in Greek but can now only remember that the last word is Amen.

Theme for an Edifying Discourse: The Art of Arriving at an Amen. It’s not so easy. There always seems to be something to add. A resolution, the resolution of faith.

91

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 92–93

92

5

53

15

20

93

30

35

For me, there’s nothing I can do, nothing I can say. It’s as if language itself is already occupied with something else. There are a few people who constantly speak of sacrificing themselves for a cause, and they eventually get a few others to believe it. But it’s not really true. They understand the idea of sacrificing themselves and making sacrifices to be a ma�er of sticking with a cause even though it would have been more profitable not to do so. But pay careful a�ention to the fact that they are completely unable to say what the other, more profitable options are. You see, that’s what they call sacrifice. When it’s understood this way, my life isn’t a sacrifice; instead, my life corresponds rather perfectly with the concept itself. The others retain the relative profit they earn and, at the same time, they enjoy the respect accorded noble self-sacrifice. I must be content with being considered mad. That’s fine, because this last element makes the sacrifice complete, which, by the way is exactly what the concept demands.

Whatever does not proceed from faith [or belief] is sin, says Paul. Thus, in a certain sense, the sin against the Holy Spirit is to intentionally act contrary to one’s own beliefs. It’s also worth noting that if everything inconsistent with one’s beliefs is sin, it might seem that anything consistent with one’s beliefs (subjective conviction) would not be sin. Here, in a sense, sin is Socratic ignorance―that is, when a person has such wildly erring convictions that his actions are, objectively viewed, sinful. But as it so happens, Paul (exactly opposite Socrates) places the emphasis on consciousness. Sin is not ignorance; sin is to do something contrary to one’s beliefs.

1849

49

50

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 93–94

1849

Here, the point of contention betw. Paul and Socrates is that Socrates would say that it’s impossible that a person could really have understood, comprehended, perceived the good if he acts in an evil way. For the proof of having really understood the good is precisely the fact that this comprehension exercises such power over him that he acts accordingly; conversely, if he doesn’t do the good, he hasn’t understood it, either. This is the pure intellectuality from which Socrates never escapes. He never finds space for the will, or a space in which the will can operate.

5

10

54

Just as the measure of the aesthetic is the capacity to wish for something, the courage and daring boldness to wish (which is why Aladdin is the poet’s hero and the poet himself is an Aladdin; just give him the ring and he’ll have the courage to wish)―so also is the of measure of individuality the ethical, [i.e.,] the capacity to demand reality, the capacity to make concerns intimate and present tense, the capacity to withstand the medium of imagination and deal only in the medium of existence. Most peop. also have an idea of what greatness is. But regardless of how they twist and turn it, a false image slips in, an image from a distant past, an image that was such and such, that is such and such, but the notion that it is about the individual himself, that the project is designed to be actualized in existence―that eludes people. An essentially ethical individual quickly makes greatness a project for the immediate present. He says―to himself―this is what I want. It’s quite possible I won’t achieve it, but this is what I want. If I can’t do it right away, I’ll crawl. Even if I never manage to get beyond crawling my entire lifetime, I’ll crawl my entire life―but that’s the direction I’m going. He doesn’t relinquish the idea; he’s like a pilgrim who perhaps has knelt and promised to go to Jerusalem―who dies along the way. But in terms of the idea, he’s reached his goal. And in this way, the truly ethical individual must necessarily reach his highest goal. He must reach it; if not now, then in eternity. But this is why all aesthetic and sensuous peop. feel anxiety when they live contemporaneously with this kind of ethical individual―precisely because he transforms everything to reality: everything he understands, he acts on.

94

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 95–97 95

5

96

10

55 15

20

97

30

35

1849

This is fascinating. God says to Moses: Why are you shouting so loudly―yet Moses was silent. That’s how scandalously loud silence can be. I read this in Luther’s sermon on the gospel for one of the Sundays a�er Easter: Hitherto you have not prayed in my name.

You’re greatly outnumbered by the enemy and his numbers grow greater nearly every day; the defending forces have long since understood the situation and are firmly convinced that the only rescue is to mount a new defense. And then someone steps forth and says: [“]You’re wrong; if you put up a defense, you’ll lose everything. A�ack, and even if you’re the last one le� standing, a single aggressor is enough. A defense, regardless of whether or not defenders outnumber the enemy, will ruin everything and the cause is lost.[”] If this doesn’t bring about a new starting point, I don’t know what will. This is my position with regard to all the tactics of the Christian establishment. Just as my discourse is consistently about faith, so also is my entire position a replication of faith. For it really requires faith to assume that a cause, that has almost been lost by its defenders, can be victorious when it simply a�acks rather than defends itself.

What is the meaning of the history of Xnty? This: It is the epitome of excuses and evasions and compromises employed by that portion of humnty that obviously won’t break with Xnty but wants to retain the semblance of being Xn; the epitome of all the excuses, evasions, and compromises that make it possible to be Xn without ever quite literally breaking with the world. The history of Xnty is retrogression, an alliance betw. the world and Xnty. It’s quite simple. Take the N.T.: close your door, speak with God, pray―and if you then do what the N.T. quite simply and plainly says, if you actualize it by expressing it existentially― that’s Xnty. But [this is] the history of Xnty: “First of all we must discover what other enlightened Xns have thought, other serious, tried Xns; we must consult the experience of history for help.” Oh,

51

52

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 97–100

1849

Good Lord! How embarrassing it is to hear a pers. speak pretentiously like that; he wants the experience of history to help him act like an individual hum. being. And then the next issue. Have any of these millions of so-called serious and tried Xns, all together or even individually, understood the issue be�er than the God-Man, have any known be�er than Jesus Xt what true Xnty is[?] Imagine that someone wanted to learn the teachings of a thinker, but went to his servant instead of the thinker himself― to the servant, who no doubt knows much about this thinker, etc.―but who knew absolutely nothing about his teaching, to say nothing of knowing it be�er than the thinker himself. And that’s what all scholarly theology is about―rather than sticking with the N. T. in simplicity―i.e., doing what it says.

5

10

56

There’s a great saying that Coun[cillor] H. C. Ørsted told me: If a lark wants to fart like an elephant, it will end up bursting. And in the same way, scholarly theology will also burst because instead of being what it is―a modest triviality―it wants to be the supreme form of wisdom.

98

20

From one perspective (the merely hum.), it could well seem that religion, esp. Xnty, is the greatest seduction. Xnty knows how the world works; and yet Xnty lures and entices a pers. in its direction until finally, offended by the merely hum., he becomes serious about seeking first the kingdom of God―Xnty knows in advance that he will come into conflict with other hum. beings. The real reason that Xnty, or rather the true Xn, faces persecution is because he refuses to be prudent, to organize his life prudently, to manage earthly challenges first―and then do a bit about the spiritual later. Every doctrine that teaches someone to a�ain some worldly advantage will be accepted by the world.

99

A sad consequence of the completely inverted and totally unchristian notion that [“]where the masses are, there also is the truth[”] is that people continually speak as if Xnty had become

100

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 100–101

5

10

57

15

20

101 25

30

35

40

1849

truer now that there are millions of Xns. They say that when Xnty came into the world, miracles were needed because there were so few Xns; but now that there are so many Xns―now that nearly everyone is Xn―miracles are no longer needed. Well, thank you very much. But it seems to me that miracles are needed now more than ever. For one no longer hears that Xnty is a militant teaching, a polemic, that posits eternal enmity betw. God and the world―but then the relationship gets inverted―and a polemical view is victorious (according to the rather thoughtless hum. notion of victory) because so many believe it. By the way, I have something against all this talk about miracles being needed then, as if hum. reason were subsequently competent to see through God’s tactics, which reason understands neither before nor a�erward. But people are vain; they want so very much to comprehend things, or to appear to have comprehended things; they want so very badly to fraternize with God. One ought to say quite simply―miracles happened back then so they must have been needed―but I won’t begin to try to figure out why they were needed. This is scholarship’s deplorable impertinence toward God, and it is extremely difficult to eliminate.

Thomas a Kempis says in the 3rd book, chap. 23, where the Lord himself teaches you how to find peace: 3. “Let it be essential to you that you would rather do another’s will than your own.” That struck me. The question is, where does one find clergy like that these days[?] If I were to put myself under the wing of some priest or another, I’m well aware that he would make the whole thing into a worldly affair by immediately ushering me into the establishment, into the affairs of the moment, by ge�ing me a position, a title, etc. There’s something very a�ractive about all that, by the way. A melancholic person is, in genrl, inclined to make himself subservient―for then it seems as if he’s less responsible. But it shouldn’t be forgo�en that he is responsible to an even greater degree for making himself subservient. The same holds true in other circumstances. A melancholic person is greatly inclined to play the subservient role in a marriage; he wants it, it satisfies him. Here again, incidentally, it’s clear how close irony and melancholia are to each other. For a

53

54

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 101–104

1849

genuine ironist, too, will always play the subservient role in a marriage.

An A�empt at Preposterous Comedy

102

The apostle Paul is tested in theology by a theology professor. He fails, of course. There’s some truth to what one finds in the Wolfenb[ü�el] Fragments (von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger § 24 conclusion), if not entirely true: Nun aber bekennt man (at baptism) eine Dreieinigkeit in Go�, eine Menschwerdung der anderen Person in Go�, und ein Haufen mehr andere Catechismus-Artikel dabey, worauf die ersten Christen und vielleicht die Apostel selbst zum Theil nicht würden haben zu antworten wissen. It’s use at baptism is the untrue part, but it’s otherwise true with regard to theology: an apostle wouldn’t know how to answer many of the questions from the catechism.

5

Every writer here in Denmark received a copy of Either/Or. I thought it was my duty; and I could do it this time, because now there can be no question of possibly trying to advertise for the book―the book is old, the crisis is over. Naturally they received the copy from Victor Eremita. It really pleased me to send copies to Øehlenschläger and Winther because I admire them. It was also a pleasure to send one to Hertz because he’s both a significant figure and a pleasant personality.

103

It might be quite expedient to memorize one of Luther’s sermons sometime―then deliver it without any hint―and see how furious the clergy would get―and then say: That was a sermon by Luther, word for word. As a precaution, one could get two sworn witnesses who could testify that this was the original intention―so the whole thing wouldn’t turn out to be a case of plagiarism.

104

8 Nun aber … antworten wissen], German, But one confesses belief [(at baptism)] in a Trinity in God, an incarnation of the second person in God, and a host of other catechistic articles, some of which the first Christians, and maybe even the apostles themselves, would not have known how to answer.

58 10

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 105

1849

55

59

105

5

10

15

NB. NB. NB. I dare not and cannot justifying thinking more about whether or not to publish the books that are �nished. My economic concerns for the future are what worry me; the melancholic thought that I might place myself too high; the earthly consideration that I might possibly hinder myself in getting an appointment. Well, God is certainly a long way from compelling me against my will; I can easily escape―but, humbly, almost penitently, I should rather feel ashamed of having destroyed myself in melancholia and re�ection for so long, and for so desperately desiring that God would use force against me, so that I would unwillingly do what he wants me to do freely. And I will thank God fervently that he has not let me escape but has held me to one single idea; for worldly evasions and excuses (I can’t, it’s too demanding on me, too much, etc. etc.) seem like good ideas at the time, especially when I consider the thousands of people who are presum[ably] of the same opinion. But in eternity, in recollection―if I died tomorrow―ah, the time for regret would be long. To have enjoyed the moment, to have been prudent in the moment, these things can’t be recollected―in eternity. No, that’s impossible. That’s the most alien thought to eternity. But to have denied oneself in the moment: that can be recollected for eternity.

56

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 106–107

1849 60

This, too, is part of Xt’s suffering: initially, he didn’t dare reveal to the apostles his true thoughts[:] that he should be, must be, that it was his intention to be, persecuted, ridiculed, spit upon, and crucified. Had he told the apostles right away, they too would likely have le� him. What patient suffering: To be “the truth” and then to be in the awkward position of having to use a few people, eventually finding them, and then having to rectify everything with a bit of untruth (concealment). What patient suffering! O “the truth”―and “humnty”; what have they to do with one another[?] What suffering, therefore, to be the truth, what suffering; not the suffering of being put to death, no, an even greater form: that of needing a few peop. and of being compelled to be a bit untrue. People think that Christ found some solidarity and encouragement with the apostles: ah, yes, it was like moving out of the rain into a stream dripping down from the roof―for with regard to the apostles, his sadness was possibly even greater because he loved them and he saw that they loved him. But he needed a few peop. And this alone could be a complete passion story in itself. He is like the most destitute of people, he, who is the truth, he, who nevertheless―can’t do without a few peop. (who could thus have taken advantage of the situation), he, who can’t do without a few peop. (for otherwise the whole thing comes to nothing and Xnty disappears altogether), and he is the truth whom everyone is in need of. What patient suffering to educate the apostles. And even if―were we to speak hmnly― even if he had become impatient and thought: A�er all, I’m not the one who needs them―well, yes, in a certain sense he does. He needs a few peop. He looks for the best he can find, and he eventually finds them―and they misunderstand him completely.

106

God only knows if I’ve been a bit too sensitive about not wanting a single follower. If I died right now, or, be�er yet, if I were put to death for my idea and therefore avoided all the difficulties that accompany having followers, they will nevertheless show up in the next generation if the whole thing isn’t to disappear completely. And am I in any way too good to suffer and bear all the difficulties associated with followers, who always more or less mess up the idea[?]

107

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

61

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 107–108

5

10

15

20

108

30

35

1849

It’s as if I simply loved myself, or at least prioritized a love of myself, in the idea that my life must be an expression of the idea, not thinking about the fact that if the truth, or something true, is to make it into the world, it will have to bear being shared with others, which will make it become less true, and bear the fact that everyone who gets it secondhand will taint it. But shouldn’t one love them so much that one says it to them straightforwardly[?] Take the supreme example: if Xt, who was truth, had remained absolutely resolute about not exposing the truth to any kind of misinterpretation, refused any kind of accommodation, then his entire life would have been one single monologue. The thing is, I have a deep understanding of the fact that truth gains nothing with followers; rather it loses something with each follower it gains. My life’s guiding thought is the strictest consequence of this fact. And I don’t think any egoism resides here. First of all, one must remember my melancholia―the thought that I’m a penitent. Furthermore, the alternative (about accommodation) hadn’t occurred to me at all before now. Thirdly, why do people maintain the illusory thought that everyone is Xn? That kind of illusion can only be dispelled with an indirect polemic, and that was my thought. That’s why I had to be so consistent, and by being consistent, why I had to remain so inflexible.

The “establishment” is an altogether unchristian concept. But it’s even more ridiculous to hear the establishment boast when it compares itself with “the sects”―because there is indeed infinitely more Christian truth in the heresies of the sects than in the drowsiness, sluggishness, and laziness of the establishment. And it’s even more ridiculous that the establishment appeals to the N.T. Yes, when Xnty itself was “a sect” (that’s what it was called back then) and then had an awakening (also of “truth”) itself, then it was a ma�er of warning against sects. But a sect always has an advantage over the establishment because it has an awakening of truth, i.e., it has the truth that lies in an “awakening”―even if what the sect takes to be truth is erroneous and heretical.

57

58

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 109–111

1849 62

1

a

(the absolutely superior one)

In a sense, Christ didn’t need to stress it as a duty that the greatest is the servant―it lies in the very nature of superiority. When a pers. is a bit superior to another, he’s the master and ruler. If he’s absolutely superior, he’s the servant; for then, in relation to the other, hea will be dealing with his relationship to God, and then he’ll be the servant. The less significant the other is, the more one becomes the servant. Therefore a humble woman (precisely because of her humility) can make a far superior man the servant, while he, in relation to someone else, e.g., a stronger man, is master; for in this case, the God relationship isn’t as prominent. If Xt hadn’t been God, he wouldn’t absolutely have been the servant, either.

109

The corrupt and demoralizing aspect of the way the daily press imparts information is not so much the fact that it says something false, but rather that it offers a depraved guarantee that there are a horde of people saying the same things and making the same judgments. For the very fact that it’s printed in a paper is the guarantee. And unfortunately peop. aren’t worried about whether they tell the truth or not; they’re worried instead that they might be the only ones to hold a given opinion. The guarantee thus serves as perverting training wheels that assist peop. toward greater and greater depravation―and that is a far greater misfortune than the mere fact that the press publishes something untrue. The daily press, like all journalism, is more or less impersonal communication designed to guarantee that almost everyone thinks the same way. This doesn’t have to be expressed explicitly in the paper; for the fact that it’s printed there is itself the guarantee.

110

“Concerned Truth”

111

is the truth that, eternally certain of being truth, is essentially occupied with imparting it to others, concerned that they accept it for their own benefit, though the truth does not, in fact, need them. This is the dialectic. Charlatans and poseurs need to impart information in order to convince themselves. Only purely intellectual pursuits are occupied with discovering truth. Concerned

5

10

20

25

30

35

63

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 111–113

5

10

1849

truth is sufficiently certain of being truth, but is concerned about imparting it.a This is Xnty. It goes without saying that as long as a pers. struggles to find truth, his life can’t express concerned truth, for his one and only concern is to find truth. This is the case with my pursuits, which, in great part, are also purely intellectual and have been incapable of a concern for imparting truth to others because I myself was in pursuit and readily perceived what is only all too true[:] that to take others along with me simply delays the project. The desire to be accompanied by others in order to find the truth is something u�ered by idiots. In Xnty, the relationship is quite different: out of concern for the other, to be willing to endure the pain and suffering implicit in imparting the truth to them.

15

112

20

The comment in the Wolf. Fragments (vom Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger § 30) that Christ used the words [“]the kingdom of heaven,[”] which the Jews understood as an earthly kingdom, is right. A kind of ambiguity lies in the fact that Xt alludes to something completely different with those words. I have shown how this ought to be understood in the first of the two essays by H. H. It belongs with the concept of “sacrifice,” with this ambiguity[:] anger was incited against him the moment it became clear that he had understood the ma�er spiritually.

25

113

30

35

64

There’s rlly some truth to what Lessing argues somewhere (in le�ers to Mendelssohn)[:] we really can’t admire the heroic―we feel alienated by it. That’s absolutely right. Admiration insinuates itself, sees its chance, so to speak, in the suffering of great people. But there is no passive suffering in the heroic. In a way, then, admiration has been fooled. Human admiration is love of self: when great people suffer, admiration wells up. But the heroic doesn’t reveal any suffering; it’s more powerful than suffering―and thus admiration is absent. It leaves peop. rather cold when it’s a current event, and it alienates when it’s in the past. (In a sense, my own life sheds light on the ma�er. If I had been the passive object of a�ack by the vulgar masses, ah, how

59

a

because it knows others are in need of truth.

1

60

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 113–115

1849

admiration for me would have grown. But the fact that I myself demanded it offended peop.; they were alienated by such a move, it was beyond their comprehension. I could have reasonably demanded that others appreciate the nobility and the selfless sacrifice inherent in my actions―and yet it is perhaps an unreasonable demand; for it’s all beyond their comprehension; for them, it borders on madness.) Another question is the degree to which Christianity incorporates the heroic. I deny that it does and have shown it (e.g., in a discourse, “The Gospel of Sufferings,” no. VII). The suffering Christian is no doubt heroic, that is, it isn’t apparent that he suffers; but his relationship to God means that his suffering is nevertheless seen. In the end, he struggles with God―with responsibility―and that’s where he suffers, suffering in fear and trembling. If the relationship to God were absent, then Christianity would be heroism. But as it is, Christianity is not under the heroic, but above it; it is first heroic, then a suffering again. But one must be careful with this dialectic; for otherwise, one babbles like priests, who transform Xnty to sobs and tears.

5

10

15

20

1

5

a

a thought that I had indeed entertained early on, which has plagued me ever since

The thought of reaching one’s potential―and then, then to break it off absolutely in order to tend to myself; to reach my potential qua auth. and then to break it off absolutely and never again set pen to paper; this thought a (even if I could do it) is by no means a religious thought, but a proud, worldly thought. Religiously speaking, the demand is this: to endure in suffering. Imparting truth is a religious action because it is considered a duty to expose oneself to the suffering tied to proclaiming the truth. Ah, thinking, that is my joy; writing sustains my life. But to surrender[?] Yes, that’s painful. I see very clearly (though perhaps my melancholia darkens everything even more) that I expose myself to opposition more and more. Pecuniary sacrifices are becoming heavier and heavier; to impart in order to learn something is impossible because I’m far too advanced for that. It’s all the more clear that my desires and duties force my resolve: I can do no other.

114

25

30

35

65

My misfortune qua auth. in Denmark was that I am prodigiously out of proportion. Again and again R. Nielsen repeated

115

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 115–117

5

10

116 15

20

1849

that he’d understood this. Then he wanted to get creative. What did he do? He erected a great edifice of sorts alongside [what I had done], using everything I’d produced as well as what he’d received in abundance from our conversations; he’s nearly silent about the former and completely silent about the la�er―and now the whole thing is entrenched more firmly than ever, if that’s possible. But there is one deception I don’t believe he’s engaged in. I don’t think he’s rlly been able to understand how deceitful his behavior can be. He seems not to be capable of gaining any perspective at all.

Happy are those who can think and be inspired by the thought that Xnty has gone from triumph to triumph from century to century, happy are those who can thus be inspired without once being perturbed by the objection about whether present-day Xnty is an expression for how much more triumphant Xnty is now than in the beginning! Ah, I can only understand Xnty as having been truest in the first generation, among the contemporaries, and less and less true with each generation. In general I can’t understand any alternative to the view that every thought (the truth of which is a ma�er of inwardness) is truest in the one in whom it first arose and therea�er becomes continually more and more untrue each time it is propagated further.

25

117

30

35

Hum. beings cannot grasp the idea that someone might voluntarily put himself in danger, knowing that he might end up suffering as a result. They think that someone who exposes himself to danger does so in the belief that he will be victorious. So when someone who believes he will end up suffering, really suffers, they busy themselves saying: It’s his own fault, his pride, etc. This suffering is also demonstrated in Xt’s life. The way they said that he wanted to tear down the temple and build it up in 3 days is reminiscent of the great things he said about himself. But they were wrong―he really did tear down the temple: his death on the cross was the downfall of Judaism; he tore down the temple at that very moment; and he built it up again in three days

61

62

1

a

vom Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 117–118

1849

because his resurrection (on the third day) was the beginning of Xnty or, rather, or the Xn temple rests on it as on a foundation.

66

What was it that explains the transformation in the apostles, who just a few days earlier were abandoned and disheartened and suddenly gained the faith and courage and heart to risk life and all for Xt’s sake? The answer one usually hears: the communication of the Holy Spirit at the feast of Pentecost and therefore this transformation proves that a miracle must have intervened. But it’s time for another side of the ma�er to be brought forward. As long as Xt was with them, they could not entirely renounce their earthly expectations (as Xt said: he must leave in order that the Spirit could come). When he then died the death of the cross and was buried, then things got serious for them; every earthly hope was now lost―and here lies their rebirth. Xt’s solemn assurances about his suffering and death don’t help; the fact that he’s the one saying it, standing there with them in his own person, is precisely what hinders them from really believing it. Things must get serious. Here one sees the difference betw. direct and indirect communication: when he really was dead, it was indirect communication. One sees from this the implausibility of the objection (found in the Wolf. Fragm.a I, § 32 and 33) that the apostles had changed their view of him and that it was only a�er his death that they made him the redeemer of the world rather than the earthly messiah that they took him to be. This is certainly true, but the fault was not Xt’s: he had said it to them quite clearly, but they couldn’t understand it. This shows that Spirit can only be communicated indirectly. As long as he was personally with them, no ma�er how clearly he said it they nevertheless misunderstood it―it was not until he had died that they themselves became spirit and understood him. The situation has to be there. And so it is for everyone. There is a difference betw. understanding in the manner of possibility (an understanding that is always a misunderstanding) and understanding in reality. No ma�er how self-sacrificing the plan someone might have thought up, as long as it has not become a ma�er of reality, of seriousness, he cannot be sure that there isn’t some surreptitious earthly hope involved, that he might nevertheless maybe triumph in this world. He has not yet become spirit. In “possibility,” it is impos-

118 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 118–121

67 5

1849

sible to become spirit. Only when it becomes a ma�er of reality and every earthly hope is really lost is he reborn so as to understand in an entirely true manner what he had indeed nevertheless understood right from the start but in such a way that a misunderstanding slumbered within. Thus spirit gathers itself together as spirit and now has purely spiritual powers. Perhaps things looked easier in possibility, but really it becomes easier in reality because Spirit is now really and purely at one with itself.

10

119

15

20

This too belongs to the nonsense that a resolute man must endure: if he lets others notice that he’s experiencing the slightest bit of pain, then they instantly beli�le everything he’s about with a rhetorical ploy, saying, If he’s really set on it then he ought to be content with the inner satisfaction it gives. As if it were that easy to be spirit at every moment and as if it wasn’t true that, viewed as a whole, he had in fact been firm in his resolution― even if he suffered for a moment―which was even the case with Xt. It is essentially envy to come up with this kind of objection, which peop. are certainly also habituated to by the slush they get served on Sundays, where everything is decided just like that: He made the great resolve and carried it out―Amen. It all happens in the space of 48 minutes.

25

120

30

121

35

What Luther says (in his sermon on this gospel text) is right, that it is a powerful word from God: God so loved the world― for “the world” is just what repels God, but this is said precisely to show that none are excluded except for those who exclude themselves.

On the other hand, it is Luther’s own saying that faith is not a ma�er for everyone, which is how he translates 2 Thess 3:2. But this facilely defines faith as a kind of geniality. I also remember how Schelling said in his lectures that faith is a form of geniality and quoted Luther.

63

64

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 122

1849 68

[a]

122

Cf. this journal pp. 217ff.

NB. No, no, I can’t and it is indeed almost an impossibility that I should now move up even higher and more boldly than when I had the bene�t of having a fortune. No, no, if I don’t have any fortune I must �nd security by getting a position or in some other way, as I always thought I would―but I am not capable of more, that is, going further out would mean tempting God. What I put down about myself in NB10 is entirely true. I need favorable conditions in order to rise up without regard to consequences. I am essentially a poet, a genius. I am not the one who directs the whole show, it is not my intention, etc., but I am used as long as I remain bound by my melancholia and consciousness of sin to the hand of the power above. I myself am like a pure re�ection, that is, sheer retrospection. To take it all upon myself in a direct way runs counter to self-denial. What has shaken me again and again and what continues to shake me despite all my religious efforts is the idea of stepping forward in the persona of an author in such a way that I commit myself to a certain standard for an extended period, perhaps my whole life, and to do so precisely at the moment when I must get used to taking care of �nancial matters.

5

10

15

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 123

1849

65

70

123

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

So. Just as the river Guadalquibir plunges underground at one point and then emerges later, I must now plunge into pseudonymity; but I have now also understood where I will emerge again in my own name. And what this really comes down to is to do something in the line of looking for a position and then traveling. 1) The three small ethical-religious treatises will remain anonymous. That was already decided upon. 2) The Sickness unto Death becomes pseudonymous and in that regard needs to be proofed to make sure my name, etc., doesn’t appear in it. 3) The three works: “Come unto Me All You,” “Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended,” “From On High He Will Draw All unto Himself”a become pseudonymous. Or all three in one volume under the common title Practice in Christianity. An Experiment by―(or each by itself). They will need to be proofed to make sure nothing personal, my name, etc., is included, which is the case in the third one. 4) The texts called The Point of View for My Work as an Auth., A Note, Three Notes,b “Armed Neutrality” cannot be published. All this productivity will be properly pseudonymous. For it has the tension and contraction of the dialectical in relation to the doctrine of sin and redemption, and that is where I then begin in my own name with a simple edifying discourse. But it is one thing when this kind of dialectic appears pseudonymously and something else when it appears with my name, in character, as a finale to all my striving. In that case, there is no hurry about publishing it. If it were to be in character, though, and as a finale, then it would have to happen as quickly as possible, something that has troubled me fearfully and something that has now almost become impossible, because today, June 4th, I spoke with Reitzel, who said he didn’t dare take on anything new at the press. All in all, this fellow has been a frightful nuisance with all his moaning, which is nevertheless probably exaggerated. What has happened here is a ba�le of ideas. In the real world, this entire ma�er about whether to publish them under my own name or not would probably be a bagatelle. But in the world of my ideas, it is a monstrously stressful problem that is like everything to me[:] neither untruthfully to hold myself back nor untruthfully to go too far, but truthfully to understand myself, to remain true to myself. I have struggled and suffered fearfully. But the one who fights for this [“]You shall,[”] as I have done, must also suffer at this point. But it is nevertheless certain that I have sometimes been not far from forcing this [“]You shall[”] in an almost melancholic and foolish manner. But now I understand myself. [“]You shall[”] is eternally true, but it is no less true―and also a [“]You shall[”]―that with [the help of] God, you shall understand your limits and shall not go beyond them, and you shall let go of wanting to. But, merciful God, how I have suffered and how I have struggled. Yet I am comforted by the thought that the God of love will let this too serve for my good; and in a certain sense it comforts me that I have endured this suffering, for it is precisely in this suffering that I became sure about how I am to make my next move. My misfortune has always been that it is so difficult for me to take an appointment; my melancholia, which is almost like a silent mental breakdown, has constantly hindered me, as too has my consciousness of sin. This has constantly helped me to take risks, for it gave

66

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 123

1849

me the assurance that this was nevertheless not vanity or anything of the sort that motivated me. But in God’s name I must now move in that direction. Strangely enough, by the way[:] I have recorded much in Journal NB10 as well as in this journal. But there’s something wri�en on a loose piece of paper that I’ve kept along with these journals that I haven’t dared record, something I’ve nevertheless taken to be the most decisive of all, and which is also among the earliest, and this is exactly what I’ll conclude with. a b

See the a�ached NB. Cf. this journal p. 157.

71 5

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 124

1849

74

124

5

10

15

belongs with Journal NB11 p. 127 If “From On High He Will Draw All unto Himself” is to be pseudonymous, then the first discourse must be taken out because that is the one I delivered in the Church of Our Lady. Or else a comment along these lines: [“I ought to] just as well acknowledge the truth straightaway and without reserve: This discourse is a kind of plagiarism. It is a discourse that Mag. Kierkegaard delivered in the Church of Our Lady. I believe it an almost exact reproduction and I ask the Magister to forgive me for publishing it, but the discourse has essentially set the tone for this entire work and so, in a sense, it belongs to it. The Hr. Mag., who so o�en has had to accept the fact that his work is used by others, will also have to accept this.[”]―Then I could reply that I rlly have nothing against it; but because the discourse has turned up in this connection, it has also become something quite different from what it was. But perhaps it would be be�er to leave it out; such a joke can easily be misunderstood.

67

68

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 124

1849

First part of NB11:123, with NB11:124, the “a�ached” piece of paper mentioned in one of the footnotes to NB11:123.

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 125

1849

69

75

125

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

To be written lengthways in the journal. If I had the means, I would risk going further, not in order to get myself put to death (that would be sinful), but nevertheless with that possibility before me, in the belief that eventually my life might take a still higher turn. I can’t do it now and I can’t justify the kind of risk that would direct me toward a life in which I wouldn’t rlly recognize myself, whereas I utterly recognize myself in the kind of persecution I’ve suffered, if one can call it that. From earliest childhood, I’ve had a premonition in my soul that things would turn out this way and that, in a sense, I would be regarded as something except[ional] with ceremonial courtesy, and yet be laughed at and be regarded as a bit bizarre. Now I can’t. Every part of my deeper self protests against me: the notion of simply being an auth., seeking a position, practicing the art of breaking it off, all the more because it was my intention―never as de�nitively as last year, when I made a bit of money from selling the house (I didn’t once rent rooms―I only did that long afterward)―to get serious about stopping and then to travel. And the Friday discourses have constantly appealed to me as the place to �nish. Perhaps I should have done so; I suffered much in 48. But I also learned much, and would scarcely have understood myself to such an extent if I’d stopped. Now I can’t. To suddenly suffer a severe �nancial blow, perhaps as I was about to take the most decisive step―and then perhaps not to be put to death after all, and to mess everything up, myself included: No, I can’t do it. As I see it, I would be tempting God if I, accustomed as I am to having money, were now, in face of this new danger, to risk everything on a scale I haven’t previously attempted. In addition, I have a suspicion about myself now, which I wouldn’t have if I still had money: Is this martyrlike impatience connected to another kind of impatience, the lack of patience as I wince at the humbling effort of taking steps to seek a post, and at the humiliation involved with it all and the entire way of life that goes with it. Furthermore, I have perhaps a little ennui. Perhaps it’s also an exaggeration when I say I’ve been mistreated so badly that I might rather have been put to death. Finally, there is the big question about whether it might be the case that―precisely because of my superior intellectual capacities―I’m intended to go on living. For the more scholarship, etc., there is, the less effective it is to work in that way. Finally, it is part of being human to never quite achieve the highest ideal he has envisioned―patience and humility in this case. But he will be wounded by this ideal―as I have, by coming so close to it in thought. But at least I’m moving in that direction. [a]

This is the loose piece of paper mentioned in this journal (NB11) p. 129

La�er part of NB11:123, with NB11:125, the sheet of paper mentioned in the last paragraph of NB11:123. Kierkegaard intended to copy it “lengthways in the journal” but never did.

72

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 126–127

1849 76

1

[a]

A mo�o relating to the three writings: Practice in Christianity.

The mo�o found in an entry in one of the later journals that was supposed to appear in the published version of the writings (Practice in Christianity) is true of my endeavors: I do not feel strong enough to be like you in such a way as to die for you or for your cause; I am content to do something less: to worshipfully thank you for being willing to die for me.

126

5

10

They take from Judaism anything that has to do with earthly promises, promises for this life; they teach that one should seek these things in a Jewish way and, in a Jewish way, they see proof of God’s grace in the fact that someone is rich, happily married, blessed in an earthly sense―and if this fails, they turn to another medicine: Xnty’s promises for eternity. And this mixture is said to be Xnty! They simply forget that Xnty’s promises for eternity are scorching because they call for such complete renunciation of the temporal, that Xnty teaches that suffering in temporal life is the very sign of God’s grace. They forget that Judaism’s idea of eternity was weak because it promised so much in this life. Take the gospel about the rich man. The only thing missing―though, on the other hand, it has to be presented like that in order to illuminate Xnty― is that he felt completely assured of being in a state of grace vis-à-vis God. And why? Because everything worked out for him. Luther also takes note of this comment in his sermon on the gospel about the rich man and the beggar. The fact of the ma�er is that the Jews, and peop. in genrl, make God too pe�y, not sufficiently spirit. He immediately compensates the weak and the sensuous: he expresses his wrath and displeasure immediately―[but] he doesn’t contend with superior souls in that way; “spirit” cannot do ba�le like that. “Spirit” must make manifest that earthly concerns

127

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 127–129

77

5

10

128 15

20

129 25

30

35

1849

73

are a ma�er of indifference and it must show that the distinguishing mark of the God-fearing person is the fact that he suffers, and the mark of the ungodly person is the fact that all his undertakings succeed here in the world. As if in a magical state, everything goes right for him; he becomes more and more secure and finally entirely secure in the illusion that he is in a state of grace vis-à-vis God, God’s favorite―then he dies and goes to hell. Hmnly speaking, it’s almost as if God is too cruel to the ungodly person by le�ing everything go right for him.

It isn’t difficult for hum. beings to understand Xnty; but it is difficult for them to understand the degree of self-containment and [self-]denial Xnty calls for. In this respect, established Xndom is of service because it confirms brilliantly that one can be Xn―and also be worldly in spite of it all. It is dangerous to affix this self-denial to Xnty― and then to contend with those who assert that they know very well what Xnty is.

Text for a Friday Sermon Just this verse for the gospel about the tax collector and the Pharisee: but the tax collector stood far away, by himself, and dared not even li� up his eyes but said: God be merciful to me, a sinner. You, however, are nearer―You are about to walk up to the altar, even if you are far away. But the altar is in a sense the place where one is nearest to God. “He went away justified.” This will be used in conclusion.

[a]

By virtue of the inwardness formed by his consciousness of sin (and this inwardness accounts for the distance), the Xn stands even further off―and yet he is as near to God at the foot of the altar as it is possible to be. This distance and nearness, while the Pharisee was near in intrusive presumptuousness―and far off.

1

5

10

74

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 130–131

1849

In relation to the highest form of self-denial, to what degree has someone the right to say: I can go no further or I am unable to go that far (that is, when it is not a question of natural disposition, genius, capacity, etc.)? The ma�er is quite simple. Because everyone’s life must be understood in terms of striving and one can’t do everything ein zwei drei, it may be entirely true, and true in a God-fearing sense (the opposite, indeed, is presumptuous), that someone can say: at this moment I can go no further. But he shall admit it to himself, make no a�empt to forget it or distract himself from it; it is to spur him on, to help him go further by keeping him alert and striving.

130

78 5

10

15

In the domain of genius, the domain where one is defined by one’s nature, in the domain of the aesthetic, what counts is whether or not one can. In the domain of ethics: that one ought. This is why ethics relates to what is universally hum. while the aesthetic relates to the difference betw. one pers. and another. It would be self-contradictory on the part of ethics to speak about ought if it was not the case that every pers. was in possession of the capacity to be able to do it if only he wanted to. Thus, in relation to ethics, nothing is conditional; it is the unconditional [“]ought[”] that tolerates no conditions because it presupposes no conditions. The aesthetic presupposes conditions and is only unconditional if the condition is unconditionally present, while ethics is unconditional because it presupposes no conditions and is thus altogether unconditional or unconditionally unconditional.

8 ein zwei drei] German, one, two, three.

131

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 132

1849

75

79

132

5

10

15

NB. Much of what I’ve been tormenting myself about―whether it is permissible to be a poet― could very well be seen from another perspective as a melancholic demand to be more than human. I have had the bene�t of having money and have therefore recognized that I was not a witness to the truth in a stricter sense―now I no longer have that bene�t: [but] this doesn’t change things; such bene�ts are not at all a plus but a minus. Now (as was my idea from the very �rst moment) I am thinking in another way about securing my means. This is entirely consistent. I cannot play the role of someone exceptional, I cannot defend such a step―I am an inspector and a poet. My incognito remains more or less in place. I have reached the limits of my individual capacities, which is why the struggle is so dif�cult, lest I go too far or do not go far enough. I think this will be the case if I seek a position and publish the �nished material pseudonymously. All of this is worked out in detail in Journal NB10, however, which I return to again after almost having wanted to go beyond my limits; but this suffering is precisely the kind of boundary dispute that, ethically, ought to be taken as seriously as possible. I have never, ever, not from the very outset, imagined that I would continue primarily to be an author for even a moment longer than I had the means to support myself in it.

76

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 133–135

1849 80

To live as do the lily and the bird isn’t the poetic way to live (it’s stupid of the philistines to reproach “the poet” for supposedly doing so―instead of earning his living, etc.). Oh, no, it is precisely the true way to live. But the misfortune is that “the poet” doesn’t do it, only the apostle does. The poetic life consists of securing an income in one way or another, and then preaching, talking, writing poems about living as do the lily and the bird, as the apostle does. The philistine complaint about the poet could gain a semblance of the truth only to the extent that the poetic is conceived of as nothing but play. For the way of the apostle is to live as do the lily and the bird with regard to making a living―and then to be absorbed in thought about the eternal, working for the eternal goal.

133

5

10

15

20

The sinner’s relation to Xt develops like the love of a woman for a man. At first there is pain, a kind of suffering―for the feminine has not yet yielded, it has a selfish element and thus shudders at the idea of a man’s superiority. So too does the sinner shudder at the first thought of coming so close to the holy one, to be before him at every moment. This, then, is still a selfish element in the sinner, and this is where offense really comes in. As soon as he has yielded entirely, his most blessed comfort will be having Xt with him at every moment―his savior and atoner.

134

With regard to ideality, one can learn something from people at these ages: the child, the youth, the young girl, the elderly―one can learn nothing in this regard from the man of affairs or the busy

135

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 135–138 81

housewife[. A]nd why not? [B]ecause they are essentially occupied with finite goals. This demonstrates, then, that ideality has a more abstract relation to reality, it is at a tangent.

5

136

10

15

A woman’s reflections are almost always too overwhelming for her, which is why it is so dangerous for a woman to acquire the capacity to reflect. This is how things o�en go with female reflection: if she has been successful in one way or another, has overcome herself, she can’t stop gazing on her victory―and so she trips up. A man’s character is more essential to him; and character is not as much a ma�er of succeeding, but of remaining upright a�er a success, of maintaining oneself in character. The female way is to endure, looking forward to the moment that is sure to come when she can breathe freely again. It is this moment that is dangerous. Character is rlly continuity.

20

137

25

30

138 35

82

On Sunday, Visby accidentally hit upon a remark that wasn’t infelicitous. It was the gospel of Nicodemus. The wind blows where it will and you hear it whistle. He then preached on how you shouldn’t try to conceptualize ma�ers and said something along these lines: the more you try to grasp it, the more you’re only able to hear it whistle. But Visby hasn’t really any insight, he just speaks any old way; but this is also what makes him refreshing and why he is a priest still worth listening to.

Hmnly speaking, it looks like this. Earthly life has sorrows and troubles aplenty (sickness, poverty, etc.); let us help one another as much as we can, all praise and honor to the one who finds new ways

1849

[a]

77

In one of my very earliest diaries (before I got my degree) it says: Xt is a tangent. This is no unfortunate remark. What is a tangent? It is a straight line that touches a circle at one single point. But that is also how the absolute is [concentrated at] a single point.

1

5

78

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 138–140

1849

and means of doing so―and then Xnty comes along, bringing only another source of need and misery: the truth―that one must suffer for the truth.

The gospel about the great supper (2nd Sunday a�er Trinity) begins with one of the guests saying, Blessed are those who feast in the kingdom of heaven―which gives Xt occasion to tell the parable that shows that he [the guest] is scarcely likely to feast in the kingdom of heaven. Hmnly speaking, it’s rather harsh. In his sermon, Luther himself draws a�ention to the rudeness. The same gospel presents marriage―as an excuse for no longer seeking God’s kingdom. In the sermon on this gospel text, Luther presents a peculiar proof for the immortality of the soul, though he doesn’t emphasize it himself. He explains that Xt himself is the food, is the supper, is the meal. If we now feed on this meal, then, even if we die, we nevertheless cannot remain in death because―what feeds us lives. In other cases, one argues that one lives because one eats; here one argues that one lives because one’s food lives. There is something peculiar about this syllogism.

The Middle Ages took a wrong turn in believing that it was a transgression for a priest to marry. Then Luther came―and got married[.] Now it’s gone so far that it’s regarded as a transgression if a priest doesn’t marry. And it’s hard to be a priest without being married: the congregation won’t have any confidence in him as a pastor, etc., if he isn’t married.―And people say this openly in the same way that they say that “families” would rather have a married man as their physician; they’re afraid that an unmarried person will be lecherous. In the Middle Ages, the single state corresponded to the idea of holiness (in principle, ignoring the possibility that there were also some lecherous characters); today, being unmarried arouses a suspicion that the person is lecherous and unsafe to have around wives and daughters. The world has truly progressed in spiritual terms[!] In the Middle Ages they had most confidence in the unmarried; they thought that the unmarried status conferred a guarantee―this

139

10

15

20

140

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 140–142 83

1849

is a syllogism of spirit. Now they have most confidence in those who are married; they think that the fact that he is married means he won’t seduce their wives and daughters: this is a syllogism of the flesh.

5

141

10

15

142 20

25

30

35

What lies in a single line in the first treatise by H. H., right at the start of the Introduction, is shocking, a prodigiously compressed melancholia. As a child he was already an old man.― ―So he lived on, he never became younger. This almost insane inversion, a child, who never became younger; a child, who was already an old man and never became younger. Oh, what a dreadful expression for a dreadful suffering. Ah, but there is nevertheless a difference; when he becomes an old man, if we can assume that he does, then he is by no means old. For to be old like an old man who is old is not the same as being old like someone who as a child was old like an old man.

Ah, what a weight! As I’ve so o�en said about myself, like the princess in 1001 Nights, I saved my life by telling stories, that is, by creating. Creating was my life. I was able to conquer it all, all of it―prodigious melancholia, inner sufferings of a sympathetic kind―when I was able to produce. Then the world stormed in on me; mistreatment that would have rendered others unproductive only made me more productive; and everything, all of it, was forgo�en, it had no power over me when I was able to create. And now, now I must give it up; I can’t afford it, I can’t afford to work diligently, let alone to work with extra diligence! Ah, what an absurd collision. But the fact that I can’t afford it can make me unproductive, for I now regard it as my duty to become unproductive, I must use ethical means to prevent myself from becoming productive. But how I suffer! My melancholia rises up against me, my inner torments come to life and grow powerful, the mistreatment and opposition I get from the world seem unendurable to me―in short I lack what compensates for all of it, I lack the chance to create. In the end I’ll have to allow myself to produce a li�le bit in order to find some relief. But it won’t amount to anything, for

79

80

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 142–145

1849

I don’t dare start on a big work, and that kind of relief has no effect; the only genuine relief comes by moving forward with the steady impetus of ongoing creativity.

84

None of the objections to Xnty ma�er at all to a person who is truly conscious of being a sinner, who then truly experiences faith in the forgiveness of sins, in this name and in this faith is saved from the preceding state of sin. The only objection imaginable in this case would be this one: yes, but it’s also possible that you might have been saved in some other way. But to this he has no reply. It’s like being in love―if someone says, yes, but you might also have fallen in love with some other girl, then he must reply: I don’t know about that, I know only one thing: that this is my beloved. As soon as a lover is able to answer the objection, he is eo ipso not in love. And as soon as a believer can answer to this objection, he is eo ipso not a believer.

143

One sees the martyrdom of being a Xn here as well. Tax collectors and sinners are peop. who are incapable of giving anything in return, so that to love them is in truth unselfish love: and yet Xt is reproached for doing so; he must suffer because he is truly loving. By loving those who can give something in return, the great and the esteemed, one wraps oneself in the esteem of others; this is what the world calls love. The relative quantities may vary, but in one way or another some small profit has to be involved in love or else the world will not consider it to be love and will make it even less profitable by punishing it as if it were a fault.

144

10

15

20

25

30

1 Tim 5:11 seems to contradict v. 14. In the former it says that the young widows who oppose Xt out of sensuous passion want to be married; in the la�er: I (Paul) think the young widows ought to be married. But if they want it themselves, everything seems to be in order. I don’t entirely understand this passage, unless I take it to be the most obvious argument against the erotic, so that wanting to 15 eo ipso] Latin, by that very fact.

145

35

85

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 145–147

5

146

10

15

20

25

147

30

35

86

1849

marry (falling in love, the erotic) is seen as blameworthy, and the Christian position is the polar opposite: they ought to marry, but not by unifying what they want with what they ought, not as if there were a harmony between desire and obligation, but in such a way that obligation is opposed to desire in the strongest way.

I won’t deny that I was painfully affected when I noticed how Mynster suddenly hit upon the idea of taking Goldschmidt as his protégé―despite the fact that he both thinks he caused a great deal of damage and that he lacks character―simply because he had a�acked certain people Mynster doesn’t like. But this too shows a lack of character. But it’s like that with everybody here in Denmark: their judgment is entirely governed by the present moment. One might have expected this from someone like Sibbern, who has become an empty-head in recent years―but not from Mynster. The fact that Mynster mentioned him by name and position, a Jew in parliament, doesn’t mean anything because talking about someone in that way changes nothing. But just look at Goldschmidt: he’s beaming with joy simply because his “eminence” has named him; and G. also suggested that Mynster is an eminent stylist. And God knows what G. has read of his―his sermons perhaps? And this is the same G. who worked the mob up against me because I had thanked Kts Inc. for what he said about Fear and Trembling!

My response to the problem that Xt’s second coming is prophesied as impending and yet still hasn’t happened is to draw a�ention to the fact that it is a subjectively true u�erance. And not only must Xt speak like this, and the apostles as well―which they did―but also every true Xn. That is, it is so agonizing to be a true Xn that it couldn’t be endured if one didn’t expect Xt’s second coming to happen at any time now. Agony and suffering engender a necessary illusion. One can therefore say the obverse, that anyone who doesn’t talk like this, but in some other way, who expects Xt’s second coming in many centuries, sometime in the future, or is interested in proving that it didn’t happen as Xt predicted, is no true Xn. One isn’t Xn without the pain and agony

81

82

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 147–148

1849

of being a true Xn in this world; and if one experiences the pain and agony, then the illusion is necessary. Take a girl in love, who is separated from her beloved. The more she loves and the more she feels the pangs of separation, the more these pangs feed her hope of seeing him again. She hopes to see him again soon, living like this for many years perhaps, yet constantly hoping that the time is at hand when she will see him again. As soon as she starts talking about seeing him again sometime, in many years, etc., it means that she’s no longer in love; it usually means she wants to arrange a new marriage. Ah, it’s such a beautiful thing in our language that “nourishment” is related to being “near”; the greater the need, the nearer the nourishment; the nourishment is in the need, and if it isn’t actually the need itself, it is what is nearest to it. If the girl who is in love really is in love, then seeing him again is near at hand; if she is not completely in love―then she might not see him again for a long time. This is the only kind of polemical response one can give to objections, to a�ack the objector from behind. If a girl puts on the appearance of being in love and says, I long to see him again but it looks as if it won’t happen for a long time, then there’s no reason to debate with her; you say: Thank you, my girl, this shows me that you’re not in love. So too if someone questions Xt’s assertion that his return is imminent. One says to him: You must admit that you’re either a believer or you’re not. If it’s the la�er, I reply: What does any of this have to do with you[?] It concerns you just as li�le as being in love concerns a third party. If you say that you are a believer, you who nevertheless make these same objections, then I say to you that you aren’t a believer: It’s proven in the way you speak.

There is something to the inverse syllogism that Fenelon proposes somewhere. People say there are many false miracles, all pagan religions also have miracles, etc. ergo the Christian ones are false, too. He turns it around: he concludes that the Christian miracles are miracles. A universal hum. error like this must have some basis in truth; this truth is the miracle of Christianity. Frantz Baader, too, ni fallor, has concluded that, given all the incarnations in paganism, ergo the Christian incarnation is true. 39 ni fallor] Latin, if I am not mistaken.

5

10

15

20

25

30

148 35

87 40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 148–149

5

1849

And therein also lies the truth: untruth contains an impulse toward truth, a nisus. This is something I’ve drawn a�ention to elsewhere: it is consoling that there are so many words to signify drivel, crock, blather, etc., because otherwise one would have to fear that everything was blather, but now there’s at least hope that something is meaningful. It would also be possible to conclude that, given the many words for drivel, blather, etc., ergo everything is blather. But the alternative conclusion is more correct.―

10

149

15

What one reads in the Wol�. Fragments (vom Zwecke Jesus und seiner Jünger § 54. p. 235) regarding Peter’s denial isn’t silly: the twelve thrones on which they wanted to sit were now cast down at a single stroke and then no one wanted to sit at his right hand or his le�. All in all, this and the following § lack neither boldness nor ingenuity, and by a scoffer.

2 nisus] Latin, striving, drive.

83

84

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 150

1849 88

If the three texts are published as one (Practice in Christianity. An Attempt), “Armed Neutrality” could well be published as an appendix, but naturally pseudonymously by the same pseudonym. A pseudonym is excellent precisely in order to identify a standpoint, an attitude, a position. He is a poetic personage. This is not the same as if I were to personally declare that this is what I shall �ght for―which could indeed almost become a lifelong obligation and an obligation that could be impossible to satisfy because of external circumstances, e.g., if I had to use the majority of my time in working for a living.

150

5

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 151–152

1849

89

151

5

10

15

It is evident from the pastoral epistles, where Paul simply portrays a Christian teacher’s relation to fellow Christians, that Xnty is much easier and milder when it is not a militant doctrine but rather is the interrelationship of Xns themselves. The aim and tone are therefore that of mild exhortation. But one of the things to be noted here is that, at the time, everything was as it should be for those few Xns, because they were indeed true Xns, or at least close to it. Moreover, the Christian Church itself was still only a li�le colony, like a sect in the world, which helped it remain vigilant. But the moment Xnty triumphed in a worldly sense and everyone became Xn in the ridiculous manner we see now, where a spiritual-worldly authority ensures that every child is baptized―from this moment on, the unconditional polemic target must be the illusion that we are all Xns because of it, and this polemical aim can only be taken more and more rigorously for each century that “established Xndom” remains established, since with each century the illusion becomes stronger.

20

152

25

30

35

90

Here’s something dialectical. It can be a spiritual trial but it can also be true: a person requires too much of God, wants to be spirit to too great an extent, and thus in a certain sense loves God more or otherwise than God can allow or accept, and wants only to be helped spiritually with his sufferings and burdens. There are innocent hum. remedies (recreation, bodily exercise, etc., etc.) that hum. beings ought not to overlook at the risk of requiring too much of God. But this is a dialectical ma�er. For sometimes, in some people, it is hum. torpor that doesn’t want to be spirit and thus they immediately take hold of the easier remedies and say that it’s because they don’t dare require too much of God. But sometimes it can also be a spiritual pride or an overwrought weakness that really does require too much of God and himself. To the first, one must say: No, don’t protect yourself, just endure. To the other: Don’t be presumptuous or don’t torment yourself. It is certain that many, many sufferings and spiritual trials that can be dispelled by hum. remedies can almost become world events if one is able to endure or conquer them by means

85

86

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 152

1849

of spirit. What is demanding is infinite transparency before God. Hum. remedies are all designed to draw the a�ention elsewhere. A wife, for example, is in many ways an excellent diversion, as are mechanical dealings, and social interactions with others. But these are dangerous, like all diversions, for it’s rlly a ma�er of ideality. The truth of ideality is this: every hum. being is the only hum. being―but what relief to know that you are just one among tens, thousands, millions. How easy life finally becomes―almost nothing. Yet, as noted, ways of diverting oneself can be necessary. But it’s evident that the proud and the weak will easily become entangled in these diversions even if, in a spiritual sense, they are permi�ed to. Let us take someone like this. He says: If, then, I am unconditionally to put up with everything, spirit must eventually come to my aid. Or is spirit not the absolute? Indeed it is, but watch out: you are not absolute spirit. On the other hand, he is constantly pained by this idea: If only I can hold on for just a moment more, then perhaps spiritual help will arrive―and this is indeed what I wanted so much. But the response to this must be: [“]Certainly you have a point. It is not praiseworthy of a hum. being to say straightaway, [‘]When I finally find relief, find some pleasure, etc., it doesn’t ma�er whether it’s spiritual assistance or assistance that comes from diversions that lead me away from spirit.[’ ”] But it is nevertheless certain that no one has the absolute right to say: [“]I will absolutely only be helped by spirit,[”] because if he has permission to want something absolutely, it can only be this: to be helped―and to gratefully accept diversions. As a rule, one can certainly endorse pastoral care that confidently prescribes something along these lines: that you shall not protect yourself but endure being and becoming spirit. Gen[uinely] spiritual souls are so rare that they are more appropriately treated as exceptions. The norm is therefore this: recommend diversions only as an exception, but as a rule prescribe spiritual medicines, for the medicine of diversion is something that hum. beings are only too eager to take. The exceptions are the sick for whom one prescribes diversions but the majority are only too robust, so the operation is aimed precisely at making them a li�le bit sick, a li�le bit weak―by prescribing spiritual medicine for them.

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 153–154

1849

91

153 5

10

154

15

20

25

30

35

92

I can repeat Peter’s words [“]Depart from me for I am a sinful man[”] with a quite distinct emphasis. There is something shocking in what I see when I look back and think about what was granted me, what I have achieved―and then that I have been a penitent. Hmnly speaking, it is an almost rebellious idea―and yet that is precisely the idea that has helped me, because if I had been a righteous man I would have recoiled with shock at the idea that the whole thing might possibly be vanity or pride.

Woe, woe to these who have taken Xnty in vain by transforming it into pure tenderness, and to such a degree that it is almost pitiful, as if Xnty didn’t have the strength to come to grips with the proudest defiance, even the devil’s defiance, but had to slink about in tenderness and indulgence in order to be acceptable to hum. beings. Woe, woe to those who have used this to make their own lives so comfortable and pleasant in a worldly sense. Woe to them, and I could also say it in my own interests, for I become all the more insufferable and hated when I bring out the rigorous aspect. And what a strange calling, that it is precisely me that is charged with being [the voice of] rigor, I, who am not far from being a melancholic self-tormentor, constantly in fear and trembling, suffering from a complete lack of physical strength and all that goes along with it: I am to represent rigor, I, who, when it comes to blows, cannot help but hit myself ten times harder than anyone else. And yet in a certain sense one could say that rigor is in good hands for that very reason; it is under the right sort of guarantee because it won’t be taken up as a ma�er of vanity to selfishly tyrannize others. I too am flesh and blood, a pers. who has a great deal of the poet in him. I would be all too happy to avoid saying certain things (which is why I am much inclined to let them lie until a�er my death)―but I am to be [the voice of] rigor; and yet I know that even if it doesn’t affect anyone else, it will affect me, about whom a certain man said early on: there is only one person you’re hard on―yourself. But Mynster has caused irreparable damage. The unfortunate thing is that if you look at him in passing, he erroneously ap-

87

88

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 154–155

1849

pears to be an impressive sovereign-figure, but he is basically a great coward. Yes! God grant he had been a ruler. And this is really what captivated me, so that for a long, long time I imagined that he was the powerful man of will, the ruler―and when one looks closer one sees a cra�y self-indulgent man who has struggled to exert his rule but not qua ruler. What he wants is power―he is willing to cut a deal when it is needed and cleverly keeps himself in power. Merciful God! Is this what it means to govern? In a sense, it can be said to his credit and in his praise that among all those in government, he made it through the year 48 with the least damage, but such an encomium is a satire on him qua ruler, höchstens an encomium on him qua cra�y man of the world. And yet I cleave so much to this man; the pious memory of my father is definitely the decisive factor. But he rlly could have been dangerous for me insofar as I have a great natural inclination toward cra�iness. And if Governance didn’t have me in its shackles, if I was my own master like all other hum. beings are, humnly speaking, if I was therewith physically strong―who knows if I wouldn’t have become the cra�y one myself.

If you take the horror of eternity away (either eternal salvation or eternal perdition), then the willingness to follow Jesus is basically a fantasy. For only the seriousness of the eternal can obligate and motivate someone to take the decisive risk, and only the seriousness of the eternal can justify doing so. But because we now all imagine, supinely, that we will all be saved, the scoundrels and the righteous alike, those who have been righteous to the very best of their abilities and those who cheated a bit, all, every one of us will be justified: yes, then peop. are basically right to consider it preposterous and ridiculous to sacrifice everything to follow Jesus. The ethical is where we find seriousness; if you remove the ethical and make, e.g., Xt into the ideal and then imitate him, you take him in vain. It must be a ma�er of heaven and hell―and that must be the reason for following him, i.e., in order to be saved; that is seriousness.

13 höchstens] German, at the most.

5

10

15

20

155 25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 155–158 93

5

156

15

1849

Ah! But what sufferings lie ahead. It is quite certain that the suffering will be nearly as horrific the second time [Christianity is introduced] into the world as it was when Xnty was originally introduced, for that is what it’s all about. It was initially introduced into the world and triumphed over raw passions. Now, in Christendom itself, Christianity has been abolished by prudence and everything that goes along with it, so that it must again be introduced into Christendom. But the fight will be with prudence.

Oration at the Grave of a Great Orator If ever there were an occasion for an orator, one of those rare occasions, this is it. But he is no longer with us, his lips are silenced, etc.; the occasion best suited to his eloquence is denied him, we stand silently by his grave―and how willingly would he who must speak here remain silent, for who can speak at his grave[?] Ah, return once more among us, let us again, for the last time, hear your powerful voice. In this form might his memory be reproduced. This isn’t an infelicitous point.

20

157

25

158 30

When James says: As the body is dead without the spirit so is faith dead without works―one could readily turn the image around and say: Likewise works are dead without faith, for faith corresponds more to spirit and works to the body than vice versa.

It’s really quite convenient to be a “contemporary,” especially is the sense of the public, because then one acts in the first person but judges oneself in the third person, as if one weren’t oneself. One gives oneself leeway to do anything at all to hinder exceptional people; if one successfully hinders them, one concludes[:] ergo they weren’t exceptional. But the culpability of the age and the way it treated them―is spoken of objectively by the age itself.

89

90

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 158–160

1849

There is an odd kind of self-contempt in willingly going along with the world like that. The public is rlly deeply contemptuous of itself; to be free of responsibility like the wind or a horse or a dog is the most pathetic of privileges.

94

5

The few contemporaries who might be said to be capable of evaluating my cause see quite clearly that I don’t have anything of value at my command right now; I have no positions to distribute, etc., etc. On the other hand, they see quite clearly that I already possess a historic renown that is rare. But they also understand that they can’t profit from it because history doesn’t take such characters along just like that: ergo they work against me li�le by li�le. Oh, hum. egotism! And then we all weep on Sundays when the priest weeps and preaches about truth. There really is something to the view that one ultimately finds a bit more self-sacrifice among women, which is no doubt because they live quieter and more withdrawn lives and thus a li�le closer to ideality; they don’t as easily acquire the marketplace measures used by men, who get right to the business of life. What saves women is the distance from life that is granted them for so long (which is why even among women one sometimes sees traces of and expressions of individuality, the boldness to grasp a single idea and hold on to it). This quieter life means that women are sometimes more loyal to themselves than men are, since men are demoralized from boyhood by the demand to be like the others, and become completely demoralized as youths, not to mention as men, by being taught all about the way things are in practical life, in reality. It is this very competence that is ruinous. If girls are brought up in the same way, one can say goodnight to the whole hum. race. And women’s emancipation, which tends toward this very sort of education, is no doubt the invention of the devil.

159

The cause could easily become life threatening. It concerns neither more nor less than the fact that within Xndom, Xnty has been abolished, and the fact that Xndom won’t for a second relinquish its claim that it is indeed Xn.

160

10

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 160

95

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

1849

If I were contesting points of doctrine―ah, such a dispute could hardly become dangerous, least of all in our time, when tolerance is so widespread, when indifference is honored in the name of tolerance. No, but denial of self, renunciation of the world, etc. are at stake when the issue is Xndom’s abolishment of Xnty. They don’t want to hear a word about any of that and yet they want to be Xn. And talking about it could easily put one’s life in peril, for what do they love more than worldliness, advantage, honor, esteem, the solidarity of self-love, etc.[?] If they’re permi�ed to retain all that, they’ll accept Xnty as a doctrine. The movement that will lead Xndom back to Xnty must be one of inwardness, however. It is as if a lawyer came to an estate and found that in a certain sense everything was as it should be―except the fact that the tenants had decided that the estate was the property of the people living there and not that of the gracious lord. What could be done here? It wasn’t a ma�er of chasing the smith away from his trade, or the priest, or the manager, etc. No. Each was permi�ed to carry on in his trade; but a notary took inventory of everybody and everything on the estate and made it clear that the estate belonged to the gracious lord. Xndom has reenacted the parable of the laborers in the vineyard who killed the master’s messengers and finally also his son: “for now the vineyard is ours.” Now they think they’ll be Xn; who knows, they say, maybe it’s a smart move. But what Xnty demands with re. to self-denial, renunciation, with re. to first seeking God’s kingdom―they don’t want to hear anything about that. Now and again, someone comes along who really is a true Xn, someone who has such a feeling for truth that he cannot conceal what it is to be a true Xn. He’s then declared a traitor, an odium totius christianitas (ad modum odium generis humani, as the first Xns were called), and he’s killed. It’s also an act of treachery to be honest and expose this whole tissue of lies. So they kill him. Like those in the vineyard, they say “let us kill him, then the vineyard is ours.” Hmnly speaking, it is thankless work: first to force oneself to deny oneself (Lord God, we’re all flesh and blood) and then to be hated, cursed, treated like a monster because of it. This is Xnty, this is the “gentle doctrine of truth” in “quiet moments,” “in holy places”!

32 odium totius christianitas (ad modum odium generis humani] Latin, offense to all Christendom (as in an offense to the human race.

91

92

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 161–163

1849 96

This is where one clearly sees the difference between a pagan and a Christian way of looking at things[:] That God delays his punishment is explained by Xnty in terms of God’s patience and mercy, that he wants to give the sinner time to repent and improve himself, and thus maybe even let him escape punishment, or in any case, let it be carried out at a moment when it falls more gently on him because he is reconciled with God. Paganism portrays God’s delay in punishment as a kind of cruelty; it knows that deferred punishment hurts the most. See, e.g., Plutarch in a li�le treatise on the deferral of div. punishment.

161

Forgiveness of sin and atonement do not exactly indicate that God suspends every punishment but that the sufferer now suffers his punishment in quite another way because he knows that he is reconciled with God. It is a crass misunderstanding to think that atonement exempts one from punishment. No, the spiritual element in the forgiveness of sin is the fact that the sinner gains the confidence to dare to believe that God is gracious to him even though he nevertheless suffers his punishment. But in relation to punishment this is a real transubstantiation.

162

It was “the evil spirit” that led Xt away to tempt him in solitude. Based on that, one might be tempted to conclude that it’s always an evil spirit that leads peop. into solitude. There’s some truth to that, but it’s also the path to the true God-relationship, and it must also be said that Xt’s temptation in solitude was his development, if one may speak that way. Moreover, in a sense God also dwells in a place of solitude. But it’s also true that solitude is dialectical, and rarely does a person amount to something, good or evil, if he’s never been alone. In solitude one finds the absolute, but also absolute danger. In company there is relativity and relative danger, but of course also a danger that is more than relative: to miss out on the absolute, never to discover that it’s there, never to define one’s life in relation to it no ma�er how far one might be from a�aining it. For it is enthusiasm and pride to want to be the absolute, but it is truth to understand that it is

163

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 163–165

1849

97

one’s measure, the measure of both humility and activation, for it is humbling to see how far away from it one is, but it must also act as instigation and keep one vigilant during one’s pursuits.

164

… And when some kind of grief, pain, or suffering takes hold of you and you experience it as something horrific, when it seems like a great achievement just to bear it as you trudge through life but that nothing more could be expected―then seek some relief; see to it that you find a new perspective, for that new perspective will refresh you. Call to mind what is wri�en in one of the hymns in our authorized hymn book:

10

15

20

165

25

30

There (in eternity) I shall bless you For your sufferings in time Cannot be likened To the blessedness there, [W]ith regard to this suffering, too, the important thing―if you don’t waste the opportunity entirely―is that you are to thank God for it. It will not only turn out to be far easier sometime in eternity, no―you shall thank God for it. Think about it, it is the relaxation of spirit and the refreshment of spirit.

On Lessing and the Fragments Even if one could forgive Lessing for everything found in The Fragments, the fact that he made the a�ack anonymously (ah, and in this regard too, he set the tone for modernity) can only be forgiven in another sense[:] here he was clearly not sufficiently dialectically developed to know what he was doing. The ma�er is quite simple. It’s impossible to fight anonymously against something that claims to be authoritative and claims to derive its strength from authority. That is, if this is allowed, then authority has lost everything before the ba�le begins and even the worst slouch can dispose of authority.

93

94

1

5

a

, [even if it were] a distance of 18,000 years, if that were imaginable; it is the greatest possible distance of qualitative misunderstanding.

[b]

10

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 165

At most, Xnty can be anonymously defended, for the defender places himself on an inferior level and perhaps does it precisely in order not to be confused with an apostle, and exceptional Xn, and so

1849

Authority fights like this: Let me see you, you, who speak like this; stand in front of me, face to face, and then repeat that I’m a deceiver, etc. That is, authority takes account of the passions. But shouldn’t, perhaps, the passionate aspect also be a truth, just as much as the so-called objective aspect[?] Lessing himself was probably of the opinion that an anonymous a�ack against him would be disarmed if the a�acker were brought face to face with Lessing, and that the a�acker would fall silent. Whether Xnty is the truth, i.e., whether Xt is who he says he is, can rlly only be decided in the situation of contemporaneousness, which really forces pathos to the fore. But if one is to form even a weak opinion about it, one must first use all one’s imaginative capacity to get an impression of the tension involved in contemporaneousness. But here not a single scholar, scarcely a single scholarly discipline, sits down and ponders what can be understood through the passions. Furthermore, we are now 1800 years away from the tension of contemporaneousness―and people are more or less completely apathetic. And they are becoming more and more anonymousa. That must become the issue itself. What is the issue? The issue is whether one is for or against what presents itself as authoritative and consequently has a passionate effect. If one takes this away, one takes the issue itself away in casu. What would we think of an official who read an order from his superior not as an order but as a literary production he was to critically evaluate and test, who thought that was his job, and even sent a “well-wri�en” critique back to his superior. I suppose he would be dismissed as mentally unfit. When there is a question about an authority, then this issue is whether or not it is an authority―ergo, it can be contested neither objectively nor anonymously. I am to be contemporary with it and must go to Xt in my own person and say: You are a deceiver.

30 in casu] Latin, in this case.

98

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 165–168

99

166

5

167

15

20

168

There is only one proof for the truth of Xnty and it is quite rightly the passionate proof that results when the anxiety of sin and the troubled conscience compel a person to cross the thin line that sep[arates] despairing madness―and Xnty. There lies Xnty.

It is disturbing to see the frivolity, indifference, and assurance with which children are brought up. And yet by the age of 10 every hum. being is essentially what he will become. And yet one will find that nearly everyone bears some damage from childhood that they haven’t overcome by their 70th year; and all unhappy individuals readily point to some bad experience in childhood. Ah, it’s a sad satire on the hum. race that Governance has so richly endowed nearly every child because it knew in advance what it means to be brought up by “parents,” i.e., to be messed up as much as hmnly possible.

It is rather odd that in the Three Godly Discourses, I ascribed Peter’s “cast all your sorrows on God” to Paul.

1849

95

forth. But it cannot be anonymously a�acked, because the a�acker situates himself on the same level as authority, which is essentially personality. The a�acker then conducts himself like this: He says, [“]I shall a�ack this authority,[”] but by remaining anonymous he’s decided the ma�er in advance and expressed his view that this authority is no authority. The whole thing is confusion.

1

5

10

96

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 169–171

1849

Prayer We are ready to receive from your hand all that you give. If it be glory and honor that is offered, we are ready to receive it from your hand; if it be mockery and contempt, we are ready to receive it from your hand. Ah, that we might with equal gratitude and joy take the one as well as the other so that we make no distinction between the one and the other―and indeed there is no great difference so long as we look solely to what is decisive: that it comes from you.

Maybe it isn’t required of you to let yourself be put to death for Xnty or to make many sacrifices; but you shall be absolutely willing to do so. But will anyone be able to say whether another pers. has done so? No, nor shall they, although it must also be remembered that if all the external data of a pers.’s life is examined, a certain suspicion might arise. But even if you’re altogether pure, just as you bear your cross, you’ll have to put up with this misunderstanding, as if in all inwardness you had not offered absolutely―this is the least you can suffer in recompense for not facing any actual danger.

100

169

5

10

170 15

20

25

1

5

[a]

One could use the words spoken by the angel to Mary Magdalene at the grave here: be not afraid―you seek Jesus of Nazareth. For those who seek Jesus initially fear him, his holiness, before they feel the comfort of his grace and mercy.

Xt stopped Paul and said: Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me. Perhaps a more common conversion crisis would be Xt stopping someone and saying: Saul, Saul, why are you fleeing from me, why are you afraid of me, for I am your savior. For this is the crisis en route to becoming a Xn, that is, the pers. who wants to become Xn is initially anxious before Xt, even though he acknowledges him.

171

30

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 172–173 172

101

173 10

15

20

25

30

35

40

In Luther’s sermon on the Pharisee and the tax collector, he quotes a beautiful passage from the psalms of David, 50:23 “Whosoever gives thanks honors me, and this is the way in which I shall show him the blessedness of God.” [T]hus “thanksgiving” is really the “sacrifice” that is well-pleasing to God.

I’ve seen up close how the press operates, how scurrilous it is, and how it brings about demoralization; i.e., [I have seen] the law governing this demoralization. Take Goldschmidt or P. L. Møller. I doubt that either of them would have dared insult me personally or would have even treated me impolitely, no, in person they would have been civil, the model of civility. Even P.L.M. responded respectfully to me in a newspaper (not even in person), but in a decent paper, of course, with his signature a�ached―and that was a�er I’d accosted him in Fædrelandet. I’m referring here to his reply to me in Fædrelandet. But anonymously and in the privileged playground of contemptibility they dared. That, then, was the first lie[:] it was a lie that these anonymous men were courageous, etc. If the simple person understood the situation, then their reputations would be harmed, for the simple person believes that fellows like that must be bold as hell because they have the courage―to write; he doesn’t look closer and doesn’t see the cowardice. Then thousands upon thousands read the paper and spontaneously act upon it― every shopboy, etc., dares to insult me in person. Is it because he’s worse than G. and P.L.M.? By no means, but there is enormous confusion in the usual way of thinking owing to a lack of clarity about ethical concepts. If I were to ask, e.g., who insulted me, the answer would be: P.L.M. or Goldschmidt. These shopboys, etc., these thousands, are all of the opinion that they’re innocent: they’ve simply read it and taken

1849

97

98

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 173

1849

their point of reference in what is wri�en in the paper. But precisely because they consider themselves to be innocent they dare do what the two cheeky fellows didn’t dare do. Nor can I use an ethical voice to pin this down on any one of these thousands of people because each one of them avoids it in the belief that he’s innocent; it’s P.L.M. and G.―and they’re anonymous. But you see, I’ve learned something from this. If I were to write a law governing the press, I know well enough what I’d do. With regard to the daily press, I place a great deal of the responsibility with the subscribers, unconditionally. A subscriber is highly significant accomplice. If one asks, Who did it? during the investigation of a the�, the court seeks out the guilty party and punishes him. In this context, it is entirely in order that one, only one, is punished because the crime was commi�ed by him alone. But with regard to crimes commi�ed by the press, what’s the harm to society? It lies in the dissemination. Yet in this sphere, they’ve come up with the preposterous idea of punishing the least possibly [guilty person], some panhandler who wasn’t even an auth. No, when the danger of the crime is its dissemination, then a subscriber is also complicit. Above all, anonymous or sham subscribers must not be tolerated. The names of the subscribers should be printed and made public with u�er accuracy in each paper and the editor should be obliged under the threat of fine to answer for the correctness. Next, the subscribers should be fined along with the auth. The crime is not so much a ma�er of Peer Madsen telling a lie and allowing it to be printed; rather, the crime consists of or is related to its dissemination and therefore it has to do with the subscribers. Ergo the larger the subscription, the larger the fine. But I won’t continue this any further right now, but the idea is right, that’s for sure: the crimes

102 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 173 commi�ed by the press are different from all other crimes insofar as the real crime is its dissemination, and this idea ought to transform all legislation concerning the press. 5

1849

99

100

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 174

1849

NB11:174, recoded diagonally across the page.

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 174 103

174

5

10

15

20

25

My misfortune, i.e., that which makes my life so difficult, is that I’m tuned an octave higher than other people are; where I am, what preoccupies me, is not the particular but a principle or idea. Most people think―at most―about who they ought to marry. I have to think about marriage [itself]. And so it goes with everything. That’s fundamentally my situation now. Most people think―at most―about what job they ought to apply for, while my fortune is to be deeply involved in a struggle, the ba�le of ideas, the question of principle about whether so-called Christian professional offices are appropriate in Christianity. My unpopularity surely has less to do the difficulty of my writings than with my own personal existence, with the fact that despite all my exertions, I haven’t amounted to anything (finite teleology), haven’t earned any money, don’t have a position, haven’t been knighted, but in every way have amounted to nothing―and have been mocked, to boot. As I see it, this is rlly the greatest thing about me, if anything is. This also requires that I fight and exert myself because I too am flesh and blood―and that’s exactly why I’m misunderstood and mistreated.

1849

101

102

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 175–176

1849 105

There’s also a kind of sinful anxiety that flees from Xt, at least to some degree, and yet continues to acknowledge him. It’s entirely consistent that someone who wants to continue sinning flees Xt. But it’s another ma�er when someone flees from every temptation and every occasion for temptation, as far as possible; one would think that he would unconditionally seek Xt and find rest in him. But this isn’t always the case, and it isn’t always such a straightforward ma�er to understand. In anxiety, he might sometimes believe that there’s a safe place where he can escape temptation; when his rational side thinks he’s found it, he relaxes and temptation really does retreat. Everything is fine now, and hmnly speaking, this is praiseworthy. But there is nevertheless a certain deception involved. He thinks that it’s impossible for him to hold his ground in the face of temptation (and this is where anxiety about spiritual trial is located). When he assures himself rationally that he’s found a place (because it’s assumed that it originates externally, and this then becomes an element of his “anxiety,” as well as proof that some part of him is nonetheless upright, for if he himself were the source of temptation, it would then be impossible to find such a place) where temptation can’t reach him, then he feels sure of himself. But what does this mean? Even if he prays, calling upon Xt’s name fervently, Xt is no savior to him. He fights on his own as well as he can, uses all his rational powers uprightly, if I can put it like that, to avoid temptation and thus really does avoid temptation and perhaps brings it all gratefully to Xt. But he doesn’t have faith that Xt will help him triumph over temptation. This is one of the most painful forms of spiritual trial.

175

5

10

15

20

25

30

Hmnly speaking, Job’s wife was, in a sense, right. For hmnly, it is truly an enormous burden to suffer like that and, in addition, to be troubled by the thought that God is nevertheless love. It’s enough to make one lose one’s mind―and, hmnly, it’s far easier to doubt―period. In suffering and spiritual trial, there are situations in which the thought of God, the thought that God nevertheless is love, make the suffering far more intense. Here faith is tested, love is tested, whether one really loves God, really can’t do without him.

176

35

106 40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 176

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

107 40

1849

Hmnly speaking, a person experiencing such suffering is justified in saying: “The whole thing would be far less agonizing if I lacked the notion of God.” The pain lies either in the thought that one has been abandoned by God, omnipotence, who could so easily help, or in the crucifixion of reason, in the thought that despite all this, God is love and whatever happens, happens for one’s own good. Hmnly speaking, it’s terrifying to be like a sparrow, or even less than a sparrow, given the fact that we develop opinions about, and have an understanding of, something we presumably can evaluate―our own suffering. Doubt is a relief because it agrees with us completely that the suffering is unbearable. The difficulty of the idea of God is to understand that not only is suffering to be endured, but that it is a good, a gi� from a God of love. Take this example: When a pers. inflicts suffering on another pers. and then, because he wants to be cruel, says, This is cruel―it alleviates [some of the pain]. But if the pers. inflicting the suffering says: This is kindness―that, hmnly speaking, is enough to drive one out of one’s mind. Yet this is only a spiritual trial, which can be horrific enough while it lasts; but it is blessedness to endure with God. The first lesson is about understanding the idea of God; there one finds alleviation. In the second lesson (and here lies the real spiritual trial), it’s as if the idea of God itself intensified the agony. Here it is a ma�er of enduring in faith. If you don’t let go of God, you will end up agreeing with God, in blessedness, that the suffering was a benefit. For God is right, unconditionally; Oh, but the height of blessedness is to agree, unconditionally, that God is right precisely when, hmnly speaking, there seems to be a case against him. God is to be believed, unconditionally; but he, the infinite, can do nothing except infinitely increase the price of faith. How blessed to believe―the greater the price the more blessed it is to believe. It’s not true that faith loses out when the price is raised: the greater the price, the greater the blessedness. [It is] sad and shameful to have bought the greatest of all for a discount price, were it possible: how blessed to have bought it at the highest price. Even a lover speaks like that; he’s not happy to have received the beloved as a bargain; the more he pays the happier he is; the price is his joy. Yet with eros, there’s always a possible dissimilarity because the price might end up interesting him more than the beloved; but that’s impossible with faith. Lessing no doubt had something similar in mind when he said that he would choose the le� hand, everlasting striving. But all the same, he was wrong inasmuch as it sounds a bit too erotic

103

104

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 176–179

1849

and, in relation to truth, it seems a li�le bit too much as if he thought the price itself as worth more than the truth. But this is rlly a form of selfishness and can easily become dangerous, a presumptuous wrong turn. 5

In Xndom, we do indeed speak of a revealed God; but aren’t there many for whom he is still a hidden and concealed God? I’ve read a somewhat similar remark in Terstegen, but he didn’t put it in quite the same way: God had earlier been hidden from him and because of that, he hadn’t loved God as deeply. This, or something like it, is found in Terstegen.

177

1 Jn 2:21 ought to be the rule for how to proclaim Xt in Xndom: I write to you, not because you do not know the truth (that is, as opposed to the pagans), but because you know it.

178

All this talk about world history, arguments and proofs for the truth of Xnty, must be eliminated. There is only one proof: that of faith. If I’m genuinely convinced of something (and this is a mode of inwardness on the way to becoming spirit), then I’ll always value my conviction higher than the arguments for it. Conviction sustains argument: argument doesn’t sustain conviction. In this regard, the aesthete in Either/Or is right, in his own way, when he says in one of the “Diapsalmata” that reasons are strange things; if I’m apathetic, I proudly look down on reasons. And if I’m passionate, then reasons well up to monstrous proportions. What he’s talking about, and what he means by [“]passionate,[”] is passion itself, inner intensity, which is exactly what a conviction is. Just as li�le as a cockerel can lay an egg (at most, only a wind egg), just as li�le can “reasons” conceive or give birth to conviction, no ma�er how long they intermingle with each other. A conviction comes from somewhere else. This is what I meant by the difference betw. a pathos-laden transition and a dialectical one, which was one of the problems I wrote down somewhere on a sheet of paper glued to a piece of cardboard.

179

10

15

20

25

108

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 179

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

109

40

1849

It can’t possibly be the case that a person holds back his convictions while pushing forward with arguments. No, one’s conviction―the fact that one has a conviction, that it is my conviction, your conviction (personally)―that’s what is decisive. One can speak semi-humorously about reasons: if you really want reasons, I’ll happily give you some. Do you want 3 or 5 or 7[?] How many do you want[?] But I can say nothing more profound than this: I believe. This suffices, this is the positive saturation point, just as when a lover says [“]I love her[”] and talks neither about loving her more intensely than others love their beloveds, and still less about his reasons. So, then, conviction must lead the charge, and therewith personality, while reasons are pushed to the rear. This, again, is just the opposite of modern objectivity. This is how my development, or anybody’s development, proceeds[:] Perhaps we begin with some reasons, but these are in the background. Then we choose. With the weight of responsibility, before God, a conviction is formed within us, with God[’s help]. Now we have the positive element. Our convictions can’t be defended or proven with arguments, which would be self-contradictory because reasons remain in the background. No, from here on the ma�er becomes personal, a ma�er of personality. One can only defend one’s conviction ethically, personally, i.e., with regard to what one is prepared to sacrifice for it and the degree to which one refuses to be scared away from maintaining it. There is only one proof for the truth of Xnty: the inner proof, argumentum spiritus sancti. This is already hinted at in 1 Jn 5:9. “If we accept hum. witness” (this means all historical proofs and arguments) “the witness of God is greater,” i.e., the inner proof is greater. And now, in v. 10 “Whoever believes in the Son of God has this witness within.” It isn’t argumentation that provides the grounds for believing in God’s Son, but vice versa: belief in God’s Son is the witness. This is the movement of infinity within itself and it can’t be otherwise. It isn’t argumentation that provides grounds for conviction, but conviction that provides grounds for argumentation. Everything prior to this is preparatory, a preliminary ma�er, something that will vanish as soon as conviction arrives and changes everything, transforming the relationship. If this weren’t the case, there would be nothing comforting about a conviction, and having a conviction would then have to be a ma�er of constantly rehearsing one’s arguments. The calming aspect, the 27 argumentum spiritus sancti] Latin, the argument of the Holy Spirit.

105

106

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 179–181

1849

absolutely calming aspect about having a conviction, about faith, is precisely that faith itself bears witness; the conviction is what provides the reasons.

5

The so o�en misused words, [“]Blessed are the eyes and ears that saw and heard what you saw and heard,[”] are spoken to―Oh! and how this strikes home―are spoken “to the disciples in particular.” This is what I’ve always fought for, but I’d forgo�en that it’s found in the NT; see Lk 10:23. But in other cases, one goes out of one’s way to emphasize what is said to the disciples in particular, e.g., what is said in the Sermon on the Mount about renouncing the world, about suffering contempt, etc. No priest forgets to make the point that this is said to the disciples in particular. But in this other case, it is forgo�en. Here it pertains to everyone, without further ado, to blessedly be, or become, a contemporary of Xt, to see―indeed, what believers alone can see, and what can therefore naturally never be conjoined with terror[―]to see as a contemporary.

180

10

15

20

What was it that really made me into a religious orator? The fact that I am a listener. That is, my life was so complex and arduous that in truth, I felt an urge to hear a word of guidance. I listened and listened―but if what I heard was supposed to be Xnty, then I was beyond help. So I myself became an orator. As a result, I know with certainty something that only few of our priests know[:] that there is one person who has benefited from these discourses: I, myself. I am just the opposite of most orators: they’re busy speaking to others―I speak to myself. And it’s also true that if others don’t think they benefit from my discourses, it must be because their lives are too easy, too untried, without danger.

181

25

30

110

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 182–183 182

5

10

15

1849

There’s a beautiful thought by Tersteegen (in his sermon on the crucified thief) that it was Xt’s prayer [“]Father, forgive them, for they know not what they do,[”] his speech, or rather these words, that brought about the thief’s conversion because he was moved by the love Xt showed by praying for his enemies. And the same sermon makes good use of the point that the thief’s faith was immediately put to the test. For at the next moment, the one who had just promised him that he would be with him in paradise cried out, [“]My God, my God, why have you forsaken me?[”] Oh, and this was the one on whom the thief had built his hope. And the sermon also points out that one can’t appeal to the example of the thief to justify postponing one’s conversion until the last moment because the thief hadn’t heard a single word about Xt before then.

111

183

20

25

30

35

40

The fault of the Middle Ages, which has also been repeated elsewhere, is that the person who acts in a particular way wants to make this into a rule for everyone. To abstain from marriage is a particular action. This may be absolutely well-pleasing to God as far as the person in question is concerned. But it is another ma�er when it is proposed as a rule and others are initiated into it just for the sake of the cause. The particular is the exception and should be conscious of being so; indeed, instead of counseling others to do the same, the exception should counsel them to follow the universal. For the particular is only true when it has the character of primitivity, in relation to God. Only the primitive God-relationship can be defended in opposition to the universal. Anything that lacks this primitivity is eo ipso unjustified when it wants to become the exception. To stay with the case at issue: to abstain from marriage. In this instance, it’s easy to show how the ma�er should be handled. The individual keeps absolutely silent about his decision. Sure enough, he carries on living in the single state, but, if he stays silent, no third party has access to his reasons. This non-fact can be explained in 17 ways. For a while, no one pays any a�ention to it because there is no prescribed age for marriage. They assume he’s like others, looking for a wife. Time passes―and he remains unmarried. This non-fact can be explained 17 ways. The fault of the Middle Ages was to make it public, and, what is still absurd, to make it into something perfect or meritorious.

107

108

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 183–184

1849

I myself have experienced this collision. In her distress and pain―Ah! and she suffered only too much―my betrothed asked me one final question: Tell me, will you never marry[?] Here was the collision. She was so distressed that a decisive turn in the direction of the religious was very near at hand for her. I could in all conscience have said: No. And then what[?] Then I, who was conscious of my u�erly particular categories, would have intruded in her life in a destructive manner. Therefore I answered with a joke. If she were to do the same, i.e., if that were truth for her and it were therefore permissible, she would have to become aware of it in a purely primitive way. The truth became apparent when she married, which I affirmed entirely and which I thanked God for. On the other hand. If it [not to marry] had been truth for her, then it would have had to happen in another way. She would not have said a word to me about such things, but would in the primitivity of her own God-relationship have determined not to marry and she would perhaps have been right. But as she perhaps understood it, she had acquired no pure God-relationship but only a God-relationship at secondhand. And if one does not have a God-relationship at firsthand one is not justified in being the exception. With all her passion she desired to be joined to me. So the next step seemed to her to be that we two could be united by not marrying, remaining unmarried. As concerns me, it was perhaps as it should be because there was something primitive in me, but in her it would only be something derivative; she had not developed a God-relationship but found solace in a kind of Platonic love toward me. But such a relationship is not religious and is thus impermissible. Only a primitive God-relationship justifies the exception.

Tersteegen puts it very well. “Die Gelehrten sind meist Schuld daran (in the debate about words and distinctions), die doch bedenken sollten, daß nicht der Tausendste unter wahren Gläubigen einen vollen Begriff von verschiedenen ihrer Ausdrücke un Distinktionen habe, gleichwie hingegen tausend Andre die Worte der Wahrheit, nicht aber die Wahrheit der Worte haben.”

33 Die Gelehrten … Worte haben] German, The learned are most to blame [(in the debate about words and distinctions)] for they should have considered that not one in a thousand among the true believers has a full conception of their various terms and distinctions, just as, by way of contrast, thousands of others have the words of truth but do not have the truth of the words.

5

10

15

20

25

30

184

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 184–186

1849

In a li�le piece “von dem Glauben und der Rechtfertigung” in my edition p. 474. 112

185

10

15

186 20

25

30

Luther makes quite a masterly distinction in his sermon on the gospel about the lily and the bird. Faith is without a care, so how can it be explained that scripture elsewhere praises care? Luther answers: Everything in Xnty hinges on faith―and love. In relation to faith, cares are sinful. In relation to love, on the other hand, care is always present. Masterly! But our hum. misfortune is precisely that our care is misplaced (i.e., in relation to faith, our cares becomes doubt, unbelief, etc.) and only seldom in the right place! Oh, how seldom a really caring love is―and how common cares are!

Why is it that children who have been strictly brought up don’t cry when they fall and hurt themselves? It’s because they know that if their parents find out about it, they’ll get a spanking on top of it. And why is that? Because the pain of the fall isn’t the last time they’ll experience pain, it isn’t definitive. And why is it that an older generation, brought up more strictly in the fear of God, could bear so much without complaining? It’s because without further ado they imagined that it was a punishment from God and therefore the pain itself wasn’t final, wasn’t definitive, but was derivative of the punishment. And why is it that these days especially, the more favorable a pers.’s external circumstances, the more he suffers from even the slightest hardship? It’s because there’s no higher, vivifying ethical idea from which to derive [a comparison]. Yesterday I read about the following court case in one of our newspapers. The wife of an artisan came home and found that her husband had hanged himself. Imagine her horror. She took

109

110

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 186–188

1849

him down―and had to turn her a�ention to her infant crying in the crib. She then ran to get help. Two doctors weren’t at home, so she went to a woman she knew for advice. Finally she got hold of a barber―but naturally it was too late. What happened then? Just listen. Legal proceedings were started against her because she hadn’t been properly vigilant in trying to revive him. Merciful God! But there was something else that struck me. Imagine if this horrific event had happened in a more prosperous family―what grief there would have been, and with good reason, but there would perhaps also have been grief marked by despair on the part of those sharing their condolences. But this poor impoverished woman. She can thank justice for giving her something else to think about; she was taken to court, as noted, and sentenced a fine of 10 r.d. One thing is sure, this is a splendid form of diversion―but justice[?]

113 5

10

15

Luther is once again completely right. No one can see faith; it is something unseen and thus no one can decide whether or not a pers. has faith. But faith is made known by love. These days people have quite rightfully wanted to make love into something unseen, against which Luther, supported by scripture, would protest, for, Christianly, love is the work of love. To say that love is a feeling, etc., is rlly an unchristian concept of love. This is, in fact, the aesthetic definition and thus nicely describes eros, etc. But Christian love is the work of love. Xt’s love was not an inner feeling, a full heart, etc., but it was the work of love that is his life.

187

Tersteegen makes an acute remark (p. 378), but he himself seems not to have grasped it entirely; it doesn’t say that Mary chose the be�er part―but the good part, i.e., the best part, without any comparison. That is, the positive is greater than the superlative. This is something I too have noted in other connections. The greatest expression of eros, or rather, the expression of the greatest eros, is this: I love this person and that person. If one says that I love

188

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 188–191

114 5

189 10

190

1849

more than anyone else, or I love as no one has ever loved his beloved, then one says less; the superlative detracts from [what is said] and shows that an unerotic comparison lies in eros. That’s why, as I’ve shown elsewhere in this journal, that in relation to faith, “reasons” subtract. I believe―then not one word more―that is the greatest [that can be said]. If I had 17 arguments, my faith would be weaker, and weaker still if I had 18.

The other day, when I opened vol. 1 of the writings of the author of A Story of Everyday Life, I saw a quotation from Schiller that struck me: “He had the gaze of a worldly man and the heart of a dreamer.”

This is a quite excellent sermon by Tersteegen: am Erscheinungsfest 1755 on Mt 2:1–12 (pp. 117ff. in my edition). The second part in particular is true in the deepest and most inward sense; it reveals such experience, such acquaintance with life. There is truly an inner truth within him.

20

191

25

The beginning of Seneca’s work De ira is rhetorically beautiful. In order to show the degree to which wrath is inhuman and unworthy of a hum. being, he constructs a proposition with these antitheses: hum. beings are born to support each other; wrath is born to bring about corruption, etc. (this is in Ch. V); thus hum. beings―and wrath―are placed in opposition to each another.

15 am Erscheinungsfest] German, on the Feast of the Epiphany.

111

112

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 192

1849 115

Monday, June 25 Fie, �e! [Y]es, I wanted to act prudently, or at least I thought I ought to, so I imagined that I should secure a post and then publish my writings pseudonymously. A splendid interpretation of what it means to seek �rst the kingdom of God! And how would it have helped me if I had sunk under the weight of having acted so cleverly and then, despite everything, were compelled to give up my post[?] All that anxiety about whether I might be denied a position is certainly hypochondria. All my other anxieties are also certainly very much entangled with hypochondria; but in any case, heavy as this may be, prudence will not guide my actions. This was so vivid to me yesterday (Sunday). For some time now, it has troubled me that I thought about refraining from publishing my work in order to take steps to secure a post. Recently, one of my own phrases has involuntarily come to mind[:] “God is not served by people who click at the decisive moment.[”] I am pained by what I read in Fenelon somewhere about the idea that it must be horrible for the person “from whom God expected more, or on whom God had relied to make a crucial decision.” On the other hand, I was struck by what I read in Fenelon today, 2nd Part, p. 26 (in Claudius’s translation). And especially what I read yesterday in Tersteegen’s Epiphany sermon, p. 141: “the wise men went another way,” for we should always be ready to follow God’s lead. All these concerns about taking a higher turn than I had imagined are indeed true, but a person cannot require so much of himself that he should immediately understand himself as a whole, in complete transparency. And has not my way of thinking been altered successively[?] Have I not become, through the intervention of Governance, a different sort of auth. from what I had originally imagined[?] And what had I originally imagined? Let me conscientiously return to the appropriate point in time. When I left her, what were my thoughts? This: I am a penitent; a marriage is impossible in this case; it will always retain a shadow of misfortune and it also protests against the wedding. On the other hand―and God knows I considered this as well even if I wanted to forget it or let it seem as if I had forgotten it―on the other hand, a decisively religious existence, which I have always desired and which must remain a possibility for me as a penitent if I am to be honest with God, cannot be reconciled with marriage. If God intends to bring my sins down upon me, then I shall not, by a falsehood, put myself in a situation where I must beg God to spare me for the sake of someone else, someone else to whom I will thus be bound by a falsehood. That is, my life either had to become one of despairing pleasure―or else an existence carried through as unconditionally as possible. And should I then NB[a] stop and become a heretic, deceiving God, he who in such a Later comment NB But something has obviously been overlooked here, [namely] the fact that at the time, I also thought that as an auth. I would be free from financial worries and, in any case, that I could take up a calling to be a priest anytime I wanted to.a

192

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

[a]

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 192–193

1849

113

a

5

Later comment Yes, and this is u�erly decisive, for it’s just here that things get snarled. But, as is so o�en the case in my writing, there is also a certain redaction going on, that is, there’s a τελος in the interpretation [of the situation], like this one, which forces me to act.

116

fatherly and accommodating way has led me ever further toward decisions that I could not have endured if I had understood everything right away[?] Oh, �e on me. And because I have hesitated so long, everything has become more dif�cult.

193

Historical Note. In order to reassure myself that it wasn’t because I feared taking a step in the opposite direction, I went to Madvig’s residence the day before yesterday (Saturday),a but didn’t find him at home. Now that was a bit of luck. But in my defense, I dare say that this time, as usual, I planned on taking these steps, but constantly with that possibility in mind in order to build momentum for acting in the opposite direction. This is something essential to my makeup, because when something that tempts me as a possibility turns out to be realizable, it becomes something else for me.b So, I didn’t meet Madvig. Mynster was le�. I really didn’t want to visit him because I’ve noticed how deeply anxious he is when he sees me, especially since R. Nielsen’s book [was published] as well as the li�le anonymous book that he’s certainly read. I was with him about three weeks ago―I saw at once how things stood between us, exchanged just a few words with him, [as he] walked back and forth across the floor, quite contrary to his usual manners. On the other hand, he repeated over and over [“]Dear friend, dear friend[”]―but refused to start a conversation. So against my will, I decided to visit him. I went, then, on Friday. Scrupulous as I am, I considered it my duty not to protect myself, lest I should feel anxious about it later. On Friday, he was at communion. I wanted to go to him on Saturday, but he was preaching on Sunday and I know that he doesn’t like to speak to anybody then. So I was with him today, Monday. Sure enough: [“]Good day, dear friend, dear friend[”]―and then he said that he didn’t have time to speak with me[:] “I’m saying it frankly.” I understood him. Meanwhile I knew that I should restrain myself and thanked him for it because it showed his confidence in me. And then he repeated this [“]dear friend[”] 6 or 7 times, slapped my back and pa�ed me―i.e., he’s frightened to speak with me because he’s frightened of ge�ing too involved with me. He did indeed say, [“]Come another time[”] but he fully realized it wouldn’t be this week, and then he’s off to do his visitations, so it was easy to understand the message. But thank God I did it and didn’t protect myself. And thank God that I didn’t get to speak with him. For even though I merely wanted to explore the possibility of arranging a position for me prior to making a binding decision―who knows, it could have been dangerous for me. However, my past life certainly has taught me the opposite: for on the same day that I, later in the a�ernoon, acted on my decision to break off the engagement, I had said the opposite that morning―and if I hadn’t done so, I wouldn’t have had the strength to do the opposite in the a�ernoon. It’s because I’m like sheer reflection. Meanwhile, it’s no doubt best for me

10

15

20

25

30

35

4 τελος] Greek, telos, goal, or aim.

114

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 193 a

1849

(a�er I’d met Mynster on Friday)

Yes, it’s true. Would to God I’d been offered a post; then it would certainly be much easier for me to understand that I couldn’t take it. But this is where, once more, my self-tormenting tendencies appear. When it isn’t offered to me, then I fear that I didn’t take the necessary steps because I wanted to protect myself.

b

that it happened as it did. What might have helped me was a welcoming disposition with regard to my idea. If that had happened, then I would surely have gained strength to let it go in order to do just the opposite. But if there had been resistance to my idea of ge�ing an official position, then the situation could easily have been damaging for me and induced me to make more of an effort at this point to make it possible―for its realization would always have had to be weighed up in a quite conclusive manner. And a failed effort of that sort could perhaps contribute to souring what rlly occupies me.

5

117

10

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 192 1849

NB11:192, with NB11:192.a in the margin. Even though Kierkegaard recorded the entry lengthways, he still reserved room in the margin for later additions.

115

116

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 194

1849

There’s something untrue about this, and there’s something of a poetic mood. When the accident happened with Strube and he became a bit confused because he’d been pondering things too much, it struck me that it would really be dangerous for me to stop producinga. On the other hand, for a long time I’ve hoped that death would help me avoid [taking responsibility for] publishing books.

a

119

194

5

a

so that while it lasted, I worked through the usual quantity with pedantic precision.

Oh, �e on me! Fie on me! All the extraordinary things God has done for me and to me, with inconceivable love, patience, and grace―and should I then betray or defraud the cause in the decisive moment[?] Ah, but what good has it done me so far? Have I found peace?a No, in my heart of hearts―where I understood what I was to do―lurked an anxiety that if I didn’t commit myself to the good, God would force me to do so, e.g., by letting me lose my mind or in some other way, until I learned to die to the world and obey. Or an anxiety that I might end up living my whole life with this matter on my conscience, like a woman who aborted her fetus. [With regard to] the �rst one (that God should use force), I’ve almost gone as far as giving in to it, hoping in that way to �nd the knot loosened and to be relieved of responsibility. For I’ve been extremely anxious about saying too much about myself.―Fie, �e! Instead of doing what I ought to do―and what I ought to do [in another sense] as well: let God take care of everything! [I]f I need peace and quiet, he’ll arrange it for me.

10

15

20

―― ―― The Three Minor Ethical-Religious Treatises are to be published, but naturally anonymously. For they contain the part about Mynster. I can’t do more than this[:] I can let it be said without personally saying it. Here again Governance has assisted me by withholding this from me until now so that I haven’t already committed myself by saying it personally. If I don’t take a stance now, right this moment, or at least as soon as possible, then the total effect of my activity as an author is lost; not to mention if I were just to let some time pass by (and who knows how long), seek a post, and then publish the rest bit by bit, pseudonymously. The de�nitive point is thus absolutely lost: an internally referential authorial activity, supported by the religious. The de�nitive point is thus absolutely lost, contemporaneousness, and everything becomes less meaningful―in order to secure a post and avoid personal dif�culties. Short and to the point[:] I understand, and do so as clearly as possible, that I would betray truth and defraud God (in a sense it would also be a betrayal of the state if I kept silent about something―i.e., if I had something lying ready―for the sake of getting a post) if I didn’t act

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 194

5

120

10

15

20

1849

117

on it now, today rather than tomorrow. But it seems to me that it’s beyond my strength. But if I can do it, now that I have everything ready, now that that’s truth, then I shall. The rest is God’s affair. Only when I’ve done it will I �nd peace. Then I’ll have a good conscience so that I can accept a post later on, if it’s offered, for [in that case] I won’t have been deceptively silent. Oh, God―how heavily this all weighs upon me―I must thank you that the moment of decision hasn’t passed. If it doesn’t happen with the accelerating pace of my entire activity as an author, if it’s been stopped, then I will have betrayed my mission. And then, then I could never make up for it once this falsehood entered into it[:] the fact that the last part [of the authorship], which belongs together as a single unit, came out later instead of when it was written. Oh, and [in that case,] everything you had done for me, O God, would be so demeaned―and I would have done it all to protect myself. Sometimes a person struggles in such a way that he’s tempted to untruthfully say more about himself than is true, thinking that this [“]more,[”] whether it’s true of him or not, will make him successful in the world. I’ve struggled in another way: to want to make the impression of being less gifted than I truly am, because I understand very well that that is the only way I’ll be tolerable to others and the only way I’ll get along with them. The other path can be ruinous for me, humanly speaking, especially in a country like Denmark. I would most prefer to remain quiet about what I’ve been given―but that is disloyal God. If glory and honor tempted the exceptional person then keeping quiet would be a matter of self-denial, but my case is virtually the opposite and therefore keeping quiet is disloyal to God.

118

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 195

1849

Well, in God’s name! What makes me most anxious is The Point of View for My Work as an Author. It can still easily be held back; there’s still plenty of time until I’m ready to publish it, and at that time, I’ll find the strength to include it. This time I’m learning what it means that I would like to ask to be free from taking this step―Oh, and that’s why for a period I hoped that death would relieve me. And I am learning what it means to sigh: would that this fire was set. Moreover, no reflections! Now they would just weary and confuse me. I will stick as concisely as possible to this: In God’s name.

121

195

5

10

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 196–199

1849

122

196

5

10

The passage right at the beginning of Tertullian’s book on patience (translated by Ferd. Fenger in J. Møller’s New Theological Library, vol. 16, 1830, pp. 64ff.) has really struck me: [“]I acknowledge before the Lord God that in a somewhat light-minded and perhaps even shameless manner I have made bold to write about patience―I who myself am so far from it.[”] It reminds me of my collision: to what extent might someone dare portray an ideal Christian although he himself is so far from it. Poetic existence is one thing, because in its striving it by no means concerns itself with the ideal but merely portrays it. It’s another thing to essentially strive [for the ideal] but nevertheless to artistically portray the ideal that he himself is so far from realizing.

15

197

20

198

25

199

30

123

It’s as if Xt said to the soul: [“]why are you anxious because of me and why do you become more anxious in my presence[?] For I am your savior. Believe me, I am. This is not an assurance; this is something much more than assurance: I let myself be crucified for you. If this can’t convince you, then nothing can.[”]

The pagans had much more sense for genuine religiosity in daily life than we Protestants, especially. Just think of how they first commemorate the gods at their meals, festivities, and almost everywhere else.

If Goldschmidt wanted to defend himself by saying that I myself gave him permission to rail against me, I would reply: “I am entirely satisfied with that explanation.[”] In truth, Mr. G’s behavior was like that of a boy, I knew that well enough. But that he himself should concede that in relation to me he was like a boy, or more exactly a li�le kid, I didn’t expect that. I myself gave him permission! Quite right! A child naturally doesn’t dare hit his father. But if one day a father says to his child [“]Go ahead and hit me,[”] and the child does it―it would be unrea-

119

120

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 199–201

1849

sonable and inconsistent if the father were to punish or get mad at the child; he himself gave permission, a�er all. That’s not how it is with Mr. G, no, that’s how it is with li�le G. I myself gave him permission, that is, he saw himself in relation to me as a boy, a kid, for a man always acts on his own account; one can’t give permission to a man in that way, least of all in casu, where I had to take responsibility for all the boyish pranks he played on me in the public eye, so that at one and the same time I was both the object of a�ack and the party responsible for it. So I gave him permission―and then he railed against me. Fine! Not one more word about it! It’s to be understood like this: Yes, I forgive you entirely, my li�le lad, E.M.G.―This is the frightful editor of The Corsair. By the way, it’s no doubt true for him, as he says, that he understood the whole affair in that way. If in this respect he’s representative of his whole audience, then it wouldn’t have occurred to a single one of them to insult me―if I hadn’t given permission myself! That’s fine, understood like this. Ah, yes, I forgive you all, li�le children.

5

10

15

20

It appealed to me as soon as I wrote it down, and it appeals to me still as a mo�o for Fulfillment’s Complete Works, a mo�o that should be on the title page itself, these words from the Three Godly Discourses of 1849: [“]When the moment to bloom has arrived, and it seems to the lily to be as calamitous as one could possibly imagine―in its simple way the obedient lily understands just one thing: now is the time.”

200

Indeed, in truth I understand it very well: to want to build your salvation on any work whatsoever, daring to come before God with such things―this is the most repulsive of sins, it holds Xt’s atonement in contempt. Xt’s atonement is everything, unconditionally, because in the end it doesn’t ma�er what a pers. does. But then it’s important that this infinite atonement doesn’t either make peop. completely sluggish or smother the childlike aspect in them which, childlike

201

25

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 201

124

1849

and simple, wants to do everything as well as possible, always with God’s permission, of course, and not on its own account, always thankful and always mindful that [mere] talk about the atonement’s infinity is nothing.

121

122

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 202

1849 125

No, it can’t be done! I can’t do it; it’s too much for me! The Point of View can’t be published after all―and then it doesn’t matter when the other existing treatises are published, or [at least] it’s less important. Something else that constantly causes me anxiety is that there’s something untrue in it; at the same time, I have a quite different worry that I’ll become absorbed in these kinds of decisions.

202

5

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 203

1849

123

126

203

5

10

15

20

25

30

This is also untrue; it was moodiness. But I’ve gone too far and entangled myself in re�ection. I can’t act with the kind of rashness as I did before, con�dent perhaps in my ability to calculate everything, because �rst of all, I’ve become so entangled in re�ection and, secondly, I’m carrying an extra burden. With faith, conversely, I can start by doing something, and perhaps greater strength will come. Yes, truly I need God this time, as I have never felt before. The audacious rush that I felt previously when making a daring move (which was perhaps not really very praiseworthy but was youthful in any case) has yielded to a sense of duty. This time I would certainly rather not act, I would willingly make the humble acknowledgment that I cannot, that God has worked me to the point of exhaustion, and let me assent to an undertaking that has humbled me. But no matter how bene�cial such humiliation might be for me, it doesn’t therefore follow that I am not to act, for this sense of humility could also be a ruse by which to let myself off. Now God will surely help me. The Sickness unto Death has now been given to the printer. And in a manner that I have never sensed before, I have recently felt the comfort of Christ as Savior. I’ve always felt a despairing melancholia but I’ve kept silent about it and, if I dare say so, have remained God-fearing. That is, I’ve never dared hope that I could be free of it, but I have silently sighed under its weight, essentially comforted by the fact that God is nevertheless love and comforted by the hope of eternity. Now it’s become clear to me that Christ is a Savior because he saves one from misery. Yet this, my hope, has no bearing on the question about whether I am now to act by publishing these writings or not, as if it were in any way meritorious on my part. Oh no. [T]his too is in truly inverted: that if it can be done and I manage to endure, then it is I who am to thank God for having granted it to me. The whole affair is utterly simple. I consider it my duty to act, my duty to make sure that God can get a grip on me―and then he will care for the rest. Oh, prudence is a dangerous friend. It seems so tempting not to act, to protect yourself― then you’re safe. Ah, but in the long run, in hindsight, you might discover that in a higher sense it was imprudent.

124

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 204

1849

127

The other idea is perhaps more rash, perhaps more audacious, perhaps a greater hazard― but that doesn’t mean it’s truer for me, and to be true is still the primary demand. If I consider my own personal life, am I thus a Christian or is my personal existence not a purely poetical existence, with even an element of something demonic[?] The idea is to dare measure myself against such a colossal standard, making myself so unhappy that I would �nd myself in a situation where I could really become a Christian. But do I really have the right to do it in such a dramatic way that the Christendom of an entire country becomes involved[?] Is there not something dubious about all this, about treacherously setting a �re in order to throw oneself into the arms of God―perhaps, because it might turn out that I didn’t become Christian after all. Nothing pertaining to my authorial persona can be used at all because it’s clear that instead of escaping the interesting, I would just become more deeply immersed in it, and it would have the same effect on my contemporaries. The simple move is easy: to keep silent and then to see about getting a position. That I now will cease to be an auth. is certain, but I will nevertheless retain this element of the interesting: I myself decided to put an end to it, of�cially, in character. The simple way is to tacitly begin with the new project; and all this solemnity about wanting to put an end to it is an extremely dangerous matter. The simple matter is to really put an end to it. I regret and reproach myself for the fact that in many previous entries in this journal there are indeed attempts at self-aggrandizement, which God will forgive me for. Up to this point, I am a poet and absolutely nothing more than a poet, and it’s a desperate struggle to try to go beyond my limits. The work Practice in Christianity has great personal signi�cance for me―does it follow that I should acknowledge it straightaway[?] I might be one of the few who needs such strong remedies―and I, I, instead of bene�ting from it and really getting serious about becoming Christian, I start by acknowledging it[?] Reverie. This work and all the other writings are ready and the time might come when they’ll become applicable and I’ll have the strength to do it, when it will be truth for me. It’s true in many ways that the entire production has been my education―�ne: does that then mean that instead of getting serious about becoming a true Christian that I become a phenomenon in the world[?] At any rate Sickness unto Death is now coming out, but pseudonymously with me as editor. It is labeled “For Edi�cation.” It is beyond my category, the poet’s category: edifying. Like the River Guadalquibir (this has occurred to me before and is recorded somewhere in this journal), which plunges underground, so also is there a stretch, the edifying, that carries Note. I was rlly a bit offended by Mynster, and that blow was just enough to push me toward what I had previously been so close to doing.

[a]

204

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 204

1849

125

[a]

5

128

10

15

NB This is self-tormenting exaggeration, because what affected me was not at all a personal issue with Mynster but rather the fact that when it didn’t work out with Madvig and Mynster, I took it as an indication from Governance that this was the wrong path and that I had to act in the opposite direction.

my name. There is something lower (the aesthetic) and something higher, which is also pseudonymous because my personality doesn’t correspond to it. The pseudonym is named Johannes Anticlimacus, in contrast to Climacus, who claimed not to be Christian; Anticlimacus stands at the opposite extreme: a Christian to an extraordinary degree―I myself push it only to the point of being a perfectly simple Christian. Practice in Christianity can be published in the same way, but there’s no rush. But none of the work about my authorial person [can be published]; it’s an untruth to anticipate [the conclusion] while still alive, which only means converting oneself into the interesting. In general, I must now move in completely different directions. I must dare believe that through Christ I can be saved from the grip of melancholia in which I’ve lived; and I must dare to try to be more economical.

126

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 205–207

1849 129

The desire to reform and awaken the whole world―instead of oneself―is a misleading path that lies all too near, and it is especially misleading for hotheads with a lot of imagination. I, too, have had a tendency to almost demonically want to force myself to be stronger than I am. As those of a sanguine disposition are called upon to hate themselves, perhaps I myself am called upon to love myself and renounce this melancholic self-hatred, which in a depressive way is nevertheless almost an indulgence. I also have the fault of constantly accompanying myself with an authorial consciousness and almost desperately demanding of myself that I act in character. Humility is therefore just what I need with regard to this point. I was humbled earlier when I had to break off the engagement; it was a shock to my pride.

205

At times I almost become anxious and afraid when I consider that the law commands that one shall love God, something that at such moments seems to me to be far too rash. At such moments I wonder how one can do it; the maximum requirement seems rather to be able to sustain the blessed thought that God loves him. What excessive audacity for a pers. in relation to God to dare say of any single action in his life, let alone of some period of his life, or of his whole life: [“]I did it for God’s sake.[”] Even if I sacrifice a great deal in a good cause, I nevertheless rely on God to give me strength to bear it, and thus I still haven’t done it for God’s sake but, at most, with confidence in God, with him in reserve.

206

One can also see how dead, external, and formalized everything has become in Christendom when, merely at random, one opens a book like Rothe’s about the Church year, (though I’m not critiquing him on that point). Here you find that in Advent, the gospels are taken from the story of J. the Baptist; one can only worthily prepare oneself for the great festival by true penitence. And it continues like that throughout. One reads these things as if they were the instructions of a dance teacher about how a

207

5

10

20

25

30

35

130

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 207–210

5

208 10

209 15

20

210

1849

127

dance is to be performed: one couple leads, and then you form a line, etc., etc. One is penitent on the 4th Sunday of Advent, full of Christmas cheer on Christmas Day, and how should we feel on “Pork Sunday” and “Fat Tuesday” as these days were called in earlier times?

They argue over whether God will save everyone or just some―almost forge�ing the most important issue: You, O God, desire my salvation; would that I might desire it myself.

J. Climacus and Anti-Climacus have several things in common, but the difference is that while J. C. places himself so low that he even claims that he isn’t Xn, one seems to sense that Anti-C. considers himself to be Xn to an extraordinary degree; at times, one also seems to sense that Xnty is rlly only for demoniacs, though without understanding this term in the direction of intellectuality. He is personally responsible for confusing himself with the ideal (this is the demonic in him), though his portrayal of the ideal might be entirely true, and on that ma�er, I’ll yield. I positioned myself above J. C., below Anti-C.

The truth of the demands of ideality is diminished when portrayed in the so easily deceitful solemnity of Sunday and in the distance between Sunday and everyday life.

[a]

On Anti-Climacus.

[b]

cf. p. 260. cf. p. 267.

[c]

1

128

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 211

1849 131

The whole idea, which I completely abandoned long ago, of publishing everything in one volume, including the piece about my authorship, was but a desperate idea and so too something of a demonic one. Rlly, something else happened. All the recent sufferings of these labors of re�ection have actually served as my own awakening. Only now am I able to say that Christ has revealed himself to me such that I understand a savior to be someone who helps a person out of his misery and not just someone who helps him bear it. But the fact of the matter is that because of the miserable melancholia that at one point was a kind of partial insanity, I have never been able to get control of the self I am, understood in the ordin. human sense. For me, then, the only possibility was to operate as pure spirit, and this is why I could only become an auth. So, �nally (as a result of working this way), I wanted to put everything into it―and then to completely withdraw on my own terms, again because I, inhumanly, have been able to work only as spirit, that is, in the third person. With all this inner agony, together with the superiority I’ve enjoyed and the mistreatment I’ve suffered, I’ve been brought to a point where it seemed as if I myself were a Governance that should arrange an awakening. The only thing that both satis�ed me and comforted me was that I could do this for the truth and was allowed to do so. Now Governance has taken me along and required me, in self-denial, to let this rash but also demonic action be. If, then, God enables me to function in a more human way so I don’t always have to see myself in 3rd person and so that I can personally intervene in actual situations, then I will have been helped.

211

5

10

15

20

25

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 212–214

1849

129

132

212

5

213

15

20

25

The work is said to be “for edification”; the preface speaks of it as edifying. It should rlly say: [“]for awakening.[”] For this is its basic character and this is the progression of my work. In essence it is also for awakening, but this doesn’t need to be said yet. This will come out decisively for the first time in the next work: Practice in Christianity.

Here too one sees how disturbing it is to raise a child in Xnty, that is, to really raise a child―for in the sense that millions of Xns do it, it’s a ma�er of complete indifference. Take such a child. Now, as might well happen to every child, let him stumble upon some difficulty in himself, something that causes him to suffer. What, then, is more natural for a child than, first, to hope that the pain can indeed be eased and that there is some remedy for it, and, secondly, to turn and entrust himself to another or to others with it. But not for this child. He’s been taught that God is the only help―which is clearly much too elevated a notion for a child. On the other hand, he’s been taught that Paul had a thorn in the flesh, and that all pious people must suffer extraordin[arily]. Ergo he entrenches himself in it and thereby begins primitively with a distorted relation to himself qua hum. being, because he used what is most decisive much too early.

30

214

35

The entire public life of the state is divided into two parties. The one party seizes offices, power, and influence, but under the solemn appearance of doing the world a favor, the serious business of life. Then the newer party makes its appearance (the opposition); it discovers a new role: to play the martyr, make sacrifices, etc.―which turns out to correspond

[a]

On The Sickness unto Death.

[b]

Cf. p. 259 in this journal

1

130

1

[a]

On a postscript to The Sickness unto Death.

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 214–217

1849

with point-by-point accuracy to how many subscribers there are.

133

One sees how fraudulent all this Xn eloquence is in an example from the otherwise noble Fenelon (works translated by Claudius 2nd vol. 208. The essay: “in der Fast- Buß- und Bet-Zeit,” together with: “am allerheiligen-Tage”). In the former he cries woe over those who don’t push the God-relationship to the point of becoming like a child in his mother’s arms. In the la�er he discusses how the saints were constantly engaged in hand-to-hand combat with themselves and were never safe, not for a single moment. The single most deplorable idea in the world is that “eloquence” has become the medium for proclaiming Xnty. Sarcasm, irony, humor are much more closely related to the existential aspect of Christianity.

215

Proverbs 28:1: The ungodly flee and there is no one who pursues them. Deut 28:65–66. You shall be without peace. The soles of your feet shall not find a resting-place. The Lord will make your heart tremble, your eyes shall be consumed, your soul distressed … and you shall be afraid by night and day, and find no assurance of your life.

216

At first I thought of adding a postscript by the editor. But, first off, one can see that I myself am already present in the book, e.g., the part about the poet of the religious; secondly, I was afraid

217

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 217–220

134

5

218 10

15

20

25

219

of contradicting what another work polemicizes against (in one of the pieces that make up Practice in Christianity) about initiating investigations rather than preaching. Incidentally, the dra�s of this postscript are in my desk.

1849

131

[b]

A postscript like this doesn’t entirely fit with the tone of the book, either, and coming am Ende such humility could even embi�er.

1

[a]

5

There is a very nice category used by Luther in his sermon on the epistle for Christmas Day (the Le�er to the Hebr.), that “Christ is the radiance of his glory and the express image of his essence.” “These words are be�er understood by the heart than they are expressed with pen or tongue.” And then he gets to it: “They are clearer in themselves than any clarification and the more one seeks to make them clear the more obscure they become.” That is, they are not to be grasped conceptually. The conclusion of the same sermon: “Therefore Luke 24:32 says: ‘Christ opened the disciples’ minds so that they understood the Scriptures. He did not open the Scriptures but the disciples’ minds, for the Scriptures are open but our eyes are only half-open.’ ”

Ecclesiastes 3:27: Those who willingly place themselves in danger, will perish in danger.

30

220

35

This was a footnote to the line that says that defending Xnty in Xndom is like becoming a Judas no. 2[:] Note. When you take a closer look, incidentally, the situation is even crazier than it seemed at first

A note that wasn’t published in the book The Sickness unto Death.

3 am Ende] German, at the end.

132

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 220–222

1849

glance. The scene is set in Xndom, where everyone is Christian. Xnty is defended there―against whom? Yes, naturally, against―Xns, because in Christiandom everyone is Christian. But how in the world did it occur to someone to “defend” Xnty when the opponents are―Xn? “Yes, but they’re not real Xns”―and they’re so far from being real Xns that Xnty must be “defended” against them. What a satire on what is already satirical enough, this constellation of words: “the Christian―world”! We’re all Xn, we live in “the Xn world” where everyone is Xn, where Xnty is “defended” against “Xns,” against “Xns” who, nevertheless, are not real Xns! The only thing missing (and who knows, maybe we’ll get this far with the help of even greater enlightenment) is that those who defend Xnty, and who are thus absolutely certain that they’re Xn, aren’t real Xns, either.

1

[a]

The title of this work: The Sickness unto Death.

It ended up being titled: [“]For Edification and Awakening.[”]

[a]

cf. p. 253 in this journal.

[a]

5

A passage in the preface to the work: The Sickness unto Death.

This [“]for awakening[”] is rlly the [“]more[”] that was added with the events of 48, but also the [“]more[”] that is higher than my personality and thus also the reason I used a pseudonym for it. I use only the poet’s predicate, “edifying,” never once “for edification.”

I thought about adding this to the closing section [that reads] [“]that the form of this treatise is what it is[”]: regardless the fact that it also lies in me being who I am. But this would go much too far in transforming a fictional character into something real. For a fictional character can’t possibly be other than what he is, he can’t declare that he could also speak differently and

135 5

10

15

221 20

25

222 30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 222–223

136 5

10

223

20

25

30

35

yet be the same, he lacks an identity that encompasses various possibilities. On the other hand, the fact that he says [“]at the very least, it’s been carefully considered[”] is correct, for that can well be the case, even if it’s his only form. The fact that he says [“]it is psychologically correct[”] is a double appoggiatura, because it’s also psychologically correct in relation to Anti-Climacus. Climacus is lower, he denies that he’s Christian. Anti-Climacus is higher, a Xn to an extraord. degree. In Climacus everything drowns in humor, which is why he retracts his book. Anti-Climacus is thetic.

The Signi�cance of the Pseudonyms. All communication of truth has become abstract: the public has become the authority, the newspapers call themselves the editorial board, the professor calls himself speculation, the priest is meditation: not one of them, not one, dares say “I.” But because the �rst condition for every communication of truth is unconditionally that of personality and because “truth” cannot possibly be served by ventriloquism, it became a matter of bringing personality once more into view. Under such conditions, where the world was so unaccustomed to hearing an I, it was impossible to begin immediately with one’s own I. So it became my mission to create authorial personae, letting them step into the midst of life’s actual circumstances to get people a bit used to �rst-person discourse. Thus, my work is no doubt only a forerunner for the one who is able to say [“]I[”] in the strictest sense. But turning from this inhuman abstraction to the personal: this is my mission.

1849

133

[b]

cf. p. 249

[a]

The Signi�cance of the Pseudonyms

1

134

1

5

10

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 224–225

[a]

It seems to me that that he would have to say: [“]This doctrine about how the truth must suffer in the world is really fortunate for me; it’s helped me to a sizable income, to high rank, and esteem, to perhaps the most enjoyable life one could have in Denmark”―but then there’s nothing to weep about.

[a]

The a�ack on “Christendom” in The Sickness unto Death.

1849

A bi�er line about Mynster in poetic character (for I wouldn’t talk like this): “I believe I’ve understood this man―now a eulogy about his cleverness, his talents, his entire regime, etc.[:] The only thing I haven’t been able to understand is why this man weeps when he preaches about how truth is persecuted―he should rather laugh at it, or deny it, and say that it’s a fable, appealing to his own life. As I’ve said, the only thing I can’t understand is why he weeps when he preaches about the glorious ones who suffered for the truth; every time I think about it, i.e., about him weeping, I always start to laugh.[”]

The a�ack on Xndom (in The Sickness unto Death) is quite correct. It is really directed against the concept of Xndom; as the book itself puts it, millions and millions of Xns, just as many Xns as there are peop. In the first place this concept is absolutely unchristian. As far as that goes, individual Xns more or less bear responsibility for having made no attempt to prevent this unchristian confusion between being a Xn and being a hum. being. Thus, e.g., a “defense” of Xnty is provided for “Xns” instead of first and foremost admonishing them against calling themselves Xns. Next, when talking about it all, Xndom, one can’t ask whether there are isolated circles of truer Xns: they count as nothing when compared with the monstrosity that boldly dares to call itself Xndom or the “Christian―world.” It’s enough to make one despair, this ungodly mock combat that has opened up a great playground for priest-talk, this business of Xndom. We are in Xndom, the country is Christian, we’re all Xn. That’s what’s said. And when the priest speaks, on one Sunday he says that more and more people are becoming Xn―in Xndom, where everyone is Xn. On another Sunday it’s that more and more are starting

137

224

5

10

225

20

25

30

35

138

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 225–228

5

10

226 15

227

20

25

228

139 35

1849

135

to fall away―in Xndom, where everyone is Xn. “Xndom” is a much more dangerous concept than “the public.” It’s a stage-se�ing that for the most part transforms all talk into drivel, even if what is said is otherwise well said. Ah, but I’m only a poor single hum. being. The others are so visibly strong. And what the others say is so popular―everyone wants to hear it; they say nothing about renouncing anything or sacrificing anything and they make God into a source of sheer mildness, almost sickeningly sweetly mild.

F. F. can truthfully say (and I too) that this book is more or less wri�en with Mag. Adler in mind.

[a]

This eulogy is delivered on the assumption that “the State Church,” “established Christendom” are valid concepts. The fact that from a Christian standpoint this must be denied is something else again. But if we assume these concepts are valid (and we owe this assumption when dealing with Bishop Mynster, because it’s only fair to interpret a man in accordance with his own ideas and thoughts) then he is a great man, worthy of admiration. On the other hand, one can only a�ack Mynster if one attacks those two concepts.

[a]

If I’ve portrayed someone so low that he even denied that he was Xn, then the opposite also ought to be portrayed. And truly Xndom is in great need of hearing the voice of this sort of a judge―but I do not wish to make myself out to be the judge, as he also judges me, which is straightforward enough

[a]

On F. F.

F. F.’s eulogy on Bishop Mynster.

On Anti-Climacus [b]

Cf. p. 249.

1

136

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 228–232

1849

and as it should be; for one would indeed have a poor understanding of the ideal if he couldn’t portray it as so elevated that he was himself judged by it. 5

What is to be reformed in our time is not Church governance, etc.―but the concept of Christendom.

229

There is no Xnty in this country―and now they’re convening a synod! It will presumably be a lot like what happened when parents visited the classroom: they’ll ask questions about installing louvers in the churches for ventilation and about ge�ing rid of the collection-plates―about whether the priest’s a�ire shouldn’t be altered in some way, perhaps also by adding a ring in the nose.

230

There’s nothing at all wrong if someone is anxious about devoting himself entirely to God. “Because,” he will say, “it’s very possible, indeed it’s perhaps quite certain that God wants what is best for me in every way, but his idea of what is best for me is perhaps so elevated that it would be like annihilation for me―he is spirit, infinite spirit, and I am a poor hum. being, a beastly creation with all these many merely hum. necessities.” What love, then, on God’s part to become hum.!

231

It’s certain that given what’s preached today, Xnty has become untenable. The whole thing is a massive a�empt to make fools of peop. The priest isn’t the one farthest out there, he stays on land―and recommends and recommends Xnty, all these glorious and priceless grounds for comfort, the great good of being a Xn. But one senses―not

232

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 232–233 140

5

10

15

20

25

indistinctly―that deep down he adds: “what misfortune if someone were reduced to the point where he could only be helped with the comfort of Xnty. I help myself by earning an income (while Xt comforts the poor) and help myself with powerful friends, honor, and respect (while Xt comforts those who are despised, etc.).[”] Sermons must contain courage and wholeheartedness and truth and what is comprised therein, personality. How they talk about miracles! They praise the miraculous and add: But miracles don’t happen any longer. This rlly amounts to making fools of peop. Either they should just let go of miracles or do this: First show how the miraculous proclaims God’s omnipotence, etc. and then say: Will you be so meanhearted that you refuse to experience the joy of God because he doesn’t perform miracles for you[?] Just as the contemplation of nature (the lily and the bird) ought to be a divine diversion, so ought a discourse on the miraculous be [an expression of] dithyrambic joy over God. Edification should be sought in this extension of the soul, this bold exhalation of joy over God―and then it doesn’t matter if God performs miracles for my sake. To speak perfectly humanly, I ought to be so in love with God the Almighty, who shows his omnipotence in performing miracles, that I entirely forget about myself because of him.

30

233

35

40

De se ipso What will happen is really quite different from what I’d originally planned. When I began as the auth. of Either/Or, I no doubt had a far deeper impression of the terror of Xnty than any clergyman in the country; I might have experienced more fear and trembling than anyone. Not that I wanted to give up Xnty for that reason. No. I explained it to myself in another way. For one thing, I’d learned early on that there are hum. beings who 31 De se ipso] Latin, On Myself.

1849

[b]

137

Priests are simply fulfilling the role of advocate in relation to Xnty―they are paid for defending Xt’s cause; and if they do it, it’s regarded as a great thing. They’re not paid―to a�ack Xnty.

1

5

138

1

a

both in Church and state

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 233

1849

seem to be chosen to suffer; secondly, I was aware that I’d sinned much, and therefore I imagined that Xnty would have to reveal itself to me in this terrifying mode. But how cruel and untrue it would be on your part, I thought, if you were to terrify others, perhaps unse�ling many, many happy, lovable existences, who might very well be truly Xn. It was so profoundly alien to my nature to want to terrify others that, with both sadness and perhaps also a li�le pride, I found my joy in comforting others, I was mildness itself in relation to them―keeping the terrors hidden in my innermost being. Thus it was my aim to give my contemporaries a hint, in a humorous form (to lighten things), that greater force was needed, even if they themselves didn’t to want to understand it―but nothing more than that. I aimed to keep my heavy burdens to myself as my cross. I’ve o�en taken exception to people who, as sinners in the strictest sense, immediately set about terrifying others.―This is where the Concluding Postscript lies. Then I was horrified to see what people understood by a Christian state (and I saw it especially clearly in 48); I saw that those who ought to exercise authoritya hid themselves in a cowardly way, while mean-spiritedness raged audaciously, and I also experienced how a truly disinterested and God-fearing endeavor (and that’s what my authorial endeavor was) is rewarded―in a Christian state. That seals my fate. Now it’s up to my contemporaries themselves to decide the price of being Xn, how terrifying [it will be]. I’ll be granted―I’m tempted to say, [“]unfortunately[”]―the strength to endure. I’m really not saying this proudly. I’ve been willing to ask God to free me from this terrifying business, and I’m still willing. Moreover, I’m a hum. being myself and, hmnly speaking, would love to live happily here on earth. But because of the Christian state, Xndom, which is evident throughout Europe, I’ve decided to call a�ention to the price of being Xn, beginning here in Denmark, in such a way that the whole concept―State Church, official posts, salaries―is blown apart.

141

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 11 : 233

142

5

10

I dare not do otherwise, for I’m a penitent of whom God can require everything. I’m also pseudonymous because I’m a penitent. I will be persecuted. I’m only safeguarded against enjoying the honor and esteem that could otherwise be mine. For a few years now I’ve borne the treachery and ingratitude of a tiny country, the envy of the respectable and the mockery of the mob, in such a way that―for want of someone be�er―I am perhaps qualified to proclaim Xnty. Let Bishop Mynster keep the velvet coat and the grand cross.

1849

139

JOURNAL NB12

JOURNAL NB12 Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Alastair Hannay

Text source Journal NB12 in Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er Text established by Niels W. Bruun and Anne Me�e Hansen

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 1

145

1

1849

NB12. July 19th, 49.

143

144

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 2–3

1849

An important passage concerning the new pseudonym is found on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A passage concerning the works that have been completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

My standpoint see . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Something concerning myself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On the year 1848 in relation to me . . . . . . . . . . .

146

p. 7. p. 14 top pp. 50 and 51. p. 74.

2

5

p. 172.

p. 230. p. 262. p. 273.

3 10

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 4

1849

147

4

Texts for the 3 Friday discourses. . . . . . . . . . . . . Di�o for di�o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Di�o for di�o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Di�o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

p. p. p. p.

226. 242. 244. 261.

145

146

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 5–6

1849 148

The problem with the three ethical-religious discourses is that if I do not name Adler, the whole thing will be understood as pertaining to myself, as if I wanted to insinuate somewhat that I myself was the extraordinary one; and at that very instant the confusion would become as unfortunate as possible: if I mention Adler by name, I get involved with that desperate person, which is something I want to avoid at all costs―that was of course the reason I gave up publishing the essay on him. It would be best for it not to come out at all. The 3rd dissertation could perhaps be published separately.

5

In the sermon for the second Sunday a�er Epiphany (epistle) Luther makes a good distinction between: to rebuke, to punish, and to curse. Someone who curses wishes that evil might come; someone who punishes wishes that evil might disappear.

6

5

10

15

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 7

1849

147

149

7

5

10

15

20

25

30

Thank God I did not come to publish the material about my work as an author or in any way want to force myself to be more than I am. The Sickness unto Death is now in print, pseudonymously, by Anti-Climacus. Practice in Christianity will also be pseudonymous. I now understand myself so completely. The point of the whole thing is that there is an ethically rigorous, highest point of Christianity that must at least be heard. But no more than that. It must be left to every individual’s conscience to decide whether he is capable of building his tower so high. But it must be heard. And the trouble is simply that almost the whole of Christendom, including the clergy, not only lives in worldly shrewdness, but that they do so in shameless de�ance, and consequently they are compelled to declare Christ’s life to be fantasy. Therefore the alternative must be heard―heard, if possible, like a voice in the clouds, heard as a �ight of wild birds over the heads of the tame ones. No more than that. Therefore it must be pseudonymous, I am merely the editor. Ah, but what haven’t I suffered before reaching this point, which indeed was essentially clear to me early on, but which I was compelled to understand for a second time. For the rest, God will surely take good care of me. Were I now to continue as an author, “sin” and “atonement” would have to be my topics, just as when I recently made use of the pseudonym in an edifying discourse in order to jack up the price properly. Indeed, pseudonyms are continually used for this purpose. This idea has also occurred to me once before, precisely with respect to what Anti-Climacus is assigned to do, and it can be found somewhere in the journals, probably in NB10. What has strained me so much recently is that I have wanted to overexert myself and have wanted too much; and then, however, I myself have realized that it was too much; therefore did not do it, but again could not escape the possibility and, to my own torment, have kept myself on the pinnacle of this possibility, which incidentally, through no merit on my part, has been a very helpful exercise for me. Now there has been action, and there is air. It was a sound idea to stop my literary production by once again using a pseudonym. Like the river Guadalquibir―that image appeals to me so much. And so not one word about myself in relation to the entire authorship, such a word changes everything and misrepresents me.

148

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 8

1849 150

1

5

[a]

And furthermore, when the whole of religiousness is merely Sunday solemnity during the quiet hours, where will the possibility of offense come from? The possibility of offense of course is rooted precisely in the fact that solemnity must be in that which is everyday.

To the natural hum. being, the Christian view of life must appear as hatred of life, and the pagan qua pagan was right to note the Xns’ odium generis humani. “Established Xndom” has botched everything together with hum. sympathy, and therefore the natural hum. being almost approves of―yes, of something that is of course not Xnty.

4 odium generis humani] Latin, hatred of humanity.

8

5

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 9

1849

149

151

9

5

10 10

It’s quite true that a pseudonym had to be used. When the requirements of ideality are to be set forth at their maximum, one ought to do everything to guard against being confused with them, as though one were oneself the ideal. Assurances could of course be used to safeguard against this. But the only certain way is this reduplication. The difference from the earlier pseudonyms is merely this, but it is essential: that I do not retract the whole business humorously, but de�ne myself as someone striving.

Incidentally, it is quite remarkable that the preface to the three godly discourses about the lily and the bird came to have the wording “as opposed to the pseudonym, which was offered and is offered with the le� [hand].” This is probably best understood in connection with the second printing of Either/Or, but it has also, of course, come to be significant with resp. to the new pseudonym.

150

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 11–12

1849 152

1

[a]

On the review of H. H.’s book in Kirketidenden.

It is splendidly put by Thomas à Kempis. Adversities do not make a person weak; rather, they show what strength he has. 1st book chap. 16.

11

H. H.’s li�le book is reviewed in the Kirketidende (Saturday, July 21). They think it is by “a quite young auth. who has read Mag. K.” Good. What critics! This li�le book is of great significance. It contains the key to the greatest possibility in all my works, but not the one I have wanted to realize. And the second essay contains the most important of all ethical-religious concepts, the concept that I have carefully allowed to remain empty until [the right person] comes. But I will not say anything about the book. For, as I have expressed it earlier, I see it as a false point de vüe signifying that I will change direction. Perhaps it is also even a li�le feint by the reviewer in order to lure me out onto thin ice. If anything is to be wri�en about this review, I must take up the defense of this “young pers.” with the thought that he [the reviewer] had treated him unjustly. If it could make him happy and perhaps be of some recompense to him―who, of course, according to the views of the knowledgeable reviewer, is a quite young pers.―then I can assure him that it is with quite extraordinary interest that I have read the li�le book in which I have seen grasped a point (the sympathetic collision) that, so far as I know, no one in this country has grasped until now, with the exception of my pseudonyms; and the book has properly found and both grasped and illuminated what is perhaps the most important ethical-religious concept: authority. Assuming that this is, as the expert reviewer says, a quite young pers., I would say to him: Keep on writing, young friend, you are without question the person to whom I would entrust the task of being my successor. But nothing is to be done; I will not get involved with that point. It will remain a li�le amusement.

12

16 point de vüe] French, properly “point de vue,” point of view.

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 13–15

1849

151

153

13

5

10

“The Church” rlly must represent “Becoming,” while the “State” represents “the Established.” This is why it is so dangerous if State and Church grow together and become identified. With respect to “State” it is the case that even if one or another institution is problematic, inasmuch as it is the established order, one must be very cautious about abolishing it, precisely because the “State” is part of the idea of “the Established,” and one is perhaps be�er served by staunchly upholding a less than satisfactory established order than by reforming it too early. With “the Church” precisely the opposite is the case, because its idea is becoming. “Becoming” is more spiritual than “being established.” The servants of the Church therefore ought not be civil servants, probably not even married, but those expediti who are suited to serve “Becoming.”

15

14

20

25

15 30

35

While the whole of existence is disintegrating, while everyone capable of seeing must see that all this about millions of Xns is a sham, that it is more likely that Xnty has disappeared from the world: Martensen sits there arranging a system of dogmatics. What does it mean that he occupies himself with this sort of thing? It means that as far as the faith is concerned, everything is in order here in this country: we are all Xns; there is no danger afoot here; we have occasion to indulge in scholarship―as everything else is in order, what is important now is the point in the system at which the doctrine of angels is to be situated, and so on.

It is what I have so o�en said. Speculation can comprehend everything―but not how I have come into faith or how faith has come into the world. But philosophy always understands faith to be a sum of doctrinal propositions. It occurs to me that I once read this in the third part of the younger Fichte’s Grundzüge zum System der Philosophie, Die speculative Theologie, Heidelberg 1846. But I have looked for it again

13 expediti] Latin, unencumbered, free.

[a]

Martensen’s Dogmatics.

1

152

1

5

a

I have a marked a passage on p. 178 in my copy, but it does not seem to me that this was the passage.

[b]

10

But now I see it was in fact the passage I was thinking of, for I find it quite accurately cited in Journal NB, p. 125.

[a]

Martensen’s Dogmatics.

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 15–18

1849

and have been unable to find it.a But perhaps I wrote it down in one or another journal from that time. In any event that is a ma�er of indifference. But what is certain is that it is ridiculous to see the certainty with which a dogmatician sits and arranges a system―and God knows whether faith is to be found in the world.

5

154

It is really ridiculous! Now we have had this talk of system and scientific scholarship, etc.―and then finally the system arrives. Great God and Father!―my most popular piece is more rigorous in its conceptual definitions, and my pseudonym Joh. Climacus is seven times more rigorous in his conceptual definitions. Martensen’s Dogmatics is indeed a sort of popular piece that lacks the powerful imagination or something of that sort that could impart value to this sort of thing. The only scholarly feature I have found is that it is divided into §§s. He has no more categories than does Mynster. And oddly enough, Mynster is almost the person cited most frequently, and as―a dogmatist. And at one time it was Mynster whom “the system” was supposed to overthrow.

16

So I am opening the valve: this means the pseudonym, AntiClimacus, the halt. Awakening is the �nal thing, but it is too lofty for me personally―I am after all too much of a poet.

17

Christianity tends everywhere toward actuality, toward being made actual, the only medium to which it truly is essentially related. It does not want to be possessed in any way other than by being actualized, does not want to be communicated except in or for the sake of edification and awakening. It must always be assumed that there are some people who do not possess it or who are at any rate lagging behind: so work must be done for

18

10

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 18–19

5

10

155

15

20

1849

their sake. But (unless those who do so would dare assert that everyone is now a Xn) Xnty must not be communicated in the medium of repose. Therefore, from the Christian point of view, the artistic, the poetic, the speculative, the scholarly, the pedagogical are sin―how dare I grant myself the repose to sit in this fashion and dabble with it[?] Martensen, whose work is inventing half-expressions and definitions, also talks about how Xnty must be a life, an actual life―now the assurances begin―a real, actual life, an entirely real, actual life in us; one must not relate to Xnty via the imagination. Good. But now, what does Martensen’s own existence express? It expresses that he wants to be a success in the world, to have great honor and respect, have a high position, etc.―is this the actualization of Xnty[?] As a philosopher Martensen gives assurances―absolutely not a dialectician, and as a Xn he also merely gives assurances. Everywhere there is nothing but rhetorical categories―which are very capable of beguiling peop. I am indeed li�le more than a poet inasmuch as I have not had the courage, a�er all, to dare expose myself to mockery and endure it. But I have had the advantage of economic independence. I do not believe I am capable of more. I am withdrawing; but with God’s help I will retain a spirited notion of those who were capable of more.

25

19

30

35

40

In the capital, “the mass” is so li�le penetrated by Xnty that if one truly wants to be a priest one cannot escape becoming a martyr unless one plays hide-and-seek in cowardly fashion, à la Mynster and Martensen―and gives assurances. But I lack even the physical strength to become such a martyr. Therefore I am withdrawing and am choosing a lesser stage, which is suitable for a personality that is so poetic, for someone who has done his 7 years’ service on a greater one. If when I was 29 years old I had understood what I understand now, perhaps I would have had the strength to do more, but two tasks of this sort are too much for one person: only to reach the beginning a�er 7 years’ strenuous labor. No, it is too much; but my works will inspire someone else who will therefore begin much earlier.

153

154

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 19–22

1849

So in any event it is best to stop and not communicate poetically something that peop. will merely view as a pointless addition.

1

[a]

How “the people” have related to Xt.

The way in which “the people” really related to Xt can best be seen in the gospel of John, chaps. 5, 6, 7, 8. At one moment the people want to kill him, at the next moment they want to deify him. A remarkable passage, incidentally, is chap. 7, v. 12 and 13: “and there was much murmuring among the people concerning him … Howbeit no man spake openly of him for fear of the Jews”―where of course an antithesis between the people and the Jews is established. The original text reads: εν τοις οχλοις―and δια τον ϕοβον των Ιουδαιων.

20

10

156

15

1. From a Christian point of view a dogmatic system is a luxury item; in calm weather, when one can count on at least the average run of peop. being Christians, there could be time for such things―but when was that ever really the case? And when the weather is stormy―then systematizing is evil, then all theology must be edifying. Systematizing contains an indirect falsehood, as if―inasmuch as there is time to make systems―it was done and se�led that we are all truly Xns. 2. A dogmatic system must not be erected on the basis of comprehending the faith but on the basis of comprehending that one cannot comprehend the faith. The fact is that from a Christian point of view, “the priest” and “the professor” must say one and the same thing, except that the prof. must say it to the second power. If there are rebellious spirits who will not be satisfied with “the priest,” they are to come to what is more rigorous by coming to the prof. From a Christian point of view, everything is discipline; to ascend from this is to come to a more rigorous discipline. In fleeing from “the priest” one must not slip into speculative pampering but come to an even more rigorous discipline.

21

20

25

30

35

It has been a long time since I have read such a fine contribution to the genre that Lichtenberg has collected under the title 13 εν τοις οχλοις] Greek, among the people. (See also explanatory note.) 14 δια τον ϕοβον των Ιουδαιων] Greek, for fear of the Jews.

22

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 22–24

1849

“women’s writing.” It is in Berlingske Tidende, morning edition, July 25.

5

10

Governess Position Sought starting November 1, by a young woman, 20 years old, in Zealand or Funen, preferably in the country. Subjects taught, in addition to the usual school topics, are English, French, German, and Danish, plus piano and needlework. Proofs of language competency and of good character can be produced as can a recommendation from the place at which she has trained for 1 year. Please leave a note bearing the mark “L.” at the corner of Studiestræde and Larsbjørnstræde, no. 174, ground floor, inside the gate, postpaid within 14 days, indicating salary, etc.

157

23 15

20

25

30

24

35

It is so touching, this Mynsterian notion: Peace, which has now been adopted by Martensen, just as Mynster has in general utterly demoralized Martensen. What does this peace mean[?] It means that one guarantees oneself one of the most respected positions in society, with the prospect of an even more respectable one. And that is where one would like to remain and really enjoy life. Ergo one must have peace. This is tarted up as Christianity. One is therefore careful to take a li�le of everything that comes along. It looks almost as if one said almost the same thing, and to the extent that it isn’t quite the same, it must surely be because― inasmuch as one is a man of such high standing―one is above it. The tactic is never to oppose something, but always to include a bit of it. Though Mynster’s time will soon be past―and Martensen, yes, he will certainly come to feel that he is no Mynster, nor in Mynster’s time were people nearly as experienced as they are now.

If this is the truth: ne quid nimis―then Xnty is a lie, every line of Holy Scripture is madness and confusion. But what is unfortunate is that in paganism people acknowledged openly that ne quid nimis was the highest maxim of life―in established Xndom, generation a�er generation, these thousands of civil servants who demoralize themselves and the congregation

32 ne quid nimis] Latin, nothing too much.

155

156

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 24–26

1849

are rewarded for giving assurances that in their heart of hearts they are willing to risk everything if it is required. I have never seen a hum. being’s life that went beyond ne quid nimis with any particular daring―and every single Sunday there is preaching about the highest thing, about seeking first God’s kingdom―My friend, have you ever seen a hum. being who even approximated this: Seek first God’s kingdom―any priest, for example, who first asks whether it is a good call, in a good district? There must, a�er all, be a li�le truth―we must make this confession to ourselves, so that this mendacious assurance must go.

5

10

158

Yes, in a sense this is something that could cause one to lose one’s mind, and here, then, is the real possibility of offense. How o�en have I not caught myself having said to myself: Even though, hmnly speaking, you are conscious of being wellintentioned toward hum. beings, you must strive to be more loving; then things will certainly go well and you will get on well with hum. beings. And what then―then Xnty comes in and says: You fool, what do you imagine, wasn’t Xt love, a�er all―and how did things turn out for him[?] Hmnly speaking, there is something frightfully cruel in this thought. And yet this is precisely Xnty. Indeed, Xnty says, You must in no way permit yourself to be prevented from doing what you had in mind―but you must know that it will lead you to the precisely opposite goal.

25

15

20

25

All personal communication and all personality have disappeared; no one says “I” or speaks to a “you.” It is said that “faith” is the first thing, the fundamental precondition, which is the basis for comprehending; this is true―but as to whether I am a believer, whether I really am a believer: well, absolutely no question is raised concerning that. It is said that rebirth must come first―from this follows etc. But whether or not I am reborn, whether I really am reborn―absolutely no question is raised concerning that. And this is how it is everywhere. Hum. beings diligently postpone the ma�er; the judgment of public opinion is cited to the effect that it is awkward to raise the ques-

26

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 26

5

10

1849

tion of whether in fact the professor really is a believer, whether he can answer Yes or No. In the whole of Martensen’s Dogmatics, or at any rate in the portion I have read thus far, there is not one single sentence that is an honest Yes or No. It is the old sophistry of being able to talk―but not converse. Because conversation immediately establishes You and I, and questions that require Yes and No. But the talker expounds: On the one hand―and on the other hand. And in the meanwhile the listener and the reader are distracted, so that they completely fail to notice that they have not rlly learned anything.

157

158

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 27

1849 159

So now The Sickness unto Death has come out, and pseudonymously. Thus an end has been put to the confounded torment of going and overstraining myself with the too great task of wanting to publish everything at once, including the piece about my writings and, as it were, taking a desperate step of lighting the fuse under established Christendom. Now, the matter of when the other 3 books appear (and the one about my writings will not appear at all) is less important, for now it is no longer a matter of the force of a single blow. Now I will rest and be more calm.

27

5

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 28–29

28

5

10

29

15

20

25

30

161

Only a�er I had come to an agreement with Luno about printing The Sickness unto Death did I learn that Councillor of State Olsen was dead. I was very loath to weaken the printer’s impression of my business sense, and I therefore went ahead with the printing. Besides, at that time I had been so churned up by an excess of reflection that I had finally come to the point of fearing that I might completely lose hold of myself.

With respect to “her,” I am, as always, ready and willing―though if possible even more fervently―to do everything that could make her happy or cheer her up. But I am continually afraid of her passion. I am the guarantor of her marriage. If she understands my true situation, perhaps she will suddenly lose her taste for marriage. Alas, I know her all too well. And either she is essentially unchanged, and then it is extremely dangerous, or she has changed so essentially that it would not mean much to her if I made an approach. The Sunday a�er the Councillor of State’s death she was in church with her entire family (in Church of the Holy Ghost). I was there as well. In a break with her usual practice, she le� immed. following the sermon, which she doesn’t usually do, as she always stays to sing a hymn, while from time immemorial I have been in the habit of leaving immediately. As mentioned, she le� immediately, together with Schlegel. And indeed, she also contrived things so that we more or less met as I passed her on the way down from the gallery. Perhaps she even expected me to greet her. I kept my eyes to myself, however. Furthermore―even if I had wanted to

1849

[a]

159

Councillor of State Olsen has died. In this connection she has certainly come to reflect quite specifically on her relationship with me. Therefore I owe it to her to bring up the ma�er again. It is also as if Governance has assigned me the time to do this. My most difficult time is always from Aug. 9 to Sept. 10. I have always had something against summer. And now, at the time I am physically weakest, is the anniversary of my father’s death; and the 10th of Sept. is of course the day of the engagement.

[a]

On “her.”

1

5

10

15

160

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 29–31

1849

do so―a purely chance event made it impossible for me to get further involved at that moment. Perhaps it is just as well that I had had all that trouble at the printer’s just then, because otherwise I might perhaps have gone over and made an overture―flying directly in the face of my previous understanding to the effect that her father was the only person with whom I might wish―and dare―to involve myself. Perhaps she has the opposite view, perhaps she thinks that he was the very person who stood in the way of my making any sort of approach. God knows how much I myself feel the need to be gentle to her―hmnly speaking―but I dare not. And yet in many ways it is as though Governance wants to prevent it―perhaps in the knowledge of what would follow―for on that occasion it was pure circumstance that made it impossible for me to speak with them. The next time Kolthoff preached I was in the Church of the Holy Ghost, she was not there.

If it could be done, and if I had not now essentially stopped being an author, it would give me great pleasure to dedicate some piece of writing to the memory of Councillor of State Olsen. “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself” could very well serve in this connection.

5

10

15

30 20

25

Tersteegen puts it very well in a li�le piece: [“]von dem Unterschied und Fortgang in der Go�seligkeit[”] § 24, p. 443 in my edition: [“]Aber woher kommt es, daß solche theure Schri�en (the mystics) insgemein so wenig geachtet und gebraucht werden? Ist es nicht deswegen, weil die neugierige Vernun� solche Nahrung nicht darin findet, auch der alte Sinn des Fleisches und der tiefe Grund des eignen Lebens zu scharf darin angegriffen wird, und sie nicht, wie Andere, nach dem Geschmack des alten Adams und der Vernun� ein wenig mehr accommodirte Bücher, ein Raisonniren und Speculiren, sondern ein Mortificiren und Verlaügnen erfordern?[”]

28 Aber woher … erfordern?] German, But how can it be that such valuable

writings [(the mystics)] are in general so li�le esteemed and used? Isn’t it because inquisitive reason does not find such nourishment in them, as well as the fact that the old temper of the flesh and the deep grounds of one’s own life are a�acked in them, and because unlike other books, which are a bit more accommodating to the taste of the old Adam and to reason, they do not require reasoning and speculation, but rather mortification and denial?

31

30

162 35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 32–34

32

5

10

15

20

33 25

34 30

1849

The Difference between an Essential Thinker and a Professor The essential thinker always states an issue in its most extreme form; this is precisely what is brilliant―and only a few can follow him. Then the professor comes; he takes away the “paradox”―a great many people, almost the entire multitude, can understand him, and then people think that now the truth has become truer! Even if a brilliant thinker came up with the idea of “a system,” he would never get it completed―so honest would he be. But just a li�le hint to a professor about what he wanted to do―and the professor would straightaway have the system completed. The professor always seems to be a quite different sort of thinking fellow―this is how it must appear when the problem is reflected in the medium of the public, or when any and every Tom, Dick, or Harry is a thinker. Every essential thinker can only view the prof. comically. The prof. is what Leporello is in relation to a Don Giovanni, only with the addition that he cheats his way into gaining great respect in the eyes of the half-learned.

Jn 20:17. Jesus says: [“]Do not hold on to me, because I have not yet ascended to my Father.[”] I don’t understand this passage, for how should it be possible to hold on to him when he had ascended. I find something inexplicable in this u�erance.

Lk 24:31. [“]Then their eyes were opened, and they recognized him; and he vanished from their sight.[”] This can be understood as meaning that the fact that he became invisible to them was the direct consequence of their recognizing him; he cannot be recognized immediately; when one recognizes him―he becomes invisible. This is “faith” which sees; there is no intuition of the

161

162

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 34–37

1849

imagination, for intuition of the imagination corresponds to paganism’s god-images. 163

1

[a]

Martensen’s Dogmatics.

What is corrupting about Martensen is this continual talk about Kant, Hegel, Schelling, etc. It provides a guarantee that there must be something to what he says. It is just like when the newspapers write in the name of the public.

35

In Acts of the Apostles 3:17, Peter says that both the people and the authorities killed Xt in ignorance. If this is to be understood quite literally, then it of course becomes impossible to come to a clear idea of the necessity that Xt had to suffer simply because he was love and the world is evil. It is almost as if it were a sort of cunning on God’s part. He wants to save hum. beings, but hum. beings can only be saved by Xt’s death. But if hum. beings see his love, how can he be put to death[?]―So it took place in ignorance. Thus nothing from Xt’s life sheds any light on the general lot of the Christian in the world. There are a great many difficulties and problems here. And strangely enough, here one recalls the Socratic notion that sin is ignorance, just as when Paul says somewhere that he was forgiven because he had acted in ignorance.

36

How uncertain M. is can best be seen indirectly. He is apparently able to keep himself on a more or less even keel in a paragraph granted to a conceptual definition, but when he speaks of quite other things, incautious u�erances occasionally creep in. Thus, at one point (doubtless in the doctrine on angels; at any rate, it is in the doctrine on the Father and prior to § 93) he suddenly states: [“]We simply appeal to the authority of Scripture.[”] Thanks! In the midst of speculation, in the midst of the system, the speculative system suddenly comes up with this idea, this category of thought that qualitatively is altogether decisive for the question of to be or not to be.

37

5

15

20

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 37–39

164 5

1849

And then in § 93, p. 210, he says: [“]Inasmuch as we therefore explain the universality of the phenomenon of sin as coming from a free hum. act undertaken at the beginning of the development of the hum. race by the individual, who must be viewed as the beginning personality of the race[”]―here it comes―[“]So here we have the support not only of the authority of biblical tradition.[”] Thus, here speculation is made into something greater than biblical authority. What drivel his whole business is.

10

38

15

20

39 25

30

35

Even our churches express how superficial and externalized everything is becoming. When one goes into one of the old-fashioned churches, with the many closed pews, with the old-time galleries, one cannot avoid receiving the impression of how much can dwell hidden in a person’s inward self―the many closed pews were indeed like a symbol of that. But now everything is a parlor; that is how they build churches nowadays. It is embarrassing and abgeschmakt for someone to possess an inwardness for oneself, it is ostentation: “What is he doing having something for himself like that”―no, we are the public.

Most peop. continually live merely in particulars; the peop. who possess essential ideality always relate to a principle. E.g., most people consider which girl they should marry, about whether to marry her or her (the particular). For the more ideal natures, a girl, e.g., is the occasion for them to reflect upon marrying, upon the reality of marriage. And so on, at every point. And this is why the more ideal natures always appear to be laggards―because they relate to the principles instead of seizing on the particular. It is as I have remarked elsewhere in a journal: every genius consists of scrutiny of one or more questions of principle relating to existence. For most peop. everything is tradition, only that which is particular is something new. It is tradition, thus it is simply given, that one marries―the only question to be asked is: to whom?

18 abgeschmakt] German, tasteless.

163

164

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 40–41

1849

Things are so deceptive in their appearance in the “actual” moments of temporality. One sees oneself surrounded by a great mass of peop., and one thinks that, a�er all, one is just as good a Xn as they are. But in eternity! All these millions who have lived. Just think, what an incalculable host of―blood witnesses. What if this were to be the standard of measure[?] And yet, there is an even greater standard, that of the ideal. Run the experiment backward. Let worldly honor and esteem be the standard of measure, and then just take the whole world’s present generation. To be a bishop in Denmark, an excellency― yes, that’s something when Denmark is the standard of measure. But in the world it is practically infinitesimal. And in eternity sufferings are the standard of measure.

1

[a]

Martensen

M. is a droll fellow. At the end of the preface to his Dogmatics he says that nowadays what most people have within themselves is politics. What does this mean? Well, probably that they are not Xns. But now to Martensen’s personal existence―what does it express? It expresses that he―honestly―has profited from the great deception that we are all Xn. For all these distinctions, being the court chaplain, being a knight, being celebrated at social gatherings, are essentially related to the illusion that we are all simply Xn. So see, he has nothing against the illusion―and yet he also wants to be self-important by talking about how most people are not Xns. This u�erance of his can further serve as an example of how a person lacking in character can say everything, that it makes no impression. In having Anti-Climacus say that Xndom, with all these millions of Xns, is an illusion, then I have really said something less than what is said by Martensen, who of course says that most people are not Xn. And yet, people will perhaps get angry at me. How could this happen―unless people have the idea that it does in fact mean something when I say it. But Martensen―he declaims. Mynster has paved the way in this respect.

165

40

5

10

15

41

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 42–46 42

1849

It must be borne in mind that the Three Godly Discourses on the lily and the bird are the most recent thing I have wri�en. They are from the 5th of May 49. The Sick. unto Death is from mid-48.

166

43

10

15

44 20

What an achievement Concluding Postscript is a�er all―there is more than enough for three professors. But of course the author was someone without an official position and who did not seem to want one; there was no §§-importance―yes, so of course it’s nothing. The book came out in Denmark. Nowhere was it mentioned. Perhaps 50 copies were sold, so when the cost of proofreading (100 rd.) is included, the publication cost me ca. 400–500 rd. in addition to my time and effort. And at the same time I was depicted in a newspaper for the rabble, which in this same li�le country had 3000 subscribers, and another paper (also with a large circulation, Flyveposten) continued the discussion of my trousers.

Bishop Mynster has caused irreparable harm not only by genrlly making finite aims a�ractive, but also by having striven to sanctify them, so that worldly honor and esteem were in addition piety!

45

I am like a chaplain in a monastery, charged with the cure of souls for hermits and the like―but I cannot have anything to do with the nonsense that nowadays is called piety and religiosity. Literally nothing is said anymore concerning spiritual trial.

46

Christ had the certainty that what he suffered paid the debt for everyone, unconditionally everyone, and the consolation that with his every step, every word, “the scriptures were fulfilled.” He was the scriptures brought to life.

165 [a]

The Three Godly Discourses and The Sick. unto Death with regard to the time they were wri�en.

1

5

166

1

[a]

Martensen

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 47–50

1849

It is also characteristic of Martensen that he never cites Fichte the younger, Baader, Günther, but constantly Schleiermacher, whom he corrects. This means that he profits, without acknowledgment, from what has come out since Schl. and that he also profits by correcting Schl.

167

47

5

That clergy constantly talk of livings in a manner entirely different from that of worldly civil servants is certainly to some extent a�ributable to the perennial possibility a priest has of obtaining a new position. A worldly civil servant is pre�y much limited to advancement within a single department, but a priest bears in mind the nation’s almost 1000 clerical calls. Perhaps some of this is also inherent in rural life, where there isn’t much else to talk about other than incomes.

48

Geniuses are like thunderstorms: they go against the wind, terrify people, and cleanse the air. The established order has invented a number of lightning conductors against, or for, geniuses: they are effective―so much the worse for the established order, for if they work once, twice, three times―the next thunderstorm will be all the more frightful. There are two types of geniuses. Thunder is characteristic of the first type; lightning, on the other hand, is rare and seldom strikes. The second type contains within itself a category of reflection with which it disciplines itself or restrains the thunder. But then the lightning is all the more intense; it strikes the chosen points with lightning’s swi�ness and certainty―and deadliness.

49

Socrates loved the young―and why? Because there is in them a breath of the infinite, and it was this he wished to preserve. Take Mynster―he truly does not love the young; he loves demoralized men, who have been demoralized by having to make finite goals into life’s earnestness―it is also possible to rule over them.

50

10

15

20

25

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 51

1849

168

51 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Bishop M. has noticed me to the extent of thinking, with respect to me: [“]This person’s misfortune is that he has too much ideality[”]―or, in Mynster’s language―[“]He is impractical. Therefore I can take it easy with respect to him.[”] This means that from the government man’s point of view, for someone just to be even a li�le dangerous he must have an admixture of finite goals, i.e., of something base. The more ideal something is, the more calmly one can―betray it. A person who wants many adherents, each of whom in turn wants his own advantage, a share of official appointments, etc.―he is dangerous. Someone who wants to have no adherents, who himself demands nothing―he is altogether undangerous, for this is ideality, and ideality, as every statesman knows, has nothing to do in this world. If I bungled my task, became worldly, and also wanted to fight for power: Yes, thank you, Mynster would notice that―and I would become “dangerous.” The purer sort of ideality is something a person has no reason whatever to fear, and something to which a person is in no way obligated. The talents I had, the fact that I was the most diligent of them all, that I strove honestly and unselfishly: Bishop M. was aware of this. But this could not move M., nor could what he indeed also knew: that the more refined set intrigued against me and the mob mocked me. All of this could not move him even to bear witness with a single word in behalf of me and my cause. But on the other hand, in his cushy enjoyment of power he could easily and pleasantly take advantage of the fact that, shackled to him as I was by the memory of my father, I did everything to support him. No: a servant of the State Church in Mynster’s style and a teacher of Xnty―they do not at all resemble one another.

167

168

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 52–53

1849 169

The two treatises by Anti-Climacus (Practice in Christianity) can be published right away. Then with this the literary production comes to a halt; essentially (to the extent that it is entirely my own) it has already come to a halt with the “Friday Discourses.” The concluding pseudonym is a higher one at which I can only hint. The second round of pseudonymity is precisely the expression of the halt. Qua author, I am like the river Guadalquibir, which at one point plunges underground: there is a stretch that is mine, the edifying; behind it and ahead of it lie the lower and the higher pseudonymity; the [“]edifying[”] is mine, not the aesthetic, nor that which is written [“]for edi�cation,[”] and even less that which is written [“]for awakening.[”]

52

Anti-Climacus must remain as the higher pseudonymity, and therefore the article “Climacus and Anti-Climacus” cannot be used unless it is by a new pseudonym. This means I cannot be the auth. of the article. But on closer inspection I see that this had never been the intention. The article is by AntiClimacus himself. So it can be done. Though a new pseudonym would perhaps be better.

53

5

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 54–55

1849

172

54

5

10

15

55 20

25

30

Luther’s words at the very beginning of the sermon on the epistle for the 1st Sunday in Lent are true: Experience indeed teaches that the gospel has not remained pure and unsullied anywhere in the world longer than it remains within living memory. But as long as those who had first given impetus to it remained alive, it continued and grew―when they were dead and gone, the light had gone out as well. Then came the sectarians and false teachers. The la�er remark is less important. The former is completely true, though Luther himself seems not to have grasped fully the intellectual category inherent in it. The situation of contemporaneity with Xt is what is true, is the truth of the situation. Therea�er comes what is derived: contemporaneity with someone who is indeed a true Xn in the stricter sense. Xnty at secondhand is nonsense, for it is Xnty without the tension of actuality.

What contributes to my being singled out as an eccentric and as half-mad is indeed quite rightly what is good about me: that I offer a clearer impression of an idea. The lives and strivings of others―for scientific, scholarly knowledge―is something one can well understand, because they are understood in their striving for, or by virtue of, one or another finite goal: they preach Xnty for a living; they teach Xnty as professors, i.e., as civil servants: well, thank you very much―but is this Xnty? Therefore my life is indeed also a bit of an offense: what is offensive is that it does at least approximate expressing that an idea does in fact exist. The lives of others express that there exist wellpaid, excellent livings, titles, and ranks: what could be offensive about this?―no, that is truth and wisdom.

169

NB12:52 and NB12:53, recorded lengthways in the journal.

172

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 56

1849

I find it shameless that in Christian sermons the Christian clergy, and above all Bishop Mynster, dare to assert the worldly concept of dignity, a concept that is entirely different when understood in the Christian sense. From a worldly point of view, it would be beneath the “dignity” of an excellency, a refined man, to preach in the streets―but didn’t Xt do this, and in so doing has he not reconfigured the concept of dignity[?] Worldly dignity is elegance, etc., plus a refined remove; understood from a Christian point of view, it is suffering for the truth and coming entirely to the actuality of daily life.

56 173 5

10

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 57

1849

173

174

57

5

10

The concept “Christendom,” “established Christendom,” is what must be reformed (the single individual). Maieutics is what is needed. It has nothing whatever to do with changes in outward things, nor that I, for example, got hundreds of people to resemble me in the way in which I understand myself before God: it is a matter of getting human beings to become aware of the fact that every individual must seek the fundamental, primitive relationship to God. A �ank attack can be directed at the clergy―though not directed personally against one or another speci�c individual―that it has, after all, become too worldly, but not as though proposals are being made for external changes. It would indeed be impatient of me to want suddenly to abandon indirect communication and personally take responsibility for the whole project as someone extraordinary. Confusion would not be avoided despite all my restrictions and stipulations concerning this measure.

174

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 58–59

1849 175

Christian Proportions in a Very Simple Example The scriptures say: Seek first God’s kingdom. And the whole of the nation’s clergy―who, be in noted in parenthesi have perhaps in fact first sought a pastoral call―they weep, every one of them, when they preach on this. Now take actuality. In a current generation there is one person who takes this seriously. What then? Don’t governments, don’t various private individuals, force official positions and appointments on people[?] So “the others” each seek something of their own: one seeks this position, the other that position; one marries this girl, the other marries that girl, etc., etc. The only one who refrains is he who seeks first God’s kingdom. But then, does everyone honor him for being so godly as to seek first God’s kingdom and give up everything else? Oh, absolutely. No―before long people will smirk at him, he will be pitied as a poor, impractical person, etc. Thus the person who makes a serious a�empt to follow Xnty’s prescription not only sacrifices everything―he also gets pitied and mocked. If he is the quiet or weak sort, he will bear this patiently for God’s sake and probably nothing more will come of it. But if he raises his voice and testifies that this is Xnty and that he is doing this qua Xn, he will next be rebuked for being a hypocrite, he will be hated, shunned, etc., etc. I hear the objection, [“]Is it not true that Bishop Mynster, for example, is cloaked in velvet, with the Great Cross of the Dannebrog, a knighthood, bishop of all the knightly orders, an excellency[”]―would it occur to him to say that he had obtained this by seeking first God’s kingdom[?]

Oh, but how shamefully people have even made use of Christianity in order to refine what is worldly. Someone desires worldly things more than does any pagan―but in addition cloaks it with Christian disdain for everything worldly. Thank you, this is harvesting twice.

4 in parenthesi] Latin, parenthetically.

58

5

10

15

20

25

30

59 35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 60–61

1849

175

176

60

5

10

15

20

25

61 30

35

A very good counterpart could be wri�en to the scene with the two servants in Holberg’s The Happy Capsize, where the one servant has the line, [“]On the 10th hujus my master wrote a poem and was rewarded with a new coat[”]―and then the other servant speaks. A very good counterpart could be created by le�ing it be the difference betw. an apostle and a preacher in established Xndom: [“]On the 5th hujus my master (the apostle) was imprisoned.[”] [“]On the 5th hujus my master (the priest in the established Church) was made a knight of the Dannebrog for having given a speech about how the apostle Paul was imprisoned.[”] [“]On the 7th hujus my master (the apostle) was crucified.[”] [“]On the 7th hujus my master (the priest in the established Church) was invited to have dinner with His Majesty, who wanted to thank him most graciously for having delivered a sermon about how Paul faithfully embraced his martyrdom.[”] The scene could be titled “An Odd Coincidence,” and it could let the narrator tell how he had witnessed the odd coincidence of these two, one of whom had known the apostle Paul personally and had wri�en a journal of his life, the other of whom was in the service of His Reverence, Senior Court Preacher Th.; and these two would read the lines, just as in Holberg, without seeing one another.

Because everything is ambiguous, what happens to a pers. could just as easily be a test as a punishment, which is something that only the individual involved can decide for himself. So it of course follows that I, in speaking of someone else―and someone else, in speaking of me―ought to explain everything as a test. In any case, it is a dubious matter when, regarding others, a pers. tends to explain their sufferings as punishments.

4 hujus] Latin, in this (here in the sense “in this month”).

[a]

It could also be arranged so that only the dates coincided: [“]On the 25th of July 48, Paul said such and such―for which he was flogged.[”] [“]On the 25th of July 1848, John Doe said that Paul said such and such and had been flogged for it, for which John Doe was rewarded by being made a knight of the Dannebrog.[”]

1

5

10

176 1

[a]

Martensen

b

See p. 138. Note.

[a]

Martensen

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 62–64

1849

§ 128 from pp. 291–306 contains Martensen’s opposition to modern science. Here one can see clearly that he is neither fish nor fowl. When the going gets rough he protects himself with “the offense,” “the objectionable,” etc. But look, at the next instant he makes an effort to comprehend it from the other side―i.e., in order to demonstrate that it is not offensive a�er all. It reminds me very much of that noteb in Fragments where a man says, [“]It is the improbable―just wait a minute, now I’ll make it probable.[”] It is as clear as day that my category is the only Christian one: to comprehend that one cannot comprehend it, to give up wanting to comprehend it. Otherwise what happens is the conversion of faith into something entirely different, so that by going farther than faith I really go away from faith. In faith, the possibility of offense is present as a sublated element―but no farther than that, because of course I must preserve myself in faith. If I believe that now my faith is perfect, that I have faith enough―so that I can comprehend it: then the entire Christian element rlly disappears. Martensen is no sort of dialectician whatever.

62

Here one can properly see the subjectivity in Xnty. In other cases, if a poet, an artist, or the like includes himself in his own composition, people criticize it. But this is precisely what God does―this is of course what he does in Xt. And precisely this is Xnty. Creation is rlly only completed when God includes himself in it. Prior to Xt, God was certainly included in creation, but as an invisible mark, like the watermark in paper. But with the incarnation, creation has been completed by God having included himself in it.

63

Is this supposed to be scholarliness? At every instant he protects himself by saying that if we fail to think of the ma�er in this way, we fall into one heresy or another. What a way is that for a scholar to talk? If something is rich in intellectual content, what

64

177 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 64–66 178

5

10

15

65

25

66 30

35

179

1849

does it ma�er to scholarship whether or not it is heresy[?] To reject something because it is heresy is completely unscholarly. The Church makes use of faith and of the possibility of offense to protect itself against heresies. But Martensen is scholarly―he comprehends it anyway. But if he can comprehend it, then it is of course procedurally improper to reject the opposite position because it is heresy. A hodgepodge like this―well, it will probably be a great success! Martensen does not have one single category. There is no more scientific scholarship in his Dogmatics than in Mynster’s sermons, but the la�er are excellent in other respects. If Martensen would take up one single concept, I would quickly be able to demonstrate to him that he is neither one thing nor another. But such an enormous book: and then all the scholarly apparatus―and then all the dogmatics―and then it is hedged around with all sorts of evasions―and when all is said and done, the system is not yet quite completed, and so on!

What Tersteegen writes in “Stimme aus dem Heiligthum” is very true[.] v. 63. (p. 515 in my edition of Tersteegen’s writings by George Rapp, Essen, 1841) Untreu und Trägheit zu verhehlen, Läßt man sich zu den Schwachen zählen; Man scheut, zum Schein, den frommen Schein, Wenn man nicht Lust hat, fromm zu sein.

Another source of sorrow for the extraord. person is that at the moment it looks as if the extraord. person is the only one who accomplishes nothing. For even a rural schoolteacher, every father of a family, etc. accomplishes more than the extraord. person―they at least do some good or help someone, whereas the extraord. person exists only for the sake of the idea. The fact is that the extraord. person rlly exists in order to register the new price and to jack up the price―in a certain sense this is something that is of no interest to anyone whatever. The 24 Untreu … fromm zu sein] German, To conceal faithlessness and sloth,

one permits oneself to be numbered among the weak. One dreads appearances, pious appearances, when one has no desire to be pious.

177

178

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 66–69

1849

others, all of those who live in the established order, in what is given, operate by trading at the given price.

Take the paradox away from a thinker―and you have a professor. A professor presides over the whole series of thinkers from Greece up to the most recent times; it looks as if the professor stands superior to all of them. Well, thanks anyway, but of course he is someone infinitely inferior to them. A prof. such as the late J. Møller, he was a real professor―he understood how to take away the paradoxes.

67

All Christian knowledge―and all ethical knowledge in general―ceases to be what it is if it is removed from its situation. A situation (namely actuality, or the fact that a person expresses what he knows in actuality) is the conditio sine qua non for ethical knowledge. A�ention has also been directed to this in the concluding portion of “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden.”

68

5

10

15

20

That the “Christian State” Is Based on an Untruth, Not to Mention a Lie, Illustrated by the Existence of Bishop Mynster. The “Christian state” is of course one in which all the subjects are Christians, or at least where the general run of them do not publicly confess another religion. When this is the case, there naturally emerges a firm concept of the clergy, who become civil servants just like secular civil servants, and some of them will become very lo�y and distinguished as well as well-paid. When this is the case: for if it is not the case―if neither all of the subjects nor more or less the general run of them are Xn― then the Christian Church will of course be a small or a minor society in the state, and being a Christian priest would be neither a civil service position nor particularly profitable, in short, not an occupation for ambitious people. 15 conditio sine qua non] Latin, the necessary and indispensable condition.

69

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 69

180 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

1849

Now take Bishop Mynster. In order to be this distinguished and to be so qua clergyman, there must be a Christian state; his entire existence qua distinguished clergyman supports the concept of the “Christian state” on which it itself rests. But how, in fact, does this man live[?] Or what does his life express existentially[?] How has it been arranged and edited from its earliest days[?] What his life expresses is: For the sake of God in Heaven, let us not involve ourselves with the mass of peop. (in the Christian state, where of course everyone is a Xn); let us live at the greatest possible remove, and with the greatest possible distinction, from the average run of peop. We preach on Sundays, but of course in the splendid house of God, secured by all possible distinction: “Out there―no, I must take care not to preach there.” (He himself has said this or something like it orally in a sermon―it is noted somewhere in the journal, probably in NB11―and it was probably printed in his sermons when they were later published.) [“]Let us be a li�le circle of people who stay together.[”] (In one of his most recently published collections of sermons he provides the consolation, with respect to 48, that “there are, however, still circles”―namely, those in which one can still install oneself quite comfortably.) Here I will not dwell any further on the fact that the circles―or the circle―of which he is a member is scarcely the best collection of Xns, but consists of people of worldly distinction. No, even if that circle consisted of the best Xns: What untruth. He profits from the illusion that this is a Christian state (the profit is to be bishop, the supreme civil servant, having offices and other delights within his gi�, great revenues), and existentially he expresses that the great mass of people are as far as possible from being Xns, but are crude and ignorant rabble. Look, this is the Christian state. What is true here of Bishop M. is true with respect to more or less every clergyman in the capital. The situation is somewhat different with respect to clergymen with rural congregations; they do not derive any particular advantage from the so-called Christian state.

179

180

1

[a]

Martensen

b

5

see also p. 449, top, “prevenient grace, a concept that is used almost exclusively outside the Church,” yes, I should think so; and it is humbug to give the appearance that all are Xns. See Journal NB11 p. 258.

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 70

1849

§ 217, p. 447b must be noted. Martensen assumes that despite the fact that everyone has been baptized, there are “thousands and thousands who live their lives without coming into a personal relationship with Xt,” and there “is only a small band of truly awakened and reborn people.” Aber―then what right does one have to produce this illusion by baptizing everyone[?] If the Christian Church had refrained from marrying into the state (but in that case the comfortable position of the clergy would have come to an end), the question is: In that case, would there not have been many more true Xns? The Church has entangled itself in an illusion that has the precise effect of making it more difficult to awaken to Xnty.

7 Aber] German, But.

181

70

5

10

15

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 71 182

71

5

10

15

Poetically, by a Poetical Person on Bishop Mynster or Such an Erscheinung in Genrl. I do not deny that his gestures, mighty movements of his arms, are a masterstroke; when he beats in front of his breast or on his breast (where the Great Cross sits and sparkles) and says “when Paul stood before Festus in chains”….. I do not find the faintest likeness between Paul and His Eminence―not that this is to say that His Eminence is without chains: Of course, he is standing there, at that very moment, chained to the whole honor of worldly distinction, chained to the considerations of a slave to worldly distinction. Nor, then, can talk about him be like his talk about Paul: When Paul stood in chains, “he was nonetheless free”―for although he is standing there freely, His Eminence cannot be seen to be anything like “free.”

4 Erscheinung] German, phenomenon.

1849

181

182

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 72

1849 183

Practice in Christianity will be the last thing to be published. This is where I am ending for now. Thus the year 48 has been included, for the things by Anti-Climacus are all from 48. The rest are from 49. As decided, the piece that deals with my writings will be put aside. When Practice in Christianity is published it will have redeemed the pledge, alluded to in a number of places, of truly setting forth the possibility of offense. This is also essentially related to my task, which is continually to jack up the price by bringing a dialectic to bear. But also for this reason a pseudonym must be employed. The dialectical element has always been represented by a pseudonym; to make myself into that person would be both untrue and an all-too-frightfully violent means of awakening.

72

5

10

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 73–74

1849

183

184

73

5

10

15

74 20

25

30

Martensen can lecture on everything. In Dogmatics, p. 456, middle of page: “The livelier and more powerfully the proclamation of the faith appears in the world, the more it becomes a sign that is contradicted, and the world is obliged to reveal its hostility to the truth, which in turn is activated by this very resistance.” Very good for rote reading―but now to Martensen’s life: He sleeps with speculation, tarts himself up and courts the approval of philosophy, makes accommodations, etc.―and he himself praises this as wisdom in contrast to the paradox. But faith cannot be powerfully proclaimed in the absence of paradox, and paradox is precisely that which stretches the world on the rack so that the world can be laid bare, whether with or against its will. This, you see, is what can be called a professor, now, yes, as opposed to a thinker.

[a]

As I have demonstrated in every way that the whole of modernity is a dislocation of Xnty back into the aesthetic―so here, too, there is a dislocation: in an u�erly confusing manner people have broadened the concept of the state preparatory to becoming a Xn. Thousands and thousands of peop. who are far, far from being on a par with catechumens with respect to their impression of Xnty, have without further ado been made into Xns. Thus there has been a promotion: if people of this sort are to be Xns, then a mediocre catechumen becomes an outstanding Xn. And this is more or less how things are in “established Xndom.” As everywhere, first place has been allowed to lapse, permi�ing third place―which otherwise is no position whatever―to move up into an actual position, and class no. 2 becomes no. 1. The apostles, the first Xns, the witnesses to the truth, etc. become fanatics.

[a]

Martensen

The Fundamental Dislocation in Modern Christendom.

1

184

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 75–76

1

[a]

5

Note God knows whether people will one day go farther down this path and say: The wri�en word is so easily exposed to distortion, even someone with fine handwriting can make an error―therefore the printed word is necessary.

Martensen

b

1849

Dogmatics p. 480, bo�om of page, and p. 481, top. That was an odd syllogism! In an earlier § Martensen makes the case that an oral tradition is subject to distortion over time. The wri�en word is therefore necessary.[b] And now he goes on to say: “Therefore we also see that Christ does not appeal to the oral tradition of the Jews, which he characterizes many times as plants that are to be ripped up, whereas on the other hand we constantly hear him say, [‘]It is wri�en,[’]; we hear him ask, [‘]What do you read?[’]” What a syllogism. Is it because Xt views the wri�en word as more reliable, is this why he appeals to the wri�en word and not to the spoken―thus that Xt in fact assumed that both were equally divine! And now this syllogism that inserts as the middle term “that Christ in many ways designates the oral tradition as plants that are to be ripped up”―a middle term that provides an entirely different view of the ma�er and destroys the concluding part of the entire syllogism. The whole business is such a sermonic syllogism. It was used by Mynster in his sermon on God’s word―but Martensen is supposedly improving on it!

185

75

5

10

15

20

25 [a]

Martensen on me.

M. appears to be directing sarcasm at me with this talk of a sickly, egotistic life as an individual (it’s in the § on rebirth § 234). This calls for a rejoinder: What Xnty understands by health is something entirely different from what the worldly pers. understands by health. By health, the worldly pers. understands saying good-bye to infinite effort but being shrewd about finite goals, ge�ing oneself a lucrative living and a velvet-covered paunch as quickly as possible, living in aristocratic circles, doing nothing unless it leads to some worldly advantage, not fancifully serving gratis―to say nothing of paying money for doing so (no, better to take advantage of the consistory’s offer to let a person’s book be printed gratis―and then get it re-

76

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 76–77

186

5

10

1849

185

funded from the printer). And when, in addition to this, a man has been married two times, a worldly pers. will regard him as very healthy, indeed he will even see it as proof of unusual health that, in his ethical doctrines, the man himself is capable of teaching that second marriages are not praiseworthy. In this sense, you see, I am certainly a sickly person―and an egotist. To yield to an idea, to lose some of the animal health that selfishly looks a�er itself and the like―this is precisely what Xnty regards as a sign of health.

15

77

20

25

30

35

In a note to § 255, where M. speaks of “the experience that there are many baptized people who are not personally reborn and believing,” he explains by citing many grounds, among others “the Church’s imperfect administration of the sacrament, inasmuch as it has o�en given baptism to those of whom it would normally be understood that they lack the preconditions needed for the development of the gi� of grace.” There, that was something else! M. has certainly not conferred with Mynster concerning this point. The State Church would explode with the help of this doctrine of Martensen, who indeed assumes that there are thousands upon thousands who are not believers and reborn, for their children would thus also be excluded from baptism. Mynster has a be�er understanding of a State Church: he even wants to have children taken by force in order to be baptized. In the next §, however, he himself has noticed something, and he realizes that in keeping with this reasoning we might easily come to abandon child baptism.

[a]

Martensen

1

186

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 77–80

1849

A�er which things go on as usual; he doesn’t really decide anything; then he decides in § 256 that we should simply baptize all children. But as always it is just humbug. 5 1

[a]

Martensen

[a]

Martensen

This, you see, is what is in general deceptive about everything of Martensen’s. That Christianity is foolishness to the world is to be taken seriously. The Xn must be willing to suffer for the fact that what is the highest thing for him is foolishness to the world. But here comes the evasion. Instead of being willing to suffer for this, one makes the foolishness into the expression of what is deep, of what is profound, so that it rlly becomes a ba�le between superficiality and profundity. This is dishonest. One must acknowledge that it is foolishness because God wants it thus, and therefore I dare do nothing other than believe it. But if foolishness is merely the expression for what is extraordinarily profound―who wouldn’t want to be profound!

78

With respect to ordination we are told “that it does not confer any extraord. gi�s,” “but that neither is it merely a ceremony.” Fine. Then what is ordination? But this is how it is everywhere. It looks like there is something there―but nothing is rlly said. The Socratic method must be employed to reduce Martensen to Yes―and No, because he is entirely sophistical: On the one hand this―and on the other hand that. I would never involve myself with Martensen without having a Notarius publicus present, in order to have at least something that stands firm.

79

A person who is to be a teacher in existential ma�ers must always himself be marked by having exposed himself to what is genrlly viewed as being the greatest danger.

80

29 Notarius publicus] Latin, notary public.

10

187

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 80–81

5

10

15

20

1849

When Christianity struggled with the immed. passions, when the lusts of the flesh and everything associated them were the greatest dangers faced by humanity, because they were what was highest to humanity, then the teacher had to show, by being unmarried and by other means, that he was the teacher. In the age of reason, “ridicule” is the most feared of all dangers; in our times a person can more easily bear everything but being made a laughingstock, not to mention being exposed to daily ridicule―people shrink more from this danger than from the most torture-filled death. And when people say [“]It’s nothing[”] when they speak of a person who is confronted with this danger this is only a sort of mad or demonic rapport with the terror―which is precisely a part of the torture. This, then, is the danger. And therefore in our time a teacher ought to be marked by having been tested in this danger. Other people of course provide proof―by holding important offices, occupying high rank, with stars and ribbons, etc.―with these they provide proof that they are teachers. By taking the step of exposing myself to ridicule I have at least proved that I have a notion of what it is to be a teacher.

188

81

25

30

35

40

In a certain hum. sense we must entirely reverse our usual way of pu�ing the ma�er. We usually find it entirely in order that the disciples felt themselves abandoned when Xt departed, that a miracle was required in order to strengthen them, that it was easy for them to be strong as long as Xt was with them, and so on. We forget what simple hum. experience teaches. In a certain sense, the disciple leads a troubled existence as long as the master is alive and with him. In a certain sense, the disciple cannot come to be himself, wavering constantly, at one moment worried about the judgment of the teacher who is so close at hand, at the next moment wanting the teacher’s support. The law is always this: In order to gain his entire strength a hum. being must have no visible help, but only invisible help. The very same divine help that helps absolutely when it is invisible is in a certain sense, hmnly speaking, also what makes things difficult when it is visible. This is likely also the meaning of Xt’s words: It is to your advantage that he go away, for otherwise the Spirit cannot come.

187

188

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 82–84

1849

At first sight, Xnty is and must be so terrifying that only an absolute shall can drive a hum. being into it. But people have abolished this first aspect. Then they have taken Xnty’s second aspect: the mildness―and now it is recommended for various reasons, it is defended, etc. But this will come to prove quite costly to the human race. Because, as when a spoiled child, to its own detriment, moves its parents to refrain from strictness, so has the race, to its own detriment, fooled or frightened those who should command and make use of authority, so that they do not dare to say: You shall. What the world needs most of all now is this: You shall, pronounced with authority. It is the only thing that can give impetus, and a person who imploringly asks someone else, [“]Just speak strictly to me[”] understands quite well what is good for him. “You shall” has been abolished. In every situation, even in sermons, the present generation has been made into the standard of judgment. The speaker or the individual pleads his case for his wares, whether they be raisins or Xnty―but there is no teacher and there is no gathering of learners: ah, far from it, every gathering is the master, and the individual is the one being examined.

82

Truly, if I ever, even once, experienced a situation in which someone had a great terror and came to me for consolation! But it is a frightful torment to be disproportionate in this way: With my religious underpinnings and terrors―to have to console someone with a toothache and say, [“]It will surely be be�er tomorrow[”]; to have to say to someone unlucky in love that in a couple of years you will surely be engaged afresh, etc., etc.

83

One would think that it was misfortune enough not to know the time of one’s visitation―and yet this is also presented as something to be punished or as grounds for punishment. Thus in the gospel for the 10th Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday. In this sense, sin is ignorance, but a punishable ignorance.

84

5

10

15

189

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 85

85 5

10

15

190

20

25

30

35

40

1849

There is a fine bit of nonsense by Martensen; somewhere in the Dogmatics he says that even if the apostles’ writings were anonymous we would be able to detect their divine character, their qualitative difference from all other writings. Here we have heresy without Martensen’s being aware of it: the divine is supposedly straightforwardly recognizable. No, the divine is everywhere paradoxically recognizable. The tactic of an apostle is not to lecture on a teaching―so that we others then recognize that this doctrine is divine. No, an apostle steps into the midst of the peop. with his doctrine and says, This teaching is from God. This puts a stop to all intellectual deliberations, and things will now depend on the apostle’s enduring the consequences of this step. But now, for God knows how many years, the world has become totally unaccustomed with “actuality” being a�ained at all or with seeing an actual personality. Everywhere there are nothing but sheer illusions, which divert all a�ention from personality. At one moment the illusion is the public, at the next the editorial staff, at another science, at yet another speculation, etc., etc. It is always called “the cause”―in any case there is no person, and in any case people have perhaps chosen to do ba�le in this way because there is no cause. The paradox is always present in the relation to everything divine, and therefore it is always necessary to have this personality who, by asserting that it is divine, by authoritatively intruding himself upon actual hum. beings, forces them to come to a decision. I know of no one whose life has a�ained actuality in the strictest sense of the term. The appearances are deceptive, but on closer inspection one sees hundreds of illusions that have the effect that, a�er all, one does not quite exist personally, that actuality cannot quite get hold of one personally. No one says: I. One person speaks in the name of the century, one in the name of science, one on behalf of his official position, and everywhere their lives are guaranteed, by tradition, that “others,” “the others” are doing the same thing. In our times most people would bona �de be of the opinion that if the art of printing books had been invented, an apostle could just as well have done his work via the printing press, publishing his Ideas, Maxims, etc., and have lived his own life in the

189

[a]

Martensen

1

190

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 85–88

1849

manner of an ordinary author, in the greatest possible concealment, and at all costs refraining from involving himself even in the type of exaggeration of which I have made myself guilty by speaking with people on the streets and alleys. Alas, my li�le bit of exaggeration is but an infinitely weak and imperfect, distant intimation of apostolic exaggeration.

The Religious Person Who Truly Believes That God Is His Father

1

a

in which there is much game

Let me imagine such a person. Let it be a man who owns nothing and is without any worldly advantage. Then―let us imagine―he calls on a baron at his estate. The baron is kind enough to show him around personally. Among other things, they ascend a hill from which they can see far and wide, and when the baron gestures over the entire expanse he says, All this is my father’s, these woods that you see over there,a etc. Then the religious person says, Yes, but please direct your eyes upward―everything that the lord baron sees, every bird that flies through the infinite spaces, is my father’s. And in principle, then, your father’s barony is also my father’s. Ah, how many indeed are there in each generation who have the courage to believe in this simple sense that it is quite literally true that God is their father―in the clear, starry night can dare say to themselves, in humility but in faith, [“]This is my father’s[”] fully as convinced of it as the baron that it is his father’s[?]

Luther puts it well in the sermon on the epistle for the 6th Sunday a�er Easter: that the Xn must be disciplined so that every day either God talks to him (by reading God’s word) or he talks to God (by praying).

An adherent is not an α intensivum but a α privativum.

32 α intensivum] Greek and Latin, alpha intensivum, an amplifying alpha, serving as a prefix. 32 α privativum] Greek and Latin, alpha privativum, a negating alpha, serving as a prefix.

5

86

10

15

191

20

25

87

30

88

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 89–91 89

5

10

15

192

90 25

30

91

35

1849

To “a�ain actuality” also means to will to exist for every hum. being, to the extent that one can. On Sundays the priest of course preaches about loving “the neighbor,” but look, in so-called actuality every hum. being lives within a certain relativity; the others do not essentially exist for him. From a Christian point of view, I am not permi�ed to ignore existentially one single hum. being. I am permi�ed to ignore an anonymous publicist, to ignore the public and all such fantasies, but no actual hum. being. Now the problem is that if one does not will to ignore the entire crowd―then one becomes the sacrifice, for that class neither has the preconditions that would enable it to understand a person, nor does it have or can it take the time to do so, nor, again, is one able to speak with every individual―and finally, a journalist can always confuse them all over again. To exist for the crowd when one has something true to communicate and does not want to deceive (for mundus vult decipi) is eo ipso having to become the sacrifice. Here is a collision: From a Christian point of view, one does not have the right to ignore one single hum. being, but if one is not willing to ignore the crowd, one incites it against oneself.

Father in Heaven! When we get ready to go to sleep in the evening, it is our consolation that you are the one who watches over us―and then, when we awaken in the morning, when we are awake all day long―alas, how distressing if you were not a�er all the one who watched over us. That is why the difference we make between sleeping and waking is only a sort of joke―as if we only needed you to be on watch as long as we are sleeping, not when we ourselves are awake.

A poem by Zacharias Werner in his Pentecost sermon (2nd volume of his sermons) Gib Wissenscha� zu wissen, daß das Wissen Von dem Gewissen uns nicht kann entrissen.

18 mundus vult decipi] Latin, the world wants to be deceived. 18 eo ipso] Latin, by that very fact. 35 Gib … entrissen?] German, Grant that science might know that knowledge cannot tear us free of conscience.

191

192

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 91–94

1849

Incidentally, it is a beautiful feature of the German language that Gewissen means certainty as well as conscience. Conscience is the true certainty. It’s a shame that we don’t have the word in Danish. 5

Much of what is said in praise of a mother’s love for her child is of course based on a misunderstanding, inasmuch as maternal love as such is only an intensified self-love, which is why animals also have it. That this sort of love is first of all self-love can also be seen from analogous relationships, in which it will really be quite obvious to everyone how foolish this sort of praise is―thus, e.g., an author’s love of his works. Nor does scripture ever provide a straightforward comparison of maternal love with God’s love for a hum. being; comparison is made only with the strength of a mother’s love. One could also use other metaphors, e.g., by making use of the passion of a miser and the like. But such a metaphor would be unbecoming. Maternal love, on the other hand, is such a beautiful metaphor.

92

10

15

193

1

[a]

R. Nielsen

In a note dated Aug. 10, R. N. has now discovered that the common point shared by Climacus and Anti-Climacus is despair, and in this connection cites the concluding words of Cl. to the effect that he does not say that he is a Xn, which Anti-Cl. must of course call “despair.” In a previous note, Nielsen had thought that the common point was offense. That was in fact much closer to being correct, and his new discovery is quite simply an anticlimax. This, of course, is the scale: what, metaphysically, is doubt, is ethically, despair, and from a Christian viewpoint, is offense. Incidentally, to the extent that there is any truth in his discovery that the contrast does indeed lie precisely at the point of declaring that one is not a Xn, this discovery of R. Nielsen’s has the dubious quality of having been wri�en in my note to him, which accompanied the book, and which he received.

93

25

30

35

The most terrible punishment of sin is new sin. That is, the hardened, self-confident sinner does not see it this way. But when

94

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 94–96

5

10

15

20

194 25

95

1849

a hum. being shudders at the thought of his sin, when he would gladly endure everything if he could but avoid falling prey to the old sin in the future, then new sin is the most terrible punishment of sin. Now, there are collisions (especially with respect to sinning in thought) in which anxiety about sin can come close to evoking sin. When this is the case a desperate wrong turn can be taken. Vigilius Haufniensis has described this as follows: Repentance goes out of its mind. As long as repentance is in its right mind, what must eternally remain fixed remains fixed: that sin must be conquered. But in his despair an unfortunate person of this sort can imagine that because the new sin is indeed sin’s most terrible punishment, he must perhaps put up with it. That is surely how to understand what quietism has taught: that a hum. being could be saved, yet still remain in sin. He trembles with mortal anxiety in the face of the new sin, but because it is indeed the punishment, despair takes him captive, as if there were nothing to be done. Here one sees the difference between how temptation and spiritual trial are to be comba�ed. In cases of temptation, it can be correct to flee. In cases of spiritual trial, one must see it through. One must flee temptation, striving neither to see nor hear the tempter. If it is spiritual trial, one must go straight toward it, trusting in God and Xt. Because in our times people have no notion whatever of spiritual trial, a person who suffered from this in our times would also be viewed as a quite extraord. sinner.

People praise this as an a�ribute of true love: the more sacrifices it makes, the more it loves the one who is its object. But this is of course also a form of self-love, because the sacrifices remind a person a�er all of himself.

35

96

That the positive is higher than the superlative; that singularity is higher than number; that simplicity is higher than multiplicity can be seen, for example, in this manner: Everyone would of

193

194

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 96–98

1849

course find it unseemly to express one’s thanks to God by saying, [“]Thanks a million, many thanks.[”] One says simply (and this is precisely where the passion lies), [“]Thank you, O God![”] 5

My Literary Work Viewed as “The Corrective” to the Established Order The category “corrective” is a category of reflection just like here/there and right/le�. The person who is to provide “the corrective” must carefully and thoroughly study the weak sides of the established order―and then one-sidedly provide the opposite, very expertly one-sidedly. Precisely in this lies the corrective, and in turn the resignation in the person who is to provide it. Indeed, in a sense, the corrective is a treat given to the established order. Then, if this is properly done, a supposedly clever fellow can come along and raise the objection that “the corrective” is one-sided―and he can get the entire public to believe that there is something to this. Good Lord! Nothing would be easier for the person who provides the corrective than to add the other side―but then it ceases to be the corrective and becomes itself the established order. Therefore an objection of this sort is raised by someone who totally lacks the resignation required to provide “the corrective” and hasn’t even the patience to comprehend it.

97

10

15

20

25

195

30

It is quite certain that there exists a presentation of the religious truth―that is, specifically, Xnty― that can only be a�ained if the presenter suffers from indescribable spiritual torment. When I think of what I have suffered day in and day out―or, at any rate, suffered the ever-present possibility that it could begin again tomorrow (indeed, raised to a higher power, these same

98

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 98–99

5

10

15

20

99

30

35

196

40

sufferings raised to a higher power in sympathetic pain)―I must nonetheless confess that if this had not been the case, it would not have been possible for me to present Xnty as I have. The moment these sufferings are taken away, my presentation would be more or less à la the priest’s: superficial, worldly, sensorily secure. Sometimes, when I think of my sufferings, it seems as if Governance were saying to me: [“]Dear li�le friend, right now I have use for a presentation of Xnty of just this sort. It cannot be accomplished without suffering. Someone must do it. So I have let it be you. I could easily compel you, but I would rather have you come to terms with it patiently― consider, the sufferings of this time are brief and short-lived, etc.” And so I reconcile myself to it entirely. The truer the presentation of the religious, the more it serves to honor and praise God. But if the suffering helps to present the truth more truly, then of course the suffering serves to honor and praise God―so let me be forgo�en as if I did not exist, even though it is I who suffer―but the suffering is to the honor and praise of God.

Question as to Whether This Could Be Psychologically Correct, Whether, Even from a Purely Psychological Perspective, This Can Be Thought An essentially melancholic individual who otherwise has never been bothered or tempted by the thought of suicide. One day he walks through a lovely forested district. It has been raining; everything exudes freshness and fragrance. It seems to him that he has never or only rarely felt so indescribably, so unspeakably good. As he walks, it occurs to him quite en passant: What if you now were to commit suicide[?]―and he does it. In this case there is no premeditation concerning such a step, no gradual development, nor anything

1849

195

196

1

5

10

[a]

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 99–101

In other respects, as in so many cases, the common boundary between melancholia and madness is becoming objective to oneself. What is odd and unusual is the almost idyllic objectivity, idyllically confusing oneself with a li�le flower and the like. It would be a powerful example of holding on to life loosely.

1849

convulsive. The idea occurs to him more or less like this: Look, there is a lovely li�le flower. He takes the step in about the same sort of mental state as one in which a person bends down and plucks a li�le flower. Thus death is here a sort of higher form of well-being. Can something like this be imagined?

5

“The thorn in the flesh” must be combated by yielding, not by kicking against the pricks (against which Paul probably kicked so hard that he kept the thorn in the flesh). Sin must be combated with all one’s might. One of the most difficult collisions is therefore when a person finds some ambiguity at this point: whether it is the thorn in the flesh or sin.

100

It would certainly seem that it is easier to proclaim Xnty to those who are happily, healthily, prosperously, pleased with life than it is to proclaim it to the leprous, the sick, the injured, etc., but in another sense I daresay it is much more difficult. The fact is that we are not so careful about what Xnty is. If Xnty is truly to be proclaimed to the fortunate, to those who are happy with life and are enjoying it, then Xnty becomes a sort of cruelty. And on the other hand it is much easier to proclaim Xnty’s consolation―to lepers. But the fact is that people would prefer to enjoy life, etc.―and that is why people are afraid even of seeing a leper, a madman, a beggar; people desire to remain ignorant of them―and then proclaim Xnty to those who have been favored! Ah, I have seen this only all too closely. My own soul has been in fear and trembling, and therefore I have really needed Xnty―and then a young, cheerful girl. Truly, send for me when a hardened sinner,

101

10

15

20

25

30

198 35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 99

1849

NB12:99, with marginal note.

197

198

J O U R N A L NB 12: 101–102

1849

on the last day of his life, suddenly awakens to repentance and to the torment of being conscious of his sins: with God’s help, I daresay I shall preach. But a young, cheerful, lovable girl, though without any more profound notions―and then Xnty! I do not know what to preach here. And yet, she is of course certainly much, much purer than I. But then, isn’t Xnty for everyone? Is it only for those who are sick and sorrowful, for those who labor and are heavy laden? Is it an error to want to make everyone a Xn? These difficulties have o�en occupied me. I sometimes take the advice of saying to myself: What concern is that of yours? So you have no need of Xnty, then? Whereupon I answer Yes and then take care of myself.

Sometimes, in a moment of dejection it occurs to me that Xt was not tried by the sufferings of illness, least of all by these that are the most painful, where the psychic and the somatic contact one another dialectically―thus, in this respect the life of the Exemplar was easier. But then I say to myself: Do you think, then, that if you were quite healthy you would a�ain perfection more easily? Ah, just the opposite: You would so easily submit to your passions―if not to other passions, then to pride, to a heightened self-esteem, and the like. Thus even though they are a burden, the sufferings are a beneficial burden, like the braces used at the Orthopedic Institute. To be in perfect physical and psychic health and then lead a true life of the spirit―no one can do that, for in that case he would be carried away by an immediate sense of well-being. In one sense the life of the spirit is the death of immediacy. This, you see, is why sufferings are helpful. When one suffers every day, when one is so frail that the thought of death is quite simplement right at hand, then it at least helps one a bit by making one continually aware of the need for God. Physical health, an immediate sense of well-being, is a far greater danger than wealth, power, and respect. It certainly has a deceptive appearance, as if it would in fact be helpful to have physical, immediate strength. But if one has that, then it is an almost superhuman task actually to live qua spirit. God-consciousness such as was present in the God-Man is required for this. Otherwise a hum. being easily deceives himself

31 simplement] French, simply.

5

10

102

20

25

30

35

199

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 102–103

1849

and confuses immediate well-being with―the life of the spirit. Physical suffering, a frail physique, is a beneficial memento.

103

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

When the category “the single individual” disappears, Xnty is abolished. Then the situation becomes one in which the individual relates himself to God through the human race, through an abstraction, through a third party―and then Xnty is eo ipso abolished. If this happens, the God-Man is a phantom instead of an actual exemplar. Alas, when I now look at my own life. How rare, indeed, is the pers. who is so favored for the life of the spirit, and above all strictly schooled with the help of spiritual sufferings: virtually all of my contemporaries see me as fighting like a Don Quixote―it never occurs to them that this is Xnty; indeed, they are convinced that it is just the opposite. Present-day Xndom existentially transforms Xt into an absolute phantom―despite the fact that they insist that Xt was an individual hum. being. They have no courage to believe existentially in the ideal. Yes, it is true. The race has grown away from Xnty! Alas, yes, in quite the same sense in which a pers. grows away from ideals. For the youth, the ideal is the ideal, but he relates to it in passion. For the older person who has grown away from the ideal, the ideal is some fantasy-laden thing that has no place in the actual world. If possible, in the hour of my death I will repeat again and again that to which every word of my writings testifies: I have never with one single word given occasion for the misunderstanding that I have confused myself with the ideal―but I have been convinced that my efforts were useful in illuminating what Xnty is. The understanding, reflection, has taken the ideal from hum. beings, from Xndom, and has made the ideal into fantasy―as a consequence, being a Xn has to be placed one reflection further back, being a Xn now comes to mean to love being a Xn, to strive to be one: so enormous has the ideal now become. See in relation to this the piece Armed Neutrality, where I have paralleled this with the transition from being called σοϕοι to being called ϕιλοσοϕοι.

39 σοϕοι] Greek, wise men.

philosophers.

40 ϕιλοσοϕοι] Greek, those who love wisdom,

199

200

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 104

1849 200

There are two kinds of instruction. One is Socratic: to ask questions in order to starve out empty knowledge. The other is the opposite: the learner asks questions. Once, in a conversation, Grundtvig made the really valuable remark that the instruction that asks a child questions is wrong―it is the child who ought to be allowed to ask.

104

5

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 105 201

105

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

1849

Now that the councillor of state is dead, it is not impossible that she believes that I could initiate a rapprochement, in which case she would have supposed that it was the councillor of state who had stood in my way. Now this is surely a misunderstanding. It was precisely the councillor of state with whom I wanted and thus sought reconciliation. With him there were absolutely no dangerous or dubious consequences connected to reconciliation, and in my view the offended father was the most serious concern. But in any event, I would gladly be reconciled with her, if it were indeed the case that she wished it. She has truly suffered on my account. She has suffered what can most injure a young girl, even if I did everything to minimize the injury and also suggested to her that she be the one to break off the engagement―she has suffered on my account―God knows how gladly I would make every, every sort of amends to her. And also for my own sake: the easier the terms of her release, the easier my own life will be for me. In a way, my own relationship to God is the reduplication of my relationship to her. But on the other hand. If she learns that I made my decision at that time based on ma�ers of religion and suffering, then I run the risk that she will suddenly despair over her marriage. It’s a delicate business: “that it would be her death” and she is the one who married; a delicate business: that I was “a scoundrel”―and must now be seen in an entirely different light. And even if I could easily do all this for her so gently that there would be no danger in this respect, I am well acquainted with her vehement and passionate nature. And it is indeed the case, as I have so o�en said to myself, that I am the guarantor of her marriage. Yet if she herself were to be the one who took the daring step of requesting it, I would view myself as obligated, in God’s name, to do what I would so much like to do. In that case the primary responsibility would not rest on me. By marrying, she has emancipated herself from being my unconditional responsibility. Besides, it is quite certain that my relationship to her has been for me a very close, present-tense study in understanding what faith is. For in this relationship I know best that the way things appear to be is precisely the opposite of what is fundamentally the case. Having endured this situation has benefited me in my relation of faith to God. While my life also opposes me, and the world is practically sheer opposition, I nonetheless have faith. In

201

[a]

On “her.”

1

202

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 105–107

1849

his relationship to God, a person who has had no such experience will immediately want to have a direct understanding, not one of faith. Furthermore, it is entirely fi�ing that the thought of coming to a direct understanding with her has become so important to me precisely when I have been in the process of reducing my existential speed qua author.

5

202

Naturally, as the God-Man, Christ could have held out as long as necessary―it cannot be assumed that suffering wore him out, but in other respects it is indeed typical that he did not live more than 34 years. If being a Xn in the strictest sense is to be endured from childhood on (when the overwhelming impression of Xnty―if it is strict Xnty that is imparted―immediately causes the child to overstrain itself) and continues in the stricter sense without ge�ing involved in some illusion, that person will hardly live to be more than 34 years old.

106

A Li�le Contribution.

107

A “highly regarded,” handsome, splendid fellow who proclaims that the truth is scorned, insulted, mocked, spat upon― upon my honor, indeed, even if I were to say it in the hour of my death, when I was clearly aware that I would have to repeat it on Judgment Day: It is nonsense! A person of high rank, who lives only in the most distinguished “circles,” who movingly proclaims that Xt “associated with sinners and tax collectors and ate with them, lived on the streets and alleys in the company of the common man”―upon my honor, indeed, even if I were to say it in the hour of my death, when I was clearly aware that I would have to repeat it on Judgment Day: It is nonsense! A man with a lucrative call, with a velvet-covered paunch or with a velvet-covered paunch in a lucrative call, who proclaims that Xt sent forth his “disciples,” saying You should own nothing, neither purse nor staff―upon my honor, indeed, even if I were to say it in the hour of my death, when I was clearly aware that I would have to repeat it on Judgment Day: It is nonsense!

15

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 107–108

5

203

10

15

20

108

25

30

35

40

1849

One thing or the other: either one’s life must at least approximate expressing the situation of being scorned, mocked, of living in the company of the common man on the streets and alleys and eating with tax collectors and sinners, of being poor and needy, or one should hold one’s tongue about such things and preach about the advantages of being a highly regarded, handsome, splendid fellow, as well as about which methods one employs to a�ain “this good;” about the advantages of being a person of high rank and about how pleasing it is to live in distinguished circles; about the advantages of having a lucrative call, as well as the benefits connected with a velvet paunch. A person’s existence is the real sermon. With it a person preaches every hour of the day and very much more powerfully than the most eloquent person in his most eloquent moment. To let one’s existence express the opposite, and then to let one’s mouth run on with glib nonsense about the opposite, is the deepest sort of twaddle and, from a Christian point of view, is to become liable to the judgment of eternity, even if, in the temporal world, it is the path to high office, honor, respect, popular approval, and the like.

Indeed, even Luther doesn’t get it right. In the sermon for the 2nd Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, he preaches on the text: Do not be astonished that the world hates you. The next Sunday he preaches on humility (God opposes the proud), that without humility one is loved neither by God nor hum. beings. Now he forgets that the Christian formula is: Do good and suffer for it―that is, be humble―and then you will be hated or will continue to be hated by hum. beings. Then, at another point in the same sermon, “Cast all your cares upon God,” Luther comes to say something about how the Christian must suffer. One can see how u�erly undialectical is this way of speaking. When one preaches in encouragement of humility, one omits the difficulty and supposes an unchristian situation; on another Sunday one consoles. I have expressed my view on this at the end of the 1st part of Works of Love, but I cannot emphasize it enough. It is no easy ma�er. Indeed I have worked on this without interruption for quite a number of years, yet I can o�en find myself veering off in an unchristian direction.

203

204

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 108–110

1849

Spiritual existence is enormously strenuous. To prove that I am right from the fact that I am scorned, that I am in the minority― what an enormous effort. And suppose, then, that the majority were to come over to one’s side―then to remember that this was the proof that one was in the wrong, or at least an indication of it. And to have to endure this in a world where one lives in the company of these thousands upon thousands who have no more understanding of spirit than they do of Chinese!

My problem is that I have lived too ideally or too melancholically ideally. When one thinks one will die tomorrow, one either says, Let us eat and drink, or one strives to fill the present day with impressions of something more ideal. And if one lives in this way year a�er year, one loses contact with everything earthly. Here we see a miniature commentary on the text: Seek first God’s kingdom. The sensory-psychic notion that a long life lies ahead for a person, etc. gives occasion for a pers. to become practical, as it is termed, to make a place for oneself in life, etc. But the spiritual notion is to live today. The category [“]a long future[”] is far inferior to the category “today.” The long future, these 30 to 40 years, is a sensory-psychic category and not a proof that a hum. being has an immortal spirit; it merely corresponds to the animal’s instinct of providing for itself―but “providing” corresponds to the sensory-psychic.

5

204

109

15

20

25

A Final Version of a Catastrophe in My Public Life Mob vulgarity had triumphed in Cph., to a certain extent in Denmark. Everyone, those who ought to provide standards of judgment, the journalists, even the police, despaired and said, There is nothing to be done here. And of course the mob vulgarity increased and triumphed. But it was constantly said―albeit as a wish, a pium desiderium: Oh, but this is intolerable―something ought to be done. Now the question was whether there wasn’t a respected younger person in this country―because in such circumstances an older person doesn’t help, for people immediately say, [“]He’s 33 pium desiderium] Latin, pious wish.

110

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 110

5

10

205

20

25

30

35

40

1849

become old, he doesn’t understand the new times[”]―a respected younger person who dared to do something. There was one and only one person of this sort: “the great pseudonym,” absolutely the most respected author, at that point completely unsullied―and indeed venerated by mob vulgarity, which shrewdly sought friendship from this quarter. It was of course unreasonable that “the great pseudonym” should be untrue to himself and take counsel with others in advance. So he did it without hesitation, though having made a religious decision. What he really had to do, his task, was to see whether he could manage to turn the situation around with a couple of words that were so powerful that they would succeed in impressing even the editors. This succeeded. It is a historical fact: Goldschmidt became unsure of himself, traveled abroad; P. L. Møller sheepishly emerged under his own name and bowed―subsequently he, too, traveled abroad. The Corsair was lost―in a way it was “never itself again.” The question, then, was how dearly the unselfish person was to pay for this step, for of course it was right that it should cost something. This was the problem for his contemporaries, who busy themselves with pronouncing the judgment of the more cultured classes (journalists of the be�er sort). Their task was to support the step taken and to point out that it was unselfish, the only thing that could have been done, heroic. They all remained silent. Here came the treachery―at that moment I saw that my position with respect to the bourgeoisie was gradually being eroded and would for the most part be irretrievably lost. Nonetheless I calmly stood my ground and was basically victorious. Rlly, religiously supported as I was, I never knew how strong I was. If I’d had sufficient financial resources, if I’d been able to look forward calmly to a long future, or my entire life secured in that regard: nothing more was needed, I alone was absolutely the strongest. Everything in the world that was excellent has usually been betrayed by its times. But treachery of the times against me has been of the more wretched sort precisely because it has involved double treachery. It is the more respected people who have rlly betrayed me.

205

206

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 110–112

1849

Apart from this I will only remark that however difficult my situation was―this, indeed, is typical of me―I asked the journalists I knew not to involve themselves in it. It is true that I made this request of them or advised them not to intervene―but what I judged about the ma�er deep down is another ma�er. My cause was pure, dedicated to God―in such cases one does not beg personally for help. Wretched age! The possibility I had otherwise reserved for myself―to live pleasantly in the country when I retire from being an author, owing to my literary reputation ranked not a li�le above the modest position of a country priest―has been lost. When a person has been marked like this it is a burden to live in the countryside.

History will not judge Goldschmidt for having mocked me. No, history’s judgment is never so moral. It judges talent, power, strength, etc. Mockery was of course the task he set for himself, and it is in this category that he will be judged. And therefore the judgment will be that he was wretched. First, that he was editor for 6 years and did not a�ack me―I, the most heterogeneous person of all, who was thus most suited for such an a�ack. That he not only did not a�ack me, but fla�ered me and deified me. The judgment will be that he was a poor ironist who saw himself as a youth compared to me and was afraid of me. Next, that because I gave the order―and because of the way in which I gave it, he exploited the situation so that he could protect himself by invoking the defense: Well, Mag. K. himself gave me permission to do it. This in fact demonstrates that in relation to me he viewed himself as a hired hand. ([C]oncerning this see a passage somewhere in the previous journal―but more likely in the present journal[.]) Last, the fact that he was caught and unmasked by a cunning stratagem, for to abuse the same person whom one has oneself deified is absolutely to despise oneself.

5

10

111

206 20

25

30

35

Just as a person who plays the lo�ery dreams only of numbers and comes up with the strangest combinations because his imagination occupies itself day and night only with this, so is there also a form of scriptural exegesis that, in a good sense, is as

112

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 112–114

1849

though obsessed with scripture and is therefore able to find types and the like everywhere. This is not an error. The error in the first case is that of filling one’s imagination with rubbish such as numbers and possible winnings. 5

113

10

The words of Sirach: “What does the person who has not been tried know[?]” could be made the mo�o for the whole of modern so-called speculative dogmatics. Fenelon (that is where I read it, pt. 1, p. 165) cites the passage in Sirach as 34:9. The same passage in Fenelon cites a beautiful saying from the book of Tobias 12:13: [“]Because you were dear to God, so must you not lack for spiritual trial.[”] I think the beauty lies in the emphasis on [“]because[”] and [“]must[”] and [“]you[”].

15

207

114

20

25

30

35

There is an obvious example of the disaster of the fusing of what is Christian with what is worldly. There would be a clergy that maintains an entirely worldly concept of dignity. Not only do they shrewdly avoid dangers, sacrifices, but they are honored and respected, because “it would be beneath their dignity” to get involved in things of that sort, to condescend to things of that sort. Oh, you who lie in your teeth. You know well that your words, if not blasphemy against God, are at any rate blasphemy against Xt! For what is Xt? He is the suffering truth who found it worthy to involve himself with all the evil. But imagine a priest who says on his deathbed: I lived in a time when lies and calumny and slander and envy and wretchedness triumphed absolutely. But of course I found it beneath my dignity to condescend to that sort of thing, to condescend to combat that sort of thing―and my life remained undisturbed by it. Oh, my friend, beware: in death only the Christian concept of dignity provides consolation. It is consoling when one ventures to say, [“]I lived at the same time as lies and wretchedness, but this I know: I had first-class accommodations in the madhouse; and this I know: when I died, the power of evil was at any rate a bit less―but at least I did not shrink from it.[”]

207

208

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 114–115

1849

Either there must be separation of church and state or we must somehow or other have monastic clergy. People will say: “Yes, but in his heart, a person who abandons the whole world and lives on roots can be just as vain as someone who has what is worldly.” Oh, I know this, I know this. But I also know that one advantage associated with having monastic clergy is that we at least occasionally get to see actions that formally remind us of Christianity; we get things all jumbled together, and it is at any rate stimulating that while most people act on the basis of the worldly sort of vanity, he―if he is indeed vain―at least acts on the basis of the sort of vanity that might be called godly. For God, this is surely worse that the former, but it does not at all follow from this that his actions cannot be helpful. Take the situation in Cph. when I had to deal with The Corsair. Not one single cleric dared preach against that sort of demoralization, against calumny, against lies, etc. And all wrapped themselves in the cloak of it being beneath their dignity. It was forgotten, entirely forgo�en, that the Christian concept of dignity is precisely the opposite of the worldly concept. And then, when I had to take upon myself the Christian task of honoring the Christian concept of dignity―when it would have been beneath my dignity to have lived with that sort of thing and not taken action―I had to suffer for it, even to point that people found that it was beneath my dignity! What a Christendom. There are 1000 clergy, all earnest men, with dignity―and then a young pers. saunters around, a flaneur―and, in the Christian sense, there was both earnestness and dignity!

1

[a]

To provide the corrective.

Providing the corrective is really a true task of resignation. No sooner does one begin than the misconception triumphant in the world looks haughtily down on the poor corrective: “It is antiquated, a thing of the past,” etc.

5

10

15

20

25

208 30

115

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 115

5

10

15

20

25

30

Then, when the corrective, in its slow but quiet and profound influence, takes on a threatening posture that gradually saps the nerve of that error―then people stealthily exploit the corrective and pretend that it is something they themselves had proposed. Or they cautiously let a certain amount of time pass, during which the corrective is at work, so to speak. During that period they remain officially silent―that is, they do not write. If they notice that the corrective has gained power, they emerge, surreptitiously making use of the corrective―and then take credit for representing moderation. If this succeeds, they go a step further: because they in fact only adopt a portion of the corrective, and because on the other hand, in order to be effective, the corrective must be equipped with the awakening paradox, they therefore portray the corrective as an exaggeration. Cowardly skulking: that is what Martensen is capable of.

How easy with finite goals. One is a professor, has a permanent position, a salary, honor, and respect―and furthermore, his efforts are understood immediately. It is of course assumed that it is serious business. That is how everything worldly joins together here. Assume the relation to an idea, assume a more pure, ideal existence―then you are superfluous, a sort of madness.

209

35

Naturally one seeks the society and company of everyone who amounts to anything, everyone who concerns himself with pronouncing judgment on literary ma�ers and the like. One also keeps a careful eye on foreigners. It helps, you see. It has now pleased Fr. Bremer to bless Denmark with her judgment. Naturally it consists of echoes of what the people concerned have said to her. This

1849

209

210

1

5

[a]

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 115–116

She lived here for quite a while and had physical intercourse with famous people. She wanted to have physical intercourse with me, but I was virtuous.

[a]

On “her”

1849

can best be seen in the case of Martensen, who has had quite a lot to do with her. She was kind enough to send me a courteous note inviting me to have a conversation with her. Now I almost regret that I did not reply as I had originally thought of doing, with merely these words: “No, many thanks, I do not dance.” But in any case I declined her invitation and did not go. So I get to hear in print that I am “inaccessible.” It is probably owing to Martensen’s influence that Frederikke has made me into a psychologist and nothing else, and has provided me with a significant audience of ladies. It is really ridiculous―how in all the world I can be considered a ladies’ author[?] But it is owing to Martensen. He has surely noticed that his star is in decline at the university. It will certainly be droll for R. Nielsen and those who are truly of the younger generation to read that I am a ladies’ author.

26 Aug. 49 It could be worth wishing that I might for a moment be entirely free in my relationship to her, in order to see what power she rlly has. A�er all, she besieged me with her pleading and tears so that I included her in my relation to God and I keep her there. She touched a melancholia like mine with a feminine devotion that was moving, but also too powerful. By incautiously begging in Jesus’ name for me to remain with her, she touched an anguished conscience like mine, which gladly would have done everything for her, but penitent as it was, cannot do it, an anguished conscience that itself understands profoundly how infinite is its need for leniency― and then, whenever [my] faith is not strong, has been tormented by the fact that I was of course cruel to her. They are frightful agonies. And they are only amplified by the enormous powers granted me. Truly, when Providence gave man strength and woman

5

10

15

116

25

30

210 35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 116–117

1849

211

weakness, whom did he make the stronger[?] Herein lies what is frightful in being involved with a woman: she succumbs in weakness―and then one struggles with oneself, with one’s own power. 5

117

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

Now, presumably they are to reform the Church; then they will convene synods, take votes, etc. Even the most strictly orthodox people, even Rudelbach, appear to have taken the position of directly engaging with all this and doing what can be done to keep things as orthodox as possible. I have always carried out flank a�acks, a�acking from behind. Thus, at the very moment of greatest importance, when we are to reform the Church, I manage to produce a piece that jacks up the price of being a Xn so high that it is doubtful whether there exists one single true Xn in the strictest sense. This is harassment! Undeniably. But it is also distressing and ridiculous that people have not at all noticed where the fundamental corruption lies. My task has always been to delay―it is something like when a man is about to jump, and someone taps him on the shoulder, saying, May I have a word with you[?] This is where Mynster and I share common ground. It is really a diversionary measure. But the fact is that Mynster is in a certain sense afraid of this diversionary measure, especially when it is in my hands. He has used it a bit himself, but as a shrewd supporter of the government―in the present case it is being used by someone who is nobody (these dangerous and suspect persons) and it is being used absolutely teleologically. But it can certainly be done without damaging Mynster, if he will simply take care to say nothing at all and remain very calm. I have always given my operation the appearance that I was entirely subaltern, practically as if I were acting under Mynster’s supreme auspices, giving the appearance that he

[a]

My Position with Respect to What the Situation Will Become in the Immediate Future.

1

212

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 117–118

1849

gives his supreme nod of approval and that this is of decisive importance. In a certain sense, there is something troubling in all this lest anything happen, be it merely a blink of the eye or an uncertainty of countenance. But it is quite true that the task is an absolutely dialectical one, and I cannot escape the thought that I must not come into conflict with what reminds me of my father.

1

[a]

On “her” forgiveness.

b

and the one who was be�er than I.

Were I truly to beg for her forgiveness, and truly to receive forgiveness, I would in turn have to justify myself and tell everything. If I do that, then she will for the first time have a true notion of how she was loved, of how I was true and have remained true to her, of what I have suffered, of precisely how the deception, the cruelty were in fact solicitude―and then, then suppose she suddenly has an aversion to her marriage and begins where we le� off in the first round, when I did indeed beg for her forgiveness, two months before the real breaking of the engagement. Anyone who knows how she spoke of Schlegel at that time―that is, how dismissively (it must indeed be remembered that the circumstance that I was the one who suggested that she take Schlegel had to embi�er her and make her lose patience)―will always have his doubts. Her forgiveness cannot make my life easier. But in the final analysis, it is not she who binds me, but I who have made use of her to bind myself. The wound I received from her hand, which I guided, was and must remain a religious wound―the relationship to God is what is binding. On the other hand, if I were to continue the deception to the bi�er end and suddenly emerge in the form of someone who had been a scoundrel and who is now repentant, then I will be deceiving her, and her forgiveness will be a sham. Loving as she is, now she is probably reposing in her marriage. This is how she understands things: I was a pers. of extraordinary talents, in a certain sense too lo�y for her; but still, I was not faithful to her; I set my sights on a more challenging goal―she had to fall. But (she says to herself) I have indeed loved her, and [“]I will piously forgive him, indeed, pray to God for him.[”] From a feminine point of view this makes sense. She contrasts herself to me precisely as the one who was pious.b If I

5

211

118

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 118

5

212 10

15

20

25

30

35

40

1849

were now to come with my own explanation of who was pious, then everything would perhaps be disturbed. It is very clear that my relationship is a God-relationship. But I should give up all self-torment. The self-torment is actlly rooted in my desperate desire that she understand me absolutely. But perhaps God does not want this at all; perhaps it is precisely through this misunderstanding that he keeps me in the relationship to himself. And I am so weak in his hands, for whenever I am lacking in faith, I worry about whether I might not, a�er all, be able to do something to make myself understood by her. When, in faith, I close my eyes and keep silent, I am at peace. As soon as I fail to do this, I am plagued by the misunderstanding, because regarding her, I have everything immediate and external against me. But if she herself were to demand an explanation from me, I would risk it. I would do it so that I said to her directly: There is one point on which I cannot speak; you must not ask me about it, but forgive me for being unable to speak about it. And apart from that I would tell her the truth, and here I think there would be a degree of understanding that might a�er all make her happy. I can truly say: She was the beloved, the only one, that I loved her more and more, that she was the beloved when I le� her, that I will love no one else. Then, with respect to one particular point, I must ask her to trust me. She has sufficient womanliness to do so―then the explanation is almost total. If it were possible that she became dialectical and began to brood over such an insane collision, then she would burst. As long as she has been able to cling to this: that despite everything I was, if not a bad pers., at any rate someone intoxicated by lo�y thoughts, then there is no collision. But if I am to be a religious person, then there is a collision. I have borne the responsibility for her to the point of bearing responsibility for her life. Now, for quite a while she has helped herself by being married. How wrong it was of me to venture into a relationship that I was unable to realize and for which I have suffered my punishment―and if I have not suffered punishment enough (or if I have)―in any case I must beg God for forgiveness. To explain ma�ers to her, to the extent possible, could be dangerous for her, could disturb the illusion of her marriage, could be dangerous for me, could alter my relationship to God. And even if this did not happen, there is still one other consideration: consideration for Schlegel, to whom all caution is owed.

213

214

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 118–120

1849

But, as has been said: just because it can be dangerous, it by no means follows that it absolutely must not happen, for sometimes what is most right is also dangerous. If she requests it, then it can be ventured. God knows, I would more than gladly do it. Perhaps one day it will be clear to me that I ought to dare take the first step myself, but the main thing is of course my own relationship to God, and a�er all, she is married.

1

[a]

“Her Relationship to Me”

[b]

5

10

15

and surely, the only right thing for her was that I got it; she would have been destroyed; in a very short time she would have torn herself to shreds, overstraining herself because she had such a gigantic notion of who I was, and wanted, if possible, to live up to something more ideal. And in any case, with my spiritual preoccupations and my dreadful reserve, I would have lived in a world of my own. Insane to be squandered on me, insane that it would be for

213 5

10

A pagan has said: It does no good to want to ride away from grief―it sits hindmost on the horse. A pious man (Fenelon) has said: Cares are like an arrow in the breast―the more vigorously the deer runs to escape it, the more firmly the arrow becomes lodged in it. NB. That is not at all how Fenelon formulated it, nor did he parallel it with the saying by Horace, but the thought is from Fenelon.

119

I should and I must have my freedom; even under the most reasonable terms, however, there would perhaps have been punishment enough for my pride in having ventured into something I could not realize. Thus I should and must have my freedom. Perhaps, however, she ought to have understood this to some extent herself and made my situation a bit easier―perhaps. Alas, but she was so young, and she was too lovingly devoted to me―ah, in altogether too humble submission―for it to occur to her that she ought to take sides against me. Furthermore, she was in a difficult position. She must surely have had a presentiment of how furious and embi�ered the councillor of state, the much-feared figure in that family’s eyes, would become. Furthermore, she had perhaps indeed been somewhat unfair to Schlegel by accept-

120

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 120

5

214

10

15

20

25

30

35

ing me―and now this catastrophe. Finally, I myself have dialectically made the situation difficult for her. I could of course have asked for my freedom more straightforwardly (either gently, religiously, or a bit more persuasively). But I deliberately did not do so. There was a quite particular reason that I could not marry; it was not upon her, but upon marriage that I foundered, and I foundered upon it for religious reasons. Now, I could not, however, permit her to remain unmarried for that same reason―and that would have happened if I had employed entirely direct communication, for then I would have bound her to me forever. She is thus purely and absolutely free of guilt― indeed, shouldn’t innocence be guiltless! In any case, it is impossible to see her crumb of guilt without simultaneously seeing my enormous guilt for having “carried her out with me into the current.” Alas, those words remind me of the earliest period of the engagement, when it was so clear to me that this was what I had done. But at that time her overweening confidence made me feel quite secure, so that I began to view the danger as insignificant, inasmuch as she took the ma�er so lightly. My guilt is having carried her out into the current, and she rlly has no guilt, even though she ought to have realized earlier that it would have been impossible for her to fight successfully for what she wanted, that I was too strong. But here, too, she is without guilt, for of course I myself gave her the hintc to struggle by means of submission, because I knew that this would be most the dangerous way for me―as indeed it has become. But therefore she is innocent; yet I constantly reminded her to give in because it was impossible that she could hold out against me.

1849

215

nothing―or even that she would in this way become an enormously painful burden on me, something she neither should be nor ought to be. I retained my innermost torments anyway. So, had I dared to bind her to myself in such a way that my innermost self was closed to her, and had I at the same time dared to use all my talents to charm her and make her happy: that would truly have been my highest wish. But if marriage obligates me to open myself u�erly, it condemns me if I do not do so, it demands that I admit her to my innermost self―so at that very instant the relationship becomes something unreasonable; then she has been insanely squandered on me, squandered on me in order to make my life more excruciating, which it would also become by my having to look upon her sufferings.―She can ornament Schlegel’s life very well; she can make him happy; he will adore and thank her. It is possible that she retains some inner pain regarding her relationship to me, but perhaps this is precisely what will make her ideal in the deepest sense, and the relationship will truly correspond to her nature, which does in fact include a good deal of pride. If, in feminine fashion, she had been content to accept my first a�empt to break off the engagement, which was designed to be as humiliating as possible to me, and in which I asked for her forgiveness―the situation would never have become frightful. In despair, she went beyond her limits and despairingly wanted to force me to go beyond mine―now the situation became frightful. There was

1

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

216 1

5

10

15

20

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 120–121

1849

only one thing to be done, absolutely only one thing: to support her by means of a deception. That is what I did, and I did not spare myself. But in so doing the ma�er became for me a private struggle with God. At any moment God can cause me anguish about not having her forgiveness―and on this score, hmnly speaking, I am as innocent as possible. Were I now to ask for her forgiveness, I would run the old risk that, on discovering that she had in fact been loved, she would once again cast herself upon me in the same despairing manner. In a certain sense, it is a lucky thing to be a woman. She suspects nothing of all this, “She does not complain that I broke off with her, but about the way I did it.”

215

Note And why was it honest of me to give her the hint? [B]ecause I was not the master, but I myself was struggling with a higher power, and her struggle with me was reflected in this inner struggle of mine, so it was important to me, for her sake and for my own, that the ma�er not become too easy for me.

c

25

30

Aphorisms. 1 Nowadays one becomes an author not by virtue of one’s primitivity, but by―reading. One becomes a human being by aping the others. That one is a human being is not something one knows from oneself, but by virtue of an inference: one is like the others―ergo one is a hum. being. God knows whether any of us is!

121

)

[a] see p. 187 in this journal, top of page.

5

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 121–122

1849

217

)

And in our time, when one has doubted and doubts everything, this doubt never occurs to anyone: God knows whether any of us is a hum. being. 2 Things are wri�en for “the crowd,” which understands nothing, by those who―understand how to write for “the crowd.” 3. Philosophy became fantastic, especially a�er people strayed from Kant’s “honest” path and paid the well-known (honest) 100 rd. in order to become theocentric. Note The 100 rd. are the well-known Kantian example of the difference between what is thought and what is actual.

5

10

15

216

122

20

25

30

35

40

My Relationship with Her. My fundamental guilt is having carried her out with me. 1st Section The engagement. I, basically introverted, suffering the torments of melancholia and conscience for having “carried her out with me.” In the relationship to her I was of course love and solicitude itself, perhaps to excess, but I was indeed already a penitent. In other respects I paid no a�ention at all to her, as if there were a possibility that she could be the source of some difficulty. 2nd Section She tries her hand at an inordinate self-confidence. Instantly, my melancholia respecting this ma�er essentially disappears, and the pangs of conscience have no connection with it. I breathe as easily as usual. Here I have some guilt: I ought to have made use of that moment and let her break it off―then it would have been the triumph of her overweening confidence. But the question whether I ought not be able to enter into a marriage was too serious a ma�er for

[a]

My Relationship with Her.

1

218

1

b

Christ’s sake and the memory of my late father, not to leave her.

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 122–123

1849

me, and there was also something childish in her overweening confidence. In any case, in a way I now had command of myself―and I approached the ma�er somewhat from her direction. 3rd Section She yields and transfigures herself into the most lovable being. At that same instant my initial situation returns for a second time, intensified by the responsibility, which of course has now been increased by her feminine, almost adoring devotion. 4th Section. I see that there must be a separation. Here, behaving honestly to her and treasonably to myself, I advise her not to fight by making use of pride―for then the ma�er would become easier for me―but by submission. Still, a break must be made.―I send back her ring, enclosed with a le�er that is printed word for word in the [“]Psychological Experiment.[”] 5th Section. Then, instead of le�ing the ma�er be decided, she goes up to my room in my absence and writes me a note of u�er despair, in which she pleads with me for Jesusb Then there was nothing else to do but dare to the utmost, to support her, if possible, through deception, to do everything to repel her from me in order to rekindle her pride. Then, two months later, I broke off the relationship for a second time.

On “her.” Now this must not be thought about any more, except at certain times, otherwise I will have self-torment in full swing. And furthermore: the explanation, the more concrete explanation, which I conceal in my innermost self, which rlly contains, even more precisely, what the terror is for me―will not be wri�en down. For me, that relationship signi�es God’s punishment. What made it terrifying was that she despairingly cast herself upon me so forcefully that she is a burden on my sympathy and on my relationship to God. The matter will certainly follow me throughout my whole life, even though, in the light of my development, it will come to be understood a little differently.

5

10

15

20

217 25

123

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 123–125

5

10

124

20

218

125

35

1849

219

Most of all, I now must remember to thank God again and again, for he “himself has provided the explanation,” by letting her get married, and has thereby alleviated the situation. My prayer is that I might, if she so wishes, have the experience of bringing her some happiness in recompense for what she has innocently suffered on my account―some happiness, but, be it noted, the sort of happiness that is truly bene�cial for her. Perhaps the day will come when she will have entirely forgotten me, perhaps; in any event it is an unforced situation [for her]. She once cast herself upon me and upon my relationship to God in such a way that I will probably carry her for my whole life. But I must take care not to fall into self-torment.

It is a merit of this book to have shown that the State Church gave rise or contributed to giving rise to the proletariat. R. himself seems not to have realized how much is implied by all this. In Xndom people live in a completely unchristian manner, also with respect to living together with the common man and what this involves. In this respect my life is like a discovery―alas, in a certain sense I can say that it is a dearly bought discovery. What is unchristian and ungodly is to base the state on a substratum of people whom one totally ignores, denying all kinship with them―even if on Sundays there are moving sermons about loving “the neighbor.”

I could almost say that my genius has rlly been my sufferings. In any case, they have been supportive, just like swimming with cork. To have a strong body and then, e.g., simply to have to maintain, solely intellectually, that death is certain at every instant: Well―good night!―that will usually turn into nothing but priestly pra�le.

[a]

Rudelbach on the Church constitution § CXXXI p. 243 et seq.

1

220

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 125–127

1849

But when one is as weak as I am, it is not difficult. Every day I live causes me astonishment. That I can be so doomed―and yet that I live! Yes, my existence is like a satire on what it is to be a hum. being. But this is also why my version is truthful. This is only all too true of hum. beings―i.e., that they are altogether too physically strong to dare involve themselves with ma�ers of this sort.

Remarkably enough, in the period immediately a�er I got engaged, one of the things I spoke of most o�en was that there were peop. whose significance was precisely that they were to be sacrificed for others. As with a shipment of fruit, where there are some pieces that get bruised, partly because they must bear the pressure of the others, partly because they protect the others from pressure, so in every generation are there some who are sacrificed for the race. Early on, I had an inexplicable intimation that this was my destiny; but now, just now, it has become so clear to me that this was my destiny―and why[?]: Precisely because I had become engaged―thus precisely because I had stepped beyond the boundaries of my character and wanted to broaden my existence instead of remaining an intense point. And it was precisely that thought and its constant presence for me that provided an indirect indication that I must leave that relationship. But, strange reduplication―alas, doesn’t it seem as if she has in turn been sacrificed for me!

5

126

15

20

25

219

“Gold and silver have I none,” said Peter, “but such as I have, I give you: Rise up and walk.” Later on the clergy said, [“]Gold and silver we have―but we have nothing to give.[”] This is occasioned by reading in Rudelbach (on the constitution of the Church) that a prelate showing off a splendid ewer supposedly said that now it was no longer true that we have no gold and silver. I have edited it to make the epigram stand out in greater relief.

127

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 128–129

128

5

10

129

15

20

220

30

35

1849

221

With Christ as the Exemplar, what we human beings might call intellectuality is not at all prominent. That is why we would find it offensive to think of Xt laughing, something that is expressed in the hymn: Why does he cry, who never laughed[?] But it is nonetheless a misunderstanding for a Christian human being to want to be so ideal that he cannot laugh. Furthermore, even in edifying discourse there is an essentially related comic element that is as true and as pedagogically appropriate as tears and sternness.

Now, under circumstances such as these it is also improper for him to withdraw out to the countryside and remain there longer than usual. It is once again a halfway measure, a sort of reversion to that system-based way of acting impersonally. He weakens his own impression and that of his cause. His book comes to be viewed as a pointless product of perfectibility, which is obliged to a�empt this sort of thing―and now he exaggerates―just as at one time he exaggerated qua Hegelian. [“]But he’ll soon get bored with this,[”] people say, [“]Nowadays you never see him, etc.[”]

In his most recent note he tells me that out in Lyngby he had a clash with Martensen on the term [“]mediation.[”] On that occasion I would have liked to have said: To clash with mediation―how could that rlly be possible! One clashes with the paradox―that is something I understand. One clinks glasses with mediation―that is something I understand. Mediation, of course, assumes a position of fantastic grandeur above all contraries, even over those that are feigned. With such grandly elevated grandeur as this it is impossible to have a clash. And on the other hand, mediation―as the word implies―is something that yields; it is itself aware of its own fragile or feeble grandeur. For indeed, if one takes the word “to clink” in its other meaning―as when one reads, above the stair at a cellar entrance, “Clink the latch shut”―it is a sort of mo�o for the term [“]mediation[”]. I can only understand mediation comically. In its fantastic grandeur

[a]

On R. Nielsen.

1

222

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 129–131

1849

it is―as is always the case with fantastic things, which are precisely the opposite of what they seem to be―living on the cellar stair. Either I deludingly amuse myself by le�ing its grandeur pass for grandeur, and then I clink glasses with it and laugh―or I see through its grandeur and see that it actually lives on a cellar stair, and then here, too, I laugh. Once, in its day (for now mediation has been weakened) it might have been right to write a li�le piece titled [“]Mediation, or the World Seen from a Cellar Stair,[”] accompanied by the mo�o [“]We clink here[”].

Even in relation to loving a hum. being this principle holds: If it is truly true that you love him, then you must also see that all things, even the most desperate, work together for your good. And how, then, could this not hold in relation to God[?] Actlly, it is God who causes things to be the way they are in the first case. God, who sees your love and who is love, lets even this, your love for a hum. being, work for your good.

5

10

130 15

20

221

Not only is it the case that abuse at the hands of the vulgarity of the mob has developed me profoundly, profoundly, but it is quite certainly responsible for having provided a musical key that I would never otherwise have had within my range: the sort of lyric called [“]The Lily and the Bird.[”] Dialectically, this abuse has also enriched me with Christianity’s essential collision with the world, something that otherwise would have eluded me, overly preoccupied as I was with inner sufferings. And what has been educative about this suffering has again been that I have been the superior one and yet have fought with a weaker power which in one sense is the stronger. If I were to take each

131

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 131–132

5

10

15

20

132

222

30

individual in the crowd, how in the world could it occur to me to fight him―and yet it can surely be burdensome to fight the crowd. But on the other hand, it may propel me toward the ideal, and in the direction of sadness, precisely because I feel all too clearly my totally disproportionate superiority, and in addition, that I have wished these peop. so well: and then, in another, lower, vapid sense, for “the crowd” to be much, much the stronger. Here again what rlly had to be developed is my relationship to God. When one fights with a hum. being who is either actually, in the ideal sense, one’s superior or one’s equal, the relationship to God is completely obscured and forgo�en. But no fight is so calculated to develop a hum. being in the godly sense as a fight in which he is the stronger and yet where, in another sense, the weaker is the stronger. The fact that I cannot rlly get any objecta means precisely that God will make use of this fight to develop my relationship to God.

a propos of that verse by Brorson : While the air is still so full Of winter snow’s shivering-cold thus the winter snow is still far from having finished falling: it remains there, tormenting the air―and this is certainly also the way it is with cares, worries, difficulties, and the like: as long as they have not yet fallen, so that one can see what it is (actuality), as long as they hover and torment in possibility, they are worst.

1849

223

a

to fight with

1

[a]

(it can be found commented on in an earlier journal, probably NB10 or NB9; see also NB14. p. 171.[)]

[b]

As on the particular day, when you first have a look at the weather to see if it is weather to go out in, that is how all of life lies before us―but here it does no good: One must go out.

5

10

224

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 133

1849

It is quite right, a�er all, that Practice in Christianity be pseudonymous. It is the dialectical element, and it would be much too strong if it were brought to bear by me personally. Thus The Sickness unto Death, Practice in Christianity, The Point of View for My Work as an Author, the “3 Notes” belong to the year 1848. The year 1849[:] “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself,” Armed Neutrality, and other lesser pieces, including the one on Phister. Even if I were to publish “From On High, etc.” under my own name, it is still guaranteed that the conception in my works focuses finally on the discourses at the communion on Fridays, because The Point of View is of course from 48. NB. And in order that “From On High, etc.,” which is a�er all somewhat polemical, not be the last work, yet another round of discourses at the communion on Fridays could of course be wri�en, which would thus constitute a second series. One and as good as two are already finished, and there are hints at a couple of additional ones in one of the new folders that bookbinder Møller has made.

223

133

5

10

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 134

1849

224

134

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

In every generation, most peop., even those who, as it is said, put on airs of thinking (professors and the like), live and die in the delusion that things keep on going, and that if it were granted them to live longer, things would keep going onward in a continuing, straightforward ascent with more and more comprehension. How many experience at all the maturity of discovering that there comes a critical point where things turn around, when what matters from then on is an increasing comprehension that more and more comprehends that there is something that cannot be comprehended[?] This is Socratic ignorance, and it is this that our age’s speculation has needed as a corrective. As Joh. Climacus rightly notes, at the point where a higher life ought to dawn on them, most people actually turn aside and become the practical “husband, father, and celebrated marksman.” As Anti-Climacus rightly notes, most people do not experience becoming spirit at all: thus neither do they experience that qualitative encounter with the divine. For them, the divine is a simple, rhetorically nonsensical, vacuous superlative of the human; therefore they become blissful in the delusion of being more and more capable of comprehending it, so that if only they had the time―and did not have to go the of�ce, to the club, talk to the wife, etc.―if only they had the time, they would certainly comprehend the div. completely. Socratic ignorance―though note well, modi�ed in the spirit of Christianity―is maturity; is intellectually what rebirth is ethically and religiously; is what it is to be a child again. It is quite literally true that the law then becomes: increasing profundity in comprehending, more and more, that one cannot comprehend. Thus here is the return of what is childlike, but raised to a higher power. The person who is mature in this way has naïveté, simplicity, wonder, but has it essentially humorously, though without it being humor. And that this life is blessed, is as blessed as it is blessed to worship, even more blessed than it is for a woman to be truly in love―well, those blissful in their delusion have no clue concerning this. They never get to the qualitative pressure, but deceive themselves more and more.

225

226

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 135–137

1849

But it is impossible that what I have to say concerning the paradox could become popular. It �atters human vanity to presume to comprehend. The alternative is the blessedness of humility. But, to take one example, how many girls are there really in each generation who are truly capable of loving? 99 out of 100, after all, prefer to love for “reasons.” People do not notice the subtle way in which “reasons,” instead of founding something or strengthening it, detract from it―the more reasons a person has for her love, the less is her love. But here again it is seen how silence comes of itself because if such a girl who was truly in love―who had no reasons whatever― talked about this to other girls, she would be looked down upon. And therefore―oh, wonderful love of Providence, which has provided every animal with one or another means of defense― thus, too, does Providence make every more profound nature silent. Through silence he saves his life, in silence; saved, he possesses his blessedness.

135

A Reply That Crazily Turns a Person Inside Out Imagine a contemporary of Xt who says (this first part of the reply is used in Practice in Christianity, no. 1): [“]I cannot have any opinion concerning him; first I must see the result of his life, and thus literally, he must be dead. And perhaps that will scarcely be enough. But if I lived 1800 years a�er his death, and I saw that he had triumphed, then I would accept the teaching[”] (and now comes the new part, which was not included in that book, the rlly crazy part) [“]and I assure you that I would give my whole life to have lived as his contemporary, that it is my most fervent longing to have lived as his contemporary.[”]

136

225

5

10

15

20

25

30

A strange nemesis hovers over the Pharisee (in the gospel about the Pharisee and the tax collector). It is of course pride to ignore others, and yet it is the proud Pharisee who notices “this tax collector,” while the tax collector humbly ignores the Pharisee.

137

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 138

1849

227

226

138

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

7 Sept.

On “Her” This girl had to be very costly for me, or I had to make her very religiously costly to myself. She herself pleaded with tears and supplications (for the sake of Jesus Christ, by the memory of my late father) for me not to leave her―I could do anything to her, absolutely anything; she would put up with absolutely everything and would nonetheless thank me all her life for her relationship with me as the greatest act of kindness. The father, who explained my behavior as eccentricity, begged and beseeched me not to leave her: “She was willing to put up with absolutely everything.” As far as he and the rest of the family were concerned, he promised me in most solemn fashion that if I wanted it, then neither he nor any of his family would ever set foot in my house, and as soon as I married her, she would be under my absolute control as if she had neither relatives nor friends. Now of course―assuming there were no inner difficulties about it on my part―I could have allowed myself to marry her; I could easily have bound everyone to me with obligations of gratitude, being otherwise altogether a tyrant, while always retaining this frightful means of coercion, namely that what I had done for her was of course an act of kindness. Truly, if I had done that, I would have been a scoundrel; in the meanest, outrageously meanest, fashion I would have taken advantage of a young girl’s distress, which brought her to say what she never ought to or could have meant in that way. But she certainly was not mistaken in understanding that if I indeed decided to have her, I would surely do everything I could to make her life worth living. That is, she had faith in me. Then I would have married her. Let us assume that. What then? In the course of half a year or less she would have torn herself to shreds. There is something spectral about me―and this is both the good and the bad in me―something that makes it impossible for anyone to endure having to see me every day and thus have a real relationship with me. Of course, in the light cloak in which I gnrlly show myself, it is another ma�er. But at home it would be noted that I fundamentally dwell in a spirit world. I had been engaged to her for 1 year, and yet she did not rlly know me.―So she would have been sha�ered. In turn, she would probably have made a mess of me, for I was constantly overstraining myself with her because in a certain sense her

[a]

On her.

1

228

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 138

1849

reality was too light. I was too heavy for her, and she was too light for me, but both can truly lead to overstraining oneself.―Then I probably would not have amounted to anything, or perhaps I would have been developed anyway, but she would have been a plague to me, precisely because I would have seen that she had become improperly situated by having married me.―Then she would have died. And then, then everything would have been over. To take her with me into history when she had become my wife―no, it cannot be done. She may certainly become a Madam or a Mrs., but she may no longer remain in the role of my lover; it must be presented as the story of an unhappy love affair, and for me she is to be the beloved “to whom I owe everything”: look, then history must take her―that is something I will certainly teach history. The ma�er is quite simple. My understanding told me quite clearly that what I wanted to do was the right thing, the only right thing. But if I had not had the relationship of conscience to support me, she would have won. I would not have dared to defy her tears, her supplications, her father’s agonies, my own wishes, solely on the basis of the reflections of my understanding―and I would have given in. But I had to struggle with the ma�er in a much higher place, and this was the source of my inflexibility, which was seen as heartlessness. On the other hand, if I had not had the relationship of conscience, the situation would never have developed to that extreme―I would surely have yielded before that point. She would actually have come to the point of surrendering altogether too completely, and there would always have been a question of whether she could come through it. My understanding said to me, She can take Schlegel. Later, she herself admi�ed to me that had I not come along when I did, she would surely have become engaged to Schlegel. So in that way the ma�er was in order. And who knows?―that li�le girl who believed that my pride was the reason I le� her.―Who knows, perhaps her pride was the reason she chose me when she did. And a�er what

227 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 138

5

10

15

228 20

25

30

35

40

she had gone through with me, her relationship to Schlegel could indeed have been fine. She got a man, then, a fine man, whom she had in fact once loved. She would then come into her own as a woman, for her life would be of great importance to him; he would gratefully appreciate every day and hour of their life together, all of her lovely charm. And truly, if he did not, he would be a fool. Alas, I am indeed somewhat spectral, and it would have been an agony for me to see all that adoring charm wasted on me, just as though it were not infinitely valuable, just as though the fault were hers and not my own. But I would never have go�en her out of that delusion, for she was overwhelmed and would have been even more terribly overwhelmed by living together with me every day in my home.―Her relationship with me would then once again be perfectly in order. She did not become a beggar in my house, but the beloved, the only beloved. Thus she belongs to history. I don’t cling particularly tightly to life but would gladly die. The day I die, her position will be enviable. She is happily married, and her life has an importance that is unusual for a wife’s to have for a husband, who surelyb But as for myself, it becomes increasingly clear to me that it is Governance who has used her to capture me. The possibility of her: that was how I was to be developed, and then there was responsibility in the relationship to God. I was to be captured. And I had to be captured by having to struggle with myself in the deepest sense. Therefore, the other party had to be someone who in a certain sense was no one, an object and yet not an object, an inexplicable something that in succumbing caused me to struggle with myself. For this a woman was used, a woman who struggled in womanly fashion by employing weakness. And she had to be lovely so as to be all the more touching― so as to make it all the more certain that I would come to struggle with myself. And she had to be so young that her youth would place the entire responsibility on me and bid me take her side―and to

1849

b

229

is not far from worshiping her―and thus my life expresses that she was the only beloved; my entire existence as an author is to accentuate her. And, if not sooner, she will understand me in eternity.

1

5

230

1

5

10

15

20

25

30

[c]

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 138

Incidentally, it would really be desirable if someone could tell me definitely the extent to which I have any renown (for I know that my significance will be revealed in history, but of course I have always thought of myself as destined to suffer) or whether the vulgarity of the mob and the envy of the elite have already succeeded in making me into a half-mad eccentric. If the la�er is the case, then I of course possess nothing of which I can be said to have deprived her unfairly. It was also for this reason that I have thought of my life as one of suffering: my first a�empt was “The Seducer’s Diary,” which failed; but I succeeded with The Corsair. When I enjoyed some respect, she was, first of all, not engaged; then at any rate not married; and finally, the councillor of state was still alive―it was his death that caused me to consider whether she might not have believed that he was the one who stood in the way. But even when she had married, a certain amount of time had of course to pass before her marriage could be assumed to have consolidated itself―and then, then I was already deeply embroiled in persecution by

1849

struggle all the more with myself. She had to be so young that her father, almost looking upon her as a child, felt himself called upon all the more to place the entire responsibility on me. So I was captured, or I had to capture myself in the relationship to God. Then, when it had happened, it was as if Governance said, [“]Look, as for her, she will certainly be looked a�er, she will emerge from this very well. But you are captured. She can neither release you nor bind you; no maneuver can do anything one way or the other, for you are trapped by the responsibility and bound to me.[”]

5

10

229

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 138–141

1849

231

the mob.―Should my life suddenly take a turn so that I enjoyed the esteem of my contemporaries, she is to be included. But my life is designed for suffering. My wish is to die for her, and it won’t be long before the renown that is certainly mine will belong to her.

139

5

140

10

230

141 15

20

25

30

Aphorism. see p. 158 in this journal It is one thing to proclaim (pro�teri) a faith, a knowledge, an ability, something else to profit from it.

I cannot direct an a�ack against any particular, named man, for at that very instant I am in one way or another making a concession to the public as the forum of judgment. And therefore I will let everyone pass unchallenged rather than make that concession.

The growth of civilization, the rise of great cities, the centralizations, and what accompanied all this and essentially produced it, the press as a means of communication, has imparted a completely wrong direction to the whole of existence. Personal existence ceased. Quite literally to make ordinary daily life into one’s stage, to go out and teach in the streets: this was more and more done away with and in the end became the most ridiculous sort of exaggeration. All reform, to the extent that there was any, was now directed unilaterally against government. Of course, reforming “the crowd” didn’t occur to anyone; finally one became fully and firmly convinced that such an idea could only arise in a madhouse―and yet, this is rlly the idea behind what it means to reform. 3 profiteri] Latin, publicly declare, proclaim, confess.

1

5

232

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 141

1849

People allowed “the crowd” to exist, and actlly this was the category―or it was the press, with the assistance of this category―that reformed the government, with the help of the crowd. This must increasingly leave a deposit of something inorganic in states. This becomes the public, and here also is the proletariat. But wanting to reform the crowd―indeed, even now, when one finally begins to open one’s eyes a li�le―is something from which anyone shrinks, petrified with terror. And yet, this is rlly what it means to reform. And this is rlly where martyrdom is to be found. A�er all, what is being persecuted by the government compared with being persecuted by these thousands upon thousands of people every day, every hour[?] The fear of peop. is so dominant that merely drawing peop.’s a�ention to oneself is one’s downfall―regardless of whether it is for a good cause, or no cause, or for a crime. But nowadays it is impossible to labor in behalf of the good, the true, and the like, on a reasonable scale without drawing a�ention to oneself, and one’s downfall is thus assured. “A�ention”―especially because it has been insanely intensified with the help of the daily press― a�ention is the annihilating principle that will kill “the single individual.” And on the other hand, only “the single individual” can truly labor for truth. If Christ were alive now, “a�ention” would make the most desperate efforts to see whether it couldn’t succeed in stifling him. Every single day, every newspaper would contain an article on him. Every most insignificant detail about him would be broadcast across the country in 10,000 copies. Everything would be set in motion to make the situation crazy, if possible. And yet, it is on this path that the world must proceed. If not, then Xnty is a chimera. The pa�ern of existence in our time expresses that Xt is a chimera, for it expresses that the collectivity, not the individual, is what drives development. But

5

10

15

20

231 25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 141–143

5

10

15

1849

233

Xt was truly no collectivity, nor does he prefigure collectivities. Oh, but it is in vain, in vain that I bear witness and strain my existence to the limit. The few who do understand me to some degree dare not understand me. If they understand a li�le of me, they immediately busy themselves with ge�ing themselves understood by a collectivity, and then everything is once again confused. Meanwhile, there are 1000 clergy who have turned Xt into money, have obtained ecclesiastical livings out of “the truth suffers in the world.” And these clergy are or at least aspire to become knights of the Dannebrog, etc. And the country is Christian, that is certain, and now we will soon have a synod summoned to reform the Church. God in heaven!

232

142 20

25

30

143 35

But what I have always said is: Only a dead man can govern the crowd. This is also true of my life. As long as I live I have a dialectical reduplication that I cannot remove, that only death can take away. Then the situationa will also be toned down: people will not see this physical individual; he will be idealized; as they pass by, it will no longer occur to a shop boy, a university student, the garbage man, etc., etc. to determine whether he indeed looks like them, whether he is not so fine a specimen, so that it would be impossible that he could be the vessel of something higher.

This Past Summer, has been as if calculated to support me in what I have indeed understood to be my task, that of stopping my literary production now; it has tormented

Note It is obvious that the truth also becomes smaller, because it now has the aid of an illusion. Oh, how o�en I have run my head up against this, which almost brings me to despair and which can best be seen in the highest situation. When Xt lived on earth, Xnty was at any rate surely truest―and then they all abandoned him. Now, in 1849, now when Xnty has already been completely victorious for many centuries―well, no thanks. That means that one illusion, crazier than the other, has triumphed―and people say that this is the victory of Xnty.

a

1

5

10

15

234

1

5

10

[a] In addition, I have also been frightfully hindered by my relationship with R. Nielsen; though I myself have understood it as follows: through him I have become acquainted with the confounded meandering that cha�ers on and on, treats topics willy-nilly, and God knows, spends half a year, I think, to publish a li�le book―and nevertheless, I wanted his to come out first. And then he finally publishes, but for the most part produces only confusion.

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 143

1849

me by constantly bringing me a new external torment as soon as I have weathered the previous one. The war had taken Anders from me; the ambience of my house had been diminished, and the extremely unfortunate business of Strube’s illness had diminished my sense of the place even more; I wanted to travel far away, but it was impossible for me to leave. Then there were all my financial worries and the lamentable fact that, like a bolt out of the blue, we will probably get an income tax. Then Reitzel has brought me to the point of despair. When, as has been the case for me, being an author has involved such sacrifices, when I have to spend money qua author and perhaps ruin my future by writing―then not even having a publisher who is accommodating, but to be suffocated by his anxieties and hesitations, his unreasonableness in wanting me to have 1 or 2 signatures printed each week and to have the book appear at a more opportune season. All of which turned out to be a lie, but in my situation it was excruciating to have to undergo this sort of thing. And then the tanner at whose place I live has tormented me with a stench all summer long. Many, many times I have really had to make a mental effort to keep from ge�ing sick from impatience. Abused in many ways by the vulgarity of the mob and by people’s inquisitiveness, my home has been my consolation, having a pleasant home has been my greatest earthly encouragement. It was with an eye to this that I acquired such a fine and expensive apartment―and then to pay 200 rd. in order to suffer like this. Then I have again and again gone through spiritual trials in connection with publishing the works that have been completed. It is almost impossible for me to find diversion in Cph., for if I merely show myself, I am immediately besieged by a confounded inquisitiveness. During all this I have suffered my usual summertime torments.

5

10

15

20

233

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 143–145

5

10

15

20

Then Councillor of State Olsen died, and that gave me new worries. And during all this I have had to deny myself my real strength, I have not dared to start any new literary productivity, let alone increase the tempo and the impetus. I have even decided to stop my literary productivity. And yet writing is rlly my life. Naturally, my melancholia has thus had greater latitude than usual, for when I write I forget everything. It has truly been a difficult time for me. I interpret it simply as an exercise in patience, and I hope that as such it will truly be of benefit to me. However painful it is, it may help me become more concrete. But may I never forget to thank God for the indescribable good he has done for me, so much more than I had expected. And may what is original in my soul, what is blessed, always remain: that God is love, his wisdom infinite, his possibilities are infinite where I have only a sparrow’s portion of understanding, and where I scarcely have one possibility, he has millions of possibilities!

234 25

144

30

145

35

As the Draconian laws were of no benefit because they were too abstractly cruel, so with the idealizing pra�le of priestly discourse: they do not make it concrete, and the existential element remains untouched by the Christian element.

A Situation. Only in the situation of actuality can one rlly get a true impression of Christianity. When Xnty was persecuted, when accepting Xnty meant having one’s name immediately entered into the list of proscribed persons, that was a situation suited for making a pers. consider whether or not he wanted

1849

235

236

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 145–146

1849

to be a Xn. In a trivial dead calm of illusion, where everything is le� to a merely internal decision, one can have anxieties and be fearful about oneself, about whether or not one is actually a Xn, about whether it isn’t just something about which one is deluding oneself. I will now imagine a pers. who says to himself: [“]It is of course easy to see that what is proclaimed in the churches by people with clerical livings is not Xnty. On the other hand, I know what Xnty is. Now (for my own sake, so that I can bring about the situation of tension that is necessary for a decision of infinite importance) I will simply state this fact, placing it right in the midst of Xndom. Naturally, Xndom will then be furious, and I will experience something like persecution. But this is what I need so that I can at least properly approach the question of whether or not I want to be a Xn, and this is actlly also what Xndom needs.[”] Does a hum. being have the right to do this[?] He does so on behalf of the truth, and I cannot rlly judge otherwise than that he does have the right to do it. But I do not think that I dare assume such a responsibility myself. I believe that when a hum. being is to be used on such a scale, Governance will surely help him by constraining him to do it. Governance will guide his development, leading him forward li�le by li�le; it is not by virtue of an arbitrium that he will come to make a decision about something so great. In general, the consolation for those who are actlly used as instruments consists precisely in the fact that in one sense, they suffer against their will. As Plato says in the Republic, those who are to rule are exactly those who have no desire to rule: thus, too, does Governance make use of a hum. being to do what in a sense he least desires. Thus Governance uses the most tender-hearted hum. beings for what are just about the most cruel sorts of business, the weakest and most anxiety-ridden for the most demanding tasks, just as it used Moses―who indeed pointed out that he was least of all suited to be a speaker―to go to pharaoh.

1

[a]

On marriage.

The most dangerous thing about being married is all the hypocrisy to the effect that one does what one does for the sake of one’s wife and children. One wallows in worldliness and cowardice―and in addition one gives it an appearance of sanctity: it is a 25 arbitrium] Latin, will, arbitrary choice.

5

10

15

20

25

30

235

35

146 40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 146–148

1849

fine thing one is doing, for of course one is doing it for the sake of one’s wife and children.

147 5

10

15

20

Ah, some day a�er I am dead, Fear and Trembling alone will be enough to immortalize my name as an author. Then it will be read and translated into foreign languages. People will practically shudder at the frightful emotion in the book. But at the time it was wri�en, when the person who was believed to be its author went about in the incognito of a flaneur, looking like the very soul of roguishness, wit, and frivolity, no one could really grasp the seriousness. Ah, you fools, the book was never as serious as it was then. That itself is the true expression of the horror. Had the author appeared to be serious, the horror would have been less. The reduplication is what is monstrous in the horror. But when I am dead, people will form an imagined figure of me, a dark figure―and the book will be terrifying. But the book itself has already said something true by pointing out the difference between the poet and the hero. There is a predominantly poetic element within me, but Fear and Trembling contains a deliberate mystification, namely that it actlly reproduced my own life. The book was already hinted at in this fashion in the intimation of it that can be found in the oldest journal, the one in octavo, that is, the oldest journal from my time as an author.

25

148

236 30

35

Xnty does not actlly exist. At any rate, I have not seen one single existence that is Christian in the strict sense, any more than is my own existence. But, a�er all, what sort of frightful sham is it that an entire country is Christian and that 1000 men live off the entire country’s being Christian[?] Xnty does not actlly exist. This situation, compared to original Xnty, is like a tender and sentimental engagement compared with a marriage. People keep open the possibility of Xnty―perhaps in case one dies―but in other respects they do not put it on existentially. No one ventures daringly―so to speak―to leap existentially into the ethical. Xnty does not exist; everything is merely about Christianity―it is not.

237

238

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 149–150

1849

Even if my life had no other significance, I am now well satisfied with having properly discovered the absolutely demoralizing existence of the daily press. The press―more specifically, the daily press―and the whole of modern life corresponding to it are rlly what have made Xnty impossible. Think of Xt: there are 17 reasons why it would be nonsense for him to have to use a newspaper to proclaim his teachings, and it is blasphemy, among other reasons, because every word he speaks must have the personal emphasis of the speaking I, but communication via the press is an abstraction that is supposedly superior to the individual personality―but in the case of Xt, the situation is surely the very opposite of this. There are a very few people who in fact are beginning to understand me, but høchstens they admire me―and shrink back. They themselves have nothing to venture, if they dared like this, they would not recognize themselves.

149

On “her.” The ma�er is extremely difficult, also when it is viewed as follows: My life’s fast tempo. Its fortissimo in the tendency toward even becoming a martyr also expresses this: [“]You have a murder on your conscience[”]―and in a way, despite my own rational understanding, I have had to understand the ma�er in a purely religious sense. And now she is not dead, but alive: is this supposed to mean that it was I who took the ma�er too hard? But which ma�er?―the fact that a lovable young girl despairingly believes that it will be her death, and that a worried father assertively repeats this. Double confusion when the two of us are placed in proximity to one another: her matrimonial situation and my life’s enormous strains. But let those ma�ers be as they may, I certainly got them se�led properly and in a fine fashion. But now, to continue: if she opens her eyes even halfway and sees that I was not exactly a scoundrel, and sees how much she was loved―what then? Then assume that the passion is ignited once more and that we have the old story, raised to a higher intensity. Assume that she bursts the bonds of marriage, that she kicks over the traces and casts herself upon me in desperation, that she wants a separation,

150

15 høchstens] German-Danish, at most.

5

10

15

20

25

237 30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 150–152

5

10

15

20

151

30

1849

wants me to marry her―not to mention what is even more frightful. What then? It would be impossible to employ the cruelty of reduplication for a second time, it would be impossible for me to regain my position.―This, you see, is something my rational understanding understands, and I am quite clear about understanding this. My understanding understands that if there is to be any talk of changing methods now, it must involve pu�ing her instead on a stricter diet, so that she never gets to see me, and if she were to encounter me in church, not to let her catch my eye. But then when the ma�er is brought into my God-relationship, everything becomes confused. I (who infinitely need div. compassion), even though I have not been cruel to her, it seems to me, in fear and trembling, as if I now am [being cruel to her], now that she is married. These words torment me: Become reconciled with your opponent while you are on the way with him. Finally, it would satisfy me religiously to transfer to her the entire glory of my renown, and as I once presented the world with a frightful example, now I present it with the exact opposite.―Though if I act on this and things go wrong, my understanding will rise up against me and say: Of course, I saw that this is what would happen.―Frightful suffering to be the superior one! In a certain sense it is enviable good fortune to be a woman!

Ah, there is indeed something sadly true in the circumstance that it would be be�er that Xnty not be preached at all than that it be preached as it is nowadays. To be elated for an hour in this way once a week just as one is in the theater, and then the problem is exactly that one gets accustomed to hearing everything without it in any way occurring to a person that he do something.

238

152 35

Sometimes I find it edifying to consider that the thorn or barb I have in the flesh, the suffering of which I patiently strive to bear―that this is exactly what will become, or what will help me to become a thorn in the eye of the world.

239

240

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 153–154

1849

Sermonic discourse functions more or less as follows: With the help of Christianity it entices mildly, and then it resorts to terror to repel. Be humble, it is said, be humble, because―inasmuch as the manner of sin is always the manner of punishment―the proud person, who wants to stand on his own, will come to stand on his own as a punishment. But, but, but Your Reverence, of course Xt also came to stand on his own, so by imitating him one goes with even greater certainty straight into the terror―which, however, had been used as the deterrent that was supposed to terrify a person into the mildness.―Be indulgent, it is said, because the obstinate and imperious person will end up being mocked, ridiculed ― ― but, but of course this is how Xt ended up. Such a person will be put to death ― ― but, but of course Xt was crucified. Thus everything is confusion. And what reveals an even deeper confusion in Xndom is that if I wanted to present this as poetic lines in the mouth of a wi�y fellow in a novella, I would be admired, applauded by layman and learned alike―for basically all agree that this is perdü. But when I say it straight out, people become enraged, because it of course looks almost as if a hum. being was mad enough to want Christianity to be taken seriously.

153

Vigilius Haufniensis has properly drawn a�ention to the concept of “anxiety” as a middle term in relation to temptation. Properly speaking it is the dialectic of temptation. If a hum. being were able u�erly to be without anxiety, temptation would never take hold of him. This in turn is how I understand the fact that it was the serpent who tempted Adam and Eve, for the serpent’s power consists precisely of anxiety; it is not so much the cunning that is wily as the cunning that knows how to create anxiety. And (as Anti-Climacus rightly remarks with respect to the immediate―it is right at the beginning of the book, where the universality of despair is treated―) anxiety is strongest when it makes use of nothing. Thus it is that the tempter and the temptation even impute the invention of the temptation to the person who succumbs, for the tempter and the temptation say: I really said nothing at all, your anxiety was about nothing. Anxiety is the first reflex of possibility, a twinkle, and yet a terrible magic.

154

19 perdü] French, properly “perdu,” lost, destroyed, disappeared.

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

239

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 155–157

155

5

156

1849

Alas, this is how it should be: the thought of God should make a hum. being so joyous that from that moment on, the whole of his life, every hour of it, would be in service of God―Alas, and this is how it is with us: all we rlly want is for God to love us.―And I confess that the very thought of a hum. being daring to say to God, [“]I love you[”] seems to me almost too lo�y.

Ought not we think that it is a fine, a properly moral world, this world where―as is the case today―there are placards on street corners that say: “The World Wants to Be Deceived.” Alas, precisely this shameless, frivolous knowledge constitutes the deepest degradation.

15

157

20

25

30

240 35

Look, this version of things will endear Fredrikke Bremer to various circles. I am now living here, have voluntarily made myself vulnerable and endure the long-drawn-out and perhaps most embi�ering of martyrdoms, that of ridicule (doubly painful because it is on such a small stage and because deep down people themselves recognize how much has been granted me and what I accomplish); I endure this under frightful mental strain, have kept up my literary productivity in the face of continuing financial sacrifice―and yet it is clear to all that I have not come out with one single utterance concerning this ma�er. In Frederikke it is stated that I am so sickly and so irritable that I can become embi�ered if the sun does not shine as I wish it to.―Goody-goody old maid, frivolous tramp, you’ve hit it just right! This explanation will unite different circles that perhaps are not so different from one another. On the one side, Martensen, Pauli, Heiberg, etc. On the other side, Goldschmidt, P. L. Møller. It was a fine world: Martensen may bear witness “before God and his conscience,” and didn’t he also get a velvet paunch and become a bishop, and didn’t Frederikke come running to him every day, reading the Dogmatics, of which she received galley proofs (this is well known)[?] And Goldschmidt may say: It was a fine world, and I always had 3000

241

242

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 157–160

1849

subscribers. All of them together: It would be a fine world, except that Mag. K. is so sickly and irritable that he can become embittered if the sun does not shine as he wishes it.

5

Zacharias Werner says in his sermon for the 1st Sunday in Advent that Xt means an anointed one; but there are only two classes of peop. who are anointed, priests and kings―and Xt is both priest and king, so he is the anointed one in a double sense.

158

10

This, too, is characteristic of Xndom: if Christianity has any special affinity for anyone, if it can be said to belong especially to anyone, then it can be said to belong especially to those who suffer: the poor, the sick, the lepers, the mentally ill and similar people, sinners, criminals―and look what Christendom has done to them, see how they get removed from life so as not to create a disturbance―earnest Christendom: [those people can] scarcely find a priest, and if so only a mediocre one. Xt did not divide people in this manner; he was priest especially for these people. The priests, on the other hand, cling to worldly wealth; there they embellish life: “they alleviate the sorrows and ennoble the joys,” that’s what they do, and the most curious thing of all is that they do it in accordance with a fee schedule. What has happened to Xnty in Xndom is like what happens when you give something to a sick child―and then a couple of stronger children come along and seize it. These altogether too strong, worldly peop., whose entire lives and way of thinking are worldliness, seize Xnty, seize all its consolation, which was presented in the form of hum. compassion―and those unfortunates who ought especially to have benefited from it, they are shoved aside.

Zacharias Werner (in the sermon for the third Sunday in Advent) puts it superbly: John is the voice of the one who cries in the wilderness―and there is still wilderness, our heart is a wilderness.

159

15

20

25

30

241

160

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 161–162

161

5

162 10

15

20

25

30

35

1849

The woman who was a sinner, who was, a�er all, a woman and a sinner, dared to go see Xt in the Pharisee’s house, where the Pharisees were gathered for dinner―Nicodemus, who, a�er all, saw himself as a righteous man, dared only come to him at night.

A Point de vüe with a Lutheran Tendency. What Luther says in the preface to the Postil about the difference betw. Xt as exemplar and as gi� is quite correct. I am also well aware that I have tended in the direction of Xt as exemplar. But in this connection something must be borne in mind. Luther was confronted by the exaggerated misuse of Xt as exemplar, and he therefore emphasizes the opposite. But nowadays Luther has long since triumphed in Protestantism and has caused Xt to be entirely forgo�en as an exemplar, and the whole business has rlly become a pretense about hidden inwardness. Furthermore, I have also been of the opinion that as exemplar Xt must be used in a different manner than that actlly contemplated by Luther or the Middle Ages. As exemplar Xt must in fact jack up the price so frightfully that the prototype is the very thing that teaches hum. beings to take refuge in grace. The error of the Middle Ages consisted in imagining that it was possible to resemble Xt. Then came sanctification by works and the like. Then, just so, Luther came and emphasized Xt as gi�, making the same distinction betw. Xt as gi� and as exemplar as that between faith and works. But I wonder if Luther could have dreamed of the pretense about hidden inwardness that this has engendered. And further, I wonder whether Luther, when he married, could have dreamed that this would finally be carried so far that a priest would come to believe more or less that if only he got married, he would have done everything that God required of him. I can very well see how someone could mount an a�ack on me precisely from Luther’s standpoint; but truly, I too have understood Luther quite well―and I have also been careful not to blunder about in the fog, as if everything were still as it was in Luther’s day.

243

244

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 163–164

1849 242

[“]The world wants to be deceived[”] can be said in quite different ways: 1) by a shrewd person who avails himself of it and says, The world wants to be deceived; 2) by a shrewd person who hypocritically defends himself by saying that this is simply the way things are in practical life, The world wants to be deceived; 3) by a person who has mystified his appearance to be infinitely worse than he is, so that he appears to be a scoundrel and heartless, when he was indeed a loving person, and who then, having been confirmed in his belief that the world rlly does like the scoundrel best, exclaims in terror, But my God and Father, the world does indeed want to be deceived; 4) by a witness to the truth who sadly says, It wants to be deceived; it is not merely deceived, it wants to be deceived; I patiently suffer the consequences―all the persecution, mockery, scorn, etc.―of not wanting to deceive it.

163

Xnty does not actlly exist. Christendom is awaiting a comic poet à la Cervantes, who will use what is essentially Christian to create a parallel to Don Quixote. The only difference is that in this case no poetic exaggeration whatever will be needed as in Don Quixote―oh, no: he can take any essential and true Christian existence whatever, not to mention simply taking Xt or an apostle: that will be sufficient. The comic element emerges because the times have changed so enormously that they find this comical. That someone actually, literally renounces this life in earnest; that he voluntarily gives up the happiness of love that was offered to him; that he endures all sorts of earthly hardships, despite the fact that he has been offered the opposite; that he thus exposes himself to all the suffering of spiritual trials (for spiritual trials only arise when they are voluntary); and that, suffering all this, he then submits to being mistreated for having done so, hated, persecuted, mocked―which is Christianity’s inevitable lot in this world. Such a life would seem absolutely comical to everything in our age. It is a Don Quixote.―All the business about the eternal can be all right, can be accepted―if one also gets what is worldly, or is at least permi�ed to seek it even if he does not get it: that is all right. But to forsake things voluntarily! That is

164

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 164–165 243

5

10

15

20

25

165

30

35

40

1849

245

too lo�y. There was a time when this was so excessively lo�y that people said in admiration: I cannot do it. In our times it is so excessively lo�y that people find it ridiculous. Just look at some lesser examples. Even a girl who has been unlucky in love and wants to remain faithful to “the deceiver” is abandoned by the passion of the times. The passion of the times is to get married―if that sort of thing can be considered a passion at all. And because people basically consider everything having to do with the herea�er to be doubtful, uncertain, extremely dubious―as is inherent in the categories themselves―then it is comical when a person wagers absolutely everything on it. People would say to that girl, [“]Now how can you be so foolish as to want to believe in such a pers.―take hold of yourself, you still have your life ahead of you.[”] Alas, fundamentally people also regard God in Heaven as the most cunning of all deceivers and seducers, who tries to entrap a person’s imagination, seducing a person into wagering everything on this uncertainty―and then. What wonder people find it comical! In an age less dominated by the understanding, people find it unfortunate―lamentable, touching―to be deceived. In an age in which the understanding is everything, people find it comical: it lies in the categories themselves. What is frightful is that people still want to call themselves Xns, claim that all are Xns. And if someone wants to tell Xndom unreservedly how things are, he is persecuted as someone who is not a Xn―is persecuted by Christians.

God knows what is rlly going on with him. Suppose he actually―perhaps without being clearly aware of it himself―has wanted to exploit me instead of serving my cause! With the view of my cause he claimed to have, he certainly ought to have assumed a more truly helpful posture. Assume, instead, that he intended to make a splash, that he reckoned that if I granted him my approval (which he received when I permi�ed him to approach me personally) he would shine―ah, and then there would be no punishment. He has imagination and has not been formed and educated by profound sufferings―in such a case it is very easy for the imagination to insert a notion of suffering that has a shortened perspective, so that it becomes the worldly notion of victory. From the very beginning, I have warned him.―Now he lies ill and I am rlly unable to determine how sick he is. Presumably he will now have to endure quite a bit from his wife, who

[a]

R. Nielsen

1

246

1

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

[b]

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 165–168

Fundamentally, however, the result is also quite strange. The world, which has always been diametrically opposed to me, has now almost become angry with R. N. because he has wanted to resemble me, and now I am elevated all the more―so that I can be used against him. But here it comes again: this definitely would not have befallen him if he had declared as formally as possible right in the preface that he had made use of my writings. As the one person who knew most about the situation, I was willing to remain silent, and I have remained silent. I was actually of the opinion that this quasi-falsehood would have worked for him, and that inasmuch as I was not particularly well-liked, the same message said by someone else would find a hearing―I would have had to put up with that. But there you are, it’s happening in spite of this. This is also typical with respect to my relation to the times: people are envious and contentious and will not acknowledge my distinction―but if there is someone who wants to play my part, they grant me my distinction and use it as a criterion against him. The last time I spoke with him, Bishop Mynster said: “To surrender oneself like this and copy someone else is just all wrong, dashing from the one extreme (absolute Hegelian) to the other. Of course we are all influenced by you and your works, we all acknowledge that.” [a]

On “falling away”

1849

probably does not exactly sing my praises but holds me guilty of everything. But what can one do[?] I have said to him again and again, I have repeatedly said that to proclaim the truth is to suffer: and now, however, he seems to be despondent. He has regarded me as stronger than Martensen and his consorts, and there is indeed some truth in this, but how o�en haven’t I told him that they might very well still be stronger in the worldly sense. The more truth a pers. has, and thus the stronger he is, the more likely―indeed, the more certain―it is that “the others” are stronger in the worldly sense. For gibberish and vacillation are always infinitely more popular than truth; selfishness more popular than selflessness, etc.

244 5

10

15

What Zacharias Werner says in the sermon for the 3rd Sunday in Advent is very true: “St. Gregory the Great puts it very well in noting that when John the Baptist says quite freely, I am not Xt―this free and humble acknowledgment already says who he is, for one is immediately forced to note that this was a great prophet and lover of the truth.”

166

The prototypes are anonymous or eternal images: “The Tax Collector,” “The Woman Who Was a Sinner,”―a name can so easily disturb, se�ing tongues wagging so that one comes to forget oneself. An anonymous prototype forces one to think of oneself as much as possible.

167

Perhaps the “falling away” foreseen by Xnty prior to the consummation of everything will issue, indirectly, from Xnty itself.

168

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 168–169

245 5

10

15

20

25

169

35

Xnty’s deepest confusion is the confounded, frivolous manner in which it has identified Xnty with the world, making everyone into Xns without further ado; in short, the deepest fall is the concept “Christendom,” as it is understood in our time as being simply identical with the hum. race. Now if Xnty once again rises up and regains its resilience, this Christian world will be furious; then indeed the decision will be at hand―and perhaps the decision will be that if people are to be serious about being a Xn, they will give it up. It must not be forgo�en that “falling away” can come from the world, from the offended, demons, free-thinkers, and the like, but also, as shown here, it can come dialectically and indirectly from Xnty itself. Of course, the world took greatest offense at Xnty when Xt was alive. Then the whole world rejected Xnty. That was not a falling away, because at that time the world was not shamming Xnty. All this silly optimism about everyone becoming Xns has no place in Xnty. Xt himself says: When the Son of Man comes again, will he find faith on the earth[?]. The “falling away” will constitute a greater guilt than the first offense at Xnty, because the reason for the “falling away” is of course the fact that people have passed themselves off as Xns.

Christ is born in a stable, swaddled in rags, laid in a manger―so apparently insignificant was this child, so li�le valued. And immediately therea�er, this child was so costly that it cost the children of Bethlehem their lives. This is the sort of extravagance there can be in connection with this child.

1849

247

248

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 170–173

1849

Friday Discourses This can become a standard literary format.

170

3 Discourses at the Communion on Fridays. No. 1. Lk 7:47: “but the one to whom li�le is forgiven, loves li�le.” No. 2. 1 Pet 4:7: love shall cover a multitude of sins. It is of course quite especially true at “the altar” that “love,” namely Xt’s love, covers a multitude of sins. In the strictest sense Xt’s reconciliation was love’s work or a “work of love” ϰατ᾽ εξοχην. 1

5

10

[a]

No. 3: Lk 24:31 could be used. The very fact that he becomes invisible to me is the sign that I recognize him: he is of course the object of faith, a sign of contradiction, must thus in a sense become invisible when I recognize him. He is the prototype, must therefore become invisible so that the imitator can resemble him. At the altar he is invisibly and yet truly present.

246 5

10

No. 3. 1 Cor 11:31, 32. can be used another time. in the 30th verse, it indeed also says that it was when he blessed the bread, broke it, and gave it to them that they recognized him.

15

1 Cor 9:18 Paul says: my reward is that I can present the gospel of Xt without being paid, thus his reward consists simply in the fact that he takes no payment. Here, you see, this is a discourse fi�ing for an apostle.

171

Thomas à Kempis says: A hum. being has two wings with which he ascends to God: simplicity and faithfulness.

172

In those situations where by remaining silent I would appear less good than I am, I should remain silent―for example by giving alms in secret. When

173

11 ϰατ᾽ εξοχην] Greek, in the eminent sense, par excellence.

20

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 170

1849

NB12:170. The markings underneath the marginal note are wri�en in red pencil, and were added by later editors of Kierkegaard’s papers.

249

250

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 173–175

1849

by remaining silent I would appear be�er than I am, I should speak―the confession of sins. The good a pers. does he should, if possible, keep to himself; he should speak of the evil he has done. Incidentally, in connection with this la�er, there are some very strange conflicts involving what is voluntary. If a pers. bears the heavy awareness of a sin, but it has not been discovered and is perhaps of the sort that does not concern the civil authorities, should he himself go and confess it publicly[?] Here a certain sort of Xnty would say that this is tempting God―he can indeed go quietly, bearing his punishment, and in other respects honestly let his life serve the good.

5

248

10

In this world one certainly sees quite o�en a person who does not believe that he himself needs rigorous Xnty, but believes that he must be rigorous with others. In my life I have never gone further, nor will I surely ever get further, than that point of “fear and trembling” at which it literally becomes certain to me that every other hum. being will surely be saved―excepting only myself. And in another regard: I have always been afraid to present Xnty’s rigor, for it seems to me that it is too rigorous, and that in view of my life, I could certainly have need of such rigor, but others do not. As soon as someone turned to me personally, I would immediately reduce the rigor significantly and grant the greatest possible leniency―but I do not escape the rigor.

174

My Standpoint. I set forth what Xnty is; to an extraordinary degree I possess all the prerequisites for this, and I quite literally understand this to be my calling, to which I have been guided in the most peculiar fashion since my earliest years. I do this in partly poetic form. Now it depends on how the age will take it, and on this my fate also depends. If it [the age] remains calm and quietly allows itself to be in�uenced by it, the situation will be as gentle as possible.

175

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 175–176

5

249

15

20

25

176 30

35

1849

If it does not, if it turns on me and attacks, then in one sense, it will be so much the worse for the age, for in that case I must remain in place. From the reception accorded my presentation I may draw a straightforward proof of the case against Christendom. Then the rigor will everywhere be raised to a higher power. Naturally, this will also be rather rigorous for myself as well, but I must certainly be a part of it. I have never maintained that I was an extraord. Christian. My situation is actually more as if I imagined a prince who captured a man known for his excellent talents and his knowledge of a particular �eld, held him prisoner and said to him: [“]I want you to present this matter. If you do as I want, things will go very well for you. Every day you will have suf�cient free time to rest and divert yourself, but you must also work diligently and strenuously for a suitable length of time every day.[”] Thus it actually seems to me that I have a peculiarly childlike relationship to Governance. I get a certain amount of free time every day in which I divert myself, and it never occurs to me that I am not totally allowed to enjoy myself in purely human fashion, as best I can, and that it is the will of Governance that I do so. But nothing more. And for the rest, if I do not do as it wills, it has frightful means by which to compel me. Ah, and this is how I live alone in the in�nite world. When I look the wrong way, and look at the others, at how they live, busily occupied with activities of the moment and with �nite purposes, it is terrifying. But when I believe, I am secure and happy.

For me there is consolation in being certain that I am headed in the right direction, that if anyone in my times can be said to have been constructed for inwardness, I am precisely the person, precisely that person―who nonetheless may lay claim to a li�le bit of externality. In this there is certainly indeed a guarantee that it does not simply tend in the direction of sanctification by works. But the fact is that the business of hidden inwardness had become such nonsense that a cunning person was needed in order to get behind it and a�ack from behind.

251

252

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 177–178

1849

In the sermon on the gospel for the 4th Sunday in Advent Luther himself says―and this is of course eternally unchangeable―that every sermon begins by being first of all a sermon of Law. And I find what he then says about the sermon of the Law to be in complete accord with what I usually say about using the prototype to preach peop. to pieces so that they seek refuge in grace. For the basic error of the Middle Ages was that they indeed clung in childish (and to that extent forgivable) fashion to the naive view that they could succeed in resembling, in attaining, the prototype. But it is certain that the prototype must remain the prototype, that is, that one must strive to resemble it and yet at the same time the prototype is also that which by its infinite distance crushes the imitator, as it were, or casts him down into the most yawning gulf―and then again the prototype is himself the merciful one who helps him [the human being] to resemble him. Properly understood, the doctrine of the prototype encompasses everything. But back to Luther. Luther says that when the Law is properly preached to a pers., he feels his misery―and then he becomes embi�ered at the Law―and this is precisely what passes judgment on him. This is quite correct. The Law captures one totally, not by fulminating against one or another of a person’s actual sins―no, it makes him despairingly into a total rebel against the Law from which he nevertheless cannot wrest himself free―and so he is caught.

177

There is alas something indescribably sad in my life situation. I wanted to live with the simple man. It was indescribably satisfying to me to be friendly and kind and a�entive and sympathetic to precisely that social class that is altogether too neglected in the so-called “Christian state.” What I could accomplish was in many ways merely insignificant, but it could nonetheless be of some significance to this sort of peop. Let me take an example, and I have scores of them. An oldish-looking woman from Amager sits in the arcade selling fruit. She has an elderly mother whom I have occasionally helped out a li�le. When I greet her, I have not really done anything. Nevertheless it pleased her, it cheered her up that every morning a pers. whom she might regard as fortunate in life came by and never forgot to say “Good Morning” and occasionally also to exchange a few words with her. Ah, truly, if it is to atone even the least bit for the scandalous injustice of its

178

5

10

250 15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 178

5

10

15

251

20

25

30

35

40

1849

existence, the Christian state in fact has need of precisely the sort of flaneur I was. For everyone grasps for the higher, more distinguished relativities of society, and as soon as they get there―who cares about the common man of the people[?] There is a need for a flaneur of this sort, or many of them, as a connecting link. How heartening it is in so many ways for the class of peop. who must otherwise stand and wait in anterooms, who are hardly permitted to say a single word―how heartening it is that there is one pers. whom they always see on the street, a pers. whom they can approach and talk with freely, a pers.―and that was me―a pers. who is all eyes for the sufferings of this very class of peop., and furthermore, that this is a pers. who has a secure place in genteel society. Ah, even if it was partly my melancholia, it is nonetheless also Xnty. This has now been fundamentally disrupted. For that class of society I exist as a sort of half-mad fellow―now I can do nothing to help them, now I must avert my gaze and absent myself if things are not to end with my becoming a mad Maier who collects a crowd. And this is the product of the very journalism that claims to protect the common man―from the distinguished classes. This, you see, is what comes of a state in which “boys judge us.” A truly clever head, a youth who―not with respect to his crimes, for in that respect I served only to warn and admonish him, but with respect to what was perhaps a be�er possibility― sat at my feet, learning (and this he will scarcely deny): he has 3000 subscribers in a country where I have 50 buyers. Nonetheless, nonetheless, things go round. I will be understood, perhaps while I am still alive, and perhaps much sooner than I think―and when I have garnered even a modicum of understanding, I am convinced that no one will be so hard-hearted as not to be moved by my life―and then the fact that I have endured this will once again serve me well, or not me, but rather my cause. The common man is my task, even if I have always been obliged to take my place at the highest levels of the world of culture and distinction. And among the things my life will come to include will be this atoning element: that a�er all, it is not so much the refined class that perpetrates injustice against the lowly as it is their own leaders and heroes.

253

254

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 179

1849

It is indeed quite true, what the pseudonyms o�en point out: that the paradigms that are used in sermonic discourse should employ possibility, not historical actuality. Historical actuality is a result; the speaker now views the ma�er quite one-sidedly from one particular aspect: that this man was the good, the noble character. But in doing this, the entire picture is disturbed. Everything must be done realistically, in the situation of contemporaneity, when it is still undecided whether or not the man is good. It is only from a presentation of this sort that I can actlly learn anything for my life. The other method merely creates various sorts of confusion. For example, in the 2nd sermon of his first volume, Grundtvig presents the episode in which the Jews mocked Xt, saying: [“]He has helped others and cannot help himself[”]. He says that this is a good example of hellish delight. But here a false effect is produced because we believe in Xt. Incidentally, Grundtvig ought to search his own soul to see whether he might not have u�ered the same words if he had lived contemporaneously with someone whom he saw as a fraud and who came to such a bad end. The words express joy over nemesis. One should not approve of such words, but rather combat them―but simply presenting these peop. as candidates for hell is nonsense.

179

5

10

15

252 20

25

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 180

1849

255

253

180

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

Texts for Friday Discourses No. 1, 1 Cor 11:31, 32. No. 2. Mt 13:45–46. The kingdom of heaven is compared to a hum. being. He found a pearl of great price―and yet he went and sold everything he had and bought it. But if he found it, he of course did not need to sell anything―in order to buy it, for of course it was his. Here one can see the true Christian scale. It is grace, which you cannot buy, cannot earn―it must be given (just as he must find the pearl)―and only then can it be bought, only then can you sell everything you have in order to buy it. Thus, too, at the altar. No. 3 Revelations 3:20. Of Xt it is told that once, a�er his resurrection, when all the disciples were gathered together, he came to them through closed doors. This is o�en misused as a metaphor that supposedly depicts the zeal with which Xt seeks souls: that he even goes through closed doors (people who are indifferent or even those who have hardened their hearts). But this is untrue. He stands at the door and knocks. If anyone hears my voice and opens the door, I will go in to him and hold communion with him, and he with me. For it is certainly true that communion is this visible thing, that these actual peop. are now kneeling at the altar, and every one of them receives the bread and the communion―but it does not follow from this that Xt holds communion with every such person. No, only the person who hears Xt’s voice (but this must be executed in a different style than the earlier one, “My Sheep Hear My Voice”), only the person who opens the door (the door of the heart―for the doors of the Church stand open to all, and one person can open the church door for

[a] Remarkable that the kingdom of heaven is compared to a hum. being―one would of course think that the kingdom of heaven was something outside a person, into which a pers. is taken up. But of course the kingdom of heaven is also “within you”―it can therefore be compared to a hum. being. The unity of the subjective and the objective: that the very objective kingdom of heaven is compared to a hum. being.

1

5

10

256

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 180–181

1849

another, but only the individual himself can open the door of his heart). To him will I go in (for it is certainly the case that during the communion hour, following the invitation “come here,” you come to Xt, but it is only true communion when Xt comes to you), and hold communion with him, and he with me (for of course it is not you who hold communion with Xt, but Xt who first holds communion with you, and only then do you hold communion with him. Grace is everything).

Texts for Friday Discourses

1

[a]

Lk 21:28, When these things begin to take place, look up.

No. 1. Mt 28:5: “Do not be afraid; I know that you are look ing for Jesus who was crucified.” That the sinner’s first relation to Xt is to flee from him, to fear him. See Journal NB11 p. 186. No. 2. Lk 18:13 “But the tax collector … would not even li� up his eyes to heaven.” First the significance of this is described. Next, Xt’s words to the person born blind (Lk 18:42) are used as a counter-theme: [“]Look up[”] (not as in the Danish text, [“]See.[”] What is wri�en is [“]αναβλεψον[”]), [“]your faith has saved you.[”] The significance of looking up―of looking upward, fresh, and cheerfully courageous―of course this is how we address the sick, the afflicted, the careworn person, when we want to encourage him to take hope: Look up! Unwillingness to li� one’s eyes to heaven is a sign of having lost one’s cheerful courage, but Christ gives cheerful courage: Look up. No. 3. Mt 8:8 “And the centurion answered, saying… but only speak the word, and my servant will be healed or, as it says in the old hymn, One word from you heals For all eternity. Being at a loss for words, sometimes even in relation to a hum. being―for example, the word Yes, to the lover; words of forgiveness from someone one has wronged, etc. But this is how it is with Xt’s words at the communion. Many words he spoke to his contemporaries have been preserved, but the words of communion are spoken directly to us: [“]This is my body which is given for you.[“] 20 αναβλεψον] Greek, Look up.

254

5

181

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 182–184

1849

255

182 5

183

15

20

25

30

184 35

256

It is really remarkable if you read the description of the future found toward the end of A Literary Review of “Two Ages” and then consider how quickly and precisely it was fulfilled two years later, in 1848, and how no one noticed it when it was wri�en, but everyone believed that everything was secure, that both “the system” and states were virtually at the highest point of perfection.

In an otherwise really maundering funeral piece on the Gospel story about the widow’s son in Nain, Visby nonetheless came up with a remark that deserves notice. He said that “sorrow,” ϰατεξοχην, is always sorrow over those who are dead; to bear sorrow, to walk in sorrow, etc.―always has to do with sorrow over the dead. But why is this sorrow the sorrow ϰατεξοχην[?] Visby stressed that this was the case because there is relief for every other sorrow, understood in the sense that the sorrow can still be transformed into joy. But it is impossible to have the dead person back again. In itself this is a very true statement. However, I think it ought to be used in order to show that there exists a far deeper sorrow than that over someone dead. The discourse ought to arranged like this: that for the natural hum. being, sorrow over someone dead is “the sorrow;” for the Xn, sorrow over sin is the deepest sorrow. The loss of the deceased is in no way irreparable, for of course there is eternity, but the loss inflicted by sin is eternally irreparable. Thus a sermon could have been preached on the gospel story about the widow’s son making use of the theme: The Irreparable Loss. In describing an excellent or wonderfully lovable pers., people do indeed say that his loss is irreparable, but this is not true. Only the loss inflicted by sin is irreparable.

In his sermon for Whitsunday (the Sunday a�er Easter), Zacharias Werner says that Gregory the Great has said: “Neither the faith of Magdalene nor that of Peter is as instructive as Thomas’s lack of faith.”

13 ϰατεξοχην] Greek, in the eminent sense, par excellence.

257

258

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 185

1849

It is in fact not merely frivolous, it is base to be a religious speaker. Xnty has never asked to have these, it has asked for: witnesses. Assuredly, one must speak, but one’s life must speak in very powerful fashion. God in Heaven! how these worldly, refined, pampered, and morally cowardly but well-spoken speakers have demoralized Xndom! Just a couple of small examples. If a person truly suffers, if he truly is poor, if the world truly opposes him―even if he had the tongue of an angel, the mass of peop. would be afraid to hear him. But a fine man who is surrounded by plenty, who possesses worldly power and influence, who is decked out in silk and velvet: if he speaks movingly, everyone flocks to him, they weep. He also surreptitiously appropriates the compassion that should rightly be given to the true sufferer, and isn’t this as mean as devouring the homes of widows and orphans―and isn’t this “to pray lengthy prayers for appearance’s sake”! A man who truly is persecuted―indeed, if his tongue is more eloquent than that of an angel, the peop. are afraid to hear him. But someone who gorges himself on worldly goods, possesses power and honor and respect―if he movingly declaims about how the persecuted suffer for the faith: everyone flocks to him. A speaker of this sort also usurps and purloins the compassion that rightly belongs to the person who is actually persecuted, adding it to his stars and sashes and ribbons as one more refinement on his velvet paunch: righteous God! These liars, these tarted-up rhetoricians, pamper peop. so that they fail to recognize true suffering in real life. As someone who has never seen beggars anywhere but on the stage would shrink back in horror on seeing an actual beggar, thus do these speakers make peop. cowardly and so�; and far from leading them to Xnty, all their talk leads them away from it. Things ought to mean something. If a man simply wants to be a rhetorician, if he wants permission to spare his own life self-indulgently while he carefully trains his voice, his gestures, etc.― well, then, he is to be regarded as an actor, and is to be paid, judged, and acknowledged accordingly. But a priest, etc.―no, he is not permi�ed to be that! There is nothing to object to in actors; as far as that goes, there is no problem in making room for godly actors―but one thing must not happen: this must not be confused with being a priest. Ah, but illusion has been brought into the churches―more illusion than is sought a�er, o�en so vainly,

185

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

257

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 185–186

5

10

15

20

25

30

1849

in the theater―which have become playhouses for these confounded rhetorician-comedians. It is these rhetorician-comedians above all who are to blame for making the unshakable principle that one’s actions match one’s words into a laughable exaggeration. How laughable as well, when all the advantages are beckoning, to get oneself castrated and become a rhetorician-comedian, how laughable, then, to take the trouble of pu�ing into practice the least li�le bit of what one speaks about, when all the dangers and troubles await a person; how laughable―and it is even more laughable the more one dares to do what one speaks about, for the dangers become all the more certain. Just take this one respectable fellow, Tryde. He ordains Kofoed-Hansen and declaims movingly about how, in these times, the servants of the Lord must reflect quite especially on the fact that this is a ma�er in which one’s life is at stake. Absolutely, thanks for that. Tryde would―if only! And now for the splendid part of the story: It is well known that Kofoed-Hansen had applied for a call to a parish and then had to withdraw his application. And why? Because the living a�ached to the call was a couple of hundred rix-dollars less than he had expected. And Tryde knows this. I raise no objections against Kofoed-Hansen―he of course is not the one who speaks in such high-toned language―but against Tryde. How is anything other than the demoralization of the entire congregation possible[?] Look, when someone comes along who is in earnest about merely exposing himself to the danger of ridicule, they all laugh, “He is mad.” Ah, how o�en haven’t I had to hear that, haven’t I had to let myself be publicly abused on the streets―ah, but the other situation is moving, is moving because of course everyone knows the whole story, that in this case it is only a joke to speak of pu�ing one’s life in danger―realiter it is about the income being 200 rd. too small.

35

186

40

258

Equality, of course, is what the world wants, loving one’s neighbor―and then I am persecuted because I lived and continue to live on the streets. But if there was a purpose behind it, it was indeed calculated to weaken the worldliness that had stiffened into relativities. By being that µεταβασις εις αλλο γενο[ς] namely to the existential sphere, my daily existence, or a daily existence of that sort, was worth infinitely more than 10 or 32 realiter] Latin, in reality.

40 µεταβασις εις αλλο γενος] Greek, transition to another conceptual sphere.

259

260

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 186–187

1849

20 newspaper articles and an entire journal that declaim but that, existentially, remain in the old sphere. But certainly at least a part of the reason I was misunderstood was that I did what I did for religious reasons and not in order to serve an esteemed, cultivated public. For this same reason I cannot defend myself, for in so doing I would of course concede to the public. But my life will contain the most precise, existential police investigation in the Christian spirit. From various angles, everything will be arranged to illuminate this thesis: With What Right Has Denmark, in specie Cph., Called Itself Xn, With What Right Have 1000 Civil Servants Made Xnty into a Living and into Nothing Else[?] In addition, my life will be a complete existential study of the hum. selfishness and all the deceit and hypocrisy that is propagated by means of Xnty.

Xnty teaches this: An eternal blessedness awaits, a blessedness that surpasses all understanding and that even in this life can to some extent can be present in a hum. being as the blessedness of faith. But in addition, further: now comes what is next. No one, quite literally no thief, robber, or cheat can be said to cast himself down into certain ruin as surely as does a Xn. And no one, no one is so hated. For the world does not hate the robber et al. who of course expresses that the world is be�er than himself. The world does not hate the thief, who expresses as powerfully as any miser that money is a great good. Only the Xn is hated. He must be annihilated in a fashion as mean as that reserved for any criminal. Otherwise, worldliness will have no peace and can take no joy in what is worldly, the influence of which is weakened by the Xn, who expresses that romantic love is selfishness, that friendship is selfishness, that honor and the like are zero, and that money is less than zero. Isn’t this outrageous[?] Isn’t it the basest sort of abomination[?] Ought not Barrabas and all the others be set free, almost honored and respected in comparison with so villainous a criminal as a true Xn[?] For even worldliness itself is not so worldly that it concerns itself about what is worldly in and for itself, unconnected to the notion that it is earnestness and honesty to heap up money, to acquire respect and esteem―but this is the very notion that the Xn dispels. Nor would anyone concern himself much with friendship if he had to confess publicly that it was selfishness. No, but this appearance―that this 9 in specie] Latin, specifically.

5

10

15

187

20

25

30

35

40

259

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 187–189

5

1849

261

sort of solidarity is true love―the world wants this appearance. And this appearance is exactly what the Xn dispels. The more truly a person is a Xn, the greater the resistance will become, right up to the end. If the resistance fails to appear, it must be because he has in one or another way spared himself, has shirked. This is Xnty. The terrifying aspect of it becomes increasingly intense and inevitable and is guaranteed by the fact that avoidance of suffering is an accusation against oneself.

10

188

15

20

25

30

189

Concerning the woman in relation to the man (love―marriage) it is quite definitely the case―indeed this is precisely what is lovely about her―that she “only sets her mind on human things” Mt 16:23: sparing the beloved, caring for him, making life more beautiful for him, and the like―which are diametrically opposed to the true div. extravagance, which is the impatience of martyrdom, which is se�ing one’s mind on what is God’s.―What is true of the woman is also true of the friend in the genrl hum. sense of the term. From this one easily sees that during his lifetime “the martyr” will be accused, hated, cursed for his egotism, vanity, hostility to humanity, and the like. And from this it can also be seen how right I am in my fundamental accusation against Xndom, that Jewish piety has been covertly substituted for Christian piety. Jewish piety consists of clinging to this life and merely se�ing one’s mind on hum. things―Xnty consists of se�ing one’s mind on what is God’s. Fundamentally, sermonic discourse remains silent about the Christian element and tarts up the Jewish element. People make use of Jewish piety in order to situate themselves cozily in this life―and then, with the help of Christianity, they add the atonement and eternity. This sort of religiosity is the most comfortable yet devised.

Grundtvig gave up his post because Clausen was teaching false doctrine and had not been removed―that was something, at any rate, a bit of an awakening. But he ought to have given it up because the concept of a “clerical living” is incompatible with Xnty―yes, indeed, then the uproar would have been something quite different.

[a]

Mt 16:23.

1

262

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 190

1849 260

190

Text for a Friday Sermon No. 1. Philipp.: for to me, living is Xt and dying is gain. No. 2.

It is no longer I who live, but it is Xt in me.

No. 3.

Our life is hidden with God in Xt.

5

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 191

1849

261

191

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

Something Concerning Myself That Must Constantly Be Kept in Mind. I have never maintained, nor do I maintain that I am a Christian to any extraord. degree. Oh, no. If, given my imagination, my passions, etc., I had been a human being in the ordinary hum. sense, I would no doubt have u�erly forgo�en Xnty. But bound as I am in excruciating misery, I am like a bird whose wings have been clipped while I nevertheless have retained all my intellectual powers, surely extraordinary powers. But I have been denied even the most basic prerequisites for being a hum. being while in another sense I have been granted the extraordinary. Thus I have been stopped once and for all: at every hour of the day, if need be, I can be made to feel the chains. Then in other respects I am equipped with great abilities, have been well brought up in Xnty since childhood, and furthermore am in possession of all the necessary prerequisites: and then it has become my mission to present Xnty. But free, free in the way in which a hum. being usually is―that I have never been. For the rest, I have been raised too strictly in Xnty―it has really been a source of offense for me―but I have never been free, never free so as to be able to forget it. For when one expects to die tomorrow, and when, today, one feels frequently and perhaps painfully how miserably one is bound, then there is no room for forge�ing. I know full well how infinitely much has been done for me; this is the truth in me: I cannot sufficiently thank God for all he has granted me and given me, the most wretched of all―I am the one best able to see the significance of this. I have also been more and more mollified by understanding my life in a religious way. Ah, but especially in my early youth, what would I not have given to be human being for just half a year! All my eccentricity―oh, it is nothing but a cunningly devised deception under which I concealed my misery. What quietly cost me the bi�erest tears and brought me to despair―I explained as pride and the like. I do not maintain, and I have never maintained that I have not married because it was supposedly contrary to Xnty, as if my being unmarried was, from a Christian point of view, a mark of perfection on my part. Oh, far from it. Had I been a hum. being, the danger for me would certainly have been something else, namely that of being altogether too devoted to women, and I could possibly have become a seducer. But it is certain

263

264

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 191

1849

that I would have been delighted to have married my fiancée. God knows how gladly I would have done so, but once again, here comes my misery. So I remained unmarried, and then I had a chance to consider what Xnty actlly had in mind when it commended the unmarried state. I do not maintain, nor have I ever maintained that the fact that I do not seek any official appointment is a Christian perfection on my part, or that this was the reason I refrained from doing so. Oh, no, far from it. From the moment my financial situation became difficult, and even before then, I would gladly have accepted an official appointment. It has always been easy for me to get along with people, and accustomed as I am to being bound, it has never seemed to me that this would be very burdensome. But once again, here comes my misery: I cannot do it because I am not a hum. being, because I am melancholic to the verge of madness―something I can certainly conceal as long as I am independent, but that renders me of no service in situations where I myself do not decide everything. People think it is pride―well, it’s the same old story. So I have had to endure in uncertainty, and have now had plenty of opportunity to consider whether it can rlly be Xnty’s position to have anything against accepting an official appointment. Look, all this explains why I always assume a poetic relation to my presentation of Xnty. In a certain sense, I am constantly being compelled to act against my will―and so I discover Christianity. Thus I am freed from the danger that what comes into my mind might be vanity. I have not disdained marriage out of vanity―far from it. Marriage has its warmest defender in me. I have not disdained serving in an official position out of vanity―far from it. I would gladly have accepted one. It seems to me that if I could a�ain greater tranquillity and imagine a longer life in that situation, I could achieve something greater. This may indeed be an illusion, but that is how it has sometimes appeared to me.―Therefore I would not dare tell another pers. to do what I do, for it is certain that I did not have

262 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 191–193 the strength to refrain from marriage or from seeking an official post, but that I have been compelled to do so. And it is also certain that what I present is Xnty.a 263

192

10

193

20

25

30

35

Oh, how pleasant, how soothing, for a pers. to be able to say, I love so and so, and my life expresses this as well.―Alas, my life expresses cruelty toward the beloved: all the love that burns within me thus expresses cruelty. And in moments of fearful spiritual trials I myself become fearful for myself, as if it were indeed actual cruelty, as if God would have to treat me the same way.

The Way It Really Should Be Said. It should be said that Xnty does not rlly praise romantic love and friendship. Nor should you be in too great a hurry, but only hold out with God for a li�le while―or be�er, for as long as you can. But if you notice that God is overstraining you, then accept the help of this hum. assistance. Thus, too, with earning a living, occupation, and all such ma�ers. But the relationship is not to be reversed, as is done in Xndom; one does not have the right to make romantic love and friendship into the truest form of love, nor is one permi�ed to transform earning one’s living and everything connected with it into the true earnestness of life. In brief, what Christianity fights for is, quite simplement, that God has first priority in a person’s life at every single point in a person’s existence, in every relationship of a person’s life. And this must be in earnest―not a way of speaking on Sundays. But on the other hand, God is not some cruel creditor or mortgagee, nor should a hum. being have the audacity to want to be more than a hum. being, a demon or a God-Man.

1849

a

265

Nor should people be able to accuse me of narrow-mindedness, of being unable to see the other side, for the other side has its warmest spokesman in me.

1

5

266

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 193–194

1849

But a hum. being or hum. beings must not live in such a way that, following an irresponsible upbringing, they fool around in life, never truly thinking in any deeper sense of God and the priorities he requires, instead regarding romantic love, and friendship, and making a living, and so on as life’s earnestness. No: having been put under the maximum possible tension by the strictest religious upbringing, and a�er having persevered, faithfully and with youthful confidence, in a strenuous relationship with God―a hum. being should have learned that this is life’s earnestness. But then he probably has also been humbled so that he can accept human assistance and relief, accept it as something beautiful that is blessed by God, but he does not become infatuated with it, he does not forget what truly is life’s earnestness.

What makes my life so frightfully strenuous is that everything is reversed, is a dialectic in which every moment of spiritual trial is transformed for me into its opposite. I seem to myself to be inferior to everyone else, a penitent―it is for this very reason that I dare as I have dared: but look, in the eyes of peop., my life appears to express pride, ambition, etc. Then, when spiritual trials arrive, they exploit this, because I possess no straightforwardly outward aspect, but always have a reversed―i.e., pure and simple―relation to spirit, which turns into the opposite the instant faith is absent. And yet, precisely because I am a penitent, have had to learn to cling to God on a scale entirely different from that of other peop. I have had to learn not to shrink away, have acquired the courage to dare as I never would have otherwise―and then God helps me to achieve on an extraord. scale; but of course this can easily be seen as pride and haughtiness. Ah, what frightful suffering, never, never to be understood. Thus, too, with my love-relationship, which from the hum. perspective looks like cruelty. And yet it is certain that only by having persevered in living like this has it been possible for me,

5

10

264

15

194 20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 194–196

5

1849

267

or granted to me, to be able to describe true Christianity; for it is indeed Xnty. Someone who could get close to the ma�er would of course be able to see that Xt’s life in relation to his mother and his disciples looks like the greatest sort of cruelty, and that must have been understood as such by them―and yet it was love. This is something I have presented in Works of Love.

265

195

15

196

20

25

30

35

In 1 Cor 2:15 the spiritual person judges all things, but he himself is judged by no one. This means that the spiritual person has the power and the key to explain all lower existences. To that extent he of course cannot be judged by anyone who is not higher than he.

On the Year 1848. In one sense, 1848 has raised me to a higher level; in another sense it has broken me. Financial worries came upon me suddenly and entirely too closely. I cannot simultaneously lift two such disparate burdens as the world’s opposition and concern about making a living. When I rented the apartment on Tornebuskegaden, it was my plan to live there for half a year’s time, quietly contemplating my life, and then seek an of�cial appointment. Then suddenly confusion broke loose. Within a couple of months a situation developed in which it was possible that the next day I would own nothing, but would literally be in �nancial straits. This took a severe toll on me. My spirit reacted all the more strongly: I wrote more proli�cally than ever, but more than ever like a dying man. This was the highest that has been granted me with respect to Christian truth―that much is certain. But in another sense it was also something altogether too lofty for me simply to make it my own, stepping into that role.

[a]

that is, it has broken me religiously, or to put it in my language: God has outrun me. He has permitted me to take on a task that I could not manage in its most demanding form, even with con�dence in him; I must therefore take it on in a lesser form. And thus this matter has― inversely―truly become my own religious upbringing―or my further religious upbringing. In one sense, I would be so happy to take the risk: my imagination beckons and encourages me, but I must indeed learn to go along with taking the risk in a lesser form. It is quite certainly the most perfect and true thing I have written, but I must not be the one who bursts in on all the others, almost in judgment―no, I myself must �rst be brought up by

1

5

10

15

20

268 1

5

10

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 196–198

the same thing. Perhaps no one will be permitted to humble himself under this as much as I myself before being allowed to publish it. I, the author, being nothing (the highest thing) myself, will not be allowed to publish it under my own name, because it passes judgment. I myself must �rst have found my place in life and have admitted that I am in fact weak like the others―then I can publish it. But what tempts my imagination is precisely to be permitted to do it before I have, humanly speaking, given way. It is quite true that in that case the blow would be more powerful, but I would also gain a false ascendancy. It is poetry―and therefore, to my humiliation, my life must express the opposite, the weaker position. Or should I become an ascetic who can live on bread and water[?]― And nonetheless I should be willing to submit to this humiliation: but I can accept an of�cial appointment. Look, in a still deeper sense, here is my dif�culty. And here, before it becomes possible, if it becomes possible, there may lie an even greater humiliation.

1849

This is the deeper meaning of the new pseudonym, which is higher than I myself am. Oh, I know it―I have not spared myself. I have wanted, to the point where it bordered on madness, to compel myself to venture recklessly. But I cannot do it―I cannot justify it. Thus does Governance constantly protect me―and govern. I had never thought of assuming a new pseudonymity. And yet the new pseudonym, though to be sure one that is higher than my personal existence―is precisely the truth of my being, the expression of the limit of my being. Otherwise, I would �nally have literally become more than a human being.

5

10

266

In his sermon on the gospel for the fourth Sunday a�er Easter, Zacharias Werner says that in his sermon on the two men who walked to Emmaus, he had noted that Xt was continually subjected to questions. And in today’s gospel he [Christ] again says, None of you is asking me, [“]Where are you going[”?] Here perhaps there is also a point for a juxtaposition of Xnty and paganism: Socrates is the questioner; Xt is the one who is questioned.

197

20

25

On her. As mentioned, it is not unlikely that now that her father has died, she expects an approach. Without deviating from my usual pa�ern, she has more than once managed to pass so close to me that it was almost a collision. Oh, but I cannot very well take the first step. I of course have no official knowledge of her situation, while of course, with her marriage, her life expresses that she has forgotten the story. Suppose that even if not entirely forgo�en, it were forgo�en in such a way that tearing it open at this point would be dangerous. And then there is Schlegel: it would almost be an injustice to him for me to appear in the same piece. And yet

198

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 196

1849

NB12:196. The text begins in the main column and continues into the marginal column. The curly line is in red pencil, and was added by later editors of Kierkegaard’s papers.

269

270

1

a

but rather insignificant

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 198

1849

I am anxious at the thought that I could in any way be unloving, cruel to her―for alas, my love was once that frightful thing: loving cruelty! And as a fairy tale bogeyman who thirsts a�er blood, I thirst a�er making all possible amends to her. People truly believed that I was proud―yes, of course, thanks: so proud that I turned my back on my honor; no, but I would take satisfaction in being permi�ed to show the world, for once, how proud I am―by making her into everything. Good Lord, humanly speaking it is a�er all a rather paltry request for a renowned figure, such as I indeed am, to beg that he be permi�ed to assume the modest position of a sort of unhappy lover at the side of a girl who had adoringly begged to become his maidservant. And yet I ask no more, only that it might become quite clear to me that I have God’s consent to act in this direction. Irony is indeed inseparable from my nature, but here it comes close to being sadness―how ironic to imagine my religious satisfaction by being a sort of unhappy lover. But what a remarkable and yet touching pa�ern! Usually it is like this: Either it is the girl who could not be satisfied with something less but grasped for something more spectacular―and then there was a decent fellowa who had loved her in the past: so she reserves a so� spot in her heart for him and he is permitted to trot humbly alongside her as an unhappy lover for whom one has a bit of affection. Or he is someone famous, etc., and abandoned the girl who became a memorial to him, while he was wedded to a girl of greater distinction. And yet nothing suits me so much as precisely this situation. To walk as an unhappy lover on the le�-hand side of a girl who had disdained my love: No, I was not suited for that. But to walk like this alongside a girl whose love I truly had not disdained, but which I had to give the appearance, humanly speaking, of disdaining: Yes, this is the task for me. But is there not, perhaps, danger associated with this situation[?] Perhaps she never so much loved as admired me, and perhaps I never so much loved her in the erotic sense as, in the most beautiful sense, I was moved―I could truly say―by this lovable child. And furthermore, if I see that this is possible, then of course the power whose consent I have obtained will also hold its protecting hand over us. But it would certainly be a relief for me (God knows whether I would recognize myself) if I―who am altogether too practiced in the sort of love that looks like cruelty―if I some time were permi�ed to express a love, a friendship a li�le more directly.

5

268 10

15

20

25

30

35

40

JOURNAL NB13

JOURNAL NB13 Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Vanessa Rumble

Text source Journal NB13 in Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er Text established by Kim Ravn and Steen Tullberg

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 1

271

1

1849

NB13 Sept. 28th, 49.

273

274

1

a

On myself see . . . . p. 39.

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 2

1849

Concerning the completed work and myself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On that single individual, my work as an author, my existence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With respect to the idea of my life . . . . . . . . . . as an author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (aAnother facet of my public situation . . . . . . . About the writings concerning my work as an author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On myself qua author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On my position qua author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lines about myself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On the three Friday discourses (The High Priest, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On my works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The turn in my works, when the new pseudonym (Anti-Cl.) was presented . . . . . . . . On the three communion discourses (The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner ) . . . . . . . . . . . . On my works as a whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

272

p. 28.

2

p. 34. 5

p. 36. p. 45.) p. 50. p. 56. p. 69. pp. 86 etc. p. 91. p. 93.

10

15

p. 124.

p. 128. p. 133 bo�om.

20

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 3

1849

273

3

5

In journal NB12 there are a number of biblical texts for Friday sermons; their page numbers are found on the first page of that journal. Texts for Friday sermons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 2. Text for a Friday sermon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 91.

275

276

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 4

1849

The dedication to Regine Schlegel , if there is to be talk of such while I am alive, could well be placed at the beginning of a li�le collection of Friday discourses, though it essentially belongs to the writings about my works. When, as I have wanted to do from the beginning, I step decisively into the character of the religious―at that instant she is the only thing of importance, because I have a God-relationship to her. ►

►►

274

4

◄◄

The dedication could read: ... with this piece, a body of wri�en work that to a certain extent belongs to her, is dedicated to her by one who belongs entirely to her. Or with a collection of Friday discourses: ... is dedicated this li�le piece.

5

10

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 5–6

1849

277

275

5

5

10

The relationship to God is not like the relationship to a hum. being: that the longer they live together and the be�er they get to know one another, the closer they also become to one another. Ah, it is the reverse with the relationship to God: the longer one lives with him and the more infinite he becomes, the smaller one becomes oneself. Alas, as a child it indeed seemed that God and hum. beings could play well together. Alas, as a youth, one dreamed that if one unreservedly made an effort―frantically, like a lover, albeit worshipfully―then the relationship could be established a�er all. Alas, as a man one discovers how infinite God is: one discovers the infinite distance. This is the upbringing―it has something in common with the Socratic ignorance with which one does not begin, but ends―it ended with ignorance!

15

6

Texts for the Friday Sermon. In this connection a number of the words spoken of him in mockery when he was crucified could be used, except that they take on another meaning.

20

25

30

35

No. 1. Mt 27:40: “You, who destroy the temple and rebuild it in 3 days, save yourself.” They say just the opposite: if he had saved himself, the temple would not have been destroyed. Save yourself―[“]Oh, no,[”] the Christian must say, [“]Do not save yourself―you, the Savior of the world―for then the world is lost.[”] In this way one can also learn something from the mockery. No. 2. Mt 27:40: “if you are God’s son, then come down from the cross.” No, precisely because he was God’s son, he remained on the cross, or precisely because he remained on the cross he proved that he was God’s son. But human beings do not comprehend what is God’s―they draw the opposite conclusions―they want to conclude that

[a]

if he saves himself, then he does not destroy the temple.

1

278

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 6–8

1849

had he climbed down from the cross, he would be God’s son―and then he would precisely not be God’s son. No. 3. Mt 27:42: “He has saved others, he cannot save himself”―well, no wonder, indeed―if he had wanted to save himself, then of course he could not save others; it is precisely in order to save others that he will not save himself. Here again mockery says something quite the opposite of what it intends.

276

This is really spoken like a father confessor. In his sermon for the 4th Sunday a�er Easter, Zacharias Werner says: “In the confessional booth, many very good but despondent Christians accuse themselves of all sorts of sins that are not sins at all or are of the most insignificant sort―No, you should instead accuse yourselves of your true sins, saying rather: the sin of despondency, for despondency is a sin that can end in mistrust of God’s grace and mercy, which is a frightful sin.”

7

5

10

15

20

Luther’s sermon on the gospel for New Year’s Day contains the true Christian distinction, the rigorous one: Xt is no savior for this life, but for eternal life. Yes, what is more―something Luther also in a way says in this same passage―he is precisely the opposite of a savior for this life. For Luther says that in this life―precisely in order to express the fact that he is no savior for this life―he lets his faithful trudge about as in a swamp. This, incidentally, is also the distinction betw. Jewish and Christian piety, for Jewish piety wants to have a savior for this life. But in Xndom they have wholly reinvented Christ as merely human sympathy. But I think that what is most rigorous must truly be heard, that one is not permi�ed to overlook it and ignore it, that it must be heard so that one can humble oneself under it; but it is not to be proclaimed in such a way as cruelly to force people to want to become spirit in accordance with such a frightful criterion.

8

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 8–9

277

10

15

20

25

1849

Here is my difference from Mynster, etc.―he wants nothing at all to be said about this. I want to have it spoken of, and furthermore I am willing to declare that when I speak of it, I do so only poetically, as my life is far from being that spiritual. Generally, I believe that ethical respect must be introduced. Wherever I present something higher than my own life, I must straightforwardly add: I am only a poet. To the extent that my own existence expresses what I proclaim, I make use of and must make use of a sort of authority. But if what is presented is higher than my life, then for the sake of the truth I must confess that I am only a poet. And above all, I must not remain silent about what is highest and make my li�le tidbit―a 2nd place, or 3rd place, or 10th place―into the highest. Mynster may be quite right in everything he says to the effect that a person must scale things down, etc.―but, but one must not scale things down by silencing what is highest. No, it must be presented with its full requirement―and then one must say to peop., [“]If you cannot do it, then entrust yourself to God, confess your weakness: he is no cruel master, he has great compassion. But you are not permi�ed to remain ignorant about God’s highest requirement.[”] If a young girl were to say to me that she would refrain from marrying if I regarded not being married as something higher, I would reply: If you are in love, if it truly is your dearest wish to be united with your beloved, then you must simply tell this to God; and then I would gladly perform the wedding and do everything to make things turn out best. But you must know that God could also require that you should renounce this joy.

30

9

35

40

Ah, there is indeed an indescribable blessedness when a person really and truly feels himself literally to be nothing before God, less than a sparrow, less than a grain of sand. Let us imagine that God then became annoyed with a hum. being and said to him, [“]Now I no longer want to have anything to do with you,[”] and that he gave him a kick so that he fell 40 million miles. Ah, if he really and truly felt that he was nothing before God―at the very second he came to his senses he would say, [“]O God, just one more thing: accept my thanks, thanks beyond description, for every year, every day, every hour, every second I have rested in your confidence. I am indeed provided

279

280

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 9–10

1849

for, because I want to do nothing other than continue to express my thanks, thanks beyond description, for every year, every day, every hour, every second that I have felt the blessedness of your confidence, the blessedness of being with you.[”] But the person who imagines that he amounts to something― he would surely shout: [“]God is a deceiver.[”] If it truly is the case that I am literally nothing, then it is grace and benefaction beyond description that he has permi�ed me to taste the blessedness of being with him, even if it were only for a second. This is how one must be in relation to God: willing to strain oneself to the utmost of one’s abilities, and [in fact] straining oneself to the utmost of one’s abilities―but even if one had held out ever so long, one must beware of bringing into the God-relationship the merely human seriousness that so easily becomes self-important, as though it amounted to something. At that very instant one must be willing to plead like a child, saying, [“]It was only a joke.[”] This is how the religious person must speak: Ah, these 70 years of frightful efforts and sacrifices, frightful in human terms―when you look upon them, o God, I say, [“]bi�e, bi�e, it is only a joke, forgive me for it, forgive me for having made an a�empt to express my love, for wanting so much to show you my love.[”] If a child sat and worked on a birthday present for a whole year, if it had denied itself every amusement for a whole year―which, hmnly speaking, is a great deal for a child―just to have the work finished and not be hindered by it from doing his real job: what a foolish and tiresome child to want to come and present his gi� with such pompous seriousness. No, the child comes lovingly with his gi�, but is willing at the same instant to transform the whole business into a joke and say: It was only a joke, oh, forgive me for venturing to express my gratitude.

What it means to pray in Jesus’ name can perhaps be illustrated most simply as follows. A governmental official commands something in the name of the king―what does that mean? First of all, it means, I myself am nothing, I have no power, nothing to say of my own―but this is in the name of the king. This is how it is to pray in Jesus’ name: I do not dare approach God except through the intermediary, so if my prayer is to be heard, it must be in Jesus’ name; this name is what gives it strength. Next, when a governmental official commands something in the name of the 19 bi�e, bi�e] German, please, please.

5

278

10

15

20

25

30

10 35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 10–12

5

279

10

15

11 20

12

30

35

1849

king, it naturally follows that what he is commanding must be the king’s will; he cannot command his own will in the name of the king. This is how it is to pray in Jesus’ name: to pray in such a way that it is in conformity with Jesus’ will. I cannot pray for my own will in Jesus’ name. Jesus’ name is not a trivial endorsement, but is of decisive significance. To pray in Jesus’ name does not mean pu�ing Jesus’ name at the beginning, but praying in such a way that one dares mention Jesus’ name in connection with it, which means that I think of him, of his holy will, together with what I am praying for. Lastly, when a governmental official commands something in the name of the king, it means that the king assumes the responsibility for it. This is also how it is to pray in Jesus’ name: then Jesus assumes the responsibility and all the consequences: he steps forward for us, steps into the place of the person who is praying.

The antithesis of antiquity, in which the 3rd person is used of oneself because one’s life is merely a fact, is to venture to the utmost by saying [“]I,[”] saying the highest with direct reference to oneself. This is expressed in the God-Man. The God-Man would not be the God-Man if his greatness consisted of tending in the direction of becoming a third person.

It would be hard to �nd a better parody of antiquity’s use of the third person than Lamartine’s speaking of himself in the third person. This is completely disgraceful. At the peak of lyrical re�ection, Lamartine includes all this―and yet speaks of himself in the third person. It is affectation. Indeed―and this has a sort of aesthetic value―he goes so far as to include mimicry. He says: [“]Then Lamartine said this with a certain facial expression,[”] etc. Here Lamartine has really made a sort of discovery. He has discovered what absolutely cannot be said in the third person, namely, that which it is impossible to know about oneself. It becomes utterly comical and calls to mind Charles in The First Love, who also relates his life in the third person.

281

282

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 12–14

1849

Using the third person is either childish―for at a certain age a child speaks in the third person, precisely because a child is not yet a person―or it is something elevated, something more than a person, a person who is himself an event. Anything situated between these two becomes comical if it uses the 3rd person.

The Fundamental Error of Christendom is rlly that people have wanted to make all religious instruction into Christian instruction, assisted by the ridiculous assertion that all peop. are Xns because they have been baptized as children. As Christianity historically came into the world a�er an entire prehistoric religious development had been undergone, so must a hum. being first go through an entire religious schooling if he is to receive a decisive impression of Christianity. Christianity is truly too spiritual for a person simply to begin with it right off. What discipline is presupposed in order to understand truly―so that it is the truth within oneself―that sin is the only misfortune and that Xt is the only savior in this regard. The best thing to do in Xndom would be to build a number of houses of prayer―which in the eyes of many would be quite a lot―and proclaim Jewish piety, but never mention Christ’s name. It is my continuing assertion that the li�le fragment of piety that exists in Xndom is Jewish piety (a clinging to this life, a hope and belief that God is to bless them in this life, etc., so that the proof that a person is God’s friend is that things go well for him in the world), and yet they continually put Xt’s name on it.

Serving the truth entirely, solely occupied with it, I either lack the time to secure for myself the

5

280

13

15

20

25

30

35

14

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 14–15

5

10

281

15

goods of finitude or I forfeit the opportunity to do so. But, hmnly speaking, this is of course my merit. But what is shabby is that this, precisely this, is what people use to portray me as an exaggeration. For people know only all too well that finite goals are what make a person popular. But, how shabby. There are none whom I have opposed in their pursuit of official positions, honor, esteem―at many points I have supported them. I have demanded nothing for myself. Alas, indeed, I once thought that it would be possible to move peop. when they saw an endeavor undertaken in more ideal fashion. Thanks a lot: no, it is precisely this [endeavor] that had to be weakened in peop.’s imagination―that is evident―for otherwise they of course would not have all the advantages of official positions and honor, whereas they now also have the advantage that their endeavors, which are self-serving and profitable, are also regarded as true seriousness.

20

15

25

30

35

At root there is something pharisaical both in this living quietly with one’s goods and especially in this living in grand ecclesiastical offices with high rank, etc. True enough, they assert that they are not like the Pharisees; they acknowledge before God that they are sinners―but this acknowledgment and this confession is at the same time indeed somewhat pharisaical, which they can surely see for themselves simply by reading the Holy Scriptures: that something quite different is required, that there must also be an occasion for them, too, to venture a li�le more. Is it really Xnty to give a tiny portion of one’s fortune, the interest on it? Is it really Xnty to step aside from every danger so that one may continue to be honored and respected? And what good is this acknowledging and confessing that one is a sinner if deep down one hardens oneself against God’s word?

1849

283

284

1

5

10

15

20

[a] Incidentally, my situation in this entire matter has been and still is an example of something close to the greatest distance between appearance and reality. I am the scoundrel―and yet it was I who did everything to make this marriage possible: one word from me, and it would have been an impossibility. I was the scoundrel, always the scoundrel: and yet I am the one who sustains this marriage, who could be tempted every moment to be a little less cruel to himself―and then perhaps the marriage would be disturbed; at least this is how things have been for a long time, and is it not still true that my merit consists precisely in my continuing unchanged as the scoundrel.

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 16

1849

My Relationship to Her: The Final Word, for Now. The fact is that as soon as I think about her in any detail, a poet immediately is brought to bear on her. Just as it brought me indescribable joy at the time to see her enchantment in falling in love, so would it again bring me joy to see her happiness when she truly realizes that it was precisely by this step that our relationship has been brought to the highest level. And this should not be dif�cult to achieve poetically. Indeed, I see her prick up her ears―true enough, she herself is not poetic, but unless she is utterly confused, when the poetic beckons, she is schlaget an und gebet Feuer, as it were. For, as to whether she understood me at the time?―Yes, indeed she did. That is, she did not understand my innermost self, she understood precisely that it was αδυτον. But as to whether she understood her erotic relationship to me?―How could I �nd enough A-pluses and gold stars to add to the highest marks she deserved, both for rote learning and for inward appropriation, etc.[?] Therefore it would again require a poet to explain to her that precisely this sisterly relationship was the poetic. If she understands this, then every danger of the erotic sort will have been averted, for with the poetic―and then with a little bit of help on my part―she can walk a very �ne line. And it is truly sad that this girl is continually consigned to the shadows, as it were. Schlegel is surely a likable man; I really think she feels quite happy with him. But this girl was an instrument he does not know how to play. She is capable of tones that I knew how to summon forth. It is remarkable, my objectivity with respect to her. For someone else it would have been more or less enough that the girl had �nally married―and for me, for me that is a matter of the greatest indifference; I am concerned only about whether it is possible to make her happy and her life more beautiful―for she has moved me. She can do almost anything she wants―I always have in readiness a poet who will 13 schlaget an und gebet Feuer] German, take aim and fire. 17 αδυτον] Greek, the inaccessible (as in the holy of holies in a temple).

16

5

10

282

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 16–17

5

10

15

283

be able to explain to her that that, precisely that, was the most beautiful, the most poetic thing. But it is a frightful responsibility, now that I have helped her through the greatest dif�culty by having her get married, and really very happily married. There is―and God knows it, this is the truth in all innocence―there is a higher leap possible for her, a conception that would render precisely this marriage of hers more beautiful to her: if it can be done, how gladly would I not do it for her. However, the most proper thing to do―and this is what I indeed have done―is surely for me to retreat one step in relation to her in order to �nd out just where we are. She will notice it immediately, for she is clever. Ah, but how economically my life has been constructed: I need only one girl. She has an imploring look that has moved me: that is something about her that I will never forget.

20

17

25

30

18 35

40

The gospel story about the wedding at Cana could also be understood as follows: it is the first miracle precisely because it is, as it were, a mo�o for Xt’s life: first suffering―then glorification. Xt’s reply to Mary, [“]Woman what have I to do with you[?”] also bears a certain faint resemblance to his reply to Peter, [“]Get thee behind me, Satan, you are an offense to me.[”] The fact is that at that instant there is in Mary something of that earthly impatience that wants to be helped immediately.

It must of course never be forgotten that Christ indeed also helped with temporal and earthly suffering. It is also possible falsely to make Christ so spiritual that he becomes sheer cruelty. On the whole, “spirit,” absolute spirit, is the greatest cruelty for a poor human being. Thus Christ also helped people who had earthly sufferings, healed the sick, lepers, the possessed, fed

1849

285

286

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 18–20

1849

the people, changed water into wine, calmed the sea, etc.―but the priest says that we dare not expect such help, so this all disappears, and Christ becomes almost more cruel to us than to his contemporaries. The reply to this must be: No! Please note that inasmuch as the strain connected to becoming and being a Christian is in proportion to contemporaneity with someone who in the strictest sense is a Christian, contemporaneity with an apostle is so strenuous that none of us will come to experience it. And now, contemporaneity with Christ himself. But here the miracle, the miracles of compassion with respect to earthly suffering, are at any rate somewhat palliative, and are the completely indispensable palliative―for otherwise it would have been impossible to live with Christ. If for even one single day Christ had expressed what it is to be absolute spirit and nothing else, the human race would have been devastated. But we who live 1800 years later, we are content to grasp the terror through the imagination, and on the other hand, we are only all too likely to transpose everything into human compassion: thus, you see, we live under much more lenient terms than did Christ’s contemporaries, who had the miracles to hold on to.

Weeping for oneself: this is the only right place for tears. Praised be the person who can say, I myself am the only object I find worthy enough―or wretched enough―to weep for.

5

10

284 15

20

19

25

A Sigh! Ah, the way in which I have lived with the common man: In the entire generation there is perhaps only one person who could do it, and how few there are who merely understand this and understand the hard-heartedness and cruelty of the differences in class and rank on which contact with the common man is generally based. And then, that this is denied me, that it is to be regarded as a ridiculous exaggeration, and that therefore I now am no longer able to do anything for the common man, because for him I exist as a sort of half-mad person. And that this has been accomplished with the help of those “who speak for the common man against the aristocrats.” Oh, how sad!

20

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 21

1849

287

285

21

Note The most truthful expression, however, is that there is something in addition; for I have in fact understood part of it from the beginning and always understood it ahead of time, before I did it.

a

On the Completed Work Concerning Myself. 5

10

15

The dif�culty with publishing the pieces about my writings is and continues to be that I have really been used without really knowing it myself, or without knowing it fully; and now, for the �rst time, I understand and can see the whole of it―but then of course I cannot say “I.” At most (that is, given my anxiety about the requirement to tell the truth) I can say: this is how I now understand the writings that have been produced.a But then the problem is that if I don’t do it myself there will be no one who can present it, for no one knows it as I do.b But this is my limit: I am a pseudonym. I am to present the ideal ardently, glowingly, and when the listener or the reader is moved to tears, I then have the task of saying: I am not this, my life is not like this. It is quite true: I think I could have a greater effect if at this moment someone emerged who spoke in his own name and gesticulated with his own existence: but perhaps this is not what Governance thinks―I must truly learn that there is something higher that I can certainly think, but dare not venture. “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself” is to be made pseudonymous.c

b

20

25

No one can illuminate the structure of the whole as I can.

On a scrap of gray paper included with this manuscript it is noted that in a way this work includes a dialectical heresy. Namely, in one of the expositions (no. 5 or 6) it is argued that in our time sermonic discourse has become impersonal―and this is stated by a pseudonym! But for one thing this is my limit: I can only direct attention. And for another thing, I am of course the legally responsible publisher, and people will in fact regard it as having been said by me. The extra element in it is actually this: although the person speaking is surely a no one, a pseudonym, the publisher is an actual person, and he acknowledges that he is judged by what the pseudonym says. c

NB13:21, wri�en lengthways, with additions above and beneath the main entry.

290

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 22–24

1849 288

It is a�er all easy to see that hum. beings must be very spiritual (and indeed actually so spiritual that they do not need a teacher) in order to be able to reward with money, honor, esteem, etc. the person who truly teaches them self-denial―making an assumption of this sort is just as peculiar as if a person, unable to remain silent himself, imagined that another person, whom he asks to remain silent, is capable of doing so. On the other hand, if a person is truly supposed to be a teacher of self-denial, what would he do with money and the like[?] This, too, is why the clergy have so eagerly wished to be salaried by the state or that the state should be the middleman in their pay―for otherwise the requirement that they themselves ought to be the paradigm easily comes too close.

22

5

10

15

Yes, if my suffering, my weakness, were not the basis for all of my intellectual activity, I would of course make another a�empt to deal with it quite simply as a medical ma�er. A�er all, it just doesn’t make sense to suffer as I suffer and simply do nothing about it if one’s life is absolutely without significance anyway. But here is the secret: The significance of my life corresponds precisely to my suffering.

23

How true what Thomas à Kempis says (in Imitation of Xt 1st book 2nd chapter): [“]do not become conceited about any art or knowledge, but rather fear for the knowledge that has been given you. For the more you know, and the be�er you understand it, the more strictly you are to be judged if you have not lived all the holier.” Look, those were some words. One seeks knowledge, one strains all one’s thoughts, one acquires it―and look, one has entrapped oneself. At the same time, however, it must be borne in mind that this applies only to ethical and ethical-religious knowledge.

24

20

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 25–27

1849

289

25

5

26 10

15

It would a�er all certainly be most proper if I once made a straightforward confession concerning how I regard the poetic element within me, despite my being a religious author―to the effect that indeed, religiously understood, it is my imperfection, but that I cannot yet do without it, nor can the majority of my contemporaries.

Another aspect of the cunning of sermonic discourse is that in warning against “meritoriousness,” one quite insidiously confounds all the fantastic asceticism of the Middle Ages (selfflagellation and the like) with exposing oneself to the dangers and strains and sufferings that are linked with confessing Xt in a decisive way, which of course is surely what is required of Christians―in a decisive way: this means without all the illusions of being a public official and the like, so that one proclaims Xnty and confesses Christ qua public official and tradesman.

27

On “That Single Individual” My Work as an Author, My Existing.

20

The movement described by the whole of my writings is from the public to the single individual. It appears for the first time in the preface to Two Edifying Discourses―and for the second time, or to the second power, at the most decisive moment, in the dedication to Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits (see in this connection the li�le piece, “The Accounting,” that is finished and is to be found together with On My Work as an Author)[.] As an aesthetic author I have, as it were, set out to take hold of the public―and this was also expressed with my personal existence, living on the streets and alleys―thus is described the movement from the public to the single individual, and thus, consistent with this, it ends with me, myself the single individual, living in a parsonage in rural isolation. Yes, it fits. Even if I were not compelled to do so by extraneous circumstances, it would still be the most proper thing to do. Ah, but Governance always helps me―this is something I see constantly―in looking backward.

25

30

35

291

292

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 28–29

1849 290

On the Text by Paul: When I was a child I thought and spoke like a child; now I have become older and I have put away childish things: [I] could speak on this theme:

28

5

what do you judge concerning your childhood and youth do you judge that it was foolishness and fantasy? or do you judge that it was precisely then that you were closest to that which is most high? Just tell me how you judge your childhood and youth, and I will tell you who you are. Tell yourself how you judge, that you might come to wisdom, for wisdom is nothing other than judging correctly about childhood and youth, expressing through one’s life that one has judged correctly.

10

15

Concerning the Idea of My Life as an Author. This, too, was my idea all in the course of time. The truth must never become the object of pity; serve it as long as you can, to the degree that you can do so completely without reservations; squander everything in its service―and then you can of course stop. Truly, a person does more good―if this is to be the case― by serving the truth genuinely and without reservations for only a year than by mixing and mediating concern for oneself with concern for the truth and spending an entire life on this mixture. No, it must be clear when I am serving the truth and when I am serving myself. Naturally, I have no objection to a person’s working for a living and the like; I myself intend to do so, and in no way do I pretend to be a pure spirit; but it must be clear that it is not in service of the truth. The truth has absolutely no need whatever for me to become a high and important man and so forth: if I live on bread crusts, it makes no difference whatever―consequently it cannot be for the sake of the truth. If it is done, as people say, in order to accomplish greater things with the help of one’s position, this makes a mockery of Christ and all the witnesses to the truth, who have done nothing other than show how one accom-

29

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 29–31 291

1849

293

plishes the most for the truth. If I nonetheless want to have the prestigious official position, very well―but with one concession: that it is for my own sake.

5

30

10

15

20

31 25

30

35

Ah, when two chamberlains throw open the doors for one, saying, “The King,” even this can be a quite difficult business―to express with one’s demeanor that one really is the king. But when one stands there, bleeding, having been flogged and spat upon, while the judges are clad in purple, making it clear that they are the rulers―then to express, [“]I am nonetheless a king.[”] Indeed, what wonder that he was put to death. This sort of thing is intolerable. But when “one” is so mighty that “one” easily understands that this is a crazy man who is to be shown to his place in the madhouse, then one takes no further action. Ah, but if the crazy man omnipotently threatens to transform the whole world and the human race into a madhouse in which he is the only sane one, he, “the king,”―well, then it is, if you wish, a ma�er of self-defense: he must be put to death. All concepts are exploded at their roots; everything, everything is lost if there is no challenge to this as blasphemy―that he says he is a king who has come to the world in order to witness to the truth.

Apart from whatever the similarity would be, if there were one, in other respects the difference is certainly that I am a penitent―Apart from this, I nonetheless couldn’t be farther from being one, à la an apostle or something of that sort. No, I merely discover this: I discover retrospectively what such an existence must be like. My limitation is that I can say nothing, not the least bit, in advance. From this comes the fact that I am likewise unable to make use of “authority.” I am reflection. I always begin with nothing, with zero, expecting to die tomorrow, but then make rather intensive use of today. In this manner I steal away―and look, when I then look back upon what has happened, I become almost anxious and afraid of myself, for what has happened was the extraordinary. But at that same instant the old situation begins again: that I will presumably die tomorrow, and that therefore what ma�ers is to make

[a]

On myself.

1

294

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 31–32

1849

quite intensive use of today―and then I again steal away. “In advance,” no, I dared not and dare not and cannot say one word in advance. My life is reversed. Instead of what ordinarily is the case for hum. beings―that a future lies ahead, so that he is oriented forward―for me, what lies closest is death. This forces me to turn around, and thus begins my living, even to this day. Naturally, by living this way I have missed having all earthly goods and finite ends, for to get them one must take action in a forward direction. Thus I have missed having all that. But not merely this: I have also had the opportunity to discover Xnty from its very foundations. For in addition to forfeiting all the advantages, I also have to suffer for doing so, have to be misunderstood, declared an egotist, vain, proud, self-infatuated. There is a point to which I continually return and at which I have suffered indescribably. Xnty came into the world and commanded: Love God and your neighbor. But Xt’s own life and the lives of all the martyrs and witnesses to the truth express this: if you really, seriously love God and your neighbor, to the degree that you do so, peop. will regard you more and more as an abominable egotist. You yourself experience, in fear and trembling, how exhausting and painful it is truly to be “spiritual”―but then peop. become indignant about you because you come and disrupt the whole of their earthly arrangements, in which everything is so delightful and lovable that one could almost be tempted to forget heaven. In their eyes you become a criminal, more dangerous than any other criminal, because you disrupt existence much more than any criminal. And thus in one sense, your life is an eternal torture: God threatens you if you do not do it, and hum. beings threaten you if you do―and what we are talking about is something that flesh and blood do not exactly relish doing.

292

10

15

20

25

30

35

Incidentally, all the nonsense that has been said about me is long forgo�en and makes no difference one way or the other. But if it comes to the point that a person exists for the lower classes under a nickname, if it comes to the point of a person being branded with one or another “ridiculous” characteristic that he is obligated to bear in his person (for I cannot, a�er all, remove my

32

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 32

5

293

10

1849

legs―though of course I can do so in the grave), then it is a daily martyrdom. Whenever they feel like it, even respectable people are capable of informing me that this is how I exist for the mob. And such a martyrdom is not the easiest sort. The whole of my fame is exploited in sustaining the mockery. This is enough to make one both laugh and weep, but it certainly would be a relief if I could get Goldschmidt to write, e.g., about my dress coat, my vest, my hat, so that my legs could have some peace, at least for a while.

295

296

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 33

1849

294 1

[a]

This is very relative, however.

Another Aspect of My Public Situation. For 6 years the literary villainy had been permi�ed to grow and to spread insanely relative to the proportions of the li�le country: absolutely dangerous precisely because it was related to the peculiar characteristic of the country or the people―a sense for the comic―and because it was related to something to which a small country is always vulnerable, something from which Denmark has always suffered―narrow-mindedness, narrow-minded envy, looking askance at one another―we, who are scarcely a nation, but a couple of peop. That was how ma�ers stood. With what right could such a country call itself Christian, where it was notorious that villainy was the only career that paid well, and in addition came close to exercising a tyrannical influence. Ought not such circumstances be a call to action to every Christian priest, every honest journalist, etc.[?] No, everyone remains silent―but on Sunday the priest preaches that if it were to happen―then he would be willing to expose himself to every sort of derision, if it were to be required of him; but here, in this situation, no, there was no occasion for that. That was how ma�ers stood; then I took action. Who was I, then? I had earlier been regarded as an impetuous hothead who got mixed up in everything. Nothing less. With talents of a magnitude that everyone surely had to concede, with almost superhuman effort and diligence, remaining taciturn, I had at my own expense developed within a few years an entire literature. So when such a pers., having acquired a literary reputation that is quite literally spotless, when he takes action, and does so in circumstances as intimate as ours, he has a reasonable expectation that people will take what he has to say a bit seriously. When, in righteous indignation, he puts his famous name on the line, then―if there is to be any meaning at all in speaking of a Christian state―people should pay a�ention. Furthermore, it was well known that the man who was the source of this villainy saw in me something extraordinary that he venerated, and that when I took decisive action, it was from the pinnacle of having been immortalized by him. When one takes a step such as this and cannot be certain of being respected, the country is rlly no country, only a provincial market town. When, furthermore, people had hinted to me in many ways that I was the only person who was in every respect capable of acting decisively in this situation, then

33

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 33–34

295 5

10

15

1849

indeed the step I took was surely the fruit of careful consideration, but was also a work of love. And what happened? What happened was that everyone remained silent, that opinion turned against me in envy, maintaining that I was mad to expose myself to this sort of thing. Well then, I am not accustomed to begging peop. for assistance. I knew very well where I was. I based my claims on the supposed Christianity of the country and the city. Evil can triumph right under one’s nose―but the priest preaches that if it were to happen, if it were to happen that he had lived at that time, at the time when―but now there is no occasion. Well then―then we must emphasize what it means to be a Christian. I have been sacrificed, but I am still the person I was, and my contemporaries should certainly feel the consequences of the fact that I have become a sacrifice. I admit the truth: despite everything I had learned about Xnty from childhood on, I had nonetheless lived in the illusion that world was a�er all be�er than it is. Now my eyes were opened.

20

34

The Gospel about the 10 Lepers. How the 9 were healed of their leprosy―and then contracted an even worse leprosy: their ingratitude and lack of appreciation.

25

30

35

The Difference between Sickness of the Body and Sickness of the Spirit. Sickness of the body makes itself known on its own. The leper did not need to made aware of the fact that he was sick―so he cried out to Xt to be healed. But that ingratitude was a sickness simply did not occur to them (a new potentiation of ingratitude); they did not think they needed Xt in connection with this. What is dangerous about sicknesses of the spirit is precisely the fact that a certain degree of health is required even to become aware, and to know, and to admit that one is sick.

297

298

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 35

1849

296

Concerning the Writings on My Work as an Author. They contain something that makes their publication suspect. This, however, is a view, a later view; I cannot say that I thought it in advance. There is a poetic element in them. In completing [my] work as an author, I have also included myself. Now it is certainly true that in the writings I have again and again repeated this and emphasized it, but I am continually afraid that by publishing them I might in some way infringe upon God, while at times it has also actually occurred to me that I would infringe upon God by not publishing them. Basically it is like this. My nature has been the possibility of being an author. Governance is what has constantly arranged situations for me in such a way that they practically pressed literary production out of me; and yet nearly all my affairs are characterized by my having freely involved myself in them. But the fact is that I was far from understanding what they contained until I realized it afterward. It is true that I have been willing to venture, to make sacri�ces, to expose myself to dangers; it is true that I have thought about the way in which I have personally offended, and I have had the hope of doing something good, if possible, to make amends―but I must also admit that this entire life has been for me an indescribable delight or satisfaction, which indeed is also why my constant prayer to God has been to thank him for the indescribable good he has done for me, so much more than I had expected. Basically, being an author has been my only possibility. I have continually had the notion of becoming a country priest, but the problem is that in one sense, an unfortunate sense, I am not a human being, and therefore it is dif�cult for me to take this sort of thing upon myself. But even if I had been able to do so, in the beginning I could not have managed it anyway: my need to produce was too great, and producing satis�ed me too much. Therefore I am refraining from publishing these writings: better, by remaining silent, say too little about myself than, by speaking, say too much. But one thing is certain and true: I did not become an author in order to become a success in the world―ah, when I started Either/Or I hated myself; I can say that I wished that everyone would rise up against me. But I do, after all, have enough understanding of the religious that I do not straightforwardly call this pure religiousness―it was a sort of intoxicated religiousness.

35

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 36

1849

299

297

36

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Right now I truly feel what blessedness and consolation it is to me that I know, before God, that I suffered in leaving her, that precisely this was suffering. What strength this gives me! Truly, if I had le� her out of selfishness and in frantic pursuit of brilliant success, my life would have been certain despair. So now I am at peace.a Deep down I know that there is not one single pers. who would tremble, who would not be moved to the deepest sympathy, if he truly knew, quite literally, how I suffered. But this was precisely what increased the pain: that I knew that I was certain to be a victim of pity―therefore I did everything I could, and it was granted to me that I might conceal it entirely. The suffering was frightful. Melancholy as I was, I understood that my own intensified wretchedness was to have all my wretchedness increased by having made her unhappy―and then, then in my soul there suddenly burst forth a wealth at which I now tremble when I look back upon it. This is where my strength rlly lies: my suffering is my superiority; it is also frightful when one considers that behind me and behind my relationship with a contemporary lies a diametrically opposite understanding of myself before God. What has happened to others before me will probably happen to me: now, or before long, people will think they understand me because of the result. Ah, but when I stood alone in my wretchedness, so wretched that I cannot (even now) get my pen to write about it, despite the fact that I know and remember only all too well what I mean: when I stood alone like that―and then it was not as a sufferer, oh no: with a girl’s accusation that it would be her death; with a father’s grief, as though she were already dead; cursed by a family; with hum. language and everything against me! If I had not been able to walk around and talk with a market lady here, a coachman there, etc., I could not have endured it. I have been struck by what I have read about Napoleon: when he crossed the Alps he was as distracted as a dreamer and preferred to speak with his guide, with whom he discussed the la�er’s domestic circumstances. Of course, Napoleon was also carrying a plan for the world; I was only carrying a deep melancholia, more or less the deepest possible.

a

precisely there, where in the opposite situation I would say, Now I have lost: that is where I now say: Now I have won.

1

5

300

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 37

1849 298

On Myself qua Author. Thus I have again come to the point where I was last summer, the most intensive and the richest time of my life, when I understood myself to be what I might call the poet of the religious, though not in such a way that my own life was to express the opposite―no, I am striving, but my being a “poet” expresses that I do not confuse myself with the ideal. My task was to situate Christianity in re�ection and not to idealize it poetically (for of course Christianity is itself the ideal), but rather to present the entire ideal poetically, fervently, in accordance with the most ideal criterion―and then always to end with: I am not it, but I am striving. If this latter does not suf�ce, if it isn’t the truth within me, then everything has been transposed into intellectuality and has failed. In the rush of last year’s literary productivity, I also managed to understand the entire body of work and myself. I understood myself to be the poetic re�ector of Christianity, capable of setting forth all the Christian existential categories in their full ideality; I understood how I had been led to this point from my earliest days and by the strangest pathways; I understood what, thank God, I still understand in the same way: that I can never suf�ciently thank God for the good he has done for me, so indescribably much more than I had expected. All this I understood, as well as the entire structure of my works, and this was set down in the piece on my work as an author. Then I misunderstood myself for a moment, though not for long. I wanted to publish that piece,a forgetting that this would be overstepping my limits. If I explain that I am this poetic re�ector and one who strives, then I make myself into something more than what I explain myself to be―in one way or another I myself come to be the more ideal �gure, come to lay claim to being that �gure. Then the whole matter would remain in the domain of the interesting, making my contemporaries coconspirators in my intrigue―yes, but I am not quite permitted to call it that, for it is also my own development. I have in the strangest ways been prevented from publishing it. And now the turn has been taken, the new pseudonym put in place. I have no merit whatever for this, for once again it is as if a Governance had helped me do the right thing. Often enough I made preparations to publish the writings about myself, but no. I had been able to write them with the same tranquillity in which I usually work, but the minute I took them out with the notion of publishing them, I felt an uneasiness, an overexertion that I had never sensed before. It was my limit. By publishing them I would have caused great confusion. Despite all the disclaimers in the writings, it would not have been possible for me to prevent my being regarded as the extraordinary Christian instead of being merely a genius; in the end, perhaps I myself would have erred and regarded myself as the extraordinary Christian. The truth, on the other hand―and this is something I have learned precisely by means of my writings―is that I am in fact very far from being the extraordinary Christian, that there is in fact a poetic element within me that, from a Christian point of view, is something negative. Publication of those writings would have been a misleading poet-confusion. In one sense, the understanding I had attained elevated me, so that I understood what extraordinary things had been granted

37

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 37

299

10

301

me and how an in�nitely loving Governance had guided me from the beginning; but this same understanding humbled me in another sense by making me understand how far I still was from being a Christian in the strict sense. But precisely this understanding was acquired through the suffering of having wanted to publish and having been unable to do so. If I had not been prevented from doing it, if I had been allowed to rush ahead and publish, a confused obscurity would surely have entered my soul. Were the situation to change such that my times demanded that I provide an explanation, then I would certainly be able to provide it, though only after having requested permission to speak entirely without reservations. Having been thus requested to do so, it would be one thing for me to explain what is inherent in the matter itself and how I now understand myself, and quite another to explain how things turned out in the end, despite all my protestations: to put into print my life’s development, transformed into my intention. The understanding of myself and my existence as an author were, if I dare say so, a gift to me from Governance, a gift that should also be a helpful Point de vüe in the effort to go further in truly becoming a Christian―the misunderstanding was that I wanted to publish it. a

15

1849

15 Point de vüe] French, properly “vue,” point of view.

302

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 38–40

1849 300

Justice Takes Revenge―Love Is Avenged.

In dealing with the question of whether Xnty could be preached to pagans or was only for Jews, it is indeed rather curious that people did not think of the story of the Canaanite woman, according to which Christ himself―despite the fact that he says the opposite,“ that he had come to seek the lost of Israel[”]―nonetheless yields. Incidentally, the gospel story about that woman is moving when at one point she makes the error of pu�ing herself entirely in the place of her daughter, for whom she is pleading: Lord, help me.

38

39 5

10

15

Example of Horror. in a Situation On the heaving, foaming sea there is a boat in which there is only one man, a pilot or what you will. He sits calmly in the stern of the boat with his hand on the tiller while the boat surges forward in the proudest flight. Now it is flung up on the crest of a towering wave―spectators on the shore shudder in admiration; he himself is calm, seeming almost to enjoy the delight of the shuddering―suddenly he notices a li�le tremor in his hand: it signifies to him, Either your hand has been paralyzed or the boat is not responding to the tiller. It would have been impossible to see this, even if one were si�ing beside him as the calmest of observers―and, unchanged in his calm posture, he steers into the abyss. What is horrifying is that the horror is concentrated in one single, almost unnoticeable point, that the horror is not rlly given the least expression, that he remains si�ing, entirely unaltered, in the same daring, calm posture, and yet he is paralyzed, so that he steers into his downfall. The horror consists precisely in the fact that the horror finds no expression whatever, not so much as the movement of an arm.

40

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 41–42

1849

301

41

5

10

15

42 20

25

30

35

40

Something can be immodest when viewed from one side, and the opposite can be immodest when viewed from the other side. If a pers. were allowed to wish for something, and he wished for a kingdom, one might perhaps say, [“]That was immodest.[”] But if a person were allowed to wish for something, and he said, [“]Well, I rlly don’t know what to wish for other than that I had worn thin boots instead of cork-soled boots today,[”] then this is simply immodest, for what it rlly signifies is that the person is ge�ing along very well (if he isn’t insane or slow-wi�ed). But if someone were ge�ing along very well―except that he has put on his cork-soled boots instead of his thin boots―and a spirit comes to him and allows him to make a wish, then he ought to turn away from that spirit and turn to God, saying, [“]No, indeed, I will not make a wish, but will thank you, my God, for all the good you have done for me.[”]

. . . . And if, li�le by li�le, gradually consumed by the continual gnawing, I had fallen to the ground or collapsed, entirely devoid of feeling and passion―then people would say, It was his own fault. Not one single word would be spoken to the effect that the step I took might be viewed as eminently shrewd and level-headed, done with intimate knowledge of the situation, and furthermore, in the Christian sense, a work of love.―It would be said, He was mad to expose himself to that sort of thing, and he himself was thus responsible for his fall. Not a word would be spoken to the effect that, insofar as the step taken failed of its purpose―or to the degree that it failed―the fault lay elsewhere, not simply in the a�ack by that journal, but in the fact that my contemporaries betrayed me by coming up with the opinion that I had been mad to expose myself to that sort of thing; that the important and respected people of the day, who shared my view of the journal’s villainy, betrayed me; that the fault lay precisely in an entire age having transformed itself into spectators; that in its capacity of the public, this same contemporary age abuses and betrays a pers.; that there was no one, not one single person, who had a word to say in public―at once both frightful cowardice and an indirect compliment to me―for who could be the accuser, when all, in their various ways, are accomplices[?]

303

304

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 43–44

1849 302

And this is why in the midst of all my sufferings I am nonetheless so indescribably happy and glad. For my imagination almost collapses when it contemplates the millions of possibilities God has at every instant. Then I do something wrong. I notice it right away. What is to be done now? My melancholy imagination immediately senses the possibility that this li�le error could ruin everything. But look, then at that very instant I say to God: [“]Bi�e, bi�e, that was wrong; even though I am a pest, an impudent pest, o God, make this very error into something correct.[”] And then―God, who at every instant has millions of possibilities―then the circumstances are combined a bit differently, and quite so, this very error then reveals itself to be the correct thing. And then, then I worship God. And then, then I have more joy from this error than from the most correct thing I myself have ever done.

43

On My Position qua Author.

44

The fact that I used nearly half of my strength to repel people, to work against myself; that I wanted no adherents (which, in the present moment, has harmed and delayed my cause); that this was a category of the ideal, a more ideal category: these were things that certain important people understood very well. And then, then not merely not to u�er one word on this topic; no, to remain silent; indeed, not merely to remain silent, but to circulate a view that makes use of the confusion of this more ideal category with the very opposite category, to the effect that I was an unclear, confused thinker, an eccentric, and that this was why I had no adherents, etc.―Phooey! Thus they wanted me continually to use half my strength to work against myself in the finite sense, so that they could profit from this in the finite sense and be prophets―against me.

20

5

10

15

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 45–47 45 303 5

10

15

20

25

46 30

47

1849

Indeed, the life of Christ also manifests this difference betw. possibility and actuality: that in “possibility” one can understand what one does not recognize in “actuality.” Had not the prophets prophesied that Xt was to suffer―and then someone came who was a sufferer and who himself said he was the Messiah―but look, they could not recognize him, he whom the words of the prophets fit perfectly; and yet they could understand the words of the prophets. This is how it always is. If I were to invite a pers. to come to my home, and I then were to explain to him that I intended to take one or another magnanimous step that would cause me loss and suffering, he would understand me completely: he would think it was glorious; he would admire me and depart from me full of fervor and enthusiasm. And if I were actually to take that step, and if just a bit of time had passed during which I had been an actual sufferer, he would be unable to recognize me. The imagination always wants to shorten things and slip in a different image, an image in which one sees this magnanimous sufferer being admired by everyone. But in actuality things do not happen so quickly; actuality keeps a distance of perhaps 50 years. Only a very few people are capable of receiving the impression of “actuality.” Most people must be satisfied with being deceived, either by receiving only the first impression (the magnanimous moment that comes before, when the actuality of suffering has not yet begun) or the last one, when the result is present, and he has triumphed.

It could be a good theme for a sermon, the words that appear somewhere in part two of Either/Or: The dreadful thing is not that I am to suffer punishment when I have done something wrong; the dreadful thing is that I could do something wrong―and there would be no punishment.

In its primary meaning (its formal category) “consecration” is the individual’s concentration in himself. When an individual begins an effort with the consciousness, or is himself conscious, that instead of leading to the a�ainment of finite goals, this effort will indeed prevent him from a�aining them, he then becomes

305

306

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 47–49

1849

introverted in redoubling of the self. This is the merely human aspect; the religious aspect then depends on the extent to which the individual then refers everything to God. 304

The truth is exposed to the concept of offense―or, as it is called, scandal―just as o�en as is untruth. Thus, when untruth has entrenched itself in “an established order” and has made itself comfortable, and the truth then stirs, the la�er will be declared a scandal. In the days when literary villainy had acquired squa�er’s rights to exist, when people found it in order, rather than a scandal, that it existed on such a disproportionate scale, then no one at all dared say a word, because they were afraid of stirring up a scandal. Thanks, much appreciated. And then when I did it, many people thought and said, It is a scandal, a scandal he ought to have avoided. Take a lo�ier example: How many thousands were they who found it a scandal when Luther began to tamper with the pope[?] This is also how it is in other situations. When a person has situated himself comfortably within an established order from which he derives all possible profit, when the truth has become a sort of luxury, and jumbling all possible points of view together in a muddle has become the highest wisdom―then bringing up the truth is a scandal. And when it is professor against professor, yes indeed, then it is a frightful scandal. But that it was scandal with all that mendacious peace and unity, that precisely this was the scandal: there must be no talk about that.

48

I have understood quite clearly how ambivalently I have been situated in the literary scene here. Thus the word about me was that I was so extraordin. that no one could take it upon himself to review me; in the meantime I had to bear the burden of being so extraordinary without ever having heard it expressed.―And then suddenly Martensen bursts into print with a view he has certainly sought to cultivate for a long time: that my entire project amounted to nothing. Oh, you shortsighted people! Have no doubt that I have seen very clearly how I have been betrayed; it is true that in a way I have freely consented to what has happened, that I have also lent

49

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 49–50

5

305

10

15

20

25

1849

support to it. But why, then? Yes, here, right here, is my power―I have understood myself as a penitent, I must not receive any reward. You see, in one sense this most hidden thought is a frightful power. That is why I have been able to remain silent and have gained strength by remaining silent, because “God’s intimacy dwelt with me.” And the longer I remained silent like this, the deeper I have cut into existence and the greater is the scale on which I reveal the others. It is, however, quite certain that Martensen has gradually become spoiled by having been permi�ed, unchallenged, to swagger like this among “the circles.” He has finally come to believe that things were as he said they were; probably he has finally come to regard my silence as some sort of lunatic idealism―and then he blurts things out in print. Perhaps this ma�er, these very words, will prove to be very danger-fraught for him, just as those foppish words by Heiberg about Either/Or. For in another sense it is also certain that deep down, many people have the idea that I am a�er all something extraordinary, but they are a li�le envious. But the person who wants to make himself into something great by disparaging me had be�er be cautious. It won’t work. It succeeded for Goldschmidt, for he was himself something contemptible. But if there is someone who himself wants to be something great, then the envy turns around and is not unlikely to give me the distinction that is my due. How strangely things happen in life, and god-fearing silence is so powerful.

50

Christianity and Speculation

30

Xnty is an existential communication that came into the world through the use of authority. There is to be no speculating; Christianity is to be kept moving existentially; becoming a Christian is to be made more and more dif�cult. Take a quite simple example. At a riot a police of�cer says, Behave yourself―no arguing. No arguing―why? because he uses authority. So, is there to be nothing objective in Xnty, or is Christianity not to be the subject of objective knowledge? Well, why not? What is objective is what he says―he, the authoritative person. But no arguing, least of all of the sort that, as it were, wants to sneak behind

35

40

307

[a]

Christianity and Speculation.

1

308

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 50–51

1849

the back of the person in authority and �nally speculate him away, too, and transpose everything into speculation.

How can a divine teaching come into the world at all? By God taking possession of a number of individual human beings, and, as it were, overpowering them to the degree that they then become willing, throughout their long lives, to do everything, to endure and suffer everything for this teaching. This, their unconditional obedience, is the form of their authority. They make use of authority and appeal to God, but they also support this with their unconditional obedience. If you are not willing to become a part of the Good, then we are certainly prepared to suffer everything, and then we will indeed see who is stronger. It is like an auction. People want to terrify the person sent by God, show him every horror, but he says: I will bid anyway, for my unconditional obedience―by which I myself am compelled―means that I can bid so low (with respect to being able to endure everything) that you cannot underbid me. So he endures; �nally he dies. Now he is the one who compels. Now he compels the human race, and thus he forces the divine teaching upon the race; his unconditional obedience, which was what had supported him, now transforms itself into the explanation that he had divine authority, something he himself had said. As long as he lives and struggles, what he rlly makes most use of is the unconditional obedience, for of course he cannot �nd people willing to listen to his div. authority; but then he dies, and then authority works all the more powerfully. The two short essays by H. H. are very instructive.

306

I look at the country’s 1000 clergy and their respective theological degrees, and I see a difference among them: that some of them regard Xnty or orthodoxy as being one thing, and the others regard it as being something else. But when clerical livings are under attack, when there are questions about promotions and getting better livings, when the focus is on exposing oneself to dangers, on the true renunciation of worldly advantages: then I see that they are all cut from the same cloth, they all follow the same worldly wisdom.

51

5

10

15

20

25

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 51–52

5

307

1849

This means that if Christianity exists, it exists as a doctrine, not as an existential communication; people argue over it as if it were about Plato, about how one or another passage is to be understood. I assure myself quite often that it is frightful for �esh and blood to read what demands the NT makes on a person in order to be a Christian. Without in the least way priding myself on being any kind of extraordinary Christian―alas, I am scarcely a Christian, though I do a little: and I am regarded as a ridiculous exaggeration. This is how I live in the midst of Christendom, day by day; nowhere do I have the least support; on the contrary, the whole of the worldly clergy �nd it very urgent to arrive at this judgment: I am mad.

15

52

20

25

30

35

40

Lines Spoken by a Poetic Individual. By chance I happen to own a very rare book; perhaps I am the only person here in the city who owns it: The New Testament of Our Lord Jesus Christ. By chance I learned as a child to read in an ordinary grammar school, something on which I place great emphasis inasmuch as I am, alas, also a doctor of philosophy and of theology and a member of a number of learned societies. By chance I have subsequently limited my reading almost entirely to that rare book. As a result of this continued reading, what follows below has occurred to me. If I were to convene a gathering of 100,000 peop., assuming I could speak loudly enough to be heard by such a gathering, and if I were to say: [“]I cannot live on air, and not only that, but I regard it as my duty to look out for my future[”]―then not only would there not be any thundering shouts of approval, but people would almost regard me as mad for bringing up such a ma�er, something that every reasonable man regards as reasonable. And yet, if I then close my door and take out that very rare book in a private chamber, then it seems to me as if there were a voice that said to me, “You scoundrel, you shameless fellow. When I, God in Heaven, command something in my Word, see to it that you obey immediately. Who has required that you live on air[?] What an impudent, presumptuous exaggeration in order to make my Word ridiculous. Go to the workhouse and acquaint yourself with what a hum. being needs in order to live―you cer-

309

310

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 52–55

1849

tainly need no more than that.”―If this is how things are, where, then, is the passage in the NT where a person swerves over into fat clerical livings[?] In general I believe I have discovered that Christianity can only be communicated in something like a private chamber, and the greater the number of people, the more insignificant Christianity appears to be, becoming almost ridiculous.

5

308

Thomas à Kempis says: Habits (bad ones) are driven out by habits (good ones).

53

At the conclusion of Luther’s sermon for Easter Monday there is a remark on the incomprehensibility of faith, and that there must be no speculating.

54

Lines about Myself. If someone were to say that as a religious author I am very severe on my contemporaries, then (without, however, entirely conceding that this was the case) I would reply: but why are you so severe with me[?] Consider my life as an author, my diligence, my exertions, my unselfishness―and then the judgment is to be that I am a kind of eccentric, an exaggeration―while you who carry on the most contemptible literary trade live in plenty and possess power, while everyone who seeks finite goals is rewarded with them and is also regarded as being serious. Isn’t this severity against me? My life, a�er all, is lived in ongoing rapport with an idea, and I personally feel myself to be religiously obligated; I cannot endure half-heartedness and nonsense―everywhere my life is an either-or. If I am to be an ornament to my country, well then, say so; but if people are to be permi�ed to do everything against me, well then, in that case I must in turn say that living in my native land is a folly on my part―and I must have this idea with me: I cannot do without Christianity, ergo I must force the price of being a Christian

15

55

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 55–57

5

10

309

15

20

25

56

30

35

57

1849

further up. If wantonness and crudeness and envy are permitted to treat the altogether respectable efforts of an author as I have been treated, well then, they will have to put up with the fact that I have my suspicions about whether such a country can rightly call itself purely Christian. They will have to put up with my jacking up the price of being a Xn. I may very well suffer for doing this, but I will not let go of the idea. If people press me harder, well then, I will come to suffer more, but I cannot let go of the idea, and the counter pressure I exert will be all the stronger in consequence. I do not exactly take pleasure in this situation, but when it comes to the idea, I cannot do otherwise, and I feel myself to be religiously obligated. Or has the fact that I am an author become a crime?a 3 years ago Concl. Postscript was published. It was the capstone of a grand authorial project from an earlier period; it is itself the fruit of 1 or 1-1/2 years’ diligent work, and I mean diligent; it cost me betw. 500 and 600 rd. to publish. This book sold 60 copies. It was not mentioned in one single place. On the other hand, I was depicted and mocked in The Corsair, much to the delight of the rabble. In Kjøbenhavnsposten P.L.M. poured scorn on it and on me; in Flyve-Posten they wrote of my trousers, that they had now become too long; this was wri�en to whip up the rabble’s ridicule of me. And then they want to complain that I am too severe―but there is not to be any talk of the severity shown against me.

In the worldly sense, one ascends as follows: when a hum. being has reached one step, he desires and aspires to reach a higher one. On the other hand, when a hum. being has involved himself with God so that God truly takes hold of him and uses him, the ascent is as follows: at each additional step he is to climb, he begs like a child to be excused, for he understands very well that, hmnly speaking, suffering and wretchedness increase to the same degree, and spiritual trials similarly. How o�en have apostles not begged in this way.

On the three Friday discourses (The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner) they are related to the last pseudonym, Anti-Climacus.

311

a

Just one example.

1

312

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 58–61

1849

Text for a Friday Discourse see journal NB12 pp. 226 and 227. The text cited under no. 3 was not used.

58

5

The Suffering of Reversedness In other cases, one suffers because one did not become what one wished, someone great, etc. But the reverse: to know―with unshakable certainty―to know that the extraordinary has been entrusted to one―and then both not to dare speak of this to one single person, so as not to affront the highest power who does not want such cha�iness, and, even if one were to speak, to be certain that one would not be the least bit understood!

310

59

10

15

Religion is also used to fla�er peop. in an extremely shabby manner. Every pers. would like to be fla�ered by fancying that he possesses a bit of the extraordinary. Now the priests help out: if a man suffers the least li�le bit, they immediately draw an analogy between his sufferings and those of the religious paradigms― with Abraham, who sacrifices Isaac; with Paul and the thorn in the flesh; with every suffering―with these words―[“] We must through much tribulation to enter into the kingdom of God.[”]

60

20

25

On My Writings. The heterogeneity must by all means be maintained: here we have an author, not a cause in the objective sense, but a cause for which an individual has stood on his own, for which he has suffered, etc. But, just as people have not understood why Concl. Postscript is structured comically―that precisely this is earnestness―and just as people therefore think they are improving the cause by taking individual theses and transposing them into a didactic mode, so here, too, it will probably also end with a new

61

30

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 61–62

5

10

311 15

20

62 25

30

35

1849

confusion, in which people treat me as a cause and transpose everything into objectivity, making it into something new, that here we have a new doctrine―rather than that what is new is that here we have a personality. As a penitent, and also because I believed that in a way this corresponded to my original nature, I have not wanted to put myself forward. All of my work as an author and the whole of my existence as an author are like a challenge: I have surrounded the terrain, everywhere inciting people and watching to see whether that single individual might not arise―in which case I would instantly have assumed the position of his master of ceremonies, indicating the order in which the pseudonyms always show themselves: that the elder serves the younger, who expresses something higher, while the elder is nonetheless the maieuticist. This has not happened. Had R. Nielsen, without any personal help from me, been immed. capable of taking a position, then I would at any rate have paid a good deal of attention to him, even if the extent to which he could be the single individual had remained dubious. But now he himself has determined his situation by seeking personal support. With respect to the idea he is now, if you will, a disciple.

The Difference betw. Immediacy and Reflection in Relation to Religious Suffering. The immediate person has also had his time of suffering, perhaps frightfully so―then for him everything is suddenly transfigured into bliss (this is immed. awakening). He himself then forgets all his sufferings because of this bliss; this can be quite proper. But then he begins to preach to others, and in a way he comes to deceive them, for he entirely forgets the part about the suffering, thereby causing them either to take the entire ma�er in vain or, later on, to become almost furious with him when they themselves come to experience suffering, furious with him for not having told them of this in advance. Reflection does not forget; it remembers backward; and reflection situates the suffering together with the bliss. Immediacy produces much greater effects at the moment; reflection works slowly but thoroughly.

313

314

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 62–64

1849

Oh, how Xnty has been damaged when only the leniency is taken, thereby fooling peop. into the delusion that they were Xns, and emasculating Xnty, instead of including the severity right from the beginning, gaining fewer but genuine adherents. 5

In Xndom the dialectical moment has everywhere been abolished. They elevate the doctrine of “grace” an entire stage too high. Xnty has demanded the genuine renunciation of the worldly, has required the voluntary―and then, that one must nonetheless acknowledge that one is nothing, that everything is grace. Xndom removes the entire first stage―and then permits grace to move up; it gra�s “grace,” if you will, immediately onto the worldly mindset.

63

The degree to which Xnty is rlly lost can best be seen in the tolerance exhibited by the orthodox. Their mo�o is: if only we are permi�ed to keep to our own faith, let the world look a�er itself. Merciful God, and this is supposed to be Xnty―this was the power that once burst into the world and by its willingness to suffer forced Xnty upon the world, exerting a force mightier than any tyrant. The orthodox have no notion that this tolerance of theirs results from the influence of sheer worldliness, that it exists because they do not in fact rlly have any understanding or respect or courage for martyrdom or any real belief in eternity, but instead prefer to have things go well for them in this world. And now (and this makes the situation even more frightful) this “tolerance” is willing to let the enormous fraud―that the entire world calls itself Xn―remain as it is, even though orthodoxy’s most fundamental belief is that the world is pagan. How low Xnty has sunk, what a powerless wretch it has become! The understanding is what has triumphed―the understanding, which has exercised tyranny over enthusiasm and the like, degrading it into something ludicrous. That is why people dare not be enthusiastic, dare not assert that martyrdom is something glorious beyond compare: people are afraid of being laughed at rather than of being put to death―and so people make compromises: they wrap themselves in their donkey skins,

64

10

312

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 64–65

1849

they ask merely that they themselves may dare to be Xns, calling this tolerance, and nonetheless boast about being the true Xns.

65

5

10

313 15

20

25

30

35

40

There was some truth in Peter’s words when he once remarked that there was a religious difference between him and myself: that he regarded the relationship to God as one of being loved, I regarded it as one of loving. This remark was not exactly something new to me; I have o�en considered whether God was not altogether too infinitely lo�y for a hum. being to dare love him—but of course it is wri�en: You shall love the Lord your God. Furthermore, I myself have in fact always said that it is God who does everything for me. But nonetheless, this is not a bad way of describing the difference between the two of us. The fact is that Peter has never been young in a spiritual sense; he received a morbid impression of the religious; he has become so anxious and fearful before God that he is stuck in this state of pusillanimity—and God knows whether he will become truly ardent by daring to believe that he is loved by God. In the physical sense I have never been young. But spiritually I have been a youth, and in a good sense. Overwhelmed by God, annihilated into something less than a sparrow before him, I have nonetheless acquired a certain cheerful courage, so that in youthful fashion I dare involve myself with him; in childlike fashion I have been able to get it into my head that God’s infinity consisted precisely in his capacity to concern himself about the very least things; in childlike fashion I could enter into the pious notion that he would not react ungraciously if, referring to my own honest strivings, I were to say to him: Bi�e, bi�e, do not refuse me, O you infinite one, you for whom at every instant I am indeed less than nothing. This is youthfulness, it is childlike, but it has truly been a part of my nature. It has been a blessing to me that this has been so natural and geläufigt for me to understand, that I have had this at my fingertips: that the more infinite someone is, the less he can concern himself about small things—oh, no, I have never been that reasonable! No, the more infinite someone is, the more he can and will concern himself about small things. I have believed that it was literally true that he concerned himself with every sparrow—literally, yes, naturally, this was of the greatest importance to me because in another sense it has always been true for me that I am a sparrow, or something less than a sparrow. 33 geläufigt] German-Danish, easy.

315

316

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 65–67

1849

Call it madness, but in my final moments I will pray to God that I might be permi�ed to thank him yet again for having made me mad in this way. In truth, if God cannot make a person mad in this way, it is very questionable whether that person will ever have a proper understanding that he exists before God. In other respects I am of course willing to recall what I have o�en recalled, that in one sense development of one’s relationship to God is this: the longer one lives with him, the more distant, in a way, one feels oneself to be from him, because he has become all the more infinitely lo�y. As a child one simply lives with him without further ado; as a youth one believes that if one truly makes an effort it can still be done; and as an adult, alas, one notices that he is indeed altogether too infinite for a person; however, it makes quite a bit of difference if one has been a child and a youth or begins right off in the old man’s situation.

The concept “Christendom” is what must be reformed. What must be done is the dialectical opposite of introducing Xnty, and yet in another sense it is somewhat similar: to introduce Xnty― into Xndom. The illusion that all are Xns has reached its high point―well then, of course there cannot be any talk of introducing Xnty― there must instead be examinations in Xnty; in propounding Xnty there must be an examination about what it in fact means when it is said that everyone is Xn. Here there is an analogy to Socratic questioning. Just as he began with the Sophists who said they were Xn, and then questioned them until they were empty, here the beginning will be the statements of those who say they are Xn. And just as he said he was ignorant, here the examiner must be someone who says that he is not himself a Christian. And just as the fruit of this Socratic questioning was a sharper definition of knowledge, here the fruit must be a sharper definition of what it is to be a Christian.

A�er all, even a hum. being can approximate an understanding of this: that a hum. being does not live by bread alone but by every word that proceeds from God’s mouth―notwithstanding the fact that these words and the context in which they are used (namely in the story of the temptation, where the contrast is with

5

10

15

314

66

20

25

30

67

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 67–68

5

10

15

1849

having fasted for 40 days and 40 nights) are superhuman, for a hum. being is indeed not so pure a spirit that he can literally live on God’s word instead of food and drink. Ah, but a hum. being can indeed live for a long, long time, year a�er year, suffering and perhaps tormenting himself with a certain understanding of some specific Christian thing―and then it suddenly dawns on him that he can view the same thing from a different angle and then feel a relief like that when a hungry person receives food or a person who has fainted is revived. Take a person who is truly conscious of being a sinner, who has tormented himself by continually being capable only of imagining Xt as the Holy One, and who therefore only trembles before him, yet continues to cling to him―what a transformation when it truly becomes clear to him that Christ is the Savior, is like a physician upon whom one calls precisely in one’s weakest moments, whereas he, to the contrary, had only dared turn to the Holy One in his best moments.

315

68 20

25

30

35

Even if a poet suffers actual persecution by his contemporaries, he reproduces and transforms even this actual suffering of his into a work of poetry and gives his contemporaries occasion for a new―enjoyment. An ethicist takes this sort of situation seriously, turns it into actuality, saying, [“]It is you, you contemporaries, of whom I speak.[”] He does not change the scene of the action, does not keep the ma�er at a poetic distance. In a certain sense the poet has greater resignation: he does not actually insist upon justice, he drops his case against actual hum. beings and transposes the entire scene into the medium of the imagination. But the poet lacks courage; his imagination terrifies him so that he does not dare a�ack actuality head-on; he distills something poetic out of it and restrains himself. This would perhaps be among the most interesting tasks: to present a poet who was developed to such an extent and had advanced so far that he himself rlly began to understand that he ought to carry out a µεταβασις εις αλλο γενος, specifically, to pass over into the ethical, the heroic—but who still could not convince himself to do so, and who then remained dialectically fixed at that point.

35 µεταβασις εις αλλο γενος] Greek, transformation into a different kind. See also explanatory note.

317

318

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 69–70

1849 Poetic Motif.

A counterpart to a seducer, except that he seduces men: seducing a man into becoming a fanatic. If it is to be kept within the realm of the interesting, the one who is seduced must in fact be an older man, for with a younger man it would be altogether too easy. Lines for a seducer of this sort: “I have o�en considered whether it would be easier to seduce if one has the advantage of being regarded as an honest person or if one has the difficulty of being regarded as a cunning fellow, against whom everyone is on guard. I view this la�er role as the easier. Precisely because a person is, as they say, on guard, it is easier to seduce him. A remarkable cleverness is required if one is not to be deceived―when one wants to be clever. That is what I am counting on. By remaining on guard, as they say, a person easily becomes conceited, and if he becomes conceited, he easily comes to feel secure. Thus one dupes him by fortifying his notion that he is clever, that it is impossible to deceive him. One tells him how a person has deceived others and how one is able to deceive others; he himself sees that he cannot be deceived in that way. During all this one makes a study of his weak sides and of how he is to be deceived. Now one dupes him even more powerfully, convincing him that it is impossible for him to be caught―and then he is caught.”

69

5

10

15

20

316

30

If when the NT is cited in defense of the polemical element in Xnty, someone says, [“]Yes, that was then, but now—in Xndom,[”] well, then, let us take Luther, who certainly lived in Xndom. Read, e.g., his sermon on the gospel text, [“]A li�le while, and you will no longer see me, and again a li�le while, and you will see me.[”] No, it is precisely because of the mendacious illusion of Xndom that the situation in Xndom is infinitely worse and more dangerous than when

70

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 70–72

1849

319

Xnty dealt with paganism; therefore the polemical element ought if possible be even stronger.

71 5

72

15

317 20

25

30

35

Oh, how far indeed we hum. beings are from the spirituality that truly grieves only over its sin and only in relation to God: How rare is even the hum. being who has the courage to be entirely open to another hum. being concerning every secret guilt.

Christianity’s Situation in Possibility―and in Actuality. As soon as I take Xnty as a doctrine and use my perspicacity, or my profundity, or my eloquence, my imagination to present it, people think well of it; I am regarded as a serious Xn, am beloved, etc. As soon as I want to express existentially what I say―that is, when I want to situate Christianity in actuality―then I explode existence, as it were; people immediately take offense. Take the rich young man―let me preach about how he was not perfect, about how he could not decide to give everything to the poor, but about how the true Xn is always willing to give everything: then people are moved and I am beloved. But if I were a rich young man and went and gave my entire fortune to the poor, peop. would be offended and would find it a ridiculous exaggeration.―Take Mary Magdalene―let me preach about her deep consciousness of sin, the passion that is indifferent to everything except sin; she goes to the Savior, exposes herself to all kinds of mockery, etc.―I promise I will move people to tears, and I, the speaker,b will be regarded as a serious Xn, beloved. If, on the other hand, I am myself conscious of being a sinner, and suddenly I want to step forth and actually make public confession of my sins, then people will immediately take offense. It will be seen as vanity and as a ridiculous exaggeration.―Preach about how a true Xn takes counsel with God about everything: it

[a]

But do not forget one thing: preaching must be your living and your job; positions and jobs are what are rlly popular; even the most abstruse philosophy almost becomes popular if only people learn that it is one’s job.

1

5

b

N.B. if preaching is also my job, for otherwise peop. will regard the ma�er as an exaggeration.

10

320 1

c

, naturally, if preaching is your job, for otherwise it is disturbing.

d

5

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 72–74

but naturally preaching must be your job; otherwise it doesn’t really sink into people; you yourself become an exaggeration in their eyes.

1849

moves people.c―If a pers. in the actual world comes forth and announces that he has taken counsel with God, it will be decried as presumption, pride, exaggeration, madness.―Depict all those quiet souls who lived out of the mainstream of life, filling their souls only with the thought of God: it will move people to tears.d Let someone carry this out in real life, and he becomes a ridiculous figure whom people almost feel a duty to insult and mock.

5

10

The ethical expression for the distinction that an artist, a thinker, a teacher of morals insists upon is that he himself renounces pecuniary advantage. If pecuniary advantages are made important, what sort of prudery is it that concerns itself with this great difference betw. such a person and any other businessman[?] But art and scholarship are of course different from other things, and a difference can of course be conceded to exist between them and other businessmen, analogous, e.g., to the one profession being more respectable than another. But of course being a teacher of morals does not lend itself to differences of this sort; in this case, the more pecuniary advantages are emphasized, the more he becomes something even less than a pure and simple businessman.

73

Ah, a martyr who gesticulates with his daily existence cannot concentrate in the moment as can these refined speakers who are pampered all week long until Sunday, when they strut and u�er solemn assurances for an hour. Ah, a martyr who gesticulates with his daily existence cannot voluptuously direct aesthetic a�ention to the mellifluousness of his voice and to his mighty gestures, for inasmuch as all his gesticulation essentially consists of translating into action, it escapes the fleeting a�ention of the moment.

74

15

20

318 25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 74

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

319

40

Ah, patience is required merely in order to understand this. But the deceivers, who ally themselves with the sensuous aspect of a hum. being, they of course have infinitely superior strength. This difference alone: what I have to say requires a silence almost like that of an individual in the confessional booth―what the others say seems be�er the more thousands there are who hear it. An actor is truly an honest man―on the placard he announces in advance what will happen this evening: that between 7 and 10 o’clock he will play a noble father and chief forester, a suffering witness to the truth, a lo�y hero, etc. He is honest; he does not lead anyone into the unfortunate confusion that he is himself the character portrayed. People have taken exception to the fact that the theater has been placed under the cultus minister; I think it would be be�er if the cultus minister kept control over what has been entrusted to him―the theater and the Church―but took the title of theater director. I don’t rlly see what Xnty can object to in the theater as far as truth is concerned: the truth is simply that the actor acknowledges that he is an actor. There is nothing that can upset me so much as when a man misuses his imagination and his eloquence to depict the suffering truth when his life expresses exactly the opposite. Then he himself mendaciously becomes the object of admiration, love, sympathy, whereas the actual witness of the truth suffers mockery and abuse. Ah, what is an actual seducer compared with a seducer such as this[?] He charms a girl, he piques her desire, indeed―but he does not, a�er all, rlly fundamentally confuse her concepts as does the other seducer, whose forgery indeed contributes to our growing hard-heartedness in relation to the genuine witness to the truth, because the la�er’s existence only becomes even more eccentric in comparison with the other’s deceptive appearance.

1849

321

322

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 75–76

1849

Shrewdness immediately resorts to the means of the moment; the Good renounces use of them. Then, when the Good has triumphed nonetheless, then sometimes, assisted by the result, people want to explain the Good as a sort of shrewdness, saying, [“]It was a�er all the shrewdest thing.[”] Here we now see the difference. They [the means and the result] must be compared in “the beginning.” For when the result is there, people overlook the “daring,” overlook the fact that it really was daring to refrain from using the means of the moment. Were shrewdness and willing the Good identical, people would have to see them as being identical in “the beginning.” “The beginning” is what judges. It is decisive.

75

That is how Xnty has been abolished, by everywhere forcing personality to withdraw. People seem to fear that an [“]I[”] could be a sort of tyranny, and therefore every [“]I[”] is to be leveled, pushed back behind an objectivity. I must not be allowed to say, I believe there is a God. I am to say, This is Xnty’s doctrine: I believe. But then this I is something more universal, not my personal I. Everywhere there is doctrine, objectivity, and everywhere people are prevented from ge�ing the impression that a pers. has an immed. relation to God.―If a priest occasionally uses his I from the pulpit, it is forgiven because his I from the pulpit is not, in fact, taken to be his personal I in the strict sense, but a sort of dramatic I, or an I qua civil servant. As learned commentators so o�en insert themselves disturbingly betw. an author and the readers he preferred, as the daily press has inserted itself disturbingly betw. genuine literature and the reader―so has objectivity everywhere been disturbingly inserted betw. God and actuality, smuggling God far, far away. Instead of doctrine being the objective element, and then my I appropriating it personally so that I thus speak in the first person in actuality, they want to make me abolish my I and speak objectively. For that which is to govern the world is not to be God, who acts upon the I, but is to be something objective, an abstraction to which individual I’s are related as leaves to a tree, as animals to a species.

76

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 77

1849

320

77

5

10

15

20

25

30

What is true with respect to actors, artists, poets is also aesthetically true with respect to “speakers”: the antithesis is generally the precondition for, or is something that corresponds to, the performance. Personal existence is generally the opposite of what the performance expresses, for it is this very longing, nurtured by the antithesis, that produces the glow in the imagination from which the performance proceeds. From this it can be seen how hopeless it is to let Xnty be represented only by “speakers.” One single ascetic walking among us preaches in a manner entirely different from 20 such speakers. In general this is also the best proof that people have completely transformed Xnty from an existential communication into a doctrine: speakers, lecturers, and the like have been substituted for ascetics. Of course it is very easy to rebut this by immediately serving up something about flagellants and the like. But in doing this the ma�er is not truly rebu�ed, and by talking like this people only show that they would prefer to drop the ma�er, the sooner the be�er. Let the authorities at the poorhouse determine how much a pers. needs to live on―and let that be the wage. The concept of asceticism by no means includes anything deviant. Xt, too, was an ascetic. Just look in the NT and see how much he needed to live on. The same with Paul. The true concept of asceticism is to reduce the requirements of life to a minimum and then, of course, not to abuse oneself with flagellation or the like. Ah, this is very easy to understand, and the reason why people are so slow to understand is also very easy to understand. I, too, can understand it, but I will not propose it, for my existence does not reach that far; I am tried only by being abused by my contemporaries.

323

324

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 78

1849

321

The Turn in the Writings When the New Pseudonym (Anti-Cl.) Was Presented. My idea was to publish all the completed manuscripts in one volume, all under my name―and then stop completely. This idea was an exaggeration, but I suffered indescribably by continually wanting to cling to it. I went and sketched, �rst in one little place (especially the writings on my work as an author), then in another, while I continually overexerted myself on the whole project, especially given the added factor that I was supposed to make an existential turn of this sort, and yet in a way conceal that there was something false in my stepping into character on that scale―conceal it by withdrawing entirely. Then it �nally became clear to me that I de�nitely had to consider my future and that it was more than I could manage to deal with both at once: to undertake literary productivity of that sort and also to be concerned about making a living. So I decided to put aside the entire literary production, which lay completed and ready, until better times―and then not to write anything more and to take steps toward getting an of�cial position. Then once again the thought dawned on me that it was perhaps indefensible to leave those works lying there; also, I became a bit impatient at the thought of how dif�cult it in fact is for me to get an of�cial position, even if people did everything, and then I go in vain both to Madvig and Mynster. Then I took hold of the matter again―I sent the �rst part of the manuscript to the printer under my name, so it was now possible to deal with the whole project. My idea at that point was to let actuality exert its pressure on me and to get a close look at the matter, and I placed myself in God’s hands, hoping for his help. In the meantime Councillor of State Olsen died, and a lot of dif�culties followed―I understood, too, that it was rash and excessive to instigate such an abrupt action―and the upshot was that The Sickness unto Death became pseudonymous. In doing this I gained by coming to understand myself and my limits. I gained an ingenuity concerning the structure of my writings, which, again, had not been my original idea. I understood that it had been almost an act of desperation on my part to want to venture out so far in the direction of being a sort of apostle, and in so strange a fashion, so that I was supposed to break off immediately and by the same step possibly have destroyed my future. If this had not happened, if I had left my entire literary production lying there, I would have returned every week to the thought of realizing that foolhardy notion after all, and I surely would have harrowed myself, for it would not indeed have been realized. Now my literary production has resumed, the pseudonymity has been established, I have gotten fresh air and relief and have been liberated from that phantom of overexertion.

78

5

10

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 79–80

1849

322

79

5

10

15

80

20

25

30

35

On the Three Discourses (The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner) They are now delivered to the printer. 1) I must find a point of rest, but I cannot rest on a pseudonym; and these [discourses] correspond to Anti-Climacus; and the position of Discourses for the Communion on Fridays is once and for all designated as the point of the rest for my works. 2) Since at present people are focusing on my pseudonym (Climacus), it is important that there be emphasis in the direction of edification. Once again, how loving it is of Governance that what I need and am to use always lies ready. 3) “The Preface[”] calls to mind the Two Edif. Discourses of 1843; it is important to me to emphasize that I began as a religious author right at the outset; it is important for the repetition.

From the ethical point of view, the situation of the sermonic discourse itself, of preaching, as it is presently understood, is as if calculated to deceive the speaker and the listener. In a splendid building, where art and good taste have produced the aesthetic concept of solemnity, when the mighty tones of the organ have filled the arches and the last notes are dying away―then a speaker steps forward; he now sets everything in motion to emphasize the moment; he himself is stimulated when he senses the effect he has; he is intensified, etc., etc. The late Spang once said that he had had some of his most splendid moments in the pulpit. Yes, alas, yes, from an aesthetic point of view, this sort of amplification of mood and imagination is indeed something. But wouldn’t an actor say the same thing about producing a stillness in the theater, so that one can hear a pin drop―and then at the next instant hear the cheers, etc.; wouldn’t an actor also say that he had had some of his most splendid moments on the stage, through the intensification of electrifying others and being electrified by them[?] And the priest would even more so, he who himself is of course the I who speaks qua author. And so they speak movingly about how a priest feels the need to preach; if he hasn’t preached for a month or two, he feels an emptiness, a lack, etc.―well, yes indeed: what wonder is it

325

326

1

[a]

see p. 134.

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 80–82

1849

indeed that a person who is pampered by such weekly aesthetic amplifications when, in an enthusiastic temper, he is exalted and moves others, and is himself moved by depicting faith, hope, love, high virtues, the blessedness of suffering, etc.―what wonder is it indeed that a person feels that something is lacking: when a person is addicted it isn’t so easy to do without alcohol. But then, where in all this is there room for lowly ethical existence and action[?] It would be just about as impossible for Mynster to stand on his head as it would be to demonstrate, even to a merely mediocre dialectician, a difference betw. an actor and someone who preaches in Mynster’s style. For the difference betw. a preacher and an actor is simply the existential circumstance that the priest is poor when he preaches about poverty, is mocked when he preaches about being subjected to derision, etc. etc.; whereas the actor simply has the task of creating illusion by completely ridding himself of the existential, in the deepest sense the priest has the task of preaching with his life. Yes, one could say, a bit paradoxically, that preaching is something close to keeping one’s mouth shut but expressing existentially, in one’s deeds, one’s life, that for which words are otherwise used. The resounding organ, the splendid arm waving, etc., are not really needed: a mute can preach, and a cripple who has no arms can also preach.

323

On My Writings as a Whole.

81

In a certain sense it is a question posed to the times in the form of a choice: one must choose either to make the aesthetic element into the idea behind it all, and then explain everything in that way, or the religious element. Precisely therein lies what is awakening.

30

see p. 133 middle of page. In order, then, to remove the aesthetic illusions and distractions, either only a few people should be preached to at a time, more or less as in a confessional, or there must be preaching to the “multitude” in the street, and not by civil servants with ecclesiastical livings.

5

10

15

20

82 35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 82–83

324 5

10

15

20

83 25

30

35

1849

O�en enough people have defended preaching in overfilled churches by appealing to Xt and the apostles, who indeed shouted and witnessed and addressed themselves to the multitude. Aber first of all, they did so in the street (and in that case aesthetic illusions do not arise); next, insofar as they did so in the synagogues, they were of course not in the service of the established order or in agreement with it―an analogy to this would be more or less if someone who was not a civil servant or a priest with an ecclesiastical living wanted to use one of our churches to preach against this entire degenerate Xnty; finally, both Xt and the apostles, in scrupulously expressing their teaching with their existence, lived in the character of their teaching, not in the character of a councillor of justice, knight of the Dannebrog, and a member of an order. Within an established order of civil servants and representatives with ecclesiastical livings, to preach in a splendid church is, from a Christian point of view, rlly nonsense. It becomes sheer illusion―this is something one can easily confirm for oneself by listening to people talk about the distinctions they draw between preachers, for one always hears aesthetic terms used.

That was how they put me off, by saying that everyone was privately willing to concede that I was so extraordinary that no one was capable of judging me―that was why there were no reviews, etc. There was some truth in this. On the strength of this, I acted. I dared―and this was something that was not rlly in my interest, but which I did for the sake of others―I dared to break with the mob vulgarity. Now it was not a ma�er of having my writings reviewed, but of securing my ordinary hum. rights. But no, everyone remained silent, and I was sacrificed to the judgment of that forum before which I cannot possibly exist, which, partly blameless, is entirely without a clue concerning the ideal that constitutes the sublimity and seriousness of my life.

4 Aber] German, but.

327

328 1

Prof. Martensen and me.

[a]

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 84–85

1849

If the ma�er is to be decided before a forum of businessmen, I have eo ipso lost. Prof. Martensen needs only to put on his vestments, the silk gown and the velvet paunch, the cross of knighthood, and perhaps, for the sake of completeness, a note in his hand or on his hat, on which is wri�en: [“]ca. 2,000 rd. a year[”]―he doesn’t need to say a word, there will not be a single one among the businessmen who does not shout, This is life’s seriousness. When it is I―alas I, wretch that I am, I who am still a nobody―when it is I who step forward, when, for the sake of completeness, I have in my hand or on my hat a note on which is wri�en, [“]A certain amount a year, which he earns by being an author, straining himself on the greatest possible scale.[”] Yes, even had I the tongue of an angel I might just as well keep my mouth shut, I will not move a single businessman to abandon his view that I am a frivolous fantast. So go home, li�le children, and read the NT. I do not blame the businessmen, oh, far from it. But what is contemptible is that Prof. M., who a�er all has, or ought to have, a notion about the real status of things, subjects himself, or allows himself to be subjected, to a forum of businessmen: that an entirely wrong concept of earnestness has been dishonestly substituted.

84

When in one way or another, a teaching offers a learner some sort of an advantage, and for this reason it is proposed that he adhere to it, well then, this is worth a hearing. But when a teaching reverses the situation, when it has not come into the world to serve hum. beings, but in order that they should serve it, sacrificing everything for its sake―then must not a practical man judge this to be madness[?] And yet this is more or less the situation with Xnty as viewed by a practical man. For a�er all, a practical man cannot care particularly much for the business about eternal blessedness, and Xnty actu-

85

2 eo ipso] Latin, by that very fact.

5

325 10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 85–86

1849

329

ally reverses the situation with respect to all relative τελη.

86 5

10

15

326

20

25

30

35

Prof. Martensen’s Status It is now a good ten years since Prof. M. returned from his foreign travels, bringing with him the latest German philosophy and creating a great sensation with this new material―he who has rlly always been more of a reporter and a correspondent than an original thinker. It was the philosophy of standpoints―and this is what is corrupting in overviews of this sort―that enchanted the young people, opening the prospect of having everything ingested in half a year. He is hugely successful, and at the same time young students take the opportunity to inform the public in print that with Martensen a new era, epoch, epoch and era, etc.b is beginning. (The corrupting influence of permi�ing young peop. to do this sort of thing, by which everything is reversed.[)]

Foremost in the Church, as the leader, stood the man who is still standing there, unchanged, the admired bishop of Zealand, who by a strange misunderstanding is sometimes criticized for something that is to his credit―because it is indeed praiseworthy when someone who is called and appointed to govern in fact wants to govern. Mynster is now supposedly weakened by public opinion (“he has remained stuck at Jacobi.[”])c In the court of public opinion, M. has also lost the ba�le over the principle of contradiction,d but he exercises an even greater power thanks to his personal superiority. Then a literary project begins: the pseudonyms. Right away Victor Eremita emphasizes the ethical, taking aim at “the System.” Johnannes de silentio does so quite clearly―and Mynster signals [his support] from above. Pseudonym follows upon pseud2 τελη] Greek, ends, purposes.

[a]

Prof. Martensen’s status.

1

Note see the preface to Philosophical Fragments.

b

Note see the li�le piece Prefaces[,] no. d Note see Maanedsskri� for Literatur. c

5

330

1

5

e

The literature has become rather embarrassing, and as its German correspondent Martensen has naturally become equally so.

f

where Bishop Mynster―he who in due course is to be taken out of service―is made into the true dogmatician.

g

―quod felix faustumque sit!―

9 quod felix faustumque sit] Latin, would that this will be fortunate for you. See also explanatory note.

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86

1849

onym, up to Joh. Climacus, in continuing opposition to the System. It does not develop into a ba�le, but the terrain is surrounded. In the meanwhile, the situation in Germany has also changed somewhat.e Martensen’s standing at the university is not at all as secure as previously; indeed, it appears as if some sort of decisive moment might be in the offing. Then something new happens: Prof. M. becomes a court preacher. This was a diverting µεταβασις εις αλλο γενος. He is again hugely successful at the Palace Church. He himself almost seems to be infatuated. He does not notice the many illusions: 1) the rumor that Hegelian philosophy had now come down to the cultured classes, to ladies, etc., who thought they had go�en some contact with it, a li�le taste of it, when he preached for them; 2) that Mynster was his protector; 3) that M. had not become a real priest, “not an ordinary man of the cloth for every Sunday,” but a court preacher for every 6th Sunday. They entirely forget that a li�le [“]NB[”] had been brought up at the university.

Finally we return to scientific scholarship, and now the Christian Dogmatics is published.f It consists of the lectures that had been titled “Speculative Dogmatics,” but this adjective had indeed been removed (a difference rather like the one Peer Degn makes in reference to the same book, one copy halfbound in vellum, the other in full leather binding). The earlier tradition of the speculative is exploited, while at the same time advancing the new opinion that―wonder of wonders!―it has now become so popular that every ordinary cultured person can read it and grasp it. In opposition to Magnus Eirikson, a theology graduate and tutor [of whom] it is said: this is altogether too lo�y for him―and at the same time it is said that any person with a merely ordinary level of cultivation can read it and grasp it. In order that Christian Dogmatics does not lack for a forerunner,g a lady novelist takes upon herself

5

10

15

20

327 25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86

5

10

15

20

328 25

30

35

40

this honorable office: Miss Frederikke Bremer. She has―oh, God save us, she, too, is to be a judge!― with the consent of the author she has in advance acquainted herself with Christian Dogmatics. She announces in advance something that she of course can and will vouch for, both in advance and a�erward: that this will be the rebirth of scholarship in Scandinavia. She implies that Martensen is Xt―and thereupon travelsh to North America, presumably to prepare him room and prepare the way.―As with the forerunner, so with all the rest of the entourage. Flyve-Posten appoints itself the master of ceremonies who makes space for “the speculative genius, Prof. M,” who―and this is something about which Fl.-P. knows everything―has remained true to his first love; in addition, it presents a proof ex consensu gentium that will be found completely satisfactory by all businessmen, that M. is the truth, that he has almost as many listeners as Fl.-P. has subscribers, ergo . . . . . Merchant N. of Berlingske Tidende steps into character as someone who swears: he swears, or he is at any rate willing to swear, that “conviction can be detected in every line of Chr. Dogmatics.” This proof is completely satisfactory for the entire bourgeoisie and for businessmen. So this high-flying speculation is Christian Dogmatics, argued for on the basis of―widespread circulation. All that’s needed now is for Prof. M.―who at any rate tolerates this line of argument―himself to argue in the same fashion: then he will have triumphed absolutely. At the instant that he himself appeals to widespread circulation, I will guarantee him that he will instantly have an additional couple of hundred buyers. One may presume that this sort of thing can be done, that it will pass unchallenged. The most appropriate person to take up a position in opposition to Christian Dogmatics was surely myself. But this is something he knows―His Right Reverence, Hr. Prof. Court Preacher and Knight Martensen with the many buyers―he knows that I will at all costs shun the use of illusion, and that indeed, it was also likely that I would remain completely silent. But 16 ex consensu gentium] Latin, by common consent.

1849

h

331

―absit risus atque scurrilitas!―

1 absit risus atque scurrilitas] Latin, now, no laughter and improper merriment.

1

332

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86–88

1849

even if I spoke, if he wanted to make use of illusions, or even tolerate their use in his favor, I would eo ipso end up drawing the shortest straw. This entire way of behaving, which begins by boasting in a speculative, high-flying fashion and then falsifies things by shi�ing the forum of debate, is disgraceful. So I have wri�en this in order that my silence not be held against me.

Collision A pers. can of course have sinned in many ways without on that account becoming liable to legal punishment, even if his guilt became publicly known. But still, doesn’t God have the right to require that a pers. subject himself to punishment of another sort than what would follow if his guilt were known[?] I have given indescribably much thought to this, and in a way the collision is outlined in one of the earlier a�empts in the first journal, journal JJ, the one in octavo, under the title de occultis non judicat ecclesia. On the one hand, if one’s guilt is not manifest, not subject to legal punishment, to want to make it public oneself could seem analogous to tempting God. On the other hand, it could be true religiousness. Suppose that for this reason a pers. decided to forfeit his entire life’s happiness, hmnly speaking. Ah, would that I lived in a different age, when there was at least a li�le bit of sympathy for these collisions of mine, which are truly Christian. But, living with such thoughts in the midst of Xndom, I am so alienated, so deprived of all sympathy and understanding, that if I want to present such collisions seriously, I am almost treated simply as a madman.

A New View of the Relationship of Priest and Poet in the Sphere of Religion. Xnty has naturally known very well what it wanted. It wants to be proclaimed by witnesses, i.e., by peop. who proclaim the teaching and in addition express it existentially. 18 de occultis non judicat ecclesia] Latin, the Church does not judge what is secret. See also explanatory note.

5

87

15

20

329

25

30

88

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 88

5

10

15

20

331

25

30

35

40

1849

As things now are, the modern concept of a priest is a complete misunderstanding. Inasmuch as priests presumably must also express what is Christian, they have quite logically discovered how to reduce the requirement, how to abolish the ideal. What is to be done now? Yes, now we must prepare a different tactical advance. First a detachment of poets: almost fainting under the requirements of the ideal, with the glow of a certain kind of unhappy love, they present the ideal. Then those who at present are priests can come in the second wave. These religious poets must indeed be able to present things so powerfully that it helps people out into the current. Then, when this has been done, when a generation has grown up that from childhood on has had a passionate impression of expressing the ideal existentially, then both the monastery and true witnesses to the truth will return. That is how far behind the cause of Xnty is in our time. What must be done first and foremost is to create passion, to make use of superior intellect, imagination, acumen, and wit to guarantee a passion for the existential, which “the understanding” has reduced to something ludicrous. This is where my task lies. A young pers., someone quite simple, can be used for the highest existential purposes―the only thing needed for this is the ethical. But when “the understanding” and the power of the understanding have triumphed in the world and have almost made what is truly existential into something ludicrous, then neither a youth nor a simple person can prevail. Then there must first be a maieuticist, someone who is in a certain sense older, who is in eminent possession of all the gi�s of the intellect―and he makes use of these to stir up passion about passion. Any young girl can truly fall in love. But if I were to imagine an age that had sunk so deeply into worldly calculation that all the bright intellects, etc., used their gi�s in order to make love ludicrous, then no young girl can simply prevail. Then there must first be an older person who can crush this understanding and create passion―and then, hail to thee, you youth, whoever you are―then there is a place for the powers of youth, which in one sense are much weaker. And yet in one sense―as is always the case with the pseudonyms―the situation is that the young pers. stands above this older person. Alas, this is illustrated by my own life. Only now do I see where the turn is to be made―now, a�er having almost over-

333

334

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 5–8

1849

NB13:88, with additional text in the margin and beneath the main entry.

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 88

5

10

15

20

332

25

30

35

40

exerted myself for 7 years, now, when I have to start bearing a new sort of burden, concern about making a living. Oh, why was there no older person who was concerned for me as I am for the youth[?] Yet to a certain extent, I myself still belong to the old order, but I guarantee passion. Mynster’s error is not the shrewdness, etc. that he has employed. No, the error is that, infatuated with the effects of this shrewdness on temporal affairs, infatuated with his power and influence, he has rlly permi�ed the ideal to vanish. If there were still one thing in Mynster’s sermons―a continuing, profound sadness that he himself had not been sufficiently spiritual to become a martyr―then I would have approved of him; then I would have said of him what I say of myself: he did not become a martyr, but he can give birth to martyrs. No one can take what has not been given to him, and therefore neither can I. I, too, am marked by having been born in Xndom, spoiled by my upbringing, etc. Had I not been brought up in Xnty, had I stood outside Xnty, it might perhaps have had the power to swing me a stage higher, if, please note, Xnty itself had been represented as in its earliest days, when there was a surplus of passion. But no one can take what has not been given to him. How true it now is to me that all of the recent literary production has rlly been my own upbringing, a humiliation. In youthful fashion, I ventured forth, and it was granted to me to present the requirement of the ideal in the highest sensea―and quite rightly I am the one who sinks under it, humbled, and learns even more profoundly to take refuge in grace. This, which I have now experienced again, even more personally, has incidentally already been brought to consciousness in the writings themselves, for Anti-Climacus says in the moral to “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden”: The Exemplar is to be presented so ideally that you are simply humbled by it and learn to take refuge in the Exemplar, but in a quite different sense, namely, as the merciful one.

1849

335

Note: Apart, naturally, from what is always my first priority, the solicitude of Governance, which causes me always to understand things best retrospectively, the fact that I have been successful with this presentation is connected with: 1) the injustice and abuse I have suffered qua author, which of course had to have an especially powerful impact on my polemical nature; 2) my melancholia; 3) my religious presuppositions and inner sufferings; 4) the notion I also have that it is precisely as a penitent that I must dare what others do not dare. This la�er is nonetheless a point concerning which I must be extremely cautious―for here it is so enormously difficult to know oneself―and not confuse daring with being truly willing to suffer. a

1

5

10

15

20

336

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 88–89

1849

But everyone must relate to the ideal, and however far down, however far away I am, my gaze and my sigh must nonetheless have a direction that makes it clear that I, too, relate to the ideal―only in this way am I a person who strives. And then, as Anti-Climacus says, then no vehemence that overwhelms itself. But what a difference: to begin as a youth can begin, and then nonetheless in one’s best days to have belonged to the old ways. Nonetheless one thing remains: that of course it is by grace that we are all saved.

1

[a]

On the “voluntary”

[b]

bound in silk with a velvet back or paunch.

On the “Voluntary” I now understand very well why Chrstnty holds fast to the voluntary. The existential authority to teach corresponds to the voluntary. Who is to teach poverty? The person who himself struggles to acquire a fortune or who has one can of course talk about it, but without authority; only the voluntary, the person who voluntarily gave up wealth and is poor―only he has authority. Who is to teach disdain for honor and esteem? The person who is himself decorated with honors and stars and sashes bound in gilt-edged velvet: he can certainly “lecture,” “declaim,” and also teach it, but it is done without authority and it can easily become a touch of elegance to have this and then in addition to congratulate oneself on it. Nor can the person who is actually despised do it either― here, then, is the voluntary: the person who voluntarily gave up or renounced honor and esteem.―There is a special dialectical dif�culty here, however. For if it is an esteemed person who teaches that one should disdain honor and esteem, peop. say, Thanks a lot. And if it is someone who actually enjoys no honor or esteem, then peop. say, Well, who cares about what he says―he enjoys no esteem. This “voluntary” is a very strange thing, however; it is so extraordinarily high and highly dangerous: there are so many ways for pride, vanity, etc. to become included in it.―But it is certain that Xnty has commanded the voluntary, and it is certain that the “voluntary” has absolutely, literally vanished; and it is certain that when the voluntary has absolutely vanished, Xnty is rlly abolished. The voluntary is the precise form of being spirit qualitatively. But there is a lower form of religiousness that thinks of God in more childlike fashion, childishly thinking that God has nothing

5

10

89

15

333

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 89

5

334

15

20

25

30

35

40

1849

against―and almost savors―the child’s happiness, and is happy about what the child is happy about. Thus one remains within sensory-mental categories, except that one refers everything to God. The voluntary is the highest form of religiousness; therefore it also has the characteristic that this is where God is most rigorous. The religious is arranged according to increasing levels of rigor. It is like the situation of a child in relation to parents. If the child wants to be a child, the parents are lenient. But suppose that on a day off from school a child were to say to its parents, [“]Instead of going out [to play], I would prefer to stay home and do some work.[”] Then the parents have nothing against it, but they do become absolutely strict about it, for now they also require that the child live up to it freely and happily. If in the middle of the day the child begins to complain about the work, the parents disapprove, saying, [“]You should have remained a child and made use of your freedom.[”] This is also how God is with respect to the voluntary. In thinking of the voluntary, however, one must not think of the dangers to which a person exposes himself for the sake of the truth, witnessing for the truth and against evil, but of what the Middle Ages understood by the term: the voluntary surrender of temporal things, without this surrender having any connection to serving the truth, but itself wanting to be an expression of the religious. The voluntary has disappeared. Christianity has become too lenient. Were I to describe it more precisely, I know of no more �tting expression for it than what occurred to me just today: To be brought up in Christianity from childhood makes it too lenient, something like what happens when a child is brought up not by its parents, but by its grandparents. To us God is not so much our father as our grandfather. It must, however, be borne in mind that God is in no way an enemy of the voluntary; that would be a self-contradiction, inasmuch as he commands it in his Word. But precisely because God had become a grandfather, it is so dif�cult to enter properly into the fear and trembling that corresponds to the voluntary or that makes the voluntary into truth. If, in the �nal analysis, God is for me truly as lenient as a grandfather, then the voluntary is untrue and ill-mannered foolery. I have concerned myself a great deal with this matter. I admit that in my own case, my notion of God is surely too lenient. Therefore, neither have I ventured into the voluntary, nor have I ever made use of authority. Even the fact that I exposed myself to

337

338

1

5

10

[a]

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 89

Christiant. has become too lenient. Only when it is enormously rigorous can a person venture into the voluntary without it occurring to him that it is something meritorious. If Christianity is lenient, it is almost impossible for the notion of merit not to sneak in, for deep down, there is rlly no reason for this daring.

1849

attack by The Corsair is not the voluntary. For one thing, it was quite simply an action in the direction of witnessing to the truth, and for another, it could just as easily have led to the opposite result, to my victory―indeed, there was even a human likelihood of this happening, and it would have happened had not the shabby envy of the distinguished people created a disturbing counterweight to me. But that it happened was surely providential. And yet even the little bit of the voluntary, if you will, that my life demonstrates is too lofty for most people. That is how far Christianity has retreated. Were I now to consider beginning on the voluntary―without, however, daring to say that I would succeed―it would have to be like this: I would say to God, I certainly understand that you command the voluntary in your Word; but I cannot conceal from you that there is in my soul the thought and the certainty (wherever it has come from) that you will be just as fond of me if I refrain from doing it and in childlike fashion remain a human being; and after all, this appeals to me much more, whereas the other causes me anxiety. Nonetheless, I constantly remember that it is indeed in your Word. So then, couldn’t you help me just a little in making a bit of a beginning on it―bitte, bitte, for I do, after all, think I understand that in a certain higher sense it makes you happy, even though I understand that you do become, and you must become, more rigorous with respect to the voluntary; bitte, bitte.―See, there we have it: one does not after all get to the voluntary in that way; God becomes too lenient; it is always the grandfather, whom the child suspects is not really that rigorous. And, as mentioned, if the rigor disappears, then the “voluntary” disappears as well.

5

10

335

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 90–92 90

5

91 10

92 15

336 20

25

30

35

1849

339

Also with respect to “temptation” it is, a�er all, true that it is only for a short while. Temptation has its power in “the moment.” It has frightful powers to create anxiety and, as it were, to concentrate everything in a moment―at the next moment it is powerless.

Indeed, Luther puts it very well with respect to the great catch of fish: the apostles got it not because of their work and troubles―no, on the contrary, they got it only a�er they had wasted their work and troubles.

Xnty’s Position at This Moment The cataclysm is really much closer than people think. The most recent group of free-thinkers (Feuerbach and company) has a�acked or has grasped the ma�er much more cleverly than had been done previously; for if you look closely you will see that they have actually taken on the task of defending Xnty against the present generation of Xns. The truth is that established Xndom is demoralized; all respect of the more profound sort (for these assurances of respect are indeed nothing) for Xndom’s existential obligations has been lost. Now Feuerbach says, [“]No, stop: if you are to be permi�ed to live as you live, then you must also admit that you are not Xns.[”] Feuerbach has understood the requirements, but he cannot compel himself to accept them―ergo he would rather renounce being a Xn. And thus, however great a responsibility he assumes, the position he takes is not incorrect. It is indeed a falsehood when established Xndom says that Feuerbach a�acks Xnty―that is not true, he is a�acking the Xns by showing that their lives do not correspond to the teachings of Xnty. This is infinitely different. It may well be that he is a malicious demon, but he is a usable figure for tactical purposes.

[a]

Christianity’s Position at This Moment.

1

[a]

And therefore one can say, with respect to Feuerbach: et ab hoste consilium.

4 et ab hoste consilium] Latin, [one can take] counsel even from the enemy. See also explanatory note.

5

340

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 92

1849

Traitors are indeed exactly what Xnty needs. Xndom has betrayed Xnty in a very insidious manner by not truly wanting to be Xn, by wanting to have the appearance of being Xn. Now there is a need for traitors. But this concept of a traitor is dialectical. The devil also has his traitors, his spies, so to speak, who do not a�ack Xnty but a�ack the Xns―namely, with the intention of causing more and more of them to desert. God also has his traitors, godly traitors who are absolutely loyal to him and who present Xnty quite naively, so that people can for once at least see what Xnty is. Naturally, established Xndom also views them as traitors, I believe, because Xndom has made use of a monstrous falsification in order to take unlawful possession of Xnty. How strange! I always understand things best in retrospect. For Joh. Climacus is of course simply a defense of Xnty that is so extreme, in the dialectical sense, that to many people it may look like an a�ack. In that book one feels precisely how Xndom has betrayed Xnty. This book truly has an extraordinary future. And I, the author―as always, I am, in a way, made out to be a fool. I end up doing things the full meaning of which I in fact only understand a�erward. This is something I have understood again and again. This is precisely why I cannot be serious in the trivial sense in which serious men are serious, for I understand that I am nothing. There is an infinite power that helps me, as it were; when I look upon it, I worship it―this, a�er all, is indeed seriousness. But when I look at myself, I almost come to laugh: that I, a miserable cur, etc., have apparently taken on this significance. I cannot quite make myself intelligible to others, for they simply a�ribute my productions to myself. But I myself understand how things really are: there the jest is almost unavoidable at every turn. Yet it is a godly jest, for precisely when I smile at myself in my nothingness, this is of course in its turn an expression of worship. To use a metaphor and an analogy, it is as if a li�le girl were loved by an intellect that was eminently superior to her, as she herself understood. This relationship does not develop into a serious one in the usual sense of the term―what is lacking here is the relationship between equals that provides finite security and seriousness. She will be unable to stop smiling at herself when she considers that she is loved by―him, and yet she feels the blessedness during every moment of visitation. Nor does she dare say to herself, in the trivial sense, that my relationship to him is “serious”―he loves me. For she will say, My

5

10

15

20

25

337

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 92

5

15

10

15

20

1849

relationship to him is rlly nothing―the moment he leaves me, he will be doing nothing whatever wrong, for there is no relationship betw. us, but the relationship is blessed as long as it exists. Except that in my situation there is also the peculiarity that it is in reflection, so that I only see retrospectively―you see, there I have been helped once again. I take hold of the pen, commend myself into God’s hands, am diligent, etc.―in short, I do the best I can with my poor human abilities. Then things go along merrily with pen and paper. I am entirely of the view that what I produce is my own. And then, then, a long time―or some time―later, I understand in the most profound sense what has been produced, and I see that I have been helped. Dialectically, it is easy to see that Joh. Climacus’s defense of Xnty is taken to the farthest extreme, for dialectically understood, defense and a�ack are only separated by a hair’s breadth. “Joh. Climacus” was actually a deliberation, for when I wrote it, my soul indeed contained a possibility that I would not be able to let myself be conquered by Xnty, even though my most honest decision was to do everything throughout the whole of my life, in daily diligence, to be a part of the cause of Xnty, to do nothing other than present it, even if, like the Wandering Jew of legend, I myself did not become a Xn in the final and most decisive sense, but led others to Xnty.

341

JOURNAL NB14

JOURNAL NB14 Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Joel D.S. Rasmussen

Text source Journal NB14 in Søren Kierkegaards Skri�er Text established by Finn Gredal Jensen and Steen Tullberg

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 1

341

1

1849

NB14. Novbr. 9th, 49.

345

346

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 2

1849 342

On publishing the writings concerning my work as an author . . . . . . . The significance of the entire body of writings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The new pseudonym Anti-Climacus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The new pseudonym Anti-Climacus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On myself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The category of my work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On the preface to Practice in Christianity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luther’s doctrine of faith, or Luther as point de vüe and my understanding of myself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On the occasion of H. H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On H. H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proclaiming Xnty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “The Prodigal Son” ― “The Father” ― “The Brother,” arranged as discourses or as godly diversion for the sake .of edification . . . . . .

8 point de vüe] French, properly “vue,” point of view.

p. p. p. p. p. p. p.

10 p. 41. 14. 16. 27. bo�om 43. 47. 50.

p. p. p. p.

57. 157. 166. 198.

pp. 219 et al.

2

5

10

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 3–4

1849

347

343

3

4 5

Texts for Friday discourses are found in NB13. The locations are indicated on the blank page at the beginning, as are the page numbers of the hitherto unused texts for Friday discourses in Journal NB12.

A saying by Thomas a Kempis could perhaps be used as a mo�o sometime; with respect to Paul he says: Therefore he surrendered everything to God, who knows everything, and defended himself only by means of patience and humility . . . . . Occasionally he defended himself, so that the weak would not take offense at his silence. 3rd book, chapter 36 § 2 or p. 131 in my li�le edition.

348

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 5 1849 344

A Caprice. Poetic Attempt to Demonstrate the Omnipotence of Genius.

5

A pair of lovers has been tragically separated in such a way as to constitute a religious collision, and, be it noted, this religious collision exists only for, and is understood only by, the [male] lover, who understands that God’s punishment of him requires that he give up this love. He himself is suffering almost to the point of despair and madness―he realizes that the girl would absolutely lose her mind if she were to be told that even though in leaving her he had indeed acted like a scoundrel, he was nevertheless a good person―yes, that the entire business was religious― thus, that it was to assuage her that he actually turned himself into a scoundrel, it was his dastardly deed.―One can easily see that this is close to being the most painful of all possible erotic collisions. But what happens[?] After a number of years pass, the situation is transformed so that he now actually dares to be hers―and in the meantime she has been faithful to him in spite of his deception. The moment of understanding has arrived. Dialectically, it can easily be seen that this moment of understanding is close to being absolutely the strangest that could be imagined, precisely because it involves a religious collision, so there is no talk whatever of regret or anything of that sort. The girl is beside herself with bliss. Then he says, “Now if there is anything you want, just say what it is you want, and you shall absolutely have it―I feel myself to be as mighty as a god.” She replies, “Oh, no, there is nothing I want, nothing. If only I may see you, I am happy beyond description.” “Well, those are pretty big words. No, this our important day must not pass unnoticed. Say something, say what you want, some desperate thing. Listen, I have it―what do you think―if you want, if it would make you happy and contribute to embellishing this,

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 5 1849

345

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

our important day, then I will go out and slap the king in the face.” “Oh, but darling, you have indeed gone out of your mind, how can you think of such a thing[?]” No sooner said, however, than done. He happens to be known by the king, who is in fact fond of him. He hurries out to the palace, requests an audience, is granted one, steps in, bows most humbly, and when the king approaches in a gracious manner―he slaps him hard in the face. His Majesty thinks he has gone out of his mind, calls the chamberlain and orders that he be taken away. He says: [“]Just one word, Your Majesty.[”] The king, (impatient and incensed): [“]No, no. Take that person away. He is mad.[”] He: [“]Just one word, Your Majesty, listen to what I have to say, oh, just listen. You have it in your power to make me unhappy―that is the least of it. But if you do not listen to me now, you will miss a witty and interesting situation―and since Your Majesty is a connoisseur, .... isn’t it true, ah, isn’t it true[?][”] The king is molli�ed: “Well, then, speak. But by our royal honor, woe to you if you fail to satisfy me.” Then he asks that the chamberlain leave. This is done. Then he comes daringly close to the king. The king instinctively retreats a step, remembering the slap in his face. He: “Your Majesty need not be afraid; as de�nitely as it had been decided that Your Majesty should have a slap in the face, that is how safe you are now.” The con�dent backwardness of these words almost causes the king to smile, and now the man begins to speak to His Majesty. He tells how he has loved that girl; he depicts her sufferings, his almost insane torment―he moves the king to tears; he depicts the bliss of their understanding―and the king is so moved that he embraces him in tears.a “Whether I forgive you[?]―oh, my friend, entirely, entirely; I thank you―you have given me one of the most sublime mental impressions I have ever experienced.” “Well, then, one more request.” “It is already granted―ask for whatever you want. If you are mad, then you have also made me mad.” “Well, then I ask that Your Majesty instantly get your coach ready; I will now hurry to her and get

349

a

He relates how, almost insane in his bliss, he found this singular way to express his delight: for the sake of her glory and honor, to slap the king in the face.

1

5

350

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 5–7

1849

her ready. Then Your Majesty yourself will arrive and witness the truth―and be witness to our bliss.” “Agreed.” Something of this sort is not impossible. Do not ask a philistine about this, no, ask Aladdin. Incidentally, I would like to present this in order to illuminate from an aesthetic standpoint how in�nitely stupid it is to judge Christ’s miracles solely with respect to their charitable intent, as if the power of the in�nite, which breaks all laws and boundaries, simply were not―si placet―a reasonable basis for the miracle. Thus with the miracle that changes water into wine at a wedding.

If an Arab in the desert suddenly discovered a spring in his tent, so that he could always have spring water in abundance, how fortunate he would consider himself: this is also how it is when a hum. being, who qua sensory being is always extroverted, in the belief that his happiness is to be found outside himself, finally becomes introverted and discovers that the spring lies within him―not to mention when he discovers the spring that is the relationship with God.

346

10

6

15

20

What is wri�en in Galatians 2―through the Law I have died to the Law―corresponds precisely to the way in which I usually present the relationship to “the Exemplar”: “the Exemplar” is to be presented as the requirement, and then it crushes you. Then “the Exemplar,” who is of course Xt, transforms himself into something else, into grace and mercy, and he is precisely the one who reaches out for you in order to support you. But in this way you have of course died to the Exemplar through the Exemplar.

9 si placet] Latin, if you please.

7

25

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 8

1849

351

347

8

see p. 41.

[a]

If the writings about my work as an author are published by a pseudonym, it could be done like this.

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Mag. K’s Work as an Author, as Understood by the Author. Poetic Venture by A-O. Preface. As in a mathematical equation, when one factor is given and another is sought for, so also with this poetic venture. The given is: 1) all the works of the author, with which I have acquainted myself in great detail[;] 2) Mag. K’s personal existence, to which I have paid careful attention from an early period, and which I daresay I know as completely as is possible for a third party. What is sought is: an authorial personality, a unity of inwardness corresponding to the work of the author, which is the given. I understand that an author’s body of work, such as that given here, which everywhere tends toward personality, requires for its de�nitive completion that the author himself be included in the conclusion. But it seems to me that dialectically this is really impossible for Mag. K himself to do, for by doing it himself he would dialectically explode the dialectical structure of the entire body of work by the author. I have now dared to make this poetic venture. The author himself speaks in the �rst person, but bear in mind that this auth. is not Mag. K but my poetic creation. I must certainly beg the pardon of Mag. K for thus venturing right under his nose, so to speak, to understand him poetically or to poetize him. But nothing more than this apology, because in other respects I have poetically emancipated myself from him quite entirely. Indeed, even if he were to declare that my understanding of him was factually untrue with respect to one detail or another, it would not follow from this that it was poetically untrue. And of course the conclusion could also be reversed: ergo, Mag. K has not measured up to or realized what would be poetically correct. A-O.

This transformation or poetic communication is absolutely correct with respect to categories, corresponding to everything that I understood at the time and that can be found written down, most likely in Journal NB11 or NB12: 1) that I am essentially a poet[;] 2) that the writings are my own upbringing[;] 3) that I am sheer re�ection, thus am always placed in retrospection[;] 4) that I am a penitent, and inasmuch as I cannot speak absolutely unreservedly about this, neither can I speak about what corresponds to it: the inwardness of the relationship to God[;] 5) that I have reached my limit; that the turn with the new pseudonym (Anti-Cl.)― and now this new pseudonym (ah, I would like to be amazed at this ingenuity, which, however, is not my own) is the dialectically absolutely consistent expression that I have reached

352

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 8

1849

my limit, that I have also been granted the inconceivable good fortune of entirely understanding my limit, of including my limit in my thinking. Oh, how could I ever suf�ciently thank Governance! In other cases, matters are poetized in such a way that something extra is mendaciously added; here, matters are poetized in such a way that something is mendaciously taken away: the fact that the whole thing is indeed actual. But I am no apostle or anything of that sort. And if I communicate directly here, then all the cautionary rules, etc. will not avail. No, but here there is once again a singular consistency―God knows, it is not my invention, I had not the least notion of it in the beginning―once again, the inversion, as with everything in my life: here, to poetize means mendaciously to remove some extra something; in becoming poetry, it becomes one key lower than actuality. This is how pressure is to be brought to bear on the times. It becomes a purely spiritual pressure. What remains for me, then, is simplicity: quite simply to accept an of�cial position, and now I have the doctrine of sin and grace. If anyone asks me directly about the work as an author, I must say: I cannot speak of it directly, for the problem is that it is my own upbringing, and that nonetheless I myself am the author. Thus I quite simply come forward as the simple person, but I do not take this step with the impetus of the entire authorial project, which would cause the whole thing to remain within the realm of the interesting. The writings are separated from me by the yawning gulf of indirect communication: they are not mine, they belong to something higher. Moreover, this is a frightful boundary skirmish here! It was a poet-existenceb that by a hair’s breadth avoided taking a wrong turn into actuality. But with respect only to the dialectical dif�culties of this con�ict, it seems to me that one could almost become an old man merely by considering that a head has been able to bear it.

Note Especially in view of the fact that I have been wealthy and have thus not been tested in that sort of actuality, and have lived prodigally, which, however, is in turn connected to my productivity and to its poetic impetus; this prodigality has surely made sense, but primarily in poetic fashion.

348 5

10

15

20

25

b

30

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 9–11

1849

353

349

9

5

10

10

15

11

25

30

35

Luther makes a nice distinction when he says that it is not wri�en in the gospel that “your hand shall not kill,” but that “you shall not kill,” thereby showing that it is the thought, the mentality, that is of decisive importance.

The Signi�cance of the Entire Body of Writings is a directing of attention to Christianity. Attention is not to be directed at me, and nonetheless attention is to be directed to the personality or to the signi�cance of personality as something decisive for Christianity. Therefore my personality is certainly utilized, but always in order, at the decisive moment, to point beyond myself: I am not that. To direct attention is to place Christianity in a relationship of possibility to human beings, in order to show them how far we all are from being Christian.

Here one sees quite simply how deceptive official appointments and clerical livings are when all preaching of Xnty is limited to them. Of course many priests preach the requirements of Xnty as vehemently as I do. They speak of the Christian, the true Christian: he is not like Nicodemus; he is not like that rich young man. No, the true Xn gives everything to the poor. And when the priest says this, it makes absolutely no impression―whereas there is panic when I say it. Why? Because in the one case it is of course his living, his office, etc.; therefore no importance is a�ributed to what he says or to the fact that he says it. Whereas it is precisely because I am acting as a private individual that importance is a�ributed to the fact that I say it.

[a]

And this is the curious thing about the difficulty of my life as opposed to the ordinary situation of a priest. A priest most o�en has the difficulty that his own life expresses absolutely nothing of what he preaches. My difficulty is precisely that in a number of ways my life is existentially so extreme that if I were merely to add an explanation, my contemporaries would take hold of it and make me into a sort of apostle. Therefore here, as everywhere, my deception is that I make myself out to be something less than what, humanly speaking, I could estimate my worth to be.

1

5

10

15

354

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 12

1849

The New Pseudonym Anti-Climacus. It was in fact understood from the first moment that the entire literary production called Practice in Christianity was poetic, so that the greatest pains had to taken in order that I not confuse myself with something analogous to an apostle. In general, my hypochondria has also played a role in all the later works; for even though things have undeniably become clearer, they were in fact understood in this way from the beginning. When the work “Come unto Me All You Who Labor etc.” was wri�en, [“]Poetic Venture―Without Authority; For Inward Deepening in Christianity[”] was immediately put on the title page. And then my name was put there. And that was also how it was with the others. But over the course of time it became clear to me (here the best places to check on this are especially journal NB11 or NB12, but most likely NB11) that if possible there must be an even stronger expression of the fact that it was poetic―and that it would be best if this were a new pseudonym. That had become clear to me. Nonetheless I still wanted to wait a while, during which I suffered greatly, constantly overstraining myself on the entire literary production and plagued by the obsessive and desperate idea of pu�ing the entire business into the literature with one, single leap and then leaping aside and disappearing―something that I surely understood, deep down, could not be done but that nevertheless captivated my imagination, so that I would not properly let go of the possibility, even though it became increasingly clear to me that if I was going to get any breathing space, it would have to be broken up. So I finally decided to put the entire literary productivity aside―to seek an official appointment; and then, when that had been done, to publish the completed material gradually, in small portions. So I called on Madvig and Mynster and met with neither of them. And since in another way I was strongly impelled in the opposite direction, I took it as a hint from Governance that I had been about to make a misstep, that I should indeed venture everything. Now came the reaction. I wrote to the printer and gave orders for typese�ers and that “things were to done quickly.” I received word from the printer that everything was ready and could they have the manuscript. At the very moment this happened, I learn that Councillor of State Olsen had died. It made

350

12

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 12–13

5

351

10

15

20

25

30

13 35

40

1849

a strong impression on me; had I known of it before I wrote to the printer, it would have been cause for a postponement. But now, a�er having so o�en been on the verge of doing it, frightfully overtired as I was, I feared that I would be paralyzed if, having taken this step, I now retreated. I was under great strain and slept rather fitfully, and strangely enough, words occurred to me to the effect that I was about to leap to my downfall. In the morning I reconsidered the ma�er. Action had to be taken, that was how I understood it. Then I decided to refer the ma�er entirely to God: to send the first manuscript (The Sickness unto Death) to the printer without saying anything whatever about whether anything else was to be printed. I would now let actuality test me: it was possible that everything could be printed, and it was possible that I could turn aside. Under tension, it became clear to me that it should be pseudonymous, which I had understood earlier but had postponed doing because it could be done at any time. During typese�ing there was some nonsense with Reitzel, which made me extremely impatient. Once again, it occurred to me to take back the entire manuscript, to put it aside and wait yet again and see whether I shouldn’t let everything be printed at the same time and without pseudonymity, for the pseudonymity had not yet been established because the title page had not been printed (in a breach with my customary practice, I had originally given orders that it was to be printed last). I went to the printer. It was too late. The typese�ing of most of it was as good as finished. So the pseudonym was put on it. That is how one must be helped, and helps oneself, when it is so difficult to act.

How fi�ing, in a Christian sense, is the expression [“]to become sober.[”] How rarely is someone ever really found who became sober in such a way that he understood (in the sense of acting accordingly) that in the Christian sense the least actual [self-]denial is much greater than the most daring venture of the most eminent intellect, even in connection with disseminating Christianity and the like. The fact is that we are a�er all unable to form a proper notion of God’s sublimity. We always come running with our aesthetic

355

356

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 13–16

1849

quantifying, with the surprising, the great, the far-reaching, etc.―whereas God is simply so infinitely sublime that the only thing he looks at is the ethical. 352

That an individual has been right in opposition to “the crowd”―yes, that has been seen. But that he has received justice―that has not been seen.

14

Stick to the established order, be like the others, why do you want to be conceited and imagine that you are different from or greater than the others, etc., etc. Well, that’s all very well, and in a certain sense I entirely approve of such talk. But of course extraordinary people have in fact existed―how did they become so? Yes, this is rlly a cruel business. Most frequently it has surely happened like this: They have painfully felt their difference from others from their earliest days and in the most unhappy fashion. These words―Why won’t you be like the others?―have had a cruel sound for them, rather as it if it were said to Sarah in the book of Tobit, “Why don’t you marry like the others” (see Fear and Trembling). Thus, through sufferings and torment they are prevented from becoming like the others―and then, perhaps a�er a long time, this difference of theirs has in turn transfigured itself into an exceptional difference.

15

15

20

25

The error of the Middle Ages was that poverty, the unmarried state, etc., were regarded as things that in and of themselves could please God. This has never been Xnty’s view. Xnty has commended poverty, the unmarried state, etc. in order that hum. beings, by having as li�le as possible to do with finite things, could all the be�er serve the truth. And indeed, it is certainly clear that a man who can live on roots, an unmarried man, etc. both has more time to serve the truth and can do so more unreservedly.

16

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 16–18

1849

357

But people have found it easiest to dismiss the entire ma�er by pretending that the error of the Middle Ages was Xnty’s doctrine.

353

17 5

10

15

20

25

30

18

On Spiritual Trial Precisely because that which in the stricter sense is Xn is in many ways related inversely to what is universally hum.: hmnly speaking, Christian love is like crueltyb; compassion is a higher form of rigor and yet is nonetheless compassion, except that here there is a sort of dialectical middle term, for otherwise what is Christian and what is simply hum. would end up as the same thing: Precisely because things are this way, the terror of spiritual trial is that because a hum. being feels so weak, he reverses course back to the merely hum. and it almost seems to him that he must repent precisely for what is most decisively Christian, as if it were pure and simple cruelty, pure and simple rigor, pure and simple pride, etc. Thus does God have the Xn in his power. The school of spiritual trial is a frightful school. Spiritual trial can also express itself in such a way that it seems to a person that he should repent―as if it were a sin―for ever having ventured so far out, for ever having come into contact with spiritual trial. Because the person who does not involve himself with God in a decisive way is eo ipso free of spiritual trial. Indeed, in weaker moments it does seem as if venturing so far out was pride. And of course one ought to repent pride. And yet it is precisely Xnty to involve oneself decisively with God. Spiritual trial is frightful. Yet I owe it to the truth to a�est to the fact that an intimation of a higher and more blessed understanding nonetheless constantly smolders within it. It is almost like the torment of having a word on the tip of one’s tongue that one cannot manage to speak. One senses the blessedness―but for the time being it expresses itself only in the most terrible torment.

Deep down, peop. would rather have a fanatic who says that he himself is the ideal (you can either deck him out in finery or quickly get rid of him, saying rightly: Of course, he wanted to be 22 eo ipso] Latin, by that very fact.

[a]

On Spiritual Trial.

b

and yet again is love

1

358

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 18–19

1849

Xt) than someone who honestly strives, who humbly says that he is nothing more than a poet and admits how infinitely far behind he is. His times cannot be done with him so quickly or so soon; he can become the continuing unrest of the times. 5

The New Pseudonym (Anti-Cl.) That there is a pseudonym is the qualitative expression of the fact that it is a poet-communication, that it is not I who speaks but another, and that I am being spoken to just as much as are the others; it is as if a spirit were speaking, while I of course have the burden of being the editor. What he has to say is something we hum. beings would rather forget. But it must nevertheless be heard. Now, it is not as if everyone must do it, or that blessedness is made dependent on my doing it, oh no. Indeed, I confess that my life does not express it either; but I humble myself under it, I regard it as an indulgence, and my life has an unrest. In relation to ethical-religious communication (that is, with respect to presenting the requirement of the ideal―which is different from grace and from what is connected to grace, different from it, i.e., precisely by tightening the rigor so that one feels the need for grace, though without being permi�ed to take it in vain) I am not permi�ed to communicate more than that I am the person speaking, thus in my own, factual first person, nothing more than what corresponds existentially to my own life, at least approximately. If I situate the requirement any higher than this, I must express that this presentation is something poetic. It is quite appropriate that I present it, for perhaps I can move someone else to strive farther, and I myself am to define myself as someone striving in relation to it―to this extent different from an ordinary poet, to whom it of course absolutely does not occur that he himself should strive in relation to the ideality he presents. In other respects, what is so terrifying here is that the requirements of ideality are presented by people who never think in the least way about whether their lives express it or do not express it at all. That I have taken notice of this is shown by the fact that I call it something poetic―although I do strive. That the communication is poetic can either be expressed by the speaker, saying in his own person: This is a poetic communication, that is, What I am saying is not poetic, because what I am saying is simply the truth, but the fact that I am saying it is what is

354

19

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 19

5

355 10

15

20

25

30

35

40

1849

poetic; or he can do it qua author with the assistance of pseudonyms, as I have done now for the first time in order to make the ma�er quite clear. But the difference between such a speaker, author―and an ordinary poet is that the speaker and the author define themselves as striving in relation to what is communicated. And this entire distinction about poetic communication is in turn related to the fundamental Christian category, that Xnty is an existence-communication and is not―as people have meaninglessly and unchristianly made Xnty into―a doctrine, so that the question is merely what it would be in relation to a doctrine: whether or not my presentation of it is truthful, as, e.g., with respect to Plato’s philosophy. No, the question is: Does my own life express what is communicated or does it not[?] As long as my life expresses what is communicated, I am a teacher; where this is not the case I have to add: What I say is certainly true, but what is poetic is that I am saying it; thus it is a poetic communication, which nonetheless has its significance both for keeping me alert and striving, and, if possible, for hastening others onward. In piece no. 1 (“Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden[”]), the qualitative rigor it contains is in one sense― the Christian sense―an untrue principle (because it is almost exclusively metaphysical): that Xt came to the world because he was the absolute, not out of human compassion or any other reason―a principle to which corresponds the absolute: [“]You shall.[”] On the other hand, however, Christianly speaking this is the case: Xt came to the world out of love in order to save the world. The fact that he had to, as it were, explode the world, that, hmnly speaking, it became, hmnly speaking, enormous suffering to associate oneself with him, is certainly because he was the absolute. But joy over the fact that he came in order to save must entirely vanquish all this suffering.―These two principles (He came because he was the absolute; and he came out of love in order to save the world) are the difference between whether Xnty is preached in “the Law” or in “grace.” In writing no. 2 (“Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended[”]) the qualitative rigor is the necessity with which offense is placed together with everything Christian. In writing no. 3 ([“]From On High He Will Draw All to Himself[”]) the qualitative rigor is the necessity with which degradation is linked to being a Christian: that absolutely every true Xn is degraded in this world.

359

360

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 20–21

1849

The times were strict with me, but I was accustomed to seeking and finding my consolation in Christianity. Naturally, the more bi�er people made my life, the less ordinary priestly pra�le was able to help. I had to search deeper―and, thank God, I indeed found blessedness, deeper and deeper. But by doing this, my presentation of Christianity became increasingly rigorous, for the more profound the consolation, the greater the rigor. So if I have been overly strict, whose fault is it? Truly, not mine. I had never dreamed of becoming so strict―I, who was compassion and sympathy. But through strictness they taught me to immerse myself more in Christianity―and then the strictness recoiled back on my contemporaries. Furthermore, in the beginning I concealed within myself a profound doubt, a profundity shared by scarcely any of my contemporaries. My thought was to conceal it, to keep the ma�er very quiet, making sure that I myself come to terms with it, but never to communicate anything I might think would merely disturb people, causing anxiety or unrest. What happened? At a number of points, as a result of the abuse I have suffered, this doubt of mine has come to the surface. True, it was never reported as doubt―no, insofar as it was reported at all, it was reported only to the extent that I had conquered it with a victorious faith. But all the same, the question remains as to whether the whole business has not escalated too far. If this is the case, then here, once again, can be seen the result of the abuse a stupid age heaped upon a person who, as an author, was truly a benefactor. It’s so jolly to treat a pers. with insolence―and then cry Alas! and Woe! when the affair suddenly becomes too strict for them. Nonetheless, I hope to God that this has not happened―there is of course always a higher power who has watched over me, and all my own guidance of things is a�er all only a bit of fun.

20

Fundamentally, all of us have too mild a notion of God, like an old man whom one can make listen to reason. Truly, come out a bit farther, out where the blessedness is indeed infinitely greater―but also where the rigor is quite otherwise. Imagine one of those mighty Oriental potentates―and watch as one of his servants, the most important of them, approaches him: what

21

5

356

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 21–24

5

10

1849

361

expressions of subservience! And yet this is only a metaphor. But, as mentioned, out there, farther out―then, when one frightfully comes to think (indeed, perhaps only a�erward) that at some point one has incurred his wrath (alas, even if it perhaps was only an anxiety-laden misunderstanding, so that one has not in fact erred): then it seems to a person that God will not look upon him again for 70,000 years. 70,000 years! Ah, for him it is indeed only 7 days, but the poor, wretched hum. being, languishing in fear and trembling! And yet, yet, that this fearsome ruler―that he is my father, yes, my father; that I, when I walk in wonder under the bright night sky and behold the stars, that I dare say: All this is my father’s!

357

22 15

23 20

25

24

35

People have made Xnty into too much of a consolation, forgetting that it is a requirement. Woe unto the flabby preachers! The consequences of this will be all the more frightful for the person who is to proclaim Xnty once again.

With respect to the requirement of ideality, it can be proper to present it as something higher than one oneself is, existentially, provided―be it noted―that one make an admission concerning oneself. In this case it can be proper, for one must of course express striving. But with respect to “grace” it would be nonsense if one proclaimed grace for others but denied that it was for oneself. For grace is related to receiving; it is not related to my worthiness, but to my unworthiness. I can speak of grace without any embarrassment whatever, for in so doing I am also speaking indirectly of my own unworthiness.

The fact that Jesus died for my sins certainly expresses how great grace is, but the fact that it is only on this condition that God will involve himself with me also expresses how great my sins are, how infinitely distant I am from God. One can therefore say that this is an expression of majesty,a of God’s majesty: that a sacrifice of this sort, a middle term of this sort, is required so that I can dare turn to him, so that he will involve himself with me. Therefore “the human being” could not invent the atonement in

a

or respect

1

362

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 24–26

1849

this deepest sense, for no hum. being could on his own think so sublimely of God’s sublimity. Only God himself knows how infinitely sublime he is. And what is remarkable is that it is precisely when God wants to express his condescension that he also indirectly expresses his infinite sublimity. I am willing to let myself be reconciled with hum. beings, he says (what condescension!), on the condition that my son lets himself be sacrificed for you―if this is the only condition, what an infinite distance of sublimity!

5

Generally, “the priests” rarely speak of “the martyrs,” but if they were to speak of them, in order to be consistent with the rest of their pra�le they must every so o�en present cautionary examples of those who “by reading in the dangerous book, the N.T., ended by making themselves unhappy,” i.e., they became martyrs. And one must also say that, humanly speaking, no one makes himself as unhappy as does a martyr for the truth.

25

This much is certain: the priestly talk that sentimentally wishes it were contemporary with Xt shall certainly come to an end. Here my formula is: I will be honest; I will admit that had I been contemporary with you, I, too, would surely have betrayed you. This, incidentally, has already been expressed in the first collection of Friday discourses.

26

358 15

20

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 27

1849

363

359

27

[a]

see p. 10

The Pseudonymous Publication of the Writings on My Work as an Author.

5

10

15

But then it is not necessary to publish them pseudonymously; it is not even proper to do so, inasmuch as the matter does not become suf�ciently simple. The category: that I myself am the one who has been brought up, that the whole thing is my upbringing, is decisive enough. The �rst idea of publishing all the writings (including those that have become pseudonymous) in my name and in one volume together with the writings about my work as an author was indeed unclear (just as it was impatient), because the writings on my work as an auth. only go as far as the Friday discourses in Christian Discourses; thus no view is communicated concerning all the new literary production that would be included in the same volume. No. The new pseudonym, Anti-Cl.―which, with respect to dialectics, also contains a new dialectical effort that is to be completed with the edifying discourse on “grace”―furnishes “the halt.” And then the communication concerning the work as an author is located within the halt.

364

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 28

1849 360

On Myself The thought of publishing the entire literary production under my name and in one single leap― thus with the greatest possible impetus―and then to jump back, without really ever knowing where, without wanting to take into account the consequences that such a step would have for me, except that I would live in seclusion: this was indeed sheer, desperate impatience. It has never been my task to destroy the established order, but always to breathe inwardness into it. Indeed, I saw what was wrong with this at the very beginning, but it momentarily tempted my imagination and was related to a poet’s impatience. My task has always been difficult. Taking aim at impudent scholarship, impudent culture, etc., that wants to go further than Xnty, I jack up the requirements of ideality so high―and at the same time I also have a great responsibility, just as I have the most vibrant sympathy for the common man, women, etc., lest I cause them anxiety. Generally speaking, woman is and ought to be a corrective in proclaiming the ethical-religious. One must not make it rigorous for men, and then have another kind for women; but in making it rigorous one must also have respect for woman as an authority and use this authority to temper things. And as far as that is concerned, perhaps a woman―precisely because she has fewer thoughts, but also fewer half-thoughts than a man, and consequently more feeling, imagination, and passion―perhaps she is very capable of li�ing the burden.

28

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 29–30

1849

365

361

29

5

10

15

30

25

30

35

40

In another journal, I have directed a�ention to this difference: that whereas in worldly ascent one always wishes and strives to climb yet another higher step, the opposite is the case with respect to godly ascent, where at every higher step, the person who has been called prays for himself because he understands very well how, hmnly speaking, the suffering becomes greater and greater. This is also why the formula for the lives of these called people is this: when the last lap is to be run, when the last step is to be ascended, it is typically with the help of repentance for having wanted to avoid it. This it how it was with the Apostle Peter’s denial. If there is a step that is too high for a hum. being and must be reached, this is also the last strength a person has: repentance for having wanted to avoid it.

Ordinarily, the religious ought to be kept equally lenient and rigorous. God wants to be the ruler, but he wants to deal with a person as cautiously and carefully as possible, making use of grace, concessions, etc. To suffer ought to be a joy, a ma�er of honor; a person comes and asks God for permission, and God says, Yes, surely, my li�le friend.[a] Things are different with “the apostle”: He is compelled. Here, once again I understand absolutely why it is so important that I restrain myself and make every effort to prevent my being confused with something a la an apostle, precisely because I can provide a point from which one can indeed get something of a glimpse of an apostle’s qualifications. But what confusion, if I myself were guilty of causing the mix-up. It is, however, also characteristic of me that Socrates has made such a deep impression on me. There is something Socratic about me, one could say that.

[a]

Naturally it does not follow from this that one cannot be a sufferer. On the contrary, in the deepest sense one can indeed suffer indescribably, also have one’s thorn in the flesh, but nonetheless, assuming that this suffering cannot be taken away, one can take joy in being permi�ed to work and live for an idea in this way.

1

5

10

366

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 30–32

1849

Indirect communication was my natural category. Precisely as a result of what I experienced, of what I went through and thought through last summer concerning direct communication, I have produced a direct communication (the piece about my work as an author, with the category: the whole affair is my upbringing) and in addition have gained a deeper understanding of indirect communication, the new pseudonymity. I think there is something inexplicably felicitous in the juxtaposition Climacus/Anti-Cl.; in it, I recognize myself and my nature entirely, so if someone else had invented it, I would think he had spied on my essence.―The credit for this does not belong to me, for I had not originally had it in mind.

362

10

15

The category of my work is to make peop. aware of Christianity, but that is why it is always said: I’m not Christian―for otherwise there is confusion. My task is in the true sense of the term to deceive peop. into the religious obligation that they have cast off. But I have no authority. Instead of authority, I employ precisely the opposite: I say, The whole affair is my upbringing. This again is a genuinely Socratic invention. As he was ignorant, so here, instead of being the teacher, I am myself the person who is being brought up.

31

To a�ain “actuality” in the religious way, is simply to put one’s personal relationship with God right into actuality, without being covered by the objectivity of a doctrine about the believer in genrl, without the cover of an official position, without speaking of how the believer refers everything to God, but saying, I have taken counsel with God and am acting with confidence in God. He does not say: The believer believes thus and such―rather: I

32

20

25

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 32–34

363 5

33 10

15

20

25

1849

367

believe thus and such, and by virtue of this faith of mine, I am taking action in this concrete situation. Then actuality has been a�ained; then God can come; then the spell is broken; then the illusion is destroyed: God can come to communicate with actuality.

Grace. The fact is that grace is not a cut-and-dried decision once and for all; a person needs grace again in relation to grace. Think of a pers. He is promised grace, the gracious forgiveness of all his sins, God’s mercy―good, but tomorrow is another day, and the day a�er tomorrow, and perhaps he will live 50 years. Now comes the difficulty: from this moment on, does he make use of every moment in a manner worthy of grace[?] Alas, no. So grace is needed yet again in relation to grace. The easiest thing is to die; the difficult thing is to live. In grace everything is intensified and concentrated―the situation of death is still an element. But when I am to live, the unending decision is once again dialectical, as in this situation: that grace is needed in relation to grace. In other words, life is a striving.

[a]

Grace.

1

[a] Concerning the Preface to “Practice in Xnty.”

34 30

35

This, too, was a part of my task: to present Christianity at so high a level that I judge myself―and then, quite consistently, to do so [i.e., judge] myself. This is what has been done in the original preface to Practice in Xnty. The original preface is indeed the right one; a dra� of another one that is on a scrap of paper with Practice in Christianity is not to be used. Thus it happened in that preface. It is also lenient. The pseudonym is rigorous: he judges―whom? Me, the editor. Though I myself acknowledge this in the preface.

[b]

The Arrangement of the Prefaces to Practice in Christianity. Piece no. 1 retains the original preface. The following preface will be used in pieces no. 2 and no. 3, reprinted in each one. Preface. In this work the requirement for being a Xn is forced up so high that it passes judgment on my life,

5

10

368 1

5

10

15

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 34–36

that I am not one, even though I strive. Therefore it is a pseudonym who speaks. But it indeed ought to be spoken, presented, heard; from a Christian point of view there must be no reduction of the requirement instead of making an admission and a confession regarding myself. It ought to be said; and I understand this as being spoken to me alone―that I might be kept striving. S. K.

1849

Right! Here I once again recognize my nature. There is a distant echo of irony’s sadness. And the contrast with the manner in which the awakened genrlly comport themselves―judging everyone except themselves―is also ironic, whereas in this case no one is judged but me.―It is spiritual struggle.

364

5

[c]

see 55, middle, in this journal.

[a]

see p. 55 bo�om of page

If, instead of being in character and protesting against the public and proposing the single individual, I had lectured, spoken, wri�en something to the public about “the single individual”―yes, then it would have sunk into people. Here one sees the difference between ethical reduplication and lecturing. Ethical reduplication transforms into action; therefore it requires a sacrifice. In lecturing, one appears to say the same thing―and is a success.

35

The Relation: Possibility―Actuality

36

Indeed, the infinite difference betw. understanding something in possibility and understanding the same thing in actuality cannot be expressed more definitely than this: Think of the apostles! Of course, they willed as honestly and sincerely as possible. Xt has told them in advance what was to happen― foretold it in order that they not be offended. And then, when it became actuality, they were nonetheless offended.

25

10

15

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 36–38

5

365 10

37

20

1849

369

The fact is this. When I understand something in possibility, I remain essentially unchanged, remain in the old situation and make use of my imagination. When it becomes actuality, then it is I who am changed, and then the question is whether I can preserve myself. With respect to understanding something in possibility, what is important is that I make every effort with my imagination; with respect to understanding the same thing in actuality, I am relieved of making any effort with my imagination; it is situated very close to me, only all too close; it has swallowed me up, as it were, and now the question is whether I can save myself from it.

Just as in relation to Providence and Governance―or, rather, in relation to what they do―what I do, whether I am an emperor or a matchstick maker, etc., is almost always a joke, as it were: so, too, in relation to the atonement. Xt’s atonement, his suffering and death, is everything, and it transforms the li�le bit I do almost into a joke; whether I reform the whole world or do my job as a manservant, it is all the same, for Xt’s atonement is infinitely everything.

25

38

30

35

On “The Sickness unto Death” Though perhaps there ought to have been a tiny li�le postscript by the editor, as originally intended, e.g.: Editor’s Postscript. This book is as if wri�en by a physician; I, the editor, am not the physician, I am one of the sick. As mentioned, this was the original intention; indeed, the various dra�s of such a postscript have been lying in the desk since then. But the fact is that at that time I myself did not yet have as deep an understanding of the significance of the new pseudonym as I now do. And furthermore (this is also

[a]

On The Sickness unto Death.

1

370

1

[a]

see p. 50 in this journal.

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 38–40

1849

noted in the journal from the period when The Sickness unto Death was in press), I was afraid that it would be misunderstood in various ways, as though I myself had become fearful and wanted to step aside, and so forth. Now I understand entirely that in connection with the new pseudonym Anti-Cl. there must always be an editor’s preface of this sort, in which I say: I am one who is striving. Xndom must be judged in some way―aber in such a way that it is I who am judged. This is, if you will, a sort of heroism that corresponds to my nature: a unity of rigor and leniency.

Possibility and Actuality see p. 52. We all weep when the priest preaches about becoming reconciled with one’s enemy. And look, in actuality, seeking reconciliation is regarded as effrontery. Thus Councillor of State Olsen regarded it “as unheard-of effrontery,” became furious about it, or was when he came home.

5

366

39

15

The 10 Lepers.

40

This gospel text, or rather, the way in which this gospel text is genrlly preached about, once again shows how li�le people rlly understand Christianity as something present, how li�le we take notice of the situation. Thus people speak very genrlly about ingratitude; people forget the specific situation: that by thanking Xt they [the lepers] of course exposed themselves to mockery for his sake; people forget that the priests (to whom they went according to Xt’s word) would in the name of God naturally have done everything to prevent them from being grateful to Xt. Generally speaking, I could almost be tempted to regard this as a test that Xt poses for them in saying, Go to the priests and show yourselves to them. For of course he surely knew that the priests would say anything to them to prevent them from thanking Xt, making it into a crime against God, an ungodliness.

20

8 aber] German, but.

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 41 41

5

367

15

20

25

30

35

40

1849

Luther’s Doctrine of Faith actlly corresponds to the transformation that takes place when a person becomes a man and is no longer a youth; his doctrine of faith is the religiousness of manhood. When one is a youth, it still seems as though it is possible to a�ain the ideal, if only one strives honestly and to the utmost of one’s abilities. There is, I daresay, a childlike relation of equality between myself and the Exemplar, if only I will it to the utmost of my abilities; here lies the truth of the Middle Ages, which believed so piously that the ideal could be a�ained by actually giving everything to the poor, entering a monastery, etc. But the religiousness of manhood is raised one power higher, and it is recognizable by the very circumstance that it feels itself to be one stage farther away from the ideal. As the individual develops, God becomes more and more infinite for him; he feels himself to be farther and farther away from God. Then the doctrine of the Exemplar can no longer simply hold first place. Then faith comes first, Xt as gi�. The ideal becomes so infinitely elevated that, if my efforts are supposed to resemble the ideal, all of them are transformed for me into an insane nothing or into a sort of God-fearing joke, even if I strive honestly. This is expressed as follows: I rest in faith alone. The youth does not notice how enormous the task is; he starts right off in the pious illusion that he will surely succeed. The older person grasps with infinite depth the distance between himself and the ideal―and then “the faith” must intervene first of all, as that in which he actlly rests, the faith that restitution has been made, the faith that I am saved by faith alone. Thus Luther is entirely right; this is a turning point in the development of religiousness. But the error in the religiousness of our time is that people have made faith into inwardness to such a degree that it has actlly disappeared; that life is given permission, mir nichts and Dir nichts, to behave in sheer worldly fashion, and that an assurance about faith has been substituted for faith. In part, this was how I previously understood my own position, by understanding Luther, but now I have come to understand it more fully. I, too, have been a youth, and it seemed to me as though the ideal was much closer, until I was humbled in the deepest sense under the ideal―and then the doctrine of “grace” truly had to show itself to me. On the other hand, all my 34 mir nichts and Dir nichts] German, simply, without further ado.

371 [a]

Luther’s Doctrine of Faith, or Luther as point de vüe and my understanding of myself.

1

5

372

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 41–42

1849

polemics against the whole modern humbug were and still are correct. As with the individual hum. being, so does the entire race need repetitions, or tutors who recapitulate the lesson, in order to preserve continuity. Geniuses are recapitulators of this sort. They are developed much more slowly than other peop.; they actually run through the basic forms of existence that world history has undergone. It is precisely here that their significance as correctives is to be found. Although geniuses prophetically display what is to come, they do so precisely by means of a more profound memory of what has been gone through. All development is indeed not a retreat, but a going-back, and this is primitivity. The earnestness of youth is immediately to begin bona �de to want to resemble the ideal. The earnestness of the older person is to situate faith in between, as the expression of respect for the qualitative difference betw. all his striving and the ideal. Modernity is humbug, assisted by the transformation of faith into fictitious inwardness.

In one sense, I think the relation of Xt as Redeemer to the believer is like this. When an adult says to children: Now, I will take care of everything, just remain completely calm and trust me―and then he becomes angry with the children if instead of being happy and le�ing him take care of them, they themselves want to take care of things. This is how I think Xt qua Redeemer becomes angry when the believer wants to busy himself in any way with atoning for his sin. No! The atonement is what is decisive. And then the other aspect emerges: an honest effort, simply out of joy over the atonement―an effort that, note well, one nonetheless regards almost as a jest―however honest and earnest it may be, as a jest, if it is supposed to be any sort of atonement. Human striving does not in any way bring about atonement. But joy over the atonement, over the fact that restitution has been made―that is the joy 17 bona fide] Latin, in good faith.

5

10

15

368 20

42 25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 42–44

5

10

43

15

1849

373

that produces an honest effort. More or less as when Luther says, It is not good works that make a good man, but a good man who does good works, i.e., the man is what has become habitual, something more than all the individual actions. And, indeed, according to Luther, one becomes a good man through faith. Thus, first comes faith. It is not through a virtuous life, good works, and the like, that one attains faith. No, it is faith that causes one truly to do good works.

To the passage (in the discourse “The High Priest” Heb. 4) that gold is virtue, that might is right, that the crowd is truth, could have been added that whatever results is the judgment. It is the same type of category as the others.

369

44

20

25

30

A Further Step in Relation to “Her.” I have wri�en a le�er to Schlegel with a le�er to her enclosed, and have received his reply and the other le�er unopened. Everything is found in a packetb in her cabinet, in a white envelope with the inscription: [“]About Her.[”] It was Nov. 19th. This is the situation. Inasmuch as she may perhaps have thought that on the occasion of her father’s death I presumably might seek a rapprochement (and I possibly have some data supporting this), I took up the matter once again. For the second time, I let a poet try his hand at the task and on her situation, and discovered that there was a possibility of a sisterly relationship, which would certainly make her

[a]

Because I have never known the date of the breaking of my engagement, I made an a�empt to figure it out. This a�empt is on a scrap of paper in the older packet, wrapped in gray paper, lying in the li�le drawer of my desk, on which is wri�en: To be destroyed a�er my death.

1

b

10

In the same packet is also a book in quarto format: “My Relationship to ‘Her’ Aug. 24th 49. somewhat poetical.” And wrapped in a li�le packet of gray paper on which is wri�en “To be burned a�er my death,” lying in the li�le drawer of my desk, there is an earlier and similar view of my relationship to her―concerning whom there are also a number of entries in the journals from last year (48) and this year (49), probably in the older ones as well.

5

15

20

374 1

5

[c] A copy of my le�er to Schlegel and the le�er to her that had been enclosed with it, are to be found in an envelope in one of the two small desk drawers. [d]

10

15

I also find it remarkable that the Councillor of State’s death took place at precisely the same time I had the idea of turning away from the authorship and entering into the character of a religious author from the beginning. See a scrap of paper lying in journal NB13: that when I enter into the character of the entire authorship as religious, a dedication would essentially relate to “her.” e

20

all the while with the understanding that her marriage―in particular to Schlegel―was the greatest benefaction toward me. [f]

25

30

Yes, though she also has a great responsibility toward me because of her misuse of religious entreaties; in a certain sense it is indeed also her responsibility that in her desperate recklessness she pushed the ma�er so far a�er it had been decided in a fashion that was certainly humiliating for me―a responsibility that rlly became clear when she got engaged so soon therea�er. [g]

35

40

45

If it had been possible, the reconciliation with “her” would have taken place simultaneously with the Three Discourses (The High Priest, The Tax Collector, The Woman Who Was a Sinner), where the preface―for the sake of recapitulating the entire body of writings―contains a repetition of the preface to the Two Edifying Discourses from 1843, a book I know she read at the time.

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 44

1849

happy―something that would make me happy.e Furthermore, the entire ma�er could easily come up again if I have to repeat it some day qua author. My conflict was a religious one. The deception about being a scoundrel was done for her sake. But she let herself get carried away by her despairing declaration of love and about wanting to die, her religious entreaties, etc.: she who is now married―and I unmarried. I submi�ed to that view; entries concerning this will be found in journal NB12. So I took action. The decisive considerations for me in this connection were: 1) An entire life is a�er all perhaps too great a criterion for a woman. It can give me satisfaction to preserve all my devotion to her, to let my life as an author glorify her name, etc.―but how can it rlly help her if she or I must first be dead[?] And what does a woman rlly care about historical renown[?] Such fidelity is almost cruel; it would indeed be better for her if I were a li�le less faithful but she got some good out of it while she was still alive. 2) I was afraid that it could be pride on my part that kept me from acting, that I was unwilling to expose myself to unpleasantness of that sort. Well, then I did not dare refrain from taking action. I knew that refraining from contacting her could not be because of my pride; I am only all too certain of that. No, the sore point was rlly Schlegel, of course. Therefore I turned to him, and he indeed made use of the occasion for a moralizing outburst. Now it is done. Thank God, I did it. For later on, I might have thought, You should have done it― and then it would be too late.―Now I can breathe. All the outbursts of that sort make the ma�er easier for me. Her pleas and pious entreaties―yes, that was powerful.

Moreover, it is impossible to do anything. I dare not enlist my personality. To approach her personally―even if she merely hears my voice, I run the

370

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 44

1849

First part of NB14:44, with five marginal notes.

375

376

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 44

1849

La�er part of NB14:44, with note NB13:44.h, which starts in the margin and continues beneath the main entry.

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 44–46

1849

377

risk that she could understand my approach in the most improper way before I make it clear to her what I want. 373

5

45

Now the ma�er is decided. For it is quite certain―without Schlegel’s consent, not one word. And he has spoken as definitively as possible. It is up to him.

It is terrifying to proclaim the Law, for if it is done vigorously and truthfully it always recoils worst on oneself[;] the person who is closest at hand is always hit hardest, and one must be most rigorous with oneself. Proclaiming grace is a joy.

15

46

20

25

30

Luther makes a good distinction (in the sermon on the son of the widow of Nain): the gospel teaches us not what we ought to do, but where we are to find the strength to do what we ought to do. But at the same time the doctrine of the Exemplar emerges once again. For example, there is no reduction in self-denial, but the gospel teaches me to believe that God and Xt help me toward self-denial. “Grace” actlly relates to the juxtaposition of temporality and eternity that constitutes a hum. being. If a body is rotated too rapidly, spontaneous combustion may result. It is similar when eternity and the requirement of ideality simultaneously collide with a person and make their demands on him: then he may despair, lose his mind, etc. In such a situation he must cry out to God: Give me time, give me time. And this is grace―indeed, this is why temporality is called the time of grace.

[h]

And naturally, not one word to her about convincing Schlegel of my idea. No, never! I understand about respecting a marriage. I had devised for her the possibility and had looked forward to delighting her with it, enhancing her marriage―and only God knows whether I had not required too much of myself by squandering myself in this way―it was to have been a gi� from Schlegel to her. If he had understood me, if he had believed me, then I would almost have become a servant in his hands.―But now the ma�er is rlly decided. And never have I felt so light and happy and free with respect to this ma�er, so entirely myself again, as just now, a�er having taken this sacrificial step; for now I understand that I have God’s consent to let her go and spare myselfa Nov. 21st a

complying only with her last request: “to think of her now and then,” and in this way preserving her for history and eternity.

1

5

10

15

20

25

378

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 46–47

1849

In eternity there rlly cannot be any question of grace. For indeed, in one sense, temporality consists simply of anguish―and yet in the divine sense, it is the time of grace. Faith, which relates to grace and grasps it, intervenes redemptively. In faith there is rest. Faith relates itself to grace, and behold: Now, precisely the opposite situation emerges; now, in one sense, there is nothing whatever to run a�er―everything has indeed been done. Here is the atonement, the restitution. Only in this way can a poor hum. being continue striving. In order to obtain the courage to strive, he must repose in the blessed assurance that everything is already decided, that he has won―in faith and through faith. Then he begins to strive, but faith, relating itself to grace, is always instantly ready to strengthen him in patient striving, always granting time, the time of grace. Ah, but if even a hum. father or mother has plenty of trouble dealing with a child―what miracle of patience it is for God in Heaven―or when one is God in Heaven―to have patience with a hum. being’s striving! 1

5

10

15

374

10

15

20

25

[c]

Of course, it is quite another matter when the immediate person, sensing something extraordinary within himself, boldly ventures forth, fully convinced that only one outcome is possible: triumph. And look, the opposite happens―that is, he does triumph, but in a spiritual way, which is to succumb. This is something entirely different, for he had not been dialectical, he had not understood beforehand that the extraordinary is dialectical, that a tiny change has to be made, that perhaps the extraordinary is so extraordinary that the adequate expression of it is to succumb, to be regarded as madness, etc.

Ah, but it is very fatiguing to be located at this discrimen: to understand and to sense that something extraordinary has been granted to a person, and then to understand that at the instant it is to be put into the actual world, there is a line like a hair’s breadth that determines whether it is to be directly expressed as the extraordinary and become the object of admiration―or is to be expressed in the opposite way and be rejected by the times. The higher one is, the more glaring appear these contrasts, which never emerge in relation to the ordinary sort of undertakings that lie within the sphere of the probable. And then, to continue working for the same thing with the same equanimity, while alternately seeing 28 discrimen] Latin, boundary, divide, turning point.

47

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 47–50 the possibility of the opposite outcome. But here lies precisely that exercise through which the mind is turned away from the outcome and is turned toward God in obedience to him. 5

48

375 10

49 15

20

50 25

30

35

A nice poem that I read in Baader’s Fermenta, part 5, p. 54. Durch der Welt Noth Und der Welt Spo� Bringt Dich Dein Go� Aus der Welt Koth!

“Grace” is usually understood as a dead, onceand-for-all decision, rather than as something related to a striving, because, to recall a saying of Baader, it is an advance payment. But it is always difficult to understand talk of a striving, and, in a certain sense, for Christianity the easiest situation is death, simply because there can then no longer be any question of a striving. For the thief on the cross it was also a relief in one sense, because there was no question of any striving.

The fact that grace is free finds perfect expression in the New Testament. An heir has no merit, not the least―everything is the benefaction of the testator. Now, if one examines the ma�er only from the outside―that is, that the heir is permi�ed to do whatever he wishes with his inheritance―then the whole ma�er has been taken in vain. In situations of the spirit―that is, where the inheritance is not something external―then “faith” is the prerequisite for becoming (and for becoming aware that one is) an heir; the duty connected with the inheritance is something essential―here again is the concept of striving. 8 Durch … Koth!] German, Through the poverty of the world and the mockery of the world, your God brings you out of the excrement of the world!

1849

379

380

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 51–54

1849

Hamann rightly says: As “Law” annuls “grace,” so does “to comprehend” annul “to believe.” This is my thesis, of course. But in Hamann it is merely an aphorism, whereas I have fought through it, or fought it out of the whole of given philosophy and culture, to the thesis: to comprehend, that one cannot comprehend faith, or (this is the more ethical and God-fearing aspect), to comprehend that one must not comprehend faith.

51

“If God is with us, who can be against us.” This looks so easy and straightforward. But of course in genuine Lutheran fashion one must say: It is precisely when God is with us that the whole world tends to be against us. But―and here comes the consolation―but what this means is that when God is with us, the opposition of the whole world can accomplish nothing against us. What the apostle means by these words, [“]who can be against us,[”] is obviously [“]who can be against us in such a way that he was the stronger.[”] Thus the words correspond to that passage: The one who is in us is stronger than the one who is in the world.

52

In the magnificent palace church, a handsome court preacher, the cultivated public’s chosen one, steps before a select circle of the distinguished and cultured, and preaches movingly on the words of the apostle, [“]God chose the lowly and the despised[”]―and no one laughs.

53

5

376

10

15

20

25

30

If there were suddenly to be a sharp increase of interest in religion, I think it would end with Goldschmidt, as a businessman, founding a journal for domestic devotions, Christian anthologies, and the like. I would give 4 shillings toward it; it would be a

54

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 54–56

5

1849

good contribution toward illuminating what people rlly understand by a priest nowadays, for there is no doubt that Goldschmidt would be able to do it just as well or be�er than many priests. Naturally, he does not read much of that sort of thing and uses his imagination for the rest―and so we get an analogy to that temperance priest who gets 4 schnapps for every member he recruits for the society.

377

55

15

20

What Socrates rlly meant in wanting to have “the poets” expelled from the state was that, by presenting things in the medium of the imagination instead of urging peop. to ethical realization in the realm of actuality, the poets pampered them and weaned them away or diverted them from doing so. One could be very much tempted to raise the same objection against “the priests” of our time. Yes, compared to Socrates, Plato himself was already a misunderstanding. Only Socrates managed to keep himself on the pinnacle of continually expressing the existential, constantly remaining as a presence, so that he had no doctrine, no system, and the like, but had practice. Plato took his time―with the assistance of this enormous illusion, it became a doctrine. Gradually the existential element disappeared more and more from view, and then the doctrine became dogmatically broader and broader.

25

56

30

35

What is particularly lacking in sermonic discourse is the awakening [“]You[”] of authoritative application: that You are the one being addressed. The awakening of the son of the widow of Nain is always presented as a symbol of spiritual awakening―well, then, Xt certainly did not walk over to the bier and give a speech about the fact that there is a resurrection of the dead. No, he said: You, young man, I say to you, arise.―Obviously, I am not of the opinion that a priest can perform miracles. So what is important is, as Luther says in his sermon on this gospel text, that you must hear Xt say it to you―but the usual talk about it does no good.

381

382

1

5

[a]

The Difficulty of Christianity and the Cunning of Our Times.

b

b

the old Adam p. 564. second column

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 57

1849

As I have always said, and as Anti-Climacus has especially emphasized, Xnty’s difficulty only rlly emerges when it is linked to the single individual, when the single individual, you and I, must appropriate it in earnest, daring to say: This is about me. For then Christianity is altogether too elevated and the offense cannot be avoided. So, just as we evade the other of Christianity’s difficulties―contemporaneity―and transform it into something in the past, so do we avoid the difficulty of the single individual by continually slipping in something objective. When I am to say: Xt loves me as does a bridegroom, me, S. A. Kierkegaard, or me, H. Martensen, or me, J. P. Mynster―yes, then it pinches. So what do we do? Then we slip in the Church: Xt, as a bridegroom, loves the Church, which is the bride. You see, now things proceed very pleasantly. So enormous a thing as the Church, the Church that has now existed for 1,800 years, consisting, as they say, of millions and millions―so enormous a thing: this appears to be commensurable in the ordinary hum. sense, commensurable with Xt. And so the offense has disappeared. And now, think of the confusion! When I speak of the single individual it must be some sort of subjective hobbyhorse―but the other business: That is objective Xnty! Oh, you scoundrels! Or, be�er, they themselves have no idea how ingenious their tactic is for undermining the whole of Xnty. To my great delight, today I read Luther (in the sermon on the gospel text for the 20th Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, the king who prepares his son’s wedding banquet) where he discourses on how “bthe blindness and obduracy of flesh and blood fights mightily against the notion that Xt loves me and you as does a bridegroom”; I read this passagec:…. [“]Indeed, the world grudgingly concedes that Xt is a handsome, noble, pious, and faithful bridegroom, and that his Church is a splendid, blessed bride. But when each one by himself is to believe that he also belongs to Xt and that Xt has such heartfelt love for him―then everything comes to a halt.” Thank God for Luther! He is a�er all always a great help against the almost insanely pompous dogmatic and objective conceitedness that, by going further, abolishes Xnty.

57

5

378 10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 58–59 58

5

379 10

59 15

20

25

30

35

1849

Oh, but it is almost a superhuman strain truly to involve oneself with God and to have anything to do with him.―Now one comes to feel all the blessedness of his love, that every one of a person’s past sins and errors have been forgo�en―and then, strengthened by this indescribable something, one must begin. And look, in the very next hour one’s efforts will be very imperfect; and God can be fully justified in saying, once more, [“]Now you yourself are once again to blame for the fact that everything is spoiled.[”]―Ah, in one sense, what a frightful strain, but then there is the infinitely different and greater task of patience: to be God!

The true Christian is also at the mercy of the world in this way: the world is very well aware of what the Christian requirement is, how much self-denial, how much patience, how much compliance, etc. But for its own part, despite the fact that the world calls itself Xndom, the world says, [“]No, thank you, I would rather be free of it.[”] Then there is one person for whom being a Xn is something serious: [“]Bravo![”] cries the world, [“]It will be great fun. We can do whatever we want to him, and we have the additional amusement of seeing whether he can take it in Christian fashion. It is a be�er comedy than what plays in the theater. Let’s strike him on the right cheek―and then we will see if he turns the le� one toward us. If he does, he will get one on the le�. It would be a sin to do otherwise, and there will also be something to laugh at. If he does not do it, then he is of course a hypocrite, he, who says he is a Christian, and then we can persecute him for that.[”] It is absolutely unavoidable that a true Xn―part of which, however, is the acknowledgment that one is a Xn, and that one does not sit and fart in a cozy parsonage or is not one of the cozy quiet ones―is eo ipso “a spectacle unto the world.” And now that Christendom has become so extraordinarily tolerant of Jews, Greeks, Mohammedans, Lama worshipers, etc., etc. (presumably because it does not occur to Xndom to assert that it is itself Jewish or a Lama worshiper), and since a li�le religious persecution is, a�er all, the spice of life, then Xndom will probably also do what it has always done, and give some consideration to persecuting the true Xn.

383

384

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 60–62

1849

If the world―which of course has no essential notion of religion―is to be the judge, then a true religious action is eo ipso pride, arrogance, and the like. A true religious action is in fact incommensurable with finite purposes and cannot be explained in terms of such purposes: ergo it is madness or pride―yes, or it is religion. How easy it was at the time for the times to come to the conclusion that when I exposed myself to the vulgarity of the mob, it was pride, arrogance. Was there a single person who imagined that at that very moment the only counsel I sought was in an edifying work[?] I am far from claiming that for this reason my action has any perfection before God.

60

Well, it is certainly fine that “language” is what distinguishes hum. beings from animals. It is also certain that it is precisely because all instruction takes place by means of language that hum. beings are easily misled. Language is namely an abstraction and always provides the abstract instead of the concrete. When ma�ers are dealt with in terms of natural science, aesthetics, etc., how easily a hum. being is induced to have the illusion that he really knows something for which he has the word. Concrete intuition is so easily lost here. And then ethically! How easy it is to mislead a hum. being to think of [“]the hum. being[”] (the abstraction) instead of himself, this enormous concretion. This was the truth in Pythagorean instruction, to begin with silence. It was reflection upon the concrete.

61

In This Way, too, Does True Consolation Take the Form of Cruelty toward Other People and Come to Suffer Instead of Being Thanked.

62

The more profound the consolation and the more profound the compassion, the more it refrains from stopping at one or another suffering or trouble, but instead searches out those who suffer in the deepest sense, as Xt sought out the demoniacs and visited tax collectors and notorious sinners. But look, then the times become embi�ered. For the race as a whole has a different tactic: it has such dread of the demoniacal and of the deepest sort of suffering that it does not even want to

5

380 10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 62–63

1849

25

hear that there is consolation and healing for them―out of fear of being reminded that there are people who suffer in this way. Thus a “consoler” of this sort disturbs the happy society that prevails in life’s various circles. To them it of course seems like cruelty for him to visit demoniacs, etc. in order to heal them―instead of behaving like the public, like Xndom, like the circles of the distinguished, Goethe, and Mynster, who in every way fortify themselves in the ignorance that such wretchedness exists. It is the same with the wretchedness of sin. By wanting to provide salvation from sin, placing on it the emphasis of eternity, the Savior of course reminds us of sin on a scale that is inconvenient for the public, for society, etc. Ergo this is cruelty on the part of this consoler and Savior; ergo we are justified in hating him and persecuting him. And as things went for Xt, so, on a lesser scale, do they go for every person who has a tolerably profound and sympathetic notion of suffering and has a true Christian notion of sin: his si placet joyous message that there is consolation and salvation becomes a nuisance for society by reminding it of the frightful scale on which suffering exists in the world and of the terrors of sin. No, a consoler and savior who is to be a success in the world must not grasp things too profoundly, must merely concern himself with curing ordinary contagious diseases, with knowing sage advice for minor accidents, and―with respect to sin―take grace in vain.

63

Protest against Bishop Mynster

5

381 10

15

20

30

35

From a Christian point of view, a life of glory, honor, esteem, abundance, pleasure, distinction such as Bishop M. has led can only be justified under one assumption: that Bishop M. take comfort in maintaining that the li�le world in which he has lived, that Denmark or his diocese of Zealand, or even just Copenhagen, has been composed of true Xns―or at any rate in denying that the great, overwhelming majority are non-Christians. Dare he deny that the words of scripture apply to this li�le world, too―that it lieth in wickedness[?] If so, then, from a Christian point of view Bishop Mynster’s life is a lie. 18 si placet] Latin, if you will.

385

386

1

5

a

he who nonetheless “teaches” that the world still lieth in wickedness! He found no occasion to suffer―he with his if―throughout this long life that has coincided with world revolutions, he found no occasion to suffer; he with his if, he did not find one even to the very end[.]

b

10

15

20

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 63–64

Yes, as long as he himself was in possession of power, when it was a ma�er of “episcopal concern” to prevent the appointment of one single, poor theology graduate: yes, then Bishop M. was ready, then he was in charge or imperious. But when the moment arrived, when there was occasion to demonstrate that one was in charge―and, from a Christian point of view, that is something one demonstrates best precisely by succumbing―then Bishop M. was as pliable as a journalist, as servile as someone who rents out clothing.

1849

And therefore, inasmuch as I can demonstrate from His Right Reverence’s sermons that the world is absolutely no be�er now than it was earlier―his life is of course a lie. The lie is that he has cravenly evaded actuality, has arranged a sort of private world consisting of circles of the elite in which―as he himself knows, by the way―Xnty has not exactly been the dominant factor: and that is where he has lived. How o�en has His Right Reverence not movingly given assurances that if it were required of him, he would willingly sacrifice his life, his blood, everything[?] If! But he must have lived in a truly fine world, inasmuch as he, with his spirited if, not only has not found any occasion to suffer, but has found nothing but occasions on which to increase in worldly glory and esteem, to be celebrated in social circles, cultivated by women, admired by actors, courtiers, and diplomats. He found no occasion to suffer―he with his ifa―not even when it was a ma�er of doing his best to protect the Church from scandal by refusing to consecrate Bishop Monrad.b If this is “Christian wisdom,” then what is worldly shrewdness; if this is Xnty, then what is worldliness; if this is truth, then what is untruth; if this is serving God, then what is it to serve oneself; if this is to sacrifice oneself, then what is it to seek one’s own advantage; if this is to guide, then what is it to lead astray[?]

5

10

382 15

20

25

30

Priests no longer concern themselves with the cure of souls; physicians now take care of that. Instead of becoming another person through conversion, one now does so through baths, spas, and the like―but we are all Xns!

64

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 65 65

5

10

15

383

20

25

30

35

40

“Grace” and “Law” “Grace” has been shoved into an entirely wrong place; people use grace to reduce the requirement of the Law. Meaningless and un-Christian! No! The requirement is and remains the same, unchanged; indeed, if anything, it has perhaps been made more rigorous under grace. The difference is simply this: Under the Law, my salvation is linked to the condition of fulfilling the requirement of the Law. Under grace, I am freed from this worry, which at its maximum must bring me to despair and make me entirely incapable of fulfilling even the least of what the Law requires―but the requirement is the same. The Law is what makes things taut; and certainly making something taut, as when one makes a bowstring taut, provides impetus, but one can also make a bowstring so taut that it snaps. That is exactly what the Law, as such, does. But it is not the requirement of the Law that causes the break―no, it is something that has been added: [“]Your salvation is dependent on your fulfilling the Law.[”] No hum. being can endure this; indeed, the more earnest he is, the more certain is his despair at that very instant, and it becomes u�erly impossible for him even to make a start on fulfilling the Law. Then comes “grace.” Naturally, it knows very well what the problem is. It removes that worry, that injunction to fulfill the Law, which was precisely what made its fulfillment impossible. “Grace” removes this worry and says: Only believe―then your salvation is assured. But then, no more than that―then, not the least reduction with respect to the requirement of the Law: it is precisely now that you must begin to fulfill it, but there must be tranquillity and peace in your soul, for you are certain of your salvation if only you believe. But just as people have made a mess of Xnty in every way by muddling it together with hum. compassion, so, too, with respect to “grace.” It is this really harebrained notion of “grace,” to the effect that our Lord has become an old dodderer who does not

1849

387

388

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 65–66

1849

look too closely at things. No, if our Lord was ever comparable to an old man, it was rather in Judaism, for he himself understood very well the impossibility of fulfilling the Law. But in Xnty he became like the young teacher who looks at things very carefully: Now I truly want this to be in earnest, now that I have given an advance payment of grace. In Judaism, God sat up in the heavens, as it were, saw that the Law had not been fulfilled, scolded and punished, but then he just let things continue on. Then came Xnty, and God became young, as it were: He descended to the earth, himself became a hum. being, walked among peop. and said: I want the Law to be fulfilled―here is grace, but now things are indeed to be in earnest. If I dared put it like this, I could be tempted to say that it is like when a new teacher comes to a school, a new teacher who in one respect is infinitely more lenient and yet in another respect more inflexible about wanting to get the task done. The old teacher scolded and punished, and was perhaps too strict as well, but however all that may or may not have been, the task was not done. Then the new teacher came. Right at the start he made a concession of infinite leniency, so that the entire school was reborn and rejuvenated―and then, then he said, Look, now we are to begin, and the requirement, the task―yes, it is old one. I could be tempted to present this in a metaphor, which of course does not illuminate anything, but perhaps it can awaken. Take a class of adult students. The old teacher has treated them in an old-fashioned way as boys; he scolds and punishes, but the instruction makes no headway. Then the new teacher comes. He liberates them. He says, Gentlemen, my friends, etc. But the instructional requirement―no, he does not reduce that: they must get down to work in quite a different fashion than under the old teacher.

1

5

a

As far as that goes, it is also a misunderstanding that the state appoints and pays “teachers” of Xnty.

The entire concept of a “Christian” state is actually a self-contradiction, a sham.a I am certainly permi�ed to let myself be paid for being a teacher of Xnty (a laborer is worthy of his pay), but then there must be some actual Xns, so that in accepting my pay I also vouch for the fact that they are Xn, and that I dare accept this pay qua Xn and teacher. But I am not to receive this pay via a third party that if need be will use worldly force to collect what is owed me, a third party that in the deeper sense does not give a damn about being Xn and merely maintains the illusion that all

5

10

15

384

20

25

30

66 35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 66–67

5

10

15

385 20

25

67

30

35

40

1849

are Xn, so that the priest, appointed by the State Church, comes to a congregation with instructions concerning his wages, and it makes no difference if there is perhaps not one single Xn in the entire congregation, if no one goes to church, etc. The priest takes his turn preaching and the state sees to it that he gets his wages. The state is related to the category: the human race; Xnty to the category: the single individual. From this alone it can be seen that they are heterogeneous. In relation to everything worldly, item art, science, etc., it is proper that I am involved with the state. Now one sees how mistaken are the efforts of the clergy, even wanting to be paid directly by the state. If one cannot instill in peop. enough of a notion of the importance of Xnty for them to pay voluntarily, then neither should one accept their money. Xnty is too highborn to be patronized by the state. If the individual citizens of a state were to sink so low that they had no sense for art and science, and the state then said, [“]Well, it cannot be helped, you have to pay anyway[”]―that is proper and praiseworthy. But Xnty is infinitely elevated above the state; if peop. reject Xnty, the punishment must be that they do not get to hear of Xnty. If for once peop. actually tried to do this, I believe it would work. If the proclamation of Xnty was ever really silenced, its day would certainly come again―instead of maintaining an illusion, as is done nowadays by means of this pitiable preachifying of Xnty.

Inasmuch as God himself indeed has created and sustains this world, one must certainly guard against the ascetic fanaticism that simply hates it and annihilates it. No, in the gentlest Christian manner, I could present the situation as follows. This world is like a game and a plaything for a child. The father can even find the game beautiful and enter into it in childlike fashion, but he nonetheless demands that the child be gradually weaned from it. Thus also with an upbringing for the kingdom of God or for Xnty. God is no impatient or cruel man who wants to harm a pers. by rushing him along. No, God is a God of patience. Still, God wants a pers. to understand that he must break once and for all with what is earthly, and do it so profoundly that the spirit comes into existence in earnest. And he wants a person, even now, gradually to wean himself away. 9 item] Latin, as well as, also.

389

390

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 67–68

1849

But no fanaticism of the flesh, for alas, there is indeed a fanaticism that is fleshly. You are to believe that God is fatherly enough to want to rejoice with you in childlike fashion when you are happy in accordance with your hum. notions. But you must remember that there must be striving, that there must be striving so that the mind can be reshaped away from what is earthly. That is how I understand it. But I also understand that what the whole of Xndom and I need is indeed for someone to step forth who would really and truly be strict with himself, who dared to be strict with us, in order that we could be encouraged both to strive and to appreciate the leniency. But God is gentle. I have always understood this. My own life makes this clear to me, for when I wanted to enjoy myself once in a while, it never occurred to me to hesitate in praying that God might help me now and grant that I might truly enjoy myself― which would be nonsense if God were a fanatical bogeyman. Yet of course, more than anyone, I truly have an extraordinary notion of the bonds with which God binds me at every instant. Perhaps most people would u�erly lose their zest for life if they were ever to understand―even to the degree that I understand it―how at every instant God could move a person over into a more rigorous regimen. And in turn―if I were to understand this to an even greater degree and constantly have it present to me to an even greater degree―things would perhaps go with me as they do with most people.

The expression “the authors’ author,” which I myself once came to use because it was unavoidable, and which was subsequently adopted by several people: this expression actlly designates the unusual extra something that I possess. I am actlly an author for authors; I do not relate directly to a public; no, qua author I make others productive. And thus it is right here that my suffering lies: as long as that is not understood, this unusual extra something I have becomes a minus instead of a plus. Martensen is ridiculous, by the way. With the aid of mediocrity, it will probably end with him becoming classical―and me artificial. Thanks a lot! Now, for once take a look and see if his work has had the least bit to do with making others productive!

5

10

15

386 20

25

68 30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 69–72 69

5

1849

That a bare and naked liberum arbitrium is a chimera can best be seen from the difficulty, the long, long, continuing struggle that is required merely to break a habit, even if one has quite earnestly made a resolution to so do. Or it is seen when one considers spiritual trials in which when a pers. fights things beyond his control, fights them with mortal anxiety, and at first, precisely because of this anxiety, the struggle summons them up rather than removes them, until finally, a�er a long, long, continuing struggle, he gradually wins.

10

70

387

20

Luther’s teachings are a�er all not merely a return to the original Xnty, but a modification of Xnty. He emphasizes Paul onesidedly and makes less use of the gospels. And he himself best refutes his Bible theory―he who rejects the Epistle of James. Why? Because it is not part of the canon? No, he does not deny that. But on dogmatic grounds. Thus he [Luther] himself has a higher point of departure than the Bible, which surely was indeed his view, inasmuch as in his conflict with the pope, he only posited the scriptures in order to have a fixed point, conceding that he would allow himself be convinced if they could convince him on the basis of scripture. And this was right enough, for what he wanted to get rid of was precisely the nonsense of tradition, which they certainly were not going to find in the Bible.

25

71

30

72

35

Odd that Luther so frequently preaches that we should give money to priests and schoolteachers. He does this even in the sermon on the gospel text for the 26th Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, Mt 25, about judgment day, when Xt is to separate the sheep from the goats.

“Be Satisfied with My Grace, for My Power Is Made Perfect in Weakness.” 1) Indeed, it is almost like a choice. Could you wish to be “strong and free,” and then be exposed to the danger of forget1 liberum arbitrium] Latin, free choice, free will, arbitrary freedom.

391

392

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 72–74

1849

ting me[?] And the reply to this must certainly be: [“]No. Even though, in suffering the pain, I wish and pray that the thorn might be removed, ah, if it were to mean that I would forget God―no, then let it remain! If by having the thorn removed I were to have a less lively sense of my fellowship with God, then let it remain. And therefore, when I pray that it might be removed, my thought is that the gratitude and the joy might then bind me all the more strongly to God. But a�er all, God alone rlly knows what binds best. 2) Consider, therefore, that it is precisely this weakness that increases your strength, for when “God’s power” “is made perfect” in weakness, then in this way you are of course stronger than you are in all your own power, as surely as God’s power is the stronger.

“What you have not done unto the least of these my brethren, neither have you done unto me.” It could perhaps also read: [“]neither would you have done it unto me.[”] Xt is suffering humanity, although more specifically, he is humanity suffering simply because of his fear of God. Here is the criterion. Peop. say, [“]If we had been Xt’s contemporaries, then, etc.[”] Xt replies what he will reply on judgment day: [“]If you have not been contemporary with the sick, the poor, the unjustly treated, the sufferers, etc., and if you have done nothing for them, which, however, would have been considerably less onerous than performing works of love toward me when I was alive―I who exposed to danger everyone who dared belong to me or acknowledge me.[”]

5

10

15

388

73 20

25

30

35

Talleyrand―when Mirabeau, meaning himself, described what a�ributes a deputy ought to have―could perhaps have been even more ironic than when he said: “You are forge�ing one thing:

74

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 74–77

1849

393

he ought to be pockmarked.” He could have said: [“]You are forge�ing one thing―but that is obvious, that is self-evident―he ought to be pockmarked.[”] That would have been more Socratic. 5

75

10

While the air is still so full Of winter snow’s shivering-cold (Brorson) On a day when the winter weather is so intimidating that you do not want to go out―and then, when an entire life like that lies before you, and the question is whether to go out into it!

389

76

20

77 25

30

The principle that fear of a greater danger provides the courage to venture into a lesser, also forms the basis of corporal punishment. A horse shies; then the coachman whips him and forces him forward: the greater danger lies behind; therefore the horse goes forward―into the danger from which he had shied away.

Balance Sheet Regarding My Move against The Corsair. A. The Consequences for the Situation. 1) What ma�ered was separating P. L. Møller and Goldschmidt, and ge�ing G. away from The Corsair―this succeeded, a�er all. 2) The change in the shape of the entire affair a�er I leaped in[a] was, a�er all, a relief for many of those who had been a�acked, 3) Preparations were made in order to awaken awareness with respect to the presentation of reli-

[a]

and indeed from the height of having been immortalized and praised.

1

394

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 77

1849

gion―which is what is to be emphasized―and if one is to have the common man on one’s side, it is always safest first to let him do something wrong, in order that he can see a�erward that he has done wrong, for the common man is always good-natured and can most easily be won over when he feels regret. One must not get into a power struggle with him, but grant him the power and then induce him to abuse it. He is satisfied that he did in fact get power, and he is all the more willing to regret having abused it.

1

5

10

15

[b]

Of course, I had struck the note of irony: What a satire upon myself, then, what an annihilating judgment, it would have been if I had not done absolutely everything possible to avert the notion that [“]of course, The Corsair is also this sort of irony―the two of them acknowledge one another, The Corsair immortalizes him as the master.[”] And from a Christian point of view, what a judgment it would be upon me if I had been the contemporary of such demoralization and had then either been so stupid as not to see it, or so cowardly as not to act.

B. The Consequences for Me. 1) The satisfaction of having been faithful to myself and my idea by not shrinking from any consequences, but daring to the utmost. This satisfaction corresponds in turn to my historical significance, and this same step has very considerably prolonged my future renown. 2) When I gave up being an aesthetic author and thus lost that support for guaranteeing indirect communication, it was nonetheless guaranteed in another way, namely by creating this opposition to myself. 3) Had I not taken that step, I would have completely escaped the double danger with respect to Xnty, so that I would always have come to understand Xnty solely in relation to the difficulties of inwardness. 4) It has been my own upbringing and development. 5) As an author I have go�en a new string on my instrument and have been made capable of producing notes that I would never have dreamed of otherwise. 6) I have come to “actuality” in the stricter sense of the term.

5

10

15

20

390

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 78–80 78

5

10

15

79

391

30

80

On closer inspection, all this talk of wishing that one had been contemporary with Xt is indeed presumptuous, for of course this means imagining that one was fit to be an apostle. And of course even the apostles fell away, and they had to be equipped with extraordinary div. powers in order to be―i.e., in order to be able to endure being―contemporary with him, which is the best proof that no one can on his own endure being contemporary with him. But those who speak in this way about contemporaneity do not know what they are talking about; it is the usual: they take the glory―and leave out the difficulty. It is pandering. As I have noted somewhere else in a journal: of course, Xt’s life also has another meaning, it is the atonement. Were Xt only the Exemplar, then it would be like cruelty for Him to push the ma�er so far; but He has to die―in order to save the world.

This is, a�er all, how things turn upside down for me. How o�en have I not heard it said “that I have no cause,” and in the final analysis I will surely be the only person who can be said to have had a cause in the deeper sense of the word. But the others have actlly never had a cause: they seize onto something here and something else there, and they always speak of having a cause[.] It was precisely because I had a cause and felt myself to be consecrated that I remained silent. Silence is precisely the criterion for the extent to which I have had a cause―but the silence (which of course existed precisely because I had a cause) was what made people think that I had no cause, because I did not cha�er.

The Epistle for the First Sunday in Advent The whole thing is actlly one metaphor: to arise―and dress (put on Xt).

1849

395

396

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 80–81

1849

Life is compared to a day: one awakens (the night is past―the day has come). So one arises, dresses (puts on Xt). To put on Xt is thus both, with respect to the atonement, to appropriate his merits (in the parable of the king who prepared his son’s wedding banquet, there was one person who was not clothed in wedding a�ire), and to seek to resemble him because he is the Exemplar and the pa�ern. This is a substantial expression for making something inward. In similar fashion, the expression he uses with respect to his teaching―that it is food―is the strongest expression for appropriation, just as pu�ing on Xt is the strongest expression of the fact that the imitation [of Christ] must be done according to the greatest possible criterion. It is not said that you should strive to imitate Xt (when that sort of thing is said, it indirectly implies that the two nevertheless remain essentially unlike)―no, you are to put him on, a�ire yourself in him. As when a person goes about in borrowed clothing, this is satisfactio vicaria, a�ire yourself in him―as when a person resembles another almost to the point of being indistinguishable from him, not merely striving to imitate him, but reproducing him. Xt gives you his clothing (satisfaction) and then requires that you are to reproduce Him.

5

10

15

20

392

1

[a]

About Peter.

NB This is his own account.

b

About Peter. Well, now Peter is going to speak about my writings. How does one react to that? I know very well that he has only read passim in several of the books―you see, that is enough for him.b Then he took it upon himself to give a lecture at the convention. But it so happened that the prepared lecture could not be used―then, the evening before, it occurs to him, [“]You could say something about Martensen and Søren and R. Nielsen.[”] So the lecture is given―and then it is printed. If one were to point out to him that it rlly does not demonstrate knowledge of the subject ma�er, he would reply: [“]Yes, good Lord, it was just for a lecture at the convention.[”] But then, why must it be printed? And not only that, but precisely because it was first delivered orally and then printed, it in fact speciously takes on a sort of higher importance. How sad! In such a li�le country, where I have not yet even been reviewed, everyone exploits my writings as an opportunity to get something said. Thereby my cause is injured rather than 17 satisfactio vicaria] Latin, vicarious satisfaction (as in Christ’s atonement,

his suffering in our stead). 26 passim] Latin, here and there.

81

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 81–82

5

82 10

15

20

393

25

30

35

1849

397

advanced. Naturally, it is “not the time or place” to go into all the finer, concrete details with which I depict the ma�er. People generalize me into twaddling truisms―so I could just as well have refrained from writing. And then the lamentable illusion that it is my brother, “who must of course have the inside story.”

Christ’s Entry into Jerusalem, from a Christian Point of View. As he said about the woman who anointed him: She did it for my burial (for he always had death before his eyes; indeed, he had come to the world in order to die; his entire life was directed at dying)―so, too, was the entry into Jerusalem a part of precipitating the catastrophe. But just as those who were present surely understood that woman differently, not thinking in the least about burial, so, too, did the disciples and the people understand Xt even less during the entry into Jerusalem. They thought: Here it comes.―He knew: Now things have been made ready for my downfall. This solitude is an essential part of Xt’s suffering as mental suffering: this solitary knowledge, which interprets all the signs in reverse fashion. It is in vain that he speaks to the disciples, telling them in advance―it does not help. If he had said to them in advance that this very entry helps further my downfall, well, they would perhaps have understood him while he was speaking. But then, when he put it into action and they heard the jubilation of the people, the situation would immediately be reversed for them, and they would think: Now he triumphs. Only Xt understands the jubilation as the sign of downfall. But what good can it do to explain things of this sort to my generation[?] Perhaps people will learn to repeat it by rote―and yet not understand it. In order to understand it, one must be profoundly acquainted with suffering and be a quiet man, quieta from having long since understood that nonsense and foolishness and busyness have infinitely superior force.

a

alas, indeed quiet

1

398

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 83–84

1849

People must indeed have lived in far simpler fashion when they believed that God revealed his will in dreams. People must have lived far more simply even with respect to their diet. An idyllic pastoral existence, living partly on vegetables―then it would have been possible. But imagine life in large cities and civilized manners: no wonder people ascribe dreams to the devil or to demons.―Furthermore, the poor opinion of dreams typical of our times is also connected to the spiritualism that constantly presses upon consciousness, whereas those simpler times piously believed that the unconscious life in a person was both the dominant and the most profound aspect.

83

5

10

15

A Polemical Comedy, which has now been published, is surely by Heiberg. The quasi-strength of the polemic is itself evidence of this. Heiberg has always pandered to the public: he acts as if he strikes at them and yet really does not strike at them; he thunders against the public and shows how bad it is―and then he is happy when the public shouts Bravo! This is a very demoralizing situation. When he is to strike at the public, he actlly flirts with it about whether it likes being hit like this. Heiberg has not only demoralized the public by fla�ering it (both in the vaudevilles and in the theory he developed in the book on the vaudeville, to the effect that the public is the judging authority), but demoralizes it even worse precisely because he wants to reform the public without himself having the ethical strength to do without it, which is the conditio sine qua non for a person to be truly capable of striking a blow. As a consequence, the very a�empts at reform have become a game, a form of pandering. This is what is most dangerous; it is like a preacher of repentance who is a comedian and who with great bravura creates a sensation with the public― whom he chastises.

32 conditio sine qua non] Latin, the necessary and indispensable condition

84

20

25

394

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 85–87 85

5

10

86

20

25

399

Another consequence of living in a li�le country is that one’s [first] name can become so wellknown that at its mere mention, everyone―or most people―understand it to be an allusion to a person. This is how it is with my name: Søren. Indeed, a person’s title, or whatever you want to call it, can be equally notorious. At one time, for half or a quarter of a year, Berlingske Tidende carried a serialized supplement, translated from the Swedish, in which a character appeared under the name [“]the crazy magister[”] or [“]the crazy priest[”]. And for many people the association of ideas led to me. (It was A Night by Bullar Lake).

An example of how not to preach―indeed, of how it is much be�er to say nothing and simply read the word of scripture aloud. Martensen preaches on the text he himself has chosen: Let the dead bury the dead. And what does he do? Presto! He wanders off into an observation to the effect that there have been entire eras and generations that merely buried their dead, spiritually speaking. Yes, thank you very much. Entire generations, eras, millions upon millions―excellent diversion! Where, then, am I, the single individual, with my tiny bit of taking action: it is more or less the same whether or not I do anything.

395

87

1849

This is also one of the passages in which Xt’s consciousness of his divine nature emerges clearly: He who merely gives the lowliest person a cup of cold water for my sake will receive it again tenfold.

[a]

Martensen.

1

400

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 88

1849

Luther is indeed not really clear,

1

5

[a]

On asceticism: in my view Schleiermacher puts it very well in one of his (no. 2) Reden über die Religion: every pers. of the deeper sort has his own asceticism.

not about the doctrine of the voluntary, for example, in the sermon on the epistle for the 1st Sunday a�er Epiphany (Rom 12), where he quite definitely treats asceticism. Nor is Luther clear with respect to another aspect of the voluntary. As is well known, the cra�y orthodox abolish the voluntary solely out of fear of tempting God, but sometimes Luther, too, fulminates against it, as when he preaches that everyone must obey the authorities, etc., etc. But just look at Luther himself! Did he not voluntarily expose himself to certain danger by opposing the pope―it was of course not the pope who a�acked Luther; it was Luther who a�acked the pope. Or I wonder what Luther would think of the theory Peter developed in order to put a nice face on whining: A person should witness for the good, but not against what is evil. And I will be judged in accordance with this. Thus, when evil is shrewd enough to ignore all a person’s witnessing for the good―perhaps even doing so impudently, praising it and thus turning it to its own advantage―then a person should not dare witness against evil, should avoid tempting God. In that case, just about every single one of the martyrs of the Church would be judged guilty of having tempted God. Surely, it is more likely that a person tempts God by making theories of this sort, which conceal a person’s lack of courage and faith and confidence. As surely as rushing forth in foolhardy fashion is tempting God, so also does a person tempt God by slinking away and staying home when he had expected that you would be there―is this not tempting his patience? Let us take a metaphor. Was Napoleon angrier when a general dared to do something on his own, or when the general failed to appear out of caution―yes, or incautiously and indefensibly[?] In the final analysis, the greatest virtue of pusillanimity is to sleep―so as not to sin or tempt God. But back to Luther. Luther acted correctly, but his sermons are not always clear or in agreement with

88

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

396 40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 88–89

5

1849

401

his life, which means that in this case we have a rare instance: his life is be�er [than his preaching]. This is the fact of the ma�er. One must acknowledge that in the final analysis there is no theory. As the king was the law and the end of the law, so, in the final analysis, is our Lord himself every theory. You, you single individual, should take counsel with him: that is the theory.

10

89

15

20

25

30

35

397 40

The Formations of the World.

[a]

Governance becomes more and more thri�y; less and less is to be squandered. In antiquity only one individual lived―the masses, the thousands, were squandered on him. Then came the idea of representation. Those who truly lived were still only a few individuals, but the masses nonetheless saw themselves in them, nonetheless participated in their life. The final formation is the single individual, understood such that the single individual is not in opposition to the masses, but each one is equally an individual. But the task for the missionaries who are to prepare the way for this also becomes more and more strenuous. In the past, the teacher was an individual, but then he had disciples. In this there was something consoling for his hum. side: he had a sort of hum. probability that all his efforts would not, a�er all, disappear without a trace, because he indeed had disciples, and thus he expanded in the realm of finitude. But when the final formation begins, the teacher becomes the single individual, who neither has nor dares have any disciples. And what a frightful effort, how is it possible to avoid dizziness! In the midst of this whole vortex of millions, where everything else is solidarity and parties―there, such an individual stands u�erly helpless. He makes himself helpless, for he does not want to have any disciples. How easy it is, then, for the waves of

[b]

The Formations of the World.

and the teacher also had the opportunity to make himself comfortable by having disciples, had relief by having a relative criterion.

1

5

402

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 89–90

1849

time to wash over him and erase all his efforts as if they were nothing! What faith, to persevere in this life, day a�er day, what faith, to believe that his life is noticed by God, that this is enough. And how squandered such a person is in God’s service! But the more that is squandered with respect to the teacher, the greater the thri� with respect to the race. In the past, thri� was exercised on the teacher, and the masses were spent; now the teacher is spent precisely because the upbringing must be in the category: the single individual.

1

[a]

R. Nielsen.

5

10

R. Nielsen. My Relationship to Him.

90

I noticed how R. N. exclusively concerned himself with my writings, and I had to fear that he would suddenly go out and begin lecturing on them. (This will be found noted in the journals from that period, 47, or early 48.) Also in order to prevent this, the best thing was to draw him a li�le closer to me― and on his part, he made the most decisive effort to be drawn. But the main thing that led me to a descision was the following. Suddenly one day it occurred to me that as part of all my labors I indeed had a responsibility not to bypass completely every sort of hum. criterion: Assume I died tomorrow―there would be no account of my life. This became completely clear to me during a carriage ride to Hirschholm, right at the time I had gained an understanding of myself qua author. In the meantime I let a few days pass, but gave the ma�er a religious formulation and then acted by virtue of a religious decision. Then I drew him to me. (There is information concerning this in the journals from that period.) His writings up to that point had not pleased me very much. The fact is that I had not wanted to tell him directly―or could not defend telling him―what he rlly ought to do. I had to leave that to him; and then there emerged the ambiguity as

15

20

25

30

35

398

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 90

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

to whether it was not more likely that he was the one who wanted to profit from me, rather than that it was my cause that was to profit from him. Well, patience.―I almost had to regard his big book as a betrayal of me: that he exploited his relationship with me in order to slip through; that, having been supported and developed by me, he played the role of someone independent. (Concerning this, see the journals and a separate packet in the desk: [“]Polemics Concerning N’s Big Book[”].) At the same time, because I have included him in my relationship to God, I have honestly persevered with him. The second book, the review of Cl. and Martensen, is certainly yet another suspect affair, inasmuch as he himself, influenced as he was, immediately cashed in his royalties, as it were, and was thus permi�ed to pass judgment on Martensen, almost pu�ing the pseudonym in an untenable position. (Concerning this, see the journals and a separate packet in the desk.) Nonetheless, he showed a bit of daring with this book, and I reckon that in his favor. Most likely, he does not rlly understand me; but the eagerness with which he has familiarized himself with my writings is worthy of respect, and I believe that I will be pleased with him, even though up to now he has rlly slowed me down, and I have spent a lot of time on him―time that for a moment almost looked as if it had been worse than wasted. What he ought to have done right at the outset was to declare quite simply and straightforwardly that these writings had convinced him, and that he had changed his standpoint and had then dedicated himself to serving the cause. That would have been brief, ethical, and in character. Then I could quickly have determined whether he could be of use. In that case I could have accepted him and then quickly closed the door again―whereas now, inasmuch as he slipped through the way he did, now I will bec holding out the crowd of people who are to pass judgment on me. Certainly, I have patiently put up with a great deal from him, and have done so precisely because I

1849

403

[b]

And with respect to my cause, what he should have done right at the outset was this: He should have illuminated the heterogeneity of the entire phenomenon as briefly but as categorically as possible. Instead, he did just the opposite: Himself confused, he also writes a big book in which he indeed ignores how he has made use of me and has been helped by me. And the second time (the review of Climacus) he still has come no further than making use of several individual theses from one single pseudonym, on which he lectures.

c

having difficulties in

1

5

10

15

404

1

5

10

15

20

25

[d]

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 90

Actually, R. N. was not originally developed by reading my writings; it was only through my personal influence―and therea�er through study of the writings. But he has never found occasion to express this. More than once, he himself has confessed to me that the only thing he feared was that he would slip past me. On the occasion of his big book, I gravely pointed out to him the dishonesty of the situation, in which he privately confessed everything but remained silent about the truth in public.―This with reference to the circumstance that now it could almost appear to someone that it was I who le� R. N. in the lurch, rather than his own cunning, which punishes itself. But of course he can make amends. If he had originally been simpler and more honest, he would have avoided all the nonsense of being a Schüler.

25 Schüler] German, pupil, disciple.

1849

have had him in my relationship to God. But it has also developed me further in a religious direction. On the other hand, if he has shrewdly wanted to deceive me, even if he himself was not clearly aware of it, then he has actlly deceived himself. Because he has not been on guard against the fact that the surrounding world is of course busily trying to force him into the role of disciple, he has put himself in the embarrassing position in which things must look as if he had wanted to go off on his own and play the role of someone independent. If he had taken this step in a simple manner, it would have been much more certain and true. In one sense, his situation does not affect me one way or the other, for I am unchanged in my religious conviction that it was my duty to take someone on. What concerns me is that I treat him honestly, in accordance with the highest standards. If he had become, if you will, a disciple, an adherent, or something of that sort, it would nonetheless not have become a coterie, for what is decisive with respect to a coterie is not that two people are united, but that they unite in order to achieve one or another finite purpose. If ten people united with respect to an idea, they would never become a coterie. The place reserved for him was also one of very great value, namely that of someone whom I acknowledged as a reliable reviewer, a position for which I had until then rejected all applicants, at great cost to myself. And his position would absolutely have been important, for precisely through his relationship with me, through his personal contact with me, he has acquired insights―and would have acquired even more―that would have made the reviews into something much more than an ordin. review. In the beginning of our relationship I developed him quite a bit, but when―particularly a�er the big book brought it to my a�ention that an extremely dangerous deception could suddenly arise here―I drew back a bit and made the relationship more distant; but I have by no means abandoned him. The fact that I am keeping silent is the best proof that at

399 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 90–92 the very least I am taking a wait and see a�itude. How foolish then, are these people who are busily trying to rid me of an adherent―as though I myself were incapable of doing it. 5

91

400

15

92 20

25

30

35

People here in this country are truly excellent: they can see right away whether something is wri�en by me or by a Schüler. Thus, when Prof. Nielsen’s name was on his book, they could see right away that it was by a Schüler. And when at the same time I put H. H. into the world―they all saw that it was someone copying me. No, that Nielsen was copying me was something even I myself could have seen, but people in genrl are not so developed.

Just as people who do not have much ideality cannot understand a caprice, a wi�icism, an anecdote, etc. without finding out “whom it was aimed at” (the name), so it is with peop. without much ideality with regard to working. They are incapable of working silently in the realm of the ideal to transform themselves into points of intensity. The moment they get a random thought, it must immediately be communicated to these actual peop., so and so (the name), or they must immediately a�ack so and so (the name―external actuality). Then there will be a sensation, a riot and a crowd, alarm in the camp, lots of noise. It looks as if they produced a quite different effect than do points of intensity. Why? Because they use weaker means. The most intensive means always look “at the moment” as if they accomplished nothing at all, moved nothing at all. And on the other hand, the weakest means―i.e., the least intensive, which have the most in common with the whole moment―move the most, precisely because in the deepest sense they do not move at

1849

405

406

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 92–94

1849

all. There is in fact no external point―which, however, is what is dialectically necessary in order truly to move something―motion is within the momentary itself. It has no heterogeneity whatever. Everyone can immediately go along with it or at any rate immediately understand it, and so names are named: the names of the supporters and the names of those a�acked, etc. And then at the next moment the wave of history washes over this entire movement and it is as if forgo�en. But in the moment a�er that, the most intensive movement arises, transfigured.

5

10

401

3rd Sunday in Advent (Mt XI:2–10). Here is a special sort of dialectic, qualitative dialect. One could most easily think of it in this fashion: The forerunner (Jn. the Baptist) confirms that Xt is the expected one. But dialectically speaking, this situation is problematic with regard to precedence: for in order to confirm something, one must be superior to that which one is confirming. Therefore it is John the Baptist who sends forth disciples to Xt to ask whether he is the expected one―and then Xt, a�er answering the disciples, ends by confirming that Jn. the Baptist is indeed the forerunner. It is not Xt who supports himself with the authority of the forerunner (which indeed would be a paralogism), no, it is he who draws the forerunner within his authority, and by virtue of his authority confirms him as the true forerunner. Only now can the words of the forerunner―that Xt is the expected one―be believed, now that Xt has confirmed that the forerunner truly is the forerunner. This looks like a circle, but is as far as possible from being one: it is the only consistency within the dialectic of authority.

93

15

20

25

30

A hum. being can also experience a situation somewhat analogous to that of Xt before Pilate. Perhaps he is offered a recognition that people already think is quite extraordinary, and yet, keeping faith with the truth, he must say, No, I will not accept it, it is untrue―I owe it to God and to the truth to demand more. Then they become embi�ered―and now he has to accept the opposite expression of recognition: suffering.

94

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 95–96

95

5

402 10

15

20

25

96

35

1849

Peter’s Remarks at the Convention. Moreover, it creates confusion to take that passage in Paul and then point out Martensen and me as the two tendencies. For if Martensen is to be compared with Paul, then Paul (including his σοφροσυνη) becomes ecstasy pure and simple. The Martensenian-Petrine notion of soundness of mind is to some extent an irreligious notion of bourgeois philistinism and complacency. Moreover, Peter ought also have pointed out that in our time what is most difficult is the representation of ecstasy. For mediocrity, worldly deal-making, etc. are precisely what predominate. What also ought to be pointed out is that the specific characteristic of my ecstasy is that it is supported by an equally great sober-mindedness: the mere fact that in representing ecstasy, I make use of pseudonyms, fictional characters―thus, not myself― whereas in the edifying discourses I myself speak in subdued and gentle tones; the difference between the way in which the pseudonyms make use of the category of the single individual and the way in which I use it, etc. But what does all that mean to Peter[?] In self-satisfied fashion (and, of course, to the cheers of country priests), he proclaims mediocrity: there are two tendencies (that is, those that accomplish something), and they are one-sided: but we, we who accomplish nothing, we are of the truth; and we are also in the majority. Just believe me, I know it, how could I not know it―I am, a�er all, 8 years older than my brother.

4th Sunday in Advent It has been thought that there is no connection to be found between the gospel and the epistle. But when one considers it, it is nevertheless there in what Jn. the Baptist says about himself: The person who has the bride is the bridegroom, but the bridegroom’s friend is happy to hear the bridegroom’s voice: this joy of mine is fulfilled. Thus a theme is possible here: perfect joy. 7 σοφροσυνη] Greek, soundness of mind, sober-mindedness.

407

[a]

Peter’s Remarks at the Convention.

1

408

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 96–97

1849

And this would entirely correspond to the epistle. And thus the theme for the epistle could be:

1

[a]

the most reliable joy.

The Perfect Joy, Joy in the Lord. 1) the joys of placability through meekness (v. 5). The most beautiful joy. 2) the joy of being unworried (v. 6) in prayer (v. 6). The most blessed joy. 3) The joy that is the peace of God. It is the most perfect joy: a) it passes all understanding, so indescribable is it; b) it preserves hearts and minds in Xt Jesus, so different from all other joys, which we must take care not to lose, whereas this joy takes care of us, preserves us: what reliability!

5

403

10

15

[a]

About Peter.

[b]

see p. 158 bo�om in this journal.

About Peter. I have lived qua author for such a long time, and Peter found no occasion to say anything about it. But as soon as it looks as if people want to pay somewhat more a�ention to me, he busies himself with ge�ing something off his chest, presumably to make an offer involving me in behalf of the party, and he is surely especially delighted at this desirable opportunity to enter the lists against R. N. (a very promising undertaking at the moment) and make an example of him for being a follower―he, who has been a follower and copier of Grundtvig to the point of ludicrous affectation. The entire affair has touched me quite painfully. During the entire period when I was suffering persecution by the mob, there was absolutely no sympathy from Peter: literally not one word, either wri�en or spoken, from him in this connection. We have never been very close, but from that time onward, he withdrew entirely. He knows that I have been concerned about my finances―never a word about that. He knows that I suffer from being

97

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 97–98

5

10

404

15

20

25

disproportionate to the size of the country―never a word about that. But finally he sees his chance. He places himself above the two tendencies: Martensen―and S. K. (true, he of course assures people that he is not mediating between the two positions, but it is nonetheless implicit in his presentation that he only wants to exploit these two tendencies―ergo he is indeed situated at a higher point). He breaks into loose jargon in a manner calculated to appeal to the public, which thus enables him to judge 7 years’ work in a half hour. He heartily proclaims the supremacy of the rural clergy and the rule of mediocrity. He cautiously covers himself with the excuse that this is just something thrown together at the last minute. He profits from the illusion: [“]As the author’s elder brother, I must of course know how things are[”]― which is of course frightfully untrue, so much so that he ought to have emphasized this fact. He has tied my hands, inasmuch as I can scarcely make a move without the world shouting: Scandal. And he remains amiable, inasmuch as what he says about me is of course very much to my advantage―which is yet another source of suffering for me, for people will say that he has been partisan. He puts me in a difficult position vis-à-vis R. Nielsen, who possibly believes that I am behind this a�ack on him, and then, when R. Nielsen a�acks Peter, he will certainly think that I am behind R. N.[d]

30

98

35

So now people have become terribly preoccupied with the notion that I want to form a school. This is supposed to be an objection against me. But how did people treat me before[?] They took the almost superhuman ideality in vain; they counted on confusing me with an eccentricity that was u�erly foreign, while they profited by borrowing from me.

1849

409

[c]

His words are very odd: He does not want to mediate between two sinful hum. beings; in ordinary hum. language one would say: I, a sinful hum. being myself, will not take it upon myself to mediate between two hum. beings.

1

5

[d]

I do not think that all this has been clear to Peter, but some of it ought to have been clear to him and would have been clear to him if he had not become so pampered into smugness by these country priests and conventions that he perhaps even believed―in a sort of foolish gemütlichkeit―that to some extent he was doing me a favor, even though he ought in fact understand that in order to do that, he would have to employ a criterion and actually shed some light on my work as an author, and least of all connive with quantitative measures used by hum. beings and with the illusion-makers.

10

15

20

25

410

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 99–101

1849

It is what I have always said: Only a dead man can govern the situation in Denmark. Indiscipline and envy and nonsense and mediocrity are in charge everywhere. Were I to die now, my life would have an extraordinary influence. Even much of what I have casually jo�ed down in the journals would come to have great significance and influence, for by then people would have become reconciled with me and would be able to concede what was and is my due.

99

5

405

10

1

[a] On the Occasion of H. H.

If only I had physical strength, just a li�le, then a good number of things could be accomplished. It is so burdensome and sad that much that is simply explained as pride and the like is just a lack of physical strength. I am so weak that I have to use my mental powers even with respect to the most insignificant things.

100

On the Occasion of H. H.

101

No ma�er how one thinks of simplicity a�er (beyond) reflection, it is never exactly the same as the simplicity of immediacy; it is distinguished precisely by reflective knowledge, which is always present but is ethically subordinated. This is the difference between the martyr of immediacy and the martyr of reflection; therefore the immediate martyr cannot have genuinely sympathetic collisions. It is easy enough to pretend that once a person has thought reflection through, then a simple resolution emerges merely as a simple resolution of an immediate person, not in the least dogged by any reflection. This looks so grand, but it is the same sort of twaddle as all the Hegelian business about doubting and then arriving at certainty, etc.―the only people who talk like this are those who have never a�empted anything, precisely those who are furthest from trying it in earnest.

15

20

25

30

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 102–104 102

406 5

10

15

20

1849

About Peter. Peter came down in the month of December. He told me that at the last convention he had given a lecture in which he had spoken about Martensen and me, and was surprised that I had not heard of it. In addition, he said that in this same lecture he had actlly spoken against R. Nielsen and a certain H. H. Thereupon I said to him, H. H. is me. He was a bit taken aback by this, for he probably had not really read much of the li�le book, fully and firmly convinced that it was not by me. So we talked about it a li�le. Then Peter said, Well, there is not much point in our talking about it any more now, because first I have to write up the lecture. So he wrote up the lecture. Well, he said very li�le about H. H., and he also noted that there is certainly a striking resemblance to S. K. God knows what he actually said at the convention. This is quite an odd business, especially if one wants to be a person of conscience, etc. In a way that I find offensive, at the least, he has also recently taken up the biblical passage “All are yours,” which is also used in the lecture. In an earlier conversation, I once pointed out to him that, a�er all, there is a certain integrity which requires that one indicate the source of certain ideas and phrases―to which he replied that this was absolutely unnecessary because for the true believer it is the case that All are yours.

25

103

30

104 35

In referring to my activity as an author, I could use the words of John the Baptist: [“]I am a voice.[”] In order to prevent a mixup in which I myself would be taken for someone extraordinary, I always retreat, and the voice―i.e., what I say―is what remains. Yet I always retreat in such a way that I do acknowledge that I am striving. Thus, I am like a voice, but I always have one more listener than speakers generally have: myself.

Thomas a Kempis (4th book, chap. 6) cites Ezekiel 33:16 as follows: None of his sins shall remember him. Gnrlly, this is read differently: None of his sins shall be remembered. It would be curious if the former translation is correct, for it is indeed a much more powerful expression of the forgiveness of sins.

411 [a]

About Peter.

1

412

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 105–106

1849

Christmas Day. Today a Savior is born unto you―and yet it was night when he was born. It is an eternal metaphor: it must be night―and in the middle of the night it becomes day when the Savior is born. [“]Today[”] is an indication of eternal time, as when God says, [“]Today[”], and as in books that are published [“]in this year.[”] It is repeated from generation to generation, to every individual among these millions―and every time a person truly becomes a Xn it is said: Today a Savior is born unto you.

A Suggestion to Put an End to All the Nonsense about How One Comes into Xnty. What rlly ma�ers most in connection with all existential knowing is producing the right situation. This is what has been completely forgo�en, and therefore people cannot get an impression of Xnty. Therefore, I am thinking of a pers. who has not yet had any particular impression of Xnty nor any profound sense of his sin, but has gone along living in the comfortable notion that he will surely be saved. Then let him take the N.T. and read it. No one can deny that the ethical teaching presented here is of the sort that will move every hum. being’s imagination. Well, then, let him begin at this point. He then carries out his intention of making Xnty into something real, and for the present he says that it makes no difference to him whether or not Xt existed, who wrote the N.T., etc. So he puts it into practice. But you see, when he puts it into practice, his life, in the Christian manner, will collide with the world; he will be vilified as an egotist precisely at the point when he acts most unselfishly, etc. Now things become difficult; now he is unable to hold out on his own―now he must have religious help. In order to hold out against the surrounding world, he must have religious help. But not only that: he must also have religious help in order to hold out against himself. For precisely because the world presses on him so powerfully, in order to be able to hold out, on his own,

407

105

5

10

106

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 106–107

5

408 10

15

1849

413

against that world, he must at every moment be entirely certain that there is not something wrong with him, that he puts the good into practice perfectly. Now, you see, things are moving along at full speed; now he needs grace; now he needs Xt. This is how it is with Xnty. As soon as a person begins to want to put it into practice in earnest, he will learn what it is to need Xt. Let him literally give away all his wealth to the poor, literally love his neighbor, etc.―he will quickly learn to need Xt. Xnty is a garment that looks quite inviting at first glance and to the imagination, but as soon as one actually puts it on, one must have Xt’s help in order to be able to live in it. This seems extremely simple to me. But people have u�erly abolished this aspect of Xnty. And yet, it is this aspect that is alluded to in Xt’s words: If anyone wants to act in accordance with my words, he shall experience etc. He shall experience, yes, it is almost ironic: He shall experience first of all that he needs Xt’s help.

20

107

25

30

35

About H. H. Peter finds it inconsistent that when a person says “Only someone who remains silent becomes a martyr,” someone is saying it. Quite right, aber this happened because that was precisely the point at which I wanted to turn aside. You see, my dear Peter, here is a consistency of which you are not aware. At the same time, a form of martyrdom is nonetheless made possible right in the book itself, namely to be put to death for having defended the proposition that a hum. being does not have the right to allow himself to be put to death for the truth, because the times would certainly regard this as enormous arrogance. And finally, it was and is my opinion that a step such as being put to death for the truth also requires that one plays the right card in order to assist one’s times in becoming suitable accomplices, so that they can participate―for otherwise the responsibility becomes too great. All this and much more, by the way, can be found noted in the journal from the period when I published H. H. But of course I cannot illuminate such things without betraying

[a]

About H. H.

1

414

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 107–108

1849

the clandestine machinery; on the other hand, I note that Peter is not a particularly clever detective.

Peter’s Remarks at the Convention. The misfortune and fundamental defect of the times was―reasonableness. What was needed was indeed―the ecstatic. But it would have been impossible for the ecstasy of the immediate to have gained acceptance―the times would have protested that this was ridiculous. I daresay what was required, then, was my brilliant sober-mindedness and cunning in order to dupe the times into it. So I transformed myself existentially into a shrewd and frivolous person and then―also for other reasons, and for my own sake―I made use of the pseudonyms. And Peter knows nothing whatever concerning all this―the heterogeneity―but he goes out and makes me―me, personally―immediately into ecstasy and pro dii immortales as opposed to Martensenian sobermindedness! It is a misunderstanding that is so enormous that if it triumphs I am weakened by 50 percent.―You see, this is how things go when one brother, silently, in obedience to God, works absolutely quietly, making every sacrifice―and then the other brother, showing off, takes it upon himself condescendingly (a�er half an hour’s preparation) to decipher the signs of the times with great profundity. And then the invidious parallel between an existential author of my elasticity, and my wingspan, and my ethical daring and something ordinary: a professor who has a career at a university. Yes, let Peter―who persuades himself and others that he has such profound feelings for the cause of Xnty―let him consider carefully how he could really defend doing this. But it actually seems that Peter―having go�en into the habit of being self-satisfied at conventions, etc.―has become rather worldly minded, so that he might like to be a success, perhaps as a nonsensical mediator, a very rewarding role.―Incidentally, this is curious: I spoke with Grundtvig two days ago; he made quite scornful remarks concerning Peter in connection with his lecture: “his pro and contra and his mediating, without accomplishing anything himself.” It does not, however, by any means follow from this that Grundtvig and I are in agreement. Perhaps, indeed, Grundtvig would have preferred that he had a�acked me instead of this twaddling 17 Pro dii immortales, Latin, by the immortal gods.

409

108

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 108–109

5

10

410

15

109 20

1849

mediation, for Grundtvig probably only has the merest notion of my character, my diligence, and sacrifices. Finally, it is also irresponsible of Peter to forget that I of course exist for the entire public at large. So when his fragmentary mention of me (supported by the illusion that as a brother, and as an older brother, he must be truly well informed) labels me as [“]the ecstatic one[”]―what then? Then it takes on quite a different meaning. In the world at large, [“]the ecstatic one[”] is just another expression for a fantast, for something close to madness. And this is actlly the way the world at large judges an apostle. You see, that was something I knew. And that is the reason for all the cunning with which I, the shrewd, [“]interesting[”] one, artfully worked in the ecstatic. And all this will be lost―unless, fortunately, all Peter’s discussion of me is quickly forgo�en, which, incidentally, it surely would be, were it not for the unfortunate circumstance that he is my brother.

While the air is still so full Of winter snow’s shivering-cold, Why, then, do you open the window[?] Brorson

25

30

35

415

But to “open the window” is a symbol of impatience; the patient person does not sit by the window, he always has enough to do; or, if he sits by the window, he does his work and does not look out the window. It is impatient even to steal a glance out the window now and then; and the impatient person forgets his work in order to look out the window; then he puts his work completely aside in order to look out the window; finally, he even opens the window. And what does it mean not to open the window (something the patient person does not do)―it means to be introspective, which the patient person is, whereas the impatient person is extroverted. As time passes, the patient person reposes quietly in himself; the impatient person does not find repose in depth―therefore his mind clings to his eye, which of course is also like a window through which he stares.

[a]

see NB 12 p. 171.

1

416

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 110–112

1849

“The church,” where the organ provides music, sometimes even assisted by trumpets, is a�er all not rlly the place to proclaim Xnty.―No, in actuality, when the music is provided by derision, then, in the Christian sense, a person is properly supported by an accompaniment―if one can preach under such circumstances.

110

5

411

1

[a]

Mag. Stilling.

During the time Xns were persecuted, among the atrocities practiced was to smear the martyrs with pitch and the like, ignite them as torches, and then use them to illuminate ceremonial occasions. In Christendom fundamentally the same thing continues to be done: the unbloody martyrs in particular have had to burn slowly―and this suffering of theirs has nonetheless been the light in the Church.

111

On the Occasion of Stilling.

112

…“Thus, it is a pleasure for me to regard you, not as an adherent of myself, but as a declared adherent of a transfigured person, your spouse. And―permit me to tell you this―this is a possible way for you to understand the situation. This is something I know how to treasure: no connoisseur of gemstones has a keener eye for refractions than I have for the noble treasure of existential possibility. By belonging entirely, in pious dedication, to a deceased person, one is quite well protected against wasting one’s time on frivolities or deceiving one’s life into ‘serious’ vanities. In ‘the honesty of one’s heart,’ a person’s strength―and a person will acquire strengths, more and more strengths―a person’s strength will direct itself toward one single thing. A person’s life will acquire significance for oneself and will take on deeper and deeper significance for others. And then, at the completion of this life, which was so profoundly satisfying to a person―for it was indeed a life lived together with the deceased―in the moment of departure from this life, one will say: ‘I do not wish to be remembered; the significance of this life was a memorial to the deceased, whom posterity shall remember in gratitude for what I have accomplished.’ That is what will be said at the moment

10

15

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 112–114

5

10

1849

of departure from this life, and yet there is scarcely time to get it said, for the moment of departure is of course also the moment of meeting with the person from whom one fundamentally was never separated, or who never was fundamentally separate.” For a moment, I thought I would write this to himb. His life is constituted such that it is could become a religious existence of a more unusual sort. But everything depends on how deeply he has been wounded by the loss of his wife and how deeply he appropriates the wound ethically. If this is not the case, then a reply of this sort only becomes an incitement, tempting the imagination; and if this is the case, no incitement is needed. But he interests me because I understand how to evaluate his existential situation.

412

113

20

25

114 30

35

…. Or when His Eminence, with an artistic gesture, places his hand on his breast, on the spot where the star of his knightly order sparkles―though perhaps it is just in order to conceal his shame―and movingly gives assurances “that even if everyone abandoned Xt, if Xnty vanished from the world, I would nonetheless…” Well, whether he places his hand on his breast in order to argue on the basis of the knightly star or in order to conceal it, it does not convince me: for, a�er all, concealing the star with one’s hand for an instant is too li�le; in order to have any faith at all in this sort of assurance by a speaker, I would have to demand a view of a reality that is the precise opposite of this: marks of derision.

This is yet another way in which peop. o�en deceive themselves: In private conversation and association they say that so and so is a bad pers. or that his life injures the cause of the good, of Xnty―but in public they say nothing, counting this as a sort of leniency on their part, gentleness. Well, no thanks: doing so in public would be difficult, inconvenient, perhaps dangerous. What a double deceit. I have made it a principle not to waste my time going around privately, saying that someone is a scoundrel and the like. If I regard him as such and the ma�er as important, then I do it publicly. But in my view, going around like this and spewing nonsense privately is doing too li�le and is repulsive to me.

417

b

on the occasion of the li�le book against Martensen he sent me.

1

418

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 115–117

1849

When I stood alone, using more than half my strength to stand alone, people impudently took advantage of the situation, and even though they had an inkling that this was in fact ideality, they raised the popular objection: Well, this isn’t really anything, it’s just one individual. Now people are reversing the situation and are invoking their previous position against me. Now they say that I supposedly have acquired adherents and so on. And nonetheless they make an odd, indirect confession concerning themselves, for fundamentally, what they confess is that now they need to include me―now they cannot avoid the pressure, which once was used impudently in turning my ideality (which they now maintain was the highest thing) into eccentricity― whereas they had in fact done all they could to ignore me. But if it was the highest thing, they of course ought to have applauded it, etc., instead of ignoring it.

115

5

10

15

413

It is quite certain that the more costly something becomes, the more peop. value it. If it cost money to go to church, more people would go to church, etc. So common sense might think that it could serve Xnty by doing this or introducing such a fee. But there is another difficulty here: the divine does not want to be supported in this way. The infinite excellence of the divine consists precisely in the fact that it wants to be squandered, without the support of illusion―though of course infinitely aware that it is the divine, and sorrowfully aware that this is precisely why it enjoys so li�le respect. But it would never be possible that the divine would want to be helped by an illusion.

116

It has now become so easy to join in, now the ma�er is more or less se�led; then Peter comes, too, and says, referring to Martensen: I said it right from the start that he was no thinker. But why, then, did he not say so publicly, right at the start―but only at the end[?] The only response to the words [“]I said it right from the start,[”] is: not really.

117

20

25

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 118–120 118

5

10

119 15

414

20

120

30

35

1849

419

Ah, but there is beauty and the power of the eternal in this single word of Luther concerning the epistle from Phil. 2: Xt humbled himself―not: he was humbled. Ah, infinite elevation concerning which it is categorically, necessarily true that there was no one in heaven, on earth, under the earth who could humble him―he humbled himself. Herein is Xt’s infinite qualitative difference from every hum. being: that in every humiliation he suffers, he himself must unconditionally approve of being subjected to this humiliation. This is infinite elevation above suffering, but qualitatively, it is also infinitely more intense suffering.

Here is yet another way in which it will be clear that merely by taking the words “seek first the kingdom of God” for a moment at anything like their face value, a person will be spirited out of actuality, as it were: the others immediately create an enormous confusion, employing methods that are, if not unclean, then at any rate dubious―and then things get moving in a hurry. Meanwhile, a poor hum. being such as him stands there, daring to use only the purest of methods, those of eternity! How easy it would be for me very quickly to fire off some li�le newspaper articles that no one but I could write, but I dare not do it. And that is how it is with everything.

The day before yesterday I went for a walk with Nielsen. It was the last time for this year. In the course of the conversation he himself admi�ed that his entire change of course had in fact been determined, at least to some extent, by something personal. “He felt himself shunted aside in comparison with Martensen; for a number of years now, Martensen had occupied the seat in the Scientific Society that was supposed to be his” and so forth. Now, it is all very well that he himself says this. It is my hope both that actuality will work on him appropriately and that through his relationship with me he will come to have quite a different view of life: then something good could certainly come of this. The fact that he himself now acknowledges this is indeed an indication that some change has already taken place in him.

[a]

R. Nielsen.

1

420

1

[a]

Joh. Climacus.

[a]

Goldschmidt.

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 121–123

1849

In all the usual talk to the effect that Joh. Climacus is mere subjectivity, etc., people have completely overlooked the fact that, in addition to all the rest of his concreteness, in one of the final sections he points out that the remarkable thing is that there is a How that has the property that when it is precisely indicated, the What is also given―that this is the How of “faith.” Here, indeed, maximum inwardness is in fact shown to be objectivity. And this is a twist of the subjectivity principle that to my knowledge has never previously been carried out or accomplished in this way.

121

The title I could most wish to make into a standing appellation for Goldschmidt in the future is [“]the goody-goody.[”] It is an allusion to The Happy Capsize, where the whore who is to be married is given a wedding poem: [“]The Lily Entwined with the Rose,[”] dedicated to the goody-goody maiden, etc. And when G. made the transition from the whoring life in The Corsair to the proper respectability of Nord og Syd (entirely analogous to a whore ge�ing married), he ought at least have seen to it that a poem of this sort appeared in the newspapers.

122

5

10

15

20

415

25

Dialectics People have a pious suspicion concerning subjectivity, to the effect that as soon as the least is conceded to it, it will immediately lay claim to being meritorious―therefore objectivity is to be postulated. Fine. In order to constrain subjectivity it is rightly taught that no one is saved by good works, but by grace―and, consequently, by faith. Fine. But am I myself therefore unable to do anything with respect to becoming a believer? Here one must either immediately answer with an absolute No, and then we have a fatalistic understanding of election

123

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 123–125

5

10

15

20

124

25

30

416

125 35

by grace, or one must make a li�le concession. The fact is that people are always suspicious of subjectivity, and when it was established that a person is saved by faith, people immediately became suspicious that too much had been conceded here. So they added, [“]But no one can give himself faith, it is a gi� of God for which I must pray.[”] Fine. But can I myself pray, or are we to go further and say, [“]No, praying―i.e., praying for faith―is a gi� of God that no one can give himself; it must be given to him[”]? And what then? Then, once again, the ability to pray rightly that I might have the ability to pray rightly must also be given to me, etc. There are many, many complications―but at one or another point they must all be stopped by subjectivity. Making the criterion so great, so difficult can be praiseworthy as an expression for the majesty of God’s infinity, but subjectivity cannot be excluded unless we want to have fatalism.

Berlingske Tidende trumpets Ørsted’s book (The Soul in Nature) as a work that is to clarify the relation between faith and science, a work “in which, even when polemics are employed, it is always done with the finest phrases of the most cultivated urbanity.” One could be tempted to reply: From beginning to end, the whole book is scientifically (i.e., in the philosophical sense of science) insignificant, and even where it wants to be most significant it always moves toward the most insignificant of insignificant turns of phrase.

Epigram. “Science” is defended by Flyveposten and Berlingske Tidende―it is a�acked by Prof. Nielsen and Magister Stilling, men who have absolutely no understanding of science. Truly, the barbarians are

1849

421

422

1

[a]

the business-oriented Flyvepost and the bumbling Berlingske Tidende.

b

5

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 125–126

Meyer

[c]

“The Lily Entwined with the Rose,” the divorced spouse of The Corsair, now Nord og Syd’s “goodygoody,” Herr Goldschmidt

1849

at the gates. Who? Yes, wie es euch gefällt; I have in mind the barbarity that science is being defended by Flyveposten and Berlingske Tidende. If that is not the barbarity you fear, then keep calm, there are (yes, barbarians truly are at the gates) already reinforcements on the way: “The Lily Entwined with the Rose,” i.e., Nord og Syd’s (espoused) goody-goody, maiden bride, the divorced spouse of The Corsair, Herr bGoldschmidt seems not disinclined to take sides in order―in the most proper, respectable, and goody-goody manner possible―to defend “Christian science.”

There is a�er all really something base, something coarse in most of Holberg’s comedy, and this certainly explains why it is so popular, for it is linked to quite ordinary, hum., teasing, grinning malice. To present as comical, or actually to laugh at, the circumstances under which a hum. being suffers―no, I could not bring myself to do that. Under such circumstances I have no inclination whatever to laugh; I would rather try to help the man put things right, or I would seek to avoid him. Once he has been so incautious as to marry a young wife, an old man fears being made a cuckold―then he really suffers from this imagined notion. No, I do not consider this comical; as mentioned, I would either try to make it clear to him that this was a delusion or I would let him go for what he in fact is―but not that sort of comedy, nor the sort of wit characterized by a Troels. The more I consider this, the more I see how demoralizing this sort of comedy is. And the more I come to think of you, you noble one, you who a�er all were the only one who nobly and profoundly understood the sort of comedy that befits a noble spirit. It is absolutely necessary that the person concerned be satisfied with himself in his ridiculous delusion; the moment he becomes dissatisfied 1 wie es euch gefällt] German, whatever you want (title of Schlegel and Tieck’s German translation of Shakespeare’s As You Like It).

5

10

126

20

25

417 30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 126–128

5

10

127 15

20

25

with himself in his ridiculous delusion, we stop laughing at him. Next, this noble irony is not to be represented as being at the head of grinning crowds or as something physically strong, but as you―o noble, simple man!―who at the moment were much, much the weaker, whereas the Sophists had the power, honor, and esteem, and were themselves exceedingly happy in the delusion an entire era shared with them―so that they were far from suffering under it, this delusion, the ridiculousness of which was seen only by you, you noble wise man!

This is yet another reason why it can be a good thing for Christianity to be represented by an unmarried person. In the end, the li�le bit of Christendom that is Christian is absorbed into the festival of Christmas and its Christmas cookies. The li�le baby Jesus: this is the sort of Xnty that is farthest removed from accentuating the concept of imitation. Of course it is not a question of becoming a child oneself―no, the Savior himself is neither more nor less than a child, and that’s that. And Daddy and Mommy also regard their li�le Sophie as a li�le God-child. Sheer effeminacy. In general, this absolute and singular emphasis on Christmas turns Xnty completely upside down. Christmas only arose in the 4th century, but in this respect the orthodox are not eager to cling to the first 3 centuries.

418

128

35

It is a shame that Dr. Kierkegaard has made a mess of himself. As Gedske in The Lying-In Room is unable to speak a single word without crying, as in Troy (see Ulysses von Ithaca), where custom dictated that when a man wanted to say, “Give me my boots,” he sang it with trills and tremolos, so it is with Dr. K., who cannot make the most insignificant observation without saying, “When we gaze upon history, seeing for ourselves with our eyes and with our hearts, fixing our gaze upon history, then the

1849

423

424

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 128–130

1849

vision becomes clarified: it is wonderfully delightful for a person, one vaguely discerns, etc.” A person loses patience with this bombast, which promises so much and contains so li�le. And one becomes more than impatient because this bombast is continually accompanied by an equally affected modesty that speaks of its own lack of knowledge and so forth, the point of which is surely the notion that the person we have before us is a seer. And yet the truth is surely this: Dr. K. is a man of unusual abilities and is very well-read, a clever mind. On the other hand, he is not―and this is something one sees right away―he is not what he leads himself and others to believe through his copying of Grundtvig: he is not a seer who sees for himself with his eyes and with his heart, when he gazes upon history, vaguely discerning―no (as Joh. Climacus has said on a similar occasion), no, he is merely jesting. Would that he might take possession of his actual talents and lay down a proper criterion for his work, understanding that in a country as small as Denmark, every talented person ought first and foremost make an effort to uphold that criterion; would that he might do this and disdain what is easy and affected: being a seer in the eyes of some rural priests who presumably also see for themselves with their eyes and hearts.1 (for such things can be repeated infinitely, and even the caraway pretzel that Niels Klim lost in his fall―of course, even that immediately assumed a posture imitating N. K.)

5

10

15

20

1

As a bass singer can sometimes sing a note so deep that it simply cannot be heard, and only when one stands very close to him and notices some convulsive movements of the mouth and throat, can one be sure that anything is happening at all―in this same way, sometimes Grundtvig gazes so deeply into history that one can see nothing at all; but it is certainly deep!

Other people who have been the objects of persecution by the rabble, as I have been, have at least something that exercises a restraining influence: high government posts, large incomes, rank and title―these are things that “the crowd” nonetheless respects, and in any case it prevents the crowd from regarding the person

25

129

30

419

130 35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 130–132

1849

involved as half-mad. I have nothing, am nothing; I have only the unusual purity of my cause, my selflessness, my sacrifices: well, thanks anyway―in this wretched world, these things by themselves are enough to cause a person to be regarded as half-mad. 5

131

10

15

20

132 25

30

420

35

And this confounded greed for ideas, audacious expressions, and the like! I cannot rlly talk, in the deeper sense of the word, with anyone. For in order even to be tolerably capable of understanding me, a person must be more than a li�le developed. And when that is the case, he cannot resist the temptation to exploit my words in order to produce something; so one person exploits them in books, another in sermons, a third person in conversations with others, etc. My misfortune is that I am and continue to be out of proportion to our small scale. And no one understands how a person can suffer from this; no one can understand it, they can only envy it. Naturally, in relation to God I can do nothing other than give thanks for the indescribable good he has done for me, so much more than I had expected.

The Proclamation of Christianity. This is the difficulty I have run up against: if Xnty is to be proclaimed in its truth, as it is in the N.T., then it is a language of God, and it takes someone who is actlly more than a hum. being to proclaim it. The spiritual inversion in relation to ordinary hum. ma�ers―that I simply ought to rejoice when the world goes against me, that this is rlly what it is to have good fortune, etc., etc.―well, even if, straining to the utmost, I were somewhat capable of remaining on this pinnacle, it is nevertheless cruel to speak to other peop. in this way. I understand this. But what has happened? Well, genuine proclamation of Xnty has disappeared from the world. The Xnty that is proclaimed is anything but Xnty.

425

426

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 132–134

1849

So I thought that something poetical was needed. Xnty is presented in a poetical form in its true superhuman sublimity―and then how far out one can venture must be le� up to each person. But with this the ma�er nevertheless becomes more difficult, for when the person who has div. authority is included as the person in command, his decisive orders are precisely what provide assistance in venturing.

5

What a painful self-contradiction there is in Xt’s relationship to the disciples. He, the Master, He who demanded that He be adored―He of course sees that, hmnly speaking, the disciples in fact suffered by being His disciples, so that, hmnly speaking, it was indeed almost as if He ought to thank them for remaining faithful to him. And what a strange dialectic of dignity: to know oneself to be God and yet to be so far from being able to assure a bit of esteem for one’s faithful disciples, that, on the contrary, they must suffer degradation precisely because of their relationship to oneself― and then to uphold the notion of infinite dignity. But is this not how it is everywhere: Christianity can only be illuminated by analogy to madness. A madman can continue to cling to the delusion that he is king, despite the protests of the entire world―ah, but when one is not mad, then, when everything expresses contempt and mockery, then to cling to the idea that one is in fact the infinitely exalted one, to sustain this vis-à-vis the disciples, who of course, hmnly speaking, instead of adoringly giving thanks for having been permi�ed to become disciples, would certainly be within their rights, hmnly speaking, in le�ing him feel that it was sooner he who ought to thank them―he, who in a certain sense cannot do without them, for he has to have and make use of a couple of peop.: you see, this is superhuman!

133

Luther.

134

Here one sees the consequences of not being dialectical. In a sermon Luther expresses the most vehement opposition to the faith that is related to the person instead of to the Word; true faith looks to the Word, regardless of who the person is.

10

15

20

25

30

35

421

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 134–136

5

10

15

20

135 25

30

136

1849

Yes, this is certainly true with respect to a relationship between one hum. being and another, but in other respects Xnty is abolished by this theory. Then we would have a teaching in the ordinary sense of the term, in which the teaching is more important than the teacher, instead of Christianity as the paradox that what is more important is the person. Why, then, would Paul so vehemently insist that he is an apostle ουϰ απ᾽ ανϑρωπων ουδε δι᾽ ανϑρωπου except to point out the heterogeneity, which of course is authority. In another connection Paul can quite consistently remove this difference when insisting on the presence of Xt’s person, as when he argues against the fact that some say they are of Peter, others of Apollos, others of Paul, instead of all being of Xt. In general, Xnty’s paradoxical heterogeneity from all other doctrines of the scientific-scholarly sort consists in the fact that it posits authority. A philosopher with authority is nonsense. For a philosopher extends no farther than his teachings extend; if I can prove that his teachings are self-contradictory, erroneous, etc., then he has nothing to say to us. The paradox is that the personality is higher than the teaching. And therefore it is indeed nonsense for a philosopher to require faith.

Ah, but this is typical: religiousness (as one always finds it presented in more rigorous edifying writings) regards the longing for death as something pious. And in our times people censure this, almost want to make it ludicrous, ostentatiously clinging to this life. Here, as everywhere, something close to an absolute reversal of religiousness has again been achieved, even while people play at being religious. The ma�er is quite simple: fundamentally, people do not believe in any sort of eternal life, and they fear death―therefore every effort is made to uphold a zest for life, and people mutually reinforce one another in doing so.

Just as nowadays people feel disgust and get the shivers when they think of being a Jesuit and the like (because people immediately think of abominable degeneracy), one day they will come to think this way about being a journalist.

8 ουϰ απ᾽ ανϑρωπων ουδε δι᾽ ανϑρωπου] Greek, not of men, nor by any man.

427

428

1

a

addressing the entire country, if possible,

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 136–137

1849

Fine men are to be found among butchers, but a certain brutality is inseparable from being a butcher; it is a part of the profession. It is worse with being a journalist: a certain degree of dishonesty is inseparable from even the most honest journalist. The human race’s deepest falling-away from God is designated by the word “journalist.” It is an ungodly a�empt to make something abstract into an absolute power, and anonymity completes the triumph of the lie. If I were a father and I had a daughter who had been seduced, I would not despair over her; I would hope for salvation. But if I had a son who became a journalist and continued as a journalist for 5 years, I would give him up. It is possible that in a given circumstance I could be mistaken, that the daughter could be the one who was lost and the son the one who was recovered, but viewed as an idea, my remarks are correct: to serve politics with the help of the daily press is too much for a hum. being. Who, indeed, would dare deny that he had ever once―perhaps many times―told a li�le lie: but to use a li�le lie every day, and in print, so that one thus addresses thousands upon thousands―this is frightful. One shudders at the brutality with which the butcher uses a knife―ah, but this is infinitesimally small in comparison to the irresponsibility and callousness with which a journalista uses untruth.

422

5

10

15

20

25

In order to endure intellectual exertions such as mine, I needed diversion, the diversion of chance encounters in the streets and alleys―for associating with a few distinguished people is not rlly a diversion. This has now been made impossible for me, because diversion is impossible when one is recognized by everyone, who constantly and almost insanely do nothing but remind a person of one thing. Thus I had previously had the consolation of being able to retreat to the countryside whenever I wished, to live in idyllic peace, making use of the respect I enjoyed in the capital to keep people at a bit of a distance, and then, with the ease thus granted me, I delighted in talking to everyone. This, too, has been denied me. Marked as I am, a person can only live in a larger city, where there at least are others who have a notion of what this sort of thing means. Even the bourgeoisie in town are impossible rlly to

137

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 137–139

423

1849

associate with, because this sort of thing means something quite different to them, whereas the country folk know nothing at all. And all this is the consequence of living in a country that is not a country, but a provincial town.

5

138

10

15

139 20

25

30

35

The vain li�le Danish people, who are so conceited with respect to their renown, ought at least have enough sense to realize that when everyone in a generation strives to be loved and respected and rewarded for immediately placing his li�le fragment of talent in the momentary service of the moment―that generation will have a deficit in history: journalists, braggarts at conventions and national assemblies, etc.―their names will definitely not contribute to glorifying the nation.―And yet this is where things are tending. There do not seem to be any high points looming among the younger generation.

Christ as Exemplar expresses absolutely that of which no hum. being is, of course, capable: absolutely holding to God in everything. As a consequence of this, it is an unconditional necessity that his life collide absolutely with the world, with hum. beings, and that he become the most forsaken and hated one, and the most wretched. Then the words of mockery resound: “He trusted in God―let us now see if God will have him.” And the malicious glee in this mockery is nothing specific to those Jews; it is in every hum. being. For there is strife between God and hum. beings, and one must choose whom to support. To a lesser degree, something similar can be experienced by a hum. being. Merely to make an approximation of earnestly holding to God is the sure way to miss everything that is temporal and worldly; for the more one holds to God, the more one strives solely to keep one’s cause unsullied and unselfish and one’s efforts sacrificial―all of which becomes one’s misfortune, for the person who holds with hum. beings knows that the trick is to secure for oneself earthly advantages that one can share with others. But all the same, peop. certainly do notice that such a hum. being’s life is powerful, and they are not fond of him―they

429

430

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 139–140

1849

almost hate him. And then, when a sort of analogue to Xt’s sufferings finally arrives―being forsaken by God―then the mockery is jubilant and it worships Nemesis in what happens to the man. Then they say: He should have remained with us. Earlier they had said: Join up with us, for love of God consists precisely in loving us, holding together with us in profiting from life. Everyone who merely makes an approximation of earnestly holding to God is in one sense eo ipso squandered, even though for faith this is most blessed thing of all; he misses everything in this life and then is hated for doing so; if this la�er happens, in addition to being squandered, he is also sacrificed. That is how it is: but this must not even be heard. If someone merely says this, his fate will be like that of the person squandered and sacrificed. It must not be heard because it disturbs peop.’s self-infatuated doctrine that holding together is loving God.

Ascending Forms of Religiousness. A.) The individual relates to God in order that things go well for him here on earth―that is, to benefit straightforwardly in an earthly sense from the God-relationship. B.) The individual relates to God in order to be saved from sin, in order to triumph over his inclinations, in order to find in him a merciful judge―thus in such a way that the situation becomes completely undialectical, and the individual has the sole benefit of this relationship. C.) It is required that the individual confess in word and deed (self-denial, the forsaking of finite goals) his faith in which his salvation lies; but the confession will have the consequence that the individual will come to suffer, making himself unhappy, hmnly speaking. Here is the dialectical element in benefiting from the God-relationship: at every moment of weakness it must seem to him as if what he gets from the God-relationship is trouble and adversity, because hmnly speaking, of course, he would be rid of a great deal of suffering if he gave up the confession, both the words of the confession and the deeds of the confession. But if at any instant things were to become so confused for the individual that he formed the overwhelming impression that it

424

10

15

140 20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 140–142

5

425 10

15

141

20

25

30

1849

was almost as if he were doing God a favor (as if it were not the case both that God can require the infinite, and that what he does for the individual is infinitely beyond comparison, compared to which this [individual’s] suffering is nothing), then at every such instant the individual is ungrateful and is in danger of becoming blasphemous. In such a state of confusion I would advise that it was preferable to retreat from the danger for a moment and confess one’s ingratitude, rather than this frightful thing happen: to become blasphemous in venturing, in venturing to have the delusion of being able to do God a favor. Note It is not said that the dangers in confessing were present only in early days of Xnty; alas, the same thing will still happen to every honest confession; for the fact is that we are cra�y and use every illusion to evade a decisive confession in word and deed.

When Xt is compared to the bridegroom and the believer to the bride, it must be remembered that the initial term of this metaphor does not fit, for surely it is not the bride who chooses the bridegroom, but the bridegroom who chooses the bride by proposing to her. But he courts her; for just that moment he is inferior: this is not the way it is with Xt. But nevertheless a weak analogy can also be developed here, for just as it is the man’s conscious superiority that causes him to behave so courteously toward the weaker sex by going down on bended knee (and this is exactly why it would be improper if the girl, who is truly the weaker, did the courting, for in that case it would simply be begging, precisely because she is not strengthened with the knowledge, deep down, that she is truly the stronger), thus the distinguishing characteristic of infinite superiority is to begin by presenting oneself almost as someone who asks for the other person’s devotion. This is the considerateness of superiority, and infinite superiority is capable of doing this precisely because it is infinite superiority.

35

142

The Sunday between Christmas and New Year, Epistle: Gal 4:1–7 Theme: God’s Upbringing, or Our Upbringing by God.

431

432

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 142–144

1849

1) at first we are slaves under the Law[;] 2) then we become children[;] 3) then children who cry, Abba, Father, and co-heirs with Christ. There is thus increasing openheartedness in relation to God. But it is not like the relationship between parents and children, where openheartedness comes gradually as the child becomes an adult; here it is the reverse: one starts out not as a child, but as a slave, and openheartedness increases proportionately as one becomes more and more a child. It is as I have remarked in another journal: the increase of inwardness in the God-relationship is characterized by things going backward for a person: one does not straightforwardly come closer to God; on the contrary, one discovers the infinite distance more and more profoundly. Therefore one does not begin by being a child, progressively becoming more intimate as one becomes older; no, one becomes more and more a child.

5

10

426

15

Lavater draws a nice parallel: As Paul had to have a thorn in the flesh, Maria had a sword through her heart; the difference between the masculine and the feminine is so significant.

143

It is one of those foolish remarks by which one immediately recognizes that someone is not a psychologist: “That there are certain things that one can indeed understand would drive a man mad―but not other things.” This is a foolish a�empt to explain in casu madness as if it were not madness, because one is so capable of “understanding” that he went mad. No, when it concerns especially important, unusual, [“]interesting,[”] etc., ma�ers―becoming preoccupied and taking an interest in the fact that a man went mad is a sort of novelistic interest, and one’s sympathy is in fact egotism. It is different with respect to going mad over what is termed a trifle, and yet here people forget something a psychologist would immediately think of: that precisely this [trifle] has surely been a reflective element in constituting the madness, so that the man lost his mind and became furious over the fact “that such a trifle could have such power

144

26 in casu] Latin, in this case.

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 144–145

5

10

1849

433

over him, that other people would believe that such a trifle had such power over him,” etc. But in relation to this entire aspect of psychiatry, it is so profoundly true that to be a physician is to be willing to suffer oneself. Someone who does not have this humble dedication, patience, love to be willing to endure the suffering, serving (as a servant, as the lesser, in the form of a servant), pu�ing himself in the other person’s situation: he heals no one; and if the physician is willing in this way to suffer more than the sick, he will heal many.

427

145

15

20

25

30

35

Mood. (Poetical). Oh, once upon a happier time, when “Jesus’ Name” had its full pathos, when it had not yet been abused by sanctimony and thoughtlessness, and even less had become shopworn and slovenly through continued abuse, so that it became nothing at all. In those days it was blessed to confess that one belonged entirely to this name. But now, now it would almost be the true pathos of inwardness to suppress it, to form one’s life as closely as possible to Xnty’s prescriptions, if possible to suffer what a Xn suffered, and yet never mention Xt’s name, preserving it as a secret in one’s heart. Thus here it is as if everything were reversed, so that the true Xn might feel himself obligated not to speak this name that had been so horribly abused, this name, for him the most valuable thing in the world, in order then to be able to live in an inward fellowship with Him. Oh, once upon a happier time, when enemies at least did not insist on being Xns, whereas now the true Xn would insanely be put to death―by Xns―because he is not a Xn. Ah, it was a consolation for those martyrs that at the very hour of death they had the blessed consolation and reassurance of having their crime announced to them: that theya were Xns―what more blessed words could they wish to hear. But the insanity and the insane fear and trembling for the verdict on the Xn martyr to be the only accusation that could cause him anguish: You are being put to death because you are not a Xn!

a

were put to death because they

1

434

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 146–147

1849

People misunderstand the divergence in the newest philosophy (where Trendelenburg rightly points out that we ought to begin with ϰινησις), as if it were merely a question about whether one ought to begin with being or with becoming. No, the question about becoming, about movement, recurs at every point. If we do not begin by presupposing ϰινησις, we never get away from that point with Seyn, and even if one mendaciously gets to movement, it can be stopped at any point, because ϰινησις had been required in order to get away from the initial location.

146

5

10

428

“The Prodigal Son” ― “The Father” ― “The Brother” 1

5

[a]

This is no novel; the story is very short and there is not one single word about love, no female character; no, it could never occur to an author of novels to make use of circumstances such as these: a father and two sons, neither more nor less; it is a very simple tale. b

there comes a moment when

10

c

15

d

(for the girl must be satisfied with receiving permission to look out the window once in a while; she is not permi�ed to go out as the boy is)

and from this, of course, comes an essential constituent of a young girl, “the sigh”―amid all her happiness: the sigh

147

3 Discourses Or perhaps an entirely new form could be chosen: godly diversion (light reading) for edification. 1. The Prodigal Son Let us begin at the beginning. The beginning is: He wants to go out into the world―he is bored with staying at home, seeing the same things and hearing the same things.―It is an old story. This is how it looks to youth:b “his father’s house has become too cramped for him.” Thus it is for a girl, as well; when she peers out the window of her father’s house,c it seems to her that she discovers that what she is seeking lies in the distance;d but usually that is as far as ma�ers get; she remains quietly in her father’s house and her longing simply becomes a quiet inwardness, a treasure for the whole of her life. But the son must get out, go away.

3 ϰινησις] Greek, movement, change (see also explanatory note). 8 Seyn] German, being (See also explanatory note).

20

25

30

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 147

1849

NB14:147, with marginal notes, including note NB14:147.c at the bo�om of the page.

435

436

1

5

10

15

20

25

35

40

A�er having received―yes, it would certainly be possible to dispute his right to this, but we can talk about that somewhere else, and since the father, who of course was the person it concerned most closely, makes no objection, we will not do so, either―thus, a�er having received “his” share of the father’s estate, he travels abroad. If he has misfortune in the world, he will in any case not be able to say that it was because his father was niggardly and strict and had blocked the path of his development by denying him money for his foreign travels. So he travels. This is not a novel, one notices this immediately―the tale rushes all too quickly to the catastrophe. Surely, I use this foreign word correctly here: for there actually is an overturning in this tale. He travels―and at that very instant not only do he and the tale arrive at that foreign land, no, at that very instant we have reached the end of the story, of its first part, at any rate. It could easily be shown that there may be a deeper significance in this almost striking brevity, for the shorter the time in which a wastrel uses up everything he owns, the greater a wastrel he is, and thus it would be a self-contradiction to expand to many volumes a tale of the greatest wastrel’s squandering. Therefore, keeping such remarks in mind, we, too, will a�empt to be brief.

1849

here the story is told. Had he remained in his father’s presence, he would surely not have done so badly. Thus his misfortune was that he traveled far away―but perhaps it was also his salvation, for his father was not so nearby as to interfere with the serious schooling he had to undergo. Genrlly speaking, fathers do not understand this, and they lack the magnanimity to send their sons away or to understand that they must go away: then things never come to any sort of resolution. From beginning to end, the prodigal son kept bad company―he spent his money on whores, and he ended up herding swine: the company he kept was thus more or less the same. It is a misunderstanding to regard him as the prodigal son only a�er he had lost his money; he was equally the prodigal son when he was squandering his money on whores. “He came to himself”―you see, now the foreign travels are over, and they do not really end with his return home, but with his coming to himself. And from here on we will begin to speak of the prodigal son in a different way. e

2 The Father In genrl people tend to fasten all their a�ention on the prodigal son and almost forget the father. But this is unreasonable, for this father was truly a most remarkable man. If you want to know exactly what is remarkable about him, I shall tell you, and pay careful a�ention to it. What is remarkable is that it was precisely when he got a prodigal son that he really became a father in earnest. Other fathers are certainly willing to be fathers when there is a well-behaved child―but when there is a prodigal son, the father says: I do not want to be his father any longer, let him paddle his own canoe. People do not want to be the father of that prodigal son―but this father, this remarkable man, wanted to be the father of )

30

e

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 147

5

10

15

430

20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 147

5

10

15

431 20

25

30

35

40

precisely this prodigal son; it is almost as if he did not care very much about being the father of the prodigal son’s brother, the well-behaved child. Was that not strange? Oh, if only a storyteller were permi�ed to end his story in this way: [“]Was that not strange?[”]―then I would be permi�ed to end it like this. Prodigal sons are o�en found in actual life, but God knows how many times there has actually been such a father, and whether he does not actually belong in a fairy tale―and in the gospel? And why in the gospel? Because the father spoken of is actlly God in Heaven. But let us begin over again in order to pay a�ention to this loving father and get to know him. The son wants to go out into the world, finds his father’s house too cramped. In a certain sense, this was indeed perhaps ingratitude toward the father, but not a word is heard about this. On the contrary, the father has surely concerned himself so lovingly with his son that he has not thought of himself at all. Then the son demands that the father divide the estate with him. How unjust, the son of course does not have the least right to demand anything! How ungrateful, it is almost like saying to the father: Fundamentally, I wish you were dead. And if it would have made the son happy and would truly have been to his benefit, the loving father also would gladly have wished himself dead. So he divides the estate with him. It is certainly rare enough that a father is willing to do something like this, but if that were the case, then the parting would surely be of a sort to be expected under such circumstances. But this father, he can put up with everything and yet continue to be the father. Fatherhood does not hang upon him loosely, like a title. The son wants to go away―he is the father. The son wants him to divide the estate with him―he is the father. The son travels away―he is the father. Everything is lost, the son is prodigal―he is the father. Well, if you require some sort of change in order to hold your a�ention―then we might just as well stop right here, for this father of ours is the most boring

1849

437

438

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 147

1849

pers. on the earth, and the only thing I can tell you in consolation is that in actuality such a father is an extremely rare occurrence. Here everything is worked through bit by bit. )

3 “The Brother.” People generally present him as hard-hearted and shrink back from his hard-heartedness, feeling themselves superior. But you see, if you want to benefit from the gospel story, that is something you should be careful about doing, and you should be especially careful about doing it too hastily. Hmnly speaking, he is right, not a word can be said in opposition to that. His annoyance is not exaggerated, it remains within reasonable bounds, and hmnly speaking, he is right. So let us not make use of this gospel on Sunday just so we can imagine that we are quite different from this brother. Well, there is one reason for his annoyance that is not immediately seen; for, a�er all, he was of course a good son; surely, he also loved his father and believed that he deserved to be loved more by his father; therefore it is not even because he was angry with his brother, but rather because his brother―and such a brother―should be preferred at his expense, inasmuch as the father’s joy was indeed so great that it was almost as if he had only one son, the prodigal, as if the other son were disinherited, as if the father―unlike the other fathers, who did not want to be fathers of a prodigal son―had said, I do not want to be the father of the righteous son. And there is one thing that I want to point out here: one often sees both lesser and greater instances in which the ill-behaved child is favored; instances when people are immediately grateful because the ill-behaved child behaves a bit be�er―so that the most advantageous position, both in the life of the family and in the greater life of the state is almost that of being the ill-behaved child.f My objection to this brother is actlly this: when he sees how indescribably this delights his father, out of love for his father he ought to have shared his father’s view. In addition, one sees here an example of the difference betw. fatherly love and brotherly love. Next, go through everything that has been preserved concerning this brother. This is added. Then the parable of the two brothers is perhaps to be used, where the one said, Yes―and did not do it―and the other said, No―and did his father’s will.

1

f

One must see that the prodigal son has had an actual conversion.

5

10

15

432 20

25

30

35

40

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 148–149

148

5

10

433

15

20

25

30

149 35

1849

The Asceticism of Christianity. So, when they have shown what was foolish about flagellation in monasteries, etc., people happily and truly believe they have explained away all the asceticism of Xnty and shown how far Xnty is from such things. But wait just a minute! This indeed always remains, it is the paradigm―when one is the King of Kings: to clothe oneself in the form of a poor servant, to have no place to lay one’s head. The self-denial Xnty requires is illustrated by this example, but this of course is really asceticism and is something other than remaining in the world (as opposed to monastic flight from the world) in order to be honored and esteemed and to enjoy life. In brief, where indeed have people found the doctrine, which has now become Xn orthodoxy (for it is supported both by Mynster and by Grundtvig, each in his way), that Xnty is enjoyment of life[?] As I have shown in another journal: Certainly, the person who remains in the world in order to suffer for the truth is right in comparison to the hermit’s flight from the world, but the person who remains in the world, clinking glasses and bearing decorations, in order (to use ordinary hum. language) to enjoy himself in life, is hardly justified in comparison to the hermit. And let us not deceive one another: everyone knows very well what is meant by wanting to enjoy life. The fact that such a person can nevertheless be exposed to ordinary hum. sufferings, illness, etc. (just as any pagan can) is of course simply part of being a hum. being, and the impudence with which such sufferings are classified under the heading [“]Christian Suffering[”] is surely yet another lie.

The words I have so o�en said to R. Nielsen are in fact true and appropriate: “It makes an infinite difference whether a person goes to an auction with the intention of bidding 100 rd, starts by bidding 5 rd, and ends up by actually giving 100 rd―or whether a person immediately bids 100 rd upon walking into the

439

a

The Asceticism of Xnty.

1

440

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 149–150

1849

auction hall―there is an especially infinite difference in the realm of the spirit, where the price is always the transaction, or the price is the ware itself, is what is purchased.” 5

1

5

10

15

20

25

a

concept existentia there. The Leibnitzian principle: If God is possible, he is necessary, is quite correct. Nothing is added to a concept whether it has or does not have existence; it is a ma�er of complete indifference; it indeed has existence, i.e., concept-existence, ideal existence. But, of course, as was taught as early as Aristotle, existence corresponds to the individual, to the single individual, which lies outside or is not subsumed into the concept. For an individual animal, an individual plant, an individual hum. being, existence (to be―or not to be) is of very decisive importance; an individual hum. being of course does not have concept-existence. The very way in which recent philosophy speaks of existence shows that it does not believe in the immortality of the individual; it does not believe at all, it only conceives the eternity of “the concepts.”

That which confuses the entire doctrine of “essence” in logic is that people do not notice that they are always operating with “the concept” existence. But the concept existence is an ideality, and the difficulty is precisely whether existence is subsumed into its concept. Thus Spinoza can be right: essentia involvit existentiam, namely concept-existence, i.e., the ideality’s existence. But in another sense Kant is right to say that through “existence, no new definition of content is added to a concept.” K. is obviously thinking honestly of an existence―empirical existence―that is not subsumed into its concept. In relationships of ideality, it is everywhere the case that essentia is existentia―if it is possible in other respects to use thea

11 essentia involvit existentiam] Latin, essence includes existence (see also explanatory note). 19 existentia] Latin, existence.

150

10

435

15

20

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 150

1849

The last entry, NB14:150, continues into the margin and beneath the main entry.

441

Notes for JOURNAL NB11 Critical Account of the Text of Journal NB11 445

Explanatory Notes for Journal NB11 453

NOTES FOR JOURNAL NB11

Critical Account of the Text by Finn Gredal Jensen and Kim Ravn Translated by K. Brian Söderquist Edited by Bruce H. Kirmmse

Explanatory Notes by Peter Tudvad Translated by George Pa�ison and K. Brian Söderquist Edited by K. Brian Söderquist

445

Critical Account of the Text I. Description of the Manuscript Journal NB11 is a bound journal in quarto format. Kierkegaard placed a label “NB11” on the outside of the book (see illustration 1). The manuscript of Journal NB11 is preserved in the Kierkegaard Archive (KA) at the Royal Library in Copenhagen. The journal is wri�en in a gothic hand with some portions in a latin hand. Sixteen entries are wri�en in a decidedly latin hand.1 Kierkegaard also employs a latin hand when writing Latin, French, and Italian words, and occasionally for calligraphic purposes in connection with titles and headings. Kierkegaard wrote across the full width of the inside cover of the journal (NB11:2). The last two lines of entry NB11:106 were wri�en in the marginal column, as were the last three lines of NB11:224. Eighteen entries are wri�en lengthwise.2 One page in the journal contains the last three lines of entry NB11:26, wri�en horizontally across the page, as well as NB11:27, wri�en lengthwise. Entry NB11:174 is recorded diagonally in the main column (see illustration on p. 100). Two entries, NB11:8 and NB11:27, were recorded in red ink.

II. Dating and Chronology According to the label affixed to its front cover, Journal NB11 was begun on May 2, 1849, and must have been concluded no later

) See entries NB11:6, 8, 20–21, 27, 105, 122, 132, 150, 192, 194, 202– 205, and 211. With the exception of NB11:205, all the passages are recorded lengthwise in the journal.

1

) See NB11:6, 8, 14, 20–21, 27, 105, 122–123, 132, 150, 192, 194–195, 202–204, and 211. Entries that were wri�en lengthwise along the margin are reproduced horizontally in KJN by using the full width of the page, that is, across the columns reserved for both the main and the marginal entries.

2

446

J O U R N A L NB 11 than July 19, 1849, which is the beginning date of the next journal, NB12.1 Three of the journal’s entries bear dates: NB11:8 (May 4 and 5), NB11:123 (June 4), and NB11:192 (June 25). In the first case, the two dates have been added later, which is clear because the entry itself is wri�en in red ink whereas the dates have added in black ink. The first date, “May 4,” is added at the top of the entry, and the second date has been inserted into the entry: “Today, May 5th, they [Two Ethical-Religious Essays] were sent to Gjødvad.” Along with NB11:192, which is dated “Monday, June 25,” the next entry, NB11:193, titled “Historical Note,” refers to events of the previous days, when Kierkegaard a�empted to visit Bishop Mynster “on Friday,” that is, June 22, and then J. N. Madvig “the day before yesterday (Saturday),” that is, June 23. He also reports a short visit to Mynster “today, Monday” in which Mynster explains that he does not have time for a longer conversation. NB11:193 was thus recorded on June 25 as well. Entry NB11:61 indicates that it was wri�en the same day that Mynster preached, “Today, e.g., (the Sunday a�er Ascension Day),” which was May 20, 1849. Likewise, in entry NB11:87, Kierkegaard mentions Mynster’s sermon, “today, at Pentecost vespers,” which was May 27, 1849. Several entries contain references to current events or circumstances that make dating possible indirectly. This is the case with entry NB11:14, which reads: “It looks dark out, and yet I’m very much at peace. / This day, my birthday, [i.e., May 5], will be an unforge�able day for me!” In entry NB11:46, Kierkegaard notes that Rasmus Nielsen’s new book has been published, which means the entry could have been wri�en on May 19, 1849, the publication date of Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed. Forelæsninger over Jesu Liv [The Faith of the Gospels and Modern

) The marginal addition NB12:143.a may have been added at a later date than the main entry if by “a li�le book” Kierkegaard is referring to Rasmus Nielsen, Mag. S. Kierkegaards “Johannes Climacus” og Dr. H. Martensens “Christelige Dogmatik.” En Undersøgende Anmeldelse [Magister S. Kierkegaard’s “Johannes Climacus” and Dr. H. Martensen’s Christian Dogmatics: An Investigative Review]. The book was advertised as having been published in Adresseavisen, no. 242, October 15, 1849, and was 132 pages long. The main entry, NB12:143, was presumably wri�en shortly a�er September 7, 1849, which is the date of a preceding entry, NB12:138. See the explanatory note to entry NB12:143.a in the present volume.

1

Critical Account of the Text

1. Cover of Journal NB11.

447

448

J O U R N A L NB 11 Consciousness: Lectures on the Life of Jesus]. Entry NB11:189 quotes from Thomasine Gyllembourg’s Skri�er [Writings], vol. 1, which was published June 23, 1849. Given that entry NB11:192 is dated June 25, it must have been wri�en very close to June 23. In entry NB11:203, Kierkegaard indicates that “The Sickness unto Death has now been given to the printer.” According to printer Bianco Luno’s records, the manuscript was received on June 29, 1849, and thus the entry cannot have been recorded earlier than this. Entry NB11:207 refers to Wilhelm Rothe’s Det danske Kirkeaar og dets Pericoper, en Haandbog for Prædikanter og Kirkegjængere [The Danish Church Year and Its Pericopes: A Handbook for Preachers and Parishioners], which Kierkegaard purchased on July 4, 1949 according to the records of Reitzel Bookstore.1 The table of contents in entry NB11:2 seems to have been continuously updated, and the last of these, “pp. 251 and ff.” refer to NB11:211. Aside from this, the chronological order seems only to have been broken when Kierkegaard added marginal notes and when he added the words “See the a�ached” to entry NB11:123, indicating that the text on a loose sheet of paper (NB11:125; see illustration on pp. 70–71) belongs there. It is uncertain when NB11:125 was authored. It is likewise unclear when a smaller loose piece of paper (NB11:124; see illustration on p. 68) was written, though it is also mentioned in entry NB11:123, and thus must have been composed before NB11:123.

III. Contents On the inside of the front cover, Kierkegaard created a table of contents (NB11:2) that refers to entries that he regarded as especially important for the development of his authorship.2 “The decisive place in this journal” is initially said to be “p. 126” of the journal, that is, NB11:122.3 The next line of NB11:2, however, refers to “pp. 217 and ff.,” that is, NB11:192. A “No” has been added to this line, and the next line then indicates that

) See KA, sec. D, fascicule 8, folder 1.

1

) In the journals that follow, Kierkegaard adds more extensive tables of contents of this sort.

2

) This same passage is referred to in the preceding journal, NB10:2 in KJN 5, 268.

3

Critical Account of the Text “p. 235,” that is, NB11:202, is the decisive entry. The same revision continues in the rest of the table of contents. In other words, Kierkegaard seems to have changed his mind about the most decisive entry in this journal, which culminates with a reference to “pp. 240 and ff.,” that is, NB11:204, which is “continued” on “pp. 251 and ff.,” that is, NB11:211. Each of the references here are to entries that Kierkegaard wrote lengthwise in the journal in latin hand. Entry NB11:122 begins with these words: “No, no, I can’t and it is indeed almost an impossibility that I should now move up even higher and more boldly than when I had the benefit of having a fortune.” In this entry, as in earlier journals, his concerns about an income give rise to a dilemma: on the one hand, he considers the possibility of applying for a position as a priest in the state Church and, on the other hand, he considers continuing as an author. The next entry, NB11:123, includes thoughts about the publication of manuscripts he has already finished: “So. Just as the river Guadalquibir plunges underground at one point and then emerges later, I must now plunge into pseudonymity; but I have now also understood where I will emerge again in my own name.” He continues with reflections on what works should be published pseudonymously (e.g., The Sickness unto Death and Practice in Christianity) and what works cannot be published at all (e.g., The Point of View for My Work as an Author). In NB11:192, Kierkegaard writes that it would probably be wise for him to apply for a position before publishing the manuscripts he has already finished but he worries that this might not be consistent with the will of Governance. He reflects as well on the fact that his authorship has become something quite different from what he had imagined earlier in his career: And has not my way of thinking been altered successively[?] Have I not become, through the intervention of Governance, a different sort of auth. from what I had originally imagined[?] And what had I originally imagined? Let me conscientiously return to the appropriate point in time. When I le� her, what were my thoughts? This: I am a penitent; a marriage is impossible in this case; it will always retain a shadow of misfortune and it also protests against the wedding. On the other hand―and God knows I considered this as well even if I wanted to forget it or let it seem as if I had forgo�en it―on the other hand, a decisively religious existence, which I have always desired and which must remain a possibility for me as

449

450

J O U R N A L NB 11 a penitent if I am to be honest with God, cannot be reconciled with marriage. If God intends to bring my sins down upon me, then I shall not, by a falsehood, put myself in a situation where I must beg God to spare me for the sake of someone else, someone else to whom I will thus be bound by a falsehood. That is, my life either had to become one of despairing pleasure―or else an existence carried through as unconditionally as possible. And should I then NB stop and become a heretic, deceiving God, he who in such a fatherly and accommodating way has led me ever further toward decisions that I could not have endured if I had understood everything right away[?] Oh, fie on me. And because I have hesitated so long, everything has become more difficult. In entry NB11:202, Kierkegaard is explicit about the fact that The Point of View for My Work as an Author (composed in the summer and fall of 1848) cannot be published.1 We read in the next entry, NB11:203, conversely, that The Sickness unto Death has already been given to the printer. Kierkegaard decided to publish the book under a pseudonym, with his own name included as editor. In NB11:204, he writes: “The pseudonym is named Johannes Anticlimacus, in contrast to Climacus, who claimed not to be Christian; Anticlimacus stands at the opposite extreme: a Christian to an extraordinary degree―I myself push it only to the point of being a perfectly simple Christian.” At the same time, he decides that Practice in Christianity can be published under the same pseudonym, but that “there’s no rush.”2 He also decides that nothing he has wri�en about his authorial person can be used, because it is wrong, he says, to anticipate the outcome of his authorial activity while he is still alive. As in other journals, NB11 includes a number of entries about the leading figures in Christendom, including Bishop Mynster, whom Kierkegaard both respects and detests. In NB11:87, he notes how Mynster is “allied with worldliness as much as anyone,” which leads him to reflect on Mynster’s sermonizing: “he’s

) Kierkegaard had earlier made the decision that The Point of View for My Work as an Author could not be published (see NB9:78 in KJN 5, 258–259). A shorter version, On My Work as an Author, was published in August 1851.

1

) Practice in Christianity was published in September 1850.

2

Critical Account of the Text coddled, and he’s coddled because he’s an orator.” He continues with reflections on Plato’s condemnation of the poets: Perhaps nothing else coddles or corrupts a pers. more. To stand at the pulpit and speak passionately―instead of taking action in the real world―and then to have it seem to the individual himself and the audience as if the man had taken action! Yes, Plato and Socrates were right: banish the poets from the state―and the orators as well. The Greek concept of philosopher (i.e., a thinker in ethical character) is on the whole far more suited to the communication of Christianity than this pitiful concept: the orator, the bombastic rhetorician rather than responsible agent. In the next entry, NB11:88, Kierkegaard continues with personal comparisons between himself and Mynster. Because Kierkegaard has been able to produce something exceptional as a “layman,” he says, a professional like Mynster finds him intolerable. In contrast, Bishop Mynster expends his energy on underwriting the establishment and thus guaranteeing the “serious” nature of joining the establishment and becoming “a full-time employee.” There are also a handful of entries dealing with Luther. Kierkegaard’s comments are o�en about individual lines from his sermons or his translation of the Bible. In entries NB11:120 and 121, for example, Kierkegaard moves from an observation about a single word in Luther’s sermon on Jn 3:16–21 to an assessment of Luther’s translation of 2 Thess 3:2. In NB11:104, he underscores Luther’s radicality by suggesting the following experiment: It might be quite expedient to memorize one of Luther’s sermons sometime―then deliver it without any hint―and see how furious the clergy would get―and then say: That was a sermon by Luther, word for word. As a precaution, one could get two sworn witnesses who could testify that this was the original intention―so the whole thing wouldn’t turn out to be a case of plagiarism. The entry is yet another example of Kierkegaard’s o�-repeated complaints that his contemporaries have failed to understand what it means to be Christian. Because so many believe that “where the masses are, there also is the truth,” one never hears “that Xnty is a militant teaching, a polemic, that posits eternal enmity betw. God and the world” (NB11:100).

451

452

J O U R N A L NB 11 In three entries, NB11:46, 51, and 115, Kierkegaard turns his a�ention to Rasmus Nielsen. In the first, he writes that his most recent book, Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed. Forelæsninger over Jesu Liv, plunders from him “in a myriad of ways, mostly from the pseudonyms, whom he never cites, perhaps with deliberate cunning because they are the least read.” In entry NB11:51, under the heading “R. Nielsen’s Book,” Nielsen is criticized for not having enough “dialectical skill, insight, or sound judgment” to carry out his philosophical defense of Christianity. In his investigation of the relationship between faith and reason, Nielsen is accused of not consistently separating faith from knowledge: “Ah, he’s confused like all the others; [it is] a kind of vanity to believe that one should be able to give highly rational grounds, etc.― instead of admi�ing that the self-denying ethical project is to say: it is incomprehensible―and not a word more.” Kierkegaard is also critical of Goldschmidt, P. L. Møller, and Corsaren [The Corsair]. In NB11:16, for example, Goldschmidt is characterized as cowardly and obscene, and as far as Kierkegaard is concerned, the path back to respectability is not easy: In truth, for G. to look like a respectable pers. again, a public apology would have to be demanded, [and it would have to be] of such a kind that it could be republished in the newspaper every eighth day for an entire year. And one could also rightfully demand that he make an a�empt to repay the blood money he’s earned and donate it to charity―even Judas was that honest: he gave the money back. In entry NB11:199, Kierkegaard compares the relationship between himself and Goldschmidt to that of a father to “a boy, or more exactly a li�le kid,” who has been given permission to strike a blow, which he did with his wi�icisms aimed at Kierkegaard in Corsaren. Finally, a number of entries concern his own books that were published on May 14, 1849, namely, the second edition of Either/ Or (see, e.g., NB11:22, 103) and The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses (see, e.g., NB11:22, 53, 133, 168).

Explanatory Notes 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

5

5

5

2

5

10

p. 126] See NB11:122. pp. 217 and ff.] See NB11:192. p. 235] See NB11:202. p. 236] See NB11:203. pp. 240 and ff.] See NB11:204. pp. 251 and ff.] See NB11:211. Luther’s sermon on the gospel for Epiphany … the first part] See, e.g., Luther’s explanation of the gospel for Epiphany, Mt 2:1–12, in En christelig Postille, sammendragen af Dr. Morten Luthers Kirke- og Huuspostiller [A Christian Book of Homilies, Collected from Dr. Martin Luther’s Church and House Postils], trans. Jørgen Thisted, 2 pts. (Copenhagen, 1828; ASKB 283; abbreviated herea�er En christelig Postille), pt. 1, pp. 132–141. In the first part of his sermon, Luther explains how the three wise men from the east set out for Jerusalem in search of the newborn king but found him instead in the small village of Bethlehem. Although they expected to find him surrounded by wealth and glory, they nevertheless worship him faithfully in his modest surroundings (see pp. 132–135). Wer ist, der sich ... Fenelon 2nd vol. p. 66] A word-for-word citation from Fenelons Werke religiösen Inhalts [Fenelon’s Religious Works], trans. M. Claudius, new ed., 3 vols. (Hamburg, 1823; ASKB 1914), vol. 2, p. 66. In the NRSV, the translation reads: “Who has resisted the Lord, and succeeded?” ― Fenelon: François de Salignac de la Mothe-Fénelon (1651–1715), archbishop of Cambrai, spiritual director, and much read also by Protestants, such as John Wesley. yet to be seriously reviewed in Danish literature] A handful of Kierkegaard’s works were never reviewed, e.g., The Concept of Anxiety, A Literary Review, and Christian Discourses, but most of the others were reviewed, some at great length,

e.g., Either/Or, Fear and Trembling, Repetition, and Works of Love. prey to the mob] → 12,18. authors … plagiarize me] It has not been possible to ascertain to whom Kierkegaard is alluding here. I can never thank God … more than I could have expected] See “A First and Final Explanation,” the unpaginated appendix to the Concluding Unscientific Postscript (Copenhagen, 1846), where Kierkegaard acknowledges his authorship of the pseudonymous works and thanks “Governance” for having “granted me much more than I ever have expected” (CUP, 628; SKS 7, 572).

10

5

11

16

If anything is to be said about my activity as an author] In the summer and autumn of 1848, Kierkegaard completed the manuscript of The Point of View for My Work as an Author, A Direct Communication: Report to History, which was published posthumously by P. C. Kierkegaard in 1859. In 1851, Kierkegaard himself published a shorter version, On My Work as an Author, dated “Cph., March 1849” (PV, 5; SKS 13, 11).

1

6

the words of Solomon … abandoned by God] Cf. Ps 37:25. The Israelite king David is traditionally viewed as the author of Psalms, whereas his son, Solomon (ca. 965–926 �.�.) is said to be author of other O.T. books such as the Song of Solomon. Xt, who says: My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me] See Mt 27:46.

3

7

I wanted to secure a comfortable future … and write] → 14,21. seek God’s kingdom first] See Mt 6:33. Kierkegaard’s phrasing here seems to echo Luther’s German translation rather than the 1819 Danish version of the New Testament that was the standard translation used in the Danish Church in his time. Kierkegaard owned Die Bibel,

6

6

8

8

454

8

8 13

15

21

23

26

J O U R N A L NB 11: 8–12

oder die ganze Heilige Schri� des alten und neuen Testaments, nach der deutschen Uebersetzung D. Martin Luthers. Mit einer Vorrede vom Prälaten Dr. Hüffell [The Bible, or All the Sacred Writings of the Old and New Testaments, According to the German Translation of Dr. Martin Luther: With a Preface by the Prelate Dr. Hüffel] (Karlsruhe, 1836; ASKB 3). a living, a post] as a priest (→ 17,12). hypochondriac nonsense … positioned myself too highly] See, e.g., NB9:74 and NB10:69 in KJN 5, 254–255, 304–305. where should I go] Concerning Kierkegaard’s plans to travel, see, e.g., NB4:77 and NB4:158 in KJN 4, 325, 361–362 and NB7:114 in KJN 5, 144– 145. Now the two essays are being published … anonymously] “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth? The Posthumous Work of a Solitary Human Being. Poetic Essay,” which according to its preface had been wri�en at the end of 1847, and ”On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle,” which according to its title page had been wri�en in 1847, which together constituted Two EthicalReligious Essays (WA, 47–108; SKS 11, 49–111). The book was published under the pseudonym H. H. and was advertised as having “appeared” on May 19, 1849; see Adresseavisen (abbreviated form of Kjøbenhavns kongelig alene privilegerede Adressecomptoirs E�erretninger [Information from Copenhagen’s Only Royally Licensed Advertising Office]), no. 116. The essays were originally placed as the third and sixth essays in A Cycle of EthicalReligious Essays (→ 16,10). Today, May 5th, they were sent to Gjødvad] Jens Finsteen Giødwad (1811–1891), Danish jurist and journalist, from 1841 joint editor and publisher of Fædrelandet [The Fatherland], a close friend of Kierkegaard, helping him in a variety of ways, including proofreading and arranging for contracts with printers. Kierkegaard sent the manuscript of Two Ethical-Religious Essays to Giødvad and then delivered it to the printer, Louis Klein. my economic situation is especially distressful] → 64,5.

1849

second edition of Either/Or] The manuscript of the second edition of Either/Or was delivered to the printer on January 19, 1849; see Erindringsbog for Bianco Luno. 1849 [Memorandum Book for Bianco Luno, 1849] (Archives of Bianco Luno Printing, Aller Press, Copenhagen). The publication of Either/Or: A Fragment of Life, Published by Victor Eremita. Second Edition, which consisted of both part 1 and part 2 in the same volume, was announced in Adresseavisen, no. 111, May 14, 1849. The publication of The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Devotional Discourses (→ 16,4), was announced in the same issue.

29

hate one’s father and mother for Xt’s sake] See Lk 14:26. Luther’s sermon on the gospel about the marriage in Cana] See, e.g., Luther’s sermon on the gospel for the second Sunday a�er Epiphany in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), pt. 1, pp. 151–159, p. 156.

5

Faith made us masters … third Sunday a�er Epiphany] Kierkegaard cites word for word from Luther’s sermon for the third Sunday a�er Epiphany, Mt. 8:1–13, in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2) pt. 1, pp. 159–167; p. 161, col. 2. In the same gospel … a witness to them] See Mt 8:4. In the last phrase … believe in Xt] Summary of En christelig Postille pt. 1, p. 164, col. 2.

9

Does a Hum. Being … for the Truth?] → 8,21. the essay indicates that he does have the right to do so] See Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21), (WA, 88–89; SKS 11, 93).

18

H.H.’s last words] An allusion to the postscript by pseudonym H. H. in “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” in Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21): “This is, as stated, ‘this man’s many thoughts in a brief summary.’ Since the whole thing is fiction, ‘a poetical venture,’ but, note well, by a thinker, the thoughtful reader will surely find it appropriate that I say nothing about it this man’s character; just because it is fiction I can, indeed, just as well

4

9

6

9

11 13

9

28

10

J O U R N A L NB 11: 12–15 say one thing as another, can’t say exactly what I wish. In another respect also, I can, inasmuch as the while thing is fiction, say exactly what I wish with regard to his life, how he fared, what he became in the world, etc., etc. But just because I qua poet have a poet’s absolute power to say what I wish, I will in these respects say nothing, in order not to contribute, by speaking about the whole novelistic aspects, to draw the reader’s a�ention away from what is essential, the thought content” (WA, 88–89; SKS 11, 93). 10m

9 10

11

9

11

this pseudonym] H. H. (→ 8,21). the older ones] i.e., the various pseudonymous authors and editors of Kierkegaard’s writings from Either/Or (1843) to The Crisis and a Crisis in the Life of an Actress (1848). He is perhaps referring to Johannes Climacus, who in his concluding “Appendix” to Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846) humorously declares that his book is superfluous and that “everything is to be understood as retracted, that not only does the book have a conclusion, but in addition to this, it is a revocation” (CUP 1, 619; SKS 7, 562). the abundance he has granted me during the past year] Since the publication of Christian Discourses (→ 69,15) on April 25, 1848, Kierkegaard had wri�en most of the manuscripts of The Sickness unto Death (→ 123,16), Practice in Christianity (→ 65,7), The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 6,1), On My Work as an Author (→ 6,1), and The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air (→ 16,4). In the same period, he also published the series “Crisis and a Crisis in the Life of an Actress” in Fædrelandet, and Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21), both of which has been composed earlier. the entire religious production] i.e., the six collections of Edifying Discourses (1843–1844), Three Discourses in Various Spirits (1847), Works of Love (1847), Christian Discourses (1848), and Two EthicalReligious Essays (1849), together with the manuscripts of The Sickness unto Death (1849), The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air (1849), and Practice in Christianity (1850).

1849

455

the entire production that followed Either/Or] In addition to the works named in the two preceding explanatory notes, he is thinking of Repetition (1843), Fear and Trembling (1843), Philosophical Fragments (1844), The Concept of Anxiety (1844), Prefaces (1844), Stages on Life’s Way (1845), Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846), and The Crisis and a Crisis in the Life of an Actress (1848), along with several journal and newspaper articles, namely, “Who Is the Author of Either/Or” (1843), “A Li�le Explanation” (1843), “An Explanation and a Li�le More” (1845), “A Cursory Observation Concerning a Detail in Don Giovanni” (1845), “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner” (1845), “The Dialectical Result of a Literary Police Investigation” (1846), and “The Crisis and a Crisis in the Life of an Actress” (1848). out of fear about my income] → 64,5. This day, my birthday] i.e., Kierkegaard’s birthday on May 5, 1849, when he turned thirty-six years old.

12

In a li�le article ... namely the Moravian Brethren] See Danish theologian Jens Møller’s (1779–1833) article, “Om Menneskenes Tilbøielighed til at agte paa Varsler af Forsynet og især om den religiøse Brug af Lodkastning hos Jordens berømteste Folkeslag” [On the Human Tendency to Respect Portents of the Future, Especially the Religious Use of the Drawing Lots among the Most Renowned People on Earth] in Nyt theologisk Bibliothek [New Theological Library], 20 vols. (Copenhagen, 1821–1832; ASKB 336–345); vol. 6, pp. 118–171. See p. 121: “One of the strangest customs, namely consulting God through the drawing of lots, has even been sanctioned in a Protestant congregation that claims association with our Lutheran church, namely the Moravian Brethren.” ― Moravian Brethren: Rooted in a Protestant movement in Moravia in what is now the Czech Republic, the Moravians were reorganized by Count Zinzendorf in Herrnhut in Saxony in 1722. A Moravian colony was founded in Christiansfeld in southern Jutland in Denmark in 1773, and a society was founded in Copenhagen in 1783. Kierkegaard’s father was a member of

2

14 19

12

456

8

12

18

18

J O U R N A L NB 11: 15–16

the Copenhagen society from 1815 (or earlier) until his death in 1838. Marriage is thus decided by lot] Jens Møller writes: “When Count Zinzendorf gave the Brethren a new constitution, he retained the casting of lots, and it is still used, as known, on several occasions, namely when filling ecclesiastical posts and missionary assignments as well as when arranging marriage between members, though each member is free to decide if he (or she) will be married according to lots” (Nyt theologisk Bibliothek, vol. 6, p. 158). Goldschmidt] Meïr Aron Goldschmidt (1819– 1887), Danish Jewish journalist and publicist, author of En Jøde. Novelle [A Jew: Novella] (by the pseudonym Adolph Meyer, edited and published by M. Goldschmidt) (Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB 1547). Goldschmidt founded Corsaren (see following explanatory note) in October 1840 and was the journal’s actual editor until October 1846, at which time he sold it and embarked on a yearlong journey abroad; starting in December 1847, he published the monthly journal Nord og Syd [North and South]. If there had been even the hint of an idea … He asked for it himself] An allusion to Corsaren [The Corsair], a satirical weekly founded in October 1840 by Goldschmidt, who was the paper’s real editor until October 1846. On October 22, 1841, Kierkegaard master’s thesis, On the Concept of Irony, received an appreciative review by one of Corsaren’s part-time staff writers, who focused exclusively on Kierkegaard’s playful language. Goldschmidt seemed to think the reviewer had not given sufficient a�ention to the content of the dissertation and therefore added this semi-flattering postscript himself: “If we now acknowledge that, despite this surprising language, Mr. Kierkegaard’s dissertation is of interest to those who have the patience to read it, this admission― of course, when it is put in the context of what has been said above―presumably grants Mr. Kierkegaard the justice that is his due” (Corsaren, no. 51, col. 8). Similarly, in the March 10, 1843, issue, Goldschmidt writes the following in a review of Either/Or: “This author is a powerful intellect.

1849

He is an intellectual aristocrat. He scoffs at the entire human race, demonstrating its wretchedness. But he is entitled to do so―he is an extraordinary intellect” (Corsaren, no. 129, col. 1). Kierkegaard was also named on November 14, 1845, when his pseudonym Victor Eremita was praised, perhaps ironically, at the expense of the liberal politician Orla Lehmann: “for Lehmann will die and be forgo�en, but Victor Eremita will never die” (Corsaren, no. 269, col. 14). On December 22, 1845, a confidential contributor to Corsaren, P. L. Møller, published a generally positive review of Stages on Life’s Way in his aesthetic annual Gæa. Under the pseudonym “Frater Taciturnus,” Kierkegaard replied in Fædrelandet on December 27, 1845 (no. 2078, cols. 16653–16658), with the article “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner” (COR, 38–46; SV2 13, 459–467). Kierkegaard’s sarcastic reply included a request that he become the object of satire in the pages of Corsaren, as he found it unacceptable that he should be the only Danish writer that had been praised by it rather than abused. Corsaren obliged by publishing a series of satirical articles about, allusions to, and drawings of Kierkegaard, first on January 2, 1846 (no. 276), and regularly therea�er until July 17, 1846 (no. 304) (see, e.g., KJN 4, 453–456). A�er Goldschmidt’s departure as editor, the teasing continued, as on October 23, 1846 (no. 318), and December 24, 1846 (no. 327), as well as January 1, 1847 (no. 328), and June 18, 1847 (no. 352). one could also rightfully demand … donate it to charity] An allusion to the fines that guilty parties were forced to pay to charities, especially to the welfare of the poor in Copenhagen. According to Goldschmidt’s own records, Corsaren made 4,000 rix-dollars (→ 23,17) during his final year as editor, whereas it made only 1,500 rix-dollars the year he took over. See M. A. Goldschmidt Livs Erindringer og Resultater [Memoirs and Results of My Life], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1877); vol. 1, pp. 429–430. ― blood money: See Mt 27:6. Judas was that honest: he gave the money back] See Mt 27:3–5.

28

30

J O U R N A L NB 11: 18–21 13

13

15

13

23

28

Heiberg] Johan Ludvig Heiberg (1791–1860), author, editor, and critic; 1828–1839, playwright and translator at the Royal Theater, therea�er its dramatic adviser until he became director of the theater in 1849; 1829, titular professor; 1830–1836, taught logic, aesthetics, and Danish literature at the Royal Military High School. J. L. Heiberg was the age’s leading tastemaker. Kierkegaard alludes here to Heiberg’s patronizing discussion of “the public” (→ 47,26). a couple of peop. I really liked] It has not been possible to identify who Kierkegaard is speaking of. Luther’s sermon on the gospel] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Mt 8:23–27 for the fourth Sunday a�er Epiphany in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 168–175. Here Luther emphasizes that Jesus himself says that he has not come to bring peace, but the sword (Mt 10:34): “All this invites you to seriously consider whether you would like to be Christian or not. For if you would like to be Christian, then prepare: there will be nothing but storms and strife (p. 169). Bishop Mynster’s leadership] Jakob Peter Mynster (1775–1854), Danish pastor, writer, and politician, from 1811 permanent curate at Vor Frue Kirke [The Church of Our Lady] in Copenhagen. From 1826, he was court chaplain, and from 1828 royal confessor as well as court chaplain and chaplain at Christiansborg Palace Chapel. In 1834, he was appointed bishop of the diocese of Zealand. As bishop of Zealand, Mynster was the primate of the Danish Church and the king’s personal counselor; during the period 1835–1846, he was a member of the Advisory Assembly of Estates in Roskilde, where he was very influential; and in 1848–1849, he was a member of the Constitutional Assembly. Mynster had a seat in a great many governing organs and was the prime mover behind various key ecclesiastical publications, including the authorized Danish translation of the New Testament that appeared in 1819, the Udkast til en Alterbog og et Kirke-Ritual for Danmark [Dra� for a Service Book and Church Ritual for Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1839), and the authorized Tillæg til den evangelisk-christelige Psalmebog

1849

457

[Supplement to the Evangelical Christian Hymnal] (Copenhagen, 1845). All those thoughts about running the risk of being put to death] See NB4:118 in KJN 4, 346 and the accompanying explanatory notes. daily insults from the mob] An allusion to his appearance in Corsaren (→ 12,18) and Kierkegaard’s perception that he was persecuted as a result it. I’m again about to publish] → 8,21 and → 8,23. I shouldered the weight of vulgar insults] → 12,18. worry about my income] → 64,5. the material about to be published] Presumably Two Ethical-Religious Essays or perhaps one or two of the soon to be published works, The Sickness unto Death (1849), The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air (1849), and Practice in Christianity (1850). the thought of stopping] Refers to the circumstance that even as early as the period following publication of Either/Or (1843), and again following the publication of Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846), and repeatedly therea�er, Kierkegaard had considered stopping his writing and seeking a position as a priest in the country. See, e.g., journal entries JJ:415 (KJN 2, 257), NB:7, NB:57, and NB2:136 (KJN 4, 12–18, 50–51, and 193– 194). See also chap. 3, “The Role of Governance in My Writings,” in The Point of View for My Work as an Author (PV, 86; SV2 13, 611). I had wanted so much a quiet life] i.e., as a rural priest. Cf. entry NB:7, wri�en on March 9, 1846: “If only I could make myself become a priest. A�er all, however much my present life has gratified me, out there, in quiet activity, granting myself a bit of literary productivity in my free moments, I would breathe more easily” (KJN 4, 16–17).

1

distressed spirit] Or “grieving” spirit. Cf. Eph 4:30. take a post out in the countryside, in tranquil security] → 14,21 and → 14,22. Neither in this case will God be mocked] See Gal 6:7.

1

14

5

13 16 17 19

21

22

2 5

15

458

6

11

16

2

16

4

5

16

10

J O U R N A L NB 11: 21–25

1849

the “Preface” that is now in “Three Godly Discourses”] See the preface to The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses, which appeared on May 14, 1849, the same day as the second edition of Either/Or (→ 8,29). The preface, dated May 5, 1849, reads: “This li�le book (which, with regard to the circumstances of its appearance reminds me of my first, the preface of the two upbuilding discourses of 1843, which came out immediately a�er Either/Or) will, I hope, bring the same recollection to ‘that single individual whom I with joy and gratitude call my reader’: ‘It desires to remain in hiding, just as it came into existence in concealment―a li�le flower under the cover of the great forest.’ My reader will be reminded of that by the circumstances and in turn, I hope, will be reminded, as I am reminded, of the preface to the two upbuilding discourses of 1844: ‘It is offered with the right hand’―in contrast to the pseudonyms, which were held out and are held out with the le� hand” (WA, 3; SKS 11, 9). Only a few lines would have been added … a second time of edification] The original preface seems not to have been preserved.

Essays, which was prepared in the summer of 1848, consists of six essays: (1) “Something about What One Could Call a ‘Premise Author’” (from the introduction to The Book on Adler, see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 5–16, slightly reworked; see Pap. IX B 1, p. 297); (2) “The Dialectical Relationship: The Universal, the Individual, the Special Individual” (from chap. 1 of The Book on Adler, see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 33–53, slightly reworked; see Pap. VIII 2 B 9,13–15, pp. 50–51, plus IX B 2, pp. 298–299, and IX B 2,7–8, pp. 305–307); (3) “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (from 1847, see Pap. VIII 2 B 136, p. 236, and VIII 2 B 138–139, pp. 238–239); (4) “A Revelation in Today’s Situation” (from chap. 2 of The Book on Adler, see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 74–90, slightly reworked; see Pap. IX B 4, p. 300); (5) “Psychological View of Mag. Adler as a Phenomenon and as a Satire on Hegelian Philosophy and on the Present” (from chap. 6 of The Book on Adler, see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 176– 230, slightly reworked; see Pap. VIII 2 B 7,12–18, pp. 32–43, VIII 2 B 8,1, p. 44, and VIII 2 B 9,12, p. 49, plus IX B 5, pp. 301–305); and (6) “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle” (from chap. 3, § 2 of The Book on Adler, see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 136–150, slightly reworked and expanded; see Pap. VIII 2 B 7,8–9, pp. 28–29 and VIII 2 B 9,16–18, pp. 51–52, plus IX B 6, p. 305). insignificant … equally insignificant] Kierkegaard here plays with the Danish word ligegyldig, which means “unimportant” or “insignificant,” but if it is broken into its root words, lige gyldig, it means “equally valid,” or “of equal significance.” that remarkable year, 48] Even among contemporary writers, 1848 was referred to as “the remarkable year” because of the many revolutions and wars around Europe, including civil war in Denmark in the southern provinces of Schleswig and Holstein. See, e.g., C. Hostrup, Familietvist eller Det mærkelige Aar, Sangspil [A Family Dispute or the Remarkable Year: A Musical Comedy] (Copenhagen, 1856), p. 4: “Time: 1848, the beginning of Autumn.”

A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Essays … divided into smaller parts] A Cycle of Ethical-Religious

The World Wants to Be Deceived] A. E. Scribe’s play, Verden vil bedrages, Lystspil i 5 Acter [The

the position I’m taking with this step, as auth.] Presumably an allusion to the publication of Two Ethical-Religious Essays that recently had been sent to the printer (→ 8,21 and → 8,23). I, who fight to give “the apostle” his due] See “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle,” in A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Essays → 8,21). I had once considered … second edition of Either/Or] The manuscript of “Come unto Me, All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest: For Awakening and Inward Deepening,” was composed in 1848 and later published in 1851 as a part of Training in Christianity. The second edition of Either/Or was published on May 14, 1849, as was The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air (→ 8,29). –– Come unto Me … Heavy Laden: See Mt 11:28.

12

20

29

16

J O U R N A L NB 11: 25–27

17

10

12

World Wants to Be Deceived. Comedy in 5 Acts], trans. by N.C.L. Abrahams from the French, Le Puff ou mensonge et vérité [Puffery, or Lies and Truth] (1848); see Det kongelige Theaters Repertoire [Repertoire of the Royal Theater], no. 167 (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB U 101), which Kierkegaard had purchased at J. H. Schubothe’s bookshop on April 7, 1849. In the play, deception prevails over truth. Only officer Albert d’Angremont is offended by the deception, but in the end, he himself ends up telling lies in order to win his beloved and to procure a just pension for a widow. The play premiered at the Royal Theater on March 27, 1849, and was performed seven times in all, with the last performance on September 15, 1849. Like the rest of it, it’s a lie (as Scribe says)] Kierkegaard alludes to the last line of the play Verden vil bedrages (→ 16,29), p. 38, col. 2. A�er hearing Antonie assert that his lie is “the honest truth,” Desgaudets, who has discovered that the times demand deception rather than truth, responds, “Like everything else.” ― Scribe: (→ 18,3). priests make a living] In provincial towns citizens had the duty of paying the priest an assessed sum called “priest money,” while peasants in rural parishes were to pay the priest a certain percentage of their agricultural yield, especially grain, known as a tithe. The size of these payments was established by the Ministry for Church and Educational Affairs. On holy days members of the congregation could also pay their priest a voluntary sum of money called an “offering.” Priests had a certain amount of additional income called “perquisites,” i.e., fees for performing such clerical acts as weddings, baptisms, and funerals. In provincial towns, there was also an additional sum for a housing allowance, while rural priests had income from the fields and farms a�ached to their call. In general, priests in Copenhagen were be�er off than those in the provinces; see an anonymous article, “Bemærkning om de kjøbenhavnske Præsters Forhold til Menigheden” [Observation on the Relation of Copenhagen Priests to the Congregation], in Politivennen [The Friend of the Police], no. 1313, February

1849

459

27, 1841, p. 130: “Compared with the rest of the country’s priests, a large portion of the priests of Copenhagen have generous incomes and live extremely well.” I can handle the mistreatment, even more mistreatment] → 12,18. nastiness was my first caretaker] An allusion to the nastiness he perceived in his treatment by Corsaren (→ 12,18). In Corsaren, Kierkegaard’s pseudonym Frater Taciturnus was occasionally associated with “Crazy Nathanson,” a horse dealer who was commi�ed to the care of the public asylum Bidstrupgård. See Corsaren, no. 278, January 16, 1846, col. 14; cf. also Corsaren, no. 280, January 30, cols. 9–11, and no. 285, March 6, col. 8. Bishop Mynster] → 13,28. He’s 72 years old now] Mynster was seventythree years old at the time. His sermons] In journal entry NB28:56, Kierkegaard mentions that in keeping with a tradition inherited from his father, he always went to hear Mynster’s sermons (KJN 9; SKS 25, 262–264). Kierkegaard also owned Mynster’s Prædikener [Sermons] (Copenhagen, 1826 [1810]; ASKB 228); Prædikener paa alle Søn- og Hellig-Dage i Aaret Prædikener paa alle Søn- og Hellig-Dage i Aaret [Sermons for Every Sunday and Holy Day of the Year], 3rd ed., 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1837 [1823]; ASKB 229–230, 2191); and his Prædikener holdte i Kirkeaaret 1846–47 [Sermons Given in the 1846–1847 Church Year] (Copenhagen, 1847; ASKB 231).

23 30

33 34 37

Scribe’s] Augustin Eugène Scribe (1791–1861), French dramatist, dominated Parisian theater life for forty years with close to 350 opera libre�i, vaudevilles, and comedies in which love is often shown to be a fleeting illusion. In the halfcentury from 1824 to 1874, Scribe’s dramas were those most o�en performed at the Royal Theater in Copenhagen, where, with the assistance of J. L. Heiberg (→ 13,13), about one hundred of his pieces were performed.

13

18

the interesting] A catchword from ca. the 1830s, taken over from German idealist aesthetics. It was a general term for the means by which a

3

19

460

16

20

2

J O U R N A L NB 11: 27–33

sense of fascination and excitement could be evoked. In the Danish context, the “interesting” was made topical by J. L. Heiberg, who, in his review of Oehlenschläger’s play Dina [Dina], in Intelligensblade [Intelligencer], vol. 2, nos. 16–17, November 15, 1842, wrote that ancient tragedy did not recognize “the interesting, which is a modern concept for which ancient languages did not even have a corresponding expression. This circumstance signifies both the greatness and monumentality of ancient tragedy, but also its limitation; for it follows from this that as much as that genre demands character portrayals, as li�le, basically, has it room for character developments; here there is, so to speak, nothing to develop, as li�le as in a marble statue. The boundaries of everything are plastically determined from the start, indeed even predetermined” (p. 80). See the preface to Either/Or (EO 1, 9; SKS 2, 17) and “Problema III” in Fear and Trembling (FT, 83; SKS 4, 173). thorn in the flesh] See 2 Cor 12:7–9. a book titled: The Life of Xt] The Enlightenment of the 18th century confronted theological work on biblical texts with the demand that biblical research, like other forms of historical research, employ a historical-critical method, i.e., that it seek historical causes and trustworthy sources in order to prove the authenticity of the various scriptural writings, including those about the historical Jesus. See, e.g., Karl Hase, Das Leben Jesu. Lehrbuch zunächst für akademische Vorlesungen [The Life of Jesus: A Manual for Academic Study], 2nd ed. (Leipzig, 1838 [1829]; ASKB 51); D. F. Strauss, Das Leben Jesu, kritisch bearbeitet [The Life of Jesus, Treated Critically], 2 vols., 4th ed. (Tübingen, 1840 [1835–1836]); J. Schaller, Der historische Christus und die Philosophie. Kritik der Grundidee des Werks das Leben Jesu von Dr. D. F. Strauss [The Historical Christ and Philosophy: Critique of the Idea Underlying Das Leben Jesu by D. F. Strauss] (Leipzig, 1838; ASKB 759). In addition to these works, Kierkegaard was probably also thinking of Rasmus Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed. Forelæsninger over Jesu Liv (→ 28,18), which he had just received from Nielsen.

1849

Johan. de cruce] Johannes de Cruce (John of the Cross) or Johannes of Yepes (1542–1591), Spanish mystic, theologian, and poet. What Luther says about prayer … it really pleases him] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Lk 18:31–43 in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2) vol. 1, pp. 194–201; see esp. pp. 199–200. Drivel … the only reply to doubt] A source could not be identified. one prefers to say with Hamann: Bah] Johann Georg Hamann (1730–1788), German author and antirationalist philosopher, writes in a le�er dated January 22, 1785, to F. H. Jacobi of the doubt that has arisen in his heart: “There are doubts, which cannot be answered with reason, but only with a Bah! that must be rejected―just as there are concerns that best can be eased with laughter.” See Friedrich Heinrich Jacobi’s Werke [The Works of Friedrich Heinrich Jacobi], ed. F. Roth, 6 vols. (in 8 tomes) (Leipzig, 1812–1825; ASKB 1722–1728), vol. 4.3 (1819), p. 34. fear and trembling] See Phil 2:12.

6

Somewhere I must have wri�en an aphorism] See journal entry CC:16 from ca. 1836–1837: “It is really fortunate that language has a number of expressions for nonsense and cha�er. If it didn’t I would go mad, because what else would it prove other than that everything people say is nonsense? It is fortunate that language is so cultivated in this respect, so that one can still hope to hear some reasonable talk once in a while” (KJN 1, 197).

2

21

But these things … the temptations of Xt] Kierkegaard quotes from Luther’s sermon on Mt 4:1–11 for the first Sunday of Lent in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 201–207; p. 207.

12

21

The didactic treatment of the life of Xt] Perhaps an allusion to Rasmus Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed. Forelæsninger over Jesu Liv (→ 28,18). dividing the life of Christ into paragraphs] As do, e.g., Karl Hase in Das Leben Jesu. Lehrbuch zunächst für akademische Vorlesungen and D. F.

1

22

11

19 22

24

1

J O U R N A L NB 11: 33–35

17 20

23

17

27

30

Strauss in Das Leben Jesu, kritisch bearbeitet (→ 20,2). the li�le essay] → 22m,1. The li�le essay … the sympathetic collision] i.e., Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21). 10 rd] i.e., ten rix-dollars. The rix-dollar, properly rigsbank dollar (rigsbanksdaler), was divided into six marks, each of which was further divided into sixteen shillings; thus there were ninetysix shillings in a rix-dollar. A judge earned ca. 1,200–1,800 rix-dollars a year; a middle-level civil servant earned ca. 400–500 rix-dollars a year; a qualified artisan would receive 200 rix-dollars a year, plus free board and lodging from his master; a maidservant received at most 30 rix-dollars plus board and lodging. Four hundred rix-dollars were considered sufficient to maintain a family for a year. A pair of shoes cost three rix-dollars, and a one-pound loaf of rye bread (the staple of the day) cost between two and four shillings. in the preface … interest to theologians] See pseudonym H. H.’s preface to Two EthicalReligious Essays (→ 8,21) (WA, 55–57; SKS 11, 61–63). a passage in the second essay] Refers to a footnote in “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle,” in Two Ethical-Religious Essays: “Perhaps it happens here with some reader as it happens with me, that in connection with this discussion of “authority” I come to think of Magister Kierkegaard’s Upbuiliding Discourses, where it is so strongly accentuated and emphasized, by being repeated in every preface every time and word for word: ‘they are not sermons, because the author does not have the authority to preach.’ Authority is a specific quality either of an apostolic calling or of ordination. To preach is precisely to use authority, and that this is what it is to preach has simply been altogether forgo�en in our day” (WA, 99; SKS 11, 103). In the preface to his first collection of edifying discourses, Two Edifying Discourses (1843), Kierkegaard remarks that he does “not have authority to preach” (EUD, 5; SKS 5, 13). This is repeated unchanged in the prefaces to the subsequent collections of 1843 and 1844 and in varied form in Three Discourses on Imagined Occasions (1845), Edifying Discourses in

1849

461

Various Spirits (1847), and Works of Love (1847); see especially this la�er work, in which Kierkegaard writes that “we [i.e., Kierkegaard] have been well instructed and brought up in Christianity from childhood on, and also in our mature years we have dedicated our days and our best energies in service to this, even though we always repeat that our discourse is ‘without authority’” (WL 47; SKS 9, 54). humoristic twist at the end] → 10,4. the first essay in “Two Ethical-Religious Essays”] i.e., “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (→ 8,21). give some ground, make some concessions] Refers to “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (→ 8,21) (WA, 63, 68, 70, 83; SKS 11, 69, 73, 75, 87–88). It wasn’t in the original manuscript … removed again in the end] A reference to the postscript to “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (→ 8,21). The “original manuscript” has not been located, but early proofs versions exist (Pap. VIII 2 B 139.5, Pap. X 5 B 10, 14–18). straightforward religious pieces a�er the Concl. Postscript] A reference to the religious works that Kierkegaard published a�er the Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846), namely, Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits (1847), Works of Love (1847), Christian Discourses (1848), The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Devotional Discourses (→ 8,29), and Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21).

1

24

1

22m

3

24m

7

24m

12

24m

Christ says to Paul … you’ll suffer for my sake] See Acts 9:16.

8

24

Essay no. 1 in Two Ethical-Religious Essays] i.e., “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (→ 8,21). all the straightforward pronouncements … that are now finished] i.e., the manuscript of The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 6,1); Report to History, On My Work as an

25

24

6

25

462

J O U R N A L NB 11: 35–46

Author (→ 6,1); “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Activity as an Author” (→ 32,19); “A Note Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 32,18); and “Everything in One Word” (see Pap. X 5 B 144). 25

18

25m

1

25

28

29

Two Essays by H. H.] → 8,21. in the second essay … qualitative difference] A loose quote from “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle,” in Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21) (WA, 100; SKS 11, 104). The Conclusion of the First of the Two Essays] i.e., the postscript to “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (→ 8,21). the humoristic part … removed] → 24m,7.

26

14

a typographical error … “the nuisance of working miracles.”] A reference to “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle,” in Two EthicalReligious Essays: “Even the miracle, if the apostle has this gi�, provides no physical certainty, because the miracle is the object of faith” (WA, 97–98; SKS 11, 101). In the proofs, Kierkegaard corrected the Danish word Gene (“nuisance,” “inconvenience”) to Gave (“gi�”) (Pap. X 5 B 10.20).

26

19

entire postscript to essay no. 1] → 8,21. if I say right a�erward that I’m essentially a thinker] → 8,21.

23

The first essay] i.e., “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (→ 8,21). The novelistic in him] → 8,21.

26

30

27

1

27

16

instruments of vulgarity] An allusion to the journalists who wrote for Corsaren (→ 12,18), especially Goldschmidt (→ 12,18) and Møller (→ 97,13).

27

33

and the “newspapers” … ethical authorities] Perhaps an allusion to the Reformation, which made use of the relatively newly invented printing press.

1849

the most degraded part of the daily press] Corsaren (→ 12,18).

1

28

I’ve had money] → 64,5. R. Nielsen’s book is out] Rasmus Nielsen (1809– 1884), cand. theol., 1837; lic. theol., 1840; privatdocent at the University of Copenhagen during the winter term, 1840–1841; from 1841 extraordinary professor of moral philosophy at the University of Copenhagen. Nielsen’s specialty was speculative philosophy, but starting in the mid-1840s he came under Kierkegaard’s influence; the two men became friends in 1848. Kierkegaard here refers to Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed. Forelæsninger over Jesu Liv [The Faith of the Gospels and Modern Consciousness: Lectures on the Life of Jesus], part 1 (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 700; abbreviated herea�er Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed). The book was advertised as “published” in Adresseavisen, no. 116, May 19, 1849. According to the book’s preface, the lectures that form the basis of the book “were delivered in the university building during the winter of 1848 before a respectable number of listeners of both sexes” (pp. vi–vii). Kierkegaard may have been familiar with the lectures before they were published, because he appears to refer to them in journal entry NB10:13; see KJN 5, 271–272. Nielsen gave Kierkegaard a copy of the book with a giltdecorated full morocco binding and a dedication dated “Sunday, May 13th 1849” (the book is privately owned). if he just used me as a crutch] Perhaps a reference to Kierkegaard’s conviction that Nielsen “obviously makes use in his works of what he takes from me” (NB10:13 in KJN 5, 271–272). His writings plunder … never cites] In Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed, Nielsen writes of the paradoxical character of Christianity and seems to be influenced by some of Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous works such as Fear and Trembling and Concluding Unscientific Postscript, which he does not specifically mention. Nielsen does, however, cite works published in Kierkegaard’s own name, namely, Two Edifying Discourses (on p. 189) and Works of Love (on p. 384). Nielsen also adds on p. 411: “Without being able to cite any par-

8

28

18

21

26

J O U R N A L NB 11: 46–53 ticular passage, the author would like to remind the reader in general of the numerous dialectical categories used here that are found in the works of Mag. Kierkegaard.” Moreover, on p. 441 he writes: “For the unique dialectic of the relationship to God, see the Kierkegaardian writings.” 28

33

miracle of the 5 loaves and the 2 small fish] See Jn 6:1–15.

30

1

Christ … forbade the more they did it] See Mk 7:36. 9 of the lepers] See Lk 17:11–19.

7

30

17 31

31

34

R. Nielsen’s Book] Rasmus Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed (→ 28,18). doubt and faith … starts the debate] A reference to Rasmus Nielsen’s foreword (paginated separately) to Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed, where he contrasts “faith in the gospel” with “modern consciousness” in the form of “the believer” and “the free thinker, the freethinker” (as well as “the doctrine of the happy medium,” represented by “academic theologians,” i.e., speculative theologians) in order “to allow the spokesmen for the respective positions to meet and go through the four gospels together, and to allow each to express himself in character” (p. vi). No more essentially than Mag. Adler had given up Hegel] A reference to Adolph Peter Adler (1812–1869), Danish theologian, who in 1840 received the magister degree with the dissertation Den isolerede Subjectivitet i dens vigtigste Skikkelser [Isolated Subjectivity in Its Most Important Forms], and from 1841 was parish pastor in Hasle and Rutsker on the island of Bornholm. In 1842, he published Populaire Foredrag over Hegels objective Logik [Popular Lectures on Hegel’s Objective Logic] (Copenhagen, ASKB 383); in 1844, he was suspended from his post; and in 1845, he was honorably discharged with an interim allowance, because his claim, in the preface to Nogle Prædikener [Some Sermons] (Copenhagen, 1843; ASKB U 9), of having received a revelation was considered, not least by Bishop J. P. Mynster, as a sign of incipient insanity. Adler also wrote in the preface to Nogle Prædikener that he had completed a Hegelian

1849

463

manuscript that “would have been titled ‘Popular Lectures on Subjective Logic’” but had decided not to publish it. He later published Forsøg til en kort systematisk Fremstilling af Christendommen i dens Logik [A�empt at a Brief Systematic Account of Christianity in Its Logic] (Copenhagen, 1846; ASKB U 13), which Kierkegaard apparently took as evidence that Adler had not abandoned his Hegelian ways. R. N. rid himself of his old ways] i.e., speculative philosophy (→ 28,18). If you do that again … I think I’ll do it right now] A possible allusion to a statement by Michael Nielsen, who was the director of the School of Civic Virtues in Copenhagen, where Kierkegaard was a student from 1821 to 1830. When another student―Orla Lehmann, who later became a leading politician in Denmark―made an impromptu speech during class, Nielsen listened quietly until he had finished and then came down from the lectern, stood in front of Lehmann and said: “If you ever do that again, I’ll box your ears―and I think I’ll do it right now,” a�er which he did so and returned to his lectern without any further comment. See H. Lund, Borgerdydsskolen i Kjøbenhavn 1787–1887 [The School of Civic Virtues in Copenhagen 1787–1887] (Copenhagen, 1887), pp. 156–157. The Whole Production Supplemented with the Two Essays by H. H.] i.e., the entire authorship, including Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21). A Note Concerning My Work as an Auth.] i.e., which was later published under the title “The Accounting” as the first part of On My Work as an Author (PV, 3–12; SKS 13, 11–18). Three Notes Concerning My Work as an Auth.] i.e., “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author,” consisting of no. 1, “On the Dedication ‘That Single Individual,’” originally wri�en in 1846 (see Pap. IX B 63,4–5, pp. 350–357); no. 2 “A Word on the Relation of My Work as an Author to ‘That Single Individual,’” originally wri�en in 1847 (see Pap. IX B 63,6–13, pp. 357–374); no. 3 “Preface to ‘The Friday Discourses,’” originally wri�en in 1847 (see Pap. IX B 63,14, pp. 375–377).

35 1

32

17

32

18

19

464

20 21

22

24

J O U R N A L NB 11: 53–56

In 1848, when Kierkegaard decided to add the three notes to The Point of View for My Work as an Author as an appendix, he gave them the title “Three Cordial ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author,” but he then deleted the word “cordial” (see Pap. IX B 58); subsequently no. 3 was used instead as the preface to Two Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (1851), while nos. 1 and 2 were posthumously published under the title “‘The Single Individual’: Two ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author,” in The Point of View for My Work as an Author (PV, 99–124; SV2 13, 627– 653). The Point of View for My Work as an Auth.] → 6,1. Discourses at Friday Communion] i.e., the sermon at the communion services then held on Fridays at the Church of Our Lady (→ 75,10). The reference here is to the fourth part of Christian Discourses, titled “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays: Christian Discourses” (CD, 262–281; SKS 10, 277–283). “3 Godly Discourses” … second edition of Either/Or] Refers to The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses (→ 16,4), published on May 14, the same day as the second edition of Either/Or (→ 8,29). what is offered with the le� hand … offered with the right] i.e., the pseudonymous works and the edifying discourses, respectively. In the preface to The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses, Kierkegaard expresses the hope that the book will remind the reader “of the preface to the Two Edifying Discourses of 1844, ‘which were offered with the right hand’―as opposed to the pseudonym, who was offered, and who is offered, with the le�” (WA, 3; SKS 11, 9). See also journal entry JJ:86 from March or April 1843, where Kierkegaard writes: “Theodorus Atheos said that he offered his teachings with his right hand, but his listeners received them with their le� hands” (KJN 2, 154). Here Kierkegaard cites as his source W. G. Tennemann, Geschichte der Philosophie [History of Philosophy], 11 vols. (Leipzig, 1798–1819; ASKB 815–826), vol. 2 (1799), p. 124 n. 39.

1849

Two Ethical-Religious Essays] → 8,21.

26

beautiful verse … Laß mich sterben, Herr! mit Dir] Cited word for word from the verse that concludes the first eleven of fourteen stations in the “Kreuzweg Andacht” [Stations of the Cross Devotional Service] in Vollständiges Betrachtungsund Gebetbuch von dem heiligen Alphons von Liguori. Neu aus dem Italienischen übersetzt von einem Priester aus der Versammlung des allerheiligsten Erlösers [The Complete Contemplation- and Prayer Book of Saint Alphonse Liguori: Newly Translated from the Italian by a Priest from the Congregation of the Most Holy Redeemer] (Aachen 1840; ASKB 264; abbreviated hereafter Vollständiges Betrachtungs- und Gebetbuch von Liguori), pp. 651–680. In Kierkegaard’s private copy, there is a vertical line on p. 654 in the margin next to the second through the fourth lines of the verse (KA, E 66). ― A. Liguori: Alfonso Maria de Liguori (1696–1787), Italian bishop, founded the Redemptorists in 1732, sainted in 1839. from the 12th station … Ach laß sterben mich mit Dir] Cited word for word from the verse that concludes the last three of the fourteen stations in “Kreuzweg Andacht” in Vollständiges Betrachtungsund Gebetbuch von Liguori, pp. 676–680.

18

preaching about the worries of poverty] A reference to the gospel reading for the fi�eenth Sunday a�er Trinity (Mt 6:24–34). See the Forordnet AlterBog for Danmark [Prescribed Service Book for Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1830 [1688]; ASKB 381; abbreviated herea�er Alter-Bog), pp. 147–148. too harsh] See Jn 6:60. The NRSV reads: “When many of his disciples heard it, they said, ‘This teaching is difficult; who can accept it?’”

31

Xt was wrapped in rags and laid in a manger] See Lk 2:1–20. buried in a new grave] See Mt 27:60. And in a grave … Xt died for us] A reference to Luther’s sermon on the gospel reading for Long Friday, Mt 27:57–66 in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 249–256; p. 255, col. 1. Xt’s body had been cremated―he was a criminal] In biblical Israel it was customary to wash

7

33

24

33

34

8 9

14

34

J O U R N A L NB 11: 56–63 and anoint the dead before burial. Being burned to death was a form of punishment. See Lev 20:14, 21:9. 34

20 23

34

35

35

35

33

2

14

16

Xt didn’t turn Nicodemus away; he tolerated him] See Jn 3:1–15, 7:50–52, 19:38–42. Luther’s reference to it in the gospel text for Good Friday] A reference to Luther’ sermon on the gospel reading for Long Friday (→ 34,9) in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, p. 252, col. 1: “Nicodemus only came to Jesus during the night; therefore John also calls him a secret disciple.” conflict with the government … condemn the press] A reference to opposition journalists and other political critics of absolutism, who during the 1830s and 1840s were frequently charged by the authorities for violation of the much-criticized edict concerning limitations on freedom of the press, which forbade criticism of the constitution and the government, among other things. Among those who had been indicted and convicted was the editor of Corsaren, M. A. Goldschmidt (→ 12,18), who on June 7, 1843, was sentenced by the Supreme Court to lifelong censorship, a fine of two hundred rix-dollars, and imprisonment on bread and water for six periods of four days each. Bishop Mynster … a phenomenon] Under the pseudonym “Kts.,” Bishop J. P. Mynster (→ 13,28) mentions Fear and Trembling and Kierkegaard’s three collections of edifying discourses from 1843 in his article “Kirkelig Polemik” [Ecclesiastical Polemics], in Intelligensblade [The Intelligencer], vol. 4, nos. 41–42, pp. 97–113. Mynster did not publicly mention Kierkegaard’s authorship a�er that. the admiring imitator] Presumably an allusion to Rasmus Nielsen (→ 28,18). See NB11:46. Today, e.g. … all who will hear, etc.] See Mynster’s sermon on Jn 15:26–16:4, delivered at Christiansborg Palace Church on the sixth Sunday a�er Easter, May 20, 1849 (see Adresseavisen, no.

1849

465

116, May 19, 1849). In his sermon, which was published as “Fred og Glæde hos vor Herre og Frelser. Paa sie�e Søndag e�er Paaske” [Peace and Joy with Our Lord and Savior: For the Sixth Sunday a�er Easter] in his Prædikener holdte i Aarene 1849 og 1850 [Sermons Given in the Years 1849 and 1850] (Copenhagen, 1851; ASKB 233), pp. 41–53, noting the hard times, he tells his congregation to “seek refuge from them [the hard times]―yes, out there in the streets and alleys, in the society of this world, it does not do any good to say it, but here in this holy place, in an assembly of those who confess him, here we dare say it, and want to say it: here with our Lord and Savior” (p. 44). preached on the streets] See Lk 10:10, 13:26. the quiet place] Kierkegaard’s repeats an expression Mynster frequently used in sermons when referring to a church.

22 30

the most highly developed period of the most intellectual of peoples] a reference to ancient Greece. Socrates a�ained ignorance] In Plato’s dialogues, Socrates o�en mentions his ignorance; see, e.g., Apology (21a–23b), where he explains that the oracle at Delphi had indeed denied that anyone was wiser than he, for he knew that he knew nothing, unlike the many who imagine that they know something. See The Collected Dialogues of Plato, Including the Le�ers, ed. Edith Hamilton and Huntington Cairns (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1961), pp. 7–9. Kierkegaard discusses Socrates’ ignorance extensively in The Concept of Irony. See, e.g., CI, 169–176; SKS 1, 217– 223.

6

sermon on the gospel for Easter Monday] Refers to Luther’s sermon on the gospel for Easter Monday, Lk 24:13–35, in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 264–273; p. 273. one thing can be true in philosophy that isn’t true in theology] A reference to the scholastic doctrine of a “double truth,” which was the result of a dispute at the University of Paris in the late Middle Ages. Cf. W. G. Tennemann’s account in Geschichte der Philosophie (→ 32,25), vol. 8.2 (1811), p. 460.

27

36

7

30

36

466

37

37

1 4

10

37

12

14

16

17

37

21

J O U R N A L NB 11: 63–72

µεταβασις εις αλλο γενος] This widely used expression is found in a similar form in Aristotle’s Posterior Analytics, bk. 1, chap. 7 (75a 38), where it is stated that a proof in one science cannot simply be transferred to another; e.g., geometric truths cannot be proven arithmetically; see Jonathan Barnes, ed., The Complete Works of Aristotle: The Revised Oxford Translation, 2 vols. (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1984), vol. 1, p. 122. The Li�le Book by H. H.] i.e., Two EthicalReligious Essays by pseudonym H. H. (→ 8,21). invite] In the card game whist, an “invitation” is a low card that is played as a signal to one’s partner to play a higher card, which can trump a card of the same suit. as it so happened] with H. H. credited as author. Lessing’s entire piece “On Fables” must be read again] A reference to “Abhandlungen über die Äsopische Fabel” [Treatises on the Aesopean Fable], in Go�hold Ephraim Lessing’s sämmtliche Schri�en [Go�hold Ephraim Lessing’s Collected Works], 32 vols. (Berlin 1825–1828; ASKB 1747– 1762), (abbreviated herea�er as Lessing’s sämmtliche Schri�en), vol. 18 (1827), pp. 160–263. ― Lessing’s: Go�hold Ephraim Lessing (1729–1781), German librarian, scholar, poet, and philosopher. Aristotle’s understanding of actuality and possibility … Lessing’s understanding of the same] A reference to Lessing’s discussion of Aristotle’s Rhetoric, bk. 2, chap. 20. See Lessing’s sämmtliche Schri�en, vol. 18 (1827), pp. 203–207. It is consistent with what I have developed in several pseudonymous works] See, e.g., SLW, 439; SKS 6, 406. I prefer “the experiment” more than the historical-actual] See, e.g., Repetition: A Venture in Experimenting Psychology, by Constantin Constantius, and “‘Guilty’ / ‘Not Guilty’: A Story of Suffering. A Psychological Experiment” in Stages on Life’s Way, by Frater Taciturnus. entrusting a pers. like Judas … treasurer] See Jn 12:6.

1849

I’ve o�en said … temper his own suffering] See, e.g., NB3:64 in KJN 4, 276 and NB7:55 in KJN 5, 106–107.

27

37

Stupid Go�lieb] A reference to Ludwig Tieck’s Der gestiefelte Kater [Puss in Boots] (1797), in which simpleminded Go�lieb obeys his talking cat’s every wish, though he doesn’t understand why. See Ludwig Tieck’s Sämmtliche Werke [Complete Works of Ludwig Tieck], 2 vols. (Paris, 1837; ASKB 1848–1849), vol. 1, pp. 3–48. maieutic] From the Greek maieúesthai, “to deliver (i.e., in childbirth),” an allusion to Socrates’ midwifery, whereby in his conversations with others he was able to help them deliver themselves by recollecting the knowledge they already possessed but had simply forgo�en. See, e.g., Plato’s dialogue Theaetetus, 148e–151d.

5

38

a ba�le of thought against doubt] Cf., e.g., the preface to Fear and Trembling (FT, 5–8; SKS 4, 101–104).

13

38

woman was given to man as a companion] See Gen 2:18. The word “companionship” (Danish, selskab) that Kierkegaard uses here is presumably based on S. B. Hersleb’s Lærebog i Bibelhistorien. Udarbeidet især med Hensyn paa de høiere Religionsklasser i de lærde Skoler [Textbook in Biblical History: Prepared for Use in Advanced Religion Courses at Institutes of Higher Education], 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1826 [1812]; ASKB 186–187), p. 3: “Then Jehova said: It is not good that man is alone. I will create companionship [selskab] for him.” calculate and tabulate the possible combinations] This refers perhaps to the Kongelig Dansk Lo�o-Calender [Royal Lo�ery Calendar], published annually, which included estimates of winnings from various combinations of numbers as well as statistics from preceding years.

7

39

In his sermon … recognizes him as his own] Refers tp Luther’s sermon on the gospel for the second Sunday a�er Easter, Jn 10:11–16, in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 294–302; pp. 300–301.

29

10

24

39

J O U R N A L NB 11: 72–75

34

40

40

1

13

19

the journeyman] See Jn 10:12–13. What De la Mo� says of Aesop’s fables] Kierkegaard cites “Abhandlungen über die Äsopische Fabel,” in Lessing’s sämmtliche Schri�en (→ 37,12), vol. 18, p. 242. ― De la Mo�e: Antoine Houdar de La Mo�e (1672–1731), French poet who published Fables nouvelles [New Fables] (1719), from which Lessing quotes. immortality … has to be proven] Shortly a�er Hegel’s death there was extensive and bi�er debate, among both his adherents and his opponents, concerning the extent to which his thought allowed for individual immortality. See, e.g., C. H. Weisse, Die philosophische Geheimlehre von der Unsterblichkeit des menschlichen Individuums [The Secret Philosophical Doctrine of the Immortality of the Human Individual] (Dresden, 1834); Carl Friedrich Göschel, Von den Beweisen für die Unsterblichkeit der menschlichen Seele im Lichte der spekulativen Philosophie [On the Proofs for the Immortality of the Human Soul in the Light of Speculative Philosophy] (Berlin, 1835; abbreviated herea�er as Beweisen für die Unsterblichkeit), and C. L. Michelet, Vorlesungen über die Persönlichkeit Go�es und Unsterblichkeit der Seele oder die ewige Persönlichkeit des Geistes [Lectures on the Personality of God and the Immortality of the Soul or the Eternal Personality of Spirit] (Berlin, 1841; ASKB 680). This German debate was regularly summarized in reports carried in the Danish Tidsskri� for udenlandsk theologisk Li�eratur [Periodical for Foreign Theological Literature], edited by H. N. Clausen and M. H. Hohlenberg, to which Kierkegaard subscribed beginning in 1833. See also “Tanker over Mueligheden af Beviser for Menneskets Udødelighed, med Hensyn til den nyeste derhen hørende Literatur” [Thoughts on the Possibility of Proofs for Human Immortality, with Regard to the Latest Literature on the Subject], in E�erladte Skri�er af Poul M. Møller [Posthumous Writings of Poul Martin Møller], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1839–1843; ASKB 1574–1576), vol. 2 (1842), pp. 158–272. giving 3 proofs] Perhaps a reference to the three proofs for the immortality of the individual

1849

467

soul set forth by C. F. Göschel in Beweisen für die Unsterblichkeit (→ 40,13), pp. 153–230. Poul Martin Møller discusses these proofs in his monograph “Tanker over Mueligheden af Beviser for Menneskets Udødelighed” in E�erladte Skri�er af Poul M. Møller (→ 40,13), vol. 2 (1842), pp. 257– 269. Lessing] → 37,12. employ all one’s … acumen … it isn’t a miracle] Presumably an allusion to Lessing’s recognition of Reimarus’s proof for the impossibility of revelation in Zur Geschichte und Li�eratur (→ 40m,1). See, e.g., sec. 4, pp. 288–365, pp. 505–506. speculators] Speculative (Hegelian) theologians. missionary efforts … the Wolfenbü�el Fragments] Cf. Zur Geschichte und Li�eratur, sec. 4, pp. 317–323. publishing the Wolfenbü�el Fragments] While Lessing was librarian at the ducal library in Wolfenbü�el in Braunschweig, he published Zur Geschichte und Li�eratur / Aus den Schätzen der Herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Wolfenbü�el [On History and Literature: From the Treasures of the Ducal Library at Wolfen Bü�el] (abbreviated herea�er as Zur Geschichte und Li�eratur), 3 vols. (Brauschweig, 1773–1781). This included fragments of biblical criticism titled “Von Duldung der Deisten: Fragment eines Ungenannten” [On Tolerating the Diests: Fragments by an Unknown Author] in 3 parts (1774), pp. 195–226, and “Ein Mehreres aus den Papieren des Ungenannten, die Offenbarung betreffend” [Something Concerning Revelation from the Papers of the Unknown Author] in 4 parts (1777), pp. 261–494. Lessing later published Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger. Noch ein Fragment des Wolfenbü�elschen Ungenannten, [The Aim of Jesus and His Disciples: Another Fragment from the Anonymous Author in Wolfenbü�el] (abbreviated herea�er as Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger), (Braunschweig, 1778). Lessing claimed to have found the fragments in the library but he had in fact copied them from the unpublished manuscripts of the deceased German theologian Hermann Samuel Reimarus (1694–1768).

25

40

28

37 17

41

1

40m

468 41

26

27

42

7

7

9 14

42

29

32

J O U R N A L NB 11: 76–79

By an old man, to whom I owe the most thanks] Kierkegaard’s father, Michael Pedersen Kierkegaard (→ 42,7). a young girl, to whom I am most indebted] Regine Olsen (1822–1904), Kierkegaard’s former fiancée. My father] Michael Pedersen Kierkegaard (1756– 1838). In 1780, he received a license as a hosier, and eight years later he was granted a license as an importer and wholesaler of colonial goods (sugar, coffee, molasses, etc.). He retired at the age of forty in possession of a considerable fortune; as the years passed, he added to his wealth through interest and investment income. A�er the death of his first wife, he married Ane Lund on April 26, 1797; they had seven children together, of whom Søren was the youngest. From 1820 to 1828, Mynster was M. P. Kierkegaard’s confessor, and this meant much to the elder Kierkegaard. See, e.g., NB5:80 in KJN 4, 407, wri�en in 1848: “It is true that there has lived many a simple citizen (exempli gratia my father) who simply by keeping literally to what was said on Sunday became a Christian―Ah! It is almost a satire on the Bishop!” my father was an insignificant simple man] Perhaps a reference to Mynster’s comment about Kierkegaard’s father in “Kirkelig Polemik,” in Intelligensblade ( → 35,2), vol. 4 (January 1, 1844), nos. 41–42, p. 112: “he was a pure and simple citizen who made no demands as he lived his life quietly.” But Mynster, who has become great] → 13,28. the deception heard in sermons … sometimes he’s persecuted] It has not been possible to identify any specific sermons that Kierkegaard might be alluding to. The conclusion of Luther’s sermon] Refers to Luther’s sermon on the gospel for the second Sunday a�er Easter (→ 39,29), in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 294–302; p. 302. Xnty can give up the fight] An allusion to the ecclesia militans (Latin, “the Church militant”), which, in medieval theology, was a designation for the Church’s conflict with the world.

1849

The Sisters in Kinnekullen] i.e., J. C. Hauch’s dramatic adventure Søstrene paa Kinnekullen, et dramatisk Eventyr i tre Akter [The Sisters in Kinnekullen: A Dramatic Tale in Three Acts] (Copenhagen, 1849). The publication of Søstrene paa Kinnekullen was announced in Adresseavisen, no. 111, May 14, 1849, but it had premiered at the Royal Theatre on April 26. It was performed seven times. In the preface, the auth. says … neither is it his own] Refers to a postscript with separate pagination, p. II: The fundamental theme of this work is in no way taken from a folk-tale, though it might seem so; at the same time, the author cannot claim that it has originally been conceived by him, either.” The author, J. C. Hauch, had sent Kierkegaard a le�er dated May 17, 1849, in which he thanks Kierkegaard for a copy of the second edition of Either/Or (→ 8,29). If Kierkegaard was aware that Hauch was the author, he might have interpreted the following passage as evidence that the idea for Søstrene paa Kinnekullen was inspired by a reading of Either/Or: “Please don’t take this as a usual compliment but rather as a declaration of truth when I say to you that I have not only followed you and your literary career, but that I have indeed found many allusions and intimations in your works that have aided by own intellectual development” (B&A, vol. 1, p. 228). a girl falls in love with money … 25 years later at her sister’s silver wedding] The sisters are seventeen-year-old Johanna and twenty-five-year Ulrikka, daughters of a poor farmer living close to Lake Vänern in West Gothland in Sweden. Johanna has accepted her impoverished circumstances and simply wants to marry her beloved as soon as possible, while Ulrikka continues spinning thread for her wedding a�ire, which she has done for ten years. Her ambition leads her into the hands of a mountain troll, who offers to let her sit in a cave in a dark mountain and spin pure gold that she herself can keep. Ulrikka sits there for twenty-five years, though she thinks it has been no more than a month or two. She finally asks the troll to release her and returns home to find that her younger sister, Johanna, is celebrating her silver anniversary. Horrified, a remorseful

34

35

5

42

J O U R N A L NB 11: 79–87

8

11

43

35 38

44

6

8 21

44m

1

Ulrikka donates all her money to churches and orphanages. sorcerer explains … waste their lives] A version of the sorcerer’s line, p. 91: “You might think she’s the only one / Who has spun away her youth / And sacrificed life for gold / But I, who know be�er, I say: / There are many women and many men / Who you revere and esteem / There are thousands who know it not / Who sat night and day in the mountain / And wasted their lives the same way.” The idea is that living in an abstract way is a wasted life] Refers to the postscript (→ 42,35): “Every thoughtful reader will no doubt understand the primary theme of this li�le tale. The question here is not only about greed and covetousness, but about every external, one-dimensional activity that causes one to forget and neglect the authentic spiritual duties that each individual is to perform, and that causes the inner life to remain inert―regardless of how busy one is in the visible world―while time slips by irretrievably. If the author has not completely missed his mark, every activity of this kind is represented by the primary character in this drama. And of course it does not make any difference if one sits in a cave, at a desk, or reclines on a sofa in a palace, if the development of one’s inner life is neglected” (p. I). pseudonyms] i.e., the pseudonymous works from 1843–1846. a) eccentric aestheticism and b) the ethicist] Presumably an allusion to pseudonyms “A” and “Wilhelm” in Either/Or as well as the five aesthetes and Wilhelm in Stages on Life’s Way. a big hit as a profound thinker] Presumably an allusion to the reviews of Hauch’s Søstrene paa Kinnekullen in Berlingske Tidende [Berling’s Times] on April 28, 1849 (no. 101), Fædrelandet [The Fatherland] (no. 98, pp. 389–391), and Flyve-Posten [The Flying Post] (no. 98). the passage in Either/Or] See EO 1, 31; SKS 2, 40. “Mary”] See Lk 10:38–41. “Anna” (patience in expectancy)] See Lk 2:36– 37. See also Kierkegaard’s edifying discourse, “Patience in Expectancy,” (EUD, 205–226; SKS 5, 206–224).

1849

469

Quidam … “the wish” must be preserved in suffering] A reference to “‘Guilty?’/ ‘Not Guilty?’ A Story of Suffering. Psychological Experiment,” the third part of Stages on Life’s Way (1845) (SLW, 185– 397; SKS 6, 173–454) ― Quidam: Latin, “someone or other.”

5

44m

flesh and blood] See Mt 16:17; Gal 1:16; Ef 6:12. Mynster] → 13,28.

26

44

1

45

by their deeds shall you know them] See Mt 7:16. Wolfenbü�el] Fragments, “Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger,” §. 6. end] See Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger (→ 40m,1), pt. 1, § 6, pp. 16–18.― Wolfenbü�el: → 40m,1.

5

45

The Book of Wisdom … unrighteous say about the righteous] See the apocryphal Book of Wisdom, Wis 2:10–20. Lasset uns … “Von dem Zwecke der Lehre Jesu” § 10 end] With some deviations in orthography, Kierkegaard cites from Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger (→ 40m,1), pt. 1, §10, pp. 29–30.

11

he doesn’t dare get angry, argue, take revenge, or repay like with like] Perhaps an allusion to Eph 4:31–32. repaying all the evil … all the good he can think of] See Mt 5:44.

16

the Christian definition of sin … not believing in me] See Jn 16:8–9. Sin is not having faith. That’s also how it’s presented in The Sickness unto Death] See, e.g., SUD, 82; SKS 11, 196.

15

Mynster … Pentecost vespers … grant the kingdom] Bishop Mynster (→ 13,28) preached at Pentecost vespers on May 27, 1849, in the Church of Our Lady. See Adresseavisen, no. 122, May 26, 1849. See J. P. Mynster, Prædikener holdte i Aarene 1849 og 1850 (→ 35,16), pp. 54–67. Heiberg, the caretaker of the public … skirmish with the public] An allusion to J. L. Heiberg’s (→ 13,13) frequent critique of “the public.” Heiberg’s

21

7

45

14

46

34

47

17

26

47

470

28

32

48

1

J O U R N A L NB 11: 87–94

castigation of the public can be found at many points in his prose and poetic writings, e.g., in “Hvad man seer, og hvad man hører” [What One Sees and What One Hears] (Kjøbenhavns flyvende Post [Copenhagen’s Flying Post], 1830, nos. 3–5), and especially in the later series of articles “Om Theatret” [On the Theater] in Fædrelandet, 1840, nos. 272, 295, 302, 303, 339, 340, 348, 359, and in articles that appeared in Intelligensblade (→ 35,2): “Folk og Publicum” [People and Public] (1842, no. 6), “Tak-Adresse til Publicum” [Address of Thanks to the Public] (1842, no. 8), “Skuespilleren, Publicum og Critiken” [The Actor, the Public, and the Critic] (1843, no. 13), and “Bifalds- og Mishags-Y�ringer i Theatret” [Expressions of Approval and Disapproval in the Theater] (1843, no. 21). In the same sermon … joining the minority in parliament … associating with the biggest names] The parliament referred to here is the body of representatives who met to debate a new Danish constitution. It was founded on October 23, 1848, and met frequently until June 5, 1849, when the constitution was signed by the king. The finished constitution was ratified on May 25, 1849, with 119 votes in favor, 4 against, while 10 abstained, including Mynster. In his sermon two days a�er the vote, Mynster speaks of not kneeling before “the idols of our time” and polemicizes against confusing “the voice of the people” and “the voice of God.” See Prædikener holdte i Aarene 1849 og 1850 (→ 35,16), p. 65 and pp. 57–58. Mynster has never had the slightest idea what Christian polemic is] Perhaps an illusion to Mynster’s article “Kirkelig Polemik” in Intelligensblade (→ 35,2). Yes, Plato and Socrates were right: banish the poets from the state―and the orators as well] In the second and third books of Plato’s Republic (376d–398b) there is a discussion of proper upbringing, and poetry is a�acked for its lack of morality; the critique of poetry is taken up again in the tenth book (595a–608b), where the conclusion is that poets are not welcome in the ideal state, both because they do not present the real truth and because they appeal more to feelings than to reason.

1849

Mynster] → 13,28.

11

48

Peer Degn … the last word is: Amen] Refers to a line by Peer Degn in Ludvig Holberg’s comedy Erasmus Montanus eller Rasmus Berg [Erasmus Montanus, or Rasmus Berg] (1731), act 1, sc. 4, where the half-literate Peer Degn says, “Oh, twenty years ago I could stand on one leg and read the entire litany in Greek. I can still remember that the last word is ‘Amen.’” See Den Danske SkuePlads [The Danish Theater], 7 vols. (Copenhagen, 1758 or 1788 [1731–1754]; ASKB 1566–1567), vol. 5. The volumes are undated and unpaginated.

3

48

Whatever does not proceed from faith … is sin, says Paul] See Rom 14:23. sin against the Holy Spirit] See Mt 12:32 and Mk 3:29. sin is Socratic ignorance] Alludes to Socrates’ principle that “virtue is knowledge,” which is developed in several of Plato’s dialogues, e.g., Protagoras (351e–357e). Here Socrates asserts that the person who has true knowledge cannot let it be displaced by the passions and the like, and that the person who chooses the wrong course of action merely expresses his ignorance. See Udvalgte Dialoger af Platon [Selected Dialogues of Plato], trans. C. J. Heise, 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1830–1838; ASKB 1164–1166), vol. 2 (1831), pp.195–209. Kierkegaard expressed in numerous places his understanding that this Socratic view meant that “sin is ignorance”; see The Concept of Irony (CI, 211; SKS 1, 255); Philosophical Fragments (PF, 50n; SKS 4, 254n); Concluding Unscientific Postscript (CUP 1, 339; SKS 7, 310); and especially the chapter titled “The Socratic Definition of Sin” in the second part of The Sickness unto Death (SUD, 87–96; SKS 11, 201–208).

25

49

Aladdin] Refers to the principal character in Adam Oehlenschläger’s comedy Aladdin, eller Den forunderlige Lampe [Aladdin, or the Wonderful Lamp], in Poetiske Skri�er [Poetic Writings], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1805, ASKB 1597–1598), vol. 2, pp. 75–436. Kierkegaard sketched Aladdin’s spirited preparations for his wedding, his stirring instructions to the genie of the lamp, and his powerful

13

26 32

50

J O U R N A L NB 11: 94–100

14

51

1

4

5

51

7

obsession with his beloved Gulnare in “Some Reflections on Marriage in Answer to Objections,” in Stages on Life’s Way (1845) (SLW, 104; SKS 6, 99), where he writes: “What makes Aladdin great is that his soul has the inner strength to desire.” The play was performed in its entirety at the Royal Theater on April 17, 1839, and was performed twenty-five times in all from then until November 25, 1842. the ring] An allusion to the ring that the evil Noureddin gives to Aladdin. While Aladdin is imprisoned in a cave, he knocks the ring against a stone, releasing a spirit who then offers Aladdin his services (Poetiske Skri�er, vol. 2, p. 133). God says to Moses: Why are you shouting so loudly―yet Moses was silent] See Ex 14, esp. v. 15. Luther’s sermon … a�er Easter] Refers to Luther’s sermon on the gospel for the fi�h Sunday a�er Easter, Jn 16:23–40, in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 318–325; p. 322, col. 2: “Moses shouted, and God said to him: ‘Why are you shouting at me?’ even though Moses was silent.” Hitherto you have not prayed in my name] See Jn 16:24, cited in En christelig Postille vol. 1, p. 318, col. 1. You’re greatly outnumbered by the enemy... the cause is lost] Presumably a reference to the Three Years’ War (also known as the First Schleswig War), which broke out in spring 1848. On July 2, both sides (the Danish and Prussian governments) agreed a three months’ truce that was prolonged by a further four months on August 26. On February 26, 1849, the Danish government withdrew from the agreed truce, although further negotiations meant that military action did not resume in southern Jutland until April 3, 1849. This resulted in the occupation of large parts of Schleswig and Jutland by allied German troops. The combined German forces totaled about sixtyfive thousand men, whereas the Danish forces totaled about forty-one thousand. The Jutland city of Fredericia was besieged by a German force of fourteen thousand men, which was roughly dou-

1849

471

ble the size of the Danish forces defending the city. A new truce began on July 10, 1849. See, e.g., Berlingske Tidende, no. 114, May 15, 1849. close your door, speak with God, pray] See Mt 6:6. the history of Xnty: “First of all … consult the experience of history for help.”] Perhaps a summary of the introduction to M. Mørk Hansen, Populær Fremstilling af Kirkens Historie for tænkende Christne [A Popular Account of the History of the Church for Thoughtful Christians] (Copenhagen, 1848; ASKB 167), pp. 1–2. God-Man] Jesus as both God and human.

33

6

52

Councillor H. C. Ørsted] Hans Christian Ørsted (1777–1851), Danish physicist; from 1806 extraordinary professor and from 1817 ordinary professor of physics at the University of Copenhagen, where he served three terms as rector. If a lark wants to fart like an elephant, it will end up bursting] No other source for the saying has been located. Cf., however, “A mouse can’t fart like a horse without spli�ing its arse,” noted as no. 6653 in E. Mau, Dansk Ordsprogs-Skat [A Treasury of Danish Sayings], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1879), vol. 2, p. 46.

15

52

seeking first the kingdom of God] See Mt 6:33 (→ 33,31).

26

52

They say that when Xnty came into the world … miracles are no longer needed] Perhaps an allusion to G.W.F. Hegel, Vorlesungen über die Philosophie der Religion. Nebst einer Schri� über die Beweise vom Daseyn Go�es [Lectures on the Philosophy of Religion: Together with a Writing on the Proofs of the Existence of God], ed. P. Marheineke, 2nd ed., 2 vols. (Berlin, 1840 [1832]; ASKB 564–565), vol. 2 (constitutes vol. 12 [vol. 16 in Jub.]), in Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel’s Werke. Vollständige Ausgabe [G.W.F. Hegel’s Works: Complete Edition], 18 vols. (Berlin, 1832–1845, abbreviated herea�er as Hegel’s Werke), vol. 12 (1840), p. 323 (Jub. vol. 16, p. 323). ― nearly everyone is Xn: According to the census of February 1, 1845, the kingdom of Denmark had

1

53

51

37

16

472

6

7 9

53

24

J O U R N A L NB 11: 100–107

a population of 1,350,327, of whom all, excepting 3,670 Jews, professed Christianity; see Statistisk Tabelværk [Statistical Tables], pt. 10 (Copenhagen, 1846), p. xiv. Xnty is a militant teaching] Presumably a reference to the idea of ecclesia militans (Latin, “the Church militant”) (→ 42,32). enmity betw. God and the world] See, e.g., Jn 15:19, Jas 4:4, 1 Jn 2:15. polemical view is victorious] Presumably a reference to the idea of ecclesia triumphans (Latin, “the Church triumphant”) (→ 42,32). Thomas a Kempis … rather do another’s will than your own] From bk. 3, chap. 23, “Four Necessary Conditions to Keep True Peace,” in Thomas a Kempis, om Christi E�erfølgelse, fire Bøger [Thomas à Kempis, Four Books on the Imitation of Christ], trans. and ed. J.A.L. Holm (with an introduction and description of Thomas’s life by A. G. Rudelbach), 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1848 [1826]; ASKB, 273), p. 110. ― Thomas a Kempis: Thomas Hemerken from Kempen (ca. 1380–1471) is generally regarded as the author of the classic late-medieval text The Imitation of Christ, although this is sometimes questioned. The book was widely read by Protestants as well as Catholics.

54

7

Wolfenbü�el Fragments … zu antworten wissen] With some deviations in orthography, Kierkegaard cites from Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger (→ 40m,1), pt. 1, §24, pp. 92–97; p. 96.

54

18

Every writer here in Denmark received a copy of Either/Or] That is, of the second edition of Either/Or that was published on May 14, 1849 (→ 8,29). See the le�ers of thanks from authors Frederik Paludan-Müller on May 15, 1849, Hans Christian Andersen on May 15, 1849, and Carsten Hauch on May 17, 1849 (B&A, vol. 1, pp. 227– 228), as well as the dedications from Kierkegaard to Christian Winther and Henrik Hertz (B&A, vol. 1, p. 340). crisis is over] That is, the crisis a�er the publication of the first edition of Either/Or in 1843.

54

21

1849

Victor Eremita] (Latin, “the victorious hermit”), the pseudonymous editor of Either/Or. Øehlenschläger] Adam Oehlenschläger (1779– 1850), Danish author; from 1810, professor of aesthetics at the University of Copenhagen. Winther] Christian Winther (1796–1876), Danish lyric poet, translator, and editor. The dedication from Kierkegaard in Winther’s copy of Either/Or reads: “To Poet Chr. Winther / With great esteem and appreciative admiration” (B&A, vol. 1, p. 340). Hertz] Henrik Hertz (ca. 1798–1870), Danish lawyer, poet, and critic. The dedication from Kierkegaard in Hertz’s copy of Either/Or reads: “To / The Danish Poet / Henrik Hertz / With appreciative devotion / from / Victor Eremita (B&A vol. 1, p. 340).

22

the books that are finished] The manuscripts to The Sickness unto Death, Practice in Christianity, and The Point of View of My Work as an Author. economic concerns] → 64,5. I might place myself too high] See, e.g., also NB11:8. ge�ing an appointment] That is, as a priest in the Danish State Church or as a teacher at the university or seminary. Applications for open positions were first given to the bishop of the local diocese (in Kierkegaard’s case, it would have been bishop Mynster [ → 13,28 ]). The bishop then forwarded the application with an accompanying evaluation to the minster of culture, J. N. Madvig (→ 113,10), who then sent his recommendation to the king.

3

To be “the truth”] See Jn 14:6. concealment] Perhaps an allusion to Jesus’ enigmatic words to his disciples concerning his immanent crucifixion in Jn 16:12: “I still have many things to say to you, but you cannot bear them now.”

6

not wanting a single follower] See, e.g., NB11:52 and 60. Xt, who was truth] Jn 14:6. everyone is Xn] → 53,1.

33

56

8

57

23

23

24

55

4 5 6

56

9

20

J O U R N A L NB 11: 108–114 57

26

31

boast when it compares itself with “the sects”] Presumably an allusion to Bishop Mynster (→ 13,28), who both as preacher and as the head of the State Church, criticized different “sects,” i.e., various religious awakenings that arose in Denmark at the beginning of the nineteenth century, which included Baptists, the “Old Lutherans,” “The Courageous Jutlanders,” and other rural movements. when Xnty itself was “a sect” (that’s what it was called back then)] See, e.g., K. Hase, Kirchengeschichte. Lehrbuch zunächst für academische Vorlesungen [Church History: Primary Handbook for Academic Lectures], 2nd ed. (Leipzig, 1836 [1834]; ASKB U 52), p. 37, where one reads that the first Christians, then called Galileans or Nazarenes, were said to be a “much hated sect.”

2

Christ … the greatest is the servant] See Mt 23:11; Mk 9:34–35; Lk 22:24–27.

58

23

training wheels] In Danish, the word is ledebaand, which was a reinlike device a�ached to a belt that was used to guide a small child around until he or she could walk without assistance.

59

16

The comment in the Wolf. Fragments … the kingdom of heaven] See Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger (→ 40m,1), pt. 1, §30, pp. 112–117, esp. pp. 112–113. in the first of the two essays by H. H. … understood the ma�er spiritually] i.e., “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” in Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21). There we read: “To shed light on this historical event, one could show how his seeming at first to want to have royal power had its place specifically in order that he could be crucified. If there is really to be passion in a life situation and flame in the passion, there must be a dra�. But a dra� is a double movement, the crossing of two currents of air. That the Jews had focused all their a�ention on him and wanted to make him king, that for a moment at the beginning, he himself, as it seemed, turned in that direction, precisely that became the sting in their embi�erment and made the rage of hate blood-

58

21

1849

473

thirsty when he then refused” (WA, 60; SKS 11, 66). Lessing argues somewhere … we really can’t admire the heroic] Lessing’s correspondence with German philosopher and author Moses Mendelssohn (1729–1786) was published as “Go�h. Ephr. Lessing’s Briefwechsel mit Moses Mendelssohn. 1755–1780” [Go�h. Ephr. Lessing’s Correspondence with Moses Mendelssohn], in Lessing’s sämmtliche Schri�en (→ 37,12), vol. 26 (1827), pp. 3–272. In a le�er dated November 28, 1756, Lessing wrote that the heroic does not arouse admiration but merely astonishment, as heroic deeds transcend what is universally human and thus cannot be imitated. For Lessing, the possibility of imitation is a condition for genuine admiration (see pp. 71–79). object of a�ack by the vulgar masses … I myself demanded it] (→ 12,18). the degree to which Christianity incorporates the heroic … “The Gospel of Sufferings,” no. VII] See Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits, third part, titled “The Gospel of Sufferings. Christian Discourses,” discourse 7, titled “The Joy in the Idea That Bold Confidence Is Able in Suffering to Take Power from the World and Has the Power to Change Scorn to Honor, Downfall to Victory” (UDVS, 321–341; SKS 8, 413–431). The relationship of Christianity and heroism is not addressed explicitly, however. fear and trembling] → 20,24.

27

Pecuniary sacrifices are becoming heavier and heavier] → 64,5. I can do no other] A reference to Luther’s celebrated (but possibly apocryphal) statement to the Diet of Worms in 1521, when he refused to retract the teachings that had been condemned by the Church: “ich kann nicht anders, Go� helfe mir! Amen!” [I can do no other. God help me! Amen!]. See C.F.G. Stang, Martin Luther. Sein Leben und Wirken [Martin Luther: His Life and Work] (Stu�gart, 1838; ASKB 790), p. 123. a thought that I had indeed entertained early on] → 14,21.

32

59

38 8

60

14

60

36

1

60m

474 60

39

61

2

61

14

32 34 37

1

62

4

12

J O U R N A L NB 11: 115–121

R. Nielsen] Rasmus Nielsen (→ 28,18). He erected a great edifice … silent about the former] Refers to Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed (→ 28,18), where Rasmus Nielsen credits Kierkegaard several times (→ 28,26). from triumph to triumph] A reference to the expression ecclesia triumphans (Latin, “the Church triumphant”) (→ 42,32). It’s his own fault] (→ 12,18). Cf. NB4:45 in KJN 4, 308–309. he wanted to tear down the temple and build it up in 3 days] See Mt 26:60–61 and Jn 2:19–22. the downfall of Judaism] That is, the destruction of the temple (70 �.�.) and the suppression of Jewish life following a revolt in 135 �.�. his resurrection … on a foundation] Perhaps a reference to M. Mørk Hansen, Populær Fremstilling af Kirkens Historie (→ 51,37) where it is said that the miracle at Pentecost “publicly laid the foundations of the Church” (p. 4). What was it … a miracle must have intervened] Perhaps another reference to M. Mørk Hansen’s Populær Fremstilling af Kirkens Historie (→ 51,37): “So they stood, abandoned and devoid of courage at the foot of the cross and their hope for a comforter whom the father would send, as he had promised in the hour of farewell, was not strong enough to form a community and give them power to fight the enemies of the gospel. But they had been purified by the pain of the master’s departure. Their joy at having seen him rise from the grave and ascend to the father’s glory gave new life to their hope. This took place on that great day of Pentecost (Acts 2), when they were gathered together as one and with marvelous signs from heaven, were all filled with the Holy Spirit and began to talk in strange tongues, led by the Spirit. Then the Apostles realized that they were not abandoned and fatherless, but that the Lord was with them with his holy power” (pp. 3–4). earthly expectations] That is, that Jesus would be an earthly king who would drive out the occupying power and reestablish an independent

1849

Jewish state. See M. Mørk Hansen, Populær Fremstilling af Kirkens Historie, pp. 5–6. as Xt said … the spirit could come] See Jn 16:7. the objection (found in the Wolf. Fragm. … earthly messiah] A summary of pt. 1, §§ 32–33, in Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger (→ 40m,1), pp. 120–127, esp. p. 127, according to which the proclamation of Jesus as redeemer was a result of the failure of his original intention of bringing about an earthly kingdom. ― messiah: Christ, literally “anointed one.” they couldn’t understand it] See Mk 9:32; Lk 9:45, 18:34.

12

62

22

27

even if he suffered for a moment] See Mk 14:32– 36; Mt 26:36–46; Lk 22:39–46. 48 minutes] According to a resolution of May 23, 1760, § 4, sermons could not be longer than one hour.

18

What Luther says] A reference to Luther’s sermon on the gospel for Whit Monday, Jn 3:16–21, in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 354–364. Citing Jn 3:16, Luther says: “For the word ‘world’ has a shameful sound in God’s ear and it seems extraordinary to say ‘God loves the world’ as this unites two absolutely contradictory things” (p. 354, col. 1). He continues: “But watch out how and of whom he speaks: For God so loved the world―that is, that all might believe in him. Now the world contains rather more than saints Peter and Paul, I think, so that what this means is the entire human race, all together, with none excluded” (p. 361, col. 1).

26

63

Luther’s own saying … 2 Thess 3:2] This refers to Luther’s sermon on the gospel for Pentecost Sunday in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, p. 349, col. 1. Schelling … Luther] The philosopher Friedrich Wilhelm Joseph Schelling (1775–1854) was called to Berlin University in 1841. From November 1, 1841, to March 18, 1842, he held a series of lectures on the philosophy of revelation. Kierkegaard attended these lectures through to February 3, 1842. See Notebook 11 in KJN 3, 303–365. The definition of faith and the reference to Luther seems not to

32

63

63

24

35

J O U R N A L NB 11: 121–123 have been made in these lectures and is therefore not found in Kierkegaard’s notes. Instead, Kierkegaard is probably referring to Friedrich Heinrich Jacobi (1743–1819) in Jacobi’s Werke (→ 20,22), vol. 4.1 (1819), p. XLIV: “Faith is not everybody’s business, as science is, that is, it cannot be communicated by simply making the requisite effort.” In Kierkegaard’s own copy of Jacobi’s text, this passage is marked with a vertical line and question mark in the margin, and the first half of the passage (“Faith is not everybody’s business, as science is”) is underlined. At the foot of the page, Kierkegaard has wri�en: “In this case, faith is once more just a ma�er of geniality that is preserved for certain individuals, just as Schelling speaks about the geniality of agency. This happens so o�en[:] In the course of articulating a universal perspective, statements like these creep in” (KA, E 65; cf. Pap. V C 13,4). 64

1 5

Cf. this journal pp. 217ff.] See NB11:192–194. when I had the benefit of having a fortune] Kierkegaard’s father died in 1838, leaving an estate―inherited by Søren Kierkegaard and his brother Peter Christian―which in 1839 was estimated to be worth 125,000 rix-dollars (see F. Brandt and E. Thorkelin, Søren Kierkegaard og pengene [Søren Kierkegaard and Money], 2nd ed. [Copenhagen, 1993 (1935)], p. 67). Kierkegaard’s financial circumstances in the period 1846–1848 can only be determined approximately; he sold the last of his inherited stocks in early March 1847, and he sold the last of his royal bonds in midDecember the same year (see Søren Kierkegaard og pengene, pp. 69–71). Therea�er Kierkegaard had no dividend or interest income from his stocks and bonds and was forced to reduce his capital further. He felt compelled to sell the family house at Nytorv 2 (see map 2, B2–3) on December 24, 1847. The purchase price was 22,000 rix-dollars and ne�ed Kierkegaard 10,000 rix-dollars in cash plus a second mortgage for 5,000 rix-dollars; his brother Peter Christian held a first mortgage of 7,000 rix-dollars (see Søren Kierkegaard og pengene, pp. 83–85). Kierkegaard invested some of the cash he received from the sale of the house in shares and royal bonds. The bond purchase turned out

1849

475

to be unfortunate because the war that began later in 1848 caused the bond market to fall, costing Kierkegaard 700 rix-dollars. He does not seem to have lost money on the shares, however; see entry NB7:114 in KJN 5, 144–145, and Søren Kierkegaard og pengene, pp. 86–90. find security by ge�ing a position … as I always thought I would] → 14,21. What I put down about myself in NB10 ] See Journal NB10 in KJN 5, entries NB10:5, 16, 19, 38, 39, 42, 48, 78, 82, 83, 84, 89, 97, 166, 169, 185, 186, 191, 192, 194, 199, 200, 203. Journal NB10 was begun on February 9, 1849, and finished by May 2, 1849, at the latest (when Kierkegaard began Journal NB11). pure reflection … sheer retrospection] See JJ:167 from 1843: “It is quite true what philosophy says, that life must be understood backwards. But then one forgets the other principle, that it must be lived forwards. Which principle, the more one thinks it through, ends exactly with temporal life never being able properly to be understood, precisely because I can at no instant find complete rest to adopt the position: backwards” (KJN 2, 179). the river Guadalquibir] Guadalquibir or Guadalquivir (from the Arabic Wad-al-kebir, “the great river”) has its source in the Sierra de Cazorla in southern Spain and flows into the Atlantic in the Bay of Cadiz. However, it does not flow underground at any point, and Kierkegaard seems to have confused it with another Spanish river, also flowing into the Bay of Cadiz, the Guadiana (from the Arabic Wadi-Ana, “river Anas”). Both are discussed in the section “On the Rivers of Spain” in J. Hübner, Fuldstændige Geographie [Comprehensive Geography], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1743–1749; AKSB 2042–2044), vol. 1, pp. 43–44. See also L. Moréri, Le grand dictionnaire historique, ou le mélange curieux de l’histoire sacrée et profane [The Great Dictionary, or the Curious Mixture of Sacred and Profane History], 6 vols. (Basel, 1731–1732; AKSB 1965–1969), vol. 4 (1732), p. 384. I must now plunge into pseudonymity] → 65,5 and → 65,7. looking for a position] → 55,6.

6 9

13

1

2 4

65

476

4

5

7

11

12 12 13

J O U R N A L NB 11: 123–124

traveling] Kierkegaard seems to have begun thinking about traveling in the spring at the beginning of 1849. See journal entry NB10:60: “I really have to travel this spring” (KJN 5, 301). See also entries NB10:69, 185, 186, 192 in KJN 5. The three small ethical-religious treatises will remain anonymous] This is a reference to A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Treatises (→ 16,10), nos. 1, 2, and 4 (which excludes nos. 3 and 6, which had already been published as Two Small Ethical-Religious Essays by H. H. (→ 8,21), and no. 5, which, according to NB10:38, Kierkegaard had already decided not to publish (see KJN 5, 286–287). It is not clear when Kierkegaard thought about publishing the works anonymously. Originally, he seems to have wanted to publish them under his own name since, in a dra� to a preface, he refers to his other works by name. See Pap. IX B 10, p. 311, and Pap. IX B 12, p. 313. The three works … Practice in Christianity. An Experiment by] These became the three parts of Practice in Christianity, by Anti-Climacus. ― An Experiment by: Parts 1 and 2 were originally called “An Experiment by Anti-Climacus.” See Pap. IX B 45 and Pap. IX B 51. nothing personal … in the third one.] That is, in no. 3, “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself.” There a footnote acknowledges that the text is that of an address “delivered by Magister Kierkegaard in Frue Church on Friday, September 1, 1848” (PC 151; SKS 12, 155). A Note] “A Note Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 32,18). Three Notes] “Three Notes Concerning my Work as an Author” (→ 32,19). Armed Neutrality] The manuscript for Armed Neutrality was wri�en in 1848 and originally conceived as a periodical, which, according to NB6:61, “was to appear simultaneously with the 2nd edition of Either/Or. And in it I would audit the whole of Christianity, piece by piece, and install the coiled spring” (KJN 5, 42). Later, when Kierkegaard wanted instead to use it as an addendum to Point of View (→ 6,1), the title was changed to “Armed Neutrality or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom” (see Pap. X 5 B 106–109, pp. 287–302).

1849

Reitzel] The Danish publisher Carl Andreas Reitzel (1789–1853) established his own press and bookshop in 1819. It was located in Købmagergade in the building that is now no. 44 (see map 2, C2). Beginning in 1847, Reitzel was Kierkegaard’s preferred publisher, and he had previously dealt with many of Kierkegaard’s works on commission. this fellow … all his moaning] See NB2:113 (from August 3, 1847), where, commenting on his dealings with Reitzel, Kierkegaard writes that “I know how careless he is” (KJN 4, 184). Later, in NB12:143 (September 1849) Kierkegaard complains that he is “suffocated by [Reitzel’s] anxieties and hesitations.” serve for my good] Possibly an allusion to Rom 8:28. an appointment] That is, as a parish priest. in Journal NB10] → 65,9. in this journal] See especially NB11:6, 8, 14, 20, 21, 25, 45, 53, 105, 107, 115, 122. a loose piece of paper] NB11:125. See the a�ached] NB11:124. Cf. this journal p. 157] i.e., NB11:150.

22

belongs with Journal NB11 p. 127 ] Page 127 of Kierkegaard’s journal contains the first three paragraphs of NB11:123. If “From On High He Will Draw All unto Himself” is to be pseudonymous … Church of Our Lady] “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself,” no. 1 (→ 65,11) was held as a communion discourse on September 1, 1848. See Adresseavisen on September 1, 1848, no. 209: “Preachers Today, Friday. / Church of Our Lady, Mr. Mag. Kierkegaard, 9:00 a.m.” ― “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself”: See Jn 12:32. ― Church of Our Lady: See map 2, B1. Mag.] Magister, i.e., magister artium (Master of Arts) referring to the degree conferred for the defense of On the Concept of Irony (September 29, 1841). Hr. Mag., who so o�en has had to accept that fact that his work is used by others] → 28,21, → 28,26, → 42,35, and → 61,2.

1

23

37 40 3

66

3 4 8 9

2

11

67

J O U R N A L NB 11: 125–132 69

2 2

6 12 13

15

20 25 36

If I had the means] → 64,5. not in order to get myself put to death] See “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” in Two Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 8,21). the kind of persecution I’ve suffered] That is, his having been pilloried by Corsaren (→ 12,18). seeking a position] → 55,6. last year, when I made a bit of money from selling the house] This refers to Nytorv 2 (today Frederiksberggade 1; see map 2, B2–3), the house that Kierkegaard jointly inherited with his brother Peter Christian Kierkegaard a�er their father’s death in 1838. In 1843 Søren became sole owner of the property (where he lived from 1813 to 1837 and again from 1844 to 1848). In December 1847, Kierkegaard felt obliged to sell it, and in January 1848, he received 10,000 rix-dollars in cash plus a second mortgage for 5,000 rix-dollars (→ 64,5). In NB7:114 (November 1848) he wrote: “When I sold the house I had considered stopping my literary productivity, traveling abroad for 2 years, and then coming home and becoming a priest. I had in fact made ca. 2200 rd. on the place” (KJN 5, 144). On January 28, 1848 Kierkegaard took out a rental agreement with the tanner J. J. Gram (KA, sec. D, fascicule 8, folder 21) for an apartment on the corner of Rosenborggade (no. 9) and Tornebuskegade (see map 2, C1). According to the contract, he was to take up occupancy on the common moving day of April 27, 1848. the Friday discourses … place to finish] A reference to the “Discourses at Friday Communion: Christian Discourses,” i.e., part 4 of Christian Discourses, which appeared on the April 2, 1848. A�er this, Kierkegaard did not publish again until May 14, 1849 (→ 8,29). ― Friday discourses: Sermons delivered at the penitential Friday communion services, held in the Church of Our Lady in Copenhagen. accustomed … to having money] → 64,5. to seek a post] → 55,6. This is the loose piece of paper … p. 129] In the last paragraph of NB11:123, Kierkegaard refers to this “loose piece of paper” (→ 66,4).

1849

477

The mo�o … die for me] A loose quotation of NB10:170, where the mo�o is said to be for the three works later collected under the title Practice in Christianity (→ 65,7). the three writings: Practice in Christianity] → 65,7.

2

72

1

72m

the gospel about the rich man] Lk 16:19–31, also the gospel reading set for the 1st Sunday a�er Trinity. he felt completely assured … the rich man and the beggar. ] A reference to Luther’s sermon for the first Sunday a�er Trinity in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 382–390. Luther writes about the rich man who ends up in hell: “he regarded himself as pious and he was indeed pious, that is, outwardly, in the eyes of the world. That is why he was able to think ‘If I was not so pious, God would not have given me such happiness and such blessings’” (p. 389, col. 2). he dies and goes to hell] i.e., like the rich man in the parable. See Lk 16:22–23.

25

72

9

73

Text for a Friday Sermon] In addition to his sermon on Friday, September 1, 1848 (on Jn 12:32, → 67,2), Kierkegaard had previously preached twice at the Friday communion service at the Church of Our Lady, namely, on June 18, 1847 (on Mt 11:28) and August 27, 1847 (on Jn 10:27). These were published as the second and third discourses in Christian Discourses, pt. 4 (→ 69,15). the gospel about the tax collector and the Pharisee] Lk 18:9–14 (the gospel for the 11th Sunday a�er Trinity). but the tax collector … a sinner] See Lk 18:13. You are about to walk up to the altar] The Friday communion service involved an act of collective penitence, which was followed by a communion discourse prior to the administration of communion at the altar. “He went away justified.”] See Lk 18:14.

24

73

what I’ve been tormenting myself about … to be a poet] See, e.g., NB11:8, 14, 21, 25, 49, 53, 122. the benefit of having money] → 64,5.

2

28

25

27 30

34

5

75

478

5 10

13 14

15

J O U R N A L NB 11: 132–139

I was not a witness to the truth] See, e.g., NB11:53. I am an inspector] See, e.g., NB3:15 from November 20, 1847, where Kierkegaard describes himself as an “inspector” or “officer” (Danish, betjent): “Well, it’s on this frontier, where smugglers as well as rebels traffic, that I’ve been assigned my place as a lowly officer [or inspector], who by any means, by cunning, by force (that is, spiritual force) must confiscate all illusions and seize those arrogant fancies based on effrontery toward God, the likes of which were known neither to paganism nor Judaism, since it is an enormous fraud, a falsification of the doctrine of the God-Man” (KJN 4, 250–251). In Stages on Life’s Way, Frater Taciturnus describes himself as a “street inspector” (SLW, 456; SKS 6, 421. See also SLW, 470; SKS 6, 433). if I seek a position] As a priest (→ 55,6). publish the finished material pseudonymously] Cf. NB11:123 and notes (→ 65,5, → 65,7, → 65,12, → 65,12, and → 65,13). in Journal NB10] → 65,9.

76

2

the lily and the bird] A reference to Mt 6:26–28 (→ 33,31).

77m

1

In one of my very earliest diaries (before I got my degree) it says: Xt is a tangent] It has not been possible to identify the passage he is thinking of.

77

21

Visby … Nicodemus] Carl Holger Visby (1801– 1871), Danish theologian and priest, cand. theol. 1823; from 1826 priest at the city court house, the prison, at the House of Punishment, Rasping, and Be�erment in the Christianshavn district of Copenhagen, and at the military prisons in the Citadel of Copenhagen, to which in 1830 he added the post of curate at the Church of Our Savior in Christianshavn until he became parish priest of that church in 1844. The text referred to here is Jn 3:1–15, the gospel for Trinity Sunday, which in 1849 fell on June 3. Adresseavisen, no. 127, June 2, 1849, advertises that Visby is preaching at high mass.

1849

The wind blows where it will] See Jn 3:8. Visby … still worth listening to] In response to being asked which of Copenhagen’s priests one should hear, Kierkegaard is said to have answered “Visby, and I will tell you why. When one of the other pastors has wri�en his sermon counting on sunshine, he will talk about sunshine even if it pours rain, but when Visby preaches and a ray of sunshine comes into the church, he grasps that ray and speaks about it as such length, and so beautifully and edifyingly, that you leave with a ray of sunshine in your heart. He is the only improviser of them all” (see Bruce H. Kirmmse, Encounters with Kierkegaard [Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1996], p. 13).

23

The gospel about the great supper … the kingdom of heaven] See Lk 14:16–24, the gospel for the second Sunday a�er Trinity. The words “Blessed are those who feast in the kingdom of heaven” are found in Lk 14:15.

5

78

In his sermon, Luther himself draws a�ention to the rudeness] Refers to Luther’s sermon mentioned in the preceding note. See En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 391–400. Luther does call it “impolite” but also says that the parable “is a lesson for the guests si�ing at the table with Christ, especially for the useless orator who wants to lecture Christ at the table by praising as blessed those who sit at the table in the Kingdom of God” (p. 392, col. 2). The same gospel … as an excuse] See Lk 14:20 (cited in En christelig Postille, vol. 1, p. 391, col. 2). seeking God’s Kingdom] See Mt 6:33 (→ 33,31). In the sermon … what feeds us lives] A summary of En christelig Postille, vol. 1, pp. 396–397: “Spiritually our dear Lord Jesus Christ is himself the supper … Christ is the food” (p. 396, col. 1). Later, he adds: “What does this food give us? How does it taste? When I believe the gospel, then I enjoy Christ, my soul is fed and strengthened, so that I taste the forgiveness of sins, eternal life, and blessedness” (p. 396, col. 2). See especially: “See, it is right to preach, to enjoy, and to taste this food. And whosoever enjoys it like this

9

78

27

11

11 13

J O U R N A L NB 11: 139–146 in faith will live eternally. / This food delivers us from death. Whoever tastes it, whoever believes in Christ, receives the promise and is given assurance that he will not die but, by faith in Christ, inherit eternal life as one who, in Christ, has overcome death. Although death is still beating in his blood, although he must one day close his eyes, this will not harm him. When his body is buried and becomes prey to the worms, he will yet rise from the dead and come forth, visibly, on the Last Day. For his food lives, that is, Christ, in whom he is incorporated by faith. He has been awakened from the dead and dies no more. Death shall not reign over him any more (Rom 6). He shall bring all to life” (p. 397, col. 1). 78

22

23

25

79

6

The Middle Ages … to marry] From 1129 until 1536, celibacy was required of the Danish clergy. The requirement was abolished with the Reformation. See the article “Cölibat der (katholischen) Geistlichen” [Celibacy of the Catholic Clergy] in Handwörterbuch der christlichen Religions- und Kirchengeschichte [Handbook of the History of the Christian Religion and Church], ed. W. D. Fuhrmann, 3 vols. (Halle 1826–1829; ASKB 75–77), vol. 1, cols. 515–520. Then Luther … got married] A�er Luther definitively gave up the monastic life, he married Katharina von Bora, a former nun, in 1525. And it’s hard to be a priest without being married] At the time, all Copenhagen parish clergy were married or were widowers. in the first treatise by H. H. … he never became younger] Freely quoted from the introduction to “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” in Two Ethical–Religious Essays (→ 8,21). See WA, 55; SKS 11, 61.

79

19

As I’ve so o�en said … by creating] See, e.g., NB8:36 in KJN 5, 167.

80

21

yet Xt is reproached] See Mt 9:10–11 and Lk 15:1–2. By loving those … in return] See Mt 5:46.

24

1849

479

1 Tim 5:11 … young widows ought to be married] See 1 Tim 5:11–14.

31

80

Mynster … Goldschmidt as his protégé] Alludes to J. P. Mynster’s (→ 13,28) reference to Goldschmidt (→ 12,18) as the “talented editor of Nord og Syd [North and South]” (→ 81,17). certain people Mynster doesn’t like] It is not clear whom Kierkegaard has in mind. Sibbern] The philosopher Frederik Christian Sibbern (1785–1872) was professor of philosophy at the University of Copenhagen from 1813 to 1870 and taught Kierkegaard in the 1830s. Mynster mentioned him … a Jew in parliament] The parliament referred to is the assembly that drew up the constitution and that first met on October 23, 1848, and continued meeting until June 5, 1849, when the king signed Danmarks Riges Grundlov [The Constitution of the Kingdom of Denmark]. Mynster participated in the assembly as a royal nominee. Section 64 of the dra� constitution concerned equal access to civic and political rights without regard to religious adherence. This was discussed at a meeting on April 12, 1849, when Mynster said: “With regard to the Jewish community, I do not consider it to be of much practical importance if these [rights] are extended or limited. I speak at liberty on this ma�er since even a member of that community, the talented publisher of North and South, recently asked whether a Jew might fulfill any office and freely speaks of ‘his people,’ thus indicating that the Jews constitute a distinct people and are not absolutely assimilated with the people among whom they dwell and live” (Beretning om Forhandlingerne paa Rigsdagen [Report of Parliamentary Proceedings], no. 322, 1849, col. 2544). Goldschmidt … simply because his “eminence” has named him] Refers to Goldschmidt’s critical discussion of Mynster in Nord og Syd. Et Maanedskri� [North and South: A Monthly Periodical], ed. and pub. M. Goldschmidt, vol. 6. (Copenhagen, 1849), pp. 192–196: “In negotiations about § 64 concerning equal access by all to civic and political rights without regard to religious adherence, we were honored to have our words cited, yet in such a way that we cannot fully en-

8

81

11 14

17

20

480

21 23

81

27

J O U R N A L NB 11: 146–148

dorse the interpretation. His Eminence Bishop Mynster has noted that the editor of this article has on various occasions said ‘my people’ (The Jews)” (p. 192). The publication of vol. 6 was announced in Adresseavisen, no. 122, May 26, 1849. ― His Eminence: The correct title accorded to the Bishop of Sjælland in the order of rank. G. also suggested that Mynster is an eminent stylist] No source for this claim has been found. this is the same G. … because I had thanked Kts Inc. … Fear and Trembling] Under his usual acronym “Kts.,” Mynster praised Fear and Trembling in the article “Kirkelig Polemik” in Intelligensblade, nos. 41–42, January 1, 1844 (vol. 4, pp. 97–114). In “A First and Last Explanation” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript, Kierkegaard writes: “I cordially thank everyone who has kept silent and, with profound veneration, the firm Kts―that it has spoken” (CUP 1, 629; SKS 7, 572). On the publication of Concluding Unscientific Postscript, Corsaren (→ 12,18) carried an article on “The Great Philosopher” on March 6, 1846, in which they write it writes Kierkegaard “thanked everyone who kept silent,” but thanked “Bishop Mynster for―having praised him.” The article continues: “So he won’t put up with any form of criticism at all; Bishop Mynster has the monopoly on praising him, and anyone who tries to partake of this privilege will be served a summons and fined as harshly as possible. Consequently, the rest of us shall keep mum. But it is rather strange that after you’ve paid 3 rix-dollars and 6 shillings for a book, you can’t do with it as you’d like. [It is as if] Magister Kierkegaard invites a man home, serves him a cup of coffee and says: You’re about to taste the most delicious coffee you’ve ever tasted in your life, but you are to be u�erly silent out of rapture over it. You’re not allowed to praise it―the only one who may praise my coffee is Bishop Mysnter” (no. 285, cols. 8–9). Xt’s second coming is prophesied as impending and yet still hasn’t happened] See, e.g., § 38 in Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger (→ 40m,1), pp. 183–188, where Reimarus notes that Jesus had predicted his second coming as so imminent that “[t]his generation will not pass away before it

1849

happens” (Mt 24:34) and “[s]ome of those standing here will not taste death before they see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom!” (Mt 16:28). Reimarus insists that this prediction was not fulfilled, despite the many a�empts to reinterpret it. See, e.g., § 39–45, pp. 188–210. “nourishment” is related to being “near”] In fact, the Danish words næring (“nourishment”) and nær (“near”) are etymologically unrelated. What does any of this have to do with you] See Jn 21:22. Fenelon] A reference to Fenelon’s Werke religiösen Inhalts (→ 5,5), vol. 3, pp. 322–333: “In just this way it seems to me, too, to be clear that the only reason that there have been so many false miracles, so many false revelations, magic tricks, etc., is because there are also some that are true; and for just this reason have there been so many false religions, because there is one that is true. For if there had never been anything of this kind, then it would, as has been said, have been almost impossible for human beings to have been directed toward it and to believe in it. But now the fact of such things and the acclaim of great men has made such an impression that the world is, so to speak, inclined and disposed to also believe the false. And so instead of concluding that there are no true miracles, because there are so many false ones, one must rather say the opposite: that there are true [miracles] because there are so many false ones, that there would be no false ones were there no true ones, and that in just the same way there would be no false religions were there not one true one. Thus the person whose spirit has been given a certain impetus by this truth will also be vulnerable to being impressed by all that is false.” Frantz Baader … the Christian incarnation is true] This reference has not been located. ― Frantz Baader: (Benedikt) Franz (Xaver) von Baader, 1765–1841, German Catholic physician, civil servant, philosophical and theological writer; from 1826, honorary professor of philosophy and speculative theology at the University of Munich. Kierkegaard owned many of Baader’s writings (see ASKB 391–418).

11

82

26

33

39

82

J O U R N A L NB 11: 148–160 83

3

something I’ve drawn a�ention to elsewhere … drivel, crock, blather, etc.] See NB11:30 in the present volume and CC:16 in KJN 1, 197.

83

11

What one reads in the Wol�. Fragments … or his le�] See § 54 in Von dem Zwecke Jesu und seiner Jünger (→ 40m,1), pp. 235–241; esp. pp. 235–236. ― Peter’s denial: see Mt 26:69–75. this and the following § … by a scoffer] Reimarus argues in § 54 and § 55 that prior to Jesus’ death, the apostles enjoyed great benefits from accompanying him, both materially and in terms of respect, and that a primary motive for their invention of the story of his resurrection was to ensure continued enjoyment of those benefits.

16

84

1 1 2

85

2 4 14

3

87

20

24 33

36 38

If the three texts are published as one] → 65,7. Armed Neutrality] → 65,13. the same pseudonym] Anti-Climacus (→ 125,8). the pastoral epistles] The le�ers to Timothy and to Titus, traditionally ascribed to Paul. a militant doctrine] (→ 42,32). a spiritual-worldly authority ensures that every child is baptized] According to the decree of 1828, § 5, a priest was responsible for ensuring that all children of Christian parents were baptized. If the parents declined (as the Baptists did in the 1840s) they were to be reported, and the child forcibly baptized. Peter’s words … I am a sinful man] See Lk 5:8. when I bring out the rigorous aspect] i.e., by publishing the manuscripts in which he has emphasized rigor, especially Practice in Christianity (→ 65,7). fear and trembling] See Phil 2:12. I am much inclined to let them lie till a�er my death] i.e., the manuscripts Kierkegaard had completed but not published. See NB11:123 and notes (→ 65,5, → 65,7, → 65,12, → 65,12, and → 65,13). a certain man] Not identified. Mynster] → 13,28.

1849

481

among all those in government, he made it through the year 48 with the least damage] Only two ministers from the Privy Council of the autocratic regime became members of the new government a�er the events of March 1848. Many other governmental and civil service personnel also lost their positions, but Mynster, by virtue of his bishopric, was not affected (→ 13,28). yet I cleave … decisive factor] See NB5:81 from 1848: “And yet I love B. M.; my only wish is to do everything that might strengthen his reputation; for I have admired him and hmnly speaking I do admire him, and whenever I can do something for his benefit, I think of my father, whom, I believe, it pleases” (KJN 4, 407).

11

When James says … without works] See Jas 2:26.

22

89

women’s emancipation] In the period following the French Revolution, calls for women’s emancipation became more frequently heard. Significant figures were Olympe des Gouges in France and Mary Wollstonecra� in England. During the Restoration period, Georges Sand was a prominent advocate of women’s rights while gender equality was also an element in the utopian socialism of Saint-Simon. Kierkegaard referred to the la�er in his anonymous article “Yet Another Defense of Woman’s Great Abilities,” in Kjøbenhavns flyvende Post. Interimsblade [Copenhagen’s Flying Post: Occasional Pages], December 17, 1834, no. 34. It was also an issue for the “Young Germany” movement (e.g., Heinrich Heine, Ludwig Börne, and Karl Gutzkow). It first became seriously discussed in Denmark in the late 1840s. A key text was Mathilde Fibiger’s pseudonymous work Clara Raphael. Tolv Breve [Clara Raphael: Twelve Le�ers], ed. J. L. Heiberg (Copenhagen, 1851; ASKB 1531).

31

90

our time … indifference is honored in the name of tolerance] Freedom of religion was guaranteed under the new 1849 constitution, § 81. The Grundtvigians had argued earlier for dogmatic, liturgical, and administrative freedom within the State Church.

2

91

88

15

482

23 28 32

35 40

92

10

J O U R N A L NB 11: 160–168

the parable of the laborers in the vineyard] See Mk 12:1–9. first seeking God’s kingdom] See Mt 6:33 (→ 33,31). odium generis humani] The source for this saying is possibly the Church Father Tertullian, Apologeticus adversus gentes pro christianis [Apology for Christians against the Pagans], 37, 8: “Sed hostes maluistis vocare generis humani” (Latin, “People have preferred to call them [the Christians] enemies of the human race”); Qu. Sept. Flor. Tertulliani opera [Tertullian’s Works], ed. E. F. Leopold, 4 vols. (Leipzig, 1839–1841; ASKB 147– 150; in Bibliotheca patrum ecclesiasticorum latinorum selecta [Library of Selected Latin Church Fathers], ed. E. G. Gersdorf, vols. 4–7), vol. 1, p. 109. See also Tacitus, Annales [Annals], bk. 15., chap. 44, 4, in C. Cornelii Taciti opera ex recensione Ernestiana [Tacitus’s Works from the Ernesti Edition], ed. I. Bekker (Berlin 1825; ASKB 1282), p. 347, where it is related that Christians who were suspected for having burned Rome during the reign of Nero were not so much condemned for arson as for “odio humani generis.” In the Danish translation of Tacitus that Kierkegaard owned, J. Bader renders the expression “hatred of humankind” Cajus Cornelius Tacitus [Tacitus], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1773–1797; ASKB 1286–1288), vol. 2 (1775), p. 282. “let us kill him, then the vineyard is ours”] Loose quotation from Mk 12:7. the “gentle doctrine of truth” in “quiet moments,” “in holy places”] Refers to phrases characteristic of Mynster’s preaching, ( → 13,28). Plutarch... div. punishment] See Plutarch (ca. �.�. 50–125), “Ueber den Verzug der gö�lichen Strafen” [On the Delay of Divine Punishment] in Plutarchs moralische Abhandlungen [Plutarch’s Moral Essays], trans. J.F.S. Kaltwasser, 9 vols. (Frankfurt, 1783–1800; ASKB 1192–1196), vol. 4 (1789), pp. 1–81. Plutarch argues that while external punishment may be delayed, offenders will suffer agonies of conscience in the meantime, and that these too belong to their punishment. Moreover, a�er death sinners will be further tormented by seeing their descendants suffer for their misdeeds. In another vein, the delay is also a�ributed to divine patience and mercy.

1849

It was “the evil spirit” that led Xt out into a lonely place to tempt him] See Mt 4:1–11.

24

92

one of the hymns in our authorized hymn book] Kierkegaard quotes from Hymn 306 (“Oh God, by Pain You to Duty Call”), v. 4, lines 5–8, in Evangelisk-kristelig Psalmebog, til Brug ved Kirkeog Huus-Andagt [Evangelical Christian Hymnal, for Use in Devotions in Church and at Home] (Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB 197), pp. 238–239.

10

93

On Lessing and the Fragments] → 40m,1. he made the a�ack anonymously] By not publishing the name of the author, the recently deceased theologian Hermann Samuel Reimarus (→ 40m,1). in this regard too, set the tone for modernity] According to a decree of September 27, 1799, anonymity was forbidden, and every author of a published work was obliged to give his or her name. It had nevertheless become normal to publish anonymously in Kierkegaard’s time. Formally, this restriction was only abolished on March 24, 1848, although every author remained legally responsible for his or her work.

23

93

the troubled conscience] Perhaps an allusion to Luther’s treatment of the troubled conscience. See entry NB:79: “What Luther says is excellent, the one thing needful and the one explanation: That the whole of that doctrine (on the atonement, and basically the entirety of Xnty) may be traced back to the struggle of an anguished conscience” (KJN 4, 67–68). See, e.g., Luther’s explanation of the gospel for the 1st Sunday in Advent in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 15–30, esp. pp. 18, 20–21, 27–28. See also the article “Gewissen” [Conscience], in Geist aus Luther’s Schri�en oder Concordanz [The Spirit of Luther’s Writings, or a Concordance], ed. F. W. Lomler, G. F. Lucius, J. Rust, L. Sackreuter, and E. Zimmermann, 4 vols. (Darmstadt, 1828–1831; ASKB 317–320), vol. 2 (1829), pp. 327–346.

4

95

in the Three Godly Discourses, I ascribed Peter’s “cast all your sorrows on God” to Paul] See The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air

25

95

25

26

J O U R N A L NB 11: 168–173 (WA, 41; SKS 11, 45; the Hong translation has corrected Kierkegaard’s error, however, adding “Peter” where Kierkegaard has wri�en “Paul”). See 1 Pet 5:7. In Kierkegaard’s time, it was generally believed that the apostle Peter authored the 1st and 2nd le�ers ascribed to him in the NT, although this is no longer the view of most NT scholars. See, e.g., § 3 in the article “Petrus” in M. Go�fried Büchner’s biblische Real- und Verbal- HandConcordanz oder Exegetisch-homiletisches Lexicon [M. Go�fried Büchner’s Hand Bible Concordance of Topics and Words, or Exegetical-Homiletic Dictionary], ed. H. L. Heubner, 6th augmented and improved ed. (Halle, 1840 [1740]; ASKB 79), vol. 2 (1837), p. 1002. 96

26

26

96m

1

97

1

6

97

13 13

Xst stopped Paul] A reference to the conversion of Paul on the road to Damascus; see Acts 9:1–19, 22:3–12, 26:12–18; Gal 1:15–17. Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me] See Acts 9:4 ― Saul: Paul was known as Saul prior to his conversion. the words spoken by the angel to Mary Magdalene at the grave] See Mt 28:5; Mk 16:6. ― Mary Magdalene: Mary from Magdala; see Lk 8:2, 24:1–12; Mt 27:56, 27:61; Jn 20:1–18. Tradition also identifies her with the woman who was a sinner in Lk 7:36–50. Luther’s sermon … the blessedness of God] From Luther’s sermon on the 11th Sunday a�er Trinity on Lk 18:9–14 in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 467–482; p. 475, col. 1. ― psalms of David: King David has long been identified as primary author of the book of Psalms, although this is now generally regarded as historically unlikely. In the NRSV, Ps 50:23 reads: “Those who bring thanksgiving as their sacrifice honor me; to those who go the right way I will show the salvation of God.” the “sacrifice” that is well-pleasing to God] An allusion to Rom 12:1. Goldschmidt] → 12,18. P. L. Møller] Peder Ludvig Møller (1814–1865), Danish author, poet, and critic, served as editor of the polemical journal Arena in 1843, and in

1849

483

the years 1845–1847, he published the aesthetic annual Gæa. Møller also contributed articles to various journals, including “satirical critiques and poems in Corsaren,” as he himself described his work in T. H. Erslew’s Almindeligt Forfa�erLexicon [Universal Encyclopedia of Authors], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1843–1853; ASKB 954–969), vol. 2 (1847), p. 406. He published some of his literary pieces in Kritiske Skizzer fra Aarene 1840–47 [Critical Sketches from the Years 1840–1847], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1847). In addition to the critique published in Gæa, he also published a negative review of Concluding Unscientific Postscript in Kjøbenhavnsposten, nos. 73 and 74, March 27 and 28, 1846, under the name “Prosper naturalis de molinasky.” At the end of 1847 he traveled abroad and never returned to Denmark. Even P. L. M. … Fædrelandet] A�er P. L. Møller had published a review of Stages on Life’s Way that was generally positive, though critical of some of Kierkegaard’s prose, Kierkegaard responded sarcastically in Fædrelandet with the article “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner” (COR, 38–46; SV2 13, 459–467). P. L. Møller then published a short, respectful response, “Til Hr. Frater Taciturnus, Høvidsmand for 3die Afdeling af Stadier paa Livets Vei” [To Mr. Frater Taciturnus, the Man Responsible for Part 3 of Stages on Life’s Way], in Fædrelandet, no. 2079, December 29, 1845, col. 16665, and signed it “Most Respectfully Yours.” ― Fædrelandet: originally established in 1834 as a weekly but published daily from late 1839 until 1848. It was the most important organ of the liberal opposition. In 1848, it had one thousand postal subscribers and almost two thousand total. Its editors from 1841 were J. F. Giødwad (→ 8,23) and Carl P. Ploug (1813–1894). All of Kierkegaard’s newspaper articles a�er 1836 were published in Fædrelandet. But anonymously and in the privileged playground of contemptibility] Corsaren (→ 12,18). thousands upon thousands read the paper ] Goldschmidt subsequently claimed that it had three thousand subscribers, while Corsaren itself claimed five thousand (November 12, 1845, no. 270, col. 14).

17

22 31

484 98

10

23

36

101

17 18

J O U R N A L NB 11: 173–177

1849

a law gowerning the press] The laws governing the press, established in 1799, had been dissolved on March 24, 1848, but had not at this point been replaced by new legislation (→ 34,33). punishing the least possibly [guilty person], some panhandler who wasn’t even an auth.] Corsaren used straw men as editors-in-chief, for which reason these were normally convicted of the paper’s transgressions of the free press edict. On June 7, 1843, Goldschmidt himself was convicted in the high court as the paper’s actual editor and publisher. These straw men were not renowned for their education. Peer Madsen] A fictitious name.

dollars for the second edition of Either/Or and a one-time royalty of 31 rix-dollars, 5 marks, and 4 shillings for The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses. See Søren Kierkegaard og pengene (→ 64,5), p. 35. don’t have a position] Kierkegaard never applied for a position as priest. knighted] A Knight of the Dannebrog (an order some members of the clergy were decorated with). mocked] → 12,18. flesh and blood] See, e.g., Mt 16:17; Gal 1:16; Eph 6:12. mistreated] → 12,18.

finite teleology] i.e., practical goals, aims, and purposes. haven’t earned any money] Until 1847, Kierkegaard had functioned as his own publisher; that is, he had himself taken charge of the production and financing of his books, which had been sold on commission. But following the publication of Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits, which appeared on March 13, 1847, he entered into a business arrangement with the publisher and book dealer C. A. Reitzel, who both assumed the expenses associated with the printing of Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits, paying Kierkegaard a one-time royalty of 225 rix-dollars for the book, and purchased for 1,200 rix-dollars the remaining copies of Repetition, Fear and Trembling, Philosophical Fragments, The Concept of Anxiety, Prefaces, Stages on Life’s Way, Three Discourses on Imagined Occasions, Concluding Unscientific Postscript, and A Literary Review, all of which Reitzel already had on a commission basis. At that point, Either/Or was sold out. See Reitzel’s journal Forhandlinger med Forfa�ere, Redacteurer &c: 1835–[1858] [Negotiations with Authors, Editors, etc., 1835–[1858]]. Kierkegaard received a one-time royalty of 270 rix-dollars for Works of Love (1847) (see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Kjerlighedens Gjerninger, SKS K9, 95), and for Christian Discourses (1848) he received a onetime royalty of 220 rix-dollars (see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Christelige Taler, SKS K10, 75–76). He received a one-time royalty of 550 rix-

seek Xt and find rest in him] See Mt 11:28.

7

102

Job’s wife was, in a sense, right.] A reference to the exchange between Job and his wife about the terrible misfortunes that had befallen them: “Then his wife said to him, ‘Do you still persist in your integrity? Curse God, and die.’ But he said to her, ‘You speak as any foolish woman would speak. Shall we receive the good at the hand of God, and not receive the bad?’” (Job 2:9–10). God is … love] See 1 Jn 4:8, 16. the crucifixion of reason] General theological expression based on Gal 5:24, where Paul says: “And those who belong to Christ Jesus have crucified the flesh with its passions and desires.” like a sparrow, or even less than a sparrow] See Mt 10:29–31. Lessing … choose the le� hand, everlasting striving] A reference to Lessing’s treatise “Eine Duplik” [A Rejoinder] (1778) in Lessing’s sämmtliche Schri�en (→ 37,12) vol. 5 (1825), pp. 95–212; p. 100: “If God were to hold all truth concealed in his right hand, and in his le� only the ever-active drive for truth, albeit with the provision that I would always and forever err in the process, and he said ‘Choose!’ I would with all humility take the le� hand.”

32

102

similar remark in Terstegen … the same way] A reference to a discourse by German mystic, hymn writer, and lay preacher Gerhard Tersteegen’s (1697–1769), “An Pfingsten 1754” [At Pentecost

9

18 19

20

24

34 5

103

7 41

104

J O U R N A L NB 11: 177–183 1754], in Auswahl aus Gerhard Tersteegen’s Schri�en, nebst dem Leben desselben [Selections from the Writings of Gerhard Tersteegen, Including His Biography], ed. G. Rapp (Essen, 1841; ASKB 729), p. 290. 104

15

I write to you, not because you do not know the truth … but because you know it] See 1 Jn 2:21.

104

24

the aesthete in Either/Or … Diapsalmata … monstrous proportions] Cf. pseudonym A’s words: “On the whole, a reason is a curious thing. If I regard it with all my passion, it develops into an enormous necessity that can set heaven and earth in motion; if I am devoid of passion, I look down on it derisively” (EO 1, 32–33; SKS 2, 42).

104

105

106

34

26

9

12

106

21

the difference betw. a pathos-laden transition … glued to a piece of cardboard] Refers to a piece of card stock backed with shiny light green paper, with writing paper glued to each side (Paper 277:1 in KJN 11). One finds “A Pathos-laden Transition―A Dialectical Transition” wri�en there among many interrelated notes. See also Not12:4 and Not13:8.a in KJN 3, 373 and 384. the inner proof, argumentum spiritus sancti] An allusion to the doctrine testimonium Spiritus Sancti internum (“the inner testimony of the Holy Spirit”). See, e.g., K. Hase, Hu�erus redivivus oder Dogmatik der Evangelisch-Lutherischen Kirche. Ein dogmatisches Repertorium für Studierende [Hu�erus Redivivus or the Dogmatics of the Evangelical Lutheran Church: A Dogmatics Sourcebook for Students], 4th improved ed. (Leipzig 1839 [1828]; ASKB 581), p. 85. This is what I’ve always fought for] See, e.g., the conclusion of chap. 4, “The Contemporary Follower,” in Philosophical Fragments (PF, 66–71; SKS 4, 267–271). what is said to the disciples in particular … about suffering contempt, etc.] See the Sermon on the Mount, Mt 5–7. religious orator] i.e., the writer of “discourses” or “orations” (Danish, taler).

1849

485

So I myself became an orator] With the publication of religious “discourses” or “orations” (Danish, taler).

25

beautiful thought by Tersteegen … praying for his enemies] A reference to Tersteegen’s discourse, “Am Charfreitage” [On Good Friday], in which he preaches on Jesus’ words to the criminal on the cross in Lk 23:43. Tersteegen’s Schri�en (→ 104,9), pp. 143–174; see esp. p. 145. ― Father, forgive them, for they know not what they do: See Lk 23:34. ― thief’s conversion: See Lk 23:39– 43. the same sermon … why have you forsaken me] A summary of Tersteegen’s Schri�en (→ 104,9), p. 169. ― My God, my God, why have you forsaken me: See Mt 27:46. the thief hadn’t heard a single word about Xt before then] A summary of Tersteegen’s Schri�en (→ 104,9), p. 171.

1

the Middle Ages] i.e., prior to the Reformation (which took place in Denmark in 1536). To abstain from marriage … as a rule] → 78,22. follow the universal] i.e., marry. primitivity] Kierkegaard’s use of the Danish primitivitet has to do with origin, primordiality. my betrothed asked me one final question: Tell me, will you never marry] Kierkegaard was engaged to Regine Olsen from September 11, 1840, to October 12, 1841 (→ 41,27). See Not15:4 in KJN 3, 343. I answered with a joke] In Not15:4, Kierkegaard writes: “She asked me: Will you never marry? I answered: Well, yes, in ten years, when I have begun to simmer down and need a lusty young miss to rejuvenate me” (KJN 3, 343). when she married] Regine married J. F. Schlegel on November 3, 1847. She had been engaged to him since August 28, 1843. which I affirmed entirely and which I thanked God for] In 1841, Kierkegaard writes the following in Not8:13: “And even if I could only see her happy with another, however painful that might be to my hum. pride, I would nonetheless be glad” (KJN 3, 224). He records his first reac-

17

107

6

14

107

19 26 27 2

8

12

12

108

486

J O U R N A L NB 11: 183–189

tion a�er Regine marries in NB3:44: “That girl has given me enough trouble. Now she is―not dead―but happily and well married. I said that on the same day 6 years ago―and was declared the basest of all base villains. Curious!” (KJN 4, 268). On September 1, 1848, he writes in NB7:20: “However much I would like to do everything for her, both for her sake and for my own, it cannot be done, I dare not do it; I fear her reckless passion if she merely gets the least thing to go on. I am rlly the guarantor of her marriage; God knows it is frightfully strenuous” (KJN 5, 90). Later Kierkegaard frequently says that is was his wish that Regine marry Schlegel. See, e.g., a dra� of a le�er to Regine where he writes: “Since you couldn’t be mine, it was my only wish that you should marry Schlegel. You’ve done that. Thank you, and thank you for marrying him as well” (B&A, vol. 1, p. 261). 108

32 33

Tersteegen] → 104,9. Die Gelehrten sind meist Schuld daran … die doch … p. 474] Quoted word for word, with Kierkegaard’s emphasis, from “Von dem Glauben und der Rechtfertigung,” in Tersteegen’s Schri�en (→ 104,9), pp. 474–493; p. 474.

109

5

Luther makes a quite masterly distinction … only seldom in the right place] Refers to Luther’s sermon on the gospel for the fi�eenth Sunday after Trinity, Mt 6:24–34, in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, pp. 514–524.

109

32

110

14

Yesterday I read about the following court case … trying to revive him] A summary of an article in the daily newspaper Fædrelandet, no. 142, June 22, 1849, p. 565. 10 r.d.] Ten rix-dollars (→ 23,17).

110

18

Luther is once again completely right … known by love] Refers to Luther’s sermon on the gospel for the fi�eenth Sunday a�er Trinity, Mt 6:24–34, in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 1, p. 520, col. 1, where Luther writes: “The first part, faith, isn’t visible. Faith sees only God.” ― faith is made known by love: See Lk 6:44.

1849

Tersteegen makes an acute remark … the best part, without any comparison] Refers to Tersteegen’s discourse, “Nach der Beerdigung einer Freundin” [At the Funeral of a Friend] in Tersteegen’s Schri�en (→ 104,9), p. 378. something I too have noted … an unerotic comparison lies in eros] See, e.g., Three Discourses on Imagined Occasions: “A true lover is recognized at once by his not defiling the lover’s tryst, which seeks solitude, by bringing along a crowd, a flock of witnesses, who are of course present as soon as he understands that he loves more than others. No, his honest and sincere judgment is brief: I am in love” (TDIO, 30–31; SKS 5, 410). See, e.g., also Works of Love: “How, then, is that simple love secured against the sickness of jealousy? Is it not in this way, that it does not love by way of comparison? It does not begin with spontaneously loving according to preference―it loves. Therefore it can never reach the point of sickly loving by way of comparison―it loves” (WL, 36; SKS 9, 43). elsewhere in this journal] See NB11:179.

29

4

111

vol. 1 of the writings … the heart of an dreamer] Schiller is quoted in Thomasine Gyllembourg’s “Mesalliance” [Misalliance] (1833), in Skri�er af Forfa�eren til ‘En Hverdags-Historie,’ samlede og udgivne af Johan Ludvig Heiberg [Writings by “The Author of A Story of Everyday Life,” Collected and Edited by Johan Ludvig Heiberg], 12 vols. (Copenhagen, 1849–1851); vol. 1, pp. 144–145: “The Duke said, ‘You’re a man of the world.’ Gustav added, ‘You have a kind heart, as pure as gold.’ ‘Well,’ replied Voldman, “since you attribute to me that beautiful union that Schiller called “des Weltmanns Auge mit des Schwärmers Herz” [the eye of a man of the world with the heart of a dreamer], then out of gratitude for your fla�ering opinion I must tell you what an elderly man may have experienced with the help of those organs.” The publication of vol. 1 was announced in Adresseavisen, no. 145, on June 23, 1849. ― the Author of A Story of Everyday Life: Thomasine Christine Gyllembourg-Ehrensvärd or simply Thomasine Gyllembourg (1773–1856), whose short stories and novels, the so-called stories of every-

9

111

110

34

J O U R N A L NB 11: 189–193 day life, were published by her son, Johan Ludvig Heiberg, during the period 1827–1845; the last of these, To Tidsaldre [Two Ages] (Copenhagen, 1845), was the subject of Kierkegaard’s praise in A Literary Review (1846). ― Schiller: Friedrich Schiller (1759–1805), German poet and philosopher. 111

15

16

111

112

21

4 5 10 12

13

16

17

sermon by Tersteegen … Mt 2:1–12 (pp. 117ff. in my edition)] See Tersteegen’s discourse “Am Erscheinungsfeste 1755” [On the Feast of the Epiphany 1755] in Tersteegen’s Schri�en (→ 104,9), pp. 117–142. The second part] The second of three parts of Tersteegen’s discourse, pp. 127–136. Seneca’s work … in opposition to each another] Quoted from De ira [On Wrath], by Roman author Seneca (ca. 4 �.�.–�.�. 65), bk. 1, chap. 5, in Lucius Annäus Seneca des Philosophen Werke [Philosophical Works of Lucius Annäus Seneca], trans. J. M. Moser, G. H. Moser, and A. Pauly, 15 vols., with continuous pagination (in Römische Prosaiker in neuen Übersetzungen [Roman Prosaists in New Translation], vols. 19–20, 25, 33, 41, 45–46, 50, 53–55, 67, 73, 111, 115) (Stu�gart 1828–1835; ASKB 1280–1280c); vol. 1, p. 31. secure a post and then publish my writings pseudonymously] See NB11:123. seek first the kingdom of God] See Mt 6:33. Sunday] June 24, 1849. one of my own phrases … at the decisive moment] See CUP, 229; SKS 7, 209: “But the person who is neither cold nor hot is an abomination, and God is no more served by dud individualities than a rifleman is served by a rifle that in the moment of decision clicks instead of firing.” what I read in Fenelon somewhere … make a crucial decision] See Fenelon’s Werke religiösen Inhalts (→ 5,5), vol. 1, p. 223. Fenelon today, 2nd Part, p. 26 (in Claudius’s translation)] See Fenelon’s Werke religiösen Inhalts, vol. 2, pp. 25–26. ― Claudius: Mathias Claudius (1740–1815), German author and translator. Tersteegen’s Epiphany sermon … to follow God’s lead] See Tersteegen’s discourse “Am

1849

487

Erscheinungsfeste 1755” [On the Feast of the Epiphany 1755], in Tersteegen’s Schri�en (→ 104,9), p. 141. The gospel passage is Mt 2:12. When I le� her] Regine Olsen, on October 12, 1841 (→ 41,27). as an auth. I would be free from financial worries … calling to be a priest] → 64,5 and → 14,21. Madvig] Johan Nicolai Madvig (1804–1886), Danish philologist; professor at the University of Copenhagen; member of the constitutional convention, 1848–1849 (→ 47,28); from November 16, 1848, cultus minister, and as such had decisive influence over ecclesiastical appointments. Madvig lived in the Klædebo quarter of Copenhagen, on Nørre Voldgade 78. See Veiviser eller Anviisning til Kiøbenhavns, Christianshavns, Forstædernes og Frederiksbergs Beboere for Aaret 1849 [City Directory, or Information on the Residents of Copenhagen, Christianshavn, the Suburbs, and Frederiksberg for 1849] (Copenhagen, n.d.), pp. 437, 782 (see map 2, C1). The Ministry of Culture was located in Lerches Gaard, today Slotsholmsgade 10 (see map 2, B3). Saturday] June 23, 1849. Mynster] Bishop Mynster (→ 13,28), to whom applications for clerical positions were delivered (→ 55,6). Mynster lived at the episcopal residence on Nørregade, opposite the Church of Our Lady. See Veiviser eller Anviisning til Kiøbenhavns, Christianshavns, Forstædernes og Frederiksbergs Beboere, for Aaret 1849, p. 474 (see map 2, B1). R. Nielsen’s book … the li�le anonymous book] Rasmus Nielsen’s book Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed (→ 28,18) and Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous (not anonymous, as he writes) book, Two Ethical-Religious Essays, which were both published May 19, 1849. that he’s certainly read] According to the catalogue of the books in Mynster’s library, auctioned a�er his death in 1854, Mynster owned Two Ethical-Religious Essays. See Bibliotheca Mynsteriana, sive Catalogus Librorum, quos reliquit Jacobus Petrus Mynster [Mynster Library: Catalogue of the Books Le� by Jakob Peter Mynster] (Copenhagen, 1854), no. 5235, p. 187.

24 38

10

10 15

17

18

113

488

18 22 23

24 24

25 31 32

33 37

116

2

J O U R N A L NB 11: 193–195 1849

three weeks ago] i.e., June 4, 1849. on Friday] June 22, 1849. On Friday, he was at communion] On June 22, 1849, at 8:45 a.m., “Bishop Mynster, wife, and daughter” were listed as participants at confession and communion with Dean Münter at Holmens Church. See Landsarkivet for Sjælland 21. Holmens pastorat. B. 3. Kommunionbog 1843–51 [The National Archives for Zealand, 21. Holmens Parish. B. 3. Communion Book, 1843–1851], p. 350. Saturday] June 23, 1849. he was preaching on Sunday] Mynster preached on June 24, 1849, at high mass in Christiansborg Palace Church at 10:00 a.m. See Adresseavisen, no. 145, June 23, 1849. today, Monday] June 25, 1849. this week] From Sunday, June 24, to Saturday, June 30, 1849. he’s off to do his visitations] In the summer of 1849, Mynster’s earliest recorded visit in the Zealand Diocese is to Toksværd on July 6, 1849. See J. P. Mynsters Visitatsdagbøger 1835–1853 [J. P. Mynster’s Visitation Books 1835–1853], ed. Bjørn Kornerup, 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1937), vol. 2, p. 196. a position] As priest (→ 55,6). acted on my decision … said the opposite that morning] Presumably a reference to August 11, 1841 when Kierkegaard tried to break the engagement with Regine, but it could also refer to October 12, 1841, when she finally agreed to it. When the accident happened with Strube … pondering things too much] Frederik Christian Strube (1811–1867), an Icelandic journeyman carpenter, and his wife and two daughters lodged with Kierkegaard in the period 1848–1852. Strube was admi�ed to Frederick’s Hospital in Copenhagen, Medical Department A, room MM, from December 1 to December 9, 1848 (RA. 257, Frederik’s Hospital. Medical Journals 1757–1850; 1848–, 683, p. 356). According to the patient journal, Strube suffered from “monomania,” i.e., partial psychosis. The recorded reason for his condition is: “Presumably pondering his current tasks in relation to frustration over perceived harass-

ment” (RA. 257, Frederiks Hospital. “Medicinske Journaler. December 1848.” Medicinsk Afdeling, 1757–1851 Journaler, 1848 September–December, 1849 [RA. 257, Frederik’s Hospital. “Medical Journals. December 1848.” Department of Medicine, 1757–1851, Journals, September 1848– December 1849). hoped that death would help … publishing books] See the following journal entries from 1848–1849: NB6:27, 27.a, 61, 64, 67 in KJN 5; NB7:9 in KJN 5; NB9:78 in KJN 5; NB10:39, 60, 102, 169, 185, 200 in KJN 5; NB11:154 in the present volume. conscience] → 95,4. aborted her fetus] Abortion was punished with the law’s most severe measures. In accordance with Chr. V’s Danske Lov [Christian V’s Danish Law], bk. 6, chap. 6, art. 7: “Loose women who do away with their fetuses are to be decapitated and their heads put on a stake,” Kong Christian den Femtes Danske Lov af det Iuridiske Fakultet giennemset [King Christian the Fi�h’s Danish Law, Revised by the Faculty of Law], ed. J. H. Bærens (Copenhagen, 1797), p. 889. In Kierkegaard’s day, such women were generally shown clemency and instead received a lengthy or lifetime prison sentence. Three Minor Ethical-Religious Treatises … but naturally anonymously] → 65,5. they contain the part about Mynster] Refers to a glorifying tribute to Bishop Mynster (→ 13,28) in A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Essays, no. 2 (see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 43–45). seek a post] As priest (→ 55,6). publish the rest bit by bit, pseudonymously] See NB11:123 and notes (→ 65,5, → 65,7, → 65,12, → 65,12, and → 65,13). the accelerating pace of my entire activity as an author] A�er Either/Or was published in 1843, Kierkegaard published new works regularly at short intervals. His publication rate had begun to slow somewhat in 1848 and 1849, however. The Point of View for My Work as an Author] → 6,1. there’s still plenty of time until I’m ready to publish it] The manuscript to The Point of View for

5

17 17

24 25

30 30

7

117

1

118

2

J O U R N A L NB 11: 195–202

6

119

2

My Work as an Author was finished at this time, but Kierkegaard never took it to the publisher. It was published posthumously. The manuscript of The Sickness unto Death, however, was taken to the publisher on June 29, 1849 (→ 123,16). I hoped that death would relieve me] → 116,6. Tertullian’s book on patience … so far from it] See “Tertullianus om Taalmodighed” [Tertullian on Patience], trans. Johannes Ferdinand Fenger (1805–1861) in Nyt theologisk Bibliothek, udg. af Jens Møller (→ 12,2), vol. 16 (1830), pp. 63–102; pp. 64–66. ― Tertullian’s book on patience: Church Father Tertullian (ca. 160–ca. 225), De patientia [On Patience]; see chap. 1, in Qu. Sept. Flor. Tertulliani opera (→ 91,32) vol. 2, (1839), pp. 16–17.

119

18

this is something much more than assurance] Perhaps an allusion to Mt 12:38–42.

119

22

pagans] i.e., the ancient Greeks and Romans.

119

27

Goldschmidt] → 12,18. I myself gave him permission to rail against me] → 12,18. E.M.G.] Perhaps a mistake for M.A.G., i.e., Meïr Aron Goldschmidt. the frightful editor of The Corsair] Ironic reference to Goldschmidt (→ 12,18). he understood the whole affair in that way] Perhaps an allusion to a coincidental meeting between Kierkegaard and Goldschmidt. Goldschmidt mentions a meeting shortly a�er Corsaren published the first article poking fun at Kierkegaard, but he does not mention making such a comment (see Livs Erindringer og Resultater (→ 12,28), vol. 1, p. 426.

27

120

12 12 14

120

22

23

as soon as I wrote it down] i.e., when Kierkegaard wrote it in the manuscript of The Lily of the Field and Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses in March or April 1849 (→ 120,25). Fulfillment’s Complete Works] In early December 1848, Kierkegaard entertained the idea of a publishing a collection of writings―The

1849

489

Sickness unto Death, Practice in Christianity, and Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom―in one volume, under the title Fulfillment’s Complete Works (see entry NB8:15 in KJN 5, 158). In the course of 1849, he revised his plan so that the collection was now to consist of three volumes under the title Fulfillment’s Complete Works: The Fruits of the Year 1848, with the following contents (see Pap. X 5 B 143): vol. 1, The Sickness unto Death; vol. 2, Practice in Christianity and Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom; vol. 3, The Point of View for My Work as an Author, “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 32,19), “One Note Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 32,18), and “Everything in One Word” (Pap. X 5 B 144). “When the moment to bloom … now is the time.”] A loose quote from The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air (see WA, 28; SKS 11, 32). In the manuscript of Fulfillment’s Complete Works: The Fruits of the Year 1848, Kierkegaard added this mo�o: “When the moment arrives when it must bloom, and it appears to the lily to be as calamitous as one could possibly imagine―in its simple way the obedient lily understands just one thing: now is the time.”/ Cf. Three Godly Discourses by S.K. 1849” (Pap. X 5 B 142).

25

to want to build your salvation … Xt’s atonement in contempt] See Confessio Augustana [The Augsburg Confession], § 20, where one reads that works cannot bring about a reconciliation with God or justify the forgiveness of sin. Faith in Christ’s atonement alone brings about reconciliation and the forgiveness of sin, and anyone who believes that he or she can earn grace through works holds Christ’s atonement in contempt. See Den re�e uforandrede Augsburgske Troesbekjendelse [The True, Unaltered Augsburg Confession], introduced, trans., and with commentary by A. G. Rudelbach (Copenhagen, 1825; ASKB 386), pp. 63–64.

30

120

The Point of View] The Point of View for My Work as an Author.

2

122

490

3

123

16

20 23

124

12 13 15 21 28 33 35

125

6

6

J O U R N A L NB 11: 202–209

the other existing treatises] i.e., Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom (→ 65,13), “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 32,19), “One Note Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 32,18), and “Everything in One Word” (Pap. X 5 B 144). The Sickness unto Death has now been given to the publisher] The Sickness unto Death: A Christian Psychological Exposition for Edification and Awakening, by Anti-Climacus, published by S. Kierkegaard, was delivered to Bianco Luno, printer and purveyor to the royal court, on June 29, 1849; the printing was finished on July 27, 1849; and the book was advertised as “published” in on July 30, 1849, in Adresseavisen, no. 176. God is … love] See 1 Jn 4:8, 16. publishing these writings or not] See NB11:202, → 122,2 and → 122,3. Nothing pertaining to my authorial persona] See NB11:202 and → 122,2 and → 122,3. the interesting] → 19,3. ge�ing a position] As priest. a�empts at self-aggrandizement] Perhaps NB11:14, 92, 174. This work and all the writings] See NB11:202, → 122,2 and → 122,3. Sickness unto Death is now coming out … “For Edification”] → 123,16. the River Guadalquibir] See NB11:123 and → 65,1. There is something lower (the aesthetic)] A reference to the pseudonymous works published between 1843 and 1846, i.e., Either/Or (1843), Fear and Trembling (1843), Repetition (1843), Philosophical Fragments (1844), The Concept of Anxiety (1844), Prefaces (1844), Stages on Life’s Way (1845), and Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846). something higher, which is also pseudonymous] i.e., The Sickness unto Death (1849); Practice in Christianity, which he planned on publishing under a pseudonym; and Two Ethical-Religious Essays (1849).

1849

Johannes Anticlimacus] i.e., Anti-Climacus. Climacus, who claimed not to be Christian] A reference to Johannes Climacus, pseudonymous author of Philosophical Fragments and Concluding Unscientific Postscript. In Postscript, Climacus does not claim to be Christian. See the appendix “An Understanding with the Reader” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript (CUP 1, 617; SKS 7, 560). try to be more economical] → 64,5. I was rlly a bit offended by Mynster] Perhaps because Mynster did not make time for an appointment with him. See NB11:193. toward what I had previously been so close to doing] Presumably to publish the works concerning his role as author. it didn’t work out with Madvig and Mynster] See NB11:193. ― Madvig: → 113,10.

8 8

16 37

124m

38

124m

3

125m

the law commands that one should love God] See Deut 6:5.

16

126

Rothe’s about the church year] Theologian Wilhelm Rothe (1800–1878), Det danske Kirkeaar og dets Pericoper, en Haandbog for Prædikanter og Kirkegjængere [The Danish Church Year and Its Pericopes: A Handbook for Preachers and Parishioners], 2nd ed. (Copenhagen, 1843 [1836]; ASKB 747; abbreviated herea�er as Det danske Kirkeaar og dets Pericoper). According to the records of Reitzel’s Bookshop, Kierkegaard purchased the book on July 4, 1849. Advent, the gospels are taken … true penitence] See “3rd and 4th Sundays in Advent” in Det danske Kirkeaar og dets Pericoper, pp. 90–92. The gospel texts for the third and fourth Sundays in Advent are Mt 11:2–10 and Jn 1:19–28, respectively. Both texts deal with John the Baptist. One is penitent … cheer on Christmas Day] Refers to Det danske Kirkeaar og dets Pericoper, p. 92. “Pork Sunday” and “Fat Tuesday”] Refers to Quinquagesima Sunday and Shrovetide Tuesday, the Sunday and Tuesday that precede Ash Wednesday when Lent begins. See Det danske Kirkeaar og dets Pericoper, pp. 119–120.

31

126

J. Climacus] → 125,8.

13

32

3

127

4

127

J O U R N A L NB 11: 209–220

13 14 17

22

127m

2

127m

3

128

1

129

2

2 3

4

129m

2

129

24

129

27

130

6

Anti-Climacus] → 125,8. J. C. places himself so low that he even claims that he isn’t Xn] → 125,8. demoniacs, though without understanding this term in the direction of intellectuality] Perhaps a reference to the Greek understanding of demons as lower divinities, spirits between the gods and human beings, and divine messengers. In The Sickness unto Death, Anti-Climacus writes: “This kind of [demonic] despair is rarely seen in the world; such characters really only appear in poets, the real ones, who always lend ‘demonic’ ideality―using the word in its purely Greek sense― to their creations” (SUD, 72; SKS 11, 186). I positioned myself above J. C., below Anti-C.] See NB11:204. cf. p. 260] NB11:222. cf. p. 267] NB11:228. The whole idea … the piece about my authorship] A reference to Fulfillment’s Complete Works, which he considered publishing in one volume but later wanted to divide into three volumes. The third was to contain the material about his authorship (→ 120,23). The work is said to be “for edification”] The Sickness unto Death: A Christian Psychological Exposition for Edification (→ 123,16). the preface speaks of it as edifying] The preface to The Sickness unto Death. It should rlly say: “for awakening.”] This suggests that “and Awakening” was added to the subtitle later. this is the progression of my work] i.e., the progression from “edifying” to “edification and awakening.” See NB11:204 and 221. p. 259 in this journal] NB11:221. Paul had a thorn in the flesh] See 2 Cor 12:7. primitively] Kierkegaard’s use of the Danish primitivt has to do with origin, primordiality. Fenelon … never safe, not for a single moment] See “In der Fast- Buß- und Bet-Zeit” [During the Time of Fasting, Penitence, and Prayer] and “Am allerheilgen-Tage” [On All Saints’ Day] in

1849

491

Fenelon’s Werke religiösen Inhalts (→ 5,5), vol. 2, pp. 208–211, 215–218. postscript by the editor] A reference to Kierkegaard’s dra� of an “Editor’s Postscript” to The Sickness unto Death. See Pap. X 5 B 15–23. the poet of the religious] See SUD, 77–79; SKS 11, 191–193. polemicizes against … initiating investigations rather than preaching] Refers to the sixth section of “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself: Christian Expositions,” in Practice in Christianity (PC, 145–262; SKS 12, 149–253).

32

130

35

130

1

131

Luther … image of his essence] A reference to Luther’s sermon on the biblical reading for Christmas Day, Heb 1:1–12, in En christelig Postille (→ 5,2), vol. 2, pp. 56–64. ― Christ is the radiance of his glory and the express image of his essence: See Heb 1:3. “These words are be�er understood by the heart than they are expressed with pen or tongue.”] Quoted word for word from En christelig Postille, vol. 2, p. 59, col. 1. The conclusion of the same sermon … our eyes are only half-open] Quoted from En christelig Postille, vol. 2, pp. 63–64.

9

131

Ecclesiastes 3:27 … will perish in danger] From Fenelon’s Werke religiösen Inhalts (→ 5,5), vol. 2, p. 226.

27

131

This was a footnote … like becoming a Judas no. 2] A reference to The Sickness unto Death: “Therefore it is certain and true that the first one to come up with the idea of defending Christianity in Christendom is a Judas No. 2. He, too, betrays with a kiss except that his treason is the treason of stupidity” (SUD, 87; SKS 11, 200). A note that wasn’t published in the book The Sickness unto Death] The note was not included in the published edition, but it was recorded on a piece of paper that was inserted into the first proof. The following line in the proof is crossed out in red: “(NB. Insert here the note recorded on the included piece of paper)” (Pap. X 5 B 24,6).

31

131

5

131m

13

20

492 132

19

21

25

132m

3

132

28

34

133

7

9 10 11

12

133m

1

133

18

J O U R N A L NB 11: 221–226

It ended up being titled: “For Edification and Awakening.”] The Sickness unto Death: A Christian Psychological Exposition for Edification and Awakening (→ 123,16, → 129,3). … for awakening … pseudonym] See Kierkegaard’s reflections on the new pseudonym, AntiClimacus, in NB11:209, 212. ― 48: 1848 (→ 16,20). I use only the poet’s predicate, “edifying,”] Kierkegaard distinguishes between “the edifying,” which he ties to the edifying discourses (1843–1844) published under the name “Søren Kierkegaard,” and “edification,” which he understands as a higher category. cf. p. 253 in this journal] NB11:212. the closing section … that the form of this treatise is what it is] A reference to a passage toward the end of the preface of The Sickness unto Death: “But that the form of the treatise is what it is has at least been considered carefully, and seems to be psychologically correct as well” (SUD, 6; SKS 11, 118). a fictional character] Pseudonym Anti-Climacus. double appoggiatura] An appoggiatura is an embellishing note or tone preceding an essential melodic note or tone and usually wri�en as a note of smaller size. Climacus … he denies that he’s Christian] → 125,8. Anti-Climacus] → 125,8. In Climacus everything drowns in humor, which is why he retracts his book] Reference to Johannes Climacus, who in his concluding “Appendix” to Concluding Unscientific Postscript, declares that he himself is a “humorist” and then writes that “everything is to be understood as retracted, that not only does the book have a conclusion, but in addition to this, it is a revocation” (CUP 1, 619; SKS 7, 562). thetic] i.e., he presents his argument dogmatically. cf. p. 249] NB11:209. the professor calls himself speculation] Perhaps an allusion to Hans Lassen Martensen (1808– 1884), who introduced speculative theology at the University of Copenhagen in lectures in 1837– 1838. In 1840, he was appointed professor.

1849

the priest is meditation] Perhaps an allusion to Bishop Mynster, whose sermons frequently used the term betragtning (“meditation,” “contemplation,” “reflection,” “observation,” “investigation”) when speaking of personal devotion, and whose principal edifying work was called Betragtninger over de christelige Troeslærdomme [Observations on the Doctrines of the Christian Faith], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1837 [1833]; ASKB 254–255). See also NB11:217.

19

Mynster] → 13,28. his entire regime] Mynster was the bishop of Zealand and, as such, primate of the Danish State Church → 13,28. the glorious ones] Christian martyrs. sizable income, to high rank, and esteem] By a royal decree of February 7, 1833, the salary of the bishop of Zealand was set at 4,800 rix-dollars (→ 23,17). According to the Danish system of rank and precedence, starting in 1847, Mynster was ranked number thirteen in the first class and was the only person to be referred to as “His Eminence.”

1

5

134m

The a�ack on Xndom … just as many Xns as there are peop.] See SUD, 102; SKS 11, 214. the country is Christian, we’re all Xn] In accordance with Kongeloven ([The Royal Law], promulgated 1665, published 1709, abolished by the constitution of 1849), the state was bound through its absolute monarch to the evangelical Lutheran Church and its confessional documents; see § 1 of Kongeloven, and Danmarks Riges Grundlov [The Constitution of the Danish State] of June 5, 1849, § 6. In practice, other religious communities were tolerated (→ 53,1, → 91,2). “the public”] See A Literary Review (1846) for Kierkegaard’s discussion of the concept of “the public” (TA, 90–96; SKS 8, 86–91).

15

134

3

135

F. F. can truthfully say … with Mag. Adler in mind] Refers to Three Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 65,5) that Kierkegaard planned to publish under the pseudonym F. F. (see Pap. X 6 B 39, pp. 47, 57, 59, 60, 63). ― Mag. Adler: → 31,34.

14

135

134

4

11

36

J O U R N A L NB 11: 227–230 135

17 18

22

135m

2

135

30

135m

3 4

136

6

This eulogy] → 135m,2. State Church] In Denmark the evangelical Lutheran Church was the State Church, headed by the king, and with bishops, deans, and priests who were civil servants appointed by the king. The king, and in principle all Danish citizens, were bound by Confessio Augustana (The Augsburg Confession). Bishop Mynster] → 13,28. F. F.’s eulogy on Bishop Mynster] This “eulogy” is the same as the glorifying tribute to Mynster in A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Essays, no. 2 (see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 43–45), that Kierkegaard mentions in NB11:194 (→ 116,25). The essay was later included in Three Ethical-Religious Essays, no. 2 (→ 65,5), which Kierkegaard had planned to publish under pseudonym F. F. (→ 135,14). If I’ve portrayed someone so low … the opposite also ought to be portrayed] Climacus (→ 125,8) and Anti-Climacus (→ 125,8), respectively. Anti-Climacus] → 125,8. cf. p. 249] NB11:209. What is to be reformed in our time is not Church governance] A�er the fall of absolutism in March 1848, the cultus minister sent out a circular le�er on May 9, in which he presupposed that “the political transformations that have taken place will come to exercise a thoroughgoing effect on the Danish People’s Church, and that it will indeed be the government’s task to put into effect in the Church the same principles that are in the process of asserting themselves in the state”; it is not his intention, however, “to make any a�empt to support especially one or another theological or religious tendency in the Church,” but only to attempt “to liberate and organize the forces that are present in the Church itself in order that, with an unprejudiced internal development, it will be able to survive the difficult struggles of the times, will be able to allow its own differences to emerge and be reconciled, will be able by its own strength to remedy its own shortcomings to the glory of God”; see, e.g., Dansk Kirketidende [Danish Church Times], May 21, 1848, vol. 3, no. 141, col. 585. The

1849

493

Danish Constitution, adopted on June 5, 1849, contained a pledge that “the constitution of the People’s Church will be ordered by law” (§ 80), but otherwise le� unchanged existing arrangements in the Church. convening a synod] Refers to the cultus minister’s circular le�er of May 9, 1848 (see preceding note), in which he advances his view “that there ought to be convened a representative gathering of the Church in which suggestions for the basic arrangements regarding Church affairs can be presented before any final decisions are made concerning these ma�ers”; see, e.g., Dansk Kirketidende, May 21, 1848, vol. 3, no. 141, col. 586. Kierkegaard may also be referring to the cultus minister’s circular le�er of October 7, 1848, in which he not only repeats the suggestion concerning a preparatory Church gathering but also presents his own thoughts about how an actual synodal constitution for the Church could be organized and introduced; see, e.g., Dansk Kirketidende, December 10, 1848, vol. 4, no. 167, cols. 177–178, and December 24, 1848, vol. 4, no. 169, cols. 230–232. But at a meeting in early May 1849, the constitutional assembly decided that there would not necessarily be convened “a meeting of the Church before the constitution of the People’s Church was ordered by law”; see, e.g., Dansk Kirketidende, May 20, 1849, vol. 4, no. 190, cols. 562–563. But there was continuing discussion about introduction of a synodal constitution for the Church that would transform it from a State Church to a People’s Church with a synodal structure, i.e., with a certain degree of self-governance. when parents visited the classroom … for ventilation] Probably an allusion to E�erretninger om Borgerdydskolen i Kjøbenhavn før og nu. Program ved Overtagelsen af Skolen [Information on the School of Civic Virtue in Copenhagen, Then and Now: Prospectus upon the Assumption of Responsibility for the School], ed. Christian Bartholin and J. Stilling (the school’s superintendents) (Copenhagen, 1844). In Journal NB2, Kierkegaard writes that the changes proposed for the school were “calculated to satisfy the demands of the times with the assistance of slid-

10

11

136

494

J O U R N A L NB 11: 230–233

ing windows, etc.” and that, instead of working, parents and teachers reassure each other “of the seriousness” of their goal of ge�ing “a new sliding window” (NB2:143 in KJN 4, 198). Bartholin and Stilling did not mention ventilation, but Michael Nielsen, the superintendant of the school, was concerned about the quality of the air in the classroom “because experience has taught me that during the hot, breezeless days of summer, the rooms don’t get enough fresh air in 10 or fi�een minutes at noontime, even if the windows and doors on the opposite side are opened.” See Michael Nielsen, “E�erretninger om Borgerdydskolen i Kjøbenhavn, for Skoleaaret 1840–41” [Report on the School of Civic Virtue in Copenhagen for School Year 1840–1841], in C. V. Rimestad, Marco Polos Beskrivelse af det østlige asiatiske Høiland [Marco Polo’s Description of the East Asian Highlands] (Copenhagen, 1841), p. 66. 136 137

24 4 11 19

137

34

138

23 24 26 43 43 44

139

2 6

10

he is spirit] See Jn 4:24. an income] → 17,12. How they talk about miracles … But miracles don’t happen any longer] See NB11:100. the lily and the bird] See Mt 6:26–28 (→ 33,31). When I began as the auth. of Either/Or] Kierkegaard wrote the manuscript of Either/Or from October 1841 to September 1842. Christain state] → 134,36. in 48] in 1848 (→ 16,20). mean-spiritedness] Perhaps an allusion to Corsaren (→ 12,18). State Church] → 135,18. official posts] Priests, employed by the state. salaries] → 17,12. I’m also pseudonymous] Presumably refers only to Anti-Climacus (→ 125,8). For a few years now … the mockery of the mob] Corsaren began to lampoon Kierkegaard on January 1, 1846 (→ 12,18). Let Bishop Mynster keep the velvet coat and the grand cross] In 1836, Bishop Mynster (→ 13,28) was decorated with the Great Cross of the Dannebrog; as a spiritual knight of that order he wore around his neck a ribbon bearing a

1849

gold cross, and on his le� breast he wore a large cross decorated with silver rays forming a star. Pursuant to a decree of March 13, 1683, as bishop of Zealand he was required to wear a silk robe with a velvet front.

Notes for JOURNAL NB12 Critical Account of the Text of Journal NB12 497

Explanatory Notes for Journal NB12 511

NOTES FOR JOURNAL NB12

Critical Account of the Text by Niels W. Bruun and Anne Me�e Hansen Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Alastair Hannay

Explanatory Notes by Niels Jørgen Cappelørn Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Alastair Hannay

497

Critical Account of the Text I. Description of the Manuscript Journal NB12 is a bound journal in quarto format. Kierkegaard placed the label “NB12” on the outside of the book.1 The manuscript of Journal NB12 is preserved in the Kierkegaard Archive (KA) at the Royal Library in Copenhagen. The journal is wri�en in a gothic hand with some portions in a latin hand. Thirteen entries are wri�en in a decidedly latin hand. These are entries NB12:5, 7, 9 (which is described in Kierkegaard’s table of contents as an “important passage concerning the new pseudonym”), 17, 27, 52–53, 57, 72, 134–135, 175 (“My Standpoint”), and 196 (“On the Year 1848”). Kierkegaard also employs a latin hand when writing Latin, French, and Italian words, and occasionally for calligraphic purposes in connection with titles and headings, e.g., for entry NB12:191, “Something Concerning Myself That Must Constantly Be Kept in Mind” and NB12:193, “The Way It Really Should Be Said” An entry can begin in a latin hand and then switch to gothic a�er several lines (NB12:24), and an entry can begin in a gothic hand and conclude in a latin hand (NB12:123, “On ‘her’”). Nine entries, NB12:7, 9–10, 27, 52–53, 57, 72, and 133, are written lengthwise along the margin (see illustration on pp. 170–171).2 Entry NB12:99 has an addition (NB12:99.a) that begins in the main column and is concluded in the marginal column (see illustration on p. 197), and this is also the case with entries NB12:196 and NB12:196.a (see illustration on p. 269). The last page of a long entry on Regine Olsen (NB12:138) is wri�en lengthwise, taking up the entire marginal column. There are a number of deletions in the journal. Entry NB12:170 includes a biblical reference and the remark “can be used another time,” which have been bracketed and subsequently deleted with ) See illustration 2.

1

) Entries that were wri�en lengthwise along the margin are reproduced horizontally in KJN by using the full width of the page, i.e., across the columns reserved for both the main and the marginal entries.

2

498

J O U R N A L NB 12 loops (see illustration on p. 249). In entry NB12:118 (“On ‘her’ forgiveness”) two hash marks were originally wri�en, apparently indicating the end of the entry. These hash marks were then crossed out by Kierkegaard, who continued the entry. The same thing occurs in entry NB12:77 (“Martensen”).

II. Dating and Chronology According to the label affixed to its front cover, Journal NB12 was begun on July 19, 1849 and must have been concluded no later than September 28, 1849, which is the beginning date of the next journal, NB13.1 With the exception of the label (NB12:1), only two of the journal’s 198 entries bear dates: NB12:116 (“26 Aug. 49”) and NB12:138 (“7 Sept.”). Both entries concern “her,” i.e., Regine Olsen. Several entries, however, contain references to current events or circumstances that make possible an approximate dating. This is the case with entry NB12:12, which mentions a review in “Kirketidende (Saturday, July 21)” of Two Minor Ethical-Religious Essays, which Kierkegaard had published anonymously on May 19, 1849. In entry NB12:22, Kierkegaard copied a classified advertisement that had appeared in “Berlingske Tidende, morning edition, July 25” as an example of “women’s writing.” Entry NB12:27 notes that The Sickness unto Death has just been published; that happened on July 30, 1849. In entry NB12:93, Kierkegaard refers to “a note dated Aug. 10” from Rasmus Nielsen.2 Entry NB12:115 refers to Fredrika Bremer’s Lif i norden [Life in Scandinavia], which appeared as a supplement in Götheborgs Handels- och Sjöfarts-Tidning ) The marginal addition NB12:143.a may have been added at a later date than the main entry if by “a li�le book” Kierkegaard is referring to Rasmus Nielsen’s Mag. S. Kierkegaards “Johannes Climacus” og Dr. H. Martensens “Christelige Dogmatik”. En Undersøgende Anmeldelse [Magister S. Kierkegaard’s “Johannes Climacus” and Dr. H. Martensen’s Christian Dogmatics: An Investigative Review]. The book was advertised as having been published in Adresseavisen, no. 242, October 15, 1849, and was 132 pages long. The main entry, NB12:143, was presumably wri�en shortly a�er September 7, 1849, which is the date of a preceding entry, NB12:138. See the explanatory note to entry NB12:143.a in the present volume.

1

) The le�er from Nielsen is published in LD, 312–313; B&A 1, 245.

2

Critical Account of the Text

2. Cover of Journal NB12.

499

500

J O U R N A L NB 12 [Gothenburg Business and Shipping Times], containing a sketch of Kierkegaard in the issue of August 15, 1849. Entry NB12:117 refers to A. G. Rudelbach’s book, Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip, dens Udartning og dens mulige Gjenreisning, fornemmelig i Danmark [The Evangelical Church’s Constitution: Its Origin and Principle, Its Decline, and Its Possible Restoration, Especially in Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 171), which had been advertised as published on August 31, 1849. In entry NB12:129, Kierkegaard refers to a note from Rasmus Nielsen dated August 28.1 In entry NB12:157, he continues his critique of Fredrika Bremer’s Lif i norden, perhaps having been provoked by the Danish translation, which appeared on September 12, 1849. In entry NB12:183, Kierkegaard mentions an allegedly muddled sermon that had been delivered by C. H. Visby in the Church of Our Savior on September 23, 1849.

III. Contents The three tables of contents, entries NB12:2, 3, and 4, refer to entries that Kierkegaard regarded as especially important or that he wanted to use subsequently. Entry NB12:2 contains page references to entries NB12:9, 17, 52, 53, 72, and 133, all of which concern “the new pseudonym,” i.e., Anti-Climacus. Entry NB12:3 contains references to three entries that have headings referring to Kierkegaard himself and in which he reflects on himself as an author, and specifically on his presentation of Christianity: “My Standpoint” (NB12:175), “Something Concerning Myself” (NB12:191), and “On the Year 1848” (NB12:196). This last entry is a retrospective reflection on the year 1848, which was marked by financial worries, then by intensified literary productivity and by deliberations concerning himself as a Christian author (that year’s work became “inversely…my own religious upbringing―or my further religious upbringing”). Kierkegaard begins by writing: In one sense, 1848 has raised me to a higher level; in another sense it has broken me, that is, it has broken me religiously, or to put it in my language: God has outrun me.

) The le�er from Nielsen is published in LD, 315–316; B&A 1, 247– 248.

1

Critical Account of the Text A�er a lengthy marginal addition in which he develops the notion of religious upbringing (NB12:196.a) he continues: Financial worries came upon me suddenly and entirely too closely. I cannot simultaneously li� two such disparate burdens as the world’s opposition and concern about making a living. When I rented the apartment on Tornebuskegaden, it was my plan to live there for half a year’s time, quietly contemplating my life, and then seek an official appointment. Then suddenly confusion broke loose. Within a couple of months a situation developed in which it was possible that the next day I would own nothing, but would literally be in financial straits. This took a severe toll on me. My spirit reacted all the more strongly: I wrote more prolifically than ever, but more than ever like a dying man. This was the highest that has been granted me with respect to Christian truth―that much is certain. But in another sense it was also something altogether too lo�y for me simply to make it my own, stepping into that role. During the period that Kierkegaard kept journals NB12 and NB13, he was preoccupied with the concurrent publication of the discourses at the communion on Fridays. The table of contents in entry NB12:4 refers to four entries―NB12:170 (“Friday Discourses”), NB12:180 (“Texts for Friday Discourses”), NB12:181 (“Texts for Friday Discourses”), and NB12:190 (“Text for a Friday Sermon”). In addition to the above, entry NB12:133 mentions several completed discourses, as well as a number of dra�s for a new series of discourses.1 yet another round of discourses at the communion on Fridays could of course be wri�en, which would thus constitute a second series. One and as good as two are already finished, and there are hints at a couple of additional ones in one of the new folders that bookbinder Møller has made. The two discourses that were as good as finished were probably the ones dealing with Heb 4:15 and Lk 18:13, which were used in The High Priest―The Tax Collector―The Woman Who Was a Sinner:

) The first series, consisting of seven discourses, was published in 1848 as the fourth part of Christian Discourses.

1

501

502

J O U R N A L NB 12 Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays.1 The following scriptural passages were also listed as ideas for Friday discourses: Lk 7:47 and 1 Pet 4:7 (these two passages were actually used in Two Discourses at the Communion on Fridays), as well as 1 Cor 11:31–322 and Lk 24:31 (all cited in NB12:170); Mt 13:45–46 and Rev 3:20 (cited in NB12:180); and Mt 28:5, Lk 18:13, and Mt 8:8 (cited in NB12:181).3 Kierkegaard made use of his journals in conjunction with the writings on which he was working at the time. An early entry in the next journal, NB13:3, contains a reference to the scriptural passages mentioned in Journal NB12,4 and entry NB13:58 consists of a comment and reference to entry NB12:170, with the information that one of the two scriptural passages mentioned in that entry was not used a�er all.5

) See the explanatory notes to entry NB12:133 in the present volume.

1

) 1 Cor 11:31–32 was deleted and replaced with Lk 24:31.

2

) In the final version of The High Priest―The Tax Collector―The Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays, the passages used were Heb 4:15, Lk 7:47, and Lk 18:13. The preface to these discourses is dated “Early September 1849.” In the dra� material for these discourses Kierkegaard wrote the date September 8, changed from September 10, but he then changed it to “in the beginning of” September, and finally chose “Early.” The variants in the dra�s and the printer’s manuscript have been published as Pap. X 5 B 25–27. According to the printer Bianco Luno’s Erindringsbog [Memorandum Book] for 1849, the printing order for The High Priest―The Tax Collector―The Woman Who Was a Sinner was placed on October 29, 1849, and on November 14, 1849, Adresseavisen advertised the work as published. Two Discourses at the Communion on Fridays was advertised as published on August 8, 1851.

3

) “In Journal NB12 there are a number of texts for Friday sermons; the page numbers of these can be found on the first page of the present journal.” See NB13:2 in the present volume.

4

) “Text for a Friday Discourse.” The entry reads: “see Journal NB12 p. 226 and p. 227. The text cited under no. 3 was not used.” See NB13:58 in the present volume.

5

Critical Account of the Text In 1849, H. L. Martensen published Den christelige Dogmatik [Christian Dogmatics] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 653).1 Entry NB12:14 contains Kierkegaard’s first reaction to the newly published book: “While the whole of existence is disintegrating, while everyone capable of seeing must see that all this about millions of Xns is a sham.…Martensen sits there arranging a system of dogmatics.” Thus, “what is important now is the point in the system at which the doctrine of angels is to be situated, and so on.” In entry NB12:16, Kierkegaard criticizes the lack of rigor in Martensen’s conceptual definitions: “The only scholarly feature I have found is that it is divided into §§s.” In entry NB12:18, it is asserted that “As a philosopher Martensen gives assurances―absolutely not a dialectician, and as a Xn he also merely gives assurances.” Entry NB12:21 a�acks the very basis of Martensen’s dogmatics: “A dogmatic system must not be erected on the basis of comprehending the faith but on the basis of comprehending that one cannot comprehend the faith.” In entry NB12:26, the fundamental criticism is continued: “In the whole of Martensen’s Dogmatics, or at any rate in the portion I have read thus far, there is not one single sentence that is an honest Yes or No. It is the old sophistry of being able to talk―but not converse. Because conversation immediately establishes You and I.” In entry NB12:35, Martensen is criticized for his habit of citing Kant, Hegel, etc.: “It is just like when the newspapers write in the name of the public.” And in entry NB12:47, Martensen is also subjected to criticism for having neglected to name certain other German philosophers. Kierkegaard’s extensive critique of Martensen’s work2 includes a rejoinder (NB12:76) to a series of remarks he felt to be an a�ack on his person: M. appears to be directing sarcasm at me with this talk of a sickly, egotistic life as an individual (it’s in the § on rebirth § 234). This calls for a rejoinder: What Xnty understands by health is something entirely different from what the worldly pers. understands by health. By health, the worldly pers. understands saying good-bye to infinite effort but being shrewd about finite goals, ge�ing oneself a lucrative living and a velvet-cov-

) On July 19, 1849, Adresseavisen advertised the work as published, but it can be seen from a receipt from the bookseller Reitzel that Kierkegaard had already purchased the book the day before.

1

) See also NB12:37, 41, 62–64, 70, 73, 75, 77–79, and 85.

2

503

504

J O U R N A L NB 12 ered paunch as quickly as possible, living in aristocratic circles, doing nothing unless it leads to some worldly advantage, not fancifully serving gratis―to say nothing of paying money for doing so (no, be�er to take advantage of the consistory’s offer to let a person’s book be printed gratis―and then get it refunded from the printer). And when, in addition to this, a man has been married two times, a worldly pers. will regard him as very healthy, indeed he will even see it as proof of unusual health that, in his Ethics, the man himself is capable of teaching that second marriages are not praiseworthy. In this sense, you see, I am certainly a sickly person―and an egotist. The journal also contains a series of commentaries and remarks on sermons by Martin Luther.1 In entry NB12:6, Kierkegaard writes: In the sermon for the second Sunday a�er Epiphany (epistle) Luther makes a good distinction between: to rebuke, to punish, and to curse. Someone who curses wishes that evil might come; someone who punishes wishes that evil might disappear. In entry NB12:20, Kierkegaard’s Bible reading evokes an observation on Jn 5–8, which sketches the people’s ambivalent a�itude toward Christ: “At one moment the people want to kill him, at the next moment they want to deify him.” In entry NB12:171, Kierkegaard dwells on 1 Cor 9:18 and begins by citing Paul: “my reward is that I can present the gospel of Xst without being paid, thus his reward consists simply in the fact that he takes no payment. Here, you see, this is a discourse fi�ing for an apostle.”2 Other authors Kierkegaard read during this period include Thomas a Kempis (NB12:11 and 172), Gerhard Tersteegen (NB12:31 and 65), Fénelon (NB12:113 and 119), and Zacharias Werner (NB12:91, 158, 160, 166, 184, and 197). Entry NB12:60 contains Kierkegaard’s dra� idea for a travesty on the playwright Ludvig Holberg: A very good counterpart could be wri�en to the scene with the two servants in Holberg’s The Happy Capsize, where the one servant has the line, [“]On the 10th hujus my master ) See also entries NB12:54, 87, and 177.

1

) See also NB12:33–34, 36, 84, 113, 137, 169, and 195.

2

Critical Account of the Text wrote a poem and was rewarded with a new coat[”]―and then the other servant speaks. A very good counterpart could be created by le�ing it be the difference betw. an apostle and a preacher in established Xndom: [“]On the 5th hujus my master (the apostle) was imprisoned.[”] [“]On the 5th hujus my master (the priest in the established Church) was made a knight of the Dannebrog for having given a speech about how the apostle Paul was imprisoned.[”] [“]On the 7th hujus my master (the apostle) was crucified.[”] [“]On the 7th hujus my master (the priest in the established Church) was invited to have dinner with His Majesty, who wanted to thank him most graciously for having delivered a sermon about how Paul faithfully embraced his martyrdom.[”] Kierkegaard was taken with Hans Adolf Brorson’s hymn “What Does My Shulamite See.” In entry NB12:132, Kierkegaard cites two lines from the first stanza: While the air is still so full Of winter snow’s shivering-cold. He regards “winter snow’s shivering-cold” as a metaphor for the fact that “cares, worries, difficulties, and the like” are at their worst while they are still awaited: thus the winter snow is still far from having finished falling: it remains there, tormenting the air―and this is certainly also the way it is with cares, worries, difficulties, and the like: as long as they have not yet fallen, so that one can see what it is (actuality), as long as they hover and torment in possibility, they are worst. In a marginal note added subsequently, Kierkegaard remarks that he had interpreted this stanza in Journal NB9 (NB9:54) and that the verses are also discussed in entry NB14:109.1

) This hymn is not cited word-for-word. In a marginal note to entry NB9:54, Kierkegaard refers to the edition he is using: “It is from Brorson’s “Svanesang” no. 49, 1, p. 867, but I cite it slightly differently, dropping the first line and pulling the two subsequent lines down to the 4th” (KJN 5, p. 240). Entry NB14:109 also has a marginal reference to this page in Journal NB9, and in entry NB14:175 Kierkegaard again refers to these lines by Brorson.

1

505

506

J O U R N A L NB 12 Kierkegaard’s relationship with Regine Schlegel (née Olsen) takes up a great deal of Journal NB12. It had been almost eight years since Kierkegaard had broken the engagement. The Sickness unto Death had just appeared, and with work on that book completed, Kierkegaard had “now essentially stopped being an author” (NB12:30). In entry NB12:27, he writes, “Now I will rest and be more calm.” From the next entry (NB12:28) it can be seen that he had already come to an agreement with printer Bianco Luno on the printing of The Sickness unto Death when he learned of the death of Regine’s father, Councillor of State Terkild Olsen. He did not stop the printing, however, because he believed that would “weaken the printer’s impression of my business sense.” But a month later, Kierkegaard thought that it was time to “bring up the ma�er again.” In entry NB12:28.a he writes: In this connection she has certainly come to reflect quite specifically on her relationship with me. Therefore I owe it to her to bring up the ma�er again. It also as if Governance has assigned me the time to do this. My most difficult time is always from Aug. 9 to Sept. 10. I have always had something against summer. And now, at the time I am physically weakest, is the anniversary of my father’s death; and the 10th of Sept. is of course the day of the engagement. This is followed by an entire series of entries in which Kierkegaard looks back on his relationship with Regine. She is not referred to by name but as “she” and “her,” and there are headings, both above the main text column and above the marginal column, with approximately the same formulation: “On ‘her.’”1 These entries ponder the possibility of reconciliation and forgiveness. The first of these entries, NB12:29, depicts an encounter at the Church of the Holy Spirit on July 1, 1849, the Sunday following the death of Councillor of State Olsen, and the entry concludes by noting that Kierkegaard was present the next time Kolthoff preached at the Church of the Holy Ghost, but “she was not there.” Not until entry NB12:105, from at least three weeks later, does Kierkegaard again write of “her.”

) NB12:29: “On ‘her’”; NB12:105: “On ‘her’”; NB12:116: “On ‘her’”; NB12:118: “On ‘her’ Forgiveness”; NB12:120: “Her Relationship to Me”; NB12:122: “My Relationship with Her”; NB12:123: “On ‘her’”; NB12:138: “On ‘Her’”; NB12:150: “On ‘her’”; NB12:198: “On her.” Entry NB12:126 has no heading.

1

Critical Account of the Text While he was writing these entries, Kierkegaard was also writing a comprehensive description of the relationship in a separate “quarto-sized book: “My Relationship to her. Aug. 24, 1849 somewhat poetic.”1 In this quarto-sized book, which according to the date on the title page was begun two days before entry NB12:116, reference is made to “somewhere in Journal NB12, about in the middle.” This reference is presumably to entry NB12:105, which discusses the possibility of a “rapprochement” and begins with a variation of the formulation that is found in the quarto-sized book: “it is not impossible that she believes that I could initiate a rapprochement.”2 In entry NB12:116, Kierkegaard describes the relative strengths of man and woman against the background of his bond to Regine: Truly, when Providence gave man strength and woman weakness, whom did he make the stronger[?] Herein lies what is frightful in being involved with a woman: she succumbs in weakness―and then one struggles with oneself, with one’s own power. Entry NB12:143 includes a retrospective consideration of the summer of 1849, which had been a difficult one for Kierkegaard: in April 1848 his faithful servant Anders Westergaard had been dra�ed into the army; the carpenter Strube and his family lived at Kierkegaard’s place, and in December 1848 Strube had become seriously ill. In addition to this, Kierkegaard had financial worries; was confronted with the prospect of paying income tax; and had troubles with his publisher Reitzel, who had wanted to postpone the publication of The Sickness unto Death, scheduled for July, until the end of the summer. And finally, there was the stench from the tannery owned by Gram, his landlord, plus continuing a�acks by Corsaren [The Corsair]. ) From the marginal entry NB14:44.b. The quarto-sized book is published as Notebook 15 in KJN 3, 427–445; see also the “Critical Account of the Text of Notebook 15” in KJN 3, 775–781.

1

) The reference in the quarto-sized book to Journal NB12 is found in a marginal note opposite the beginning of the entry Not15:5, which begins with the words: “Now that the councillor of state is dead. Possibly she hopes, a�er all, to get to see me again, a relationship with me, an innocent and loving [relationship]” (KJN 3, 437).

2

507

508

J O U R N A L NB 12 Abused in many ways by the vulgarity of the mob and by people’s inquisitiveness, my home has been my consolation, having a pleasant home has been my greatest earthly encouragement. It was with an eye to this that I acquired such a fine and expensive apartment―and then to pay 200 rd. in order to suffer like this.1 The Swedish writer Fredrika Bremer (1801–1865) stayed in Copenhagen from the autumn of 1848 until June 1849, associating with various notables including Hans Christian Ørsted, Grundtvig, Martensen, and Queen Caroline Amalie. In May 1849 she wrote a le�er to Kierkegaard’s pseudonym Victor Eremita, saying that “a recluse like yourself…heartily wished to meet you, in part to thank you for the heavenly manna of your writings, in part to speak to you about Life’s Stages [i.e., Stages on Life’s Way].”2 When Victor Eremita failed to react, she wrote another le�er, this time addressed to “Theology Graduate, Mr. Søren Kierkegaard. Gammel Torv.”3 Kierkegaard refused to meet with her.4 Shortly a�er this, Bremer’s Lif i norden began to appear as a supplement to Götheborgs Handels- och Sjöfarts-Tidning (July 31, August 6–7, and 15, 1849).5 The book included sketches of a number of well-known Danes, including―Kierkegaard.6 In entry NB12:115, which was wri�en no later than August 26, Kierkegaard has the following commentary: It has now pleased Fr. Bremer to bless Denmark with her judgment. Naturally it consists of echoes of what the people

) On Kierkegaard’s apartment in Rosenborggade, see the explanatory notes to entry NB12:143, pp. 565-566 in the present volume.

1

) LD, 286; B&A 1, 225.

2

) LD, 287; B&A 1, 226.

3

) LD, 288; B&A 1, 226–227 (dra�)

4

) A Danish translation, Liv i Norden, appeared on September 12, 1849.

5

) The sketch of Kierkegaard appeared in the supplement that appeared on August 15. Kierkegaard had access to the newspaper in the private library Athenæum.

6

Critical Account of the Text concerned have said to her. This can best be seen in the case of Martensen, who has had quite a lot to do with her.1 She was kind enough to send me a courteous note inviting me to have a conversation with her. Now I almost regret that I did not reply as I had originally thought of doing, with merely these words: “No, many thanks, I do not dance.” But in any case I declined her invitation and did not go. So I get to hear in print that I am “inaccessible.” It is probably owing to Martensen’s influence that Frederikke has made me into a psychologist and nothing else, and has provided me with a significant audience of ladies. In entry NB12:157 Kierkegaard continues se�ling accounts with Bremer’s sketch of him: In Frederikke it is stated that I am so sickly and so irritable that I can become embi�ered if the sun does not shine as I wish it to.―Goody-goody old maid, frivolous tramp, you’ve hit it just right! This explanation will unite different circles that perhaps are not so different from one another. On the one side, Martensen, Pauli, Heiberg, etc. On the other side, Goldschmidt, P. L. Møller. It was a fine world: Martensen may bear witness “before God and his conscience,” and didn’t he also get a velvet paunch and become a bishop, and didn’t Frederikke come running to him every day, reading the Dogmatics, of which she received galley proofs (this is well known)[?] And Goldschmidt may say: It was a fine world, and I always had 3000 subscribers. All of them together: It would be a fine world, except that Mag. K. is so sickly and irritable that he can become embi�ered if the sun does not shine as he wishes it.

) The marginal note NB12:115.b contains this frivolous aside: “She lived here for quite a while and had physical intercourse with famous people. She wanted to have physical intercourse with me, but I was virtuous.”

1

509

Explanatory Notes 144

1 2 3 4 5 6

144

8 9 10

145

1

2 3 4

146

1

the new pseudonym] → 147,3. p. 7] See NB12:9. p. 14 top] See NB12:17. pp. 50 and 51] See NB12:52 and 53. p. 74] See NB12:72. the works that have been completed … p. 172] See NB12:133 and related explanatory notes. My standpoint see … p. 230] See NB12:175. Something concerning myself … p.262] See NB12:191. On the year 1848 in relation to me … p. 273] See NB12:196 and related explanatory notes. Texts for the 3 Friday discourses … p. 226] See NB12:170 and 170.a and related explanatory notes. Di�o for di�o … p. 242] See NB12:180. Di�o for di�o … p. 244] See NB12:181. Di�o … p. 261] See NB12:190. the three ethical-religious discourses] Refers to nos. 1, 2, and 4 of A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Essays, which were edited and arranged in the summer of 1848 but had been wri�en in 1846– 1847, consisting of six essays: no. 1, “Something on What Could Be Called Premise Authors” (from the introduction to The Book on Adler) (→ 146,1), see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 5–16, slightly reworked; see also Pap. IX B 1, p. 297); no. 2 “The Dialectical Relationship: The Universal, the Single Individual, the Special Individual” (from chap. 1 of The Book on Adler; see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 33–53, slightly reworked; see also Pap. VIII 2 B 9,13–15, pp. 50–51, as well as IX B 2, pp. 298–299, and IX B 7–8, pp. 305–307); no. 3 “Has a Human Being the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (from 1847; see Pap. VIII 2 B 136, p. 236, and VIII 2 B 138–139, pp. 238–239); no. 4, “A Revelation in the Situation of the Present Age” (from chap. 2 of The Book on Adler; see Pap.

VII 2 B 235, pp. 74–90; slightly reworked, see Pap. IX B 4, p. 300); no. 5, “A Psychological View of Mag. Adler as a Phenomenon and as a Satire on Hegelian Philosophy and the Present Age” (from chap. 4 of The Book on Adler, see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 176–230; slightly reworked, see Pap. VIII 2 B 7,12–18, pp. 32–43, VIII 2 B 8,1, p. 44, and VIII 2 B 9,12, p. 49, as well as IX B 5, pp. 301–305); and no. 6, “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle” (from chap. 3, § 2, of The Book on Adler, see Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 136–150; slightly reworked and expanded, see Pap. VIII 2 B 7,8–9, pp. 28–29, and VIII 2 B 9,16–18, pp. 51–53, as well as IX B 6, p. 305). Nos. 2 and 6 were published together on May 19, 1849, as Two Ethical-Religious Discourses under the pseudonym H. H. (see entry NB11:8 and its accompanying explanatory notes in the present volume). Kierkegaard had earlier decided to omit no. 5 (→ 146,8). if I do not name Adler] Refers to no. 5, “A Psychological View of Mag. Adler as a Phenomenon and as a Satire on Hegelian Philosophy and the Present Age” from A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Essays (see the preceding explanatory note). ― Adler: Adolph Peter Adler (1812– 1869), Danish theologian, who in 1840 received the magister artium degree with the dissertation Den isolerede Subjectivitet i dens vigtigste Skikkelser [The Isolated Subjectivity in Its Most Important Forms], and from 1841 was parish pastor on the island of Bornholm. In 1842, he published Populaire Foredrag over Hegels objective Logik [Popular Lectures on Hegel’s Objective Logic] (ASKB 383); in 1844 Adler was suspended from his post; and in 1845 he was honorably discharged with an interim allowance, because his claim, in the preface to Nogle Prædikener [Some Sermons] (Copenhagen, 1843; ASKB U 9), of having received a revelation was considered, not least by Bishop J. P. Mynster, as a sign of incipient insanity. A�er his discharge, Adler published Skrivelser min Suspension

1

512

6 8

10

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 5–7

og Entledigelse vedkommende [Writings Concerning My Suspension and Dismissal] (Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB U 10). There followed Nogle Digte [Some Poems] (Copenhagen,1846; ASKB 1502), Studier og Exempler [Studies and Examples] (Copenhagen, 1846; ASKB U 11), Forsøg til en kort systematisk Fremstilling af Christendommen i dens Logik [A�empt at a Short Systematic Account of Christianity in Its Logic] (Copenhagen, 1846; ASKB U 13), and Theologiske Studier [Theological Studies] (Copenhagen, 1846; ASKB U 12). From mid-June until the end of September 1846, Kierkegaard had worked on the first version of a book on Adler (Pap. VII 2 B 235, pp. 5–230); in 1847, he undertook both a second (Pap. VIII 2 B 7–8, pp. 20–45) and a third (Pap. VIII 2 B 9–27, pp. 46–79) revision and reorganization of the book, generally referred to as The Book on Adler. that desperate person] Presumably a reference to Adler (see the preceding note). gave up publishing the essay on him] See journal entry NB10:38, from February or March 1849, in KJN 5, 286–287. The 3rd dissertation] i.e., essay no. 4, “A Revelation in the Situation of the Present Age,” in A Cycle of Ethical-Religious Essays” (→ 146,1).

146

13

Luther makes a good distinction … evil might disappear] Refers to Martin Luther’s sermon on the epistle Rom 12:6–16, for the 2nd Sunday after Epiphany, in En christelig Postille sammendragen af Dr. Morten Luthers Kirke- og Huuspostiller [A Christian Book of Sermons Drawn from Dr. Martin Luther’s Church and House Sermons], trans. J. Thisted, 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1828; ASKB 283), vol. 2, pp. 104–115; see p. 113, cols. 1–2: “here a distinction must be made between a curse and a rebuke or a punishment.…To curse is really to wish that evil befall someone, but to rebuke or punish is to be angry with the evil.…In brief: to curse and to punish are two opposite things―the person who curses wishes that evil might come; the person who punishes wants evil to disappear.”

147

1

I did not come to publish the material about my work as an author] In the summer and autumn

1849

of 1848, Kierkegaard completed the manuscript of The Point of View for My Work as an Author, A Direct Communication: Report to History, which was published posthumously by P. C. Kierkegaard in 1859. In 1851, Kierkegaard himself published a shorter version, On My Work as an Author, dated “Cphgn, March 1849,” (PV, 5; SKS 13, 11). The Sickness unto Death is now in print … by Anti-Climacus] The Sickness unto Death: A Christian Psychological Exposition for Edification and Awakening, by Anti-Climacus, edited by S. Kierkegaard, was delivered to Bianco Luno, printer and purveyor to the royal court, on June 29, 1849; the printing was finished on July 27, 1849; and the book was advertised as “published” on July 30, 1849, in Adresseavisen (abbreviated form of Kjøbenhavns kongelig alene privilegerede Adressecomptoirs E�erretninger [Information from Copenhagen’s Only Royally Licensed Advertising Office]), no. 176. –– Anti-Climacus: “Against Climacus,” i.e., a contrast or opposite pole to Climacus (→ 152,11). Anticlimacus or AntiClimacus is first mentioned as a possible new pseudonym in NB5:8 (KJN 4, 373; SKS 20, 373). On Kierkegaard’s explanation, in On My Work as an Author, of Anti-Climacus as “the halt,” → 152,24. On the contrast between Climacus and Anti-Climacus, see the piece “Climacus and Anticlimacus: A Dialectical Invention” (→ 168,10), where Anti-Climacus writes: “I, Anticlimacus… was born in Copenhagen, am just about exactly the same age as Johannes Climachus, with whom I have in one sense much, all too much, in common, but from whom I am, however, very different in another sense. For he says of himself that he is not a Christian―it’s enough to make one furious. I have indeed become so furious about it that I―if anyone could trick me into saying so― say exactly the opposite, or because I say exactly the opposite concerning myself, I could become furious about what he says concerning me. I say, in fact, that I am a Christian to a degree as extraordinary as ever anyone was, but, note well, it is something I am in hidden inwardness” (Pap. X 6 B 48, pp. 53–54). Practice in Christianity will also be pseudonymous] On June 4, 1849, Kierkegaard began to

3

4

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 7–8

7 11 17

18

20

29

consider publishing the three pieces, “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest,” “Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended in Me,” and “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself,” of which the first two were wri�en in 1848 and the third presumably in 1849 (see NB12:133), in a single volume as Practice in Christianity (see journal entry NB11:123 in the present volume). The book was published in early September 1850, with Anti-Climacus as author and Kierkegaard as editor. decide whether he is capable of building his tower so high] A reference to Lk 14:28–30. heard, if possible, like a voice in the clouds] Presumably a reference to Mt 17:1–13, esp. v. 5. “sin” and “atonement” … in an edifying discourse] These two themes were developed in The High Priest―The Tax Collector―The Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays, which Kierkegaard published under his own name on November 14, 1849. the pseudonym … jack up the price properly] See the “Editor’s Preface” to the first part of Practice in Christianity, where Kierkegaard writes, “In this work, which is from the year 1848, the requirement for being a Christian is forced up to the highest level of ideality by the pseudonym [Anti-Climacus]” (PC, 7; SKS 12, 15). This preface is referred to in parts 2 and 3 of the book (PC, 73 and 149; SKS 12, 85 and 153). This idea has also occurred to me once before … probably in NB10] See entry NB11:123 in the present volume. ― NB10: see KJN 5, 263–395. Like the river Guadalquibir] Or Guadalquivir, is one of Spain’s largest rivers, emptying into the Bay of Cadiz in southern Spain, but at no point does it flow underground, as Kierkegaard claims at various points. He seems to confuse this river with the Guadiana. Both rivers are discussed in J. Hübner, Fuldstændige Geographie [Comprehensive Geography], translated from the German, 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1743–1749; ASKB 2042–2044), vol. 1, pp. 43–44: “The river Anas, in their language Guadiana.…People have argued that not far from its source this river runs underground and disappears for ca. 45 miles, which is also why it has been called Anas; it is a duck [Danish, And] that

1849

513

dives under.…But because travelers have explored it more carefully it has been discovered that the stream flows between two cliffs so that it cannot be seen.” See also L. Moréri, Le grand dictionnaire historique, ou le mélange curieux de l’histoire sacrée et profane [Great Historical Dictionary, or The Strange Mixture of Sacred and Profane History], 6 vols. (Basel 1731–1732; ASKB 1965–1969), vol. 4 (1732), p. 384. that image appeals to me so much] Three times previously, Kierkegaard had used the metaphor of a river that disappears underground and later reemerges: see journal entries EE:128 (KJN 2, 42), NB11:123 in the present volume, and CI, 198; SKS 1, 244. odium generis humani] The source for this saying is possibly the Church Father Tertullian, Apologeticus adversus gentes pro christianis [Apology for Christians against the Pagans], 37, 8: “Sed hostes maluistis vocare generis humani” (“People have preferred to call them [the Christians] enemies of the human race”); Qu. Sept. Flor. Tertulliani opera [Tertullian’s Works], ed. E. F. Leopold, 4 vols. (Leipzig, 1839–1841; ASKB 147– 150; in Bibliotheca patrum ecclesiasticorum latinorum selecta [Library of Selected Latin Church Fathers], ed. E. G. Gersdorf, vols. 4–7), vol. 1, p. 109. See also Tacitus, Annales [Annals], bk. 15, chap. 44, 4, in C. Cornelii Taciti opera ex recensione Ernestiana [Tacitus’s Works from the Ernesti Edition], ed. I. Bekker (Berlin, 1825; ASKB 1282), p. 347, where it is related that Christians who were suspected for having burned Rome during the reign of Nero were not so much condemned for arson as for “odio humani generis.” In the Danish translation of Tacitus that Kierkegaard owned, J. Baden renders the expression as “hatred of humankind.” Cajus Cornelius Tacitus [Tacitus], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1773–1797; ASKB 1286–1288), vol. 2 (1775), p. 282. during the quiet hours] An expression o�en used by J. P. Mynster (→ 152,17) with respect both to private devotions and church services. See, e.g., Betragtninger over de christelige Troeslærdomme [Observations on the Doctrines of the Christian Faith], 2 vols., 2nd ed. (Copenhagen, 1837 [1833];

30

4

148

3

148m

514

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 8–12

ASKB 254–255), vol. 1, p. 240; vol. 2, pp. 298, 299, 301, 306; Prædikener paa alle Søn- og Hellig-Dage i Aaret [Sermons on Every Sunday and Holy Day of the Year] (→ 177,10), vol. 1, pp. 8 and 38; and Prædikener holdte i Kirkeaaret 1846–47 (→ 177,10), p. 63. 149

1 2 6

6

8

11 12

a pseudonym had to be used] i.e., the pseudonym Anti-Climacus (→ 147,3 and → 147,4). When the requirements of ideality are to be set forth at their maximum] → 147,18. the earlier pseudonyms] i.e., the various authors and editors of Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous writings from Either/Or (1843) to The Crisis and a Crisis in the Life of an Actress (1848). that I do not retract the whole business humorously] Reference to Johannes Climacus (→ 152,11), who in his concluding “Appendix” to Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846) humorously declares that his book is superfluous and that “everything is to be understood as retracted, that not only does the book have a conclusion, but in addition to this, it is a revocation” (CUP 1, 619; SKS 7, 562). the preface to the three godly discourses … offered with the le�] Cited from the preface to The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses, which appeared on May 14, 1849 (the same day as the second edition of Either/Or; see the next note). Here Kierkegaard expresses the hope that the book will remind the reader “of the preface to the Two Edifying Discourses of 1844, ‘which were offered with the right hand’―as opposed to the pseudonym, who was offered, and who is offered, with the le�” (WA, 3; SKS 11, 9). See also journal entry JJ:86 from March or April 1843, where Kierkegaard writes, “Theodorus Atheos said that he offered his teachings with his right hand, but his listeners received them with their le� hands” (KJN 2, 154). Here Kierkegaard cites as his source W. G. Tennemann, Geschichte der Philosophie [History of Philosophy], 11 vols. in 12 parts (Leipzig, 1798–1819; ASKB 815–826), vol. 2 (1799), p. 124 n. 39. second printing of Either/Or] The second edition of Either/Or was published on May 14,1849. the new pseudonym] i.e., Anti-Climacus (→ 147,3).

1849

Thomas à Kempis] German monk, mystic, author (ca. 1380–1471), ordained a priest in 1414. There is dispute concerning his authorship of the four books of De imitatione Christi [On the Imitation of Christ]. Adversities … what strength he has. 1st book chap. 16] Cited from bk. 1, chap. 16, “On Bearing with the Frailties of Others,” Thomas a Kempis, om Christi E�erfølgelse, fire Bøger [Thomas à Kempis: On the Imitation of Christ, Four Books], trans. and ed. by J.A.L. Holm, 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1848 [1826]; ASKB 273), pp. 19–21; esp. pp. 20–21.

2

H. H.’s li�le book is reviewed in the Kirketidende (Saturday, July 21)] Refers to a very brief review of Two Minor Ethical-Religious Essays by H. H., under the rubric “New Books / (April–June)” in Dansk Kirketidende [Danish Church Times], July 22, 1849, vol. 4, no. 43, cols. 718–719. According to the table of contents (no pagination), the reviewer was “Helweg,” i.e., the Danish theologian and Grundtvigian priest and author, Hans Friedrich Helweg (1816–1901). ― Saturday, July 21: Dansk Kirketidende officially appeared on Sundays but was presumably sent to subscribers the Saturday before. a quite young auth. who has read Mag. K.] Refers to the beginning of the review: “Two Minor Ethical-Religious Discourses by H. H. owe their existence―both the ideas and the way they are expressed―to the reading of Mag. S. Kierkegaard’s writings. Overwhelmed by the wealth unfolded to him there, the author, doubtless someone very young, has credited himself with productive powers, though his work proves nothing other than that he has understood material provided from elsewhere” (col. 718). the second essay] i.e., “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle.” the most important of all ethical-religious concepts] i.e., authority (→ 150,30). ― ethical-religious: Variant: added. until the right person comes] Variant: A word is missing here; the editors of SKS suggest the reading “until the right person comes.” as I have expressed it earlier … I will change direction] Refers to journal entry NB11:53 in the present volume.

7

150

3

8

11 12

14

15

150

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 12–14

27

29 30

the sympathetic collision] Refers to the doubt that is the beginning point for the fictive author in the first part of “Has a Human Being the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?” (see WA, 58, 68; SKS 11, 64, 73). my pseudonyms] → 149,6. the most important ethical-religious concept: authority] Refers to the omnipresent theme in the second of the two minor ethical-religious essays, “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle” (see, e.g., WA, 94, 98; SKS 11, 98, 102).

151

12

servants of the Church therefore ought not be civil servants] → 167,34.

151

16

While the whole of existence is disintegrating … Xnty has disappeared from the world] See the end of the preface to Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik [Christian Dogmatics]: “And the age’s trial by fire, of which the Apostle speaks [1 Cor 3:11–13] cannot be far off in this age. For who can fail to notice that the events of the times, which have come over us so suddenly, also herald a time of testing, of accusation, for the Church? Who can fail to notice that the upheaval that is now upon the world also has significance for a kingdom wholly other than that of politics and peoples―which indeed does seem to be the only kingdom that most people have within them just now. But it is proper for us―in view of the judgment that is to come, in expectation of what else the times will make manifest―to give one another an accounting of where and upon which foundation we stand, and how we will build upon it. Pay close a�ention to yourself and to your teaching! 1 Tim 4:16” (p. iv). Martensen sits there arranging a system of dogmatics] Refers to H. L. Martensen, Den christelige Dogmatik [Christian Dogmatics] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 653), advertised as having appeared in Adresseavisen, no. 167, July 19, 1849; according to the year-end accounts for 1849 from the bookseller C. A. Reitzel, Kierkegaard had purchased a copy of the book on July 18, 1849. ― Martensen: Hans Lassen Martensen (1808–1884), Danish theologian and pastor; theology graduate, 1832; a�er a journey abroad in 1834–1836, Martensen be-

19

1849

515

came a privatdocent and university tutor whose students included Kierkegaard; he acquired the degree of licentiate in theology in 1838; lecturer at the University of Copenhagen, 1838; extraordinary professor of theology at the University of Copenhagen, 1840; honorary doctorate from the University of Kiel, 1840; member of the Royal Scientific Society, 1841; ordinary professor at the University of Copenhagen, 1850; appointed court preacher on May 16, 1845; knight of the Dannebrog, 1847. ― arranging a system of dogmatics: See the preface to Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik: “That coherent theological thought―indeed, theological speculation―is both possible and necessary is a conviction I hope to be able maintain, even if it could eventually be demonstrated that my own work was flawed” (p. 11). Martensen uses the term “dogmatic system” at various points, e.g., in § 3, p. 7. ― system: Refers to Kierkegaard’s earlier polemic, not only against the particular philosophical system developed by G.W.F. Hegel in his Encyclopedia of the Philosophical Sciences, but also more generally against Hegelianism, including the a�empts by J. L. Heiberg and Rasmus Nielsen to construct an all-encompassing philosophical system; see, e.g., The Concept of Anxiety (CA, 51; SKS 4, 356) and Prefaces (P, 14, 65; SKS 4, 478, 525, with accompanying explanatory notes). By the term “system” or “the System” Kierkegaard thus seems to refer generally to a philosophical a�empt to understand and explain the world as a whole with the help of abstract logical categories or discursive thinking; at times the term seems to be used as a synonym for objective knowledge. Kierkegaard sets forth his most comprehensive polemic against “the System” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript (see, e.g., CUP 1, 13–17, 106–125; SKS 7, 22–26, 103–120). here in this country: we are all Xns] → 178,24. indulge in scholarship] Presumably a reference to the preface to Den christelige Dogmatik (see pp. ii–iii), where Martensen apparently makes an oblique reference to Kierkegaard: “The objections [to coherent theological thought and theological speculation] I have recently heard voiced in the name of faith have been no more able to cause

22 23

516

24

151m

1

151

29

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 14–16

me to abandon this any more than has negative speculation. From a psychological point of view it is certainly completely explicable that nowadays there are many people who are suspicious of all scholarly-scientific treatment of faith and who think that scholarship and science are the sole property of freethinkers and paganism. Of course, at all times it is true that not science, but faith, is the one thing needful for all of us … But in recent times, when it has begun to become emphasized as a sort of dogma that the believer can have no interest whatever in seeking a coherent knowledge of that which is the highest thing for him; that the believer would not wish to involve himself with any speculation concerning the Christian truths because all speculation is cosmic―i.e., worldly and pagan; that the believer must regard the concept of a science of faith as a self-contradiction that abolishes true Christianity: then I confess that even when I have heard or seen such propositions put forth in brilliantly paradoxical fashion, I have found them so far from being convincing that I can only see that they contain a great misunderstanding, or, be�er, an ancient error.” Martensen goes on to define dogmatics as follows: “Dogmatics is the scientific presentation and justification of the doctrines of the Christian faith in their internal coherence” (§ 1, p. 3; see also § 3, pp. 4–7 and § 34, p. 80). the point in the system at which the doctrine of angels is to be situated] See Martensen, Den christelige Dogmatik, § 68–71, pp. 153–161. Martensen’s Dogmatics] → 151,19. Speculation can comprehend everything] See § 33, p. 79 in Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), where Martensen states: “It is thus the task of dogmatics to present the Christian view as a coherent doctrinal concept. Dogmatic comprehending is, if anything, an explicative comprehending, a development of that which is given in intuition, a development of its internal coherence. But the explicative comprehending contains within itself the tendency toward the speculative comprehending that does not merely remain at the point of presenting the coherence within the given, but also asks about possibilities and reasons; it does not

1849

merely say Ita [Latin, “thus”], but also says Quare [Latin, “how,” “why”]. The thorough explication will be able to do nothing other than develop such antitheses of thought, such antinomies, that require mediation in the concept; for as is wri�en in Sirach’s Wisdom (33:17) [NRSV Sir 33:15] ‘the highest deeds are always two: the one against the other’; and the speculative consists precisely in grasping the opposites in the unity of the Idea.” philosophy always understands faith to be a sum of doctrinal propositions] → 152m,12. the third part of the younger Fichte’s … Die speculative Theologie, Heidelberg 1846] Refers to I. H. Fichte’s principal philosophical work, Grundzüge zum Systeme der Philosophie [Essential Features of a System of Philosophy], 3 vols. (Heidelberg, 1833–1846; ASKB 502–503 and 509); the reference here is to the third volume, Die speculative Theologie oder allgemeine Religionslehre [Speculative Theology or General Doctrine of Religion]. ― the younger Fichte: Immanuel Hermann Fichte (1796–1879), German philosopher, son of J. G. Fichte, thus o�en referred to as “Fichte the younger”; from 1836, extraordinary professor, and from 1840, ordinary professor at the University of Bonn; 1842–1863, professor at Tübingen. Kierkegaard owned a number of his works (see ASKB 501–511 and 877–911). a dogmatician sits and arranges a system] → 151,19. God knows whether faith is to be found in the world] See Lk 18:8. I have a marked a passage on p. 178 in my copy] Kierkegaard’s copy of Fichte’s Grundzüge zum Systeme der Philosophie (→ 151,33) has been lost, but in entry NB:74 (KJN 4,) he refers to the third volume, Die speculative Theologie oder allgemeine Religionslehre, “p. 178, 14 lines from the bo�om,” which reads: “the Christian concept of God, incidentally freed from all dogmatic assumptions and forms.” cited in Journal NB, p. 125] See the preceding note. Now we have had this talk of system and scientific scholarship] Refers to the contemporary discussions of methodology, speculative philosophy,

31 33

4

152

5 1

152m

10

8

152

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 16

9 11

13 16 17

the formation of a system, science, and scholarliness; see, e.g., F. C. Sibbern, Logik som Tankelære fra en intelligent Iag�agelses Standpunct og i analytisk-genetisk Fremstilling [Logic as a Doctrine of Thinking, from the Point of View of an Intelligent Observer and in an Analytic-Genetic Presentation] (Copenhagen, 1835), esp. chap. 5 (§ 167–179), “Om videnskabelig Fremstilling i Almindelighed og Beskrivelse, Definition, Inddeling og Læresætning i Særdeleshed” [On Scholarly Presentations Generally and on Description, Definition, Subdivision, and Doctrine in Particular], pp. 353– 371, and F. C. Sibbern, Om Philosophiens Begreb, Natur og Væsen. En Fremstilling af Philosophiens Propædeutik [On the Concept, Nature, and Essence of Philosophy: A Presentation of the Propaedeutic of Philosophy] (Copenhagen, 1843), exp. § 7, “Philosophy is c) scholarly-scientific knowledge. On scientific knowledge and scholarliness in general,” pp. 22–24, and § 19, “Philosophy’s Emergence in c) a philosophical system,” pp. 71– 80. ― system: → 151,19. finally the system arrives] Refers to H. L. Martensen, Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19). my pseudonym Joh. Climacus] i.e., Johannes Climacus, the pseudonymous author of Philosophical Fragments (1844) and Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846). The name Climacus is presumably a reference to the Greek theologian and monk Johannes Klimax (Latin, “Climacus”), (ca. 525–616), who lived as a hermit on Mount Sinai for forty years and was the author of the work Κλίµαξ τοῦ πα αδείσου (in Latin, Scala paradisi, [Ladder of Paradise]), thus the source of his surname. See also the more detailed note in SKS K4, 197. Martensen’s Dogmatics] → 151,19. it is divided into §§s] Den christelige Dogmatik is divided into 291 sections. Mynster] Jakob Peter Mynster (1775–1854), Danish pastor, writer, and politician, from 1811 permanent curate at Vor Frue Kirke (Church of Our Lady) in Copenhagen. From 1826, he was court chaplain and from 1828, royal confessor as well as court chaplain and chaplain at Christiansborg Palace Chapel. In 1834, he was appointed bishop of the diocese of Zealand. As bishop of Zealand,

1849

517

Mynster was the primate of the Danish Church and the king’s personal counselor; during the period 1835–1846, he was a member of the Advisory Assembly of Estates in Roskilde, where he was very influential; and in 1848–1849 he was a member of the constitutional assembly. Mynster had a seat in a great many governing organs and was the prime mover behind various key ecclesiastical publications, including the authorized Danish translation of the New Testament that appeared in 1819, the Udkast til en Alterbog og et Kirke–Ritual for Danmark [Dra� for a Service Book and Church Ritual for Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1839), and the authorized Tillæg til den evangelisk-christelige Psalmebog [Supplement to the Evangelical Christian Hymnal] (Copenhagen, 1845). Mynster is almost the person cited most frequently, and as―a dogmatist] Refers to the fact that Martensen four times cites Mynster’s Om Begrebet af den christelige Dogmatik [On the Concept of Christian Dogmatics] (Copenhagen, 1831), in Mynster’s Blandede Skrivter [Miscellaneous Writings], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1852–1853; ASKB 358–363), vol. 1, pp. 37–80; see the notes in Den christelige Dogmatik, pp. 3, 29, 263, 309. Martensen also refers to Mynster’s essays “Bidrag til Læren om Drivterne” [Contribution to the Doctrine of Instincts] from 1827, in Blandede Skrivter, vol. 1, pp. 149–201, and “Om Justinus Martyrs Brug af vore Evangelier” [On Justin Martyr’s Use of Our Gospels] in Videnskabelige Forhandlinger ved Siællands Sti�s Landemode [Scholarly Proceedings at the Assembly of the Zealand Diocese], ed. P. H. Mønster and C. F. Gutfeldt, first issue (Copenhagen, 1811), pp. 126–167, which appeared in vol. 1 (Copenhagen, 1812); also appeared in German in Mynster’s Kleine theologische Schri�en [Minor Theological Writings] (Copenhagen, 1825), pp. 1–48. See the notes in Den christelige Dogmatik, pp. 251 and 302. In addition to this, Martensen also refers to Mynster in the text itself; see, e.g., p. 12. And at one time it was Mynster whom “the system” was supposed to overthrow] Refers to the debate about G.W.F. Hegel’s doctrine of the suspension of the principle of contradiction, in which J. L. Heiberg and H. L. Martensen were

17

18

518

152m

12

152

23 24

25

25

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 16–18

among those who argued for Hegel’s position in opposition to J. P. Mynster’s (→ 152,17) objections; see Mynster’s article “Rationalisme. Supranaturalisme” [Rationalism, Supernaturalism] in Tidsskri� for Li�eratur og Kritik [Journal for Literature and Criticism], vol. 1 (Copenhagen, 1839), pp. 249–268, and the reactions to this by Heiberg in “En logisk Bemærkning i Anledning af H.H. Hr. Biskop Dr. Mynsters A�andling om Rationalisme og Supranaturalisme” [A Logical Remark on the Occasion of His Highness Mr. Bishop Dr. Mynster’s Essay on Rationalism and Supernaturalism] and from Martensen in “Rationalisme, Supranaturalisme og principium exclusi medii (I Anledning af H.H. Biskop Mynsters A�andling herom)” [Rationalism, Supernaturalism, and the Principle of the Excluded Middle (on the Occasion of His Highness Bishop Mynster’s Essay on the Subject], both published in Tidsskri� for Li�eratur og Kritik, vol. 1, pp. 441–456 and 456–473, respectively; plus Mynster’s rejoinder in “Om de logiske Principper” [On Logical Principles] in Tidsskri� for Li�eratur og Kritik, vol. 7 (Copenhagen, 1842), pp. 325–352. As a result of this debate, Mynster came to be generally regarded as an anti-Hegelian; see the anonymous article “Mynster og Hegelianerne” [Mynster and the Hegelians] in Dagen [The Day], no. 64, March 16, 1841 (no pagination). Kierkegaard refers to the Hegelians’ critique of Mynster in Concluding Unscientific Postscript (CUP 1, 304–305; SKS 7, 277). Martensen’s Dogmatics] → 151,19. the pseudonym, Anti-Climacus] → 147,3 and → 147,4. the halt] See the note appended to “The Accounting” in On My Work as an Author (→ 147,1) (PV, 6n; SKS 13, 12n). Awakening is the final thing] Refers both to the subtitle of The Sickness unto Death: A Christian Exposition for Edification and Awakening (→ 147,3) and to the subtitle “For Awakening and Inward Appropriation” to part 1, “Come unto Me, All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden,” of Practice in Christianity (→ 147,4). it is too lo�y for me personally … a poet] → 152,24.

1849

in or for the sake of edification and awakening] → 152,25. the speculative] → 151,29. the scholarly] → 151,23 and → 152,8. Martensen … not relate to Xnty via the imagination] Refers to Martensen’s, Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), where he states that “the essential difference between these spheres [philosophy and art] and the religious is that the speculative and aesthetic relation to God is only a relation at secondhand, a relation through an idea, through a thought and image, whereas the religious relation to God is an existential relation.… Thus while the heroes of art and scholarship only have God in the mirror image of thought and imagination, the pious person has God in his existence” (pp. 8–9). Furthermore, “Thus there are philosophers, poets, painters, sculptors, who have depicted Christian notions with great plasticity, without themselves possessing these notions in a religious way, because they have related to them only through the medium of thought and imagination” (p. 14). have great honor and respect, have a high position] → 151,19. philosopher] Variant: first wri�en “Dial”, which are the first four le�ers of the Danish word for “dialectician.” expose myself to mockery and endure it] Refers to the fact that Kierkegaard identified P. L. Møller with Corsaren [The Corsair] and then requested that he become the object of satire in the pages of Corsaren because he could not accept being the only Danish author who had not yet been abused by the paper, but only praised by it; see the article “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner,” which appeared under the pseudonym Frater Taciturnus in Fædrelandet [The Fatherland], on December 27, 1845, no. 2078, cols. 16653–16658 (COR, 38–46; SV2 13, 459–467). Corsaren obliged by carrying a series of satirical articles about, allusions to, and caricatures of Kierkegaard (→ 165,13). The first of these appeared on January 2, 1846 (no. 276), and others appeared at regular intervals until July 17, 1846 (no. 304). The teasing continued a�er M. A. Goldschmidt’s departure as editor (→ 165,13), and

32

152

4

153

4 7

13 15

20

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 18–22

21

153

27 30 30 31

continued until February 16, 1849 (no. 439). A�er the second Corsaren article, which appeared on January 9, 1846 (no. 277), Kierkegaard responded, once again under the alias of Frater Taciturnus (→ 205,3), in Fædrelandet, January 10, 1846 (no. 9, cols. 65–68), with “The Dialectical Result of a Literary Police Action” (COR, 47–50; SV2 13, 468–471). I have had the advantage of economic independence] Kierkegaard’s father died in 1838, leaving an estate―inherited by Søren Kierkegaard and his brother Peter Christian―which in 1839 was reckoned at 125,000 rix-dollars (see F. Brandt and E. Thorkelin, Søren Kierkegaard og pengene [Søren Kierkegaard and Money], 2nd ed. [Copenhagen, 1993 (1935)], p. 67). Kierkegaard’s financial circumstances in the period 1846–1848 can only be determined approximately; he sold the last of his inherited stocks in early March 1847 and the last of his royal bonds in mid-December the same year (see Søren Kierkegaard og pengene, pp. 69–71). Therea�er, he had no dividend or interest income from his stocks and bonds and was forced to reduce his capital further. He felt compelled to sell the family house at Nytorv 2 (see map 2, B2–3) on December 24, 1847. The purchase price was 22,000 rix-dollars and ne�ed Kierkegaard 10,000 rix-dollars in cash plus a second mortgage for 5,000 rix-dollars; his brother Peter Christian held a first mortgage of 7,000 rix-dollars (see Søren Kierkegaard og pengene, pp. 83–85). Kierkegaard invested some of the cash he received from the sale of the house in shares and royal bonds. The bond purchase turned out to be unfortunate because the war that began later in 1848 caused the bond market to fall, costing Kierkegaard 700 rix-dollars. He does not seem to have lost money on the shares, however; see entry NB7:114 (KJN 5, 201– 202), and Søren Kierkegaard og pengene, pp. 86–90. the capital] Copenhagen. Mynster] → 152,17. Martensen] → 151,19. I am withdrawing and am choosing a lesser stage] → 206,9. ― withdrawing: Variant: first wri�en “withdrawing.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence.

1849

519

done his 7 years’ service] Kierkegaard generally dated his work as an author from the publication of Either/Or, which appeared on February 20, 1843, but had been wri�en between October 1841 and January 1843; see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Enten ― Eller, SKS K2–3, 58. ― 7 years’ service: See Gen 29:18–20. when I was 29 years old] i.e., a�er May 5, 1842, when Kierkegaard was working on Either/Or. not communicate poetically … a pointless addition] i.e., not publish The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1).

33

1

154

The way in which “the people” … John, chaps. 5, 6, 7, 8] See Jn 5–8. chap. 7, v. 12 and 13: “and there was much murmuring … no man spake openly of him for fear of the Jews”] Slightly altered from Jn 7:12–13; Kierkegaard’s emphasis. original text] i.e., the Greek text. From the ASKB it can be seen that Kierkegaard owned six editions of the New Testament in Greek (ASKB 14– 19 and U 86); here Kierkegaard refers to Novum Testamentum graece, ed. J.A.H. Ti�mann, stereotype ed. by A. Hahn (Leipzig, 1828; ASKB 19).

5

154

a dogmatic system] Presumably an allusion to H. L. Martensen, Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19). comprehending the faith] → 151,29. See also § 2 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 3.

16

that Lichtenberg has collected … “women’s writing.”] Refers to “Humoristische Aufsätze” [Humorous Essays], no. 1, “Charakteristik der Dienstboten für Dichter,” [Sketch of Domestic Servants for Writers], section B, “weibliche” [feminine], in G. C. Lichtenberg’s Ideen, Maximen und Einfälle. Nebst dessen Charakteristik [G. C. Lichtenberg’s Ideas, Maxims, and Notions: With a Description of Him], ed. G. Jördens, vol. 1, 2nd ed. (Leipzig, 1831 [1827]; ASKB 1773), and vol. 2, 1st ed. (Leipzig, 1830; ASKB 1774), pp. 10–19, esp. pp. 13–19. ― Lichtenberg: Georg Christoph Lichtenberg (1742–1799), German satirist and physicist, who from 1769 was extraordinary professor at Gö�ingen and from 1775 ordinary professor at the same university. As an author he is

37

35

9

13

154

25

154

520

155

155

1

14

14

17

18

22

28

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 22–26

especially known for his wi�y and satirical attacks on the tendency toward sentimentality during the “Sturm und Drang” period. Berlingske Tidende … indicating salary, etc.] Cited from a classified advertisement in Berlingske Tidende [Berling’s Times], no. 173, “Wednesday morning, July 25,” 1849, with several minor changes. ― Berlingske Tidende: Den Berlingske politiske og Avertissements-Tidende [Berling’s Political and Advertisement Times, generally referred to as Berlingske Tidende], founded 1748; starting in January 1845, it appeared twice a day, carrying political material, news, reviews, business information, a literary supplement, and advertisements. Until 1848, the paper had a royal monopoly on publishing political news. In Kierkegaard’s day Berlingske Tidende and Adresseavisen were the only newspapers permi�ed to accept paid advertising. this Mynsterian notion: Peace] It has not been possible to identify specifically what is being referred to, but see J. P. Mynster’s (→ 152,17) sermon for Pentecost in 1848 (→ 179,18). which has now been adopted by Martensen] It has not been possible to identify specifically what is being referred to. ― Martensen: → 151,19. guarantees oneself one of the most respected positions in society] On J. P. Mynster’s respected positions, → 152,17; on H. L. Martensen’s respected positions, → 151,19. the prospect of an even more respectable one] Presumably refers to the fact that Martensen had the prospect of being named ordinary professor (a position to which he was appointed in 1850) and perhaps also to the fact that he had good prospects of becoming Mynster’s successor as bishop of Zealand (which happened in 1854). take a li�le of everything] Presumably a reference to the fact that Martensen, by citing Mynster a number of times in Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 152,17), can be said to have included a bit of the la�er’s dogmatics. Mynster’s time will soon be past] Mynster was born on November 8, 1775, and in July 1849 he was thus seventy-three years old.

1849

ne quid nimis] This adage is the Latin translation of a Greek inscription on the temple at Delphi and is known from the Roman poet Terence’s comedy Andria, act 1, v. 61, where the emancipated slave Sosia says: “nam id arbitror apprime in vita esse utile, ut ne quid nimis” (“I believe the best principle in life is nothing in excess”). See P. Terentii Afri comoediae sex [Six Comedies by Terence], ed. B.F.F. Schmieder, 2nd ed. (Halle, 1819 [1794]; ASKB 1291), p. 11. English translation is from Terence, The Woman of Andros, The Self-Tormentor, The Eunuch, trans. John Barsby, Loeb Classical Library (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2001), p. 55. in paganism … the highest maxim of life] See the preceding note. civil servants] i.e., priests who functioned as civil servants in the Danish State Church (→ 167,34). seeking first God’s kingdom] See Mt 6:33. a good call] i.e., a good pastoral call, with accompanying salary.

32

It is said that “faith” is the first thing … the basis for comprehending] Presumably a reference to § 30 in Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), p. 72, where Martensen writes: “Christian cognition is a cognition in faith, for only by means of faith can the human spirit participate in God’s wisdom. Credo ut intelligam [Latin, “I believe in order that I might understand”].” See also p. 73 and § 35, p. 81. that rebirth must come first―from this follows] Presumably a reference to § 18 in Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), p. 32, where Martensen writes: “Rebirth is to the single individual what inspiration is to the Church as a whole: the new beginning that incorporates the sense for Christ’s revelation.” See also § 30, p. 73: “only through rebirth can the human spirit, darkened by sin, be li�ed up to the stage of life and existence from which it can obtain the true view of divine and human things. But rebirth, in turn, has its expression in faith.” Martensen’s Dogmatics] → 151,19. the old sophistry of being able to talk―but not converse] Refers to sophistry, a dominant tendency in Greek philosophy in the 5th century �.�.

29

155

34 37 5

156

8

156

32

3 5

157

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 26–28 Sophists traveled throughout the country and offered instruction on a professional basis. The discipline most systematically cultivated was rhetoric, which had the goal of preparing students for political life. In opposition to the Sophists, who taught the art of talking, was Socrates, who taught the art of conversing. 158

1 3

3 5

159

159m

2

1

So now The Sickness unto Death has come out, and pseudonymously] → 147,3. publish everything at once] i.e., Three Minor Ethical-Religious Discourses (→ 146,1), The Sickness unto Death (→ 147,3), and Practice in Christianity (→ 147,4 and → 158,5). the piece about my writings] i.e., The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1). the other 3 books] i.e., the three pieces that were subsequently grouped together and published in one volume as Practice in Christianity (→ 147,4 and → 158,3). come to an agreement … The Sickness unto Death] → 147,3. ― Luno: i.e., Christian Peter Bianco Luno (1795–1852), printer to the royal court and proprietor of the most technically and typographically advanced printing firm in Copenhagen at the time. With the exception of Two Minor Ethical-Religious Discourses (→ 150,7), which was produced by Louis Klein, all of Kierkegaard’s books were printed at Bianco Luno’s Printing House. Councillor of State Olsen has died] Terkild or Terkel Olsen (1784–1849), head of the office of accounting in the government finance department, father of Regine Olsen, subsequently Regine Schlegel (→ 159m,2). The obituary for him in Adresseavisen, no. 150, June 29, 1849, reads: “On the night between 25th and 26th of this month, the Lord called away my beloved husband a�er 40 years of marriage, the father of my 6 children, Terkild Olsen, Councillor of State and Knight of the Dannebrog. [signed] Regine Olsen, née Malling.” ― Councillor of State: In the Danish system of rank and precedence (established by decrees of 1746 and 1808, plus later amendments) there were nine classes, each further subdivided into numerical subclasses. Specific titles

1849

521

and forms of address were assigned to persons in various official positions. An “actual” (as opposed to “titular”) councillor of state was in the third subclass of the third class. See “Titulaturer til Rangspersoner i alfabetisk Orden” [Titles of Persons of Rank, Listed in Alphabetical Order], in C. Bartholin, Almindelig Brev- og Formularbog [Universal Book of Le�ers and Formulae], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1844; ASKB 933), vol. 1, pp. 49–56. Terkild Olsen had been granted the title “actual councillor of state” on June 28, 1840. she] i.e., Regine Olsen (1822–1904), daughter of Regina Frederikke Olsen (née Malling) and Terkild Olsen (→ 159m,1), who had been engaged to Kierkegaard from September 10, 1840 (→ 159m,9) until October 12, 1841 (→ 218,25), subsequently became engaged to J. F. Schlegel (→ 159,31) on August 28, 1843, and married him on November 3, 1847. her relationship with me] Kierkegaard provided a retrospective account of his relationship to Regine Olsen in Notebook 15, titled “My Relationship to ‘Her.’ Aug. 24th 49. somewhat poetical.” (KJN 3, 429–445). It is also as if] Variant: “is also” changed from “will also be”; “as if” is added. Governance] i.e., God’s guidance or Providence. from Aug. 9 to Sept. 10] See Notebook 15 (→ 159m,4), where Kierkegaard writes, “the period from 9 Aug into September could be called the period during which I approached her” (KJN 3, 431). He then states that on September 8, 1840, he encountered Regine on the street, walked home with her, and said: “It’s you I’m searching for, you I’ve been seeking for two years,” (KJN 3, 431). Immediately therea�er Kierkegaard sought out Councillor of State Olsen, who said neither yes nor no. Kierkegaard asked to speak with Regine, a conversation that took place on September 10. Regine said yes (see KJN 3, 432). the anniversary of my father’s death] August 9, 1838; see journal entry DD:126 (KJN 1, 249). Michael Pedersen Kierkegaard (1756–1838) received a license as a hosier in 1780, and eight years later he was granted a license as an importer and wholesaler of colonial goods (sugar, coffee, molasses, etc.). He retired at age forty in

2

4

6 7 9

12

159m

522

14

159

12 16 23

24

26

31

160

3

6

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 28–32

possession of a considerable fortune; as the years passed, he added to his wealth through interest and investment income. A�er the death of his first wife, he married Ane Lund on April 26, 1797; they had seven children together, of whom Søren was the youngest. M. P. Kierkegaard se�led at 9 Østergade in 1805 (see map 2, C2), and lived there until 1809, when he bought the house at 2 Nytorv (see map 2, B2), where he lived until his death. the 10th of Sept. is of course the day of the engagement] → 159m,9. “her”] i.e., Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). her marriage] to J. F. Schlegel (→ 159m,2). The Sunday a�er the Councillor of State’s death] i.e., July 1, 1849; Councillor of State Terkild Olsen died on the night between June 25 and June 26 (→ 159m,1). Church of the Holy Ghost] i.e., today’s Helligåndskirken (Church of the Holy Spirit), then known as Helliggeistes-Kirke (Church of the Holy Ghost), situated at the corner of Vimmelska�et and Lille Helliggeist Stræde in Copenhagen (see map 2, BN–C2); today the street names have changed, so that the church is at the corner of Amagertorv and Niels Hemmingsens Gade. According to Adresseavisen, no. 151, June 30, 1849, “Hr. Licent[iate] Kolthoff” (→ 160,16), preached at the 10 A.M. service on July 1, 1849. she le� immed. following the sermon] It was a widespread custom that those who had not been to confession and were not going to take communion would leave the church a�er the sermon or the hymn following the sermon. Schlegel] Johan Frederik Schlegel (1817–1896), Danish jurist and civil servant; university student, 1833; bachelor of law, 1838; worked for a time as a private tutor in the Olsen household and developed tender feelings for Regine. In 1842, he started as an intern in the government’s Office of Customs and Commerce, becoming a head clerk there in 1847. He married Regine Olsen on November 3, 1847 (→ 159m,2). all that trouble at the printer’s just then] i.e., trouble with the printer Bianco Luno (→ 159,2) over the production of The Sickness unto Death. her father was the only person … involve myself] → 201,5.

1849

The next time Kolthoff preached] According to the list of preachers that was published in Adresseavisen each Saturday, Kolthoff preached again in Church of the Holy Ghost at the Sunday morning service on July 22, 1849 (see no. 169, July 21, 1849). Ernst Vilhelm Kolthoff (1809–1890), Danish theologian and priest; theology graduate, 1830; licentiate in theology, 1834. A�er a stay in Germany, Kolthoff lectured as a privatdocent at the University of Copenhagen; served as second curate at the Church of Our Lady in Copenhagen, 1837–1843, then as second curate at Holmens Church in Copenhagen, 1843–1845, and thereafter as second curate at Church of the Holy Ghost; from 1856 he was parish priest at that church.

16

Councillor of State Olsen] → 159m,1. “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself”] → 147,4.

21

Tersteegen ... ein Mortificiren und Verlaügnen erfordern?] Cited from § 24 in G. Tersteegen’s observation “Von dem Unterschied und Fortgang in der Go�seligkeit” [On the Differences and Progress in Godliness], in Auswahl aus Gerhard Tersteegen’s Schri�en, nebst dem Leben desselben [Selections from the Writings of Gerhard Tersteegen, Including His Biography], ed. G. Rapp (Essen, 1841; ASKB 729), pp. 442–444; p. 443. The addition “the mystics” is Kierkegaard’s. ― Tersteegen: Gerhard Tersteegen (1697–1769), German Reformed mystic, hymn writer, and lay preacher.

26

160

Then the professor … takes away the “paradox”] Refers to H. L. Martensen’s preface to his Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), p. iii (→ 151,23). a system] → 151,19. the professor would straightaway have the system completed] Refers to H. L. Martensen, Den christelige Dogmatik. what Leporello is in relation to a Don Giovanni] Leporello is Don Giovanni’s servant in Mozart’s opera Don Giovanni (1787), with libre�o by da Ponte. See journal entry DD:29, from July 1837, where Kierkegaard writes: “Thank you, Lichtenberg, Thanks! for saying there is nothing

6

161

160

22

10 13

19

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 32–37 more tiresome than talking with a so-called man of le�ers in science who hasn’t done any thinking himself yet knows 1000 historic-literary particulars,” and in the margin adds: “they keep a list just like Leporello, but what they miss, yes, the whole point; while D. Juan seduces and indulges―Leporello notes down time, place, and the girl’s description” (KJN 1, 222; see the accompanying explanatory note). Thus Leporello keeps a list of all Don Juan’s mistresses: 120 in Italy, a score or so in Germany, several in France, and 1,003 in Spain. 161

33

there is no intuition of the imagination … paganism’s god-images] Refers to H. L. Martensen’s understanding of “intuition of the imagination” in Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 153,7). See also Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), pp. 13–14.

162

4

Martensen] → 151,19. continual talk about Kant, Hegel, Schelling] Refers to the fact that in his Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), H. L. Martensen o�en mentions and refers to Immanuel Kant, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel, and Schelling. In Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik, see: p. 13 (Hegel), p. 16 (Kant), p. 82 (Schelling and Hegel), p. 84 (Hegel), p. 86 (Schelling and Hegel), p. 100 (Schelling and Hegel), p. 110n (Kant), p. 127 (Hegel), p. 189 (Hegel and Kant), p. 192 (Schelling and Hegel), p. 197 (Hegel), p. 206 (Kant), p. 207 (Schelling and Kant), p. 208 (Hegel), p. 224 (Schelling), p. 225 (Schelling), p. 232 (Schelling), p. 237 (Schelling), p. 268 (Hegel and Schelling), p. 278 (Hegel), p. 291 (Schelling), p. 298 (Schelling and Hegel), p. 338 (Kant), and p. 428 (Kant). ― Schelling: Friedrich Wilhelm Joseph Schelling (1775–1854), German philosopher; studied philosophy and theology in Tübingen together with Hegel; from 1798, extraordinary professor at Jena; from 1803, professor at Würzburg; and from 1806, general secretary of the Academy of Painting and Sculpture in Munich. Therea�er he was marginalized by Hegel, but in 1827 he was appointed professor at Munich and in 1841 was called from there to Berlin in order to counteract Le� Hegelianism. He retired in 1846. Schelling delivered a much-antici-

4

1849

523

pated lecture series in Berlin from November 15, 1841, through March 18, 1842. Kierkegaard was among the many auditors (who included Jacob Burckhardt, Alexander von Humboldt, Friedrich Engels, and Mikhail Bakunin). Kierkegaard apparently stopped a�ending Schelling’s lectures in early February 1842; see Kierkegaard’s lecture notes, Notebook 11 in KJN 3, 301–366, plus the “Critical Account of the Text of Notebook 11” and the accompanying explanatory notes in KJN 3, 657–713, esp. 665–679. the Socratic notion that sin is ignorance] Alludes to Socrates’ principle that “virtue is knowledge,” which is developed in several of Plato’s dialogues, e.g., Protagoras (351e–357e). Here Socrates asserts that the person who has true knowledge cannot let it be displaced by the passions and the like, and that the person who chooses the wrong course of action merely expresses his ignorance (see Udvalgte Dialoger af Platon [Selected Dialogues of Plato], trans. C. J. Heise, 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1830–1838; ASKB 1164–1166), vol. 2 (1831), pp. 195–209. Kierkegaard expressed in numerous places his understanding that this Socratic view meant that “sin is ignorance”; see On the Concept of Irony (CI, 211; SKS 1, 255); Philosophical Fragments (PF, 50n; SKS 4, 254n); Concluding Unscientific Postscript (CUP 1, 339; SKS 7, 310); and especially the chapter titled “The Socratic Definition of Sin” in the second part of The Sickness unto Death (SUD, 87–96; SKS 11, 201–208), → 147,3). Paul says somewhere … acted in ignorance] Reference to 1 Tim 1:13.

21

M.] H. L. Martensen (→ 151,19). a paragraph granted to a conceptual definition] → 152,16. the doctrine on angels] i.e., the section titled “Mennesket og Englene” [Human Beings and Angels], § 68–71, pp. 153–161 (→ 151,24), in Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19). the doctrine on the Father] A major section, consisting § 59–124, in Den christelige Dogmatik, pp. 137–279. § 93] In Den christelige Dogmatik, pp. 204–211.

25

162

22

26 29

30

30

162

524

31

32 32

163

1

163

13

15

17

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 37–41

We simply appeal to the authority of Scripture] Refers to § 69 (→ 162,29) in Den christelige Dogmatik, pp. 157–158, where Martensen writes: “When, against this assertion [that there is no third category of spiritual beings, in addition to angels and spirits―see, e.g., Acts 23:8], we posit the authority of Scripture, we add that no speculation will be capable of deciding the extent to which there could be powers in Creation who possess in themselves the sort of spirituality that would enable them, with personal consciousness, to serve or to oppose the Creator. Speculation can neither confirm nor deny anything concerning this, but does well in adhering to the words of the poet: ‘There is more between heaven and earth, than are dreamt of in philosophy.’” In the midst of speculation] See the preceding note. On speculation, → 151,29. the system] → 151,19. And then in § 93, p. 210, he says: “Inasmuch as we … the authority of biblical tradition] Cited, with minor orthographic variations, from § 93 (→ 162,30) in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 210. old-time galleries] In Kierkegaard’s day, Copenhagen churches had closed galleries above the side aisles of the nave, e.g., in Trinity and Holmens Churches; the la�er church in fact had three stories of galleries. The Church of Our Lady and Church of the Holy Ghost were more open. See the illustrations in Peter Tudvad, Kierkegaards København [Kierkegaard’s Copenhagen] (Copenhagen, 2004), pp. 401, 408, 413. closed pews were indeed] Variant: immediately preceding “indeed” the word “almost” has been deleted. But now everything is a parlor; that is how they build churches nowadays] Presumably refers to the two Copenhagen churches, Christiansborg Palace Church, dedicated in 1826, and the Church of Our Lady, dedicated in 1829, both designed in neoclassical style by the architect C. F. Hansen. See the illustrations in Peter Tudvad, Kierkegaards København, pp. 425, 437; see also illustration 17 in SKS K10, 173.

1849

in a journal: every genius … questions of principle] Presumably a reference to the second lecture, “The Communication of Knowledge and Capability,” in “The Dialectic of Ethical and Ethical-Religious Communication,” which according to Kierkegaard was wri�en in 1847, and in any event prior to the publication of Christian Discourses on April 25, 1848 (see Pap. VIII 2 B 79), where Kierkegaard writes, “the primitive existence always contains a revisiting of what is fundamental. This can be seen most clearly in the primitive genius. What is the significance of a primitive genius? It is not so much that he brings forth something absolutely new, for there is nothing new under the sun, as that he revisits what is universally human, the fundamental questions. This is the profoundest sort of honesty. And to be entirely lacking in primitivity (and thus in this revisiting), to take everything quite simply as accepted customary usages, permi�ing the fact that it is customary usage to suffice, thus to evade the responsibility for the fact that one is doing the same thing: is dishonesty” (Pap. VIII 2 B 89, p. 188; see also VIII 2 B 82,6).

33

163

blood witnesses] i.e., martyrs. the ideal] i.e., of Christ as exemplar. bishop... excellency] According to the system of rank and precedence (→ 159m,1), the title “excellency” was reserved for persons in the first rank class, e.g., the country’s bishops, excepting Bishop of Zealand J. P. Mynster (→ 152,17), who, according to the system of rank and preference was ranked as number 13 in the first class and was therefore the only bishop with the title “eminence.”

7

164

M.] H. L. Martensen (→ 151,19). At the end of the preface to his Dogmatics … within themselves is politics] See the preface (151,16) to Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19). court chaplain … knight] → 151,19. being celebrated at social gatherings] In his memoir, Af mit Levnet [From My Life], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1882–1883), vol. 2 (1883), p. 86, Martensen writes: “The church was always full as, thank God, it has remained to this day, and

17

9 12

17

24 24

164

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 41–43

31

37

165

1

3

165

6

among the listeners were both men and women who were among the noblest and most cultured people in the capital. Thus among my listeners were Mynster and A. S. Ørsted.” He notes in addition: “In becoming court chaplain, I also came into a relationship with a social circle with which I had not previously had contact” (vol. 2, p. 99), following which he relates how he regularly participated in King Christian VIII’s Sunday court dinners along with artists and scholars. On the dowager queen Marie Sophie Frederike, Martensen notes: “In obedience to the king’s command, along with the rest of the court clergy I had to take turns preaching for her in her chambers. Having been invited or permi�ed to a�end, a group of people gathered in these chambers at Amalienborg Palace, many of whom otherwise never went to church, but who regarded it as great good fortune to have access to this religious service because following the service the queen held court and usually spoke with each of them” (p. 112). having Anti-Climacus say that Xndom … is an illusion] Refers to the second part of The Sickness unto Death, where Anti-Climacus (→ 147,3) writes in “the Appendix to A”: “But it must be said, and as unreservedly as possible, that so-called Christendom (in which all, by the millions, are simply Christians, so that there are as many, exactly as many, Christians as there are people) is not merely a wretched edition of Christianity … but it is an abuse of it, it is taking Christianity in vain” (SUD, p. 102; SKS 11, 214). Mynster] → 152,17. the Three Godly Discourses … are from the 5th of May 49] Refers to the fact that the preface to The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses (→ 149,8) is dated “May 5th 1849,” (WA, 3; SKS 11, 9); the discourses were probably wri�en in March and April 1849. The Sick. unto Death is from mid-48] The Sickness unto Death (→ 147,3) was probably wri�en in the period from January through ca. mid-May 1848. of course the author … without an official position … did not seem to want one] In the auto-

1849

525

biographical conclusion of chap. 1 of the first section of the second part of Concluding Unscientific Postscript, Johannes Climacus provides a lively description of how, while he sat and smoked a cigar on Sunday a�ernoon at a pastry shop in Frederiksberg Gardens, he had a sudden notion to make an a�empt at being an author (see CUP 1, 185–187; SKS 7, 170–172). See also the appendix, “An Understanding with the Reader,” where Climacus calls himself “a self-employed humorist” (CUP 1, 617; SKS 7, 560). no §§-importance] Refers to the fact that Concluding Unscientific Postscript is not like H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), which is constructed in numbered sections (“§§”) (→ 152,16). At a number of points, however, the Postscript is in fact divided into sections marked by the § symbol; see the table of contents (CUP 1, v–x; SKS 7, 13–16). The book came out in Denmark] Concluding Unscientific Postscript was published on February 27, 1846, by C. A. Reitzel, the university bookseller in Copenhagen. Nowhere was it mentioned] Concluding Unscientific Postscript was reviewed by “Prosper naturalis de molinasky” (i.e., P. L. Møller) in Kjøbenhavnsposten [Copenhagen Post], nos. 73 and 74, March 27 and 28, 1846, and by P. W. Christensen in “Troen og Dialektiken. Imod S. Kierkegaard” [Faith and Dialectic: Against S. Kierkegaard] in Dansk Kirketidende, March 29, 1846, vol. 1, no. 29, cols. 475–482); the Postscript and was rebu�ed by the same P. W. Christensen in “Troens Dialektik” [The Dialectic of Faith] in Dansk Kirketidende, September 20, 1846, vol. 1, no. 52, cols. 841–856, and was mentioned in the anonymous articles “Afslu�ende uvidenskabelig E�erskrivt” [Concluding Unscientific Postscript] and “Kjøbenhavnspostens Anmeldelse af ‘afslu�ende uvidenskabelig E�erskrivt’” [Review of Concluding Unscientific Postscript in Kjøbenhavnsposten] in Nyt A�enblad [New Evening Newspaper] (publisher and editor H. Trojel), nos. 75 and 76, March 30 and 31, 1846. See also the article “S. Kjerkegaard og hans Recensenter” [S. Kierkegaard and His Reviewers] in Den Frisindede [The Freethinker] (publisher and editor C. Rosenhoff), no. 58, May 19, 1846.

8

10

10

526

11

12

13

13

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 43

Perhaps 50 copies were sold] It is not known how many copies of Concluding Unscientific Postscript were sold upon publication. In a le�er dated August 1, 1847, Kierkegaard, citing printer Bianco Luno (→ 159,2) and book dealer C. A. Reitzel (→ 234,11) as his sources, reports that Reitzel had received 250 copies of the book in February 1846, and that as of May 4, 1847, 89 copies were le�; thus at that point 161 copies of the book must have been sold; see LD, 220; B&A 1, 173. the publication cost me ca. 400–500 rd.] The production costs for Concluding Unscientific Postscript came to 461 rix-dollars, 1 mark, and 3 shillings; see Erindringsbog for Bianco Luno. 1846 [Memorandum Book for Bianco Luno, 1846] (Archives of Bianco Luno’s Printing House, Aller Press, Copenhagen). The corrections in the first set of proofs and in the surviving ten sheets (160 pages) of the second proof were inserted by Kierkegaard’s secretary, Israel Levin; see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Afslu�ende uvidenskabelig E�erskri�, SKS K7, 77 and 85; it has not been possible to verify how much Kierkegaard paid for proofreading. ― 400–500 rd.: The rix-dollar, properly rigsbank dollar (rigsbanksdaler), was the currency introduced a�er the Danish state declared bankruptcy in 1813. A rix-dollar was divided into six marks, each of which was further divided into sixteen shillings; thus there were ninety-six shillings in a rix-dollar. Four hundred rix-dollars were considered sufficient to maintain a family for a year. A judge earned about 1,200–1,800 rix-dollars a year, while a maidservant received at most 30 rix-dollars plus board and lodging, and a qualified artisan would receive 200 rix-dollars a year plus free board and lodging from his master. A pair of shoes cost three rix-dollars, and a one-pound loaf of rye bread (the staple of the day) cost between two and four shillings. my time and effort] Kierkegaard’s work on Concluding Unscientific Postscript probably began in April or May 1845 and ended in December of the same year; see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Afslu�ende uvidenskabelig E�erskri�, SKS K7, 43–92. I was depicted in a newspaper for the rabble] Refers to Peter Klæstrup’s caricatures of

1849

Kierkegaard in Corsaren in 1846: January 2 (no. 276), January 9 (no. 277), January 16 (no. 278), January 23 (no. 279), January 30 (no. 280), March 6 (no. 285); see SKS K20, 41–44; and in 1848: January 8 (no. 381-a) and February 11 (no. 386). Corsaren was a satirical weekly founded in October 1840 by M. A. Goldschmidt (→ 205,15), who served as the paper’s actual editor until October 1846. The paper claimed to be unaffiliated with political parties and, particularly before the fall of absolutism 1848, it was labeled republican because of its criticisms both of the absolute monarch and his royal government and of the liberal opposition. The journal’s criticisms of the government led to frequent confiscations by the censor, and in 1843 Goldschmidt himself was convicted of a violation of the law regulating press freedom. Corsaren’s satirical articles were supplemented with drawings by Peter Klæstrup, which helped gain the journal a sizable readership (see the next note). In addition to scoffing at the government and the opposition, the journal poked fun at the reigning literary elite. had 3000 subscribers] In the mid-1840s, Corsaren had a press run of about three thousand copies, twice the size of the leading liberal daily Fædrelandet and only a few hundred fewer than the semi-official government Berlingske Tidende (→ 155,1). another paper … Flyveposten … continued the discussion of my trousers] It has not been possible to verify this from an inspection of FlyvePosten [The Flying Post] for the period January 1846–July 1849. ― Flyveposten: Conservative daily, founded 1845, edited until 1852 by Eduard Meyer; popular news and entertainment articles gained it a wide circulation, and in the period 1848–1850 it had about 7,000 subscribers; see Je�e D. Søllinge and Niels Thomsen, De danske aviser 1634–1989 [Danish Newspapers, 1634–1989], 3 vols. (Odense, 1988–1991), vol. 2 (1989), pp. 114– 115. ― continued the discussion of my trousers: Refers to the fact that in Peter Klæstrup’s drawings (→ 165,13), Kierkegaard’s trouser legs were o�en of uneven length, and that his trousers generally were an object of irony in Corsaren, e.g., February 27, 1846 (no. 284), May 29, 1846 (no. 297), and January 1, 1847 (no. 328).

15

15

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 44–48 165

19

Bishop Mynster] → 152,17.

165

32

with his every step, every word, “the scriptures were fulfilled.”] See Lk 4:16–30; 22:37; 24:44; see also Mt 1: 22; 2:15, 17, 23; 4:14; 8:17; 12:7; 13:35; 21:4; 26:54, 56; 27:9; Mk 14:49; 15:28; Jn 12:38; 15:25; 17:12; 18:9; 19:24, 28, 36.

166

2

Martensen] Reference to H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19). Fichte the younger] Martensen neither cites nor mentions Fichte the younger (→ 151,33) in Den christelige Dogmatik. Baader] (Benedikt) Franz (Xaver) von Baader, 1765–1841, German Catholic physician, civil servant, philosophical and theological writer; from 1826, honorary professor of philosophy and speculative theology at the University of Munich. Kierkegaard owned many of Baader’s writings (see ASKB 391–418). In Den christelige Dogmatik (p. 250) Martensen makes one reference to Franz Baader, but never cites him. Günther] Anton Günther (1783–1863), Czech, Austrian, Catholic priest, philosopher, neoscholastic; wanted to reformulate and refound the teachings of the Catholic Church on the basis of the philosophical tendencies of the period. Kierkegaard owned a number of his works (see ASKB 520–523, 869–870, 1672). Martensen neither cites nor mentions Anton Günther in Den christelige Dogmatik. constantly Schleiermacher] Friedrich Daniel Ernst Schleiermacher (1768–1834), German theologian, philosopher of religion, and classical philologist; priest in Berlin, 1796; from 1804, extraordinary professor at Halle; from 1810, professor of theology at Berlin. Kierkegaard owned a number of his works; see ASKB 238–242, 271, 769, 1158–1163; and in particular ASKB 258, Der christliche Glaube nach den Grundsätzen der evangelischen Kirche im Zusammenhange dargestellt [The Christian Faith Presented in Context, in Accordance with the Fundamental Principles of the Evangelical Church], 2 vols., 3rd. ed. (Berlin, 1835–1836 [1st ed., 1821–1822; 2nd revised ed., 1830]). In Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), Schleiermacher is introduced as fol-

2

3

3

3

1849

527

lows: “In this respect, Schleiermacher’s dogmatics represents a turning point in modern times. For whatever one thinks of the purity and profundity of the faith and knowledge expressed here, one of the great effects produced by this work has been to reawaken in many people an awareness that dogmatics has its own independent principle and does not have to take its kingdom as a fief from any externally provided philosophy” (p. 7). Schleiermacher’s Der christliche Glaube is cited on pp. 65–66, and Schleiermacher is mentioned on pp. 83, 189, 192, 197, 296, 379, and 408n; see also the next note. whom he corrects] Martensen corrects (and criticizes) Schleiermacher in Den christelige Dogmatik on pp. 11–12 (referring to J. P. Mynster, Om Begrebet af den christelige Dogmatik [On the Concept of Christian Dogmatics] [→ 152,17]); on pp. 75– 76, 110n (referring to Martensen’s own licentiate dissertation, Den menneskelige Selvbevidstheds Autonomie i vor Tids dogmatiske Theologie [The Autonomy of Human Self-Consciousness in the Dogmatic Theology of Our Time], trans. from the Latin by L. V. Petersen [Copenhagen, 1841; ASKB 651]); and on pp. 127, 161, 197, 208–209, 221, 227– 231, 322–323, 327–328, 399, 436–438, 573. Schl.] Schleiermacher. to the perennial possibility a priest has of obtaining a new position] When an ecclesiastical post was declared vacant in Departementstidenden [The Departmental Times], applications for that position had to be sent within six weeks to the bishop of the diocese; he then sent the applications, together with his own remarks, to the cultus minister (i.e., the minister for ecclesiastical and educational affairs), who then recommended to the king who ought to be appointed to the post. There were about 1,050 clerical positions in the kingdom of Denmark (→ 166,13). the nation’s almost 1000 clerical calls] According to the lists in the Geistlig Calender for Aaret 1848 [Ecclesiastical Yearbook for 1848] (Copenhagen, 1848 [went to press January 18, 1848]; ASKB 378), there were about 890 principal parishes in the kingdom of Denmark (i.e., without the duchies of Schleswig, Holstein, and Lauenburg), which em-

4

6 10

13

166

528

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 48–52

ployed about 1,050 priests, including bishops and deans; in addition to this there were about 120 personal chaplains. 166

17

25

166

166 167

30

32 3 13

27

31

Geniuses are like thunderstorms: they go against the wind] Cf. journal entry EE:158: “Like a thunderstorm, genius flies against the wind” (KJN 2, 50). a category of reflection] Variant: “category” added. Socrates loved the young] See, e.g., Plato’s Symposium, 216d, where the young and handsome Alcibiades gives his intoxicated encomium: “Notice, for instance, how Socrates is a�racted by good-looking people, and how he hangs around them, positively gaping with admiration” (Plato: The Collected Dialogues, Including the Le�ers, ed. Edith Hamilton and Huntington Cairns [Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1961], p. 568). Alcibiades then goes on to tell of his love for Socrates. Mynster] → 152,17. Bishop M.] Bishop Mynster (→ 152,17). a share of official appointments] Applications for ecclesiastical positions in the diocese of Zealand were to be sent to Bishop J. P. Mynster, who then forwarded them to the cultus minister with his recommendation (→ 166,10). Mynster thus had influence on who was appointed to a vacant position, and in this sense can be said to have handed out a “share” of appointments, thereby winning adherents for himself. the mob mocked me] Presumably a reference to the a�ack on Kierkegaard by the satirical weekly Corsaren (→ 165,13) and the consequences of this, namely, that Kierkegaard was abused on the street (→ 187,8). shackled to him … by the memory of my father] J. P. Mynster had been Kierkegaard’s father’s (→ 159m,12) confessor from 1820 until 1828. In journal entry NB2:267, Kierkegaard writes that he had been “brought up on Mynster’s sermons―by my father” (KJN 4, 240), and in journal NB28:56, he mentions that it was a tradition of his always to

1849

be present when Mynster preached (KJN 9; SKS 25, 262–264). State Church] In Denmark the evangelical Lutheran Church was the State Church, headed by the king, and with bishops, deans, and priests who were civil servants appointed by the king. The king, and in principle all Danish citizens, were bound by the Confessio Augustana (Augsburg Confession). The two treatises by Anti-Climacus (Practice in Christianity)] i.e., no. 1, “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest,” and no. 2, “Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended in Me,” in Practice in Christianity (→ 147,4). ”Friday Discourses.”] i.e., “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays,” the fourth section of Christian Discourses (1848) (CD, 247–300; SKS 10, 253–325). The concluding pseudonym is a higher one] → 152,24. The second round of pseudonymity is … the halt] → 152,24. ― second round of: Variant: added. the river Guadalquibir … plunges underground] → 147,30. a stretch that is mine, the edifying … the lower and the higher pseudonymity] → 152,24. the aesthetic] See “Part One, A,” “The Ambiguity or the Duplicity in the Entire Authorship, Whether the Author Is an Aesthetic or a Religious Author,” in The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1), where Kierkegaard immediately follows this with a note in which he lists the titles of the books in question, and writes, with respect to the first group: “1st Group (aesthetic writings): Either/Or, Fear and Trembling, Repetition, The Concept of Anxiety, Prefaces, Philosophical Fragments, Stages on Life’s Way―plus 18 Edifying Discourses published successively” (PV, 29; SV2 13, 555). See also “The Accounting” in On My Work as an Author (→ 147,1), where Kierkegaard writes, “The movement described by the authorship is from ‘the poet’―from the aesthetic, from ‘the philosopher’―from the speculative to the intimation of the most inward categories of Christianity: from

34

1

3

3 4

5 6 7

168

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 52–56

8

8

168

10 10 10

11

13

169

2

the pseudonymous Either/Or through Concluding Postscript, with my name as editor, to Discourses at the Communion on Fridays” (PV, 5–6; SKS 13, 12). that which is wri�en “for edification,”] Refers to The Sickness unto Death (→ 147,3), which bears the subtitle A Christian Psychological Exposition for Edification and Awakening (→ 152,25). that which is wri�en “for awakening.”] Refers both to The Sickness unto Death (see the preceding note) and to “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest,” (→ 147,4), which bears the subtitle “For Awakening and Inward Appropriation” (→ 152,25). Anti-Climacus] → 147,3 and → 147,4. the higher pseudonymity] → 152,24. the article “Climacus and Anti-Climacus”] Refers to a short article “Climacus and Anticlimacus. A Dialectical Invention. By Anticlimacus. Postscript,” which was wri�en on a folio sheet of paper and folded to quarto format (see Pap. X 6 B 48; → 147,3). The article, which was “wri�en in 49” (see Pap. X 6 B 46), is thought of as a postscript to a fictive book by Anti-Climacus, which would be explained in a short preface (see Pap. X 6 B 47). a new pseudonym] See the front of a cover, formed from a folio sheet folded to quarto format, on which Kierkegaard writes: “NB Aug. 1st 49. / see Journal NB12 p. 51. [i.e., entry NB12:53 in the present volume] / Anti-Climacus must remain in place as the higher pseudonymity, and therefore this article cannot be used unless it is supposed to be by a new pseudonym. That means that I myself cannot be the auth. of this article. / This was written without inspecting the piece itself, but now I see that it had never been the idea that it should have me as the auth. It is by Anti-Climacus. It can be done. But a new pseudonym is perhaps be�er” (Pap. X 6 B 45). The article is by Anti-Climacus himself … a new pseudonym would perhaps be be�er] See the preceding note. Luther’s words … Then came the sectarians and false teachers] Cited from Martin Luther’s sermon on the epistle 2 Cor 6:1–10, for the first Sunday in

1849

529

Lent, in En christelig Postille (→ 146,13) vol. 2, pp. 162–169; p. 163, col. 2, with minor variations in punctuation and orthography. well-paid, excellent livings] In provincial towns citizens had the duty of paying the priest an assessed sum called “priest money,” whereas peasants in rural parishes were to pay the priest a certain percentage of their agricultural yield, especially grain, known as a tithe. The size of these payments was established by the ministry for church and educational affairs. On holy days members of the congregation could also pay their priest a voluntary sum of money called an “offering.” Priests had a certain amount of additional income called “perquisites,” i.e., fees for performing such clerical acts as weddings, baptisms, and funerals. In provincial towns, there was also an additional sum for a housing allowance, whereas rural priests had income from the fields and farms a�ached to their call. In general, priests in Copenhagen were be�er off than those in the provinces; see an anonymous article, “Bemærkning om de kjøbenhavnske Præsters Forhold til Menigheden” [Observation on the Relation of Copenhagen Priests to the Congregation], in Politivennen [Friend of the Police], no. 1313, February 27, 1841, p. 130: “Compared with the rest of the country’s priests, a large portion of the priests of Copenhagen have generous incomes and live extremely well.”

29

169

Bishop Mynster] → 152,17. excellency] → 164,12. to preach in the streets―but didn’t Xt do this] See Martin Luther’s sermon on the epistle Acts 6:8–14 and 7:54–59 for the day a�er Christmas, in En christelig Postille (→ 146,13), vol. 2, pp. 64–70; p. 66, where he speaks in opposition to the tendency of the times (according to which everyone wants to build his own chapel or altar), for this is to build on works: “To get rid of an error of this sort, it would even be a good thing if people once and for all made all the world’s churches into rubble and preached in ordinary houses or out in the open, prayed there, baptized there, and did all their Christian duties.” Luther adds:

2

172

6 6

530

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 56–60

“Christ preached for three years, though only for three days in the temple of Jerusalem. The other days he preached in Jewish schools, in the wilderness, on the mountain, in the ship, at the dinner table, and in houses.…On Pentecost, the apostles preached in the market and on the streets of Jerusalem.” See also Lk 13:26, where Jesus talks of having taught in the streets. 173

1 3

6 11

174

3 14

26 27

27

28 28

175

1

be reformed] → 211,6. Maieutics] The art of midwifery, from the Greek “’maieúesthai,” to deliver someone in childbirth; the term refers to Socrates’ art of midwifery, which consists of conversation in order to deliver someone who is already pregnant with a knowledge that he has merely forgo�en and must therefore he helped to recall. See, e.g., Plato’s dialogue Theaetetus, 148e–151d. primitive] original, primal, immediate. personally take responsibility for the whole project as someone extraordinary] Refers to the publication of The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1). The scriptures say: Seek first God’s kingdom] Refers to Mt 6:33 (→ 156,5). honor him] Variant: first wri�en “honor him?” with the question mark indicating the end of the sentence. Bishop Mynster] → 152,17. cloaked in velvet] In accordance with a sumptuary decree from 1683, which was still in force in Kierkegaard’s day, as bishop of Zealand and royal confessor, J. P. Mynster was the only cleric permi�ed to “wear black velvet-lapelled gowns.” Great Cross of the Dannebrog] Mynster had become a Knight of the Great Cross of the Dannebrog in 1836. knighthood] Mynster had become a Knight of the Dannebrog in 1826. excellency] → 164,12. the scene … in Holberg’s The Happy Capsize … was rewarded with a new coat … then the other servant speaks] Refers to act 2, scene 2 of Ludvig Holberg’s comedy Det Lykkelige Skibbrud [The Happy Capsize] (1731), in which two servants,

1849

si�ing on opposite sides of a large bundle, so that they are unable to see one another, each read from a list the occasional poems their respective masters have wri�en and relate how much each of their masters has earned from his writings. See Den Danske Skue-Plads [The Danish Theater], 7 vols. (Copenhagen 1758 or 1788 [1731–1754]; ASKB 1566–1567), vol. 4. The volumes have no date of publication and are unpaginated. the apostle Paul was imprisoned] Paul was put in prison on several occasions; see Acts 16:23–40; 2 Cor 6:5, 11:23; Philem 13. And he was held as a prisoner over a long period; see Acts 22:22–28:30. On the 7th … my master (the apostle) was crucified] Presumably a reference to the apostle Peter, who according to tradition suffered a martyr’s death by crucifixion in Rome during Emperor Nero’s persecution of Christians; see bk. 2, chap. 25 of Kirkens Historie gjennem de tre første Aarhundreder af Eusebius [Eusebius’s History of the Church during the First Three Centuries], trans. C. H. Muus (Copenhagen, 1832; ASKB U 37), pp. 103–105, p. 104. dinner with His Majesty] → 164,24. Paul faithfully embraced his martyrdom] Refers to the fact that according to tradition, Paul suffered a martyr’s death by being beheaded in Rome during Emperor Nero’s persecution of Christians; see bk. 2, chap. 25 of Kirkens Historie gjennem de tre første Aarhundreder af Eusebius, p. 104 His Reverence] According to the system of rank and preference (→ 159m,1), “reverence” was a title reserved for the upper levels of the clergy. Senior Court Preacher Th.] The word Kierkegaard uses for “Senior Court Preacher” is Oberhofprædikant, from hofprædikant, the Danish word for “court preacher,” plus the German prefix ober, which here means “senior.” Kierkegaard himself coined this word and had recently used it in referring to the German court preacher Ludwig Theremin in The Crisis and a Crisis in the Life of an Actress (1848) (C, 317; SV2 10, 382), where he describes Theremin (whom he misspells as “Theremim”) as a gi�ed preacher, but whose very gi�s and elusiveness made him a generator of illusion. Thus the “Th.” in the present journal entry probably stands for Theremin. The recently

12

13

16 18

25

25

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 60–62

175m

3

176

1

4

deceased German theologian, Ludwig Friedrich Franz Theremin (1780–1846), had been named court and cathedral preacher in Berlin in 1814. In time, Theremin became the senior court preacher in Berlin and enjoyed a great reputation in this capacity, though in his later years he had preached quite infrequently, albeit with great ado; see the explanatory notes accompanying The Crisis and a Crisis in the Life of an Actress (C, 459; SKS K14, 293–294). In journal entry NB6:55 (KJN 5, 37–39), from 1848, Kierkegaard, clearly referring to the Theremin passage in The Crisis, writes that the recently published piece contains “a li�le squib at Martensen”; see also entry NB6:76 (KJN 5, 122), also from 1848, where Kierkegaard again refers to The Crisis, stating that “the article contained a little allusion to Martensen.” It is thus probable that, as in The Crisis and the two 1848 journal entries cited above, Kierkegaard’s mention of “Senior Court Preacher Th.” in the present journal entry is an oblique reference to H. L. Martensen, who had recently been appointed a court preacher in Copenhagen. Paul … was flogged] Paul was whipped when he was imprisoned in Philippi (see Acts 16:22, 37), and he was about to be flogged again when he was imprisoned in Jerusalem (see Acts 22:24–29). § 128 from pp. 291–306 … Martensen’s opposition to modern science] i.e., § 128 in H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), pp. 289–306 (part of the section “Guds Menneskeblivelse i Christo” [God’s Becoming Man in Christ], pp. 283–306). In § 128, Martensen treats the union of Christ’s divine and human natures, and pp. 291–306 consist of a lengthy note in which Martensen states his opposition to the various modern forms of Docetism (i.e., the gnostic idea that Christ did not have an actual human body, but only the apparition of a body), under which Martensen includes speculative mysticism and modern biblical criticism. he protects himself with “the offense,” “the objectionable,” etc.] A reference to § 128 in Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 176,1), pp. 290–291, where Martensen writes: “It was natural that inasmuch

1849

531

as the new gospel was proclaimed with its power both to a�ract and to offend, there would also be people who sought to appropriate that part of Christianity that a�racted them, while seeking to remove what they found to be offensive. Among those who confessed the new faith there were both Jews and pagans who formed for themselves a Christ in accordance with their own inner inclinations. This is the basis for heresies and false images of Christ. Because the Jewish way of thinking found it offensive that God himself was present in Christ, it made Christ into a divinely gi�ed human being, the greatest of all prophets, the most perfect of those known hitherto. This removed the scandal, but it also removed what was new in Christianity, for now Christianity was merely the greatest blossoming of Judaism. Because the pagan way of thinking found it offensive that the unity of essence of God and a human being should have another actual existence than that of metaphor and thought, it declared that Christ’s body was only an apparition; that is, paganism transformed his history into myth. In this way the foolishness, i.e., the real wonder, was removed, but it also removed what was new in Christianity.…These are the truly fundamental heresies, the prototypes of all false images of Christ in which ‘the offensive element’―but thereby also what is new and original―is omi�ed.” he makes an effort … to demonstrate that it is not offensive a�er all] Presumably an allusion to the remark in § 145 of Den christelige Dogmatik, pp. 344–345, where Martensen begins by stating that an “alternation of degradation and glory, of ϰρύψις [Greek, “hiddenness”] and ϕανέρωσις [Greek, “revelation”] expresses a universal law that governs all revelation of truth in temporality, namely for all revelations of divine Providence.… And despite the fact that the coming of Christ is the most unambiguous proof of God’s Providence, its pinnacle of light and splendor, it is nonetheless subject to this universal law.” that note … in Fragments where a man says … I’ll make it probable] A reference to the note in Philosophical Fragments; see PF, 94n–95n; SKS 4, 292–293).

5

8

532

11

14

16

176m

2

176

34

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 62–65

my category … to comprehend that one cannot comprehend it] See, e.g., journal entry NB6:93, from August 1848: “The task is not to comprehend Xnty, but to comprehend that one cannot comprehend it. This is faith’s holy cause, and therefore reflection is sanctified by being used in this manner” (KJN 5, 70; SKS 21, 68). See also Christian Discourses (CD, 127–128; SKS 10, 138). going farther than faith] According to G.W.F. Hegel, in the system of speculative knowledge, religion is situated on the second-highest level, while philosophy represents the highest level. Religion is thus to be regarded as an imperfect stage on the way toward the absolute knowledge of philosophy, and one must “go farther” in order to reach this philosophical knowledge. a sublated element] Alludes to the Hegelian concept of an aufgehobenes Moment. In Geman idealism the concept das Moment (German, “the element”) designates a constitutive element of a larger organic whole. According to Hegel’s dialectical logic, a category or a “moment” is necessarily negated by its opposite; thus, e.g., being is negated by nothing; together, the two opposite categories therefore constitute a conceptual unity, as, e.g., being and nothing are united in becoming. In this way, the individual categories that have been traversed can be said to be “sublated elements” in the dialectically progressing movement, i.e., the opposition between them has been suspended or sublated, but they themselves are preserved as incorporated in a higher unity. See p. 138. Note] → 176,8. he protects himself … we fall into one heresy or another] It is particularly in the main section of Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), which deals with “Læren om Sønnen” [The Doctrine of the Son], that Martensen treats the various possible heresies, particularly Docetism; see, e.g., pp. 286, 291–306 (→ 176,4), 307, 313, 318–319, 323–324, 325, 327, and esp. 329: “the criticism that will not confess this [that Christ is “conceived by the Holy Spirit, born of the Virgin Mary”] is inevitably Docetism or Ebionism”; see also pp. 362, 367, 379–380, 387.

1849

Martensen is scholarly―he comprehends it anyway] → 176,5. H. L. Martensen (→ 151,19). his Dogmatics] H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik. Mynster’s sermons] Kierkegaard owned the following editions of J. P. Mynster’s (→ 152,17) published sermons: Prædikener [Sermons], 2 vols., vol. 1, 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1826 [1810]), vol. 2, 2nd ed. (Copenhagen, 1832 [1815]); see ASKB 228 and 2192 for details; Prædikener paa alle Søn- og HelligDage i Aaret [Sermons on Every Sunday and Holy Day of the Year], 2 vols., 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1837 [1823]; ASKB 229–230 and 2191); Prædikener holdte i Kirkeaaret 1846–47 [Sermons Given in the 1846–1847 Church Year] (Copenhagen, 1847; ASKB 231); and Prædikener holdte i Aaret 1848 [Sermons Given in the Year 1848] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 232). such an enormous book] Den christelige Dogmatik is 582 pages in octavo format, plus a four-page preface and a two-page table of contents. all the scholarly apparatus] Allusion to the fact that H. L. Martensen divided Den christelige Dogmatik into 291 sections (“§s”), of which many contain lengthy asides, plus more than five hundred footnotes, many of which refer to the Bible, but also to a number of other writings. all the dogmatics] Refers to the circumstance that in Den christelige Dogmatik, H. L. Martensen wants to cover the whole of dogmatics, including “Det christelige Gudsbegreb” [The Christian Concept of God], pp. 89–136; “Læren om Faderen” [The Doctrine of the Father], pp. 137–279; “Læren om Sønnen” [The Doctrine of the Son], pp. 281–392; and “Læren om Aanden” [The Doctrine of the Spirit], pp. 393–582. the system is not yet quite completed] Presumably an allusion to the preface of Den christelige Dogmatik, where Martensen writes: “I issue this work with a lively sense of the great distance between the actual achievement and the ideal that hovered before me when I was working on it, and which continues to hover before me” (p. iv). On “the system,” → 151,19.

4

Tersteegen … Wenn man nicht Lust hat, fromm zu sein] Cited from stanza 63 in Gerhard

20

177

10 10

14

14

15

17

177

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 65–69 Tersteegen’s poem “Stimme aus dem Heiligthum” [Voice from the Sanctuary], consisting of sixtyseven stanzas in all, in Auswahl aus Gerhard Tersteegen’s Schri�en (→ 160,26), pp. 502–516, p. 515. 177

178

178

178

29

9

17

23 24

the extraord. person … jack up the price] → 147,18. ― register the new price: Variant: added. A prof. such as the late J. Møller] The late Jens Møller (1779–1833), Danish theologian; from 1802 extraordinary professor and from 1838 ordinary professor of theology at the University of Copenhagen; dr. theol., 1813; member of the Royal Danish Academy of Sciences, 1814; member of the commission charged with producing an authorized translation of the New Testament, 1819; editor and frequent contributor to the periodicals Theologisk Bibliothek [Theological Library], 20 vols. (Copenhagen, 1811–1821; ASKB 326–335) and Nyt theologisk Bibliothek [New Theological Library], 20 vols. (Copenhagen, 1821–1832; ASKB. 336–345); together with his brother Rasmus Møller he published Det Gamle Testamentes poetiske og prophetiske Skri�er, e�er Grundtexten paa ny oversa�e [The Poetic and Prophetic Books of the Old Testament, Newly Translated from the Original Texts], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1828–1830; ASKB 86–88 and 89–91). the concluding portion of “Come unto Me All You … Are Heavy Laden.”] See the conclusion of section 4, “Christianity as the Absolute, Contemporaneity with Christ,” of “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest. For Awakening and Inward Appropriation,” part 1 of Practice in Christianity (→ 147,4) (PC, 62–66; SKS 12, 74–78). Bishop Mynster] → 152,17. all the subjects are Christians] The evangelical Lutheran Church was Denmark’s established State Church (→ 167,34). According to of the census of February 1845, the kingdom of Denmark had a population 1,350,327, of whom 5,371 confessed a Christian faith other than that of the State Church, while even fewer were non-Christians, namely the 3,670 Jews. See Statistisk Tabelværk [Statistical

1849

533

Tables], 1st series, no. 10 (Copenhagen, 1846), pp. iii and xiv. civil servants just like secular civil servants] Bishops, deans, and priests were all royally appointed civil servants of the state (→ 167,34). and some of them will become very lo�y and distinguished] → 164,12. well-paid] → 169,29. house of God] Standard term for the church; see 1 Tim 3:15. “Out there … take care not to preach there.” … orally in a sermon] Refers to Mynster’s sermon on Jn 15:26–16:4, delivered at Christiansborg Palace Church on the sixth Sunday a�er Easter, May 20, 1849 (see Adresseavisen, no. 116, May 19, 1849). In his sermon, which was published as “Fred og Glæde hos vor Herre og Frelser. Paa sie�e Søndag e�er Paaske” [Peace and Joy with Our Lord and Savior: For the Sixth Sunday a�er Easter] in his Prædikener holdte i Aarene 1849 og 1850 [Sermons Given in the Years 1849 and 1850] (Copenhagen, 1851; ASKB 233), pp. 41–53, noting the hard times, he tells his congregation to “seek refuge from them [the hard times]―yes, out there in the streets and alleys, in the society of this world, it does not do any good to say it, but here in this holy place, in an assembly of those who confess him, here we dare say it, and want to say it: here with our Lord and Savior” (p. 44). noted somewhere in the journal, probably in NB11] see NB11:61 in the present volume. printed in his sermons when they were later published] → 179,13. In one of his most recently published collections of sermons … one can still install oneself quite comfortably] Refers to Mynster’s sermon on Acts 2:1–11, for Pentecost, given on June 11, 1848, and published as “Vort Samfund i Christi Kirke. Paa første Pintsedag” [Our Society in the Church of Christ: For Pentecost] in Prædikener holdte i Aaret 1848 (→ 177,10), pp. 67–81, where he writes, “God be praised that there are still many among us, very many, an ever-growing multitude, for whom the gospel of Christ is precious, who will not and cannot let go of it, for whom the world would be desolate, shrouded in dark-

28

29 30 12 13

15 16 18

179

534

26

27

27 28

28

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 69–70

est night, if they thought the gospel was gone.… Surrounded by the world’s afflictions and the world’s sin pushing in upon them, they needed a place of refuge where they could find salvation; they found it under the cross of Christ; there, in his sacrificial love, they found the balm for a contrite heart for which they had otherwise sought in vain in everything that grows from the bosom of the earth, in everything that develops from a person’s own thoughts―there they saw raised up a symbol of reconciliation that satisfied their hearts in the midst of the world’s commotion” (pp. 72–73). Mynster continues: “Perhaps you have gone far away from the peaceful regions of your childhood, but if you found the way back, once again found the way to light and peace, it was because, through the church, you heard the Lord’s voice: Come unto me all you who labor and are heavy laden, that I might give you rest!” (p. 75). ― with respect to 48: In the first part of 1848, Europe was marked by a series of revolutions and political upheavals, which in Denmark culminated with the fall of absolutism on March 21. Here Mynster is referring in particular to the duchies of Schleswig and Holstein (then under the rule of the Danish crown), where a civil war between the Danish and German portions of the monarchy had broken out on April 9. the illusion that this is a Christian state] See the above-mentioned sermon from Prædikener holdte i Aaret 1848 (→ 179,18), p. 77, where Mynster says: “But as long as our people is to be called a Christian people, there must also be ecclesiastical bonds, and whoever would cast these off entirely thereby cuts himself off from the rest of the people and lives a foreigner in the land.” supreme civil servant] As bishop of Zealand, Mynster was the primate of the Danish Church and the king’s personal adviser. offices and other delights within his gi�] → 167,13. great revenues] Pursuant to a royal resolution of February 7, 1833, the bishop of Zealand had an annual salary of 4,800 rix-dollars (→ 165,12). existentially he expresses … crude and ignorant rabble] See the above-mentioned sermon from Prædikener holdte i Aaret 1848 (→ 179,18), pp. 76–77,

1849

where Mynster says: “Oh, do not think less of the mass of people, teeming in your cities and towns, because they are called the common people and cannot be numbered among the wise and intelligent. Our Lord and Master preached the gospel for the poor, and he sent out his servants to teach all people, out on the highways and byways to invite whomever they could find; he pitied the masses around him because they languished and were sca�ered like sheep who had no shepherd [Mt 9:36]; therefore he wanted to gather them, so that there would be one herd, one shepherd.” § 217, p. 447] In H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), § 217, pp. 447–448, is part of the section “Naadevalget” [Election by Grace] (§ 206–224), which is part of the final principal subdivision, “Læren om Aanden” (→ 177,15). Martensen assumes that … there “is only a small band of truly awakened and reborn people.”] Freely cited from § 217 in Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 447, where Martensen writes: “Even if all are baptized and incorporated in the Kingdom, are objectively dedicated to Christ, nonetheless, at any given time there is only a small band of truly awakened and reborn people in whom Christianity lives a subjective and personal life. Thousands of individuals in Christendom live their entire lives without having come into a personal relationship with Christ, having been affected by Christian influences in a merely external or indistinct general sense.” baptizing everyone] In accordance with a decree of May 30, 1830, the priest was to make sure that all children of parents who confessed Christianity were baptized; if the parents refused to let their children be baptized―which a number of Baptists did in the 1840s―the priest was to report this omission to the authorities, who would then carry out the baptism forcibly. marrying into the state] → 167,34. awaken to Xnty] → 168,8. See also § 217 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 447, where Martensen writes: “No person can decide his awakening, nor can any person decide that grace will continue to visit him despite his own indifference or resistance, continue to push its thorn into the soul, un-

1

1

8

9 15

180

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 70–73

180m

1 2

7

181

3 7

8

182

1 3

til he acknowledges that it is vain to kick against the pricks [Acts 26:14] and subjects himself to the power of love.” Martensen] → 151,19. also p. 449, top, “prevenient grace … outside the Church] Freely cited from § 218 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 449, top, where Martensen writes: “But universal grace also defines itself as preparatory, a concept that for the most part has its use outside the Church, but also repeats itself within it.” See Journal NB11 p. 258] See entry NB11:220 in the present volume. Bishop Mynster] → 152,17. his breast (where the Great Cross sits and sparkles)] As a clerical knight of the Order of the Great Cross of the Dannebrog, Mynster (→ 152,17) was permi�ed to bear a gold cross on a ribbon around his neck, so that it hung below his clerical collar, plus a Great Cross ornamented with silver rays that formed a star, fastened to the velvet vestments he wore on his breast (→ 174,27). “when Paul stood before Festus in chains … he was nonetheless free”] Freely cited from J. P. Mynster’s sermon on John 8:31–36 for the eighth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday in 1848, published as “Hvor Herrens Aand er, der er Frihed” [Where the Lord’s Spirit Is, There Is Freedom] in Prædikener holdte i Aaret 1848 (→ 177,10), pp. 98– 99, where Mynster says: “When Paul stood before that prince [King Agrippa], who half-mockingly said, ‘It wouldn’t take much for you to convince me to become a Christian,’ and he replied, ‘I could pray to God that not only you, but all who hear me today might become such as I am, except for these chains’ [Acts 26:28–29], he was certainly subjected to compulsion outwardly, which he might wish to have taken away, but was there anyone in that whole assembly surrounding him―of whom none were wearing chains―who was as free as he?” See Acts 25:23–26:32 on Paul’s speech in Festus’s behalf when he was imprisoned and chained. ― His Eminence: → 164,12. Practice in Christianity] → 147,4. the things by Anti-Climacus are all from 48] i.e.,

1849

535

The Sickness unto Death and Practice in Christianity, both of which are by Anti-Climacus (→ 147,3 and → 147,4). On the genesis of The Sickness unto Death, → 165,3. According to the preface to piece no. 1 in Practice in Christianity, the three pieces that constitute that book are all from 1848; see this preface, which is referred to in pieces 2 and 3 in the book, where Kierkegaard, the editor of the volume, writes, “this piece, stemming from the year 1848” (PC, 7; SKS 12, 15). Although pieces 1 and 2 appear to have been wri�en in the period April–December 1848, it is possible that no. 3 was not wri�en until the beginning of 1849 (→ 224,5). The rest are from 49] i.e., The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses (→ 165,1) and On My Work as an Author (→ 147,1). the piece that deals with my writings] i.e., The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1). truly se�ing forth the possibility of offense] Refers to “‘Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended in Me’: A Biblical Exposition and Christian Definition,” piece no. 2 in Practice in Christianity (PC, 71; SKS 12, 83). to jack up the price] → 147,18. awakening] → 168,8. Martensen] → 151,19. In Dogmatics, p. 456, middle of page: “The livelier … by this very resistance.”] Cited from § 223 in H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), p. 456, though Kierkegaard writes “is activated by this very resistance” instead of Martensen’s “gains in strength by this very resistance.” He sleeps with speculation] → 151,23 and → 151,29. makes accommodations] The expression “accommodation” is an allusion in particular to the Enlightenment theological notion of accommodation, i.e., the adaptation of divine revelation to the limitations, prejudices, and errors of human beings. Martensen discusses the concept of accommodation in this sense in § 153 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 356. he himself praises this as wisdom in contrast to the paradox] → 151,23.

3

4 6

7 10 2 2

7 9

9

183

536 183

23

28

184

1

2

6

16

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 74–76

catechumens] In the earliest period of the Christian Church, this term designated Jews or pagans who had converted to Christianity but who had not yet been baptized. They occupied a special place in the church and were not allowed to be present at the distribution of communion. Subsequently, the term came to designate a young person who received instruction from a priest, especially in preparation for confirmation. first place has been allowed to lapse … class no. 2 becomes no. 1] Alludes to the system of rank and preference (→ 159m,1). ― actual position: On “actual” versus “titular” positions (→ 159m,1). Dogmatics p. 480, bo�om of page, and p. 481, top] Refers to § 237 in H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), pp. 480–481; § 237 is a part of the section “Guds Ord og den hellige Skri�” [God’s Word and Holy Scripture] (§§ 237– 243), which is included in the book’s final principal subdivision, “Læren om Aanden” (→ 177,15). In an earlier § Martensen … The wri�en word is therefore necessary] Refers to § 237 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 480, where Martensen writes: “True as it is that the Lord had not wanted to give his Church a continuing inspiration, a self-perpetuating, living apostolate such as the Roman Church has invented, it is equally true that over the course of time, Christianity’s oral tradition has been subjected to all the uncertainty, to possibilities of distortion, that are inseparable from oral accounts. Over the course of time, Christianity’s oral tradition would all too easily cease to be the true tradition of Christianity if the Church had not been given the holy apostolic scriptures for differentiating between the true and the false tradition, for creating a norm for the transmi�ed, living, developing consciousness of Christianity in the Church.” “Therefore we also … hear him ask, ‘What do you read?’”] Cited with minor variations from § 237 in Den christelige Dogmatik, pp. 480–481. middle term] A proposition connecting the premises and the conclusion in an argument, the truth of which must be proven in order for the conclusion to be regarded as proven.

1849

was used by Mynster in his sermon on God’s word] Refers to J. P. Mynster’s (→ 152,17) sermon “Om Guds Ord. Paa anden Søndag i Advent” [On the Word of God: For the Second Sunday in Advent], on Rom 14:4–9, in Prædikener paa alle Søn-og Hellig-Dage i Aaret (→ 177,10), vol. 1, pp. 14–28; see especially pp. 17–18, where Mynster says: “The Apostles who themselves were chosen to complete the Holy Scriptures, to add to the great building that portion which is needed to give true meaning and full beauty to the whole―the Apostles had only the holy books of the Old Testament.…But inasmuch as they recognized faith in Jesus Christ as the stone, as it were, that completed the building―that toward which everything tended, that whereby everything was fulfilled―they also wrote down the instruction concerning this, the tale of Jesus’ life and destiny, his words as they had heard them, their exposition of those words, their regulations for the congregations, and their prospect for the future. With these books they wrote―the collection to which we assign the important name ‘the Holy Scriptures,’ and which we also, in a special sense, call the Word of God, the content of which was to serve as the rule for the life and the faith of Christians―the collection was concluded.” someone with fine handwriting] a calligrapher or someone who writes in accordance with banal or popular taste, o�en with a pre�ifying or falsely idealizing tendency.

22

6

184m

M. appears to be directing sarcasm at me … a sickly, egotistic life as an individual ( … § 234)] Refers to Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), p. 475, where H. L. Martensen writes: “The individual can only develop his charisma [i.e., gi� of grace] in the reciprocity of love with the many charismas that are co-inhabitants of the realm [of reborn individuals]. He cannot complete his sanctification by wanting to live in sickly and egotistical fashion as an ‘individual,’ but only by joining his individual life with the life of the congregation. If Christ is really to live in the individual, the Church of Christ, with its tribulations and triumphs, must lead an actual life in the individual.” This section (§ 234) is part of the larger

26

184

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 76–77

34 34

35 39

40

185

2

5

subdivision called “The Order of Salvation” (§ 225–235), which in turn is included in the book’s final principal subdivision, “Læren om Aanden” (→ 177,15). a lucrative living] → 169,29. a velvet-covered paunch] In accordance with a sumptuary decree from 1683 (→ 174,27), because Martensen held an honorary doctorate (→ 151,19) he was presumably entitled to wear a gown with lapels and a breastpiece of velvet (o�en disparagingly referred to as a “velvet paunch”). living in aristocratic circles] → 164,24. the consistory’s offer to let a person’s book be printed gratis] It has not been possible to verify this information. The consistory was a governing body at the University of Copenhagen. get it refunded from the printer] Den christelige Dogmatik was published by C. A. Reitzel (→ 234,11); see Reitzel’s Forhandlinger med Forfa�ere, Redacteurer &c: 1835–[1858] [Negotiations with Authors, Editors, etc., 1835–[1858]], p. 35, where it is stated, concerning Prof. Martensen: “Publication of a ‘Dogmatics.’ Press run 1025 copies. The sum is 30 rd. plus 25 gratis copies. Printing and paper for free copies in accordance with agreement. Printing of 500 copies refunded to author at the rate of 7 rd. 48 shillings per [sixteen-page] sheet; with this the costs covering the press run have been paid to the printer.” Inasmuch as Den christelige Dogmatik was 588 pages long, which amounted to thirty-six sheets plus twelve pages, Martensen received a refund of about 273 rix-dollars (on the value of the rix-dollar, → 165,12). married two times] Refers to the fact that on November 10, 1848 Martensen married for the second time, to Virginie Henrie�e Constance Bidoulac; his first wife, Helene Mathilde Martensen, née Hess, whom he had married in 1838, had died on September 20, 1847. the man himself is capable of teaching that … second marriages are not praiseworthy] Refers to § 83 on monogamy in Martensen’s Grundrids til Moralphilosophiens System. Udgivet til Brug ved academiske Forelæsninger [Outlines of the System of Moral Philosophy: Published for Use in Conjunction with Academic Lectures] (Copenhagen, 1841; ASKB 650), pp. 84–85, where

1849

537

Martensen begins by writing: “The necessity of monogamy is based on the concept of marital love, in which the individuals place their natural categories in an indissoluble unity with their moral categories.” In a note to § 255 … “the experience … are not personally reborn and believing,”] Abbreviated citation, with minor deviations, from the first sentence of the remark accompanying § 255 in H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), p. 513. The section is a part of the larger subdivision on “Sacramenterne” [The Sacraments] (§ 247–272), which in turn is included in the book’s final principal subdivision, “Læren om Aanden” (→ 177,15). “the Church’s imperfect administration of the sacrament … development of the gi� of grace.”] Abbreviated citation, with minor deviations, from the remark accompanying § 255 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 513. Mynster] → 152,17. State Church] → 167,34. assumes … thousands who are not believers and reborn] → 180,1. their children would thus also be excluded from baptism] Presumably alludes to § 256 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 514, where Martensen writes: “If we ask to which individuals the Church, as housekeeper of God’s secrets, is entitled and obligated to give baptism, it is obvious that baptism can only be given in accordance with the purpose that is intended: that it can be the beginning of a Christian worship of God, thus where there is the prospect that the other ceremonial elements of Christianity will also be available to take effect.…Thus, compulsory baptism is unjustifiable, for where there is active resistance to Christianity it will not be possible for baptism to become the foundation of a Christian life. If the only prospect is that the foundation will be desecrated, then it must not be built, for the Lord has commanded that what is holy not be given to dogs, and that pearls not be cast before swine [Mt 7:6], a pronouncement that obviously applies to the Christian mysteries.”

16

19

26 27 28 30

185

538

32

35

186

2

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 77–78

he even wants to have children taken by force in order to be baptized] Refers to the circumstance that Bishop Mynster favored the compulsory baptism of the children of Baptists. Martensen wrote about this later, in his memoir Af mit Levnet (→ 164,24), vol. 2 (1883), p. 71: “Mynster insisted that because the Baptists would not have their children baptized, the state was justified in incorporating them in our society and taking care that baptism be carried out, even if it was against the parents’ will. The consequence of this was that on occasion it was necessary to use the police to get children baptized.” Even at the time of this affair, Martensen expressed his opposition in Den Christelige Daab betragtet med Hensyn paa det baptistiske Spørgsmaal [Christian Baptism, Viewed in Connection with the Baptist Question] (Copenhagen, 1843; ASKB 652). In keeping with Mynster’s views, a proclamation of December 27, 1842, required that children of Baptist parents be baptized, and consequently compulsory means were used to take the children of Baptist parents of Copenhagen to Trinity Church, where they were baptized against their parents’ will. In the next § … abandon child baptism] Refers to § 256 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 514, where Martensen writes: “But on the other hand, the Church must avert the Baptist one-sidedness that wants absolute assurance that baptism and faith will actually coincide. Because, first of all, the Church would then have to abandon infant baptism, and second, in order to a�ain this assurance it would be compelled to postpone baptism forever.” ― In the: Variant: first wri�en as two hash marks (# #), apparently indicating the end of the entry. he decides … we should simply baptize all children] Refers to § 256 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 515, where Martensen writes: “The false scruples about the administration of baptism, lest it be wasted on those who are unworthy, necessarily has the consequence that it is withheld from many where it would bear fruit. And therefore we are only able to propose a universal rule (which will surely be modified under various circumstances) that the Church baptize those adults whom it finds to have a receptive willingness to

1849

receive it, but that it baptize children wherever mother congregations have been established and a Christian upbringing can lead children to the faith.” of Martensen’s] i.e., of H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19). Christianity is foolishness to the world] See 1 Cor 1:18–31. Instead … a ba�le between superficiality and profundity] Presumably a reference to § 226 in Den christelige Dogmatik, pp. 458–462, where Martensen writes, p. 460: “As such, being awakened is only a state of religious passion, a pathos in which a person is spontaneously affected, and must be thought of in analogy with those moments of genius in a person’s life that have not yet been appropriated by an independent sobermindedness. But only through free submission on a person’s part can the awakening grace reach its goal and take its place as the creative grace of a new birth, which sinks down into freedom as an imperishable seed [1 Pet 1:23], puts down roots into a person’s heart, and thus becomes the enduring principle of a new development of character.” And further, on p. 462: “Therefore, fanaticism is inseparable from the religious pride in which people fool themselves into believing that they, unlike others, are chosen instruments, mixing together the light that has been ignited by God with fantasies dreamed up by their own nature, hating order and discipline―a condition that in every way has its natural prototype in frantic, untrammeled genius. The religious systems of fanatics, which display a strange blend of profundity and confusion, are indeed the result of an impure mixture of awakening’s higher light and the natural thoughts of the heart. O�en, these systems are indeed moved by a flash of genius, of natural gi�s; but inasmuch as fanatics permit neither the sprouting seeds of nature nor those of grace to a�ain maturity through conscientious selfknowledge or through obedient submission to the historical order of revelation, this commotion can only produce spiritual abortions, untimely miscarriages, caricatures of what is holy, of which the history of the Church has many examples.”

7 7 10

186

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 79–85 186

20

24

26 28

187

2

8

With respect to ordination … “but that neither is it merely a ceremony.”] Freely cited from § 272 in Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), pp. 533– 534, where Martensen writes: “In the Lutheran Church, when priests are ordained in the apostolic manner with the laying on of hands by their brothers…we certainly cannot put priestly ordination on the same level as the real sacraments, nor ought we assume that extraordinary spiritual gi�s are connected with it, as was the case in apostolic times. But neither can we assume that it is merely a ceremony through which nothing is communicated.” but nothing is rlly said] But see § 272 in Den christelige Dogmatik, p. 534, continuing the passage cited immediately above, where Martensen writes: “For, as an office instituted by the Lord, inherent in its concept is that it contains a power and an authority from the Lord himself, and to a certain extent it is accompanied by the promises that were fulfilled in an extraordinary degree by the apostles and the disciples whom the Lord himself sent forth [Lk 21:15]. From the authority that is inherent in this office and is descended from the Lord himself, making the priest not merely a servant of the congregation, but of the Lord, there develops the unique priestly gi� of performing the service of edifying the congregation, and specifically of preaching for edification, for admonition, and consolation―a gi�, an unction that is not ordinarily found among those who lack authority, because they only have a subjective or at any rate a merely human calling.” sophistical] → 157,5. Martensen] → 151,19. the lusts of the flesh … greatest dangers faced by humanity … that he was the teacher] Presumably an allusion to 1 Cor 6:12–20 and to 1 Cor 7, esp. v. 7. See also Mt 19:12. exposed to daily ridicule] → 167,27. See also journal entry NB:7, dated March 9, 1846: “Every butcher boy believes that he is entitled practically to insult me on orders issued by The Corsair; the young university students smirk and giggle and are happy that a prominent person is trampled down” (KJN 4, 16). See also journal entry NB 8:110

1849

539

from December 1848: “year in and year out, day a�er day, to be reminded of the same thing―my legs―and that it is these that people write about. The animal health with which a shoemaker’s apprentice, a journeyman butcher, etc., guffaw, seizing on my physique: it is disgusting. And to endure it every single day!” (KJN 5, 199). stars and ribbons, etc.] i.e., clergy decorated with the cross-insignia associated with various ranks in the knightly order of the Dannebrog, including the Great Cross of the Dannebrog, plus the various sashes and ribbons for these and other orders (→ 181,7). the step of exposing myself to ridicule] → 153,20.

17

18

the disciples felt themselves abandoned when Xt departed] See Jn 16:5–6. Xst’s words … otherwise the Spirit cannot come] Abbreviated citation of Jn 16:7.

24

the gospel for the 10th Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday] Lk 19:41–48. In 1849, the tenth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday fell on August 12. sin is ignorance] → 162,21.

36

Martensen … qualitative difference from all other writings] Refers to § 241 in Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), p. 488, where H. L. Martensen writes: “Even if the writings of the New Testament had been anonymous, in being compared with everything else Christian literature has produced, they would prove their absolute primitivity, something that is strikingly obvious when one compares them with the writings we possess from the period immediately following apostolic fathers.…It is the task of biblical criticism to cultivate a sense for the canonical writings in their specific differences from other contemporary and subsequent writings, a sense that properly understood is included in the gi� of ‘trying spirits’” [1 Jn 4:1]. (For “primitivity” (→ 173,6). This teaching is from God] See, e.g., 1 Cor 11:23 and Gal 1:12. science] → 151,23 and → 152,8. speculation] → 151,29.

3

187

39

188

37

13 21 21

189

540

42 42

190

8

190

27

191

3 18

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 85–93

Ideas, Maxims, etc.] See G. C. Lichtenberg’s Ideen, Maximen und Einfälle (→ 154,37). lived … in the greatest possible concealment] Probably an allusion to the proverbial expression bene qui latuit, bene vixit (Latin, “He who conceals himself well, lives well”) from the Roman poet Ovid’s Tristia [Sorrows], bk. 3, chap. 4, 25; see P. Ovidii Nasonis quae supersunt [Ovid’s Extant Works], ed. A. Richter, 3 vols., stereotype ed. (Leipzig, 1828; ASKB 1265), vol. 3, p. 207. That God Is His Father] See, e.g., Mt 23:9. Luther puts it well … (by praying)] Refers to Martin Luther’s sermon on the epistle 1 Pet 4:7–11 for the sixth Sunday a�er Easter in En christelig Postille (→ 146,13), vol. 2, pp. 278–291; p. 279, col. 1: “For it is a double weapon and shield with which the devil is put to flight: diligently to listen, learn, and practice God’s Word, always instructing, consoling, and strengthening oneself with it and, when the trials and the struggle begin: to li� up one’s heart with those same words, shouting and crying to God for help! One of these two must always be in progress―as an eternal conversation between God and humanity: Either he talks to us―then we sit still and listen to him; or we talk to him beseeching him for what we need, and he listens.” loving “the neighbor,”] See, e.g., Mt 22:37–39; see also Mt 19:19 and Lk 10:25–37. mundus vult decipi] This Latin phrase, which is usually followed by the phrase decipiatur ergo (“so let it be deceived”), has been widely used. In his stories of heroes (1739), Holberg relates that Cardinal G. P. Caraffa (subsequently Pope Paul IV) “when in a procession, distributed blessings with his hand, but at the same time continually mumbled these words with his mouth: Mundus vult decipi, decipiatur!” Adskillige store Heltes og berømmelige Mænds, sær Orientalske og Indianske sammenlignede Historier og Bedri�er e�er Plutarchi Maade [Comparative Stories and Deeds of a Number of Great Heroes and Famous Men, Especially Those of the Orient and India, in the Manner of Plutarch], in Ludvig Holbergs udvalgte

1849

Skri�er [Selected Works of Ludvig Holberg], ed. K. L. Rahbek, 21 vols. (Copenhagen, 1804–1814), vol. 9 (1806), p. 86. Zacharias Werner … Von dem Gewissen uns nicht kann entrissen] From Zacharias Werner’s sermon for Pentecost on Jn 14:26, in Zacharias Werner’s ausgewählte Predigten [Selected Sermons by Zacharias Werner], 3 vols., originally published in 1826; the edition of the sermon Kierkegaard cites here is from Zacharias Werner’s Sämmtliche Werke. Aus seinem handschri�lichen Nachlasse herausgegeben von seinen Freunden [The Complete Works of Zacharias Werner, from His Posthumous Manuscripts, Published by His Friends], 13 vols. (Grimma, n.d. [1840]; ASKB 1851–1854), vol. 12, pp. 16–30; p. 22. ― Zacharias Werner: Friedrich Ludwig Zacharias Werner (1768–1823), Austrian poet, priest, and mystic; converted to Catholicism in Rome in 1811, ordained a priest in 1814, therea�er preached in Vienna. Gewissen means certainty as well as conscience] See Th. Heinsius, Volksthümliches Wörterbuch der Deutschen Sprache [Popular Dictionary of the German Language], 4 vols. (Hanover, 1818–1822; ASKB U 64), vol. 2 (1819), p. 439, col. 1.

33

191

2

192

in praise] Variant: added. as such is only] Variant: “as such” and “only” added. comparison is made only with the strength of a mother’s love] Perhaps an allusion to Sir 4:11 (in NRSV and modern Danish translations Sir 4:10). See also Isa 66:13.

6

192

R. N. has now discovered … which Anti-Cl. must of course call “despair.”] Refers to a letter from Rasmus Nielsen to Kierkegaard, dated “Lyngby August 10, 1849”; see (LD, 312; B&A 1, 245). ― R. N.: Rasmus Nielsen (1809–1884), Danish theologian and philosopher; theology graduate, 1837; licentiate in theology, 1840; winter semester 1840–1841, privatdocent; from 1841, extraordinary professor in moral philosophy, and from 1850, ordinary professor at the University of Copenhagen. He taught speculative and Hegelian philosophy in particular, but in the mid-1840s he

20

8 14

192

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 93–102

25

33

193

6

9

came under Kierkegaard’s influence, and they became friends in 1848 (concerning this, see journal entries NB7:6 and NB10:32 in KJN 5, 80–81 and 283). Kierkegaard appears to have brought Nielsen into his confidence concerning the ideas behind his writings; see the dra� of an article “Concerning My Relationship to Hr. Prof. R. Nielsen,” from ca. 1849–1850: “In the middle of the year 1848 a number of considerations, all leading to the same point, made it clear to me that I ought, that it was my duty, at least make an attempt to share my views with another person by having a personal relationship with him, all the more so because I had the intention of stopping as an author. I chose Prof. Nielsen, who had already tried to approach me. Since then I have as a rule spoken with him once a week” (Pap. X 6 B 124, p. 164). ― Cl.: Johannes Climacus, here as the pseudonymous author of Concluding Unscientific Postscript (→ 152,11). ― Anti-Cl.: Here as the pseudonymous author of The Sickness unto Death (→ 147,3). ― concluding words of Cl. to the effect that he does not say that he is a Xn: See the appendix “An Understanding with the Reader” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript (CUP 1, 617; SKS 7, 560). In a previous note … the common point was offense] Refers to a le�er to Kierkegaard, dated “Lyngby, July 28, 1849”; see (LD, 303; B&A 1, 238). wri�en in my note to him … which he received] Refers to an undated le�er to Rasmus Nielsen, probably from July 1849, which accompanied a copy of The Sickness unto Death; see LD, 298–299; B&A 1, 235. ― which he received: See the preceding note. anxiety about sin] See § 1, “Anxiety about Evil” in chap. 4 of The Concept of Anxiety (CA, 113–118; SKS 4, 415–420). Vigilius Haufniensis … repentance goes out of its mind … he must perhaps put up with it] Summary of § 1.c in chap. 4 of The Concept of Anxiety (CA, 115–116; SKS 4, 417–418). ― Vigilius Haufniensis: Latin for “the Copenhagen watchman” or “the vigilant person of Copenhagen,” the pseudonymous author of The Concept of Anxiety.

1849

541

quietism … yet still remain in sin] It has not been possible to identify a source for this assertion. Quietism was a tendency within Christian ethics that had the ideal of ridding the will entirely of all desire and self-involvement, so that the soul could be freed of all self-interest, contemplating only God and his glory; mysticism emphasized the quietistic ideal to the point of making the goal the total surrender of the self in order that the soul could find rest and sink into God as a drop or water disappears in the infinite ocean. See W.M.L. de We�e, Lærebog i den christelige Sædelære og sammes Historie [Textbook and History of Christian Moral Doctrine], trans. C. E. Scharling (Copenhagen, 1835; ASKB 871), pp. 158–161.

15

That the positive is higher than the superlative] See journal entry NB11:188 in the present volume.

36

193

sufferings of this time] Variant: first wri�en, instead of “sufferings”, “longing”.

15

195

kicking against the pricks (against which Paul … thorn in the flesh)] Allusion to Acts 26:14; see also 2 Cor 12:7–9.

10

196

leprous] In Kierkegaard’s day people with leprosy were still regarded as morally suspect. in fear and trembling] Allusion to Phil 2:12. a young, cheerful girl] Reference to Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). those who are sick and sorrowful] Modeled on a prescribed prayer for the communion service on Fridays: “Our Lord Jesus Christ, peace be unto us forever! God comfort all those who are sick and sorrowful, whether they be far away or close at hand!” (Forordnet Alter-Bog for Danmark [Prescribed Service Book for Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1830 [1688]; ASKB 381), p. 228. those who labor and are heavy laden] Allusion to Mt 11:28.

21

196

the Orthopedic Institute] In July 1834, machinist Johannes Peter Langgaard was granted authorization and a ten-year exclusive license to establish

25

35 36 7

198

8

198

542

35

39

199

5 9 14

22

38

38

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 102–105

and operate an Orthopedic Institute. According to C. Nyrop, Camillus Nyrop (Copenhagen, 1884), pp. 103–104, Kierkegaard’s close friend Emil Boesen, who was a priest, held services there for handicapped girls every other Sunday and on other holy days. wealth, power, and respect] Variant: immediately preceding “power”, the word “honor” has been deleted. God-Man] i.e., Christ, who as the human being in whom God revealed himself, united in himself the divine and human natures. “the single individual”] Variant: “the” is changed from “that”. God-Man] → 198,39. Don Quixote] Principal character in Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra’s eponymous parody of a knightly romance (1605–1615). Kierkegaard owned a Danish version, Cervantes’ Don Quixote af Manchas Levnet og Bedri�er [The Life and Exploits of Don Quixote de la Mancha], trans. C. D. Biehl, 4 vols. (Copenhagen, 1776–1777; ASKB 1937–1940) and a German translation, Der sinnreiche Junker Don Quixote von La Mancha [The Ingenious Knight Don Quixote of la Mancha], trans. and with an introduction by Heinrich Heine, 2 vols. (Stu�gart, 1837; ASKB 1935–1936). a pers. grows away from ideals] Variant: first wri�en, instead of “ideals”, “X”, i.e., the Greek letter “chi,” the first le�er in Kierkegaard’s standard abbreviation “Xnty.” Armed Neutrality] The title of a piece wri�en by Kierkegaard in 1848 and originally intended to be a periodical, the program of which, according to journal entry NB6:61, was “to give the times a definite and non-reduplicated impression of what I say I am, what I want, etc.” (KJN 5, 42). In 1848, when Kierkegaard instead wanted to use it as an appendix to The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1), the title was changed to “Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom. Appendix to The Point of View for My Work as an Author” (see Pap. X 5 B 106–109, pp. 287–302). have paralleled this with the transition from being called σοϕοι]] See Armed Neutrality, where

1849

Kierkegaard writes: “But the ideality in relation to being Christian is constant inward appropriation. The more ideally being a Christian is understood, the more inward it becomes, and the more difficult. Being a Christian thus undergoes a change that I will illustrate by means of a worldly analogy. In Greece, first there were wise men σοϕοι. Then Pythagoras came along and with him came categories of reflection with respect to being a wise man, reduplication [→ 201,19], so he did not even dare call himself a wise man, but he called himself a ϕιλοσοϕος. Was this a step backward or a step forward―or wasn’t it because Pythagoras had understood more ideally what it would really mean to be a wise man––what would be required of one in order to call oneself a wise man―that there was wisdom in his not even daring to call himself a wise man” (AN, 137; Pap. X 5 B 107, p. 297). See also journal entry NB6:73 in KJN 5, 54– 55 and the accompanying explanatory note. Socratic: to ask questions in order to starve out empty knowledge] Refers to Socrates, who was known for his talent for asking questions. See, e.g., Apology, 21b–23b, in Platonis opera quae extant [Surviving Works of Plato], ed. Fr. Ast, 11 vols. (Leipzig, 1819–1832; ASKB 1144–1154), vol. 8 (1825), pp. 108–113; Plato: The Collected Dialogues, including the Le�ers (→ 166,30), pp. 7–9. See also The Concept of Irony (CI, 31–41; SKS 1, 93–103), where Kierkegaard discusses Socrates’ talent for asking questions. Grundtvig] Nikolai Frederik Severin Grundtvig (1783–1872), Danish theologian, priest, author of hymns, historian, politician; from May 1839, priest at Vartov Hospital Church in Copenhagen.

2

Now that the councillor of state is dead] i.e., Councillor of State Terkild Olsen’s death (→ 159m,1). she] i.e., Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). with whom I … sought reconciliation] See journal entry NB7:10, where Kierkegaard tells of his failed a�empt at reconciliation with Terkild Olsen on August 26, 1848, in KJN 5, 83–84. suggested to her that she be the one to break off the engagement] See entry Not15:4.h (→ 159m,4),

1

200

5

2 5

14

201

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 105–106

19

20

22 23

where Kierkegaard writes: “During these two months [from August 11 to October 12, 1841] of deception I took the precaution of saying to her straightforwardly and at regular intervals: give in, let me go; you won’t endure it. To which she replied passionately that she would rather endure everything than let me go. I also suggested that things could be made to look as if it was she who broke off from me, in order to spare her all the indignities. She would not have it, she answered that if she could endure the other, she certainly could also endure this” (KJN 3, 434). reduplication] An expression o�en used by Kierkegaard to designate a relationship of reflection in which something abstract is repeated (actualized) in concrete practice or existence. my decision at that time based on ma�ers of religion and suffering] See journal entry Not15:4, where Kierkegaard writes: “the next day I saw that I had made a mistake. Penitent that I was, my vita ante acta, my melancholia, that was enough” (KJN 3, 432). And a li�le later he writes: “Had I not been a penitent, had not had my vita ante acta, not been melancholic―the alliance with her would have made me happier than I had ever dreamed of becoming. But…there was a divine protest. The marriage. I had to conceal enormously much from her, to base the whole thing on an untruth” (KJN 3, 433). See also entry Not15:13: “the fact that it was a religious collision must needs elude her completely, she who was not the least bit developed religiously, and least of all developed to sense that sort of religious collision” (KJN 3, 442). her marriage] i.e., her marriage to J. F. Schlegel (→ 159m,2). it would be her death] → 218,19. Could also refer to something said by Regine Olsen’s father, see entry Not15:4, where Kierkegaard relates that the day his relationship to Regine was over he went directly from her to the Royal Theater, where he encountered Terkild Olsen, who asked to speak with him: “We went to his home together. He was in despair. He said: It will be the death of her; she is in u�er despair. I said: I will try to calm her down, but the ma�er is se�led” (KJN 3, 434). See also entry Not15:5 (KJN 3, 437) and entry NB:210, from May 1847 (KJN 4, 123).

1849

543

I was “a scoundrel”] See entry Not15:4.l, where Kierkegaard writes: “To exit from the relationship as a scoundrel, if possible as a first-class scoundrel, was the only thing that could be done in order to get her afloat, to speed her to a marriage; but it was also exquisite gallantry” (KJN 3, 434– 435). See also entry Not15:9, where Kierkegaard recounts that he had heard that Regine was angry with him for the way in which he had broken off their engagement, and he adds: “She forgets that she herself said that if I could convince her that I was a scoundrel she could easily come to terms with the entire business. And now she complains about the manner, presumably ‘the scoundrelly manner.’ And incidentally, if that manner had not been employed, we would probably still be in the process of breaking up. To this extent it is right to complain about ‘the manner,’ since in no other manner could I have succeeded” (KJN 3, 439). See also entry Not15:11.a: “In order to help her, I have put up with being seen as a scoundrel in the eyes of everyone else―indeed, I have done everything to promote this” (KJN 3, 440). as I have so o�en said to myself, … I am the guarantor of her marriage] See, e.g., journal entry NB7:10, from the beginning of September 1848, where Kierkegaard writes: “The fact that I am a scoundrel, or at any rate someone who wanted to be something great in the world, is and will continue to be the keystone of her marriage” (KJN 5, 83). “her”] Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2).

24

1

201m

God-Man] → 198,39. he did not live more than 34 years] In Kierkegaard’s time it was widely held that Jesus was thirty years old when he was baptized by John the Baptist, and that his public ministry lasted three years. See G. B. Winer, Biblisches Realwörterbuch zum Handgebrauch für Studirende, Kandidaten, Gymnasiallehrer und Predi-ger [Specialized Biblical Dictionary for Use as a Handbook for Students, Graduates, Preparatory School Teachers, and Preachers], 2 vols., 2nd ed. (Leipzig, 1833–1838 [1820]; ASKB 70–71), vol. 1, pp. 654–667, where it is explained that according the three synoptic Gospels, Jesus’ public activity lasted one year,

10

202

28

12

544

17

202

22

25

27

32 33

203

203

18

23

25

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 106–110

while according the gospel of John, it lasted three years. hardly live to be more than 34 years old] Presumably an allusion to the fact that Kierkegaard thought that he would die before he reached the age of thirty-four, but to his surprise he did not do so; see journal entry NB:210, from May 1847 (KJN 4, 123), and Hans Brøchner’s recollections of Kierkegaard in Bruce H. Kirmmse, ed. and trans., Encounters with Kierkegaard (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1996), p. 240. scorned, insulted, mocked, spat upon] Basing his account on the New Testament, Kierkegaard wrote on several occasions that Christ was scorned, insulted, and spat upon; see, e.g., journal NB10:112 (KJN 5, 326) from ca. March 1849, and the first of the “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays” included in Christian Discourses from 1848 (CD, 259; SKS 10, 272). A person of high rank, who lives only in the most distinguished “circles,”] Kierkegaard may be thinking of H. L. Martensen (→ 164,24). Xt “associated with sinners and tax collectors and ate with them] The first three gospels contain a number of accounts of Jesus’ associating and eating with tax collectors and sinners, people who were looked down upon. velvet-covered paunch] → 184,34. Xt sent forth his “disciples,” … neither purse nor staff] See Mt 10:1–42, esp. vv. 9–10; see also Lk 10:1–12, esp. vv. 3–4. become liable to the judgment of eternity] Presumably an allusion to Mt 12:36–37. In the sermon … on the text … the world hates you] See Martin Luther’s sermon on the epistle 1 Jn 3:13–18 for the second Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, in En christelig Postille (→ 146,13), vol. 2, pp. 320–328; p. 321; see esp. col. 2, where Luther writes: “But―St. John admonishes―do not be astonished, my dear brothers, if the world hates you.” The next Sunday … loved neither by God nor hum. beings] Refers to Martin Luther’s sermon on the epistle 1 Pet 5:5–11 for the third Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, in En christelig Postille, vol. 2, pp. 329–338. The sermon is divided into four

1849

parts, of which the first (pp. 329–331) treats humility, stating: “for humility is the most beautiful virtue in Christendom; it is absolutely necessary for maintaining peace and order among people. But it is especially seemly for the young; it makes them beloved of God and humanity, and it produces many good fruits” (p. 329). ― God opposes the proud: See 1 Pet 5:5. the same sermon … how the Christian must suffer] Refers to the second part of the sermon “Cast All Your Cares upon Him, for He Cares for You” (from 1 Pet 5:7), pp. 331–334, where Luther begins: “Indeed, one sees every day how pious people are tormented and persecuted and must be the rejected of the world.…Yes, the believer does and suffers what he must, for he knows that he has been called to do this, but he commends the sufferings to God, and thus endures it well despite everything that plagues him” (p. 332, col.1). And further: “Therefore, even though he must suffer all sorts of hindrances, torments, and misfortune, the Christian endures cheerfully, saying, ‘Dear Lord God, you have commanded that I believe, learn, rule, and act in this manner. I will venture to do so in your name, and I will commend unto you whatever will be my lot on this account’” (p. 334, col. 1). at the end of the 1st part of Works of Love] Refers to the conclusion of discourse 5, “Our Duty to Remain in Love’s Debt to One Another,” which constitutes the conclusion of the “First Series” of Works of Love (1847); see WL, 191–204, esp. 191–192; SKS 9, 190–203, esp. 191. that I am scorned] → 167,27 and → 187,8.

30

37

2

204

thinks one will die tomorrow … Let us eat and drink] Allusion to 1 Cor 15:32. Seek first God’s kingdom] Allusion to Mt 6:33 (→ 156,5). these 30 to 40 years] Refers to the generally held view that thirty-three years was a generation. sensory-psychic category] Variant: “sensory-psychic” changed from “sensory”. of providing for itself] Variant: added.

11

204

a Catastrophe in My Public Life] Refers to Corsaren’s a�ack on Kierkegaard (→ 165,13) and its consequences (→ 167,27 and → 187,8).

27

15 21 21 23

204

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 110 1849

28

205

3

5

Cph.] Variant: first wri�en “Denmark”. the great pseudonym] Refers to Frater Taciturnus (Latin, “the taciturn brother”), the pseudonymous author of “‘Guilty?’/ ‘Not Guilty?’ A Story of Suffering. Psychological Experiment,” the third part of Stages on Life’s Way (1845) (SLW, 185–397; SKS 6, 173–454) and of the articles “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner” and “The Dialectical Result of a Literary Police Action” (→ 153,20). The expression “the great pseudonym” is probably an allusion to the article “How the Itinerant Philosopher Found the Itinerant Actual Editor of Corsaren,” which appeared in Corsaren, no. 276, January 2, 1846, cols. 1–6, where it stated: “Here in the city lives a great and famous hermit and philosopher called Frater Taciturnus or the silent brother” (col. 3). See also Corsaren, no. 279, January 23, 1846, where Frater Taciturnus is called “Taciturnus the Great,” (col. 1). venerated by mob vulgarity … sought friendship from this quarter] See Frater Taciturnus’s article “The Dialectical Result of a Literary Police Action,” in which he indirectly speaks of Kierkegaard as “someone who has been praised and immortalized in this journal” (COR, 47; SV2 13, 468). This refers to the fact that M. A. Goldschmidt (→ 205,15) had earlier praised some of Kierkegaard’s books in Corsaren. When Kierkegaard published The Concept of Irony in 1841, for example, it was reviewed by one of Corsaren’s part-time employees, but Goldschmidt himself added this postscript: “When we acknowledge that despite its surprising language, Mr. Kierkegaard’s dissertation is of interest to those who have the patience to read it through, this acknowledgment―be it noted, when viewed in combination with what has been wri�en above―shows Mr. K. all the justice that is his due” (Corsaren, no. 51, October 22, 1841, col. 8; see COR, 93). Goldschmidt reviewed Either/Or in the March 10, 1843, issue of Corsaren, writing: “This author is a mighty spirit, he is an intellectual aristocrat: he mocks the entire human race, shows its wretchedness, but he has a right to do so, he is an unusual intellect” (no. 129, col. 1; see COR, 93–95). Finally, Kierkegaard received mention on November 14, 1845, when his pseud-

545

onym Victor Eremita was praised at the expense of the National Liberal politician and journalist Orla Lehmann: “for Lehmann will die and be forgo�en, but Victor Eremita will never die” (no. 269, col. 14; see COR, 96). even the editors] Refers primarily to M. A. Goldschmidt. Starting in January 1846, Goldschmidt’s name appeared as publisher at the bo�om of the last page of Corsaren. (See the next note.) Goldschmidt became unsure of himself, traveled abroad] In his memoirs, Livs Erindringer og Resultater [Memories and Results of My Life], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1877), vol. 1, pp. 428–429, Goldschmidt relates how Kierkegaard ran into him on Myntergade “and walked past me with an intense and extremely embi�ered look, without either wanting to greet me or to be greeted” (see Kirmmse, Encounters with Kierkegaard [→ 202,17], p. 75). Goldschmidt continues, “There was something in that intense, wild look that, as it were, pulled the rug out from under the higher right upon which Kierkegaard had previously insisted, and which I had been unable (but had also been unwilling) to see, despite the fact that I certainly sensed its presence. I felt accused and oppressed: The Corsair had triumphed in the ba�le, yet I myself had acquired a false sense of being number one. But my spirit felt yet another protest arise during that burden-filled moment: I was not the sort of person to be looked down upon, and I could prove it. Walking through the streets, and before I reached home, I arrived at a firm decision to give up The Corsair” (Encounters with Kierkegaard, pp. 75–76). Later on in his memoirs, Goldschmidt relates that he traveled abroad a�er having resigned from Corsaren and sold it to xylographer A.C.F. Flinch for about 1,500 rix-dollars. On October 7, 1846, Goldschmidt traveled to Germany and returned to Denmark a�er a year abroad. ― Goldschmidt: Meïr Aron Goldschmidt (1819–1887), Danish Jewish journalist and publicist, author of works including En Jøde. Novelle [A Jew: Novella] (by the pseudonym Adolph Meyer, edited and published by M. Goldschmidt) (Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB 1547). Goldschmidt founded Corsaren (→ 165,13) in October 1840 and

14

15

546

16

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 110

was the journal’s real editor until October 1846, when he sold it and embarked on a yearlong journey abroad; starting in December 1847, he published and contributed to the monthly journal Nord og Syd [North and South], in which he argued for universal suffrage and a more democratic constitution. P. L. Møller sheepishly emerged under his own name and bowed] Refers to P. L. Møller’s article “To Hr. Frater Taciturnus, Chief of the Third Division of Stages on Life’s Way,” which appeared in Fædrelandet, no. 2079, December 29, 1845, col. 16665, signed “Your most respectful, P. L. Møller” (see Bl.art., pp. 233–234; COR, 104–105). The letter was a rejoinder to Kierkegaard’s sarcastic anonymous article “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner,” which had appeared in Fædrelandet the day before, where Kierkegaard, alias Frater Taciturnus, replied to Møller’s impertinent critique of Stages on Life’s Way (1845), in particular of “‘Guilty?’/ ‘Not Guilty?’” (→ 205,3), which Møller had included in his essay “Et Besøg i Sorø” [A Visit in Sorø], published in Gæa, æsthetisk Aarbog 1846 [Gaea, Aesthetic Annual], ed. P. L. Møller (Copenhagen, 1846), pp. 144–187, esp. pp. 172–180. By the term “sheepishly” Kierkegaard apparently alludes to the fact that Møller’s essay was cast in the form of a fictional conversation among some of Copenhagen’s literary critics, and that this prompted Taciturnus to write: “If there is anything unpleasant about Hr. P. L. Møller’s daring, it is more the offense toward a poet like Prof. Hauch and his private life. The fact that the scene is set in Hr. Prof. Hauch’s house, and that he participates in the conversation, naturally lends interest to it. But it seems rather impertinent to recompense oneself in that way for―yes, for what?―for having been received hospitably by a famous man” (COR, 40; SV2 13, 461). In his article, Møller defends himself by stating that there has been “a slight inaccuracy of fact,” and he makes the following admission: “Yes, not one single one of those speakers is mentioned by name, which would have been all the more difficult, inasmuch as the conversation (with which a calm reader will easily agree) did not actually

1849

take place, but is fictional garb for some critical remarks, not all of which appear to have pleased you. I confess that news such as this is not among the most pleasant things an author must impart” (Bl.art., pp. 233–234; COR, 105). ― P. L. Møller: Peder Ludvig Møller (1814–1865), a Danish author, poet, and critic, served as editor of the polemical journal Arena in 1843, and in the years 1845–1847 he published the aesthetic annual, Gæa. Møller also contributed articles to various journals, including “satirical critiques and poems in Corsaren,” as he himself described his work in T. H. Erslew’s Almindeligt Forfa�er-Lexicon [Universal Encyclopedia of Authors], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1843–1853; ASKB 954–969), vol. 2 (1847), p. 406. He published some of his literary pieces in Kritiske Skizzer fra Aarene 1840–47 [Critical Sketches from the Years 1840–1847], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1847). In addition to the critique published in Gæa, he also published a negative review of Concluding Unscientific Postscript in Kjøbenhavnsposten, nos. 73 and 74, March 27 and 28, 1846, under the name “Prosper naturalis de molinasky.” subsequently he, too, traveled abroad] On May 15, 1846, P. L. Møller received a government grant for travel abroad, but he seems not to have traveled until the end of 1847; see Goldschmidt, Livs Erindringer og Resultater, vol. 1, p. 433. The Corsair was lost] Presumably an allusion to the fact that Corsaren (→ 165,13) was in decline, as was its circulation: in the mid-1840s it had a press run of three thousand copies (see Goldschmidt’s Livs Erindringer og Resultater), but by 1848 it had only one thousand subscribers―though its press run is estimated to have been about two thousand at that time; see De danske aviser 1634–1989 (→ 165,15), vol. 1, p. 170. this step] An allusion to the article “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner,” in which Frater Taciturnus identified P. L. Møller with Corsaren and asked that he himself might soon apprear in Corsaren because he could not accept being the only Danish author who had thus far not been abused, but only praised by the journal (COR, 46; SV2 13, 467). This is also an allusion to the a�ack that Frater Taciturnus directed at Corsaren in the

17

18

20

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 110 1849

27

29 29 34

206

2

article “The Dialectical Result of a Literary Police Action,” in which he writes that he is taking “the step for the sake of others,” namely, the step of “requesting that I myself be abused” (COR, 47; SV2 13, 468). They all remained silent] Alludes to Kierkegaard’s perception that no one among “the more cultivated classes” or “the be�er sort of journalists” issued a rejoinder to Corsaren during its a�ack on him and the public ridicule of him that followed. See, e.g., a journal entry from the summer of 1850 in Journal NB18, where Kierkegaard writes the following under the heading “Fædrelandet”: “I acted. Gjødvad [J. F. Giødwad] stood impatiently at my side, waiting for the article in which I demanded to be abused. Either one thing or the other: either they must adhere to the view that that journal is to be ignored―and in that case not accept my article, even though I have asked them to do so; or (and this was the truth) they realized that the position was so desperate and the public situation was so chaotic that action must be taken―and then they would have to support my conduct, which required only the merest mention. They did not do it, betrayed me.…Fædrelandet is perhaps guiltier in its conduct toward me than is Goldschmidt. And in any case [there is] always the guilt of not having a�empted to provide a li�le direction with one single word of witness” (Pap. X 3 A 88, p. 70). See also a journal entry from May 1852 in Journal NB25, where Kierkegaard writes that from the moment he a�acked Corsaren, “The newspaper Fædrelandet never knew that I existed, presumably out of anxiety concerning the public” (NB25:112 in KJN 8; SKS 24, 526). Only the Jewish publicist Go�lieb Siesby (1803–1884), who started as a shoemaker and became an editor and publisher of various newspapers a�er 1839, went into the breach for Kierkegaard with his Epistel til “Corsaren” Meyer Adolph Goldschmidt [Epistle to the “Corsair” Meyer Adolph Goldschmidt] (Copenhagen, 1846). gradually] Variant: added. would for the most part be irretrievably lost] Variant: “would” and “be” changed from “was”. financial resources] → 153,21. I asked the journalists … not to intervene] See

547

journal entry NB18:44 from the summer of 1850 (→ 205,27), where Kierkegaard recalls: “In the course of a conversation, when it seemed as if I was being asked whether they ought to do something (without this question being asked directly), I always said: Just do nothing” (KJN 7; SKS 23, 277). ― the journalists I knew: Refers particularly to Jens Finsteen Giødwad (1811–1891), Danish jurist and journalist; editor of Kjøbenhavnsposten 1837–1839, and from 1839 coeditor and publisher of Fædrelandet. He assisted Kierkegaard with proofreading, and during the publication of the pseudonymous writings of 1843–1845 Kierkegaard o�en made use of him to carry out business errands with his printer Bianco Luno (→ 159,2) and with his publisher and bookseller C. A. Reitzel (→ 234,11). Kierkegaard repeated this in 1849, when he sent the manuscript of the pseudonymous Two Minor Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 150,7) to Giødwad for delivery to the printer Louis Klein; see journal entry NB11:8 in the present volume. On Kierkegaard’s friendship with Giødwad, see journal entry NB9:28, from January 1849, where Kierkegaard writes, “Giødvad is my personal friend” (KJN 5, 222), and the previously cited entry NB18:44 from the summer of 1850, where Kierkegaard again calls Giødwad his personal friend and relates that he has “spoken with him every single evening during the last 4 years” (KJN 7; SKS 23, 280). Kierkegaard may also have had in mind Parmo Carl Ploug (1813–1894), Danish journalist, politician, and author; from May 1841, coeditor with Giødwad of Fædrelandet. He may also have been thinking of Edvard Philip Hother Hage (1816–1873), Danish jurist, politician, and journalist, in the 1840s a contributor to Fædrelandet, especially in the field of foreign affairs, and from January 1847 to May 1848 editor of Dansk Folkeblad [Danish People’s Paper]. In any case, in journal entry NB17:64, probably from April 1850, Kierkegaard writes: “Privately, Heiberg and Ploug and Hage (at that time editor of Folkeblad) and others have thanked me,” i.e., for his a�ack on Corsaren (KJN 7; SKS 23, 210–211). when I retire … the modest position of a country priest] Refers to the circumstance that even as early as the period following publication of Either/

9

548

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 110–113

Or (1843), and again following the publication of Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846), and repeatedly therea�er, Kierkegaard had considered stopping his writing and seeking a position as a priest in the country. See, e.g., journal entries JJ:415 (KJN 2, 257), NB:7, NB: 57, and NB2:136 (KJN 4, 16, 50, and 193–194). See also chap. 3, “The Role of Governance in My Writings,” in The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1) (PV, 86; SV2 13, 611). 206

15 15 17

20

22 25

27

Goldschmidt] → 205,15. for having mocked me] A reference to the a�acks on Kierkegaard in Corsaren (→ 165,13). Mockery was of course the task he set for himself] See chap. 2, “Forsvar for Udgiveren” [In Defense of the Publisher], of the article “Svar til Fædrelandet af 24de, 27de, 29de og 31te December 1847” [Reply to Fædrelandet, December 24, 27, 29, and 31, 1847] in Nord og Syd. Et Maanedskri� [North and South: A Monthly], ed. and pub. M. Goldschmidt, vol. 1, first quarter, 1848 (Copenhagen, 1848), pp. 209–255; p. 224, where he writes: “the comic and satirical element in it, which garnered such approval in the greater public, carried him [Goldschmidt, the editor of Corsaren] along, and instead of doing justice to each of the parties―which then ba�led so fiercely and passionately―he exploited their injustice in aesthetically wi�y essays. Corsaren assumed a role, a negative role, which proved unchangeable.” First, that he was editor for 6 years and did not a�ack me] Refers to the fact that M. A. Goldschmidt founded Corsaren in 1840 and was its editor until October 1846, and that he did not a�ack Kierkegaard until January 2, 1846 (→ 165,13 and → 205,27). fla�ered me and deified me] → 205,5. because I gave the order―and because of the way in which I gave it] Reference to the fact that Kierkegaard, alias Frater Taciturnus, himself asked to be “abused” in Corsaren (→ 205,27). Mag. K.] Kierkegaard, who defended his thesis, On the Concept of Irony, for the degree of magister on September 29, 1841.

1849

viewed himself as a hired hand. (Concerning this … present journal)] Refers to journal entry NB11:199 in the present volume. See also entry NB6:7 in KJN 5, 10.

29

lo�ery … the strangest combinations] Possible allusion to Kongelig Dansk Lo�o-Calender [Royal Danish Lo�o Calendar], published annually, the contents of which included tables with calculations of possible winnings in connection with a great many different combinations. types] Allusion to typology, the exegetical method according to which persons, events, and situations in the OT are understood as anticipating persons, events, and situations in the NT.

36

206

1

207

“What does the person who has not been tried know?”] Danish translation of the quite free rendering of Sir 34:9 in Fenelon’s Werke religiösen Inhalts (→ 207,9), vol. 1, p. 165. modern so-called speculative dogmatics] See, e.g., H. L. Martensen’s lectures on “Speculative Dogmatics,” the first twenty-three sections of which Kierkegaard summarized in entry KK:11 (KJN 2, 342–352). In Af mit Levnet (→ 164,24) vol. 2 (1883), p. 3, Martensen reports on his lectures on dogmatics: “I announced them as speculative dogmatics in order to indicate what could be expected of them, even though I later changed this title to the more ordinary Christian dogmatics”; see the title Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19). See also, e.g., F. Baader, Vorlesungen über speculative Dogmatik [Lectures on Speculative Dogmatics] 1 vol. in 5 pts. (Stu�gart, 1828–1838; ASKB 396), and Ph. K. Marheineke, Die Grundlehren der christlichen Dogmatik als Wissenscha� [Principles of Christian Dogmatics as a Science], 2nd ed. (Berlin, 1827 [1819]; ASKB 644). On “speculative,” → 151,29. Fenelon … cites the passage in Sirach as 34:9] Refers to no. 9, “Wider die Versuchungen” [Against Temptations], in “Verschiedene christliche Gedanken und Weisungen über manche für die Go�seligkeit, Si�en und das inwendige Leben sehr wichtige Materien” [Various Christian Thoughts on Many Ma�ers Important for Godliness, Morals, and the Inner Life], in Fenelon’s

6

207

7

9

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 113–115

11

207

36

208

17 30

209

19

37

Werke religiösen Inhalts [Fenelon’s Religious Works], trans. Ma�hias Claudius, 2nd ed., 3 vols. (Hamburg, 1823 [1800–1811]; ASKB 1914), vol. 1, pp. 163–167; p. 165. ― Fenelon: François de Salignac de la Mothe-Fénelon (1651–1715), French archbishop and author, noted for having educated the duke of Burgundy, who at the time was widely regarded as the likely successor of his grandfather, Louis XIV. ― 34:9: In the authorized Danish translation of Kierkegaard’s day, as in the NRSV, the passage in question is Sirach 34:10, but Kierkegaard here follows Fénelon, who cites the passage in a note as Sir 34:9. The same passage in Fenelon … Tobias 12:13 … not lack for spiritual trial] Kierkegaard’s Danish rendering of Fénelon’s free translation of Tob 12:13. first-class accommodations in the madhouse] Here Kierkegaard is referring to his “accommodations” at Corsaren (→ 165,13). Corsaren had identified Kierkegaard’s pseudonym Frater Taciturnus― and by extension, Kierkegaard himself―with “crazy Nathanson,” a horse dealer who had been put in the city insane asylum Bidstrupgård and who had subsequently made his madness quite clear in the newspaper Corve�en Politivennen [Corve�e, Friend of the Police]; see Corsaren, no. 278, January 16, 1846, esp. col. 14, where Taciturnus himself is admi�ed to Bidstrupgård; see also Corsaren, no. 280, January 30, 1846, cols. 9–11, and no. 285, March 6, 1846, col. 8. I had to deal with The Corsair] → 153,20 and → 205,27. On Corsaren, → 165,13. There are 1000 clergy] → 166,13. that is what Martensen is capable of] Presumably an allusion to H. L. Martensen’s preface to Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19), p. iii (→ 151,23). Fr. Bremer to bless Denmark with her judgment] Refers to Fredrika Bremer’s series of articles, Lif i norden [Life in Scandinavia], published under the initials “Fr. B–r” in Götheborgs Handelsoch Sjöfarts-Tidning [Gothenburg Business and Shipping Times], no. 177, August 1, 1849; no. 181, August 6, 1849; no. 182, August 7, 1849; and Bihang till Götheborgs Handels- och Sjöfarts-

1849

549

Tidning [Supplement to Gothenburg Business and Shipping Times], no. 189, August 15, 1849. The series contains Bremer’s impressions from a stay in Copenhagen that lasted from the autumn of 1848 until June 1849. The articles were collected, translated into Danish, and published as the Liv i Norden af Frederikke Bremer, Forfa�erinde til de svenske Hverdagshistorier [Life in Scandinavia by Fredrika Bremer, Author of the Swedish Stories of Everyday Life] (Copenhagen, 1849). The Danish translation was announced as having been published in Adresseavisen, no. 214, September 12, 1849. On her blessing and judgment of Denmark, see, e.g., Liv i Norden, pp. 41–42: “Peaceful, fruitful years, good rulers and statesmen have in recent decades made the country wealthy and happy. At the present time, li�le Denmark is one of the most blossoming and well-governed states in Europe. The sense of this buoys the people’s naturally elastic and sanguine temperament.…Never have poets and authors been more productive, never has the public been more receptive, has it read more or taken a greater interest in poetry and romance; and it has been many years since the art academy’s exhibition has offered such a wealth of excellent works of art.” ― Fr. Bremer: Fredrika Bremer (1801–1865), Swedish author; debuted in 1828 with the book Teckningar ur Hvardagslifvet [Sketches from Everyday Life], which was followed by a series of novels in which Bremer― like the Danish writer Thomasine Gyllembourg, who wrote under the pseudonym “Author of ‘A Story of Everyday Life’”―sketched the everyday life of the cultivated middle class. Her books were widely read in Europe and the United States. Starting in the 1840s, Bremer concerned herself increasingly with religious ma�ers, and beginning in 1848 she traveled abroad, first to Copenhagen, from which she continued to tour the rest of Denmark and therea�er London and the United States. echoes of what the people concerned have said to her] Apparent allusion to the long segment in Liv i Norden, pp. 20–37, where Bremer writes in praise of Bishop J. P. Mynster; Pastor N.F.S. Grundtvig; the authors Adam Oehlenschläger, B. S. Ingemann, Henrik Hertz, Carsten Hauch,

38

550

210

1

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 115

Frederik Paludan-Müller, Christian Winther, Johan Ludvig Heiberg, H. C. Andersen, and Steen Steensen Blicher; the sculptors J. A. Jerichau and H. V. Bissen; the painters Wilhelm Marstrand, Niels Simonsen, Jørgen Sonne, C. A. Schleisner, David Moniers, Vilhelm Melbye, C. F. Sørensen, P. C. Skovgaard, F.C.J. Kjærskou, C. G. Rump, C. A. Jensen, O. D. O�esen, J. V. Gertner, H.A.G. Schiø�, and Elisabeth Baumann; the composers J.P.E. Hartmann, Henrik Rung, and Niels W. Gade; the lexicographer Christian Molbech; the jurist A. S. Ørsted; the natural scientists H. C. Ørsted, J. G. Forchhammer, J.J.A. Worsaae, and J. F. Schouw; the physicians O. L. Bang, S. M. Trier, and S.A.V. Stein; the philosopher F. C. Sibbern; and the theologian H. L. Martensen. This is followed by a discussion of Kierkegaard. Martensen, who has had quite a lot to do with her] See Liv i Norden, pp. 36–37, where Bremer writes: “A seedsman in the highest sense of the word, H. L. Martensen, still young and at the peak of his powers, with his living words and his philosophical writings (highly regarded in Sweden as in Denmark), he broadcasts the seeds of a new development of the Church’s religious life and of scientific scholarship through a more profound understanding of what they essentially are, transfiguring the life of faith into the life of reason by wedding deep feelings with logical thought. In his Dogmatics [Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19)], soon to be published, we await a more complete presentation of his views. And what we have seen of the works he has already published awakens hope of a rebirth of ecclesiastical life in ma�ers both great and small, in the state and in the heart of the individual. The unusual clarity and distinctness of language with which this richly gi�ed thinker can present the most profound speculative principles, and the interesting and ingenious manner of his teaching make him a popular writer. In his Dogmatics we await a major work, and not only for the learned. It is about time that theology developed popular appeal. That was what Our Lord did eighteen hundred years ago.” H. L. Martensen himself reports on his connection with Fredrika Bremer in his memoir Af mit Levnet (→ 164,24), vol. 2 (1883), pp. 134–135: “As it happened,

1849

the first person who read my Dogmatics bit by bit in proofs, was a lady, the poet Frederike Bremer, author of the Swedish ‘Stories of Everyday Life.’ That year she was staying in Copenhagen and frequently came to my house, speaking with me a great deal about religious ma�ers and wanting to learn about dogmatics.…I recall with joy the many evening hours that she came to my room and spoke of what had moved and edified her in the work―she thought that I had constructed the intellectual equivalent of a cathedral―but she also set forth her doubts and misgivings. Even though she has a religious temperament and a Christian tendency, like so many cultivated people, she was ensnared in a one-sided humanism and had difficulties in acquiring a consciousness of sin and guilt.…Therefore we had to have a number of conversations about sin and grace. And she always interested me as a member of the congregation who a�empted to absorb my presentation of the doctrines of the faith.” send me a courteous note inviting me to have a conversation with her] See the undated letter from Fredrika Bremer to Victor Eremita, the pseudonymous editor of Either/Or (LD, 286; B&A 1, 225). The le�er refers to Ascension Day, which in 1849 fell on Thursday, May 17. On Tuesday, May 15, Fredrika Bremer sent yet another note (LD, 287; B&A 1, 226), this time addressed to “Theology Graduate, Mr. Søren Kierkegaard.” I did not reply as I had originally thought of doing] See Kierkegaard’s dra� reply to Fredrika Bremer (LD, 288; B&A 1, 226–227). “No, many thanks, I do not dance.”] Allusion to the conclusion of the preface of Philosophical Fragments (1844), where Johannes Climacus writes: “The thought of death is an excellent dancer, my dance partner; every person is too heavy for me; therefore I beseech per deos obsecro [Latin, “I ask by the gods”]: Let no one invite me to dance, for I do not dance” (PF, 8; SKS 4, 217). So I get to hear in print that I am “inaccessible.”] See the next note. Frederikke has made me into a psychologist … with a significant audience of ladies] Refers to Fredrika Bremer’s discussion of Kierkegaard in Liv i Norden, pp. 37–38: “Whereas from his cen-

3

4

6

8 10

210

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 115 tral standpoint the brilliant Martensen sheds light upon the entire sphere of existence and upon all the phenomena of life, Søren Kierkegaard stands on his isolated pillar like a Simeon Stylites, his gaze fixed uninterruptedly on a single point. He places his microscope over this point, carefully investigating the tiniest atoms, the most fleeting motions, the innermost alterations. And it is about this that he speaks and writes endless folios. For him, everything is to be found at this point. But this point is―the human heart. And―because he unceasingly has this changeable heart reflect itself in the Eternal and Unchangeable that ‘became flesh and dwelt among us,’ because in the course of his exhausting dialectical wanderings he says divine things―he has gained a not inconsiderable audience in happy, pleasant Copenhagen, particularly among ladies. The philosophy of the heart must be of importance to them. Concerning the philosopher who writes on these ma�ers, people speak well and ill―and strangely. He who writes for ‘that single individual’ lives alone, inaccessible and, when all is said and done, known by no one. During the daytime one sees him walking in the midst of the crowd, up and down the busiest streets of Copenhagen for hours at a time. At night his lonely dwelling is said to glow with light. The cause of this [behavior] seems to be less his wealth and independence than a sickly and irritable nature, which finds occasion to be displeased with the sun itself when its rays shine in a direction other than what he wishes. Something like the transformation about which he writes so o�en seems to have taken place within him, however, and it has led the doubt-plagued author of Either/Or through Anxiety and Trembling [sic] to the brilliant heights from which he speaks with inexhaustible bombast about The Gospel of Sufferings [see the title of the third part of Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits from 1847], about Works of Love, and about ‘the mysteries of the inner life.’ S. Kierkegaard is one of the rare, involuted types who have been found in Scandinavia (more frequently in Sweden than in Denmark) since the earliest days, and it is to like-minded spirits that he speaks of the sphinx within the human breast and of the quiet, mysterious, and allpowerful heart.”

1849

551

really ridiculous] Variant: first wri�en “really ridiculous.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. his star is in decline at the university] See H. L. Martensen, Af mit Levnet (→ 164,24), vol. 2 (1883), where he relates that his lectures on “the history of modern philosophy and its relation to theology from Kant to Hegel,” when they were given in the winter of 1837–1838 “and every time they were repeated, were…a�ended by very large numbers” (pp. 3–4). Then, when he gave lectures on dogmatics, in which he could presuppose knowledge of modern philosophy, he entered “into a special relationship to Hegel, who was the great and famous philosopher of the age” (p. 4). A�er having emphasized that he did not regard himself as a “representative of Hegelianism” (p. 5), he writes that “without exaggeration, the effect of my lectures can be described as great and extraordinary. A new life and movement was present among theology students.…Certainly there were some for whom the whole business was a fad. Hegel was of course the man of the hour, and if one bore his seal, one stood at the pinnacle of the age. Others took Hegel seriously and became profoundly familiar with him. Among these there were some who could not accept that I was not a Hegelian.… They could not see that even if I o�en made use of Hegelian formulations, there was another view working its way to the fore in me―a view very different from the Hegelian. Among others there arose what could be called a hostile opposition to my deviations from Hegel. Indeed, it soon became clear that the Hegelian Le� gained acceptance among many of those in my audience, who opposed me from a pantheistic standpoint.…But I did have the satisfaction that a significant circle of the best minds and most profound natures understood me properly, understanding that a new version of Christian doctrine was working its way to the fore in my dogmatics―that here there was a religious speculation, a knowing that proceeded from faith and in which faith came to self-understanding” (pp. 5–7). See also the article “Den Danske Kirke, betragtet af en Engelskman” [The Danish Church, Observed by an Englishman] in Dansk Kirketidende (→ 150,7), August 26, 1849,

12

15

552

16

210m

1 2

3

210

22

24

25

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 115–117

vol. 4, no. 203, col. 783: “Martensen’s lectures at the university are received with great approval and have gathered about him a great crowd of auditors, old and young, of students from every branch of study. He has published a short, systematic presentation of morals [Grundrids til Moralphilosophiens System (→ 185,5)], which bears the stamp of his personality, and a presentation of Christian doctrine [Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 151,19)] can be expected to appear shortly.” R. Nielsen] → 192,20. According to the preface to Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed (→ 221,16), the lectures that form the basis of the book “were delivered in the university building during the winter of 1848 before a respectable number of listeners of both sexes” (pp. vi–vii). She lived here for quite a while] → 209,37. had physical intercourse with famous people] → 209,38 and → 210,1. ― physical intercourse: Confidential social contact. Here Kierkegaard is probably alluding to the fact that the expression actually means sexual relations―note that Kierkegaard writes: “but I was virtuous.” She wanted to have physical intercourse with me] → 210,3. her,] Variant: first wri�en “her.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. ― her: Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). with her pleading and tears] See entry Not15:5 (→ 159m,4): “to sense that judgmental voice within one―‘You have to let her go’―that is your punishment, and it will be intensified by seeing all her suffering, intensified by her prayers and tears, she, who does not suspect that it is your punishment, but believes that it is your hardheartedness that must be moved” (KJN 3, 444). included her in my relation to God and I keep her there] See entry Not15:5: “I once prayed to God for her, the dearest one, as for a gi�; there were also moments, when I caught sight of the possibility of realizing a marriage, when I thanked God for her as for a gi�; later I had to view her as God’s punishment of me; but I always traced her back to God, honestly maintained this position, even when, in desperation, she did everything to make me feel my own superiority” (KJN 3, 444).

1849

begging in Jesus’ name for me to remain with her] → 218,19. touched an anguished conscience] See entry Not15:5: “For me, the contents of that year of the engagement were really: the deliberations of an anguished conscience, Do you dare to become engaged, Do you dare to marry―alas, and at the same time she, the lovely child, walked by my side and was―the fiancée!” (KJN 3, 444). cannot do it] Variant: first wri�en “cannot do it.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence.

29

Now, presumably they are to reform the Church] A�er the fall of absolutism in March 1848, the cultus minister sent out a circular le�er on May 9, in which he presupposed that “the political transformations that have taken place will come to exercise a thoroughgoing effect on the Danish People’s Church, and that it will indeed be the government’s task to put into effect in the Church the same principles that are in the process of asserting themselves in the state”; it was not his intention, however, “to make any a�empt to support especially one or another theological or religious tendency in the Church,” but only to a�empt “to liberate and organize the forces that are present in the Church itself in order that, with an unprejudiced internal development, it will be able to survive the difficult struggles of the times, will be able to allow its own differences to emerge and be reconciled, will be able by its own strength to remedy its own shortcomings to the glory of God”; see, e.g., Dansk Kirketidende (→ 150,7), May 21, 1848, vol. 3, no. 141, col. 585. The Danish Constitution, adopted on June 5, 1849, contained a pledge that “the constitution of the People’s Church will be ordered by law” (§ 80) but otherwise le� unchanged existing arrangements in the Church. then they will convene synods] Refers to the cultus minister’s circular le�er of May 9, 1848 (see the preceding note), in which he advances his view “that there ought to be convened a representative gathering of the Church in which suggestions for the basic arrangements regarding Church affairs can be presented before any

6

30

32

7

211

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 117–118

8

8

final decisions are made concerning these matters”; see, e.g., Dansk Kirketidende, May 21, 1848, vol. 3, no. 141, col. 586. Kierkegaard may also be referring to the cultus minister’s circular le�er of October 7, 1848, in which he not only repeats the suggestion concerning a preparatory Church gathering, but also presents his own thoughts about how an actual synodal constitution for the Church could be organized and introduced; see, e.g., Dansk Kirketidende, December 10, 1848, vol. 4, no. 167, cols. 177–178, and December 24, 1848, no. 169, col. 4, cols. 230–232. But at a meeting in early May 1849, the constitutional assembly decided that there would not necessarily be convened “a meeting of the Church before the constitution of the People’s Church was ordered by law”; see, e.g., Dansk Kirketidende, May 20, 1849, vol. 4, no. 190, cols. 562–563; but there was continuing discussion about introduction of a synodal constitution for the Church that would transform it from a State Church (→ 167,34) to a People’s Church with a synodal structure, i.e., with a certain degree of self-governance. the most strictly orthodox people] The reference here cannot be determined unambiguously, but it could be an allusion to the strictest segment of the Grundtvigian movement, who liked to call themselves “orthodox.” even Rudelbach … as orthodox as possible] Refers to A. G. Rudelbach, Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip, dens Udartning og dens mulige Gjenreisning fornemmelig i Danmark. Et udførligt kirkeretligt og kirkehistorisk Votum for virkelig Religionsfrihed [The Evangelical Church’s Constitution: Its Origin and Principle, Its Decline, and Its Possible Restoration, Especially in Denmark. A Detailed Vote, Based on Canon Law and Church History, for Real Religious Freedom] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 171; abbreviated herea�er as Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip). In this work Rudelbach opposes a State Church arrangement (→ 167,34) and supports a separation of church and state. And in §§ 203–204, pp. 367–370, he argues for organizing the Church in synodal fashion, though in such a way that the synod does not stand “above, but beneath everything that constitutes the Church’s objec-

1849

553

tive and authoritative contents in the Word and the sacraments, in confession and worship,” and without the procedure of majority decision making: “All synodal negotiations must be carried on and concluded by what we could characterize as the Church’s spiritual principle, based on what the Apostle called ‘the revelation of the truth’ (2 Cor 4: 2), avoiding the elevation over conviction of the sluggish, dead principle of the majority. Church meetings are not worldly, political assemblies; if they are not supported by the Lord’s liberating and vivifying spirit, they are not deserving of existence, indeed, they do not exist. Synods with the majoritarian principle and the corresponding modern form of representation do not build the Church, but dissolve it” (p. 369). In Adresseavisen, no. 204, August 31, 1849, it was announced that Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip had “le� the press.” ― Rudelbach: Andreas Go�lob Rudelbach (1792–1862), Danish theologian, pastor, and author; theology graduate, 1820; dr. phil., 1822; pastor in Glauchau in the principality of Saxony, 1829–1845; lectured as a privatdocent at the University of Copenhagen, 1847–1848; from 1848, parish priest in Slagelse on Zealand. In his early years, while still a biblical theologian, Rudelbach was a strong adherent of N.F.S. Grundtvig and was his comradein-arms against rationalism, but he subsequently broke openly with him, coming ever closer to J. P. Mynster (→ 152,17) and H. L. Martensen (→ 151,19). produce a piece that jacks up the price of being a Xn so high] Refers to Practice in Christianity (→ 147,18). Mynster] → 152,17. supporter of the government] → 152,17. say nothing at all and] Variant: first wri�en “say nothing at all.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. something troubling in all this] Variant: first wri�en “something troubling in all this.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. what reminds me of my father] → 167,31. her] Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). the deception] → 201,24. See entry Not15:4.h,

16

26 31 36

3

212

8 10 14

212

554

15

16 17

19 21

26

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 118–119

where Kierkegaard calls the period from August 11 to October 12, 1841, the “two months of deception” (→ 201,14). cruelty … solicitude] See, e.g., entry Not15:4, where Kierkegaard writes of a conversation with Regine a�er the break: “She asked me: Will you never marry? I answered: Well, yes, in ten years, when I have begun to simmer down and need a lusty young miss to rejuvenate me. A necessary cruelty” (KJN 3, 434). And further on in entry Not15:14, “I had to affront and abandon her, and then in the two final months I had to be cruel in order to help her if possible. This, however, was perhaps most difficult for me. I had to continue this cruelty with what were truly the most honorable of intentions” (KJN 3, 443). And in entry Not15:15: “But the relationship had to be broken off, and I had to be cruel in order to help her― look, that is ‘fear and trembling’” (KJN 3, 444). her marriage] To J. F. Schlegel (→ 159m,2 and → 159,31). when I did indeed beg for her forgiveness … breaking of the engagement] Refers to the letter Kierkegaard sent to Regine Olsen together with his engagement ring on August 11, 1841 (→ 218,15), two months before the final break on October 12. Schlegel] → 159,31. I was the one who suggested that she take Schlegel] See entry Not15:5: “Assume that she believed it to be my will that she should marry Schlegel, that this was why, during the two final months, I had spoken so much about him (even if in a jesting, teasing manner) and that she ought to take him. And, true enough, this was my opinion and my wish” (KJN 3, 437). The wound I received from her hand … must remain a religious wound] See “Se�lement” in entry Not15:13: “But the swordplay itself, which she had to execute, was done in high style and was admirable. In a way, I placed the bow in her hand, I myself placed the arrow on it, showed her how she should aim―my idea was―and it was love―either I will become yours, or you will be allowed to wound me so deeply, wound me in my melancholia and in my relationship to God, so deeply, that although separated from you, I nonetheless remain yours” (KJN 3, 442).

1849

someone who had been a scoundrel] → 201,24. Loving] Variant: first wri�en: two hash marks (# #) apparently indicating the end of the entry. perhaps God … at all;] Variant: first wri�en instead of “all;” “all.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. more and more, that she was the beloved] Variant: changed from “most”. if I am to be a religious person, then there is a collision] → 201,20. I have borne] Variant: first wri�en: two hash marks (# #), apparently indicating the end of the entry.

30

A pagan has said … grief―it sits hindmost on the horse] Refers to the Roman poet Horace’s Odes, bk. 3, no. 1, vv. 37–40, in Q. Horatii Flacci opera [The Works of Quintus Horatius Flaccus (Horace)], stereotype ed. (Leipzig, 1828; ASKB 1248), p. 65: “But Fear and Foreboding climb as high as the owner; black Anxiety does not quit the bronze-beaked galley, and sits behind the horseman.” English translation from Horace, Odes and Epodes, ed. and trans. Niall Rudd, Loeb Classical Library (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2004), p. 143. The Danish translation of Kierkegaard’s time, Q. Horatius Flaccus’ samtlige Værker [The Complete Works of Horace], trans. J. Baden, 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1792–1793), vol. 1, p. 211, renders the passage as follows: “But fear and threats clamber up to the master; dark grief [Bekymring] does not abandon the copper-clad triple-decker and sits hindmost on the horse.” The Latin cura, rendered as “Anxiety” in the above-cited English translation and as Bekymring (“grief”) in Danish, can also be translated as “worry” or “care.” A pious man (Fenelon) has said … the more firmly the arrow becomes lodged in it] Refers to no. 14, “Von den innerlichen Wirkungen Go�es, um den Menschen zu dem wahren Ziel, dazu er uns geschaffen hat, zurück zu bringen” [On the Inward Workings of God to Bring People Back to the True Goal for Which We Were Created], in “Verschiedene christliche Gedanken und Weisungen” [Various Christian Thoughts and

12

33

6

213

22 30 32

14

214

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 119–120

19

214

25 28 31

36 39

215

7

18

21

Instructions], in Fenelon’s Werke religiösen Inhalts (→ 207,9), vol. 1, pp. 209–226; p. 219: “One is like a deer that has been wounded, that bears in its side the arrow by which it has been struck; the more it runs through the forest, trying to free itself from it, the more deeply it drives it in.” by Horace] → 214,12. ventured into something I could not realize] → 201,20. she] Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). she was so young] Regine Olsen turned eighteen on January 23, 1840, and Kierkegaard became engaged to her on September 10, 1840. the councillor of state] Regine Olsen’s father, Councillor of State Terkild Olsen (→ 159m,1). been somewhat unfair to Schlegel by accepting me] Refers to the circumstance that Regine Olsen appears to have had a relationship to J. F. Schlegel (→ 159,31) before she became engaged to Kierkegaard; see entry Not15:4 (→ 159m,4), where Kierkegaard relates how he sought out Regine Olsen on the street on September 8, 1840, and accompanied her home: “And when she spoke of a relationship to Schlegel I said, So let that relationship be a parenthesis” (KJN 3, 431). could not marry;] Variant: first wri�en “could not marry.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. “carried her with me out into the current.”] Cited freely from “‘Guilty?’/‘Not Guilty?’” in Stages on Life’s Way (1845), in which the principal male character Quidam (Latin, “someone or other”) writes: “Why did I pull her out with me into the current, why did I make myself guilty of applying to a girl’s existence a criterion that only disturbs both of us!” (SLW, 239; SKS 6, 223). her overweening confidence … she took the ma�er so lightly] See entry Not15:4, where Kierkegaard writes of the period immediately following becoming engaged: “I suffered indescribably during that period. She seemed to notice nothing. On the contrary, she finally became so arrogant that she once declared that she had accepted me out of pity[;] in brief, I have scarcely ever known such arrogance. In a way, this became the danger. I thought, if she doesn’t take

1849

555

it any more seriously than that she [could say], as she herself once had said, ‘If she thought that I came [to see her] out of habit, she would immediately break it off’―if she doesn’t take it any more seriously than this, I’ll be all right. Then I regained my composure. In another sense I admit my weakness, that she was a�er all able to make me angry for a moment” (KJN 3, 432). realized earlier] Variant: “earlier” added. if marriage obligates me to open myself u�erly] → 201,20. See also “The Aesthetic Validity of Marriage” in the second part of Either/Or (1843), where Judge William asserts that “the life principle of love” is “openheartedness, honesty, openness on the grandest scale imaginable” (EO 2, 104–105; SKS 3, 106). And in similar fashion he maintains that “honesty, openheartedness, openness, understanding constitute the life principle of marriage―without this it is unbeautiful and actually immoral” (EO 2, 116; SKS 3, 117). And Judge William mentions a situation in which he would advise against marriage, “that is, when the individual life is so entangled that it cannot disclose itself. If your inner developmental history possesses something of which you cannot speak, or if your life has put you in possession of secrets―in short, if in one way or another you have gorged on a secret that cannot be dragged out of you save at the cost of your life, then never marry.…I will not decide whether such secrets exist, whether it is true that there is a self-enclosedness of which not even love can pick the lock―I merely adhere to my principle, and as for myself, I have no secrets from my wife. One would think that it would certainly never occur to a person to marry if, in addition to everything else he had to do, he also had to occupy himself with his painful secret every day” (EO 2, 117; SKS 3, 117–118). See also “‘Guilty?’/‘Not Guilty?’” in Stages on Life’s Way (1845), (SLW, 354–355; SKS 6, 329–330). my first a�empt to break off the engagement … in which I asked for her forgiveness] Refers to the le�er Kierkegaard sent to Regine Olsen together with his engagement ring (→ 218,15). In despair, she went beyond her limits … force me to go beyond mine] See entry Not 15:4 (→ 159m,4), where Kierkegaard writes: “What did she

27 13

37

43

215m

556

216m

3 19

216

4

217

1

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 120–121

do? In her feminine desperation she overstepped the boundary. She obviously knew that I was melancholic, she intended to cause me the greatest sort of anxiety. The opposite happened. True enough, she caused me the greatest sort of anxiety, but then my nature reared up, gigantically, to shake her off. There was only one thing to be done: to repulse [her] with all [my] might” (KJN 3, 433). This is presumably a reference to the note Regine Olsen le� at Kierkegaard’s apartment on Nørregade (→ 218,19). by means of a deception] → 201,14 and → 212,14. “She does not complain … but about the way I did it.”] → 201,24. primitivity] → 173,6. in our time, when one has doubted and doubts everything] Alludes to a famous saying in the history of philosophy: De omnibus dubitandum est (Latin, “One is to doubt everything”), which was coined by the French philosopher, mathematician, and natural scientist René Descartes (1596–1650). In his chief systematic work, Principia philosophiae [Principles of Philosophy] (1644), the saying forms part of the title of the first section of the first part: “Veritatem inquirenti, semel in vita de omnibus, quantum fieri potest, esse dubitandum” [He Who Seeks the Truth Ought for Once in His Life Doubt Everything to the Extent Possible], in Renati Des-Cartes opera philosophica [Philosophical Works of René Descartes], 4 vols., 6th Elzevier ed. (Amsterdam, 1677–1678, vol. 1, 1678; vols. 2–4, 1677; ASKB 473), vol. 2, p. 1. The saying expresses Descartes’s a�empt to reach a firm foundation for scientific cognition and a starting point for his philosophical system by going through methodical doubt. The saying was cited by G.W.F. Hegel in his lectures on the history of philosophy. Kierkegaard had already criticized it in his uncompleted tale Johannes Climacus, or De omnibus dubitandum est from 1842–1843 (see Pap. IV B 1), and it had o�en been cited and discussed in Danish Hegelianism, particularly by H. L. Martensen and J. L. Heiberg. In his review of J. L. Heiberg’s Indlednings-Foredrag til det i November 1834 begyndte logiske Cursus paa den kongelige militaire Høiskole [Introductory Lecture to the Logic Course

1849

Begun in November 1834 at the Royal Military College] (Copenhagen, 1835), which appeared in Maanedsskri� for Li�eratur [Literary Monthly], vol. 16 (Copenhagen, 1836), p. 518, Martensen writes: “Nowadays the slogan is: Doubt is the beginning of wisdom,” and on p. 519: “The requirement ‘de omnibus dubitandum est’ is not fulfilled so easily, for what is required is no finite doubt, not the popular doubt about one or another thing whereby one always reserves for oneself something that is not included in the doubt.…Science thus requires absolute, infinite doubt.” An English translation of the lecture itself is available in Heiberg’s Introductory Lecture to the Logic Course and Other Texts, ed. and trans. Jon Stewart (Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel, 2007). In the first issue of the journal Perseus, Journal for den speculative Idee [Perseus: Journal of the Speculative Idea], no. 1, June 1837, and no. 2, August 1838 (ASKB 569), Heiberg published a lengthy article on the relations between philosophy and theology, “Recension over Hr. Dr. Rothes Treenigheds- og Forsoningslære” [Review of Dr. Rothe’s Doctrine of the Trinity and of Atonement], in which he states, p. 35: “Doubt is … the beginning of philosophical system, and to that extent it is equally the beginning of wisdom.” Martensen repeated Descartes’s principle in his licentiate dissertation, De autonomia conscientiæ sui humanæ, in theologiam dogmaticam nostri temporis introducta (Copenhagen, 1837; ASKD 648), p. 19; see L. V. Petersen’s Danish translation, Den menneskelige Selvbevidstheds Autonomie i vor Tids dogmatiske Theologie (→ 166,4), p. 16. a�er people strayed from Kant’s “honest” path … to become theocentric] See the introduction to “The Dialectic of Ethical and Ethical-Religious Communication” (→ 163,33): “If one were to sum up in a single word the confusion of modern philosophy, especially since the time when―to call to mind a slogan―it abandoned Kant’s ‘honest path,’ and, if I dare say so, paid the well-known 100 rd. in order to become theocentric, I know of nothing more fi�ing than [to say] that it is dishonest” (Pap. VIII 2 B 86, p. 168). ― Kant’s “honest” path: Presumably cited freely from the German Right Hegelian philosopher C. H. Weiße’s dissertation, “Die drei Grundfragen der gegen-

9

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 121–122 wärtigen Philosophie. Mit Bezug auf die Schri�: Die Philosophie unserer Zeit. Zur Apologie und Erläuterung des Hegelschen Systemes. Von Dr. Julius Schaller” (Leipzig, 1837) [The Three Fundamental Problems of Contemporary Philosophy, with Reference to the Work The Philosophy of Our Times: Toward a Defense and Elucidation of the Hegelian System. By Dr. Julius Schaller], published in Zeitschri� für Philosophie und spekulative Theologie [Journal for Philosophy and Speculative Theology], ed. I. H. Fichte, 2 vols. (Bonn, 1837; ASKB 877–911), vol. 1, pt. 1, pp. 67–114, and pt. 2, pp. 161–201. In vol. 1, p. 86, Weiße, who has pointed out that Hegel lacks a critique of knowledge and thus also a foundation for his philosophical method, writes, “Remember, it is indeed in accordance with our philosophical convictions that Hegel’s point of view must be overcome methodically by a return, once again ‘to the honest path of Kant.’” The expression “the honest path of Kant” occurs for the first time in Weiße’s article on p. 83. See entry Not4:46, where Kierkegaard uses the expression “the honest path of Kant” (KJN 3, 167). ― 100 rd.: → 217,13. ― become theocentric: Allusion to G.W.F. Hegel and to Danish Hegelianism, which was characterized by a speculative philosophy and theology that regarded itself as “theocentric,” i.e., in which God served as the point of departure and the ground of explanation, as opposed to “anthropocentric,” i.e., with humanity as the point of departure. This designation presumably comes from the influential philosopher of the day, I. H. Fichte (→ 151,33), who introduces it in Beiträge zur Charakteristik der neueren Philosophie, oder kritische Geschichte derselben von Des Cartes und Locke bis auf Hegel [Description of Modern Philosophy, or a Critical History of Modern Philosophy from Locke to Hegel], 2nd. ed. (Sulzbach, 1841 [1829]; ASKB 508), pp. 1033ff. Fichte differentiates between three main points of view in modern philosophy: the anthropocentric, represented by Locke, Berkeley, Hume, Kant, Jacobi, and J. F. Fries; the theocentric, represented primarily by Hegel; and finally the speculativeintuitive, represented by J. F. Herbart and I. H. Fichte himself.

1849

557

The 100 rd. are the well-known Kantian example of the difference between what is thought and what is actual] Refers to Kant’s Critik der reinen Vernun� [Critique of Pure Reason], 4th ed. (Riga, 1794 [1781]; ASKB 595), p. 627: “One hundred actual dollars contain not the least bit more than one hundred possible ones.” see p. 187 in this journal, top of page] See entry NB12:139.

13

217

33

216m

Her] Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). out with me.] Variant: first wri�en “out with me; but I was”. “carried her out with me.”] → 215,18. I was indeed already a penitent] → 201,20. She tries her hand at an inordinate self-confidence] → 215,21. let her break it off] → 201,14 and → 215,21. She yields and transfigures herself into the most lovable being] See entry Not15:4 (→ 159m,4): “Then I set forces in motion―she really yielded, and just the opposite happened, the most extreme sort of devotion, of worship” (KJN 3, 432). I send … a le�er that is printed … in the “Psychological Experiment.”] i.e., in “‘Guilty?’/ ‘Not Guilty?’ A Story of Suffering. Psychological Experiment,” the third part of Stages on Life’s Way (1845) (SLW, 185–397; SKS 6, 173–454), which reads: “So as not to have to rehearse yet again something which must, in the end, be done; something which, when it has been done, will surely give the strength that is needed; let it be done, then. Above all, forget the person who writes this; forgive a person who, whatever he might have been capable of, was incapable of making a girl happy,” SLW, 329–330; SKS 6, 307. Kierkegaard’s original le�er is not preserved. she goes up to my room … writes me a note … pleads with me for Jesus … not to leave her] See “‘Guilty?’/ ‘Not Guilty?,’” in which, according to entry Not15:4, Kierkegaard reproduced the break in “strictly historical” fashion (KJN 3, 433). In “‘Guilty?’/ ‘Not Guilty?’” he relates: “What happens? Great God! She has been up to my rooms while I was out. I find a note, wri�en in passionate despair: she cannot live without me, it will be her death if I leave her, she beseeches me for

17

217

18 23 25 30 36 6

15

19

218

558

23 23 25

218m

218

1

27 28 34

219

2 11

219

15 15

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 122–126

God’s sake, for the sake of my salvation, by every memory that binds me, by the holy name” (SLW, 330; SKS 6, 307). ― note … not to leave her] Variant (concerning both the main entry NB12:123 and its continuation in NB12:123.b) changed from “note.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. deception] → 212,14. do everything to repel] → 215m,43. two months later, I broke off the relationship for a second time] i.e., on October 12, 1841; the first time had been August 11, 1841 (→ 212,17). Christ’s sake … not to leave her] → 218,19. ― my late father: → 159m,12. “her.”] Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). any more,] Variant: first wri�en “any more.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. For me, that relationship signifies God’s punishment] → 210,25. le�ing her get married] to J. F. Schlegel (→ 159m,2 and → 159,31). will probably carry her] Variant: “probably” added. this book] A. G. Rudelbach’s Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip (→ 211,8). shown that the State Church … contributed to giving rise to the proletariat] Refers to § 131 in Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip (→ 219m,1), where Rudelbach writes: “A gigantic serpent has coiled around the hearts of modern states; its coils are sensed differently in different places, but everywhere it does threaten the heart: the organism of the state itself. It is the proletariat” (p. 243). Then Rudelbach goes on to show how the State Church (→ 167,34) and the rule of the church by the state has failed the weak and the poor in ma�ers related to their social, ecclesiastical, and spiritual well-being, and he draws the conclusion that when all this is taken into consideration, “people will understand why it is right and reasonable for us to maintain that in addition to everything else, the State Church itself and all of its worldly tendencies was an essential cause of the formation of the modern proletariat” (p. 246). ― proletariat: i.e., the entire “class of poor people

1849

in civil society”; see L. Meyer Fremmedordbog eller Kortfa�et Lexikon over fremmede, i det danske Skri�og Omgangs-Sprog forekommende Ord, Kunstudtryk og Talemaader [Dictionary of Foreign Words, or a Compact Lexicon of Foreign Words, Turns of Phrase, and Figures of Speech That Occur in Danish Wri�en and Everyday Language], 3rd augmented and improved ed. by F.P.J. Dahl (Copenhagen, 1853 [1837]; ASKB 1035), p. 654, col. 2 (the term occurs for the first time in this modern sense in this edition; compare the 2nd ed. [1844], ASKB 1034, where it does not appear in this sense). R.] Rudelbach (→ 211,8). In Xndom people live in a completely unchristian manner … with the common man and what this involves] Allusion to § 131 in Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip, where Rudelbach writes: “The State Church had become too great to be able to fulfill its duties to the lesser people … These lowly and poor people were of course treated as members of the State Church, but not as those for whom the Church, as it were, sacrifices itself” (p. 244). loving “the neighbor.”] → 191,3. Rudelbach on the Church constitution § CXXXI p. 243 et seq.] Refers to § 131 in A. G. Rudelbach, Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip, pp. 243–246. Remarkably … there were peop. … to be sacrificed for others] See entry NB5:126, from June or July 1848: “Strangely enough! In one of my first conversations with her [Regine Olsen], when I was most profoundly shaken and my very being was set in motion from the ground up, I said to her that every generation includes some individual hum. beings who are destined to be sacrificed for the others.…I had never previously suspected how melancholic I was; I had rlly had no criterion for how happy a hum. being can be. Thus I believed myself to be sacrificed, because I understood that my sufferings and torments made [me] inventive in searching out the limits of the truth, something that could then be of help to other peop.” (KJN 4, 422). ― I got engaged: to Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2).

17 19

26 1

219m

10

220

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 126–129

18

26

220

30 33

Early on, I had an inexplicable intimation that this was my destiny] See The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1), which Kierkegaard was working on in the summer of 1848: “The idea that in each generation there are two or three who get sacrificed for the others, who are used, in frightful sufferings, to discover what will benefit the others, is a thought that goes very far back in my memory; that is the melancholic way I understood myself, that I was destined for this” (PV, 81; SV2 13, 606–607). reduplication] → 201,19. “Gold and silver have I none … Rise up and walk.”] Freely cited from Acts 3:6. in Rudelbach … no longer true that we have no gold and silver] Refers to § 131 in A. G. Rudelbach, Den evangeliske Kirkeforfatnings Oprindelse og Princip (→ 211,8 and → 219m,1), p. 244n, where he contrasts Acts 3:4 with “the words of Thomas Aquinas when a prelate showed him an extraordinarily beautiful ewer, saying ‘You see, Master Thomas, now the Church no longer needs to say, Gold and silver have I none.’”

221

4

expressed in the hymn: Why does he cry, who never laughed] Freely cited from Brorson’s hymn, “Now Jesus Goes to His Suffering,” in Troens rare Klenodie, i nogle aandelige Sange fremstillet af Hans Adolph Brorson [Faith’s Rare Treasure, Presented in Some Spiritual Songs by Hans Adolph Brorson], ed. L. C. Hagen (Copenhagen, 1834; ASKB 199), pp. 148–151, p. 148. The hymn is in the portion of Brorson’s hymnbook titled “Om Guds Billede og Menneskets Elendighed og Fordærvelse” [On God’s Image and Man’s Wretchedness and Corruption].

221

13

him] Rasmus Nielsen (→ 192,20). withdraw out to the countryside and remain there longer than usual] According to correspondence between Rasmus Nielsen and Kierkegaard, Nielsen seemed to have been staying in Lyngby since the la�er half of July 1849; see, e.g., a le�er dated “Lyngby, July 28, 1849” (LD, 303; B&A 1, 238). He was still there in late September; see a letter dated “Thursday, Septbr. 20 [1849],” in which

13

1849

559

Nielsen writes: “Arrived here [i.e., Copenhagen]” (LD, 320; B&A 1, 251). His book comes to be viewed as a pointless product of perfectibility, which is obliged to a�empt this sort of thing―and now he exaggerates] Refers to Rasmus Nielsen, Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed. Forelæsninger over Jesu Liv [The Faith of the Gospels and Modern Consciousness: Lectures on the Life of Jesus], pt. 1 (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 700; abbreviated herea�er as Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed). The book was announced as having “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 116, May 19, 1849. See the review, probably by H. F. Helweg, under “Bog–Nyt. (April–Juni)” [Book News: April–June], in Dansk Kirketidende (→ 150,7), July 22, 1849, vol. 4, no. 43, cols. 714–718. The reviewer starts by writing: “Prof. R. Nielsen’s voluminous work Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed…[is] a remarkable book in a number of respects, not so much because it opens the reader’s eyes to new insights, as because of the freshness and poetic intuition with which the ideas are advanced and, indeed, the book makes an interesting contribution to a portrait of its author. Prof. Nielsen, who had been known earlier as a talented spokesman for the speculative theology of Hegel’s school, though always in such a way that one always sensed in him―both as philosopher and theologian―a deeper religious seriousness and warmth, has now broken entirely with modern scientism, and in this work, in which he for the first time clearly articulates this break, has essayed composition in the manner of Mag. Kierkegaard, though without any particular success. Yes, when it becomes dubious to remain at one absolute standpoint, it is of course fine that the way has been paved to another, for then one at least avoids sinking into the infinite chaos of relativity. If one has previously been the Idea’s authoritative spokesman, who never condescended to speak his subjective thoughts, but always demonstrated the absolute self-movement of the Idea, it is indeed altogether too humiliating to become an ordinary human being who has a bit of an opinion about one thing or another about which he would occasionally like to speak for the benefit and enjoyment of his

16

560

19 23

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 129–131

good friends. If it is no longer possible to have mediation [→ 221,28], which allows all the opposing standpoints to have their due so that they might combine into a speculative unity―well, then one gives it up, allows the opposites to come forward unreconciled to one another! But how so? A�er all, doesn’t one become a simple human being once again when one enters into the unruly confusion of opposites? Ah, no! It is Mag. Kierkegaard’s undying merit to have shown the way that Prof. Nielsen has followed, namely to make oneself into the dialectical. If previously one had the entirely correct view, because it contained within itself all the subordinate views, now one has absolutely no view at all.…But the author does not want to limit himself to presenting dialectical fencing of this sort―through what he is doing, he also wants to express his own personal conviction. But when he does this, he once again comes to recognize the full strength of objections to that conviction, and then the conviction falls silent and is carried away into the dialectical maelstrom” (cols. 714–715). A�er a discussion of Nielsen’s “judgment condemning ‘as good as all modern schools of theology,’” the review concludes by saying: “One senses that it is ‘the answer to his life question,’ which has occupied the author, who has not, however, been able to avoid becoming tiresome by discussing the same questions over and over again―even if the author himself is tireless in continually having them appear in new metaphors” (col. 718). qua Hegelian: → 192,20. he tells me … a clash with Martensen … “mediation.”] See a le�er from Rasmus Nielsen to Kierkegaard, dated “August 28, [1849],” which begins: “Dear Hr. Magister! You are right again, and again, doubly right: I was really quite close to burning myself on mediation.” Nielsen then gives an account of a dinner party he had recently a�ended at which Bishop Mynster and H. L. Martensen had also been present; Nielsen makes unfla�ering remarks about both of them and reports having been badgered by Martensen concerning “mediation.” See LD, 315–316; B&A 1, 247–248. ― Martensen: → 151,19. –– mediation: → 221,28.

1849

Mediation … grandeur above all contraries, even over those that are feigned] The expression “mediation,” which does not occur in Hegel, is used by the Danish Hegelians to render the Hegelian concept of Vermi�lung, i.e., the reconciliation of opposed concepts in a higher unity in which the concepts exist as sublated elements. Thus, for example, the Danish theologian and Hegelian A. P. Adler writes in his Populaire Foredrag over Hegels objective Logik [Popular Lectures on Hegel’s Objective Logic] (Copenhagen, 1842; ASKB 383), § 9: “Mediation…concerns only elements between which there is truly strife.…Negation is thus the first process of the dialectic; mediation is the second process. Dialectic is the common name for the entire movement, grounded in the nature of the ma�er, by which what is one-sided passes into the opposite (is negated) and both come together into a higher unity (are mediated)” (p. 20). See also J. L. Heiberg, “Det logiske System” [The Logical System], in Perseus, Journal for den speculative Idee (→ 217,1), no. 2, pp. 18, 21, and esp. 30. Once, in its day (for now mediation has been weakened)] The heyday of Hegelian philosophy in Denmark had been in the late 1830s and early 1840s (→ 210,15).

28

8

222

all things … work together for your good] Allusion to Rom 8:28. who is love] Alludes both to 1 Jn 4:8 and 1 Jn 4:16.

16

222

abuse at the hands of the vulgarity of the mob] Presumably a reference to the a�ack on Kierkegaard by the satirical weekly Corsaren (→ 165,13) and the consequences of this, namely, that Kierkegaard was abused on the street (→ 187,8). the sort of lyric called “The Lily and the Bird.”] Probably a reference to The Lily of the Field and the Bird of the Air: Three Godly Discourses (→ 165,1), but also to “What We Learn from the Lilies of the Field and the Birds of the Air: Three Discourses,” the second part of Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits (1847) (UDVS, 155–212; SKS 8, 253–307), and “The Cares of the Pagans,” which is the first part of Christian Discourses (1848) (CD, 3–91; SKS 10, 13–98), all of which are based on Mt 6:24–34,

25

20

29

222

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 131–133

32

223

223m

22

2 4

224

1 3 3

about the birds of the air and the lilies of the field. Christianity’s essential collision with the world] See “Moods in the Strife of Sufferings: Christian Discourses” and “Thoughts That Wound from Behind―for Edification: Christian Addresses,” which are parts 2 and 3 of Christian Discourses (1848) (CD, 93–159 and 161–246; SKS 10, 101–166 and 169–252). that verse ... winter snow’s shivering-cold] Cited from H. A. Brorson’s hymn “Hvad seer min Sulamith” [What Does My Shulamite See], no. 49 in Psalmer og aandelige Sange af Hans Adolph Brorson [Hymns and Spiritual Songs by Hans Adolph Brorson], ed. J.A.L. Holm, 2nd ed. (Copenhagen, 1838 [1830]; ASKB 200), pp. 867– 869; p. 867, first stanza: “The Bridegroom. / What does my Shulamite see, / When the air is still so full of winter snow’s shivering-cold? / Why, then, do you open the window, / And stare continually at the top of the clouds; / Why do you do this so o�en, / My Shulamite? / The Bride. / I am only standing here to see, / When at the crack of doom, the stars, / Have begun to fall, / How will it snow then. / Go away, as the birds fly, / You winter dwelling, enough for me; / I don’t intend to sign a lease on you, / I have my traveling clothes.” The hymn had first been published in 1765. ― Brorson: Hans Adolph Brorson (1694– 1764), Danish pietist theologian, bishop, author of hymns. it can be found commented on in … NB10 or NB9] See journal entry NB9:54 in KJN 5, 240–241. see also NB14. p. 171] See journal entry NB14:109 in the present volume. Practice in Christianity be pseudonymous] → 147,4. The Sickness unto Death] → 147,3 and → 165,3. Practice in Christianity] In assigning Practice in Christianity to the year 1848, it seems that Kierkegaard has in mind only no. 1, “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest,” and no. 2, “Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended in Me.”

1849

561

The Point of View for my Work as an Author] → 147,1. the “3 Notes”] i.e., “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author,” consisting of no. 1, “On the Dedication ‘That Single Individual,’” originally wri�en in 1846 (see Pap. IX B 63,4–5, pp. 350–357); no. 2, “A Word on the Relation of My Work as an Author to ‘That Single Individual,’” originally wri�en in 1847 (see Pap. IX B 63,6–13, pp. 357– 374); no. 3, “Preface to ‘The Friday Discourses,’” originally wri�en in 1847 (see Pap. IX B 63,14, pp. 375–377). In 1848, when Kierkegaard decided to add the three notes to The Point of View for My Work as an Author as an appendix, he gave them the title “Three Friendly ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author,” but he then deleted the word “friendly” (see Pap. IX B 58); subsequently no. 3 was used instead as the preface to Two Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (1851), and nos. 1 and 2 were posthumously published under the title “‘The Single Individual’: Two ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author,” in The Point of View for My Work as an Author (PV, 99–124; SV2 13, 627–653). “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself,”] → 147,4. Kierkegaard’s own statements about the time of composition of “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself” are inconsistent. In the printer’s manuscript of Practice in Christianity he notes: “No. III wri�en in the beginning of 49” (Pap. X 5 B 31,2; see also X 5 B 92); this statement corresponds to the statement here in entry NB12:133. On the other hand, the preface to no. 1 in Practice in Christianity, to which the reader is referred from no. 3, makes reference to “this work, stemming from the year 1848” (PC, 7; SKS 12, 15); this corresponds to the statement (→ 182,3) in NB12:72 in the present volume. On a loose piece of paper with a note concerning the arrangement of the prefaces to the three parts of Practice in Christianity―where Kierkegaard considers having only one preface printed, namely, the preface to no. 1, to which nos. 2 and 3 would direct the reader―he writes: “So the fact that the piece stems from the year 1848 must be added to the preface to no. 1; no. 2 is similarly from 1848, no. 3 from 1848 and the beginning of 1849” (Pap. X 5 B 71).

3 4

5

562

5 6

7

11

12

12

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 133–134

Armed Neutrality] → 199,38. the one on Phister] Refers to “Hr. Phister as Captain Scipio (in the singspiel Ludovic). A Recollection and for Recollection” (see Pap. IX B 67–73, pp. 383–407). On the cover of this dra�, Kierkegaard noted, “wri�en at end of 1848,” and similarly on the cover of the fair copy, “wri�en at the end of 1848” (see Pap. IX B 69 and 67). ― Phister: Joachim Ludvig Phister (1807–1896), Danish actor, appeared in about 650 roles. He played the role of “Scipio, captain in the papal police force,” in Ludovic. Syngestykke i to Acter af Saint–Georges. Musiken af Hérold og Halévy [Ludovic: Singspiel in Two Acts by Saint-Georges. Music by Hérold og Halévy], trans. Th. Overskou (Copenhagen, 1834). The piece was performed for the first time at the Royal Theater on May 24, 1834 and nineteen times between then and October 1841; it was performed once in 1846 and did not appear in the repertoire again until 1859. Even if I were to publish … the discourses at the communion on Fridays, because The Point of View is of course from 48] Refers to the fact that Christian Discourses (published in April 1848), of which the fourth and final part is “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays” (→ 168,3), is listed in The Point of View for My Work as an Author (written in the summer and autumn of 1848) as the last work assigned to the group of “purely religious productions”; see Kierkegaard’s note (PV, 29n; SV2 13, 555n). Note also that this entry assigns “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself” to 1849, i.e., to the period following the composition of The Point of View. See also “The Accounting” in On My Work as an Author (→ 168,7). discourses at the communion on Fridays] At 9 A.M. every Friday, confession and communion were held at the Church of Our Lady in Copenhagen; in addition to a discourse in connection with confession, a short sermon was also delivered between confession and communion. second series] With the “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays” in Christian Discourses (→ 224,7) as the first series. One and as good as two are already finished] The one that was already finished is presumably the discourse on Heb 4:15 that was later included

1849

as “The High Priest” in The High Priest―The Tax Collector―The Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (see WA, 113–124; SKS 11, 249–259), which appeared in November 1849. Kierkegaard had the idea for the piece in August 1848 (see journal entry NB7:17 in KJN 5, 88). In the dra� Kierkegaard writes, with respect to the genesis of the piece: “wri�en approximately in mid-1849” (Pap. X 5 B 25,3). The other piece that was as good as finished was perhaps the discourse on Lk 18:13 that was later included as “The Tax Collector” in The High Priest― The Tax Collector―The Woman Who Was a Sinner (WA, 109–144; SKS 11, 243–280). Kierkegaard had the idea for this piece in May or June 1849 (see journal entry NB11:129 in the present volume). Socratic ignorance] In the conversations found in Plato’s dialogues, Socrates o�en mentions his ignorance; see, e.g., Apology (21a–23b), where he explains that the oracle at Delphi had indeed denied that anyone was wiser than he, for he knew that he knew nothing, unlike the many who imagine that they know something. See Platonis opera quae extant (→ 200,2), vol. 8 (1825), pp. 108–113; see also Plato: The Collected Dialogues, Including the Le�ers (166,30), pp. 7–9. Kierkegaard discusses Socrates’ ignorance in On the Concept of Irony (CI, 169–176; SKS 1, 217–223). our age’s speculation] → 151,29. Joh. Climacus … husband, father, and celebrated marksman] Refers to the second section of the second part, “Division II,” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript by Johannes Climacus (→ 152,11) (CUP 1, 385–387; SKS 7, 350–352). Anti-Climacus … most people do not experience becoming spirit at all] Refers to “B” of the first section and “B” of the second section of The Sickness unto Death by Anti-Climacus (SUD, 26 and 107; SKS 11, 142 and 219). the club] Starting ca. 1770, Copenhagen had a number of gentlemen’s clubs, a fashion that peaked ca. 1800, some still remained later in the 19th century. The clubs, which were gradually replaced by political associations, hosted cultural events, including learned lectures, literary readings, and drama; some clubs also sponsored char-

11

11 13

16

22

225

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 134–138

27 32

226

21

21

226

31

31

227

1 2 5

itable causes, but they were first and foremost social groups. Here one could converse with one’s fellows, smoke, drink punch or coffee, read the newspapers, and play cards. Some clubs permitted members to bring their wives one day a week in addition to occasional balls and masquerades, but normally women were not admi�ed. what it is to be a child again] Presumably an allusion to Mt 18:1–5. has naïveté, simplicity] Variant: changed from “becomes naive, simple”. Practice in Christianity, no. 1] i.e., “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest. For Awakening and Inward Appropriation” (→ 147,4). I cannot have any opinion … then I would accept the teaching] Summary of “The Halt,” § II. A, in “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest,” in Practice in Christianity (see PC, 45–46; SKS 12, 58–59). the Pharisee] The Pharisees were one of the most influential movements in Judaism during the Hellenistic-Roman period from ca. 100 �.�. until the destruction of Jerusalem in �.�. 70, emphasizing legalistic adherence to Mosaic law, e.g., complex rules of ritual cleanliness for the priesthood. They believed themselves to be in possession of a comprehensive oral tradition regarding the application of the Mosaic legal framework, and held other beliefs, such as the existence and importance of angels and the resurrection of the dead. There were about 6,000 Pharisees in Jesus’ time. the gospel about the Pharisee and the tax collector] Reference to Lk 18:9–14, the gospel for the eleventh Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, which in 1849 fell on August 19. 7 Sept.] Kierkegaard had sought out Regine on September 8, 1840 (→ 214,39). “Her”] Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). She herself pleaded with tears … for me not to leave her] → 210,24 and → 218,19. ― my late father: → 159m,12.

1849

563

she would … thank me all her life … greatest act of kindness] See entry Not15:6 (→ 159m,4), where Kierkegaard relates: “I had a cabinet made of Brazilian rosewood. It was made according my own design, and this in turn was occasioned by words from her, the lovable, in her agony. She said that she would thank me her whole life long if she were permi�ed to remain with me, even if she had to live in a li�le cabinet. Taking this into account, it was built without shelves” (KJN 3, 438). The father … begged and beseeched me not to leave her] See entry Not15:4, where Kierkegaard relates that Regine Olsen’s father, Terkild Olsen (→ 159m,1), said: “I am a proud man; it is hard, but I beg you not to break with her” (KJN 3, 434). he promised … she would be under my absolute control as if she had neither relatives nor friends] This promise by Regine Olsen’s father is not recorded elsewhere. engaged to her for 1 year] → 159m,2. then history must take her―that is something I will certainly teach history] → 229,3. the relationship of conscience] → 210,30. Schlegel] → 159m,2 and → 159,31. believed that my pride was the reason I le� her] See entry Not15:15.a, where Kierkegaard writes a note concerning his apparent hard-heartedness: “This was really also her view, for she said numerous times that it was my pride that was to blame for my wanting to leave her” (KJN 3, 444). whom she had in fact once loved] → 214,39. who surelyb] Variant: at this point a leaf has been cut out of the journal. not an object,] Variant: first wri�en “not an object.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. she had to be so young] → 214,31. neither release you nor bind you] Presumably an allusion to Mt 16:19. by the responsibility] Variant: changed from “by the responsibility.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. my entire existence as an author is to accentuate her] See entry Not15:14, where Kierkegaard writes: “My existence was to accentuate her life absolutely, my activity as an author could also be

7

10

13

39 16

228

21 37 41

3

229

25 35

41 10

230

12

3

229m

564

230m

8

18

20 20 21

22 23 25 32

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 138–142

viewed as a monument to her praise and honor. I am taking her with me into history. And I who, melancholy, had only one wish, to enchant her: there it is not denied me; there I walk by her side; as a master of ceremonies I escort her in triumph, saying: please make a bit of room for her, for ‘our own dear li�le Regine’” (KJN 3, 443–444). the vulgarity of the mob … making me into a half-mad eccentric] Refers to the a�ack on Kierkegaard by the satirical weekly Corsaren (→ 165,13) and the consequences of this, namely, that Kierkegaard became subject to public ridicule and abuse on the streets (→ 187,8). ― a half-mad eccentric: → 207,36. The Seducer’s Diary] Included in the first part of Either/Or (1843); see entry Not15:4.n: “‘The Seducer’s Diary’ was certainly intended to repulse―and I certainly know what agonies I went through on the occasion of its publication, because my idea, like my intention, was to arouse evrybdy’s indignation against me, something that indeed u�erly failed to happen, especially with respect to the public, who greeted me with jubilation, which served to increase my contempt for the public―but to the extent that anyone came or will come to think of ‘her,’ it was also the most exquisite gallantry imaginable” (KJN 3, 436). The Corsair] → 153,20, → 205,27, and → 165,13. When] Variant: first wri�en “At the councillor of state’s death in 45, that was the time.” she was, first of all, not engaged] Regine Olsen became engaged to J. F. Schlegel (→ 159,31) on August 28, 1843. at any rate not married] Regine Olsen married J. F. Schlegel on November 3, 1847. the councillor of state] Terkild Olsen (→ 159m,1). his death] → 159m,1. be assumed to have] Variant: first wri�en “have”.

231

2

see p. 158 in this journal] Variant: added; see entry NB12:121.

231

20

to go out and teach in the streets] → 172,6. This could also refer to Socrates, whom the Greek author Diogenes Laertius (3rd century �.�.) described in his history of philosophy, bk. 2, chap. 5, sec. 21: “He [Socrates] discussed moral ques-

1849

tions in the workshops and the market-place, being convinced that the study of nature is no concern of ours.” Diogen Laërtses filosofiske Historie, eller: navnkundige Filosofers Levnet, Meninger og sindrige Udsagn, i ti Bøger [The Philosophical History of Diogenes Laertius: or, The Life, Opinions, and Clever Sayings of Famous Philosophers, in Ten Books], trans. B. Riisbrigh, ed. B. Thorlacius, 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1812; ASKB 1110–1111), vol. 1, p. 66. English translation from Diogenes Laertius, Lives of the Eminent Philosophers, trans. R. D. Hicks, 2 vols., Loeb Classical Library (London: William Heinemann; New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1925), vol. 1, p. 151. All reform … was now directed unilaterally against government] Refers in particular to the liberal opposition to the more or less absolutist governments of Denmark, Germany, and France, ca. 1830–1848. the press … reformed the government, with the help of the crowd] Refers to the decisive significance of the press in the decision of King Frederick VII to renounce absolute power on March 21, 1848. (There had also been a procession of thousands of people to Christiansborg, the seat of government, that same day.) proletariat] → 219,15. being persecuted by the government] Prior to the fall of absolutism in 1848, the opposition believed it was being persecuted by the government. no collectivity] Variant: changed from “no collectivity.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. 1000 clergy] → 166,13. knights of the Dannebrog] The king decorated a number of clergy with the order of the Dannebrog, founded in 1671. the country is Christian] → 178,24. have a synod summoned to reform the Church] → 211,7. what I have always said is: Only a dead man can govern the crowd] see, e.g., entry NB10:166 (KJN 5, 349). reduplication] → 201,19. they all abandoned him] Presumably an allusion to Mt 26:56.

24

2

232

7 14

1

233

10 13

14 15

19

233

21 10

233m

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 142–143 234

3

4

5

6

9

11

12

The war had taken Anders from me] Anders Christensen Westergaard (1818–1867), Kierkegaard’s servant since May 1844, was a son of a peasant family and hence subject to military service, into which he was dra�ed as a result of the general mobilization of April 1848. my house] Either the apartment at 9 Rosenborggade, where Kierkegaard lived from April to October 1848, or the apartment at 7 Rosenborggade, where Kierkegaard had lived since October 1848 (→ 234,24; see map 2, C1); see Kierkegaards København (→ 163,13), pp. 44–50. Strube’s illness] Frederik Christian Strube (1811– 1867), an Icelandic journeyman carpenter, and his wife and two daughters, lodged with Kierkegaard in the period 1848–1852. Strube was admi�ed to Frederick’s Hospital in Copenhagen, medical department A, room MM, from December 1 to December 9, 1848 (see Rigsarkivet [National Archives] 257, Frederiks Hospital. 1757–1850 Sygejournaler, 1848 et seq., 683, p. 356). According to the patient journal, Strube suffered from “monomania”; see journal entry NB11:194.a and accompanying note in the present volume. I wanted to travel … impossible for me to leave] See journal entry NB4:158 (KJN 4, 360–361) from the end of April 1848, and its accompanying note; in that entry Kierkegaard expresses his wish to travel, which, however, he viewed as impossible owing to the war and the revolutions in much of Europe. my financial worries] Presumably a reference to the fact that Kierkegaard could no longer depend on interest and dividend income from an intact fortune (→ 153,21), and that furthermore, he intended to underwrite the publication of his writings (→ 234,14). an income tax] It was not until a�er Kierkegaard’s time that the first income tax was introduced in Denmark. Reitzel] Carl Andreas Reitzel (1789–1853), Danish publisher and bookseller, founded his own bookshop and publishing house in 1819, which from 1827 was situated on Købmagergade, at the site of today’s number 44 (see map 2, C2). From 1847, Reitzel served as Kierkegaard’s preferred publisher, just as earlier―when Kierkegaard had been

1849

565

his own publisher―he had taken a great number of Kierkegaard’s books on commission for sale in his bookshop; see the next note. I have to spend money qua author] Until 1847, Kierkegaard had functioned as his own publisher; that is, he had himself taken charge of the production and financing of his books, which had been sold on commission. But following the publication of Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits, which appeared on March 13, 1847, Kierkegaard entered into a business arrangement with the publisher and bookdealer C. A. Reitzel, who both assumed the expenses associated with the printing of Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits, paying Kierkegaard a one-time royalty of 225 rix-dollars for the book, and purchased for 1,200 rix-dollars the remaining copies of Repetition, Fear and Trembling, Philosophical Fragments, The Concept of Anxiety, Prefaces, Stages on Life’s Way, Three Discourses on Imagined Occasions, Concluding Unscientific Postscript, and A Literary Review, all of which Reitzel already had on a commission basis. At that point, Either/Or was sold out. See Reitzel’s journal Forhandlinger med Forfa�ere, Redacteurer &c: 1835–[1858] (→ 184,40). Kierkegaard received a one-time royalty of 270 rix-dollars for Works of Love (1847) (see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Kjerlighedens Gjerninger, SKS K9, 95), and for Christian Discourses (1848) he received a onetime royalty of 220 rix-dollars (see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Christelige Taler, SKS K10, 75–76). have 1 or 2 signatures printed each week] The Sickness unto Death is 136 pages long, which corresponds to eight and a half signatures. the book] i.e., The Sickness unto Death (→ 147,3). have the book appear at a more opportune season] The Sickness unto Death appeared on July 30, 1849 (→ 147,3). the tanner at whose place I live] On September 28, 1848, Kierkegaard entered into a contract with tanner Johan Julius Gram (KA, D pk. 8 læg 21) to rent the apartment on the second floor of Gram’s property on Rosenborggade (see map 2, C1); according to the contract, Kierkegaard was to move in on October 17, 1848. The place had been built in 1847.

14

19

20 20

24

566

25

28

31 32

36

41

235

1 16

19 20 20

234m

3 10

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 143–145

tormented me with a stench all summer long] Gram appears to have tanned hides―with the resulting stench―both on the street and in the building’s courtyard. Abused in many ways by the vulgarity of the mob] Presumably a reference to the a�ack on Kierkegaard by the satirical weekly Corsaren (→ 165,13) and the consequences of this, namely, that Kierkegaard was abused on the street (→ 187,8). earthly] Variant: added. such a fine and expensive apartment] According to the rental contract, the apartment consisted of “6 rooms, maid’s room, kitchen, garret, 2 a�ic rooms for firewood and peat. A cellar for food storage, plus a shared a�ic for drying laundry and a shared laundry cellar” (KA, D pk. 8 læg 21). The semiannual rent was 200 rix-dollars. the works that have been completed] i.e., The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1), Three Minor Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 146,1), and Practice in Christianity (→ 147,4 and → 158,5). my usual summertime torments] See, e.g., journal entry NB2:113, where Kierkegaard writes that “the state of my health, my whole constitution, and all my physical habits are diametrically opposed to the madness of traveling in the 23-degree [Réaumur = ca. 84 degrees Fahrenheit or 29 degrees Celsius] heat of the dog days―a time when I scarcely venture out for a carriage ride at noon―when I instead feel much be�er keeping quite still” (KJN 4, 184). Councillor of State Olsen died] → 159m,1. thank God for the indescribable good … more than I had expected] Compare with The Point of View for My Work as an Author (PV, 72; SV2 13, 597). God is love] Alludes both to 1 Jn 4:8 and 1 Jn 4:16 (→ 222,20). his wisdom infinite] → 159,7. his possibilities are infinite] Allusion to Mt 19:26; see also Lk 1:37. R. Nielsen] → 192,20. a li�le book] Perhaps a reference to Rasmus Nielsen, Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed (→ 221,16), though this is 530 pages long. If this marginal entry was wri�en later than the main entry, it could refer to Nielsen’s Mag. S. Kierkegaards

1849

“Johannes Climacus” og Dr. H. Martensens “Christelige Dogmatik.” En undersøgende Anmeldelse [Mag. S. Kierkegaard’s “Johannes Climacus” and Dr. H. Martensen’s Christian Dogmatics: An Investigative Review] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 701), which was only 132 pages long and came out in October 1849 (see the next note). then he finally publishes] Either Rasmus Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed, which according to its preface is a further development of the lectures he had “given in the university building, in the winter of 1848” (p. vi), and which appeared in May 1849, or Nielsen’s Mag. S. Kierkegaards “Johannes Climacus” og Dr. H. Martensens “Christelige Dogmatik.” En undersøgende Anmeldelse, which was announced as having been published in Adresseavisen, no. 242, October 15, 1849.

12

Draconian laws were … too abstractly cruel] Refers to laws that according to legend were promulgated by Dracon of Athens, ca. 624 �.�., and that supposedly imposed the death sentence for almost all crimes, including vagrancy, and were therefore soon so�ened and subsequently abolished; see, e.g., Karl Friedrich Beckers Verdenshistorie, omarbejdet af J. G. Woltmann [Karl Friedrich Becker’s History of the World, Revised by J. G. Woltmann], trans. and augmented by J. Riise, 12 vols. (Copenhagen, 1822–1829; ASKB 1972–1983), vol. 1, pp. 417–418. concrete,] Variant: changed from “concrete.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence.

26

people with clerical livings] i.e., priests (→ 169,29). state this fact,] Variant: changed from “state this fact.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. Does a hum. being have the right to do this] → 150,27. Plato says … those who are to rule are exactly those who have no desire to rule] Refers to Plato’s Republic, bk. 7, 520d (Platonis opera quae extant [→ 200,2], vol. 4 [1822], pp. 390–391), where Socrates says to Glaucon: “the truth is that the city in which those who are to rule are least eager

8

235

29

11

17 29

236

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 145–150

35

237

4 6

7

8

14 18

21

to hold office must needs be the best administered and the most free of dissension.” English translation from Plato: The Collected Dialogues, Including the Le�ers (→ 166,30), p. 752. Moses … was least of all suited to be a speaker … go to pharaoh] Allusion to Ex 3:1–4:17; 4:10– 13; see also Ex 6:12 and 6:30. Fear and Trembling] Fear and Trembling: Dialectical Lyric by Johannes de silentio (Copenhagen, 1843). translated into foreign languages] Fear and Trembling did not appear in translation in Kierkegaard’s lifetime; in a le�er from Christian K. F. Molbech to Hans Brøchner, dated in Kiel, July 21, 1855, it is stated that a translation was under way, but as far as is known, it was never published; see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Frygt og Bæven, SKS K4, 98–99. at the time it was wri�en] Fear and Trembling was probably wri�en in May and June 1843; see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Frygt og Bæven, SKS K4, 83–97. the person who was believed to be its author] See T. H. Erslew, Almindeligt Forfa�er-Lexicon (→ 205,16), vol. 2 (1847), p. 25: “He [Kierkegaard] is assumed to be the author of…Fear and Trembling: Dialectical Lyric by Johannes de silentio. reduplication] → 201,19. the difference between the poet and the hero] See the beginning of the “Eulogy on Abraham” in Fear and Trembling (FT, 15–16; SKS 4, 112–113). already hinted at … the oldest journal … from my time as an author] Kierkegaard is referring to journal entry JJ:87, which ends as follows: “When the child is to be weaned, the mother blackens her breast, but her eye looks upon the child just as lovingly. The child believes that it is the breast that has changed, but the mother is unchanged. And this is why she blackens the breast, because she says that it would be a shame for it to look so inviting when the child must not have it.―This collision is easily resolved, because the breast is only a part of the mother herself. Fortunate the person who did not experience more terrible collisions; who did not need to blacken himself; who did not need to travel to Hell in order to learn what the Devil looks like―so that he could depict

1849

567

himself like that and thus, if possible, save another human being, at least in his or her relation to God. This would be Abraham’s collision.―The person who explains this mystery has explained my life. But who among my contemporaries has understood this?” (KJN 2, 155–156). Kierkegaard wrote in Journal JJ, which is in octavo format, from May 1842 until sometime around the end of September 1846; see the “Critical Account of the Text of Journal JJ” in KJN 2, 455–459. an entire country is Christian] → 178,24. 1000 men live off the entire country’s being Christian] → 166,13.

29

“her.”] Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). a murder on your conscience] Because Regine Olsen had said that breaking the engagement would be her death, and her father had also said that this would be the case (see the next two notes). The phrase occurs a number of times in “‘Guilty?’/ ‘Not Guilty?’” in Stages on Life’s Way (1845); see, e.g., SLW, 198, 212, 331, 394, 432, 447, 451; SKS 6, 185, 199, 308, 365, 400, 414, 416. a lovable young girl … will be her death] → 218,19. a worried father assertively repeats this] → 201,23. her matrimonial situation] i.e., Regine Olsen’s marriage to J. F. Schlegel (→ 159m,2 and → 159,31). I was not exactly a scoundrel] → 201,24. wants a separation] In Kierkegaard’s day, a request for a separation was processed by a threemember conciliation board; if it was not possible to come to a compromise, the ma�er became a divorce case and was referred to municipal authorities. cruelty] → 212,15. reduplication] → 201,19. encounter me in church] In journal entries JJ:107 and Not15:4 (→ 159m,4), Kierkegaard relates that Regine Olsen had nodded to him at vespers on Easter Day (April 16, 1843) in the Church of Our Lady (KJN 2, 161; KJN 3, 436). And in entry NB12:29, he mentions their encounter a�er a church service in Church of the Holy Ghost on July 1, 1849.

19

237

29

238

23

28 29 31

35 40

2 3 9

239

568

13 14

239

33

240

6 7

240

24

29 35

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 150–157

in fear and trembling] Allusion to Phil 2:12 (→ 196,35). Become reconciled … while you are on the way with him] Refers to Mt 5:23–25. for an hour] In Kierkegaard’s day sermons o�en lasted an hour; see § 15 in “Forslag til et: KirkeRitual for Danmark” [Suggestion for a Church Ritual for Denmark], p. 11 in J. P. Mynster, Udkast til en Alterbog og et Kirke-Ritual for Danmark [Dra� of a Service Book and Church Ritual for Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1839), where it is stated: “The sermon should not last longer than an hour at most, but never shorter than half an hour.” the thorn or barb I have in the flesh] See 2 Cor 12:7–9. Your Reverence] → 175,25. Xt also came to stand on his own] → 233m,10. Vigilius Haufniensis … “anxiety” as a middle term in relation to temptation] Refers to chap. 1, § 4, “The Concept of the Fall,” esp. note 1; § 5, “The Concept of Anxiety”; § 6, “Anxiety as the Presupposition of Original Sin and as Explaining Original Sin Retrogressively in the Direction of its Origin,” in The Concept of Anxiety (1844) (CA, 38–41, esp. note; 39–40; 41–46; 46–51). ― Vigilius Haufniensis: → 193,9. the serpent who tempted Adam and Eve] Alludes to Gen 3:1–6. anxiety is strongest when it makes use of nothing] Refers to “B. The Universality of this Sickness (Despair)” in the first part of The Sickness unto Death (→ 147,3): “Despite its illusory security and tranquillity, all immediacy is anxiety, and thus, quite consistently, is most anxious about nothing. The most gruesome description of something most terrible does not make immediacy as anxious as a subtle, almost carelessly, and yet deliberately and calculatingly dropped allusion to some indefinite something―in fact, immediacy is made most anxious by a subtle implication that it knows very well what is being talked about. Immediacy probably does not know it, but reflection never snares so unfailingly as when it fashions its snare out of nothing, and reflection is never so much itself as

1849

when it is―nothing” (SUD, 25–26; SKS 11, 141– 142). ― Anti-Climacus: → 147,3. the tempter] the serpent (→ 240,29), the Devil.

36

placards on street corners that say: “The World Wants to Be Deceived.”] Refers to the placard for the September 15, 1849, performance of A. E. Scribe’s play, Verden vil bedrages, Lystspil i 5 Acter [The World Wants to be Deceived. Comedy in 5 Acts], trans. by N.C.L. Abrahams from the French, Le Puff ou mensonge et vérité [Puffery, or Lies and Truth] (1848); see Det kongelige Theaters Repertoire [Repertoire of the Royal Theater], no. 167 (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB U 101), which Kierkegaard had purchased at J. H. Schubothe’s bookshop on April 7, 1849. The play premiered at the Royal Theater on March 27, 1849, and was performed seven times in all, with the last performance on September 15, 1849. The day before a performance, the Royal Theater had yellow placards announcing the performance posted around town on walls and street corners.

11

241

Fredrikke Bremer] → 209,37. I … voluntarily made myself vulnerable … most embi�ering of martyrdoms] Refers both to the circumstance that Kierkegaard, alias Frater Taciturnus, himself asked to be “abused” in the satirical weekly Corsaren (→ 205,27), and to the fact that Corsaren directed a long series of a�acks at him (→ 165,13 and → 187,8). ― have voluntarily made myself vulnerable: Variant: added. continuing financial sacrifice] → 234,14. In Frederikke it is stated … embi�ered if the sun does not shine as I wish it to] → 213,10. Presumably a reference to Fredrika Bremer’s series of articles Lif i norden, which began to appear in Danish translation on September 12, 1849 (→ 209,37). Martensen] → 151,19. Pauli] Just Henrik Voltelen Paulli (1809–1865), Danish theologian and priest; theology graduate, 1833; from 1835, catechist at Church of the Holy Ghost; from 1837, palace priest at Christiansborg Castle Church, and from 1840, also court priest; close associate of Bishop J. P. Mynster (whose el-

16

241

18

24 26

31 31

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 157–162

31

32 32 34 34 34

37

dest daughter Paulli married in 1843) and a close friend of H. L. Martensen; member of the hymnal commi�ee of the Copenhagen Clerical Convent, 1841–1844. Heiberg] Johan Ludvig Heiberg (1791–1860), author, editor, and critic; 1828–1839, playwright and translator at the Royal Theater, therea�er its dramatic adviser until he became director of the theater in 1849; 1829, titular professor; 1830–1836, taught logic, aesthetics, and Danish literature at the Royal Military High School. J. L. Heiberg was the age’s leading tastemaker. Goldschmidt] → 205,15. P. L. Møller] → 205,16. velvet paunch] → 184,34. become a bishop] H. L. Martensen would in fact become bishop of Zealand in 1854. didn’t Frederikke come running … the Dogmatics, of which she received galley proofs] → 210,1. always had 3000 subscribers] i.e., to the journal Corsaren (→ 165,15). Mag. K.] Magister Kierkegaard (→ 206,27).

242

2

242

6

Zacharias Werner says … Xt … is the anointed one in a double sense] Kierkegaard’s rendering of Zacharias Werner’s sermon for the first Sunday in Advent on the gospel reading, Lk 21:28, in Zacharias Werner’s ausgewählte Predigten, vol. 3, in Zacharias Werner’s Sämmtliche Werke (→ 191,33), vol. 13, pp. 113–126; p. 120.

242

16

get removed from life so as not to create a disturbance] Refers to the fact that the mentally ill could not be admi�ed to Frederick’s Hospital in Copenhagen but were instead sent to the city’s insane asylums, St. Hans Hospital in Roskilde or Bidstrupgård, northwest of Roskilde, about twenty miles from Copenhagen. scarcely find a priest, and if so only a mediocre one] See, e.g., Politivennen, no. 1450, October 13, 1843, p. 658: “Can it be called a Christian duty when a priest lets a corpse lie unburied for eleven days because he is unwilling to inconvenience himself to go out to the cemetery until there is a corpse for which he will be paid, and this corpse, which he has to bury free of charge, can be taken along as a ma�er of secondary importance?”

17

1849

569

“they alleviate the sorrows and ennoble the joys,”] It has not been possible to identify the source of this quotation. they do it in accordance with a fee schedule] → 169,29. Zacharias Werner … our heart is a wilderness] Kierkegaard’s rendering of Zacharias Werner’s sermon for the third Sunday in Advent on the gospel reading Jn 1:23, in Zacharias Werner’s ausgewählte Predigten, vol. 3, in Zacharias Werner’s Sämmtliche Werke (→ 191,33), vol. 13, pp. 140–152; p. 140.

21

The woman who was a sinner … dared to go see Xt in the Pharisee’s house … dinner] Refers to Lk 7:36–50. Nicodemus … dared only come to him at night] Refers to Jn 3:1–21; see also Jn 7:50 and 19:39.

2

What Luther says … about the difference betw. Xt as exemplar and as gi�] Refers to “Dr. Morten Luther’s Fortale” [Dr. Martin Luther’s Preface] in En christelig Postille (→ 146,13), vol. 1, pp. xii–xiv, where Luther warns against “making Christ into a Moses, as if he was nothing more than a teacher and an exemplar―something other saints also are―or as if the gospel was a textbook and a law book…[it is true that Christ was an exemplar] but this is the least of the gospel, and in this respect it does not really deserve the name of gospel.…For the basis and main point of the gospel is that before you take hold of Christ as an exemplar, you accept and acknowledge him as a present, a gi�, whom God has given you as your property.… When in this way you have Christ as the foundation and chief good of your salvation, then the second part follows, namely that you also accept him as an exemplar and sacrifice yourself in service to your neighbor.…So the difference between gi� and exemplar is the same as the one between faith and works.…This double good―gi� and exemplar―we have in Christ.” the exaggerated misuse of Xt as exemplar] Refers to the widespread emphasis on Christ as exemplar, and thus the practice of “imitating Christ,” in the Middle Ages, especially in monastic movements and in mysticism. For example, St. Bernard

9

22 33

243

4

13

243

570

16 25

29

244

2

244

19 21 29

245

27 33 39

41

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 162–168

of Clairvaux placed great emphasis on the imitation of Christ in poverty, humility, and suffering. The mysticism that emphasizes the passion of Christ regarded imitation of Christ’s sufferings as the path to perfection, whereas quietist mysticism (→ 193,15) said both that the soul ought to imitate Christ’s death on the cross, and also that the individual ought to imitate Christ in striving a�er virtue, especially pure love of God. Thomas à Kempis’s De imitatione Christi [The Imitation of Christ] (→ 150,2 and → 150,3) contributed greatly to spreading the idea of imitating Christ in late medieval Europe. the whole business has rlly become] Variant: first wri�en “has made the whole business into”. the same distinction betw. Xt as gi� and as exemplar as that between faith and works] → 243,9. Luther, when he married] In 1525, Luther married the nun Katharina von Bora, who had fled with several other nuns from a cloister in Nimbschen to Wi�enberg, where Luther offered them refuge. The world wants to be deceived] → 191,18 and → 241,11. a comic poet à la Cervantes] → 199,14. Don Quixote] → 199,14. voluntarily] Variant: added. going on with him] Rasmus Nielsen (→ 192,20). I permi�ed him to approach me personally] → 192,20. Now he lies ill] See an undated le�er (probably from early September 1849) from Rasmus Nielsen to Kierkegaard (LD, 317; B&A 1, 249). endure quite a bit from his wife … holds me guilty of everything] Rasmus Nielsen’s wife, Edel Margrethe Nielsen, seems to have been critical of her husband’s close relationship to Kierkegaard; see P. A. Rosenberg, Rasmus Nielsen. Nordens Filosof. En almenfa�elig Fremstilling [Rasmus Nielsen, Scandinavia’s Philosopher: A Popular Presentation] (Copenhagen, 1903), p. 45: “his wife, who understood well that the consequence of his relationship with the great hermit would be harmful in the worldly sense, let him know that he was destroying his future thereby.”

1849

Martensen] → 151,19. almost become angry with R. N. because … I can be used against him] Perhaps an allusion to the review of Rasmus Nielsen’s (→ 192,20) Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed that appeared in Dansk Kirketidende (→ 221,16). right in the preface that he had made use of my writings] i.e., in the preface to Rasmus Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed, pp. v–x, in which neither Kierkegaard nor his writings are mentioned. The last time I spoke with him, Bishop Mynster said] The date of the conversation to which Kierkegaard refers is not known. Hegelian] → 192,20.

7

246

5

246m

What Zacharias Werner says … “St. Gregory the Great … great prophet and lover of the truth.”] Kierkegaard’s rendering of Zacharias Werner’s sermon for the third Sunday in Advent on the gospel reading, Jn 1:23, in Zacharias Werner’s ausgewählte Predigten, vol. 3, in Zacharias Werner’s Sämmtliche Werke (→ 191,33), vol. 13, pp. 140–152; p. 148. ― St. Gregory the Great: Pope Gregory I (or the Great) (ca. 540–604, pope from 590 until his death), since the Middle Ages regarded by the Roman Catholic Church as the fourth of the four Latin Fathers of the Church. ― John the Baptist … I am not Xt: See Jn 1:20.

19

246

“The Tax Collector,” “The Woman Who Was a Sinner,”] See The High Priest―The Tax Collector― The Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (→ 224,12). ― The Tax Collector: → 226,31. ―The Woman Who Was a Sinner: → 243,2.

28

246

“falling away” … the consummation of everything] Reference to 1 Tim 4:1; see also 2 Thess 2:3. in our time] Variant: first wri�en “in our time.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. free-thinkers] In Kierkegaard’s time a term for people who either did not adhere to Christianity or who argued against it; sometimes the term was used more specifically with respect to contempo-

34

246

5

247

12

33

38

14

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 168–177

22

247

30 33

248

1 3 4

6

14

248m

11

rary theologians and philosophers who regarded Christianity as a myth; see, e.g., CUP 1, 580 (where the Danish word “Fri-Tænker” is translated into English as “atheist”); SKS 7, 528. Xt himself says … will he find faith on the earth] Cited freely from Lk 18:8. Christ is born in a stable … laid in a manger] Reference to Lk 2:7. cost the children of Bethlehem their lives] Reference to Mt 2:16–18. Friday Discourses] → 224,7. Discourses at the Communion on Fridays] → 224,7. No. 1. Lk 7:47: “but the one to whom li�le is forgiven, loves li�le.”] The idea for the first of the Two Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (1851) (WA, 167–177; SKS 12, 283–292). No. 2. 1 Pet 4:7: love shall cover a multitude of sins] The idea for the second of the Two Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (Copenhagen, 1851) (WA, 179–188; SKS 12, 293–302). 1 Pet 4:7 is an error for 1 Pet 4:8. in the 30th verse … when he blessed the bread … they recognized him] Variant: added. See Lk 24:30. At the altar he is invisibly and yet truly present] The idea of Christ’s presence at the altar is based on the Lutheran doctrine of ubiquity, i.e., the doctrine of the omnipresence of Christ, both in his divine nature at the right hand of God in heaven and in his human nature as flesh and blood in the elements of communion, where he was present “in, with, and under” the external symbols of bread and wine. See, e.g., the Lutheran confessional document Formula Concordiae [Formula of Concord] (wri�en 1577–1578, pub. 1580), in Libri symbolici ecclesiae evangelicae sive Concordia [The Symbolic Books of the Evangelical Church or Concordia], ed. K. A. Hase, 2 vols., 2nd ed. (Leipzig, 1837 [1827]; ASKB 624), p. 735. See also § 123 in K. Hase, Hu�erus redivivus oder Dogmatik der Evangelisch-Lutherischen Kirche. Ein dogmatisches Repertorium für Studierende [Hu�erus redivivus or the Dogmatics of the Evangelical Lutheran Church: A Dogmatics Sourcebook for Students],

1849

571

4th improved ed. (Leipzig, 1839 [1828]; ASKB 581), p. 306. Thomas à Kempis says: A hum. being has two wings … simplicity and faithfulness] Free rendering of Thomas à Kempis’s (→ 150,2) words in the preface to bk. 2, chap. 4 “Et reent og eenfoldigt Sind” [A Pure and Simple Spirit], in Thomas a Kempis, om Christi E�erfølgelse, fire Bøger (→ 150,3), pp. 48–49; p. 48.

25

248

giving alms in secret] Allusion to Mt 6:2–4. tempting God―] Variant: first wri�en “tempting God.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence.

32

248

10

250

“fear and trembling”] Allusion to Phil 2:12 (→ 196,35).

18

250

a�ack from behind] See journal entry JJ:186, from January or February 1844, where Kierkegaard writes: “for time is the most dangerous thing to fight against; for then it wounds like the Parthian shot, in that it takes flight and a�acks always worst from behind” (KJN 2, 185). In Plutarch’s biography “Crassus,” chap. 24, 6, in his Parallel Lives, he relates that the Parthians continued to shoot arrows even while they retreated, and that they did so with great skill, Plutarchi vitae parallelae [Plutarch’s Parallel Lives], 9 vols., stereotype ed., (Leipzig, 1829; ASKB 1181–1189), vol. 5, p. 192. For an English translation, see Plutarch’s Lives, trans. Dryden, 3 vols. (London, 1910), vol. 2, p. 293.

36

251

In the sermon … every sermon begins by being first of all a sermon of Law] Refers to Martin Luther’s sermon on Jn 1:19–28, the gospel for fourth Sunday in Advent, in En christelig Postille (→ 146,13), vol. 1, pp. 52–61; pp. 59–60: “So John [the Baptist] has a double office, and following him so does every evangelical preacher, because he indeed first makes all people into sinners… next, he consoles, showing how a person must take leave of sin, pointing toward the coming Savior, who will deliver us from all our sinfulness if we accept him in living faith.…A truly

1

252

572

4

7 18

252

31 34

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 177–179

Christian preacher is thus the person who does not preach otherwise than did John in days gone by, but remains true to it, not deviating from it: First, he preaches the Law…” what he then says about the sermon of the Law] Refers to the next portion of Luther’s sermon cited in the previous note: “He [a truly Christian preacher] shall, so to speak, baptize his listeners in the Jordan. For the cold water signifies the doctrine of the Law, which does not kindle love, but rather extinguishes it. For through the Law a person acknowledges how difficult, yes, impossible, it is to fulfill the Law. He therefore becomes hostile to the Law, his desire for it cools, his heart turns away from it.…Then he must humble himself and confess that he is a lost creature, that all his works are sin. With this, John’s baptism comes to an end. Now he sees what John means when he says: Convert! Now he understands that there is splendid meaning in the saying that there is no one who is not sorely in need of conversion.… When the Law has thus been fulfilled and baptism consummated, when a person is humbled by self-knowledge and is deprived of all confidence in his own almighty ego―then comes the second part of John’s office, when he turns poor people away from himself, toward Christ, saying: Behold the Lamb of God, who takes away the sin of the world! In other words: By my teachings, up to this point I have made all of you into sinners, condemned all your works, and said that you must abandon confidence in yourself―then mark well, in order that you not abandon your confidence in God, and I will show you how you are to be saved from your sins!” (En christelig Postille, vol. 1, p. 60). the basic error of the Middle Ages … the prototype] → 243,13. Luther says that when the Law is properly preached … passes judgment on him] → 252,4. “Christian state.” ] → 178,24. woman from Amager] A woman (especially from Amager, then farmland outside of the city, now a district of Copenhagen) who sold fruits and vegetables. In Kierkegaard’s day, Amager was a rural district with many small farms, and the city peo-

1849

ple of Copenhagen regarded people from Amager as naive, crude, and comical. the arcade] Refers to the arcade encircling the riding ring behind Christiansborg Palace in Copenhagen. Because the arcade was a favorite place for promenades in Kierkegaard’s time, it also a�racted hawkers and beggars. See Kierkegaards København (→ 163,13), p. 372, the illustration and accompanying caption. I exist as a sort of half-mad fellow] → 230m,8. a mad Maier] Probably a reference to the publisher, editor, and journalist Edvard Meyer (1813–1880), who since January 1845 had had great success in publishing the daily newspaper Flyveposten, but at the same time was ridiculed for his self-satisfaction, naïveté, and lack of a linguistic sense. During Corsaren’s a�ack in 1846 (→ 165,13) Kierkegaard was not compared with “mad Meyer,” but (in the form of his pseudonym Frater Taciturnus [→ 205,27]) he was identified with “crazy Nathanson” (→ 207,36). the very journalism … protect the common man―from the distinguished classes] Refers to Corsaren (→ 165,13). boys judge us] Allusion to Isa 3:4; see also Eccl 10:16. A truly clever head, a youth] Reference to M. A. Goldschmidt (→ 205,15). sat at my feet, learning] Allusion to Acts 22:3. 3000 subscribers] i.e., to Corsaren (→ 165,15). I have 50 buyers] i.e., of Concluding Unscientific Postscript (→ 165,11). the paradigms that are used … possibility, not historical actuality] It has not been possible to identify the referent here. Grundtvig … He has helped others and cannot help himself … hellish delight] Refers to N.F.S. Grundtvig’s (→ 201,1) sermon “Hidtil haver Herren hjulpet sig selv!” [Until Now, the Lord Has Helped Himself!] on Mk 16:1–8 for Easter Sunday, no. 13 (and not no. 2, as Kierkegaard writes) in Grundtvig’s Christelige Prædikener eller Søndags-Bog [Christian Sermons, or Sunday Book], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1827–1830; ASKB 222–224), vol. 1, pp. 185–199; pp. 185–186: “My friends, there are scarcely any words in the entire pas-

35

17

253

19

21

23 24 27 28 28

3

16

254

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 179–182 sion story that wound every noble human heart as deeply as the poisonous words with which the chief priests, the elders, and the scribes mocked the crucified one, when they said: he has helped others and cannot help himself! [Mt 27:42].…[This] makes it plain to see what sort of delight and jokes there are in Hell.” 255

2 19 21

37

256

3

255m

6

256

10 14 15

Friday Discourses] i.e., discourses at the communion on Fridays (→ 224,7). Of Xt it is told that … he came to them through closed doors] Refers to Jn 20:19, 26. This is o�en misused as a metaphor … that he even goes through closed doors] See, e.g., Zacharias Werner’s sermon “Am weißen Sonntage” [For Whitsunday] on Jn 20:28 (→ 257,34), in Zacharias Werner’s ausgewählte Predigten, vol. 1, in Zacharias Werner’s Sämmtliche Werke (→ 191,33), vol. 11, pp. 135–146; p. 138. the earlier one, “My Sheep Hear My Voice”] Refers to the third of the “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays: Christian Discourses,” which is the fourth section of Christian Discourses (1848) (CD, 268–274; SKS 10, 285–292). The discourse is based on the gospel text Jn 10:27. the invitation “come here,”] Alludes to Jesus’ invitation in Mt 11:28 (→ 198,8). This is probably also an allusion to the statue of Christ at the altar in the Church of Our Lady in Copenhagen, where the pedestal bears the passage: “Come unto Me / Ma�h. XI. 28.” See “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays,” no. 2 (which Kierkegaard delivered in the Church of Our Lady on Friday, June 18, 1847), in Christian Discourses (1848): “See, he [Christ] opens his arms and says: come here, come here to me, all you who labor and are heavy laden” (CD, 262–267; SKS 10, 282, and accompanying note). of course the kingdom of heaven is also “within you”] Allusion to Lk 17:21. Friday Discourses] i.e., discourses at the communion on Fridays (→ 224,7). see Journal NB11 p. 186] See entry NB11:171.a in the present volume. Lk 18:13 “But the tax collector … li� up his eyes to heaven.”] → 226,31.

1849

573

Next, Xt’s words to the person born blind (Lk 18:42) … your faith has saved you] Kierkegaard owned K. G. Bretschneider, Lexicon manuale graecolatinum in libros Novi Testamenti [Greek and Latin Hand Lexicon of the New Testament], 2 vols., 2nd ed. (Leipzig, 1829 [1824]; ASKB 73–74). The Greek word αναβλεψον cited by Kierkegaard is given two slightly different readings in Bretschneider’s lexicon (vol. 1, p. 70, where the passage Lk 18:41– 43 is among the loci Bretschneider cites); the first is “I look up” the second, “I see again.” the old hymn, One word from you heals For all eternity] Cited in abbreviated form from the fi�h stanza of the hymn “O Herre! kommer Sorgens Stund hernede” [O, Lord! The Hour of Sorrow Comes Here Below], by the Danish author and composer of hymns, B. S. Ingemann: “O, You, who can turn aside all the world’s pain! You, who taught me the joys of heaven even in the midst of pain: One word from you saves and heals me for eternity,” Tillæg til den evangelisk-christelige Psalmebog (→ 152,17), no. 596, pp. 38–39 (the supplement was paginated and bound separately at the back of the Evangelisk-christelig Psalmebog [Evangelical Christian Hymnal]) (Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB 197). The hymn had been published in B. S. Ingemann’s Høimesse-Psalmer til Kirkeaarets Helligdage [Hymns for the Principal Services on the Holy Days of the Church Year] (Copenhagen, 1825), in which it was included as hymn no. 13, with the indication that it was intended for “the third Sunday a�er Epiphany. (Gosp. Ma�. 8th chap., 1st verse, Jesus came down from the mountain).” Xt’s words at the communion … This is my body which is given for you] Refers to the words of institution of the communion ritual. In addition to the Forordnet Alter-Bog (→ 198,7), pp. 253–254, see also Mt 26:26–29; Mk 14:22–25; Lk 22:17–20.

17

read the description of the future found toward the end of A Literary Review of “Two Ages”] Refers to A Literary Review: Two Ages, Novella by the Author of a Story of Everyday Life, Published by J. L. Heiberg Cphgn. Reitzel 1845, Reviewed by S. Kierkegaard (Copenhagen, 1846), pp. 107–111 (TA, 106–110; SKS 8, 100–104).

3

30

36

257

574

7

257

10

10

257

258

34

9 12

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 182–185

“the system”] → 151,19. otherwise really maundering funeral piece] Variant: “otherwise” added. Variant: what is here rendered as “funeral piece” is, in Kierkegaard’s Danish, Begravelses-Tærte (literally, “burial tart”), and is not an expression otherwise known in Danish. The editors of SKS suggest that it is an error for Begravelses-Tale, which means “burial discourse.” the Gospel story about the widow’s son in Nain] The text is Lk 7:11–17, which was the gospel for the sixteenth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, which in 1849 fell on September 23. In his sermon for Whitsunday … Zacharias Werner … Thomas’s lack of faith] Free rendering of Zacharias Werner’s sermon “Am weißen Sonntage” [On Whitsunday] on Jn 20:28, in Zacharias Werner’s ausgewählte Predigten, vol. 1, in Zacharias Werner’s Sämmtliche Werke (→ 191,33), vol. 11, pp. 135–146, p. 140, where it is related that “Gregory the Great” said that “The faith of Magdalene and Peter is not as instructive as Thomas’s lack of faith.” ― Whitsunday (the Sunday a�er Easter): An ancient ecclesiastical name for the first Sunday a�er Easter, from the earliest days of Christianity, which was the major baptismal day of the year, when those who were to be baptized wore white garments. (In the modern Christian tradition, “Whitsunday” can mean Pentecost, which is the seventh Sunday a�er Easter.) –– Gregory the Great: → 246,19. –– Magdalene: Mary Magdalene; see Lk 8:2, 24:1–12; Mt 27:56, 27:61; Jn 20:1–18. Tradition also identifies her with the woman who was a sinner in Lk 7:36–50. ― Thomas: one the twelve apostles; on his lack of faith, see Jn 20:24–29. even if he had the tongue of an angel] See 1 Cor 13:1. in silk and velvet] In accordance with a sumptuary decree from 1683 (→ 174,27), among the clergy, only bishops, the royal confessor, and those who had taken the theological doctorate were permi�ed to wear a priestly cap and gown of velvet, with a silk cape.

1849

devouring the homes of widows and orphans] See Mt 23:14. On the offense of oppressing widows and orphans, see, e.g., Ex 22:21; Deut 24:19; Jer 7:6; Ezek 22:7; Zech 7:10; and Mal 3:5. “to pray lengthy prayers for appearance’s sake”] Presumably a rendering of Mt 23:14; see the preceding note and Mt 6:5, 6:7. stars and sashes and ribbons] Signifying membership in various orders. velvet paunch] → 184,34. Tryde] Eggert Christopher Tryde (1781–1860), Danish theologian and priest; theology graduate, 1804; a�er having served as parish priest in a number of different parishes on Zealand from 1807, in 1838 he was named archdeacon at the Church of Our Lady, and from 1841 he was also co-director and teacher at the pastoral seminary in Copenhagen. Tryde had served as Kierkegaard’s confessor in the period 1839–1842. He ordains Kofoed-Hansen] Hans Peter KofoedHansen (1813–1893), Danish theologian, teacher, and priest; theology graduate, 1837, following which he became a teacher at the Odense Cathedral School; starting in 1840, he authored novels under the pseudonym “Jean-Pierre”; on June 24, 1849, named perpetuate curate at the Church of Our Savior in Christianshavn, a district immediately adjoining Copenhagen, though not then legally a part of the city (see Departementstidenden [Departmental Times], no. 43, June 28, 1849, p. 583); on August 17 the same year he was ordained by Bishop J. P. Mynster in the Church of Our Lady in Copenhagen; and on September 9 of the same year he was installed (not ordained) at the Church of Our Savior by Archdeacon E. C. Tryde (see Berlingske Tidende, no. 213, September 8, 1849): “Hr. Archdeacon Tryde installs H. Kofod [sic] Hansen as permanent curate at the Church of Our Savior. Hr. Kofod Hansen delivers his inaugural sermon.” See P. P. Jørgensen, H. P. Kofoed-Hansen (Jean Pierre) med særligt Henblik til Søren Kierkegaard [H. P. Kofoed-Hansen, with Special A�ention to Søren Kierkegaard] (Copenhagen, 1920), pp. 431ff. declaims … the servants of the Lord … one’s life is at stake] Appears to refer to E. C. Tryde’s address on installing Kofoed-Hansen in his post,

16

16

24 25 13

13

14

259

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 185–190

18

27

259

36

36

260

12

260

17 30

though it has not been possible to find the address itself. Kofoed-Hansen … had to withdraw his application … a couple of hundred rix-dollars less than he had expected] Refers to the fact that Kofoed-Hansen sent a petition to the king, dated “Odense, July 7, 1849,” in which he thanked the crown for having appointed him to the post at the Church of Our Savior, but then went on to say “however, the post turned out to be different from what I had assumed when I most humbly applied for it.” The fact was that the clerical living a�ached to the post was significantly less than it had first appeared to be, and Kofoed-Hansen writes: “Therefore I dare most humbly petition Your Majesty to show me the grace of freeing me from the post to which Your Majesty called me on June 24 and permit me to remain in the post I had until that time,” (Rigsarkivet [National Archives], Kultusministeriet, Dept. 1, Journal A 1849, 645/1849). exposing himself to the danger of ridicule] Probably a reference to the fact that Kierkegaard made himself vulnerable to “abuse” by the satirical weekly Corsaren (→ 205,27, → 165,13, and → 187,8). Equality, of course, is what the world wants] Presumably an allusion to the slogan “Liberty, Equality, and Fraternity” from the French Revolution of 1789, a slogan that reappeared during the “February Revolution” in Paris in February 1848, and therea�er in other European countries, including Denmark, where it was particularly popular with the Society of Friends of the Peasantry, a group representing the common people of the countryside. See entry NB4:113 in KJN 4, 340. loving one’s neighbor] → 191,3. 1000 Civil Servants] → 166,13. a blessedness that surpasses all understanding] Allusion to Phil 4:7. that romantic love is selfishness, that friendship is selfishness] See, e.g., chap. 2.B in the first series of Works of Love (1847) (WL, 44–60; SKS 9, 51–67), and chap. 4 in the second series of Works of Love

1849

575

(WL, 264–279, esp. 267–268; SKS 9, 263–277, esp. 265–266). Barrabas … be set free] In English and modern Danish translations “Barabbas.” Allusion to Mt 27:15–26.

33

Grundtvig gave up his post because Clausen was teaching false doctrine and had not been removed] In his polemical piece Kirkens Gienmæle mod Professor Theologiæ Dr. H. N. Clausen [The Church’s Rejoinder to Professor of Theology, Dr. H. N. Clausen] (Copenhagen, 1825), N.F.S. Grundtvig (→ 201,1) directed a violent a�ack at H. N. Clausen for having “placed himself at the head of all the enemies of the Christian Church and despisers of God’s Word in this country” (p. iii) in his book Catholicismens og Protestantismens Kirkeforfatning, Lære og Ritus [The Church Constitutions, Doctrines, and Rites of Catholicism and Protestantism] (Copenhagen, 1825). Grundtvig further insisted “that as an honest man, he [Clausen] must either offer a solemn apology to the Christian Church for his unchristian and offensive teachings, or he must lay down his post and renounce his name as a Christian” (p. iv). Clausen sued Grundtvig for libel. Grundtvig lost the case, and on October 30, 1826, he was sentenced to lifelong prior censorship of his writings. Even before the sentence was handed down, Grundtvig resigned from his position at the Church of Our Savior, where he had been permanent curate since the autumn of 1822. ― Clausen: Henrik Nicolai Clausen (1793–1877), Danish theologian; dr. theol., 1826; from 1821, a lecturer at the University of Copenhagen, where he became extraordinary professor in 1822 and ordinary professor in 1830.

35

261

Friday Sermon] i.e., a sermon at the communion on Fridays (→ 224,7). Philipp.: for to me, living is Xt and dying is gain.] Freely cited from Phil 1:21. It is no longer I who live, but it is Xt in me] Free rendering of Gal 2:20. Our life is hidden with God in Xt.] Free rendering of Col 3:3.

3

262

5 6 7

263

576 263

26 27

264

2

5 8 11 19

34

41

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 191–196

I cannot sufficiently thank God for all he has granted me] → 235,16. the most wretched of all] Probably an allusion to Eph 3:8; see also 1 Cor 15:9. my fiancée] i.e., Regine Olsen, to whom Kierkegaard was engaged from September 10, 1840, until October 12, 1841 (→ 159m,2). commended the unmarried state] Probably an allusion to 1 Cor 7. I do not seek any official appointment] → 206,9. From the moment my financial situation became difficult] → 153,21 and → 234,14. madness―] Variant: changed from “madness.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. Marriage has its warmest defender in me] See, e.g., “The Aesthetic Validity of Marriage” in the second part of Either/Or (1843) (EO 2, 3–154; SKS 3, 13–151), and “Some Words on Marriage in Reply to Objections” in Stages on Life’s Way (1845) (SLW, 87–184; SKS 6, 85–171). sometimes] Variant: added. my life expresses cruelty toward the beloved] → 212,15.

265

8

265

17

romantic love and friendship] → 260,30.

266

38

267

4

my love-relationship … looks like cruelty] → 212,15. Xt’s life … looks like the greatest sort of cruelty … in Works of Love] Refers to chap. 3.A in the first series of Works of Love (1847) (WL, 91–134; SKS 9, 96–136).

267

20 23

26 27

Financial worries] → 153,21 and → 234,14. rented the apartment on Tornebuskegaden] On January 28, 1848, Kierkegaard entered into a rental contract (KA, D pk. 8 læg 21) with the tanner J. J. Gram (→ 234,24). The rooms rented were on the second floor of Gram’s property at the corner of Rosenborggade and Tornebuskegade. According to the contract, Kierkegaard was to move in on April 27, 1848. then seek an official appointment] → 206,9. Then suddenly confusion broke loose] Refers to the political upheavals in and around Denmark in 1848 (→ 179,18).

1849

I wrote more prolifically than ever] → 267m,17. stepping into that role] An expression Kierkegaard frequently uses and that he emphasizes in the sense of choosing to be something fully and wholly, of standing behind one’s personal view and acting in accordance with it. The Danish expression is at træde i Charakteer (literally, “to step into character,” i.e., to assume one’s role). the new pseudonym] i.e., Anti-Climacus (→ 147,3). truth of my being,] Variant: changed from “truth of my being.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. that is, it has broken … greater humiliation] Variant: This marginal note begins in the main column and is continued and completed in the marginal column. to put it in my language: God has outrun me] See “The Thorn in the Flesh” in Four Edifying Discourses (1844), where Kierkegaard writes: “An ancient, venerable, and trustworthy devotional work says that God acts toward a person as a hunter acts toward game: he gives him a bit of breathing room to recruit his strength and then resumes the chase” (EUD, 344; SKS 5, 332). Here Kierkegaard is referring to bk. 3, chap. 23 in Johann Arndt, Vier Bücher vom wahren Christenthum [Four Books on True Christianity] (Magdeburg, 1605–1610). See Sämtliche geistreiche Bücher Vom Wahren Christenthum, Welche handeln Von heilsamer Buße herzlicher Reue und Leid über die Sünde wahrem Glauben auch heiligem Leben und Wandel der rechten wahren Christen [All Insightful Books on True Christianity, Which Treat of Healthy Repentance, Heartfelt Regret, and Remorse over Sin, True Faith, as well as the Holy Life and Doings of the Genuinely True Christian], 2nd ed. (Tübingen, 1737 [1733]; ASKB 276), p. 768. become my own religious upbringing] See, e.g., chap. 3, “The Part of Governance in My Writings,” in the second part of The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 147,1) (PV, 70–90, esp. 77; SV2 13, 595–616, esp. 602): “If I were now to express, in the most categorically definite manner possible, Governance’s part in the whole of my writings, I know of no expression more fi�ing or decisive

32 37

1

268

11

1

2

9

267m

J O U R N A L NB 12 : 196–198

17

268

15

23

268

27 28

35 36 39

270

2 4

6

than this: It is Governance that has brought me up, and the upbringing is reflected in the process of the literary production.” the most perfect and true thing I have wri�en] Refers to The Sickness unto Death (→ 147,3) and to parts no. 1 and no. 2 of Practice in Christianity (→ 147,4 and → 224,5); probably also to The Point of View for My Work as an Author. In his sermon … Zacharias Werner says … None of you is asking me, “Where are you going?”] Kierkegaard’s rendering of Zacharias Werner’s sermon for the fourth Sunday a�er Easter on the gospel reading, Jn 16:8, in Zacharias Werner’s ausgewählte Predigten, vol. 3, in Zacharias Werner’s Sämmtliche Werke (→ 191,33), vol. 11, pp. 169–180; p. 171. ― two men who walked to Emmaus: Refers to Lk 24:13–35. Socrates is the questioner] A reference to Socrates’ unique talent as a questioner (→ 200,2). her] i.e., Regine Olsen (→ 159m,2). is not unlikely that … she expects an approach] See entry Not15:5 (→ 159m,4), where Kierkegaard writes: “Now the councillor of state is dead. Possibly she hopes, a�er all, to get to see me again, a relationship with me, an innocent and loving [relationship]” (KJN 3, 437). ― father: i.e., Terkild Olsen (→ 159m,1). her marriage] i.e., Regine Olsen’s marriage to J. F. Schlegel (→ 159m,2 and → 159,31). the story] i.e., the story of the engagement of Regine Olsen and Kierkegaard (→ 159m,2). Schlegel] Johan Frederik Schlegel (→ 159,31). my love was once that frightful thing: loving cruelty] → 212,15. making all possible amends to her] → 229m,3. See also entry Not15:5: “What wouldn’t I give to be able to dare to do it, to dare to deck her out, while she is still alive, with the historical renown which is surely hers. She will rank high among women” (KJN 3, 437). turned my back on my honor] Probably a reference to the fact that Kierkegaard appeared to be a scoundrel when he broke the engagement to Regine Olsen (→ 201,24).

1849

577

how proud I am―] Variant: first wri�en “how proud I am.” with the period indicating the end of the sentence. a sort of unhappy lover] Variant: “sort of” added. a girl who had adoringly begged to become his maidservant] This statement a�ributed to Regine Olsen has not been found wri�en elsewhere.

7

11 11

Notes for JOURNAL NB13 Critical Account of the Text of Journal NB13 581

Explanatory Notes for Journal NB13 589

NOTES FOR JOURNAL NB13

Critical Account of the Text by Kim Ravn and Steen Tullberg Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Vanessa Rumble

Explanatory Notes by Peter Tudvad Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Vanessa Rumble

581

Critical Account of the Text I. Description of the Manuscript Journal NB13 is a bound journal in quarto format. Kierkegaard placed a label “NB13” on the outside of the book.1 The manuscript of Journal NB13 is preserved in the Kierkegaard Archive (KA) at the Royal Library in Copenhagen. A single slip of paper, containing entry NB13:4, has been lost and therefore is reproduced here as it appears in EP, where editor H. P. Barfod notes that the entry was wri�en on “a loose slip of paper placed in the journal from the autumn of 1849.”2 The journal is wri�en in a gothic hand with some portions in a latin hand. Ten entries (NB13:11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 35, 50, 51, 61, and 89) are wri�en in a decidedly latin hand. In addition there are three entries (NB13:21, 37, and 78) that are wri�en vertically along the edge of the journal page, also in a decidedly latin hand.3 A latin hand was also used in writing Latin words and phrases and as a sort of calligraphy to lend emphasis to headings.

II. Dating and Chronology According to the label affixed to its front cover, Journal NB13 was begun on September 28, 1849, and must have been concluded no later than November 9, 1849, which is the beginning date of the next journal, NB14. Apart from the label on the cover (NB13:1), none of the journal’s ninety-two entries are dated. In entry NB13:79, Kierkegaard writes that the three discourses titled “The High Priest,” “The Tax Collector,” and “The Woman Who Was a Sinner” had now been delivered to the printer, which

) See illustration 3.

1

) EP I, 200.

2

) In SKS these entries are reproduced horizontally, across the entire width of the page.

3

582

J O U R N A L NB 13 took place on October 29, 1849.1 In this same entry he writes that “at present people are focusing on my pseudonym (Climacus),” which is perhaps a reference to a review that appeared in Flyveposten [The Flying Post], no. 256, November 1, 1849, of Rasmus Nielsen’s Mag. S. Kierkegaards “Johannes Climacus” og Dr. H. Martensens “Christelige Dogmatik.” En undersøgende Anmeldelse [Mag. S. Kierkegaard’s “Johannes Climacus” and Dr. H. Martensen’s Christian Dogmatics: An Investigative Review] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 701).2 In the next journal, NB14, Kierkegaard mentions “a scrap of paper that is lying in journal NB13.” According to this entry in Journal NB14, what was wri�en on that scrap is that, “when I enter into the character of authorship as something religious, a dedication would essentially relate to ‘her’” (NB14:44.d, in the present volume). This scrap of paper has now been lost, but as mentioned above in the “Description of the Manuscript” of Journal NB13, H. P. Barfod reproduced this scrap in EP. In the introductory remarks concerning Journal NB13 that he included in his catalogue of Kierkegaard’s papers, Barfod wrote, “at the beginning there is a reference to NB12 concerning the text for the Friday discourses, plus a loose scrap of paper containing the dra� of a dedication to Regine Schlegel.”3 It is not possible to assign a more specific date to the entry, NB13:4, which contains this dedication, but it is likely that it was wri�en during the period Kierkegaard was writing Journal NB13.

III. Contents The journal begins with a table of contents (entry NB13:2) that employs headings and page numbers in referring to fourteen of the journal’s ninety-two entries.4 These o�en quite detailed entries are evidence of Kierkegaard’s continuing efforts to interpret the work

) See Erindringsbog for Bianco Luno. 1846 [Memorandum Book for Bianco Luno, 1846] (Copenhagen: Archives of Bianco Luno’s Printing House, Aller Press), serial no. 442.

1

) See the explanatory notes to entry NB13:79 in the present volume.

2

) B-Cat., 370.

3

) Entries NB13:21, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 44, 55, 57, 61, 78, 79, and 81.

4

Critical Account of the Text

3. Cover of Journal NB13.

583

584

J O U R N A L NB 13 he had produced up to that point, and in particular of his deliberations concerning whether it was now appropriate to publish the results of that work,1 and in this connection, his understanding of himself and of his task in relation to his times. Kierkegaard’s deliberations relating to the writings concerning his work as an author are typified by his repeated recapitulations of the reasons for and against publishing them, which always end in a refusal to do so. The course typical of such deliberations can be followed in entry NB13:35: Concerning the Writings on My Work as an Author. They contain something that makes their publication suspect. This, however, is a view, a later view; I cannot say that I thought it in advance. There is a poetic element in them. In completing [my] work as an author, I have also included myself. Now it is certainly true that in the writings I have again and again repeated this and emphasized it, but I am continually afraid that by publishing them I might in some way infringe upon God, while at times it has also actually occurred to me that I would infringe upon God by not publishing them.…Therefore I am refraining from publishing these writings: be�er, by remaining silent, say too li�le about myself than, by speaking, say too much. The table of contents in entry NB13:2 is followed in entry NB13:3 by several references to dra�s of “Friday sermons.” There are references both to Journal NB122 and to entry NB13:6, which is a lengthy outline of a sermon on the mockery directed at Christ when he was on the cross (Mt 27:40–42). As mentioned above, the three Friday discourses (“The High Priest,” “The Tax Collector,” and “The Woman Who Was a Sinner”) were completed and delivered to printer3 during the period that Kierkegaard wrote

) On My Work as an Author was first published on August 7, 1851, whereas The Point of View for My Work as an Author was published posthumously in 1859 by P. C. Kierkegaard. See also the explanatory notes to entry NB13:21 in the present volume.

1

) Entry NB12:170.

2

) They were published on November 14, 1849, as Three Discourses for the Communion on Fridays.

3

Critical Account of the Text Journal NB13. In entry NB13:79, Kierkegaard notes that the book has been sent to the printer, and both there and in entry NB13:57 he remarks that these discourses “are related to the last pseudonym, Anti-Climacus” (NB13:57). In addition to reflections on the significance of the pseudonym Anti-Climacus (e.g., in entry NB13:78), there are a couple of entries that bear traces of Kierkegaard’s efforts in connection with the publication of Practice in Christianity, for example, entries NB13:32 and 88.1 In entry NB13:21, he remarks that “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself,” which would be included in Practice in Christianity, is to be made pseudonymous, and in a note on this entry (NB13:21.c) he comments that “in our time sermonic discourse has become impersonal.” The problem of contemporary “sermonic discourse” is the focal point of several entries, for example, entry NB13:26, but especially of the entries toward the end of the journal. In entry NB13:76 it is asserted that the priest’s “I” from the pulpit is not expected to be his personal “I,” but “a sort of dramatic I, or an I qua civil servant,” while in the next entry, NB13:77, he points out the inappropriateness of Christianity’s being represented by “speakers,” who, given their similarity to actors and poets, can be expected to express something close to the opposite of their personal existence. A comparison of the art of sermonic discourse and that of acting is developed in entry NB13:80, which begins as follows: From the ethical point of view, the situation of the sermonic discourse itself, of preaching, as it is presently understood, is as if calculated to deceive the speaker and the listener. In a splendid building, where art and good taste have produced the aesthetic concept of solemnity, when the mighty tones of the organ have filled the arches and the last notes are dying away―then a speaker steps forward; he now sets everything in motion to emphasize the moment; he himself is stimulated when he senses the effect he has; he is intensified, etc., etc. The late Spang once said that he had had some of his most splendid moments in the pulpit. Yes, alas, yes, from an aesthetic point of view, this sort of amplification of mood and imagination is indeed something. But wouldn’t an actor say the same thing about producing a stillness in the theater, so

) See the explanatory notes to entries NB13:21 and NB13:88 in the present volume.

1

585

586

J O U R N A L NB 13 that one can hear a pin drop―and then at the next instant hear the cheers, etc.; wouldn’t an actor also say that he had had some of his most splendid moments on the stage, through the intensification of electrifying others and being electrified by them[?] And the priest would even more so, he who himself is of course the I who speaks qua author. Kierkegaard is capable of drawing quite satirical consequences from the fact that the priest has become an actor, for example, in entry NB13:74, where he expresses surprise that the theater has been made the responsibility of the cultus minister: “I think it would be be�er if the cultus minister kept control over what has been entrusted to him―the theater and the Church―but took the title of theater director.”1 Observations on the problems of contemporary sermonizing are continued in entry NB13:82, where Kierkegaard proposes that the theatrical aspect of customary “sermonic discourse” could be remedied either by preaching to only a few people at a time, more or less as in a confessional, or by preaching to people on the street. In a number of places, Kierkegaard gives concrete examples of what he criticizes, for example, in addition to the late Pastor Spang mentioned above (NB13:80), Bishop J. P. Mynster (e.g., entries NB13:8, 80, and 88). This journal also contains examples of Kierkegaard’s recurrent critique of the clergy as a class (e.g., entry NB13:60), and as in the earlier cases, here, too, the cardinal points involve the contrast between leading a truly Christian life and having an ecclesiastical living, an official position, and making a profit (e.g., entries NB13:14, 15, 22, and 73). These deliberations reach a sort of culmination in a pair of entries on H. L. Martensen, who, in addition to being a professor of theology, could call himself a court preacher. In entry NB13:84, Kierkegaard imagines Martensen clad in “his vestments, the silk gown and the velvet paunch, the cross of knighthood, and perhaps, for the sake of completeness, a note in his hand or on his hat, on which is wri�en: [‘]ca. 2,000 rd. a year.[’]” In the lengthy entry NB13:86, which bears the heading “Prof. Martensen’s Status,” Kierkegaard then summarizes the relationship among Martensen, Mynster, and himself since Martensen’s return from his foreign travels ten years earlier, with his baggage packed full of Hegelian philosophy. In entry NB13:49, which treats Kierkegaard’s ambiva-

) See also the explanatory note to entry NB13:74 in the present volume.

1

Critical Account of the Text lent position in the literary world of the time, reference is made to Martensen and his influence on Kierkegaard’s public reception.1 Personal ma�ers are touched on in entries concerning Regine Schlegel (née Olsen) and Kierkegaard’s brother, Peter Christian. Kierkegaard’s onetime fiancée is the subject the dedication in entry NB13:4, and detailed accounts of Kierkegaard’s relationship with her are given in entries NB13:16 and 36.2 In entry NB13:65, Kierkegaard a�ributes the difference between his brother and himself to his brother’s never having had a spiritual youth, whereas Kierkegaard himself had never been young in the physical sense. The comparison takes its point of departure in “Peter’s words when he once remarked that there was a religious difference between him and myself: that he regarded the relationship to God as one of being loved, I regarded it as one of loving.” Other entries (e.g., NB13:5, 9, 10, and 56) revolve around the relationship to God. Among Kierkegaard’s theological considerations are his deliberations on the doctrine of grace (NB13:63), his recurrent reflections on suffering, that is, religious suffering (e.g., NB13:30, 59, and 62), and also on his daily martyrdom and his painful distance from the common man (e.g., NB13:20 and 32). At a number of points, including the lengthy entry NB13:89, “On the ‘Voluntary,’ ” it is emphasized that Christianity has become too lenient, just as Kierkegaard also repeats his definition of Christianity as an existential communication as opposed to a doctrine, and he raises the idea of reintroducing Christianity in Christendom (e.g., NB13:13, 50, 51, 66, and 92). In this context he asserts that the polemical element in Christianity ought to be emphasized even more strongly than was the case in Luther’s time (NB13:70).

) See the explanatory note to entry NB13:49 in the present volume.

1

) See also the “Critical Account of the Text of Journal NB12” in the present volume.

2

587

Explanatory Notes 273

1

NB13 … 49.] Variant: label on the outside front cover of the book.

274

1

Concerning the completed … p. 133 bo�om.] Variant: wri�en on the inside cover of the book. Concerning the completed work and myself … p. 28] See NB13:21 and NB13:21.a–c and their accompanying explanatory notes in the present volume. On that single individual, my work as an author, my existence … p. 34] See entry NB13:27 and its accompanying notes in the present volume. With respect to the idea of my life as an author … p. 36] See NB13:29 in the present volume. Another facet of my public situation … p. 45] See NB13:33 in the present volume. About the writings concerning my work as an author … p. 50] See NB13:35 and accompanying explanatory notes in the present volume. On myself qua author … p. 56] See NB13:37 in the present volume. On my position qua author … p. 69] See NB13:44 in the present volume. Lines about myself … p. 86 etc.] See NB13:55 in the present volume. On the three Friday discourses (The High Priest, etc.) … p. 91] See NB13:57 and → 311,37 in the present volume. On my works … p. 93] See NB13:61 in the present volume. The turn in my works, when the new pseudonym (Anti-Cl.) was presented … p. 124] See NB13:78 and → 324,1 in the present volume. On the three communion discourses (The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner) … p. 128] See NB13:79 and → 325,1 in the present volume. On my works as a whole … p. 133 bo�om] See NB13:81 in the present volume. On myself see … p. 39] See NB13:31.

1

3

5 7 8

10 11 12 13

15 16

18

21

274m

1

journal NB12] See Journal NB12 in the present volume. texts for Friday sermons] i.e., biblical passages for sermons at the communion services that in Kierkegaard’s day were held on Fridays in the Church of Our Lady. Kierkegaard had himself preached at three communion services in the Church of Our Lady: on June 18, 1847, on the text Mt 11:28; on August 27, 1847, on the text Jn 10:27; and on September 1, 1848, on the text Jn 12:32. Two of the sermons were published as the second and third discourses in the fourth part of Christian Discourses under the title “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays: Christian Discourses” (CD, 262–274; SKS 10, 277–292), and another in the first exposition in part 3 of Practice in Christianity (→ 287,18), (PC, 151–156; SKS 12, 151–160). first page of that journal] See NB12:4 in the present volume. p. 2] See NB13:6 in the present volume. p. 91] See NB13:58 in the present volume.

1

Regine Schlegel] Née Olsen (1822–1904), youngest daughter of Regina Frederikke Olsen (née Malling) and Terkild Olsen (→ 299,29); she had been engaged to Kierkegaard from September 10, 1840, until October 12, 1841; she subsequently became engaged to J. F. Schlegel on August 28, 1843, and married him on November 3, 1847 (→ 284,29). Friday discourses] i.e., discourses for the communion service that was held on Friday (→ 275,1). writings about my works] → 287,5. as I have wanted to do from the beginning … the character of the religious] Kierkegaard continually makes this assertion in The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 287,5).

1

Socratic ignorance] In the conversations recounted in Plato’s dialogues, Socrates o�en alludes to

13

275

1

3 5 6

276

3 4 5

277

590

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 5–9

his ignorance; see, e.g., Apology (21a–23b), where he explains that the oracle at Delphi had indeed denied that anyone was wiser than he, for he knew that he knew nothing, unlike the many who imagine that they know something. See Platonis opera quae extant [Surviving Works of Plato], ed. Fr. Ast, 11 vols. (Leipzig, 1819–1832; ASKB 1144–1154), vol. 8 (1825), pp. 108–113; for an English translation, see Plato: The Collected Dialogues, Including the Le�ers, ed. Edith Hamilton and Huntington Cairns (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1961), pp. 7–9. 277

16 17

278

12

13

278

21

Texts for the Friday Sermon] → 275,1. the words spoken of him in mockery when he was crucified] See Mt 27:40–42. a father confessor] A priest to whom one confesses one’s sins prior to receiving communion. In Kierkegaard’s day a priest gave a collective confessional discourse for those present and pronounced the forgiveness of sins to each communicant before he or she received the sacrament (→ 321,6); see chap. 4, art. 1 of Dannemarks og Norges Kirke-Ritual [Church Ritual for Denmark and Norway] (Copenhagen, 1762 [1685]). Zacharias Werner says … a frightful sin.] Friedrich Ludwig Zacharias Werner (1768–1823), Austrian poet, priest, and mystic; converted to Catholicism in Rome in 1811, ordained a priest in 1814, therea�er preached in Vienna. The passage cited is a translation from his sermon for the fourth Sunday a�er Easter on the text Jn 16:8, in Zacharias Werner’s Sämmtliche Werke. Aus seinem handschri�lichen Nachlasse herausgegeben von seinen Freunden [The Complete Works of Zacharias Werner: From His Posthumous Manuscripts, Published by His Friends], 13 vols. (Grimma, n.d. [1840]; ASKB 1851–1854), vol. 11, pp. 169–180; quotation on pp. 175–176. ― very good but] Variant: added. Luther’s sermon … for eternal life] Rendering of Luther’s sermon on the gospel text for New Year’s Day, Lk 2:21 in En christelig Postille sammendragen af Dr. Morten Luthers Kirke- og Huuspostiller [A Christian Book of Sermons Drawn from Dr.

1849

Martin Luther’s Church and House Sermons], trans. J. Thisted, 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1828; ASKB 283), vol. 1, pp. 118–126; p. 124: “Whoever will accept this child and allow him to be his Savior, regards him as a helper not primarily for this life, which he has commended into the hands of others, but for eternal life, for he indeed saves from sin and death.” For Luther says that … his faithful trudge about as in a swamp] From En christelig Postille, vol. 1, p. 124: “But on the other hand, he who believes that there is a God easily concludes that it does not have to do with this life, but that another and eternal life must come a�er.…And it does not make a lot of difference if he lets us slosh about in this temporal life as though we were in a swamp, so that it looked as if we had no God who would or could help us.” Mynster] Jakob Peter Mynster (1775–1854), Danish pastor, writer, and politician, from 1811 permanent curate at Vor Frue Kirke [The Church of Our Lady] in Copenhagen. From 1826 he was court preacher, and from 1828 royal confessor as well as court chaplain and chaplain at Christiansborg Palace Chapel. In 1834 he was appointed bishop of the diocese of Zealand and as such was the primate of the Danish Church and the king’s personal counselor; during the period 1835–1846, he was a member of the Advisory Assembly of Estates in Roskilde, where he was very influential; and in 1848–1849 he was a member of the constitutional assembly. Mynster was a member of a great many governing bodies and was the prime mover behind various key ecclesiastical publications, including the authorized Danish translation of the New Testament that appeared in 1819, the Udkast til en Alterbog og et Kirke-Ritual for Danmark [Dra� for a Service Book and Church Ritual for Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1839), and the authorized Tillæg til den evangelisk-christelige Psalmebog [Supplement to the Evangelical Christian Hymnal] (Copenhagen, 1845). to be nothing before God, less than a sparrow] See Mt 10:29–31. less than a grain of sand] See Sir 18:8–10.

25

1

279

32

279

33

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 9–15 280

40 18

281

18

21

281

25 26

30

every year, every day] Variant: changed from “every day”. these 70 years] Refers to the traditional notion of the length of a human life; see Ps 90:10. antiquity, in which the 3rd person is used of oneself] E.g., Julius Caesar, who speaks of himself in the third person in his account of the Roman conquest of Gaul. God-Man] Reference to Jesus as true God and true man. antiquity’s use of the third person] → 281,18. Lamartine’s speaking of himself in the third person] Refers to the French author and politician Alphonse de Lamartine (1790–1869), who in his Histoire de la Révolution de 1848 [History of the Revolution of 1848] (1849) sought to justify his role in the so-called February Revolution of 1848, when he served for a time as foreign minister and as the de facto head of the government. A Danish translation of Lamartine’s work appeared under the title “Den franske Revolutions Historie i 1848” [The History of the French Revolution of 1848]; it was first published as a supplement to the newspaper Berlingske Tidende [Berling’s Times] (→ 331,20), from July 27 through September 20, 1849 (nos. 176–223), and continued with the issue of October 16, 1849 (no. 245); it was subsequently published in book form as Den franske Revolutions Historie i 1848, 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1850–1851). Lamartine continually speaks of himself in the third person, o�en providing detailed descriptions of his own tone of voice, facial expressions, gestures, posture, feelings, etc. He says: Then Lamartine said this with a certain facial expression, etc.] See, e.g., Berlingske Tidende, no. 206, August 31, 1849: “Lamartine pauses for a moment at the top of the stairs, and, with a slightly sarcastic though not defiant smile, he steadily observes those who had shouted, and he says…”; see Den franske Revolutions Historie i 1848, vol. 1, p. 199. And in Berlingske Tidende, no. 216, September 12, 1849: “Lamartine then addressed this man in the convincing tone of honesty, which he had in his heart and which the seriousness of

1849

591

the circumstances had made even more profound and more cherished”; see Den franske Revolutions Historie i 1848, vol. 1, p. 259. Charles in The First Love, who also relates his life in the third person] Refers to the Danish translation of A. E. Scribe’s comedy, Les premières amours ou Les souvenirs d’enfance [The First Loves, or Memories of Childhood] (1825), sc. 16, in which Charles, who is pretending to be someone else, relates his life story in the third person to his cousin, who does not recognize him because they have not seen one another in eight years. See Scribe, Den første Kjærlighed. Lystspil i een Act [The First Love, Comedy in One Act], trans. J. L. Heiberg in Det kongelige Theaters Repertoire, nr. 45 [The Repertoire of the Royal Theater, no. 45] (Copenhagen, 1832; ASKB U 98), pp. 12–13. It had been performed at the Royal Theater in Copenhagen a total of seventy-nine times from its premiere on June 10, 1831, through May 29, 1849.

35

this … is what people use to portray me as an exaggeration] It has not been possible to find a source for this. pursuit of official positions] i.e., appointment as a priest or something similar (→ 291,15).

3

grand ecclesiastical offices with high rank] In the Danish system of rank and precedence (established by decrees in 1746 and 1808, plus later amendments) there were nine classes, each further subdivided into numerical subclasses. The order of rank and precedence was published annually in the Kongelig Dansk Hof- og Stats- Calender [Royal Danish Court and Government Almanac] and the Veiviser eller Anviisning til Kiøbenhavns, Christianshavns, Forstædernes og Frederiksbergs Beboere [City Directory, or Information on the Residents of Copenhagen, Christianshavn, the Suburbs, and Frederiksberg] (Copenhagen, 1849), in which all persons of rank were listed with the proper forms of address. See also “Titulaturer til Rangspersoner i alfabetisk Orden” [Titles of Persons of Rank, Listed in Alphabetical Order], in C. Bartholin, Almindelig Brev- og Formularbog [Universal Book of Le�ers and Formulae], 2 vols.

24

283

8

283

592

25

284

2

12 29

36

284m

285

5

22 25 25

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 15–20

(Copenhagen, 1844; ASKB 933), vol. 1, pp. 49–56. The highest-ranking of Danish clergy was the bishop of Zealand, who ranked thirteenth in the first class; other bishops ranked ninth in the third class; the first court preacher ranked fourth in the fourth class; court priests and deans ranked eighth in the fi�h class; palace priests and parish priests in Copenhagen ranked thirteenth in the sixth class. they are not like the Pharisees; they acknowledge before God that they are sinners] See Lk 18:9–14. My Relationship to Her] i.e., to Regine Olsen (→ 276,1). See Notebook 15, dated August 24, 1849, which bears the title “My Relationship to ‘her’” in KJN 3, 427–445. unless … confused] Variant: added. Schlegel] Johan Frederik Schlegel (1817–1896), Danish jurist and civil servant; university student, 1833; law degree, 1838; worked for a time as a private tutor in the Olsen household and developed tender feelings for Regine. He became engaged to Regine Olsen August 28, 1843, and married her on November 3, 1847. In 1842, he started as an intern in the government’s Office of Customs and Commerce, becoming a head clerk there in 1847, and in December 1848 he was named head of the Colonial Office. finally] Variant: added. I am the scoundrel] Presumably, Kierkegaard wanted people in general―and Regine in particular―to view him as a scoundrel for having broken the engagement. See entry Not15:4.l, where Kierkegaard writes: “To exit from the relationship as a scoundrel, if possible as a first-class scoundrel, was the only thing that could be done in order to get her afloat, to speed her to a marriage” (KJN 3, 434–435). The gospel story about the wedding at Cana] See Jn 2:1–11. suffering] Refers to the various accounts of Christ’s passion in the four Gospels (→ 293,9). glorification] Refers to Jesus’ glorification through his death and resurrection; see Jn 7:39; 12:16 and 23; 13:31–32.

1849

Xt’s reply to Mary, “Woman what have I to do with you?”] See Jn 2:4. his reply to Peter, “Get thee behind me, Satan, you are an offense to me.”] See Mt 16:23.

25

spiritual] Variant: first wri�en “cruel”. Christ also helped people who had earthly sufferings, healed the sick, lepers, the possessed] See, e.g., Mk 1:29–34, Lk 17:11–19, Mt 9:27–34. fed the people] See Jn 6:1–15 and Mk 8:1–10. changed water into wine] → 285,22. calmed the sea] See Mt 14:22–33. the priest says that we dare not expect such help] It has not been possible to identify any specific sermon to which Kierkegaard might be referring.

35

for him I exist as a sort of half-mad person] In part because Corsaren [The Corsair] (→ 311,18) had identified Kierkegaard’s pseudonym Frater Taciturnus―and by extension, Kierkegaard himself―with “crazy Nathanson,” a horse dealer who had been put in the city insane asylum, Bidstrupgård, and who had subsequently made his madness quite clear in the newspaper Corve�en Politivennen [The Corve�e, Friend of the Police]; see Corsaren, no. 278, January 16, 1846, esp. col. 14, where Taciturnus himself is admitted to Bidstrupgård; see also Corsaren, no. 280, January 30, 1846, cols. 9–11, and no. 285, March 6, 1846, col. 8. who speak for the common man against the aristocrats.] Presumably an imagined phrase that Kierkegaard a�ributed to the editors and writers connected to the republican weekly Corsaren, which emphasized “that we are not like certain aristocrats for whom the sufferings of the people are unimportant, but indeed our most profound sympathy is for the great mass of people who, despite being called ‘the simple common folk,’ are nonetheless the soul of the people and the most faithful supporters of the state when the gilded gingerbread of the nobility and the aristocrats has collapsed, and we could never want them to suffer, not even for the sake of freedom” (no. 51, October 22, 1841, col. 6).

34

27

285

39

40 1

286

1 1

36

286

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 21 287

4

5

11

18

the Completed Work] i.e., the manuscripts of Practice in Christianity (→ 287,18), The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (→ 311,37), plus “the pieces about my writings” (see the next note). the pieces about my writings] i.e., in particular the manuscripts of The Point of View for My Work as an Author: A Direct Communication. Report to History, wri�en in 1848 and published posthumously by P. C. Kierkegaard in 1859, and On My Work as an Author (→ 291,20). In addition to these, there are several pieces that also treat Kierkegaard’s writings: “The Accounting” (→ 291,20); “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Activity as an Author,” consisting of no. 1, “On the Dedication ‘That Single Individual,’” originally wri�en in 1846 (see Pap. IX B 63,4–5, pp. 350–357); no. 2, “A Word Concerning the Relation of My Activity as an Author to ‘That Single Individual,’” originally wri�en in 1847 (see Pap. IX B 63,6–13, pp. 357–374)―both of the aforementioned pieces were subsequently published together in The Point of View for My Work as an Author as “‘The Single Individual’: Two ‘Notes’ Concerning My Activity as an Author” (PV, 101–124; SV2 13, 627–653); and no. 3, “Preface to the ‘Friday Discourses,’” originally wri�en in 1847 (see Pap. IX B 63,14, pp. 375–377) and later used as the preface to Two Discourses for the Communion on Fridays (1851); “Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom” (see Pap. X 5 B 106–109, pp. 287–302); and “Everything in One Word” (see Pap. X 5 B 144). I am a pseudonym] Refers to Practice in Christianity, which Kierkegaard published under the pseudonym Anti-Climacus (see the next note). “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself” is to be made pseudonymous] Refers to the manuscript of “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself: Christian Expositions,” which was published as the third part of Practice in Christianity, wri�en by Anti-Climacus and published in 1850 by Kierkegaard (PC, 144–262; SKS 12, 149–253). ― “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself”: See Jn 12:32.

1849

593

On a scrap of gray paper included with this manuscript … dialectical heresy] The scrap of paper does not appear to have been preserved, but in early 1850, Kierkegaard copied its wording into Journal NB15: “Oct. 9, ’49. / In a way, there is a dialectical heresy in the book, namely where it is shown that sermonic discourse is impersonal, and this is communicated by someone who is no one. The inconsistency is that this is done by a pseudonym, who thus is himself no one. But here is my limit: I can make people aware―nothing more. And on the other hand, I am, a�er all, included as publisher, and will of course bear the responsibility, and, a�er all, everything will be understood as if I myself said it. Thus a very important step forward has in fact been taken here: both ge�ing it said and that people will in fact a�ribute it to me. The extra element here is really this: that while the person speaking is certainly no one, a pseudonym, the publisher is an actual person who acknowledges that he will be judged for this discourse spoken by pseudonym” (NB15:63 in KJN 7). ― this manuscript: i.e., the manuscript of “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself: Christian Expositions” (→ 287,18); see Pap. X 5 B 29–31. in one of the expositions (no. 5 or 6) it is argued that in our time sermonic discourse has become impersonal] Refers to the sixth exposition in “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself: Christian Expositions” (→ 287,18) in Practice in Christianity (PC, 233–257; SKS 12, 227–249). a pseudonym] i.e., Anti-Climacus. legally responsible publisher] The prologue of the so-called Freedom of the Press Decree of September 27, 1799, stated that in order to make it possible to hold publishers responsible in courts of law, “everyone who publishes any printed matter [has] the obligation of identifying himself.” the person speaking is surely a no one] Allusion to the ninth song of Homer’s Odyssey, where Odysseus convinces the cyclops Polyphemus that his name is “No One,” and Polyphemus, under a�ack by Odysseus and his crew, then cries out to the other cyclopses that “No One” is a�acking him. Kierkegaard owned Poul Martin Møller’s translation of the Odyssey in Poul Martin Møller,

20

21

23 25

27

594

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 21–27

E�erladte Skri�er, 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1839–1843; ASKB 1574–1576); see vol. 1, p. 352. 290

2 11

290

291

25

9

10

15

very spiritual] Variant: deleted, before “very”: “extremely”. clergy … salaried by the state] As employees of the Danish State Church, priests were civil servants of the state and salaried by the state. what Thomas a Kempis says … lived all the holier] Cited with minor alterations from bk. 1, chap. 2, “On Humility,” of Thomas a Kempis, om Christi E�erfølgelse, fire Bøger [Thomas à Kempis, On the Imitation of Christ, Four Books], trans. and newly ed. by J.A.L. Holm, 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1848 [1826]; ASKB 273), pp. 2–4; esp. p. 3. ― Thomas a Kempis: German monk, mystic, author (ca. 1380– 1471), ordained a priest in 1414. There is dispute concerning his authorship of the four books of De imitatione Christi [On the Imitation of Christ]. warning against “meritoriousness,”] It has not been possible to identify any specific sermon to which Kierkegaard might be referring. See also, e.g., F. G. Lisco, Das christliche Kirchenjahr. Ein homiletisches Hül�uch beim Gebrauche der epistolischen und evangelischen Pericopen [The Christian Ecclesiastical Year: A Homiletic Manual for Use in Connection with the Epistolary and Gospel Texts], 2 vols., 3rd ed. (Berlin, 1843 [1834]; ASKB 629–630), which warns against Verdienst (“meritoriousness”) in connection with the epistle for the sixth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday (Rom 6:3–11), vol. 2, pp. 149–151. ― meritoriousness: The notion that in God’s eyes good works have merit with respect to one’s salvation. the fantastic asceticism of the Middle Ages (selfflagellation and the like)] In the Middle Ages, whipping oneself―a form of asceticism known from the earliest Christian hermits and monks― was viewed as an especially effective means of penance. In the 13th and 14th centuries, groups of wandering self-flagellants a�racted much attention. a public official and the like] i.e., a priest (a public official in the Church) or a teacher (a public official in the university or at the pastoral seminary).

1849

tradesman] In the narrow sense of the term, a tradesman (here also translated as “businessman”) was someone who had received a town or city license permi�ing him to engage in a mercantile occupation (i.e., trade, manufacturing, transportation, innkeeping, and the like). As civil servants, priests were salaried by the state, but in addition to this they were entitled to “perquisites,” i.e., remuneration for performing ecclesiastical services such as weddings, baptisms, and funerals.

16

That Single Individual] See the next note. The movement described by the whole of my writings … “The Accounting,” … On My Work as an Author] Compressed version of the manuscript of “The Accounting,” originally titled “One Note Concerning My Work as an Author,” which subsequently constituted the first part of On My Work as an Author (dated “March 1849” and published in 1851) (OMWA, 3–12; SKS 13, 9–19). ― in the preface to Two Edifying Discourses: Refers to the preface to Two Edifying Discourses (1843), where Kierkegaard refers to “that single individual whom I happily and thankfully call my reader, that single individual whom it seeks, for whom it stretches out its arms, as it were, that single individual who is kind enough to permit himself to be found, kind enough to receive it” (EUD, 5; SKS 5, 13). ― for the second time … in the dedication to Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits: Refers to the dedication to “An Occasional Discourse” in Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits, where it is wri�en: “This li�le work is dedicated to ‘that single individual’” (UDVS, 4; SKS 8, 120). But this was not exactly “the second time” this dedication had been used, because prior to the publication of Edifying Discourses in Various Spirits, Kierkegaard had already referred to “that single individual” as his preferred reader in the prefaces to Three Edifying Discourses (1843) (EUD, 53; SKS 5, 63); Four Edifying Discourses (1843) (EUD, 107; SKS 5, 113); Two Edifying Discourses (1844) (EUD, 179; SKS 5, 183); Three Edifying Discourses (1844) (EUD, 231; SKS 5, 231); Four Edifying Discourses (1844) (EUD, 295; SKS 5, 289); and Three Discourses on Imagined Occasions (1845) (TDIO, 5; SKS 5, 389). my personal existence, living on the streets and alleys] Accounts from Kierkegaard’s time confirm

19 20

28

291

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 27–32

32 33

that he daily spent time walking in Copenhagen, conversing with various people. living in a parsonage in rural isolation] → 298,27. extraneous circumstances] Presumably economic considerations (→ 335,2).

292

2

the Text by Paul … put away childish things] See 1 Cor 13:11.

292

28

I myself intend to do so] By seeking appointment as a priest (→ 298,27). with the help of one’s position] As a priest. witnesses to the truth] i.e., those who witnessed to the truth of Christianity, including the martyrs who were persecuted and executed during the first centuries of Christianity.

34 35

293

9

16 21

293

37

294

9 17

19 22

294

36 38

when one stands there, bleeding … “I am nonetheless a king.”] i.e., when Jesus stood before Pilate. the crazy man … blasphemy] i.e., Jesus, who was condemned to death for blasphemy. he says he is a king who has come to the world in order to witness to the truth] See Jn 18:37. the old situation … that I will presumably die tomorrow] Earlier, in the summer of 1848, Kierkegaard had expected that he would die soon; see entries NB6:27, NB6:27.a, NB7:20, and NB10:200 in KJN 5, 22, 23, 91, 378. ends,] Variant: first wri�en: “ends. But not only that”. Xnty … commanded: Love God and your neighbor] See Mt 22:37–40; see also Lk 10:27, Rom 13:9, Gal 5:14, and Jas 2:8. witnesses to the truth] → 292,35. fear and trembling] Allusion to Phil 2:12. all the nonsense … said about me] i.e., in particular, Corsaren’s a�acks on Kierkegaard (→ 311,18). a person exists for the lower classes under a nickname] Presumably refers to the fact that Corsaren’s a�acks on Kierkegaard resulted in his being abused on the street; see, e.g., Georg Brandes’s memory of having heard “a street urchin shout ‘Either/Or!’ a�er him” (Bruce

1849

595

H. Kirmmse, ed. and trans., Encounters with Kierkegaard: A Life as Seen by His Contemporaries [Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1996], p. 98). “ridiculous” … my legs] Refers in particular to Peter Klæstrup’s drawings of Kierkegaard in Corsaren, where on January 9, 1846 (no. 277, col. 4 [COR, 116]); January 23, 1846 (no. 279, cols. 1 and 2 [COR, 126–127]); March 6, 1846 (no. 285, col. 9 [COR, 132]); and January 8, 1848 (no. 381-a, col. 8), one could see Kierkegaard’s trousers with legs of differing lengths. On January 16, 1846 (no. 278, col. 5 [COR, 120]), his thin legs were depicted in a pair of boots that were much too large for him. See also “Den nye Planet” [The New Planet] in Corsaren, January 9, 1846 (no. 277, cols. 1–4 [COR, 112–117]), which consists of a fictional discussion involving J. L. Heiberg, the astronomer C.F.R. Olufsen, and Kierkegaard, in which Olufsen, referring to his tailor, assures Kierkegaard that “dammit, the one trouser leg is always just as long as the other one unless I expressly request it otherwise in order to look like a genius” (cols. 2–3). See also “Tilbageblik paa 1845” [A Look Back at 1845] in Corsaren, January 23, 1846, where there is mention of Kierkegaard’s “trousers” (no. 279, col. 11), and “Corsarens Logbog” [Corsaren’s Logbook], in Corsaren, February 27, 1846, where Kierkegaard, alias Victor Eremita (the pseudonymous editor of Either/Or), has a�ributed to him the following mo�o: “Experience demonstrates that trouser legs on cloth trousers are either of equal length or the one leg is longer than the other” (no. 284, col. 13 [COR, 131]). On April 3, 1846, Corsaren included a “catalogue of a rich and significant selection of the newest and most beautiful ornamental georginas (dahlias), available for 1846, and destined to be exhibited from time to time in Corsaren’s flower garden,” in which the third of the nine flowers is described as follows: “‘Beauty of Kierkegaard,’ biscuit-colored, excellent structure with two unequal stems beneath, brilliant and impressive bearing; unexcelled in every respect; the play of colors on the stems is particularly fine” (no. 289, col. 13 [COR, 136]). On May 29, 1846, one could be diverted by reading a “Selection from Corsaren’s Newest and Best

40

596

295

7

296

2

3

11

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 32–33

Dream Book, Published for the Amusement and Pleasant Entertainment of Everyone Who Wants to Have His Dreams Interpreted with Certainty,” with the following entry: “To see short trousers… means…Frater Taciturnus” (no. 297, col. 7 [COR, 137]). Lastly, in “‘Corsarens’ Almanak for Aaret 1846” [Corsaren’s Almanac for the Year 1846], January 1, 1847 (no. 328), it was noted that 1846 was the year “0 since Frater Taciturnus’ trouser legs became about the same length” (col. 1), and that “Frater Taciturnus had previously had 3 henchmen, namely one long and one short trouser leg, plus an umbrella; now he has only 2―the umbrella and ordinary trousers,” (col. 2); plus “Tilbageblik paa 1846” [A Look Back at 1846] in the same issue of Corsaren, where it is noted that “Frater Taciturnus prostitutes Søren Kierkegaard; his one trouser leg has done the same thing for many years” (cols. 3–4). Goldschmidt] Meïr Aron Goldschmidt (1819– 1887), Danish Jewish journalist and publicist, author of works including En Jøde. Novelle [A Jew: Novella] (by the pseudonym Adolph Meyer, edited and published by M. Goldschmidt) (Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB 1547). Goldschmidt founded Corsaren (→ 311,18) in October 1840 and was the journal’s actual editor until October 1846, when he sold it and embarked on a yearlong journey abroad; starting in December 1847, he published the monthly journal Nord og Syd [North and South]. For 6 years the literary villainy had been permitted to grow and to spread] Refers to the large circulation gained by the satirical weekly Corsaren in the period from its founding in 1840 until its first a�ack on Kierkegaard in 1846 (→ 311,18). the proportions of the li�le country] As of the census of February 1, 1845, the kingdom of Denmark had 1,350,327 inhabitants. could such a country call itself Christian] According to Christian V’s Danske Lov [Christian V’s Danish Laws] (1683), bk. 2, chap. 2, the only religion permi�ed in the country was the evangelical Lutheran Church, but in practice other religious societies were tolerated (→ 316,21); freedom of religion was guaranteed in § 81 of the Danish constitution adopted on June 5, 1849.

1849

villainy was the only career that paid well] Presumably an allusion to the fact that a frontpage notice in Corsaren (appearing in the issue of January 19, 1845, and all subsequent issues) stated that contributors would be paid a royalty of 1–3 rix-dollars (→ 328,6) per column. everyone remains silent] In early June 1846―five months a�er Kierkegaard’s a�ack on Corsaren― when the Jewish publicist Go�lieb Siesby published Epistel til ‘Corsaren’ Meyer Adolph Goldschmidt [Epistle to “The Corsair” Meyer Aron Goldschmidt], in which Siesby claimed that he was the first who dared to a�ack the journal, Corsaren replied: “He begins by saying and then continually repeating the big words, that he is the first who ‘dares’ to a�ack us. But if he wanted to do a count, he could find at least six people, from Blok Tøxen to Mag. Kierkegaard, who have stalwartly a�empted to a�ack us” (no. 300, June 19, 1846, col. 11). The writer J. K. Blok Tøxen had wri�en various articles and pamphlets in opposition to Corsaren, e.g., Blok Tøxens Erklæring imod ‘Corsaren’ eller, paa Dansk: Sørøveren, med Tugt at mælde! da nysmældte Titel er verre, end f E: ‘Bagtalelsesbladet, Løgnbladet, osv’ [Blok Tøxen’s Declaration against “The Corsair” or, in Danish, The Pirate, Not to Put Too Fine a Point on It! because the Title Just Mentioned Is Worse Than, e.g., “Slander Sheet, Sheet of Lies,” etc.], no. 1, (Copenhagen, 1844); and “Blok Tøxens Svar til Corsaren, hvis Indskrænkethed og Sproguvidenhed ere ligesaa store, som dens Taushed ved den offentlige Beskyldning for en nedrig og ondskabsfuld Løgn” [Blok Tøxen’s Reply to The Corsair, Whose Narrow-Mindedness and Ignorance of Language Are as Great as Is Its Silence Regarding the Public Accusation of a Dastardly and Malicious Lie], in Politievennen [Friend of the Police] no. 1486, June 21, 1844, pp. 385–394. Siesby’s assertion was also rebu�ed by Den Frisindede [The Freethinker]: “There are plenty of people who have ‘dared’ to stand in opposition to Corsaren and Goldschmidt. Fædrelandet [The Fatherland], Kjøbenhavnsposten [The Copenhagen Post] (→ 311,20), Berl. Tid. [Berlingske Tidende], Portefeuillen [The Portfolio]―indeed, even Heiberg and Kierkegaard have taken notice of Corsaren”

12

16

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 33–35

16

20

24

31

(no. 66, June 9, 1846, p. 262). The articles in the daily newspapers Fædrelandet, Kjøbenhavnsposten, and Berlingske Tidende have not been identified, but in the weekly Portefeuillen, edited by Georg Carstensen, the founder of Tivoli, there was a lengthy polemic against Corsaren that ran from May 9 through June 20, 1841 (vol. 2, nos. 6–12). In Figaro. Journal for Literatur, Kunst og Musik [Figaro: A Weekly Journal for Literature, Art, and Music], which was also edited by Carstensen and which shortly a�erward replaced Portefeuillen, the polemic was continued until October 10, 1841, when under the heading “Beviis for at Corsaren er et Nul” [Proof That The Corsair Is a Zero] Carstensen proclaimed “that except in cases of great necessity, in the future I will not be able to bring myself to do anything concerning The Corsair” (vol. 2, no. 2). J. L. Heiberg had already given the journal rough treatment in his poem “Skuespilhuset i Kjöbenhavn” [The Theater in Copenhagen] in Danmark. Et malerisk Atlas [Denmark: A Painter’s Atlas], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1842–1843), vol. 1, pp. 43–44, 44–45, 48. Furthermore, Flyve-Posten [The Flying Post] (→ 311,21) had accused Corsaren of having no ethics (no. 87, April 16, 1846). on Sunday the priest preaches that if it were to happen] It has not been possible to identify any specific sermon to which Kierkegaard might be referring. then I took action] i.e., by challenging Corsaren with an article in Fædrelandet, December 27, 1845 (→ 311,18). I had at my own expense developed within a few years an entire literature] Kierkegaard had served as his own publisher in connection with the publication of works in the period 1843– 1846 (Either/Or, Repetition, Fear and Trembling, Philosophical Fragments, The Concept of Anxiety, Prefaces, Stages on Life’s Way, Three Discourses on Imagined Occasions, Concluding Unscientific Postscript, and the six collections of Edifying Discourses). He financed the production of these books, which were then sold on commission. He ended this practice in 1847. Christian state] In accordance with Kongeloven [The Royal Law] (promulgated 1665, published 1709, abolished by the constitution of 1849), the

1849

597

state was bound through its absolute monarch to the evangelical Lutheran Church and its confessional documents; see § 1 of Kongeloven, and Danmarks Riges Grundlov [The Constitution of the Danish State] of June 5, 1849, § 6. the man who was the source of this villainy saw in me something extraordinary that he venerated] Refers to the founder of Corsaren and its editor from 1840 through 1846, M. A. Goldschmidt (→ 295,7), who earlier had praised Kierkegaard’s works; see Corsaren, no. 51, October 22, 1841, cols. 7–8, and no. 129, March 10, 1843, cols. 1–3; and → 296,35. immortalized by him] Refers to the fact that in 1845, Kierkegaard’s first pseudonym, Victor Eremita, the editor of Either/Or, had been immortalized in Corsaren at the expense of the popular leader of the liberal opposition, Orla Lehmann, “for Lehmann will die and be forgo�en, but Victor Eremita will never die” (Corsaren, no. 269, November 14, 1845, col. 14 [COR, 96]). provincial market town] As opposed to a capital city or a city of royal residence. work of love] → 303,25. everyone remained silent] → 296,16. expose myself to this sort of thing] i.e., by asking, in his article in Fædrelandet, December 27, 1845, to “appear in Corsaren” (→ 311,18). but the priest preaches that if it were to happen] It has not been possible to identify any specific sermon to which Kierkegaard might be referring.

33

35

38 2

297

3 5

9

The Gospel about the 10 Lepers] i.e., Lk 17:11– 19, the gospel text for the fourteenth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday. How the 9 were … ingratitude and lack of appreciation] A�er Jesus had healed the ten lepers, only one came back to thank him, which caused him to inquire about the other nine. The leper … cried out to Xt to be healed] See Lk 17:13.

22

the Writings on My Work as an Author] → 287,5. This, however, is a view … in the writings I have again and again repeated this and emphasized it] See, e.g., On My Work as an Author (→

2

297

23

27

4

298

598

24

27

31

37

38

299

3

15

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 35–36

291,20) (OMWA, 12; SKS 13, 18) and The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 287,5) (PV, 79; SV2 13, 601–602). my constant prayer to God … more than I had expected] See “A First and Final Declaration” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript, where Kierkegaard acknowledges his authorship of the pseudonymous works and gives God thanks for having “granted me much more than I had ever expected” (CUP 1, 628; SKS 7, 572). Similar gratitude is expressed frequently from Journal NB2 through Journal NB12 and in the manuscripts of The Point of View for My Work as an Author (PV, 72–73; SV2 13, 597) and On My Work as an Author (OMWA, 12; SKS 13, 18). I have continually had the notion of becoming a country priest] As early as the period immediately following the publication of Either/Or (1843), again following the publication of Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846), and repeatedly therea�er, Kierkegaard considered stopping as a writer and seeking appointment as a priest in a rural parish. See, e.g., journal entries JJ:415 in KJN 2, 257 and NB:7 and NB:57 in KJN 4, 16 and 50. See also chap. 3, “The Role of Governance in My Works,” in the second part of The Point of View for My Work as an Author (PV, 86; SV2 13, 611). in the beginning] i.e., at the start of what Kierkegaard considered to be his works, i.e., with Either/Or (see the next note). when I started Either/Or I hated myself] Kierkegaard began writing the manuscript of Either/Or―which was published under the pseudonym Victor Eremita on February 20, 1843―ca. October 1841; this was more or less simultaneous with his break with Regine (→ 276,1); see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Enten ― Eller, SKS K2–3, 54–58. I wished that everyone would rise up against me] Perhaps an allusion to Kierkegaard’s wish, a�er his break with Regine, that everyone would view him as a scoundrel (→ 284m,5). I suffered in leaving her] Refers to Kierkegaard’s break with Regine Olsen on October 12, 1841 (→ 276,1). then in my soul there suddenly burst forth a wealth] Presumably refers to the fact that

1849

Kierkegaard began his writing career approximately simultaneously with his break with Regine (→ 298,37). with a girl’s accusation that it would be her death] On August 11, 1841―two months before the final break―Kierkegaard had sent his engagement ring back to Regine, but when she apparently adjured him―by the memory of his father and by Jesus Christ―not to leave her, he postponed his decision; she supposedly said, in addition, that a break would be her death, and formally speaking, Kierkegaard therefore believed that he had a murder on his conscience for having le� her. ― that it: Variant: first wri�en: “that I”. a father’s grief] Refers to Regine’s father, Terkild Olsen (1784–1849), department head in the Danish Finance Department. The evening following the final breaking of the engagement, October 12, 1841, Kierkegaard met him at the Royal Theater; see entry Not15:4: “He said: It will be the death of her; she is in u�er despair. I said: I will try to calm her down, but the ma�er is se�led. He said: I am a proud man; it is hard, but I beg you not to break with her” (KJN 3, 434). Later, on the occasion of a chance meeting with Olsen at Fredensborg on August 26, 1848, Kierkegaard sought in vain for a reconciliation with him; see entry NB7:10: “He took off his hat in greeting, but then he brushed me aside with his hand and said, I do not wish to speak with you. Alas, there were tears in his eyes, and he spoke these words with stifled emotion” (KJN 5, 84). cursed by a family] Presumably a reference to Regine’s brother, Jonas Christian Olsen (1816– 1902), who supposedly sent Kierkegaard a le�er in which (according to entry Not8:9) he claimed that he hated Kierkegaard “as no one had hated before” (KJN 3, 231). The Olsen family included three daughters and a son in addition to Regine, Jonas, and the parents. I have read about Napoleon … domestic circumstances] The French general and political leader, Napoleon Bonaparte (1769–1821) ruled France as first consul (1799–1804) and subsequently as Emperor Napoleon I (1804–14 and 1815). Here the reference is to his crossing of the Alps at the St. Bernard Pass on May 20, 1800, which has been im-

28

29

30

33

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 36–41 mortalized in a famous painting by Jacques Louis David. Kierkegaard’s source is Adolphe Thiers, Consulatets og Keiserdømmets Historie [The History of the Consulate and the Empire], Danish trans. by J. C. Magnus, 17 vols. (Copenhagen, 1845–1860 [vols. 1–7, 1845–1847; ASKB 2016–2023]), vol. 1, pp. 353–354. 300

2

10

11 15 17 22

23

last summer, the most intensive and the richest time of my life] In the summer of 1848, Kierkegaard wrote portions of the manuscripts of The Sickness unto Death (→ 324,24); “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest: For Awakening and Inward Appropriation” and “Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended in Me: A Biblical Exposition and Christian Definition,” which subsequently became parts 1 and 2 of Practice in Christianity → 287,18); and The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 287,5). intellectuality and has failed.] Variant: changed from: “intellectuality.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. the entire body of work and myself] Reference to The Point of View for My Work as an Author. I can never sufficiently thank God … much more than I had expected] → 298,24. on my work as an author] i.e., The Point of View for My Work as an Author. the more ideal figure,] Variant: first wri�en: “the more ideal figure.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. the interesting] The “interesting,” a category originating in German aesthetic theory (first with Friedrich Schlegel), became a fashionable word in the early 1840s, serving as a common term for stimulating artistic effects that were regarded not as beautiful, but as fascinating. The “interesting” could thus designate tension, disharmony, something piquant or sensational, etc., but could also designate a refined or reflective style and a stimulating novelty of materials or of their arrangement. In the Danish context, “the interesting” made its entrée with J. L. Heiberg’s review of Adam Oehlenschläger’s tragic drama Dina (1842) in Intelligensblade [Intelligencer], nos. 16–17, November 15, 1842, vol. 2, pp. 73–106. The

1849

599

widespread use of the term is further illuminated in Politievennen, nos. 1478–1479, April 26–May 3, 1844, pp. 267–271, 279–283. See also Fear and Trembling (FT, 83; SKS 4, 173). I have in the strangest ways been prevented from publishing it] Among the circumstances to which Kierkegaard may be referring here is the fact that in 1849 C. A. Reitzel, Kierkegaard’s publisher, seems to have been unwilling to publish his writings; see entries NB11:123 and NB12:143 in the present volume. It is not clear what other factors Kierkegaard may be referring to. the new pseudonym] i.e., Anti-Climacus (→ 311,39). the writings about myself] The Point of View for My Work as an Author and On My Work as an Author (→ 291,20). Despite all the disclaimers … to prevent my being regarded as the extraordinary Christian] Kierkegaard denies that he is himself an extraordinary or perfect Christian in The Point of View for Work as an Author (PV, 43, 56; SV2 13, 566, 581) and On My Work as an Author (OMWA, 12; SKS 13, 19). from the beginning] i.e., from the beginning of what Kierkegaard regarded as his canon, which started with Either/Or (→ 298,37). helpful] Variant: added.

26

27 29

33

1

301

15

whether Xnty … was only for Jews] This matter was discussed at a meeting of the apostles in Jerusalem, where it was decided that pagans could become members of Christian congregations without being circumcised as Jews were; see Acts 15:1–30 and Gal 2:1–11. the story of the Canaanite woman … Lord, help me] See Mt 15:21–28, the gospel text for the second Sunday in Lent.

4

cork-soled boots] Boots with thick cork soles had the advantage of greater insulation. According to a receipt from a shoemaker named W. Søfverborg, dated January 2, 1850, Kierkegaard had had new heels put on his “cork boots” on November 17, 1849, and had had heel reinforcements put on the same boots on October 15, 25, and 29, 1849 (KA, D pk. 8 læg 26).

8

302

6

303

600 303

23

25

30 31 37

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 42–49

the step I took] i.e., Kierkegaard’s challenge to Corsaren, asking that he himself might “appear in The Corsair” (→ 311,18). in the Christian sense, a work of love] In Works of Love (1847) Kierkegaard differentiates between genuine and merely apparent works of love; see WL, 13; SKS 9, 21. the a�ack by that journal] i.e., by Corsaren (→ 311,18). betrayed] Variant: first wri�en: “that the fault lay precisely”. not one single person, who had a word to say in public] i.e., no one among the “important and respected people,” except the Jewish publicist Go�lieb Siesby (1803–1884), a former shoemaker and, from 1839, the editor of various newspapers, stepped into the breach for Kierkegaard (→ 296,16).

305

1

the life of Christ … the words of the prophets] Presumably a reference to the circumstance that the disciples were unable to recognize Christ a�er his crucifixion and resurrection; see Lk 24:13–49; see also Isa 50:6 and 53:11–12.

305

30

in part two of Either/Or … no punishment] Quoted loosely from “On the Equilibrium between the Aesthetic and the Ethical in the Composition of the Personality” in the second part of Either/Or (EO2, 331; SKS 3, 312).

305

36

the individual’s] Variant: added.

306

6

9 11

12 13

24

scandal] From the Greek skándalon (“trap”) specifically, the stone or stick that released a trap when it was tripped; offense; stumbling block. literary villainy] i.e., Corsaren (→ 311,18). it existed on such a disproportionate scale] i.e., Corsaren’s disproportionately large circulation (→ 311,18). no one at all dared say a word] → 296,16. when I did it] i.e., by asking in Fædrelandet, December 27, 1845, that he might “appear in The Corsair” (→ 311,18). professor against professor] Perhaps an allusion to Prof. Rasmus Nielsen’s (→ 313,15) critique of Prof. H. L. Martensen (→ 306,34) in

1849

Mag. S. Kierkegaards ‘Johannes Climacus’ og Dr. H. Martensens ‘christelige Dogmatik.’ En undersøgende Anmeldelse (→ 312,30). suddenly Martensen bursts into print … my entire project amounted to nothing] Refers to the preface of H. L. Martensen, Den christelige Dogmatik [Christian Dogmatics] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 653), advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen (abbreviated form of Kjøbenhavns kongelig alene privilegerede Adressecomptoirs E�erretninger [Information from Copenhagen’s Only Royally Licensed Advertising Office]), no. 167, July 19, 1849, where Martensen makes a clear reference to Kierkegaard, though without naming him, saying: “…those who do not feel the tendency toward coherent thought but are able to satisfy themselves by thinking in random thoughts and aphorisms, sudden discoveries and hints, can also be within their rights in viewing coherent knowledge as unnecessary for themselves. But when, as in recent times, it begins to be put forth as a sort of dogma that the believer can have absolutely no interest in seeking coherent knowledge of that which is of greatest importance for him; that the believer cannot wish to engage in any speculation concerning the Christian truths, because all speculation is merely cosmic, i.e., worldly and pagan; that the believer must view the concept of systematic knowledge about faith as a self-contradiction that abolishes true Christianity, etc.―then I confess that such statements, even when I have heard them and seen them put forth with ingenious paradoxicality, are not capable of convincing me. Indeed, I can see them only as containing a great misunderstanding and a new, or rather, old error.…As far as I can see, there is only one person who corresponds perfectly to the concept of the believer, namely the entire Universal Church. As individuals, each of us possesses the faith to only a certain limited degree, and we must certainly guard against making our own individual, perhaps rather one-sided, perhaps even rather sickly life of faith into a rule for all believers” (p. iii). ― Martensen: Hans Lassen Martensen (1808–1884), Danish theologian and pastor; theology graduate, 1832; a�er a journey abroad in

34

306

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 49–51

307

5 15

1834–1836, Martensen became a privatdocent and university tutor whose students included Kierkegaard; he acquired the degree of licentiate in theology in 1838; lecturer at the University of Copenhagen, 1838; extraordinary professor of theology at the University of Copenhagen, 1840; honorary doctorate from the University of Kiel, 1840; member of the Royal Scientific Society, 1841; ordinary professor at the University of Copenhagen, 1850; appointed court preacher on May 16, 1845; knight of the Dannebrog, 1847. “God’s intimacy dwelt with me.”] Presumably an allusion to Job 29:4. those foppish words by Heiberg about Either/ Or] i.e., J. L. Heiberg’s review of Either/Or in the article “Li�erær Vintersæd” [Literary Winter Seed] in Intelligensblade, ed. J. L. Heiberg, 4 vols. (Copenhagen, 1842–1844; ASKB U 56), vol. 2, no. 24 (March 1, 1843), pp. 285–292. Heiberg begins his review of Either/Or as follows: “Furthermore, a monster of a book has just recently come crashing down upon our literary world, like lightning out of a cloudless sky. I am referring to Either/Or by ‘Victor Eremita,’ in two heavy tomes, comprising 838 densely printed pages. So it is primarily with respect to its bulk that the book may be called a monster, because one is impressed by its sheer mass even before one becomes acquainted with the spirit of the work, and I have no doubt that were the author willing to place himself on exhibit for money, he would earn as much from that display as he would from permi�ing people to read the book for money” (p. 288). At the end of his discussion of the book Heiberg implies that he will read the book more carefully in order to form a more definite impression of its significance, which he will then communicate to his readers (p. 292). He never did so, however. Kierkegaard took his revenge on Heiberg in Prefaces (1844). ― Heiberg: Johan Ludvig Heiberg (1791–1860), Danish author, translator, editor, critic of drama and literature, Hegelian philosopher, and popularizer of Hegelian philosophy. A�er having served as a lecturer in Danish literature at the University of Kiel in the period 1822–1825, Heiberg was appointed titular professor in 1829, and in the period 1830–1836 he taught logic, aesthetics, and

1849

601

Danish literature at the Royal Military Academy. From 1828 to 1839 he was a playwright and permanent translator at the Royal Theater, where he was appointed director in 1849. Heiberg was the tastemaker of his age. Goldschmidt] → 295,7. he was himself something contemptible] i.e., as editor of Corsaren (→ 310,23). long lives, to do] Variant: “do” added. the race;] Variant: first wri�en: “the race.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. The two short essays by H. H.] “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth? The Posthumous Work of a Solitary Human Being. Poetic Essay,” which according to its preface had been wri�en at the end of 1847, and “On the Difference between a Genius and an Apostle,” which according to its title page had been wri�en in 1847, which together constituted Two Minor Ethical-Religious Essays (WA, 47–108; SKS 11, 49–111). The book was published under the pseudonym H. H. and was advertised as having “appeared” on May 19, 1849; see Adresseavisen, no. 116. the country’s 1000 clergy] As of the census of February 1, 1845, the kingdom of Denmark had 1,018 inhabitants who made a living as clergy, church officers, and related posts. See Statistisk Tabelværk [Statistical Tables], 1st ser., no. 10 (Copenhagen, 1846), p. 68. clerical livings] In provincial towns citizens had the duty of paying the priest an assessed sum called “priest money,” while peasants in rural parishes were to pay the priest a certain percentage of their agricultural yield, especially grain, known as a tithe. The amount of these payments was established by the ministry for church and educational affairs. On holy days members of the congregation could also pay their priest a voluntary sum of money called an “offering.” Priests had a certain amount of additional income called “perquisites,” (→ 291,16). In provincial towns, there was also an additional sum for a housing allowance, while rural priests had income from the fields and farms a�ached to their

21 21

7

308

20

27

308 30

33

602

309

9

309

17

19 20

28

36

39

310

3

310

10

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 51–55

call. In general, priests in Copenhagen were better off than those in the provinces; see an anonymous article, “Bemærkning om de kjøbenhavnske Præsters Forhold til Menigheden” [Observation on the Relation of Copenhagen Priests to the Congregation], in Politivennen, no. 1313, February 27, 1841, p. 130: “Compared with the rest of the country’s priests, a large portion of the priests of Copenhagen have generous incomes and live extremely well.” I am regarded as a ridiculous exaggeration] No specific source for this assertion has been identified. By chance I happen to own a very rare book; … The New Testament of Our Lord Jesus Christ] Kierkegaard himself owned two copies of Vor Herres og Frelsers Jesu Christi Nye Testamente [The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ] in the officially authorized edition of 1819 (Copenhagen, 1820; ASKB 21–32 and 33). ― here in the city: Variant: added. as a child] Variant: added. grammar school] A school for children of the common people, as opposed to a school for children of the bourgeoisie. I cannot live on air] Allusion to the proverbial expression: “you cannot live on air,” which appears, e.g., in Dansk Ordbog [Danish Dictionary], ed. Videnskabernes Selskabs Bestyrelse [The Governing Board of the Scientific Society], 5 vols. (Copenhagen, 1793–1829), vol. 3 (1820), p. 207. When I, God in Heaven, command something in my Word] Perhaps an allusion to Mt 6:24–34, esp. v. 25. Go to the workhouse … in order to live] Reference to the minimally nutritious rations― bread, beer, soup, and horse meat―served to prisoners at the workhouse (literally “the House of Discipline, Rasping, and Be�erment”) in the Christianshavn quarter of Copenhagen (see map 2, C4). clerical livings] → 308,33. Thomas a Kempis says … by habits (good ones)] Cited with minor changes from bk. 1, chap. 21, “Om Hjertets sande Anger” [On the Heart’s

1849

True Contrition] in Thomas a Kempis, om Christi E�erfølgelse, fire Bøger (→ 290,25), pp. 28–30; p. 29. At the conclusion of Luther’s sermon … no speculating] Refers to Luther’s sermon on the gospel text for Easter Monday, Lk 24:13–35, in En christelig Postille (→ 278,21) vol. 1, pp. 264–273; p. 273: “When it concerns the Bible, clever and quarrelsome masters have nothing to say. God has granted other arts―here you may be clever, here you may dispute merrily, here you may investigate and ask questions about what is right and wrong. On the other hand, when it comes to Holy Scripture, you must send all your questioning and quarreling packing with the declaration: God has said it―therefore I believe it! Here it is not a ma�er of arguing What or Why?…But believe― then you will feel how your heart burns within you. If instead you want to argue and ask, How can all this be?―then you have already removed yourself from the truth and from the proper understanding of Scripture.”

13

310

an exaggeration] → 283,4. you who carry on the most contemptible literary trade] i.e., those who publish and write for Corsaren (→ 311,18); in the dra� of an article against Corsaren, Kierkegaard describes it as “this literary contemptibleness” and as “a literary production that wants to earn money by whoring” (Pap. VII 1 B 1, p. 167). In the version of the article he actually published, he mentions “the paper’s contemptibleness”; see Fædrelandet, no. 9, January 10, 1846, col. 66 (COR, 49; SKS 14, 88). such a country can rightly call itself purely Christian] → 296,11. 3 years ago Concl. Postscript was published] Kierkegaard published Concluding Unscientific Postscript under the pseudonym Johannes Climacus on February 27, 1846. authorial project from an earlier period] i.e., Kierkegaard’s writings from the publication of Either/Or on February 20, 1843, through the publication of Concluding Unscientific Postscript. the fruit of 1 or 1-1/2 years’ diligent work] The manuscript of Concluding Unscientific Postscript

23

310

23

4 13

15

15

311

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 55

16

17

18

was delivered to the printer on December 30, 1845 (see EP III, p. 269); work on that manuscript had probably started in April or May 1845, although a number of earlier entries in journals and notebooks served as the basis for the work; see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Afslu�ende uvidenskabelig E�erskri� in SKS K7, 44–45, 52–68. it cost me betw. 500 and 600 rd. to publish] As his own publisher, Kierkegaard had to pay 461 rix-dollars, 1 mark, and 3 shillings for the printing of Concluding Unscientific Postscript (→ 328,6); see Erindringsbog for Bianco Luno. 1846 [Memorandum Book for Bianco Luno, 1846] (Archives of Bianco Luno’s Printing House, Aller Press, Copenhagen). In addition, he had to pay 100 rix-dollars for proofreading; see entry NB12:43 in the present volume. Kierkegaard does not include in his calculations the income realized from sale of the book. This book sold 60 copies] It is not known how many copies of Concluding Unscientific Postscript were sold upon publication. In a le�er dated August 1, 1847, Kierkegaard, citing printer Bianco Luno and book dealer C. A. Reitzel as his sources, reports that Reitzel had received 250 copies of the book in February 1846, and that as of May 4, 1847, 89 copies were le�; thus at that point 161 copies of the book must have been sold; see LD, 220; B&A 1, 173. It was not mentioned in one single place] Concluding Unscientific Postscript was in fact reviewed by “Prosper naturalis de molinasky” (i.e., P. L. Møller) in Kjøbenhavnsposten, nos. 73 and 74, March 27 and 28, 1846, and by P. W. Christensen in “Troen og Dialektiken. Imod S. Kierkegaard” [Faith and Dialectic: Against S. Kierkegaard] in Dansk Kirketidende [Danish Church Times], March 29, 1846, vol. 1, no. 29, cols. 475–482. The same P. W. Christensen sought to rebut the Postscript in “Troens Dialektik” [The Dialectic of Faith] in Dansk Kirketidende, September 20, 1846, vol. 1, no. 52, cols. 841–856, and the Postscript was also mentioned in the anonymous articles “Afslu�ende uvidenskabelig E�erskrivt” [Concluding Unscientific Postscript] and “Kjøbenhavnspostens Anmeldelse af ‘afslu�ende uvidenskabelig E�erskrivt’” [The Review of Concluding Unscientific Postscript in

1849

603

Kjøbenhavnsposten], in Nyt A�enblad [New Evening Newspaper] (publisher and editor H. Trojel), nos. 75 and 76, March 30 and 31, 1846. See also the article “S. Kjerkegaard og hans Recensenter” [S. Kierkegaard and His Reviewers], in Den Frisindede [The Freethinker] (publisher and editor C. Rosenhoff), no. 58, May 19, 1846. On the other hand, I was depicted and mocked in The Corsair, much to the delight of the rabble] Corsaren was a satirical weekly founded in October 1840 by M. A. Goldschmidt, who served as the paper’s actual editor until October 1846. The paper claimed to be unaffiliated with political parties and, particularly before the fall of absolutism 1848, it was labeled republican because of its criticisms both of the absolute monarchy and of the liberal opposition. The journal’s criticisms of the government led to frequent confiscations by the censor, and in 1843 Goldschmidt himself was convicted of a violation of the law regulating press freedom. Corsaren’s satirical articles were supplemented with drawings by Peter Klæstrup, which helped gain the journal a sizable readership. In the mid-1840s Corsaren had a press run of about three thousand copies, twice the size of the leading liberal daily Fædrelandet and only a few hundred fewer than the semi-official government newspaper, Berlingske Tidende. In addition to scoffing at the government and the opposition, the journal poked fun at the reigning literary elite, but for many years Kierkegaard was an exception, and as late as November 14, 1845, he received positive mention when his pseudonym Victor Eremita was praised (→ 296,35). But on December 22, 1845, one of the paper’s contributors, P. L. Møller, published a critique of Kierkegaard’s works in his aesthetic annual Gæa for 1846. Kierkegaard replied, identifying P. L. Møller with Corsaren and asking “to appear in The Corsair,” because he could not accept being the only Danish author who had not yet been abused but only praised by the paper; see the article “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner,” which appeared under the pseudonym Frater Taciturnus in Fædrelandet, on December 27, 1845 (no. 2078, cols. 16653–16658 [COR, 38–46; SKS 14,

18

604

20

21

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 55–57

77–84]). Corsaren responded by carrying a series of satirical articles about, allusions to, and caricatures of Kierkegaard. The first of these appeared on January 2, 1846 (no. 276), and others appeared at regular intervals until July 17, 1846 (no. 304). A�er M. A. Goldschmidt’s departure as editor, the teasing nonetheless continued until February 16, 1849 (no. 439). A�er the second Corsaren article, which appeared on January 9, 1846 (no. 277), Kierkegaard responded, once again under the alias of Frater Taciturnus, in Fædrelandet, January 10, 1846 (no. 9, cols. 65–68), with “The Dialectical Result of a Literary Police Action” (COR, 47–50; SKS 14, 85–89). In Kjøbenhavnsposten P.L.M. poured scorn on it and on me] Refers to P. L. Møller’s review of Concluding Unscientific Postscript in Kjøbenhavnsposten (→ 311,18). ― Kjøbenhavnsposten: Daily newspaper, founded in 1827, originally emphasized literary and cultural material, soon therea�er political material as well. In the 1830s, it was the most important organ for political liberalism, but in the 1840s, it lost ground as it adopted a more radical line. ― P.L.M.: Peder Ludvig Møller (1814–1865), a Danish author, poet, and critic, served as editor of the polemical journal Arena in 1843, and in the years 1845–1847 he published the aesthetic annual Gæa. Møller also contributed articles to various journals, including “satirical critiques and poems in Corsaren,” as he himself described his work in T. H. Erslew’s Almindeligt Forfa�er-Lexicon [Universal Encyclopedia of Authors], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1843–1853; ASKB 954–969), vol. 2 (1847), p. 406. He published some of his literary pieces in Kritiske Skizzer fra Aarene 1840–47 [Critical Sketches from the Years 1840–1847], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1847). In addition to the critique published in Gæa, he also published a negative review of Concluding Unscientific Postscript in Kjøbenhavnsposten, nos. 73 and 74, March 27 and 28, 1846, under the name “Prosper naturalis de molinasky.” In late 1847, he traveled abroad and never returned to Denmark. in Flyve-Posten …my trousers … had now become too long] It has not been possible to verify this from an inspection of Flyve-Posten for the period January 1846–July 1849; see entry NB12:43 in

1849

the present volume. ― Flyve-Posten: Conservative daily, founded 1845, edited until 1852 by Eduard Meyer; popular news and entertainment articles gained it a wide circulation, and in the period 1848–1850 it had about seven thousand subscribers; see Je�e D. Søllinge and Niels Thomsen, De danske aviser 1634–1989 [Danish Newspapers, 1634–1989], 3 vols. (Odense, 1988–1991), vol. 2 (1989), pp. 114–115. the three Friday discourses (The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner)] i.e., the manuscript of The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays, which was delivered to the printer on October 29, 1849; see Erindringsbog for Bianco Luno. 1846, p. 66. The discourses were published under Kierkegaard’s own name and were advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 268, November 14, 1849. the last pseudonym, Anti-Climacus] i.e., the pseudonymous author of The Sickness unto Death (→ 324,24) and subsequently of Practice in Christianity (→ 287,18). The pseudonym AntiClimacus was formed, with the addition of the prefix “anti-,” as a counterpart to the pseudonym Johannes Climacus, the author of Philosophical Fragments and Concluding Unscientific Postscript. This pseudonym presumably alludes to the Greek theologian and monk Johannes Klimax (Latin, Climacus, ca. 525–616), who lived for forty years as a hermit at the foot of Mt. Sinai and was the author of the Κλίµαξ τοῡ παραδείσου (Greek, [Klímax toû paradeísou], “ladder of paradise”), an allusion to Jacob’s ladder (see Gen 28:12); it was translated into Latin under the title Scala paradisi. In the work he describes the thirty steps by which one can ascend to Christian perfection through conquering one’s vices and acquiring Christian virtues. See W.M.L. de We�e, Christliche Si�enlehre [Christian Moral Doctrine], 4 vols. (in three parts) (Berlin, 1819–1823; ASKB U 110); vol. 2 (part 2,1) (1821), pp. 52–55, and de We�e’s Lærebog i den christelige Sædelære og sammes Historie [Textbook of Christian Moral Doctrine and Its History], trans. C. E. Scharling (Copenhagen, 1835 [original German ed., 1833]; ASKB 871), pp. 135–

37

39

311

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 57–65 140, where de We�e refers to Johannes Klimax’s book in the notes. 312

2 3 3

312

22 22 23 30

312

313

32

10 12

15

Text for a Friday Discourse] → 275,1. see journal NB12 pp. 226 and 227] See entries NB12:170 and 170.a in the present volume. The text cited under no. 3 was not used] Refers either to 1 Cor 11:31–32 (see NB12:170) or to Lk 24:31 (see NB12:170.a). Abraham, who sacrifices Isaac] See Gen 22:1–19. Paul and the thorn in the flesh] See 2 Cor 12:7. We must through much tribulation to enter into the kingdom of God] See Acts 14:22. Concl. Postscript] i.e., Concluding Unscientific Postscript (→ 311,13). just as people therefore think … transposing them into a didactic mode] Presumably a reference to Rasmus Nielsen (→ 313,15), who analyzed and compared Concluding Unscientific Postscript and H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 306,34) in Mag. S. Kierkegaards ‘Johannes Climacus’ og Dr. H. Martensens ‘Christelige Dogmatik.’ En undersøgende Anmeldelse [Mag. S. Kierkegaard’s “Johannes Climacus” and Dr. H. Martensen’s Dogmatics: An Investigative Review] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 701). It was advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 242, October 15, 1849. that single individual] → 291,20. pseudonyms always show themselves … the elder is nonetheless the maieuticist] → 333,40. ― maieuticist: A person who practices maieutics, the art of midwifery, from the Greek maieúesthai (“to deliver someone in childbirth”). An allusion to Socrates’ art of midwifery, namely, that by conversing with someone, Socrates could deliver a person of the truth with which he was already pregnant, i.e., which he knew, but had forgo�en, and thus had to be assisted in recollecting. R. Nielsen] Rasmus Nielsen (1809–1884), Danish theologian and philosopher; theology graduate, 1837; licentiate in theology, 1840; privatdocent, winter semester 1840–1841; from 1841 extraordinary professor in moral philosophy, and from 1850 ordinary professor at the University of Copenhagen. He taught speculative and Hegelian

1849

605

philosophy in particular, but in the mid-1840s, he came under Kierkegaard’s influence, and they became friends in 1848 (concerning this, see journal entries NB7:6 and NB10:32 in KJN 5, 80–81 and 283). Kierkegaard appears to have brought Nielsen into his confidence concerning the ideas behind his writings; see the dra� of an article, “Concerning My Relationship to Hr. Prof. R. Nielsen,” from ca. 1849–1850: “In the middle of the year 1848 a number of considerations, all leading to the same point, made it clear to me that I ought, that it was my duty, to at least make an attempt to share my views with another person by having a personal relationship with him, all the more so because I had the intention of stopping as an author. I chose Prof. Nielsen, who had already tried to approach me. Since then I have as a rule spoken with him once a week” (Pap. X 6 B 124, p. 164). Oh, how] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry.

1

314

the tolerance exhibited by the orthodox] A reference to the Grundtvigians, who viewed themselves as orthodox Lutherans and pleaded for tolerance within the Danish State Church, both by granting priests freedom with respect to dogma and liturgy, and by permi�ing parishioners the freedom to a�end a church presided over by a priest with whom they agreed, thus loosening the legal obligation to a�end church in the parish of one’s residence. martyrdom is something glorious] Allusion to the idiomatic expression “the glorious ones,” which was used to designate the martyrs who were executed for their faith during the early centuries of Christianity.

15

314

Peter] Kierkegaard’s elder brother, Peter Christian Kierkegaard (1805–1888); defended his licentiate degree in theology in 1836; served as tutor for theological students until 1842, when he accepted a call as priest for the parish of Pedersborg and Kinderto�e by Sorø in south-central Zealand; he was a faithful adherent of Grundtvig. religious] Variant: added.

4

34

5

315

606

10 11

20

21 38

316

21

25

26

27 29

316

35

317

1

317

23

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 65–72

You shall love the Lord your God] See Mt 22:37; see also Deut 6:5. always said that it is God who does everything for me] Presumably an allusion to Kierkegaard’s frequent statement that God has “granted me much more than I had ever expected” (→ 298,24). youth,] Variant: first wri�en: “youth.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. less than a sparrow before him] → 279,32. he concerned himself with every sparrow] → 279,32. all are Xns] The census of February 1, 1845 put the population of the kingdom of Denmark at 1,350,327, of whom only 5,371 belonged to Christian confessions other than the evangelical Lutheran Church, while even fewer, i.e., the 3,670 Jews, were not Christian at all. See Statistisk Tabelværk, 1st ser., no. 10 (Copenhagen, 1846), pp. iii, xiv. Socratic questioning] Refers to Socrates, who developed his philosophy in dialogues with his contemporaries. he began with the Sophists who said they were Xns] Presumably a reference to Plato’s Apology, in which Socrates relates how he had sought out various men who were reputed to be wise (i.e., not “Christians,” as Kierkegaard here states), but had shown that their wisdom was imaginary; according the Apology 21c, Socrates began with politicians, not the Sophists; see Plato: The Collected Dialogues, Including the Le�ers, pp. 7–8. and then … empty] Variant: added. he was ignorant] → 277,13. a hum. being … that proceeds from God’s mouth] See Mt 4:4; see also Deut 8:3. having fasted for 40 days and 40 nights] See Mt 4:1–11, esp. v. 2. It is you, you contemporaries, of whom I speak] Allusion to the proverbial Latin phrase, mutato nomine de te fabula narratur, (“Change but the name, and the tale is told of you”), from Horace’s Satires, bk. 1, no. 1, v. 69–70; see Q. Horatii Flacci Opera [The Works of Horace], stereotype ed. (Leipzig,

1849

1828; ASKB 1248), p. 157. English translation from Horace, Satires, Epistles, Ars Poetica, trans. H. Rushton Fairclough, Loeb Classical Library (London: William Heinemann, 1926). He] Variant: first wri�en: “I”. µεταβασις εις αλλο γενος] This widely used expression is found in a similar form in Aristotle’s Posterior Analytics, bk. 1, chap. 7 (75a 38), where it is stated that a proof in one science cannot simply be transferred to another; e.g., geometric truths cannot be proven arithmetically; see Jonathan Barnes, ed., The Complete Works of Aristotle: The Revised Oxford Translation, 2 vols. (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1984), vol. 1, p. 122.

24 35

the interesting] → 300,23.

4

318

his sermon … you will see me] Refers to Luther’s sermon on the gospel text for the third Sunday after Easter, Jn 16:16–23, in En christelig Postille (→ 278,21), vol. 1, pp. 302–309. Here Luther points out an opposition that will always exist between the world and Christians; see esp. pp. 306–307: “But impress this upon yourselves, especially those of you who occupy the position of preacher of the Holy Word: the Devil and the world will never cease tempting you. If you speak the truth, the world will fume and rage, it will curse, condemn, and persecute you; you will have to suffer mockery and derision.” ― A li�le while … and you will see me: Cited from Jn 16:16 in En christelig Postille, vol. 1, p. 302.

36

318

the rich young man … could not decide to give everything to the poor] See Mt 19:16–22. Mary Magdalene … exposes herself to all kinds of mockery] According to Lk 8:2, Mary Magdalene became a disciple of Jesus a�er he had cured her of demonic possession. She was present at Jesus’ crucifixion (Mt 27:56) and burial (Mt 27:61) and is named among the women who went to the grave two days later but was told by an angel that he had arisen from the dead (Mt 28:1:7). According to Jn 20:1–18, however, she had gone to the grave alone and was the first person to meet Jesus a�er his resurrection. Here the reference is to the traditional identification of Mary

19

319

27

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 72–78 Magdalene with “the woman who was a sinner,” who went to the house of the Pharisees despite their disdain, and there wet Jesus’ feet with her tears and dried them with her hair, kissing them and salving them with oil (Lk 7:36–50). 320

17

businessman] → 291,16.

320

32

an hour] In Kierkegaard’s day sermons o�en lasted an hour; see § 15 in “Forslag til et: Kirke-Ritual for Danmark” [Suggestion for a Church Ritual for Denmark], p. 11 in J. P. Mynster, Udkast til en Alterbog og et Kirke-Ritual for Danmark [Dra� of a Service Book and Church Ritual for Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1839), where it is stated: “The sermon should not last longer than an hour at most, but never shorter than half an hour.” confessional booth] A special, closed room, located either in the church itself or in the sacristy, where confession took place. In Kierkegaard’s day, confession was an absolute prerequisite for participation in communion. In larger churches, such as the Church of Our Lady, where Kierkegaard o�en went for confession, there were two confessional booths, each with room for thirty to fi�y people. Those who wished to make confession gathered in the church, where the procedure began with a hymn and a confessional prayer read by the cantor from the chancel doorway. Then the sexton admi�ed them to the confessional booth, where they took their places in pews. The father confessor (→ 278,12) sat in his chair and gave a short confessional sermon, about ten minutes in length. Therea�er, the priest went through the pews and with laying on of hands pronounced the forgiveness of sins to every individual, two at a time. Then they returned to the church, and if there were more than could be accommodated in the confessional booth at one time, a new group went into the confessional booth. When the entire ceremony was concluded, a hymn was sung; see Dannemarks og Norges Kirke-Ritual (→ 278,12), chap. 4, art. 1, pp. 143–150. An actor is truly an honest man … a lo�y hero, etc.] The day before a performance, the Royal Theater had yellow placards, announcing the performance times and who would play which roles,

321

6

9

1849

607

posted around town on walls and street corners. See the illustration accompanying the explanatory note for entry NB12:156 in the present volume. People have taken exception … the cultus minister] A�er the fall of absolutism, the Royal Theater was no longer directly under royal protection and was instead placed under the state, represented by the cultus minister (i.e., the minister for the Church and for educational affairs). ― taken exception: It has not been possible to document any such criticism. theater director] This title was, however, reserved for J. L. Heiberg (→ 307,15), whom the cultus minister appointed theater director on July 23, 1849, a�er having dismissed the previous governing body for the theater.

16

20

civil servant] → 291,15. learned commentators] To the writings of classical authors.

25

“speakers”] i.e., priests. flagellants] → 291,10. Let the authorities at the poorhouse … to live on] The system of poor relief in Copenhagen was organized in accordance with a plan adopted in 1799. Its primary task was to distribute alms or put to work those who could not earn their living on their own. The basic needs of a poor person were defined as “the food, clothing, shelter, and heat that are indispensable for the maintenance of life and health” (§ 32). the wage] i.e., of priests. I, too Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#) apparently indicating the end of the entry. I am tried only by being abused by my contemporaries] Refers in particular to the consequences of Corsaren’s a�ack on Kierkegaard, i.e., that he was abused on the street (→ 311,18).

3

the New Pseudonym (Anti-Cl.)] → 311,39. My idea was to publish all the completed manuscripts in one volume] In early December 1848, Kierkegaard entertained the idea of a publishing a collection of writings―The Sickness unto Death → 324,24), Practice in Christianity (→ 287,18), and Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian

1

322

26

323

17 21

22 30 31

2

324

608

3

5 12

14 17

18

22

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 78–79

Author in Christendom (→ 287,5)―in one volume, under the title Fulfillment’s Complete Works (see entry NB8:15, KJN 5, 158). In the course of 1849, he revised his plan so that the collection would consist of three volumes under the title Fulfillment’s Complete Works: The Fruits of the Year 1848, with the following contents (see Pap. X 5 B 143): vol. 1, The Sickness unto Death; vol. 2, Practice in Christianity and “Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom”; vol. 3, The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 287,5), “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 287,5), “One Note Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 291,20), and “Everything in One Word” (→ 287,5). stop completely] i.e., completely stop writing and seek appointment as a rural priest (→ 298,27; see also entry NB8:15: “And then it should be concluded,” KJN 5, 158. the writings on my work as an author] → 287,5. the entire literary production, which lay completed and ready] i.e., the “completed manuscripts” mentioned above (→ 324,2) and the manuscripts of the “three minor ethical-religious essays” (see NB11:123 and its accompanying explanatory note in the present volume). official position] i.e., as a priest or something similar (→ 291,15). then I go in vain both to Madvig and Mynster] On June 23, 1849, Kierkegaard called on Cultus Minister Madvig, and on June 25, 1849, he called on Bishop Mynster. Both visits were in vain; see entry NB11:193 in the present volume. ― Madvig: Johan Nicolai Madvig (1804–1886), Danish philologist; professor at the University of Copenhagen; member of the constitutional convention, 1848– 1849; from November 16, 1848, cultus minister, and as such had decisive influence over ecclesiastical appointments. ― Mynster: → 279,1. sent the first part of the manuscript to the printer under my name] i.e., sent the first part of Fulfillment’s Complete Works (→ 324,2), namely, The Sickness unto Death, to the printer, which Kierkegaard did on June 29, 1849 (→ 324,24). Councillor of State Olsen died] Refers to Terkild Olsen (→ 299,29), who had been made “actual councillor of state” on June 28, 1840; according

1849

to the system of rank and precedence (→ 283,24), this title ranked third in the third class. Olsen died during the night of June 25–26, 1849; see Adresseavisen, no. 150, June 29, 1849. The Sickness unto Death became pseudonymous] The Sickness unto Death: A Christian Psychological Exposition for Edification and Awakening, by Anti-Climacus, published by S. Kierkegaard, was wri�en in 1848 and was delivered to the press under Kierkegaard’s own name on June 29, 1849; see Erindringsbog for Bianco Luno, 1849 [Memorandum Book for Bianco Luno, 1849] (Archives of Bianco Luno’s Printing House, Aller Press, Copenhagen), “Bestillinger” [Orders], p. 39. On July 30, 1849, it was advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 176). the three Discourses (The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner)] i.e., The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (→ 311,37). They are now delivered to the printer] This was done on October 29, 1849 (→ 311,37). these discourses correspond to Anti-Climacus] See entry NB13:57 and → 311,39 in the present volume. Discourses for the Communion on Fridays] → 275,1. at present people are focusing on my pseudonym (Climacus)] Presumably a reference to Rasmus Nielsen’s recently published book, Mag. S. Kierkegaards ‘Johannes Climacus’ og Dr. H. Martensens ‘Christelige Dogmatik.’ En undersøgende Anmeldelse (→ 312,30) and the review of that book in Flyve-Posten, no. 256, November 1, 1849. ― Climacus: → 311,39. 3)] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry. “The Preface” calls to mind the Two Edif. Discourses of 1843] In the preface to The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner, Kierkegaard refers to the preface to Two Edifying Discourses (1843), from which he cites a number of passages, including the appeal to “that single individual whom I with joy and gratitude call my reader” (→ 291,20).

24

1

3 5

6 8

13

325

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 80–86 325

20

23 26

326

1 3 9

326m

1

326

33 35 37

327

13

13

327

25 29

32

328

2 2 3

a splendid building … the aesthetic concept of solemnity] Presumably a reference to Christiansborg Palace Church (→ 330,11), where both Bishop Mynster and H. L. Martensen preached regularly. speaker] i.e., priest. Spang] Peter Johannes Spang (1796–1846), Danish priest, acquaintance of Kierkegaard; 1840–1845, curate at the Church of the Holy Ghost, and from 1845 until his death, parish priest at the same church (see map 2, B2/C2). weekly aesthetic] Variant: “aesthetic” added. faith, hope, love] See 1 Cor 13:13. Mynster] → 279,1. see p. 134] See entry NB13:82. see p. 133 middle of page] See entry NB13:80. only a few people … as in a confessional] → 321,6. civil servants with ecclesiastical livings] i.e., priests (→ 291,15 and → 308,33). councillor of justice] According to the system of rank and precedence, “titular” councillors of justice were placed in the third place of the fi�h class, while “actual” councillors of justice were in the third place of the fourth class (→ 283,24). A councillor of justice was to be addressed as “Noble and Wellborn Sir.” knight of the Dannebrog] A Danish royal order; membership at different levels was granted to a range of notable people. no reviews] Most of Kierkegaard’s publications were reviewed. I dared to break with the mob vulgarity] i.e., with Corsaren, which Kierkegaard challenged in an article in Fædrelandet, December 27, 1845 (→ 311,18). everyone remained silent] → 296,16. businessmen] → 291,16. Prof. Martensen] → 306,34. the silk gown and the velvet paunch] In accordance with a sumptuary decree from 1683 among the clergy, only bishops, the royal confessor, and those who had taken the theological doctorate were permi�ed to wear a priestly cap and gown of velvet, with a silk cape.

1849

609

the cross of knighthood] Martensen had been made a knight of the Dannebrog on June 28, 1847. ca. 2,000 rd. a year] Martensen had an annual salary of 1,803 rix-dollars as a civil servant; see Fortegnelse over de Embedsmænd, der have en aarlig Gage af 600 Rbdlr. eller derover [List of Civil Servants with an Annual Salary or 600 RixDollars of More] (n.p., n.d. [Copenhagen, 1851]), p. 33. ― rd.: Rix-dollar. The rix-dollar, properly rigsbank dollar (rigsbanksdaler), was the currency introduced a�er the Danish state declared bankruptcy in 1813. A rix-dollar was divided into six marks, each of which was further divided into sixteen shillings; thus there were 96 shillings in a rix-dollar. A judge earned about 1,200–1,800 rixdollars a year; a middle-level civil servant earned about 400–500 rix-dollars a year; a qualified artisan would receive 200 rix-dollars a year plus free board and lodging from his master; a maidservant received at most 30 rix-dollars plus board and lodging. Four hundred rix-dollars were considered sufficient to maintain a family for a year. A pair of shoes cost three rix-dollars and a onepound loaf of rye bread (the staple of the day) cost 2–4 shillings. I who am still a nobody] Kierkegaard had earned the degree of magister in 1841 but had never sought or received an official position. A certain amount a year, which he earns by being an author] For information on Kierkegaard’s income from his writings, see the section “Udgivelsesmåde” [Publication Methods] in the “Critical Accounts of the Text” of the published writings in SKS K1–K13. had I the tongue of an angel] See 1 Cor 13:1. substituted.] Variant: first wri�en: “substituted;”, with the semicolon apparently indicating that the sentence was to continue. Prof. Martensen] → 306,34.

4

1

328m

Prof. M. returned … a great sensation with this new material] During a stay abroad from 1834 to 1836, when he spent time in Berlin, Heidelberg, and Munich, Martensen had acquainted himself with the speculative philosophy of the German philosopher G.W.F. Hegel. Shortly a�er his re-

5

329

6

10

13

16 27

610

11

15

22 24 25

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86

turn to Denmark he presented this philosophy at the University of Copenhagen, first in his licentiate dissertation on the autonomy of human consciousness, which he defended on July 12, 1837 (→ 329,15), and then in the winter term of 1837– 1838, when as a privatdocent he presented a lecture series titled “Forelæsninger over Indledning til speculativ Dogmatik” [Introductory Lectures on Speculative Dogmatics], which a�racted much a�ention (see Kierkegaard’s excerpts from the first ten lectures in entries Not4:3–12, KJN 3, 125–142). During the next two semesters (summer term of 1838, winter term of 1838–1839), as a newly appointed lecturer, he taught speculative dogmatics to no fewer than 200–230 students; see Kjøbenhavns Universitets Aarbog for 1838 [University of Copenhagen Yearbook for 1838], ed. H. P. Selmer (Copenhagen, n.d.), p. 83. the philosophy of standpoints] The goal in Hegel’s speculative philosophy is to gain a systematic overview of the whole by analyzing various finite standpoints, each of which has a certain validity, but which is abolished in the final result. at the same time young students … epoch and era] Refers to theology student Lauritz Vilhelm Petersen’s (1817–1879) Danish translation of H. L. Martensen’s Latin licentiate dissertation, Den menneskelige Selvbevidstheds Autonomie i vor Tids dogmatiske Theologie [The Autonomy of Human Self-Consciousness in the Dogmatic Theology of Our Time] (Copenhagen, 1837; ASKB 648). In the preface to his translation, Den menneskelige Selvbevidstheds Autonomie i vor Tids dogmatiske Theologie (Copenhagen, 1841; ASKB 651), Petersen states: “This was the first work from the latest speculative trend that appeared among us, heralding the theological era from which people have already begun to reckon” (unpaginated). stood] Variant: changed from: “stands”. bishop of Zealand] i.e., J. P. Mynster (→ 279,1). criticized for something … wants to govern] Refers to the criticism to which Mynster had been subjected by those who thought he was insufficiently a�entive to people―especially Grundtvigians and participants in clerical assemblies―who wanted reforms in the State Church or who thought that he was too inflexible in his treatment of religious minorities.

1849

Mynster] → 279,1. he has remained stuck at Jacobi] Presumably loosely cited from H. L. Martensen’s article “Rationalisme, Supranaturalisme og principium exclusi medii (I Anledning af H. H. Biskop Mynsters A�andling herom)” [Rationalism, Supernaturalism, and the Principle of the Excluded Middle (On the Occasion of the Right Reverend Bishop Mynster’s Essay on the Subject)] (see the next note), p. 467, where Martensen writes as follows, in opposition to Mynster, who is “intellectually related to Jacobi”: “But can one remain standing at an aut aut [Latin, “either/or”] in the opposition between pantheism and theism? Isn’t the task of our times precisely to abolish this unfortunate aut aut in which Jacobi’s noble, truthloving intellect was entangled and from which he believed there was not way out!” The German philosopher Friedrich Heinrich Jacobi (1743–1819) opposed rationalism with a philosophy of life in which the concepts of faith and feeling occupied a central place. In the court of public opinion, M. has also lost the ba�le over the principle of contradiction] The principle of contradiction maintains that it is impossible for the same predicate to be simultaneously true and not true in the same sense for the same thing. In speculative philosophy, particularly in that of Hegel, the principle of contradiction was “sublated.” For Hegel contradiction is a principle of development in a dialectical process that does not lead to the abolition of the contradiction, but to a higher union of identity and difference. In the late 1830s, Hegel’s doctrine of the sublation of the principle of contradiction was the occasion of much debate in Denmark, where thinkers including J. L. Heiberg and H. L. Martensen followed Hegel, while others, including J. P. Mynster and F. C. Sibbern defended the universal validity of the principle of contradiction. Mynster set forth his views in the article “Rationalisme. Supranaturalisme” [Rationalism, Supernaturalism], in Tidsskri� for Li�eratur og Kritik [Journal for Literature and Criticism] (vol. 1, Copenhagen, 1839, pp. 249– 268), which drew opposition from J. L. Heiberg in “En logisk Bemærkning i Anledning af H.

29 30

31

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86

35

36

37

38

H. Hr. Biskop Dr. Mynsters A�andling om Rationalisme og Supranaturalisme” [A Remark on Logic in Reference to the Right Reverend Bishop Dr. Mynster’s Treatise on Rationalism and Supernaturalism], in Tidsskri� for Li�eratur og Kritik (vol. 1, Copenhagen, 1839, pp. 441–456) and H. L. Martensen, “Rationalisme, Supranaturalisme og principium exclusi medii (I Anledning af H. H. Biskop Mynsters A�andling herom),” in Tidsskri� for Li�eratur og Kritik (vol. 1, Copenhagen, 1839, pp. 456–473). It was not until three years later that Mynster responded to his opponents in “Om de logiske Principper” [On the Principles of Logic], in Tidsskri� for Li�eratur og Kritik (vol. 7, Copenhagen, 1842, pp. 325–352). ― M.: Mynster. Then a literary project begins: the pseudonyms] Refers to Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous works, which began with the publication of Either/Or on February 20, 1843, and had for the time being been concluded with the publication of Concluding Unscientific Postscript on February 27, 1846. Victor Eremita emphasizes the ethical, taking aim at “the System.”] Either/Or was published under the pseudonym Victor Eremita (Latin, “the victorious hermit”), who was also listed as author of the book’s preface; in the present journal entry Kierkegaard has in mind the ethical pseudonym who was listed as the author of the book’s second part, Judge William, who vehemently opposes speculative philosophy’s idea that knowledge can be exhaustively described in a scientific “system.” See esp. EO 2, 321; SKS 3, 303: “But a positive view of life cannot be imagined unless it contains an ethical element. In our times one does quite often encounter people who have a system in which the ethical is not found at all.” Johnannes de silentio does so quite clearly] Johannes de silentio (Latin, “John of silence”), the pseudonymous editor of Fear and Trembling (1843), includes a polemic against “the system” in the preface to the work (FT, 7–8; SKS 4, 103–104) and at the beginning of each of the three Problemata (FT, 54–55, 68–69; 83; SKS 4, 148–149, 160–161, 172)―against Hegel’s supposed claim that faith and ethics are commensurable. Mynster signals his support from above] i.e., in a piece, signed by his usual pseudonym “Kts.,”

1849

611

titled “Kirkelig Polemik” [Ecclesiastical Polemic], in Intelligensblade (nos. 41–42, January 1, 1844, vol. 4, pp. 105–106), Mynster made use of Fear and Trembling in opposing the demand that the Christian message be adjusted to meet the cultured classes’ preference for reflection and irony. Pseudonym follows upon pseudonym] In addition to the pseudonymous works already mentioned (→ 329,36, → 329,37, and → 330,1): Repetition, by Constantin Constantius, 1843; Philosophical Fragments, by Johannes Climacus, 1844; The Concept of Anxiety, by Vigilius Haufniensis, 1844; and Stages on Life’s Way, edited by Hilarius Bookbinder, 1845. Joh. Climacus] i.e., Johannes Climacus (→ 311,39) as the author of Concluding Unscientific Postscript, which had for the time being concluded the pseudonymous writings and which contained a running polemic against “the system,” including its abolition of the principle of contradiction and its supposed lack of a genuine ethics. the situation in Germany has also changed somewhat] See Magnus Eiríksson (→ 330,35), “Nogle Bemærkninger foranledigede ved den Anmeldelse af mit Skri�: ‘Speculativ Re�roenhed og geistlig Retfærdighed,’ som findes i Nr. 249 af de�e Blad” [Some Remarks Occasioned by the Review of My Piece ‘Speculative Orthodoxy and Ecclesiastical Righteousness,’ Which Appeared in Issue No. 249 of This Paper] in Kjøbenhavnsposten, no. 253, October 30, 1849, p. 1010: “The so-called orthodox or ecclesiastical tendency of modern speculation is in no way ‘a theological school with a very broad following,’ for even in Germany, its principal headquarters, it is contracting more than it is expanding, and it is more properly regarded as a theological clique that still has some scholarly and educated theologians in its leadership, than as ‘a theological school with a very broad following.’” Martensen’s standing at the university is not at all as secure as previously] Interest in speculative philosophy had declined; see Martensen’s preface (dated December 1850) to Mester Eckart. Et Bidrag til at oplyse Middelalderens Mystik [Meister Eckhart: A Contribution to the Illumination of the Mysticism of the Middle Ages], 3rd ed.

39

1

4

5

330

612

9

10 11

14

17

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86

(Copenhagen, 1851 [1st ed. 1840; ASKB 649]): “ten years ago one could count on much more interest because of the speculative movement then dominant in the literature” (unpaginated). And as early as 1846 Mynster could write in his (posthumously published) memoirs that “in recent years Hegelian philosophy has had to move aside completely.” Meddelelser om mit Levnet [Communications about My Life] (Copenhagen, 1854), pp. 236–237. Prof. M. becomes a court preacher] This took place on May 16, 1845 (→ 306,34) and Ny CollegialTidende [New Collegial Times], no. 22, May 24, 1845, p. 464). This] Variant: first wri�en: “He is hu”. He is again hugely successful at the Palace Church] Refers to Christiansborg Palace Church, situated on Slotsholmen, opposite Højbro Plads (see map 2, B2); it was designed by court architect C. F. Hansen and dedicated in 1826, functioning both as a church for the royal court and as a parish church with regular access to communion services and vespers. In his memoirs Martensen writes: “The church was always full as, thank God, it has remained to this day, and among the listeners were both men and women who were among the noblest and most cultured people in the capital. Thus among my listeners were Mynster and A. S. Ørsted,” H. L. Martensen, Af mit Levnet [From My Life], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1882–1883), vol. 2 (1883), p. 86. the rumor that Hegelian philosophy … a little taste of it] See the anonymous review of Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik in Berlingske Tidende, no. 205, August 30, 1849: “Over the last decade, Prof. Martensen’s work as a lecturer on dogmatics at the university has been of such significance that this work is received eagerly not only by his numerous students, many of whom owe their first-rate theological education to him, but surely also by many older people and nontheologians, who wish to acquaint themselves with his system, which won many adherents when it was presented sporadically in many pieces and collections of sermons.” Mynster was his protector] i.e., by using his influence as primate of the Danish Church to have Martensen named a court preacher.

1849

M.] Martensen. not an ordinary man of the cloth for every Sunday] i.e., not an ordinary parish priest, curate, or the like, who unlike, e.g., doctors of theology, were not permi�ed to wear special vestments of silk, velvet, etc. (→ 328,3), and who o�en preached every Sunday. every 6th Sunday] See the lists of preachers at Copenhagen’s various churches, published in Adresseavisen for the period May–October 1849: Martensen preached on May 13 (no. 110, May 12, 1849); four weeks later, on June 10 (no. 133, June 9, 1849); ten weeks later, on August 19 (no. 193, August 18, 1849), and for the last time, seven weeks later, on October 7 (no. 235, October 6, 1849). a li�le “NB” had been brought up at the university] Presumably a reference to the criticism Martensen had received from another professor at the university, i.e., Rasmus Nielsen (→ 312,30 and → 313,15). scientific scholarship] i.e., speculative philosophy and theology, which insisted that it was a science; thus Martensen regarded his dogmatics as a science; see his preface to Den christelige Dogmatik (see the next note). now the Christian Dogmatics is published] H. L. Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 306,34) was advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 167, July 19, 1849; according to a receipt from the book dealer C. A. Reitzel, Kierkegaard purchased it on July 18, 1849. It consists of the lectures that had been titled “Speculative Dogmatics,”] Refers to Martensen’s introductory lectures on “speculative dogmatics,” which he had first presented at the University of Copenhagen in the winter term of 1837–1838 (→ 329,5); see the preface, p. 1, in Den christelige Dogmatik, where Martensen writes: “Having repeatedly lectured on Christian dogmatics at the nation’s institution of higher learning, I here present the outlines of my views on dogmatics.” removed (a] Variant: first wri�en: “removed.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. reference to … one copy half-bound … the other in full leather binding] Refers to Ludvig

18 19

20

21

24

25

25

28

29

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86

31

32 35

38

Holberg’s comedy Erasmus Montanus eller Rasmus Berg [Erasmus Montanus, or Rasmus Berg] (1731), act 1, sc. 4, where the half-literate Peer Degn confuses his hosts with fragmentary Latin, referring to the same work with different bindings as if this made them different books. See Den Danske SkuePlads [The Danish Theater], 7 vols. (Copenhagen, 1758 or 1788 [1731–1754]; ASKB 1566–1567); vol. 5. The volumes are undated and unpaginated. The earlier tradition of the speculative] Presumably the original version of speculative philosophy, especially that of Hegel. the new opinion that … and grasp it] → 330,36. In opposition to Magnus Eirikson … altogether too lo�y for him] Presumably a reference to the negative reactions to the critique of Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik that Magnus Eiríksson expressed in his Speculativ Re�roenhed, fremstillet e�er Dr. Martensens ‘christelige Dogmatik,’ og Geistlig Retfærdighed, belyst ved en Biskops Deeltagelse i en Generalfiskal-Sag [Speculative Orthodoxy, Presented in Accordance with Dr. Martensen’s Christian Dogmatics, and Ecclesiastical Righteousness, Illuminated by a Bishop’s Participation in a Supreme Court Case] (abbreviated herea�er as Speculativ Re�roenhed). The book was advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, October 16, 1849 (no. 243), and was reviewed in Kjøbenhavnsposten on October 25, 1849 (no. 249, p. 993), and FlyvePosten on October 24, 1849 (→ 331,16). ― Magnus Eiríksson: (1806–1881), Icelandic author; cand. theol. from the University of Copenhagen, 1837; therea�er private tutor in Copenhagen. His writings were inspired by Kierkegaard, to whom he refers on p. 108 of the above-mentioned work. See Kierkegaard’s article “Occasioned by a Remark in Magnus Eirikson’s Most Recent Book, Speculative Orthodoxy etc.” (Pap. X 6 B 128). ― a theology: Variant: first wri�en: “it is said”. it is said that any person … can read it and grasp it] Refers to the anonymous review of Den christelige Dogmatik in Berlingske Tidende, no. 205, August 30, 1849: “This book is suitable not only for men who are specialists, but owing to its crisp, clear, spirited style, it is accessible to a very large group, and the profound, inward conviction that speaks from every page of the book can be

1849

613

understood not only by scholarly sensibilities, but by every reader or thoughtful person with a religiously educated temperament.” Miss Frederikke Bremer] Fredrika Bremer (1801– 1865), Swedish author; debuted in 1828 with the book Teckningar ur Hvardagslifvet [Sketches from Everyday Life], which was followed by a series of novels in which Bremer―like the Danish writer Thomasine Gyllembourg, who wrote under the pseudonym “Author of ‘A Story of Everyday Life’”―sketched the everyday life of the cultivated middle class. Her books were widely read in Europe and the United States. In the 1840s, Bremer concerned herself increasingly with religious ma�ers, and starting in 1848 she traveled abroad, beginning in Denmark with a stay in Copenhagen that lasted from the autumn of 1848 until June 1849. She collected her impressions from this visit in Liv i norden af Frederikke Bremer, Forfa�erinde til de svenske Hverdagshistorier [Life in Scandinavia by Fredrika Bremer, Author of the Swedish Stories of Everyday Life] (Copenhagen, 1849), originally published in a Swedish newspaper; the Danish translation was advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 214, September 12, 1849. ― Miss: Variant: added. with the consent of the author … She implies that Martensen is Xt] Compressed rendering of Liv i norden, pp. 36–37: “Still young and at the peak of his powers, H. L. Martensen is a seedsman in the highest sense of the word: with his living words and his philosophical writings (highly regarded in Sweden as in Denmark), he broadcasts the seeds of a new development of the Church’s religious life and of scientific scholarship through a more profound understanding of what they essentially are, transfiguring the life of faith into the life of reason by wedding deep feelings with logical thought. In his Dogmatics, soon to be published, we await a more complete presentation of his views. And what we have seen of the works he has already published awakens hope of a rebirth of ecclesiastical life in ma�ers both great and small, in the body politic and in the heart of the individual. The unusual clarity and distinctness of language with which this richly gi�ed thinker can present the most pro-

1

3

331

614

9

12

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86

found speculative principles, and the interesting and ingenious manner of his teaching make him a popular writer. In his Dogmatics we await a major work, and not only for the learned. It is about time that theology developed popular appeal. That was what Our Lord did eighteen hundred years ago.” ― in advance acquainted herself with Christian Dogmatics: See entry NB12:157 in the present volume, where Kierkegaard relates how during her stay in Copenhagen Fredrika Bremer came “running to him [Martensen] every day, reading the Dogmatics, of which she received galley proofs (this is well-known).” See also Martensen, Af mit Levnet (→ 330,11), vol. 2 (1883), p. 134: “As it happened, the first person who read my Dogmatics bit by bit in proofs, was a lady, the poet Frederike Bremer, author of the Swedish ‘Stories of Everyday Life.’ That year she was staying in Copenhagen and frequently came to my house, speaking with me a great deal about religious ma�ers and wanting to learn about dogmatics.” ― Scandinavia. She: Variant: first written: “Scandinavia―and travels”. thereupon travels to North America] A�er her stay in Copenhagen, Fredrika Bremer traveled first to the Danish islands and in September 1849 continued on to London and the United States. Flyve-Posten … “the speculative genius, Prof. M,” who … has remained true to his first love] Rendering of a passage in the review of Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik in FlyvePosten (→ 311,21), no. 174, July 28, 1849: “Thus in principle Martensen has upheld the standpoint with which he first supported himself when he emerged as an academic teacher.…Therefore this scholarly work will be greeted with joy not only by theology students, but the joy will be just as great among all who have had their theological education from Martensen and have been inspired by his genius, just as it will be a blessing in other circles, where the more recent negative speculation, supported by the spirit of the times, has consciously or unconsciously been granted admission and has sapped the foundations of the faith.” ― has remained true to his first love: i.e., unlike Rasmus Nielsen, concerning whom Flyve-Posten writes (November 1, 1849 [no. 256]), on the occa-

1849

sion of his Mag. S. Kierkegaards ‘Johannes Climacus’ og Dr. H. Martensens ‘Christelige Dogmatik.’ En undersøgende Anmeldelse (→ 312,30): “as he himself now publicly declares that he has le� ‘his first love’ [i.e., speculative philosophy].” in addition, it presents a proof … as Fl.-P. has subscribers] Refers to the following passage in the review of Magnus Eiríksson, Speculativ Re�roenhed in Flyve-Posten, no. 249, October 24, 1849: “Both as a teacher and a preacher M. [Martensen] has made a name for himself and has a�racted universal a�ention that would have been impossible for him if, in addition to his unusual gi�s, a Christian life had not dwelt within him. If, as Eiriksson maintains, M. was a hypocrite who wants ‘to hoodwink people,’ it would be strange if E. were the only person who saw this and assumed it to be the case, and even more strange and unreasonable that M. would continue to attract an audience; no, this can only have its basis in the fact that a religious life truly dwells in him, that a spirit dwells in him that is in the service of the truth and Christ.” See also an article where Kierkegaard refers to the same passage, Pap. X 6 B 129. ― businessmen: → 291,16. ― Fl.-P. has subscribers: → 311,21. Merchant N. of Berlingske Tidende … conviction can be detected] Cited loosely from an anonymous review of Den christelige Dogmatik that appeared in Berlingske Tidende (→ 330,36). Den Berlingske politiske og Avertissements-Tidende [Berling’s Political and Advertisement Times], generally referred to as Berlingske Tidende, was founded in 1748; starting in January 1845, it appeared twice a day, carrying political material, news, reviews, business information, a literary supplement, and advertisements. Until 1848, the paper had a royal monopoly on publishing political news. In Kierkegaard’s day Berlingske Tidende and Adresseavisen were the only newspapers permi�ed to accept paid advertising. ― Merchant N.: The German-Danish-Jewish businessman and economist Mendel Levin Nathanson (1780–1868) was editor of Berlingske Tidende from 1838 to 1858 (and subsequently in 1865–1866). His Right Reverence, Hr. Prof. Court Preacher and Knight Martensen] According to the sys-

16

20

39

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 86–87

41

329m

2

4

6

tem of rank and preference (→ 283,24), as a doctor of theology Martensen was to be addressed as “Very Reverend and Most Noble Sir,” and as court preacher as “Very Reverend and Wellborn Sir.” ― Knight: → 328,4. the many buyers] Den christelige Dogmatik was published by C. A. Reitzel; see Reitzel’s Forhandlinger med Forfa�ere, Redacteurer &c: 1835– [1858] [Negotiations with Authors, Editors, etc., 1835–[1858]], p. 35, where it is stated, concerning Prof. Martensen: “Publication of a ‘Dogmatics.’ Press run 1025 copies.” As early as November 13, 1849, less than four months a�er it was published, C. A. Reitzel reported in Adresseavisen (no. 267) that “a new printing of Dr. Prof. H. Martensens Dogmatik is being readied for the press.” By way of comparison, more than fourteen months a�er the publication of Concluding Unscientific Postscript, only 161 copies had been sold (→ 311,17). see the preface to Philosophical Fragments] See the preface to Philosophical Fragments (1844), where the author asks that people not think that he intends that this book should be the foundation of a new scientific-scholarly, systematic, and world-historical epoch, “of which the symptom is yelling, convulsive yelling, while the content of the yelling is these words: era, epoch, era and epoch, epoch and era” (PF, 6; SKS 4, 216). see the li�le piece Prefaces] See Prefaces (published under the pseudonym Nicolaus Notabene), no. 6 (P, 31–34; SKS 4, 493–496), where the author claims that he wants to publish an edifying work for cultured people, inasmuch as Mynster’s popular collection Prædikener paa alle Søn- og Hellig-Dage i Aaret [Sermons for Every Sunday and Holy Day of the Year], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1823 [3rd ed., Copenhagen, 1837; ASKB 229–230]), “despite all its excellent qualities no longer satisfies―the cultured people,” (P, 31; SKS 4, 493). see Maanedsskri� for Literatur] See F. C. Sibbern, “Om den Maade, hvorpaa Contradictionsprincipet behandles i den hegelske Skole, med Mere, som henhører til de logiske Grundbetragtninger” [On the Way in Which the Principle of Contradiction Is Treated in the Hegelian School, Plus Other Ma�ers Pertaining to Logical Principles] in

1849

615

Maanedsskri� for Li�eratur [Literary Monthly], vol. 19 (Copenhagen, 1838), pp. 424–460. where Bishop Mynster … who in due course is to be taken out of service] Refers to the fact that Martensen, at a number of points in Den christelige Dogmatik, specifically in the footnotes on pp. 29, 263, and 309, refers to Mynster’s Om Begrebet af den christelige Dogmatik [On the Concept of Christian Dogmatics] (Copenhagen, 1831). This brief dogmatic treatise by Mynster was included in his Blandede Skrivter [Miscellaneous Writings], 6 vols. (Copenhagen, 1852–1857; ASKB 358–363 includes vols. 1–3, [1852–1853]), vol. 1, pp. 37–80. ― taken out of service: See NB12:16 in the present volume, where, with reference to Martensen’s critique of Mynster in 1839 (→ 329,31), Kierkegaard writes that “at one time it was Mynster whom ‘the system’ was supposed to overthrow.” quod felix faustumque sit] This formulaic phrase was used at the beginning of the le�er issued to students upon matriculation to the University of Copenhagen; see, e.g., Kierkegaard’s own matriculation papers, LD, 8; B&A 1, 7). in the first journal, journal JJ … de occultis non judicat ecclesia] Refers to Journal JJ, bound in octavo format, which Kierkegaard used in the period 1842–1846 (KJN 2, 133–288; see the “Critical Account of the Text of Journal JJ,” KJN 2, 453). This journal includes notes and sketches for a story of a person who is oppressed by hidden guilt; see entries JJ:317–317.b, 332, 339–339.e, 341, 417–417.a, and 431 (KJN 2, 220, 227, 230, 232, 257– 258, and 262). ― de occultis non judicat ecclesia: This is a famous principle of canon jurisprudence, which originated with Pope Innocent III, who ca. 1213 issued a decree (included as chap. 33 in Decretalium Gregorii IX [Decrees of Gregory IX], bk. 5, title 3) on the occasion of a case involving simony, and refers to the Church “quæ non iudicat de occultis” (“which does not judge things that are hidden”); see Corpus juris canonici Gregorii XIII Pontif. Max. auctoritate post emendationem absolutam editum [The Corpus of Canon Law, Published by the Authority of Pope Gregory XIII, A�er Having Been Completely Revised], ed. J. H. Boehmer, 2 vols. (Halle, 1747), vol. 2, col. 726.

5

330m

9

17

332

616 333

15 16 20 28 40

43

335

2

12

18 28

34

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 88–89

the monastery] i.e., as in pre-Reformation times. witnesses to the truth] → 292,35. guarantee] Variant: first wri�en: “create”. maieuticist] → 313,12. the situation is that the young pers. stands above this older person] Refers to the relationship between the Young Man and Constantin Constantius in Repetition, and between the Young Man and Constantin Constantius, Victor Eremita, the Fashion Designer, and Johannes the Seducer in the “In vino veritas” section of Stages on Life’s Way. a�er having almost overexerted myself for 7 years] i.e., since 1842, when Kierkegaard started writing Either/Or and thus began what he considered his “authorship.” a new sort of burden, concern about making a living] Presumably a reference to the fact that Kierkegaard was no longer able to live on the income generated by his capital, because he had consumed most of the inheritance he had acquired on the death of his father, and he found the income from his writings to be insufficient. See Frithiof Brandt and Elise Thorkelin, Søren Kierkegaard og pengene [Søren Kierkegaard and Money], 2nd ed. (Copenhagen, 1993 [1935]), pp. 65–100. Mynster’s sermons] According to a later journal entry, Kierkegaard always went to hear Mynster when he preached in Copenhagen; see journal entry NB28:56 (KJN 9; SKS 25, 262). He also owned a number of collections of sermons by Mynster: Prædikener [Sermons], 3 vols., 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1826 [1810]; vol. 2, 2nd ed. [Copenhagen, 1832 (1815)]; ASKB 228), Prædikener paa alle Søn- og Hellig-Dage i Aaret (→ 329m,4), Prædikener holdte i Kirkeaaret 1846–47 [Sermons Held in the Church Year 1846–1847] (Copenhagen, 1847; ASKB 231), and Prædikener holdte i Aaret 1848 [Sermons Held in the Year 1848] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 232). No one can take what has not been given to him] See Jn 3:27. all of the recent literary production] Refers especially to the manuscript of Practice in Christianity (→ 335,38). take refuge in grace] Refers to the words u�ered during confession (→ 321,6) by the priest to those

1849

confessing their sins: “Inasmuch as you have heartily repented and regre�ed your sins, and in constant faith take refuge in God’s mercy in Christ Jesus, promising with the help of God’s grace to endeavor to lead a be�er and more worthy life herea�er, then, on behalf of God’s office and my own, in accordance with the power and authority God has granted me from above to forgive sins here on earth, I pronounce to you that all of your sins are forgiven in the name of God the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit, amen!” Dannemarks og Norges Kirke-Ritual (→ 278,12), chap. 4, art. 1, pp. 146–147. This, which …, for] Variant: first wri�en: “It is as”. Anti-Climacus says in the moral … Heavy Laden”:] Abbreviated rendering of the “moral” in “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest: For Awakening and Inward Appropriation,” which was published as part 1 of Practice in Christianity (1850) (PC, 3–68, esp. 67–68; SKS 12, 11–80, esp. 79–80). ― Come unto Me … and I Will Give You Rest: See Mt 11:28. as Anti-Climacus says, then no vehemence that overwhelms itself] Rendering of a passage immediately preceding the “moral” to “Come unto Me” (see previous note), where Anti-Climacus writes: “of course, human vehemence and unruliness do not help” (PC, 66; SKS 12, 77). decorated with honors and stars and sashes bound in gilt-edged velvet] In this connection Kierkegaard could have in mind, e.g., J. P. Mynster (→ 279,1), who was decorated with the symbols of membership in the Order of the Great Cross of the Dannebrog, which in the case of ecclesiastical knights consisted of a gold cross hung from a ribbon around the neck, and, fastened to the le� breast, a large cross with silver rays forming a star. In addition, as a bishop he was to wear a clerical cap and gown of velvet (→ 328,3). elegance] Variant: first wri�en: “elegance,” with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. the Middle Ages] i.e., the period prior to the Reformation, which came to Denmark in 1536.

35 38

5

336

20

336

23

20

337

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 89–92

35 42

338

10 26

336m

2

fear and trembling] → 294,22. I exposed myself to a�ack by The Corsair] By asking “to appear in The Corsair” (→ 311,18). the li�le bit of the voluntary] Variant: the word “true” has been deleted before “voluntary”. bi�e,] Variant: first wri�en: “―See, th”. bound in silk with a velvet back or paunch] → 328,3 and → 336,20.

339

2

it is only for a short while] See Jn 16:16.

339

8

Luther … the great catch of fish] Rendering of Luther’s sermon on Lk 5:1–11, the gospel text for the fi�h Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, in En christelig Postille (→ 278,21), vol. 1, pp. 419–429; see p. 420, where Luther writes of the Apostles Simon Peter and the sons of Zebedee, James, and John, who had fished all night in vain and then cast their net out in obedience to Jesus’ command, and had a great catch of fish: “With this example, he [Jesus] demonstrates in particular the situation of those whom he will help and in what way he typically helps. The situation must indeed be like that of these fishermen: one must have worked all night, but all the work must have been of no use, all the troubles wasted, all the counsel and assistance of people must have failed. Christendom has this experience every day, when it must endure all sorts of tribulations, wretchedness, and suffering. Because it does not come to pass without trials, troubles, and work.”

339

16

Feuerbach and company] In his principal work of philosophy, Das Wesen des Christenthums [The Essence of Christianity], published in 1841, the German philosopher Ludwig Feuerbach (1804– 1872) asserted that the essence of Christianity was anthropology, because God was a projection of human beings’ idealized notion of the essential features of their own species. Kierkegaard owned the second, expanded edition of Das Wesen des Christenthums (Leipzig, 1843; ASKB 488), to which reference will be made in the notes that follow. In the preface Feuerbach refers to “Strauß and Bruno Bauer, in whose company I am constantly mentioned” (p. xix), i.e., the German theologian and philosopher David Friedrich Strauß (1808–1874)

1849

617

and the German theologian Bruno Bauer (1809– 1882), both of whom understood Christianity as mythology. Now Feuerbach says … you are not Xns] Fabricated quotation based on Feuerbach’s preface to Das Wesen des Christenthums (→ 339,34 and → 340,1). established Xndom says that Feuerbach attacks Xnty] Reference to theologians’ reactions to the publication of Feuerbach’s Das Wesen des Christenthums. he is a�acking the Xns by showing that their lives do not correspond to the teachings of Xnty] Reference to the preface to Das Wesen des Christenthums, where Feuerbach criticizes the Christians of his day for hypocrisy because they do not live up the requirements of Christianity as the earliest Christians tried to do. See esp. p. iii, where he writes that “Christianity, too, has had its classical era, and only what is true and great is worthy of being thought of as classical; rather, what is untrue, pe�y, and unclassical belongs to the forum of satyrs or to the comical; so that is why, in order to focus on Christianity as an object worthy of thought, I abstract from all the dissolute, characterless, easygoing, belletristic, flirtatious, epicurean Christianity of the modern world, situating myself back in the times when the bride of Christ was still a chaste, immaculate virgin, when the crown of thorns of her heavenly spouse had not yet been entwined with the roses and myrtle of the pagan Venus, when despite being poor in worldly treasures, she was overflowing and supremely happy with the joys of the secrets of supernatural love.” Xndom has betrayed Xnty in a very insidious manner … by wanting to have the appearance of being Xn] Presumably an echo of Feuerbach’s preface to Das Wesen des Christenthums, p. v: “The hypocritical negation of Christianity given by the appearance of assent to it, is moral, indeed it is authorized and honored.” And p. xvi: “That which no longer exists in faith―the faith of the modern world is merely an apparent faith, a faith that does not believe what it imagines itself to believe, merely an indecisive, imbecilic unbelief, as has been adequately demonstrated by myself and others―

25

33

34

1

340

618

5 15

17

341

16

16

21

J O U R N A L NB 13 : 92

is nonetheless still supposed to hold true as public opinion: that which is itself no longer truly holy must at least appear holy.” dialectical] Variant: the words “so to speak” have been deleted before “dialectical”. Joh. Climacus] i.e., Johannes Climacus (→ 311,39), the pseudonymous author of Philosophical Fragments and Concluding Unscientific Postscript. ― Joh.: Variant: first wri�en: “E,” which is the first le�er of E�erskri� (Danish, “Postscript”). that book] i.e., Concluding Unscientific Postscript (→ 311,13). Joh. Climacus] Here, in addition to the books mentioned above (→ 340,15), Kierkegaard could have in mind his unfinished manuscript “Johannes Climacus or De omnibus dubitandum est” (JC, 113–172; SKS 15). when I wrote it] If Kierkegaard is thinking of Philosophical Fragments, the probable period of composition was February–May 1844 (see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Philosophiske Smuler, SKS K4, 184). If he is thinking of Concluding Unscientific Postscript, the probable period of composition was from the spring of 1845 through the end of that year. If he is thinking of “Johannes Climacus or De omnibus dubitandum est,” the period of composition was ca. 1842– 1843. the Wandering Jew of legend] The Wandering Jew, also known as Ahasuerus, known from several legends recorded in chronicles in southern Europe and England at the beginning of the 13th century, which have lived on in popular books; see, for example, J. Görres, Die teutschen Volksbücher [German Popular Books] (Heidelberg, 1807; ASKB 1440), pp. 200–203. According to one of the legends, which possibly has its origin in Armenia, the Wandering Jew is supposed to have been Pontius Pilate’s doorkeeper, who disdainfully struck Jesus on his back with his fist when Jesus was being led out of the palace; he is also said to have shouted to Jesus: “Go faster!” whereupon Jesus turned and replied: “I am going, but you shall wait until I come again.” According to other legends, the Wandering Jew is supposed to have refused to allow Jesus to rest on the doorsill of his house when bearing the cross to

1849

Golgotha. Later legends claim that he was a cobbler from Jerusalem, which is the source of the term “Jerusalem’s cobbler.” As a punishment for what the Wandering Jew did to Jesus, he is supposed to wander the earth eternally, a despairing outcast. et ab hoste consilium] An allusion to Ovid’s Metamorphoses, bk. 4, v. 428: “fas est et ab hoste doceri” (Latin, “’Tis proper to learn even from one’s enemy”); see P. Ovidii Nasonis quae supersunt [Ovid’s Surviving Works], ed. A. Richter, 3 vols., stereotype ed. (Leipzig, 1828; ASKB 1265); vol. 2, p. 87. English translation from Ovid, Metamorphoses, trans. Frank Justus Miller, 2 vols., Loeb Classical Library (London: William Heinemann, 1916), p. 209.

4

339m

Notes for JOURNAL NB14 Critical Account of the Text of Journal NB14 621

Explanatory Notes for Journal NB14 633

NOTES FOR JOURNAL NB14

Critical Account of the Text by Finn Gredal Jensen and Steen Tullberg Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Joel D. S. Rasmussen

Explanatory Notes by Tonny Aagaard Olesen Translated by Bruce H. Kirmmse Edited by Joel D. S. Rasmussen

621

Critical Account of the Text I. Description of the Manuscript Journal NB14 is a bound journal in quarto format. Kierkegaard placed the label “NB14.” on the outside of the book.1 The manuscript of Journal NB14 is preserved in the Kierkegaard Archive (KA) at the Royal Library in Copenhagen. Most of the journal is wri�en in Kierkegaard’s gothic hand. Four entries (NB14:5, 8, 10, and 27) are wri�en in a distinct latin hand, and a latin hand is also used for Latin, French, and Italian words and occasionally as a form of calligraphy for headings and titles. The entries wri�en on the inside front cover of the journal (NB14:2) and the first page (NB14:3 and 4) were wri�en across almost the entire width of the page (i.e., ignoring the normal twocolumn format), as was entry NB14:39, and entries NB14:8 and 27 were wri�en parallel to the spine of the journal. In all the abovementioned cases, Kierkegaard’s usage is indicated in the present volume by allowing the text to run across the entire page. Entry NB14:8 has two additions in which Kierkegaard departed from his normal practice of writing either footnotes or marginal notes: NB14:8.a, wri�en to the le� of the main entry’s heading, and entry NB14:8.b, which was inserted under the main entry. Three marginal notes (NB14:30.a, 77.a, and 97.d) were begun as additions in the main text column but continued out in the margin. Entry NB14:44 contains three atypical additions: marginal note 14:44.a, wri�en upside down above the main column; marginal note 14:44. b, wri�en parallel to the spine of the journal in a narrow inner marginal column (see illustration on p. 375); and marginal addition NB14:44.h, which begins at the bo�om of Kierkegaard’s next manuscript page, continues under the main text column, and has an appended note, NB14:44.h.a, indicated by a reference mark (see illustration on p. 376). Entry NB14:128 has an appended footnote, NB14:128.1. Entry NB14:147 has an addition, NB14:147.c, written under the main text column (see illustration on p. 435, where a number of other minor additions, indicated by horizontal brackets, are also visible). The lengthy marginal addition NB14:147.e

) See illustration 4.

1

622

J O U R N A L NB 14 extends over two manuscript pages. In order to make room for the conclusion of the journal’s final entry, NB14:150, Kierkegaard was obliged to continue the entry in the margin; he indicates this marginal addition with a hash mark (#) in the margin and concludes the addition at the very bo�om of the main column (see illustration on p. 441).

II. Dating and Chronology According to the label affixed to its front cover, Journal NB14 was begun on November 9, 1849, and must have been concluded no later than January 6, 1850, which is the beginning date of the next journal, NB15. Only a few dates are indicated in the journal, namely, at two points in entry NB14:44 and in NB14:105, from “Christmas Day.” Entry NB14:44, “A Further Step in Relation to ‘Her.’” begins as follows: “I have wri�en a le�er to Schlegel with a le�er to her enclosed, and have received his reply and the other le�er unopened. Everything is found in a packet in her cabinet, in a white envelope with the inscription: [‘]About Her.[’] It was Nov. 19th.” The date given, which is a later addition to the entry, and in which the number 19 has been changed, probably from the number 20, must refer to the le�er to Johan Frederik Schlegel. A copy Kierkegaard made of the le�er has “19 Nov.” as the date of writing.1 The entire main entry, NB14:44, appears to have been wri�en in one si�ing, whereas at the end of the final marginal addition, NB14:44.h, the date “Nov. 21st” appears. In another marginal addition, NB14:44.g, Kierkegaard notes that a reconciliation with “her” could have taken place simultaneously with the publication of Three Discourses (The High Priest, The Tax Collector, The Woman Who Was a Sinner), which were advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen (abbreviated form of Kjøbenhavns kongelig alene privilegerede Adressecomptoirs E�erretninger [Information from Copenhagen’s Only Royally Licensed Advertising Office]), no. 268, November 14, 1849. In using the word “simultaneously,” Kierkegaard must have had in mind the date of publication, because prior to that date it would not have been possible for Regine to have read the preface and have understood that it was directed at her.

) The original le�er has been lost; the copy, which is also mentioned in entry NB14:44.c, is reproduced in LD, 234–237; B&A 1, 262–264.

1

Critical Account of the Text

4. Cover of Journal NB14.

623

624

J O U R N A L NB 14 A number of entries can be dated approximately. In entry NB14:81, Peter Christian Kierkegaard’s lecture at the Roskilde Ecclesiastical Convention, which had been held on October 30, 1849, is mentioned for the first time in the present journal. The lecture appeared in print in Dansk Kirketidende [Danish Church Times], no. 219, December 16, 1849. A subsequent journal entry, NB14:102, is formulated retrospectively, and Kierkegaard mentions his brother’s visit “in the month of December,” his brother’s mention of the lecture, and the fact that it was now to be wri�en up.1 In connection with this, entry NB14:81 appears to contain a direct reaction to the visit, which apparently had taken place at the beginning of the month, a supposition supported by the fact that the preceding entry, NB14:80, concerns the epistle for the first Sunday in Advent, which fell on December 2. In entry NB14:84, there is mention of “A Polemical Comedy,” which has now has been published.” This refers to Henrik Hertz’s anonymous work Hundrede Aar. Polemisk Comedie i fire Decorationer med Forspil, E�erspil og Parabaser [One Hundred Years: A Polemical Comedy in Four Scenes, with a Prelude, a Postlude, and Parabases], which was advertised as “appeared” in Berlingske Tidende [Berling’s Times], no. 295, December 13, 1849, so the entry in question cannot have been wri�en prior to that date.2 In another entry, NB14:112, it is clear that Kierkegaard had received a copy of P. M. Stilling’s dissertation, Om den indbildte Forsoning af Tro og―Viden, med særligt Henblik til Prof. Martensens “christelige Dogmatik” [On the Supposed Reconciliation of Faith―and Knowledge, with Particular Reference to Prof. Martensen’s Christian Dogmatics], (Copenhagen, 1850 [actually published late 1849]; ASKB 802), which was advertised as “appeared” in Berlingske Tidende, no. 303,

) P. C. Kierkegaard’s notebook (in the National Archives, NKS 2656, 4o, I, p. 155) states that the work of writing it up had begun in November. 2 ) Kierkegaard erroneously supposed that the piece had been written by Heiberg and begins his entry as follows: “A Polemical Comedy, which has now been published, is surely by Heiberg. The quasi-strength of the polemic is itself evidence of this. Heiberg has always pandered to the public: he acts as if he strikes at them and yet really does not strike at them; he thunders against the public and shows how bad it is―and then he is happy when the public shouts Bravo!” 1

Critical Account of the Text December 22, 1849.1 Entry NB14:124 cannot have wri�en before December 28, 1849, because in it Kierkegaard cites from a review of Hans Christian Ørsted’s Aanden i Naturen [The Soul in Nature] (Copenhagen, 1850 [actually published late 1849]; ASKB 945), which had been published that day in Berlingske Tidende. In a number of journal entries Kierkegaard reflects on biblical texts for specific holy days. These reflections did not necessarily coincide with the holy days in question, though on a number of occasions he refers to texts for the Advent season, and the dates on which he wrote the entries do not appear to diverge very much from the dates appropriate to those texts. Thus, it is very likely that entry NB14:80 was wri�en close to the first Sunday in Advent, which fell on December 2, 1849. Something similar is the case for entry NB14:93, which refers to the text for the third Sunday in Advent, which fell on December 16, and entry NB14:96, which refers to the text for the fourth Sunday in Advent, December 23.2 Entry NB14:142 is linked to the Sunday between Christmas and New Year’s Day, which fell on December 30, 1849. A few marginal notes (NB14:8.a, 34.c, and 97.b) were wri�en later than the main entries to which they are connected; this can be seen from the circumstance that they refer forward in the journal, sometimes with cross-references to the passage to which they refer. Kierkegaard’s overview of some of the contents of the journal, wri�en on the inside cover of the book (entry NB14:2), must also have been wri�en later than the entries it mentions.

) In a le�er, Kierkegaard thanks Stilling for the book; see LD, 338– 339; B&A 1, 265. The le�er is undated, but in it Kierkegaard refers to “‘This Merry Christmas Season,’ which for you will surely be a time of sorrow.”

1

) The editors of Papirer provide an explanatory footnote for Pap. X 2 A 261 (NB14:86), noting that H. L. Martensen preached in Christiansborg Palace Church on the fourth Sunday in Advent in 1849, and that the entry is supposedly related to that event, but the entry itself refers to Martensen’s Prædikener [Sermons], 1st collection (Copenhagen, 1847; ASKB 227), pp. 151–165, where there is a sermon on a text chosen by Martensen (Mt 8:21–22) that has no connection to the fourth Sunday in Advent 1849.

2

625

626

J O U R N A L NB 14

III. Contents Journal NB 14 contains 150 entries that continue the trend of the preceding journals both in breadth and in content of subject matter. The contents range from thoughts about his own writings concerning his work as an author, to Kierkegaard’s own self-understanding and his position vis-à-vis historical and contemporary figures and his times generally, to reflections on fundamental theological questions. As in Journals 12 and 13, Kierkegaard wrote a brief overview of some of the contents on the inside cover of the journal. The entries he lists1 deal with the question of “publishing the writings concerning my work as an author” (NB14:8 and 27, both of which were wri�en parallel to the spine of the journal), his writings as a means of directing a�ention to Christianity (NB14:10 and 31), the pseudonyms Anti-Climacus (NB14:12 and 19) and H. H. (NB14:101 and 107, and the preface to Practice in Christianity (NB14:34). Kierkegaard also refers to entries that reflect in various ways on his personal task with respect to the religiosity of the times: the balancing of his lo�y ideal requirements against his sympathy for ordinary people (NB14:28); a deeper understanding of Luther’s sermons (NB14:41); and a consideration of the necessity of employing poetic forms in the communication of Christianity (NB14:132). Finally, there is a reference to a lengthy interpretation of the parable of the prodigal son (Lk 5:11–32), entry NB14:147, which according to Kierkegaard’s overview is arranged as discourses or as “godly diversion light reading for edification.” A couple of entries a�empt short and pithy summaries of Kierkegaard’s view of his writings and of his role as an author. In entry NB14:103, he paraphrases Mt 3:3, saying of his work as an author, “I am a voice.” And Kierkegaard begins entry NB14:68 with a definition of himself as an author: The expression “the authors’ author,” which I myself once came to use because it was unavoidable,2 and which was subsequently adopted by several people: this expression actlly designates the unusual extra something that I possess. I am actlly an author for authors; I do not relate directly to a pub-

) Entries NB14:8, 10, 12, 19, 27, 28, 31, 34, 41, 101, 107, 132, and 147.

1

) See “A First and Last Explanation” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript (CUP, 627; SKS 7, 541).

2

Critical Account of the Text lic; no, qua author I make others productive. And thus it is right here that my suffering lies: as long as that is not understood, this unusual extra something I have becomes a minus instead of a plus. Discussion of the strategy of pseudonymity employed in the writings is not limited to those entries to which Kierkegaard himself refers in his overview of the contents of the journal. It is true that the pseudonym Anti-Climacus is discussed in most detail in entries NB14:12 and 19, but he is also touched upon at a number of other points in the first half of the journal. In entry NB14:38, for example, Kierkegaard notes that he ought to have followed an earlier impulse with respect to Anti-Climacus’s work The Sickness unto Death,1 and appended a short epilogue by the editor, which could state: “This book is as if wri�en by a physician; I, the editor, am not the physician, I am one of the sick.” Related to this position is the notion that if judgment is to be passed on people in Christendom, it must be done in such a way that Kierkegaard himself is among those judged, and this causes him to remind himself that the writings by Anti-Climacus must always be accompanied by an editor’s preface that states: “I am one who is striving.” One such work by Anti-Climacus is Practice in Christianity, the original preface of which is discussed in entry NB14:34. A large group of entries concern themselves with theological problems. These include reflections on the relationship to God in the broader sense (e.g., entries NB14:21, 32, 58, and 141), but especially deliberations concerning the atonement (e.g., entries NB14:24, 37, and 42), faith, the Law, and grace (e.g., entries NB14:23, 33, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, and 65). Entry NB14:65 is a lengthy piece with the heading “‘Grace’ and ‘Law,’” and begins: “Grace” has been shoved into an entirely wrong place; people use grace to reduce the requirement of the Law. Meaningless and un-Christian! No! The requirement is and remains the same, unchanged; indeed, if anything, it has perhaps been made more rigorous under grace. The difference is simply this: Under the Law, my salvation is linked to the condition of fulfilling the requirement of the Law. Under grace, I am freed from this worry, which at its maximum must bring me to despair and make

) On July 30, 1849, The Sickness Unto Death was advertised as having been published.

1

627

628

J O U R N A L NB 14 me entirely incapable of fulfilling even the least of what the Law requires―but the requirement is the same. In addition to traditional theological themes, the entries include examples of themes that were of particular interest to Kierkegaard, for example: the idea of contemporaneity, and especially how it is misunderstood (entries NB14:26 and 78); the notion of the present moment (entry NB14:92); the dialectic of communication (e.g., entry NB14:35); and the idea of imitation of Christ, which was often linked to Kierkegaard’s ongoing reading of Thomas a Kempis (entries NB14:4 and 104). Theological reflections also include Kierkegaard’s consideration of various New Testament texts: Galatians (e.g., entries NB14:7 and 142) and Romans (e.g., entries NB14:52 and 80), but especially texts from the four Gospels, (e.g., entries NB14:40, 73, 82, 93, 94, 96, and 105). A number of these entries concern texts from the beginning of the Church year, for example, entries NB14:80 (first Sunday in Advent), NB14:93 (third Sunday in Advent), NB14:96 (fourth Sunday in Advent), NB14:105 (Christmas Day), and NB14:142 (Sunday between Christmas and New Year’s Day).1 Kierkegaard supplements his reflections on scriptural passages with his views concerning the art of preaching, making particular use of Luther in this context. Luther’s sermon on the son of the widow of Nain (Lk 7:11–17) is discussed in entry NB14:46, and in entry NB14:56 it is presented as a counterexample to the lack of personal address (“You are the one being addressed”) typical of the usual sermon. An additional ten entries concern themselves with Luther, some critically, some approvingly. Entry NB14:134 is an example of Kierkegaard’s critique, where Luther is censured for being undialectical and for placing the teaching above the teacher.2 Like the journals preceding it, Journal NB14 is characterized by a number of running critiques of various individuals. Kierkegaard’s increasingly critical view of Bishop Mynster is visible in the heading of entry NB14:63 (“Protest against Bishop Mynster”), and entry NB14:113 contains biting satire of “His Eminence” and the glaring contrast between the sparkling star of Mynster’s knightly order (which was fastened to his clerical gown) and genuine “marks of derision.” H. L. Martensen is subjected to the same treatment and

) See also the preceding section, “Dating and Chronology.”

1

) See also entries NB14:9, 41, 42, 46, 57, 70, 71, 88, and 118.

2

Critical Account of the Text is referred to as “a handsome court preacher” (entry NB14:53), whose writings, unlike Kierkegaard’s, are not capable of making other writers productive (entry NB14:68), and whose preaching style is cited as a warning on how not to preach (entry NB14:86). The journal also contains Kierkegaard’s continuing se�ling of accounts with M. A. Goldschmidt, who is now accorded the appellation “the goody-goody” (entries NB14:122 and 125). In entries NB14:98 and 115, Kierkegaard defends himself against the accusation of having formed a school, particularly in connection with Rasmus Nielsen, whose writings were in large measure inspired by Kierkegaard. The relationship with Nielsen is the subject of detailed deliberation in a handful of entries (NB14:90, 91, 120, 125, and 149). P. M. Stilling, who was similarly influenced by Kierkegaard, is also discussed (entries NB14:112 and 125). Both Nielsen and Stilling took their point of departure in polemics against H. L. Martensen’s dogmatics, and it is precisely the constellation of Kierkegaard and Martensen that forms the background for a group of entries concerning Kierkegaard’s brother, Peter Christian Kierkegaard, who on October 30, 1849, had delivered a lecture on Kierkegaard and Martensen at the Roskilde Ecclesiastical Convention that was subsequently published in Dansk Kirketidende on December 16, 1849. This lecture gave rise to a number of journal entries, including NB14:81, apparently wri�en in reaction to a visit by Kierkegaard’s brother in early December:1 About Peter. Well, now Peter is going to speak about my writings. How does one react to that? I know very well that he has only read passim in several of the books―you see, that is enough for him. Then he took it upon himself to give a lecture at the convention. But it so happened that the prepared lecture could not be used―then, the evening before, it occurs to him, [“]You could say something about Martensen and Søren and R. Nielsen.[”] So the lecture is given―and then it is printed. If one were to point out to him that it rlly does not demonstrate knowledge of the subject ma�er, he would reply: [“]Yes, good Lord, it was just for a lecture at the convention.[”] But then, why must it be printed? And not only that, but precisely because

) See also the preceding section, “Dating and Chronology.”

1

629

630

J O U R N A L NB 14 it was first delivered orally and then printed, it in fact speciously takes on a sort of higher importance. How sad! In such a li�le country, where I have not yet even been reviewed, everyone exploits my writings as an opportunity to get something said. Thereby my cause is injured rather than advanced. Naturally, it is “not the time or place” to go into all the finer, concrete details with which I depict the matter. People generalize me into twaddling truisms―so I could just as well have refrained from writing. And then the lamentable illusion that it is my brother, “who must of course have the inside story.” Kierkegaard repeatedly concerns himself with “Peter’s Remarks at the Convention” and seems especially annoyed with his brother’s depiction of him as ecstatic and of Martensen as sober-minded (entries NB14:95, 97, 102, 107, 108, and 117).1 The lengthy entry NB14:44 bears the heading “A Further Step in Relation to ‘Her.’” It is one of a group of detailed entries concerning Kierkegaard’s onetime fiancée that have a prominent place in Journals NB12–14, in particular, and that concern the possibility of rapprochement and reconciliation.2 The entry has the form of a ) Kierkegaard’s reaction to the printed version of the lecture can also be seen in an undated le�er to his brother, presumably from December 1849: “Finally, it seems to me that both for your own sake and for my sake, you ought to modify your pronouncements concerning me. If what you have said is to be even approximately correct, it must be said concerning a couple of my pseudonyms. It simply does not apply to me as an author of edifying discourses (my actual writings, published under my own name, which are certainly voluminous enough). I myself have asked in writing that this distinction be observed. It is important to me, and the last thing I would have wished for was that you, of all people, should in any way contribute to lending credence to the carelessness under which I have o�en enough had to suffer” (LD, 337–338; B&A 1, 264–265). In EP VI, 616–617, this le�er is referred to as a dra�; other circumstances make it likely that it was not sent: for one thing, there are no concluding words, and for another, it is not included in Peter Christian Kierkegaard’s overview of his correspondence for 1849, which he put in his diary (National Archives, NKS 2656, 4o, I, p. 153).

1

) See the “Critical Account of the Text of Journal NB12” in the present volume.

2

Critical Account of the Text summing-up of his relationship with Regine Schlegel (née Olsen). The “further step” consisted of Kierkegaard’s having wri�en a letter to her husband in which he enclosed a le�er to her (which, however, was returned unopened). Appended to the entry are a number of lengthy additional notes that also include information on the physical location of various wri�en materials relating to Regine,1 and in the last of these additions, NB14:44.h, Kierkegaard describes his reaction to what has happened: But now the ma�er is rlly decided. And never have I felt so light and happy and free with respect to this ma�er, so entirely myself again, as just now, a�er having taken this sacrificial step; for now I understand that I have God’s consent to let her go and spare myself[.] The journal is also marked by a number of ideas and polemics generally directed toward Kierkegaard’s times and contemporary institutions. This includes his continuing accusation that the times have distorted Christianity (e.g., entry NB14:22); his critiques of priests and of the Danish Church (e.g., entries NB14:25, 64, 110, and 116); of journalists and journalism (e.g., entries NB14:77 on Corsaren and 136); and of the state (e.g., entry NB14:66). There are also reflections on the consequences of having priests who have salaried clerical livings and are officials of the state (e.g., entry NB14:11), as well as deliberations on the merits of having Christianity represented by someone unmarried (entry NB14:127), on the abuse to which Kierkegaard himself has been exposed (e.g., NB14:20), and various reflections on the opposition between “the world” and the true Christian (e.g., entries NB14:47, 59, and 60). Finally, there are a number of entries that select and investigate individual themes. See, for example, entry NB14:17, On Spiritual Trial”; entries NB14:36 and 39 on the relation between possibility and actuality;2 entry NB14:89 on “The Formations of the World,” which takes a historical view of the relation between the individual and the masses, and entry NB14:148, on the proper understand-

) Thus, marginal note NB14:44.b tells of “a book in quarto format: ‘My Relationship to “Her” Aug. 24th 49. somewhat poetical.’” (See Notebook 15 in KJN 3, 427–445, and the accompanying “Critical Account of the Text,” 775–781.)

1

) See also entries NB14:45 and 72.

2

631

632

J O U R N A L NB 14 ing of The Asceticism of Christianity.1 In addition to these are several entries that comment and reflect on specifically philosophical subjects, for example, entry NB14:69 on free will, entry NB14:146 on “the divergence in the newest philosophy,” and the final entry, NB14:150, on the “doctrine of ‘essence’ in logic.”

) See also entry NB14:67.

1

Explanatory Notes 345

1

NB14. … 49.] Variant: label on the outside front cover of the book.

346

1

On publishing … pp. 219 et al.] Variant: wri�en on the inside front cover of the book. p. 10] See NB14:8 in the present volume. p. 41] See NB14:27 in the present volume. p. 14] See NB14:10 in the present volume. p. 16] See NB14:12 in the present volume. p. 27. bo�om] See NB14:19 in the present volume. p. 43] See NB14:28 in the present volume. p. 47] See NB14:31 in the present volume. p. 50] See NB14:34 in the present volume. p. 57] See NB14:41 in the present volume. p. 157] See NB14:101 in the present volume. p. 166] See NB14:107 in the present volume. p. 198] See NB14:132 in the present volume. pp. 219 et al.] See NB14:147 in the present volume.

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13

347

1

Texts for Friday discourses … as are the page numbers] See Kierkegaard’s introductory overview in entry NB13:3, in the present volume, where two entries (NB13:6 and NB13:68) are listed as biblical passages for use in “Friday Discourses”; in this same entry Kierkegaard refers to a similar overview to be found in the preceding journal, i.e., entry NB12:4. ― Texts for Friday discourses: i.e., biblical passages for sermons at the communion services that in Kierkegaard’s day were held on Fridays in Vor Frue Kirke [The Church of Our Lady]. Kierkegaard had himself preached at three communion services in the Church of Our Lady, on June 18, 1847, on the text Mt 11:28; on August 27, 1847, on the text Jn 10:27; and on September 1, 1848, on the text Jn 12:32. Two of the sermons were published as the second and third discourses in the fourth part of Christian Discourses under the title “Discourses at the Communion on

Fridays: Christian Discourses” (CD, 262–274; SKS 10, 277–292), and another in the first exposition in pt. 3 of Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2), (PC, 151–156; SKS 12, 151–160). A saying by Thomas a Kempis … p. 131 in my li�le edition] Cited from bk. 3 (“On Inward Consolation”), chap. 36 (“On the Vain Judgments of Human Beings”), in pt. 2 of Thomas a Kempis, om Christi E�erfølgelse, fire Bøger [Thomas à Kempis, On the Imitation of Christ, Four Books], trans. and newly edited by J.A.L. Holm, 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1848 [1826]; ASKB 273), pp. 130– 131, where it is said with reference to Paul: “He did everything he could to edify and to save others, but he could not prevent being despised and unfairly judged by people. Therefore he surrendered everything to God, who knows everything, and defended himself only by means of patience and humility against the words of those who alleged evil things about him or thought up foolish and mendacious rumors and whatever other despicable things that occurred to them about him. Occasionally he defended himself, so that the weak would not take offense at his silence.” ― Thomas a Kempis: German monk, mystic, author (ca. 1380–1471), ordained a priest in 1414. There is dispute concerning his authorship of the four books of De imitatione Christi [On the Imitation of Christ], which was published anonymously in 1418.

4

347

lover,] Variant: first wri�en “lover.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. Aladdin] Refers to the principal character in Adam Oehlenschläger’s comedy Aladdin, eller Den forunderlige Lampe [Aladdin, or the Wonderful Lamp], in Poetiske Skri�er [Poetic Writings], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1805, ASKB 1597–1598); vol. 2, pp. 75–436. Kierkegaard sketched Aladdin’s

8

348

4

350

634

7

10

350

22 23

351

1 2

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 5–8

spirited preparations for his wedding, his stirring instructions to the genie of the lamp, and his powerful obsession with his beloved Gulnare in “Some Reflections on Marriage in Answer to Objections,” in Stages on Life’s Way (1845), where he writes: “What makes Aladdin great is that his soul has the inner strength to desire” (SLW, 104; SKS 6, 99). The play was performed in its entirety at the Royal Theater on April 17, 1839, and was performed twenty-five times in all from then until November 25, 1842. intent,] Variant: first wri�en “intent.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. the miracle that changes water into wine at a wedding] See Jn 2:1–10. Galatians 2―through the Law I have died to the Law] See Gal 2:19–21. the way in which I usually present the relationship to “the Exemplar”] See, e.g., entries NB:193 and NB2:182 in KJN 4, 115–116 and 212; entries NB6:3, NB10:54, and NB10:198 in KJN 5, 9, 295, and 374; and entries NB12:162, NB12:177, and NB13:88 in the present volume. See also, e.g., Christian Discourses (1848) (CD, 41–45; SKS 10, 52–56). see p. 41] See NB14:27 in the present volume. the writings about my work as an author] In the course of the summer and autumn of 1848, Kierkegaard had wri�en the manuscript of The Point of View for My Work as an Author: A Direct Communication. Report to History, which he himself never published; it was published posthumously by P. C. Kierkegaard in 1859. In March 1849, he wrote a briefer account, On My Work as an Author, which he published under his own name in 1851, together with Two Discourses at the Communion on Fridays. In addition to these there are several pieces that also treat Kierkegaard’s writings: (a) “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Activity as an Author,” consisting of no. 1, “On the Dedication ‘That Single Individual,’” originally wri�en in 1846 (see Pap. IX B 63,4–5, pp. 350–357); no. 2, “A Word Concerning the Relation of My Activity as an Author to ‘That Single Individual,’” originally

1849

wri�en in 1847 (see Pap. IX B 63,6–13, pp. 357– 374)―both of the aforementioned pieces were subsequently published together in The Point of View for My Work as an Author as “‘The Single Individual’: Two ‘Notes’ Concerning My Activity as an Author” (PV, 101–124; SV2 13, 627–653); and no. 3, “Preface to the ‘Friday Discourses,’” originally wri�en in 1847 (see Pap. IX B 63,14, pp. 375–377) and later used as the preface to Two Discourses for the Communion on Fridays (1851); (b) “Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom” (see Pap. X 5 B 106–109, pp. 287–302); and (c) “Everything in One Word” (see Pap. X 5 B 144). are published by] Variant: changed from “are published while living, it could thus be done by”. Mag. K.’s] i.e., Magister Kierkegaard’s; Kierkegaard acquired the degree of magister in philosophy in 1841 with his dissertation On the Concept of Irony. A-O] Possibly an abbreviation of “AlphaOmega.” seems to me that dialectically] Variant: “dialectically” added. corresponding to everything … Journal NB11 or NB12] It is more likely that Kierkegaard had in mind Journal NB11 (which was begun on May 2, 1849, and was concluded no later than July 19, 1849) than Journal NB12 (which was in use from July 19 to September 7, 1849); see, e.g., entries NB11:122, 132, 192, 204, 209, and 233; see also NB12:17 and 196, all in the present volume. the new pseudonym (Anti-Cl.)] i.e., the pseudonym Anti-Climacus, author of The Sickness unto Death (→ 355,11) and subsequently of Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2). The name expresses an opposite or a counterpart to (Johannes) Climacus (→ 420,1). Anticlimacus or Anti-Climacus is mentioned for the first time as a possible pseudonym in entry NB5:8, in KJN 4, 373. accept an official position] i.e., as a priest or teacher (→ 354,30). the interesting] The “interesting” is a category originating in German aesthetic theory (first with Friedrich Schlegel); it became a fashionable word in the early 1840s, serving as a common term for stimulating artistic effects that were regarded not

2 4

5 15 30

35

15 22

352

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 8–12

22 28

353

2

as beautiful, but as fascinating. The “interesting” could thus designate tension, disharmony, something piquant or sensational, etc., but could also designate a refined or reflective style and a stimulating novelty of materials or of their arrangement. In the Danish context, “the interesting” made its entrée with J. L. Heiberg’s review of Adam Oehlenschläger’s tragic drama Dina (1842) in Intelligensblade [Intelligencer], nos. 16–17, November 15, 1842, vol. 2, pp. 73–106. The widespread use of the term is further illuminated in Politievennen [Friend of the Police], nos. 1478–1479, April 26–May 3, 1844, pp. 267–271, and 279–283. See also Fear and Trembling (FT, 83; SKS 4, 173). yawning gulf] Allusion to Lk 16:19–31, esp. v. 26. I have been wealthy] Kierkegaard’s father died in 1838, leaving an estate―inherited by Søren Kierkegaard and his brother Peter Christian― that in 1839 was reckoned at 125,000 rix-dollars (→ 439,33); see F. Brandt and E. Thorkelin, Søren Kierkegaard og pengene [Søren Kierkegaard and Money], 2nd ed. (Copenhagen, 1993 [1935]), p. 67. Kierkegaard’s financial circumstances in the period 1846–1848 can only be determined approximately; he sold the last of his inherited stocks in early March 1847 and the last of his royal bonds in mid-December the same year (see Søren Kierkegaard og pengene, pp. 69–71). Therea�er Kierkegaard had no dividend or interest income from his stocks and bonds and was forced to reduce his capital further. See journal entry NB11:122 and its accompanying explanatory note in the present volume. Luther makes a nice distinction … that is of decisive importance] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Mt 5:20–26, the gospel text for the sixth Sunday after Trinity Sunday, in En christelig Postille sammendragen af Dr. Morten Luthers Kirke- og Huuspostiller [A Christian Book of Sermons Drawn from Dr. Martin Luther’s Church and House Sermons], tr. J. Thisted, 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1828; ASKB 283; abbreviated herea�er as En christelig Postille), vol. 1, pp. 430–437, where Luther writes: “As you know, the fi�h commandment says Thou shalt not kill! Now the Pharisees thought that if they could only control their hands so that they did not kill

1849

635

anyone, they would have fulfilled the commandment.…But Christ tightens the tension on the bow and says: ‘No, my good fellow, it means something else. Yes, if the fi�h commandment said, “Your hands must not kill,” then everyone who did not kill someone with their hands would have fulfilled the commandment. But it says Thou shalt not kill―that is, your heart, your mouth, your five senses, everything you have, everything within you, must never harm your neighbor” (pp. 431–432). like Nicodemus] See Jn 3:1–21. Kierkegaard wrote about Nicodemus at length in Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2; see PC, 246–251; SKS 12, 239–243). that rich young man] See Mt 19:16–22. add an explanation] For example, as in the chapter “The Explanation: That the Author Is and Was a Religious Author” in The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 351,2), (PV, 33–37; SV2 13, 559–563).

25

10

353m

The New Pseudonym Anti-Climacus] → 351,35. the entire literary production called Practice in Christianity] i.e., the three pieces, “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest: For Awakening and Inward Appropriation” (→ 354,9), “Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended in Me: A Biblical Exposition and Christian Definition” (→ 359,36), and “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself: Christian Expositions” (→ 359,39). According to the preface to piece no. 1 in Practice in Christianity, the three pieces that constitute that book are all from 1848; see that preface, which is referred to in nos. 2 and 3 in the book, where Kierkegaard, the editor of the volume, writes, “this piece, stemming from the year 1848” (PC, 7; SKS 12, 15). It seems clear, however, that the first two pieces were wri�en in 1848, whereas the third was probably wri�en in 1849; see journal entry NB12:133 in the present volume. On June 4, 1849, Kierkegaard began to consider publishing them pseudonymously in a single volume as Practice in Christianity; see journal entry NB11:123 in the present volume. The book was published in early September 1850,

1

354

353

26

2

636

9

15

20 26

30

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 12

with Anti-Climacus as author and Kierkegaard as editor. When the work “Come unto Me All You Who Labor etc.” … with the others] The manuscript of Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2), no. 1, bearing the subtitle “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest: For Awakening and Inward Appropriation” (PC, 3–68; SKS 12, 11–80), was completed in the summer of 1848; see entry NB6:64 in KJN 5, 45-47. No title page with the wording Kierkegaard mentions has been preserved. In November 1848, when Kierkegaard considered publishing The Sickness unto Death (→ 355,11) and Armed Neutrality (→ 351,2), plus the three pieces, “Come unto Me, All You Who Labor and are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest,” “Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended in Me” (→ 359,36), and “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself” (→ 359,39) in a single volume titled Fulfillment’s Complete Works or Consummation’s Complete Works, he added the following note in the margin: “The three― [‘]Come unto Me[’]; [‘]Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended[’]; [‘]From On High[’]―would then get a separate title page: A�empt to Introduce Xnty in Xndom; but, at the foot of the title page: [‘]Poetic A�empt―Without Authority[’]”; see entries NB8:15, NB9:56, and NB10:19 in KJN 5, 158, 242, and 275. ― Come unto Me All You Who Labor: See Mt 11:28. journal NB11 or NB12, but most likely NB11] See, e.g., entries NB11:122–124, 150, and 203, plus entry NB12:72, all in the present volume. suffered] Variant: deleted, before “suffered” “constantly”. possibility,] Variant: first wri�en “possibility.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence seek an official appointment] i.e., as a priest or as a teacher at the university or the pastoral seminary. When an ecclesiastical post was declared vacant in Departementstidenden [The Departmental Times], applications for that position had to be sent within six weeks to the bishop of the diocese; he then sent the applications, together with his own remarks, to the cultus minister (i.e., the minister for ecclesiastical and educational affairs),

1849

who then recommended to the king who ought to be appointed to the post. There were about 1,050 clerical positions in the kingdom of Denmark. I called on Madvig and Mynster and met with neither of them] On June 23, 1849, Kierkegaard called on Cultus Minister Madvig, and on June 25, 1849, he called on Bishop Mynster. Both visits were in vain; see entries NB11:193, NB11:204.a.a, and NB13:78, in the present volume. ― Madvig: Johan Nicolai Madvig (1804–1886), Danish philologist; professor at the University of Copenhagen; member of the constitutional convention, 1848– 1849; from November 16, 1848, cultus minister, and as such had decisive influence over ecclesiastical appointments. ― Mynster: Jakob Peter Mynster (1775–1854), Danish pastor, writer and politician, from 1811 permanent curate at the Church of Our Lady in Copenhagen. From 1826 he was court preacher, and from 1828, royal confessor as well as court chaplain and chaplain at Christiansborg Palace Chapel. In 1834, he was appointed bishop of the diocese of Zealand and as such was the primate of the Danish Church and the king’s personal counselor; during the period 1835–1846, he was a member of the Advisory Assembly of Estates in Roskilde, where he was very influential; and in 1848–1849, he was a member of the constitutional assembly. Mynster had a seat in a great many governing organs and was the prime mover behind various key ecclesiastical publications, including the authorized Danish translation of the New Testament that appeared in 1819, the Udkast til en Alterbog og et Kirke-Ritual for Danmark [Dra� for a Service Book and Church Ritual for Denmark] (Copenhagen, 1839), and the authorized Tillæg til den evangelisk-christelige Psalmebog [Supplement to the Evangelical Christian Hymnal] (Copenhagen, 1845). I wrote to the printer … could they have the manuscript] This correspondence between Kierkegaard and the printer has not been preserved. Kierkegaard delivered the manuscript of The Sickness unto Death to the printer on June 29, 1849 (→ 355,11). ― the printer: i.e., Bianco Luno’s Printing House, printer and purveyor to the royal court, where all of Kierkegaard’s books were typeset and bound, with the exception of Two

33

37

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 12–16

40 41

355

11

Minor Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 405,10), which was produced by Louis Klein. At the very moment] Variant: first wri�en “I promised them”. Councillor of State Olsen had died] Refers to Regine’s (→ 373,18) father, Terkild or Terkel Olsen (1784–1849), head of the office of accounting in the government finance department. Terkild Olsen was made “actual councillor of state” in June 1840. In the Danish system of rank and precedence (established by decrees of 1746 and 1808, plus later amendments) there were nine classes, each further subdivided into numerical subclasses. Specific titles and forms of address were assigned to persons in various official positions. An “actual” (as opposed to “titular”) councillor of state was in the third subclass of the third class. See “Titulaturer til Rangspersoner i alfabetisk Orden” [Titles of Persons of Rank, Listed in Alphabetical Order], in C. Bartholin, Almindelig Brev- og Formularbog [Universal Book of Le�ers and Formulae], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1844; ASKB 933), vol. 1, pp. 49–56. The obituary for him in Adresseavisen (abbreviated form of Kjøbenhavns kongelig alene privilegerede Adressecomptoirs E�erretninger [Information from Copenhagen’s Only Royally Licensed Advertising Office]), no. 150, June 29, 1849, reads: “On the night between 25th and 26th of this month, the Lord called away my beloved husband a�er 40 years of marriage, the father of my 6 children, Terkild Olsen, Councillor of State and Knight of the Dannebrog. [signed] Regine Olsen, née Malling.” The Sickness unto Death] The Sickness unto Death: A Christian Psychological Exposition for Edification and Awakening, by Anti-Climacus, edited by S. Kierkegaard, was delivered to Bianco Luno’s Printing House on June 29, 1849; see Erindringsbog for Bianco Luno, 1849 [Memorandum Book for Bianco Luno, 1849] (Archives of Bianco Luno’s Printing House, Aller Press, Copenhagen), “Bestillinger” [Orders], p. 39. The printing was finished on July 27, 1849; and the book was advertised as “published” on July 30, 1849, in Adresseavisen, no. 176.

1849

637

nonsense with Reitzel] It is unclear what Kierkegaard is referring to. In entry NB12:29 in the present volume, Kierkegaard writes of “trouble at the printer’s just then,” and appears to be referring to problems about the actual production (typese�ing) of The Sickness Unto Death at Bianco Luno’s Printing House (→ 354,37). He could, however, also be referring to negotiations with the publisher C. A. Reitzel, either, as is mentioned in the present volume in entry NB11:123 (“today, June 4th, I spoke with Reitzel who said he didn’t dare take on anything new at the press. All in all this fellow has been a frightful nuisance with all his moaning, which is nevertheless probably exaggerated”) or in connection with royalties for the second edition of Either/Or, which was published on May 14, 1849; see Kierkegaard’s le�er to Reitzel in LD, 223–224; B&A 1, 177. In entry NB2:113 (August 3, 1847) Kierkegaard, referring to Reitzel, writes: “I know how careless he is” (KJN 4, 184). Later, in entry NB12:143 from September 1849, in the present volume, Kierkegaard complains about “not even having a publisher who is accommodating, but to be suffocated by his anxieties and hesitations.” ― Reitzel: Carl Andreas Reitzel (1789–1853), Danish publisher and bookseller, founded his own bookshop and publishing house in 1819. From 1847, Reitzel served as Kierkegaard’s preferred publisher, just as earlier―when Kierkegaard had been his own publisher―he had taken quite a few of Kierkegaard’s books on commission for sale in his bookshop.

19

to become sober] See 1 Pet 4:7.

33

355

said to Sarah in the book of Tobit, “Why don’t you marry like the others”] See Tob 3. see Fear and Trembling] Fear and Trembling provides a sketch of Sarah; see FT, 102–104; SKS 4, 191–193. transfigured itself] Variant: changed from “transfigured me”.

20

356

error of the Middle Ages … could please God] Refers to medieval monastic asceticism, including celibacy; see also entry NB11:140 in the present volume.

27

21

24

356

638

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 17–27

357

14

decisively Christian,] Variant: first wri�en “decisively Christian.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence.

358

6

Anti-Cl.] i.e., Anti-Climacus (→ 351,35); variant: added. under it,] Variant: first wri�en “under it.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. my own] Variant: first wri�en “my own name”. poetic communication] Variant: first wri�en “something poetic”. first time] Variant: first wri�en “first time.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. Plato’s philosophy] → 381,17. piece no. 1 … Heavy Laden] → 354,9. that Xt came to the world … You shall] See “The Halt,” sec. 4, “Christianity as the Absolute: Contemporaneity with Christ,” in “Come unto Me All You Who Labor and Are Heavy Laden, and I Will Give You Rest: For Awakening and Inward Appropriation” in Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2) (PC, 62–66; SKS 12, 74–78). not out of human] Variant: “human” added. writing no. 2 (“Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended”)] i.e., the manuscript of “Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended in Me: A Biblical Exposition and Christian Definition,” which was completed in the summer of 1848 and was published as pt. 2 of Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2) (PC, 69–144; SKS 12, 81–148). ― Blessed Is He Who Is Not Offended: See Mt 11:6. writing no. 3 (From On High He Will Draw All to Himself)] i.e., the manuscript of “From On High He Will Draw All to Himself: Christian Expositions,” published as pt. 3 of Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2) (PC, 145–262; SKS 12, 149– 253). ― From On High He Will Draw All to Himself: See Jn 12:32.

15

23 38

359

2

8 20 23

24 36

39

360

20

361

7 8

the abuse I have suffered] → 393,24. for him it is indeed only 7 days] See 2 Pet 3:8. in fear and trembling] See Phil 2:12.

1849

my sins are,] Variant: first wri�en “my sins are.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. God’s majesty:] Variant: first wri�en “God’s majesty.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence.

32

in the first collection of Friday discourses] See the fourth of the seven Friday discourses (→ 347,1) that constitute the last part of Christian Discourses (1848) (CD, 275–281; SKS 10, 293–300): “There is not one person in the entire human race, not one single one, who will have anything to do with him [i.e., Jesus]―and He is the truth! Ah, and if you think that you would never have done this, you would never have laid a hand on him or participated in the mockery―but betray him?―that is something you would have done: you would have fled or you would have shrewdly remained at home, have held yourself aloof, have had your servant let you know what happened” (CD, 279; SKS 10, 299).

22

362

p. 10.] See NB14:8 in the present volume. Writings on My Work as an Author] → 351,2. The category … that the whole thing is my upbringing] See The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 351,2); “Thus all the work as an author concerns becoming a Christian in Christendom. And the expression for the part Governance has played in the writings is this: that the author himself is the one who has been brought up, though with awareness of this from the very beginning” (PV, 90; SV2 13, 616). In “The Accounting” (dated March 1849), which constitutes the first part of On My Activity as an Author (→ 351,2), Kierkegaard writes: “When I speak with myself ‘before God,’ I religiously call all my work as an author my own upbringing and development, though not in the sense as if I had now become perfect or am perfectly finished with respect to needing upbringing and development” (PV, 12; SKS 13, 19). The first idea of publishing … writings about my work as an author] Sometime near the beginning of December 1848, Kierkegaard sketched a plan for a collection of his writings, specifically The Sickness unto Death (→ 355,11), Practice in

1

363

361

34

2 5

7

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 27–28

9 9

12 12

Christianity (→ 354,2), and Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom (→ 351,2), in one volume titled Fulfillment’s Complete Works (see entry NB8:15 in KJN 5, 158). In the course of 1849, he revised this plan, so that the collection would consist of three volumes titled Fulfillment’s Complete Works: The Fruits of the Year 1848, with the following contents (see Pap. X 5 B 143): vol. 1, The Sickness unto Death; vol. 2, Practice in Christianity and Armed Neutrality, or My Position as a Christian Author in Christendom; vol. 3, The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 351,2), “Three ‘Notes’ Concerning My Work as an Author” (→ 351,2), “One Note Concerning My Work as an Author” (see “The Accounting,” published as part of On My Activity as an Author [ → 351,2]), and “Everything in One Word” (→ 351,2). The plan was abandoned a�er the publication of The Sickness unto Death; see entry NB12:27 in the present volume. because the writings] Variant: first wri�en “because the writing”. the writings on my work as an auth. … in Christian Discourses] Inasmuch as the writings on his work as an author―and here Kierkegaard is presumably thinking of The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 351,2)―had been wri�en in 1848, his most recent published work at that time was Christian Discourses, which had appeared on April 25, 1848. Christian Discourses consists of four sections (all of which are actually independent works in themselves), of which the last is “Discourses at the Communion on Fridays,” which Kierkegaard judged to be an appropriate ending for his career as an author; see entries NB11:125, NB12:52, and NB12:133 in the present volume. Thus if the account of Kierkegaard’s work as an author were published together with The Sickness unto Death (→ 355,11) and Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2), it would not have included those works. The new pseudonym, Anti-Cl.] i.e., AntiClimacus (→ 351,35). a new dialectical effort … on “grace”] In Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2), “the pseudonym forces the requirement of being a Christian up to the highest level of ideality”; see “The Editor’s

1849

639

Preface” (→ 367m,11). On December 20, 1850, barely three months a�er the publication of Practice in Christianity, Kierkegaard published An Edifying Discourse, which places emphasis on the forgiveness of sins. “the halt.”] See “The Accounting” in On My Work as an Author (→ 351,2), where Kierkegaard writes the following in a note: “Later [i.e., later than “Discourses for the Communion on Fridays,” the fourth part of Christian Discourses (1848)], however, a new pseudonym, Anti-Climacus, appeared. But the very fact that it is a pseudonym means what the name (Anti-Cl.) also implies: that he is inversely coming to a halt. All the earlier pseudonymity is lower than ‘the edifying author’; the new pseudonym is a higher pseudonymity. But that is how one is ‘halted,” of course: something higher is manifested that simply forces me back within my limits, judging me, judging that my life does not measure up to so lo�y a requirement and that therefore the communication is something poetic” (PV, 6; SKS 13, 12). The principal portion of the pt. 3 of Practice in Christianity (→ 359,39) bears the title “The Halt” (PC, 23–68; SKS 12, 35–80). On Myself] Variant: added. The thought of publishing the entire literary production under my name] i.e., the plan to publish “Fulfillment’s Complete Works,” or, as it was later called, “Fulfillment’s Complete Works: The Fruits of the Year 1848” (→ 363,7) under his own name; see Pap. X 5 B 142 and entry NB13:78 in the present volume. momentarily] Variant: added. impudent scholarship, impudent culture, etc., that wants to go further than Xnty] An allusion to Hegelianism and to the debate following the publication of J. L. Heiberg’s (→ 398,16) introductory essay Om Philosophiens Betydning for den nuværende Tid [On the Significance of Philosophy for the Present Age] (Copenhagen, 1833; ASKB 568), where Heiberg writes: “It is of … no use to conceal or gloss over the truth: we must confess to ourselves that in our time religion is primarily a matter for the uncultivated, whereas for the cultivated world it belongs to the past, to a previous stage”

13

2 3

15 18

364

640

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 28–34

(p. 16). J. P. Mynster (→ 354,33) replied in an article titled “Om den religiøse Overbeviisning” [On Religious Conviction], in Dansk Ugeskri� [Danish Weekly], nos. 76–77 (Copenhagen, 1833), pp. 241–258, and an anonymous critique appeared in Dansk Li�eratur-Tidende [Danish Literature Times] (Copenhagen, 1833), no. 41, pp. 649–660; no. 42, pp. 681–692; and no. 43, pp. 697–704. Heiberg issued a response to these objections in Dansk Li�eratur-Tidende (Copenhagen, 1833), no. 46, pp. 765–780. The debate flared up again in the 1840s, when younger Hegel-inspired theologians attacked the Church, claiming that it was no longer important to people of culture, and Mynster once again defended the Church. Expressions such as “to go further” or “going beyond” were a part of Hegelian vocabulary. 365

1 13

365

27

27 37

366

2

5 11

365m

1

366

18

In another journal] See entry NB13:56 in the present volume. the Apostle Peter’s denial] See Mt 26:69–75. Things are different] Variant: “That is how it is with us ordinary hum. beings” has been deleted before “Things are different”. “the apostle”] i.e., Paul. Socrates] In the first part of his magister dissertation, On the Concept of Irony (see CI, 7–237; SKS 1, 69–278) Kierkegaard had given a detailed treatment of Socrates’ special form of irony. what I experienced … direct communication] See Journal NB6 (NB6:61–62, 65–66, 68–70, 76, 78, and 80–81) in KJN 5, 42–45, 47–49, 49–52, 57–59, 60, and 61–63; see also Journal NB7 (NB7:6, 8, 11, and 13) in KJN 5, 80–81, 81–82, 84, and 85. the piece about my work as an author … my upbringing] → 363,5. Climacus/Anti-Cl.] i.e., Johannes Climacus (→ 420,1) vs. Anti-Climacus (→ 351,35). Naturally it does not … in this way] Variant: this marginal note was begun in the main text column. ― thorn in the flesh: See 2 Cor 12:7–9. The category of my work is to make peop. aware of Christianity] See “The Accounting,” which constitutes the first part of On My Work as an Author (→ 351,2), where Kierkegaard writes:

1849

“‘Without authority’ to make aware of the religious, of Christianity, is the category of all my work as an author, viewed as a whole. That I was ‘without authority’ is something I have from the very first moment emphasized and repeated stereotypically; I prefer to regard myself as a reader of the books, not as their author” (PV, 12; SKS, 19). As he was ignorant] In the conversations recounted in Plato’s dialogues, Socrates o�en alludes to his ignorance; see, e.g., Apology (21a–23b), where he explains that the oracle at Delphi had indeed denied that anyone was wiser than he, for Socrates knew that he knew nothing, unlike the many who imagine that they know something. See Platonis opera quae extant [Surviving Works of Plato], ed. Fr. Ast, 11 vols. (Leipzig, 1819–1832; ASKB 1144–1154), vol. 8 (1825), pp. 108–113; see Plato: The Collected Dialogues, Including the Le�ers, ed. Edith Hamilton and Huntington Cairns (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1961), pp. 7–9. See also, e.g., Theaetetus (149d–150c), Plato: The Collected Dialogues, pp. 845–919.

26

does not say: The] Variant: first wri�en, instead of “The”, “I”.

37

366

In other words] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry.

25

367

This is what has been done in the original preface to Practice in Xnty] Presumably a reference to the four-page preface (see also Pap. X 5 B 68) originally wri�en for the first part of Practice in Christianity (→ 354,9), published as Pap. X 5 B 61. In this unused preface Kierkegaard writes: “As for myself, the editor: to repeat what I have said, I am a poet and a dialectician who believes that he has permission from the truth to take upon himself the responsibility of an editor, but who, as mentioned, by no means believes that he has permission to be a judge and to say, in judgmental fashion, what is said in this book to one single person―and therefore I do not do so―and yet I do indeed have permission to be a judge and to say, in judgmental fashion, what is said in this book to one single person, namely to myself, and therefore I do so” (Pap. X 5 B 61, pp. 273–274).

31

367

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 34–38

33

35 37 3

367m

2

4

6 9

11

a dra� of another one … Practice in Christianity] Presumably a reference to a new preface, twenty-two lines long, to the first part of Practice in Christianity, published as Pap. X 5 B 62. In a note appended to this, Kierkegaard writes: “Perhaps the original preface is be�er a�er all, because it makes the ma�er even more lenient. This is the right thing as long as the ma�er does not become so lenient that I poetically withdraw from it, but rather continue to be someone who is striving” (Pap. X 5 B 63). It is also lenient] → 367,33. I myself acknowledge this in the preface] → 367,31. the awakened] Presumably a reference to the religious or “godly” awakenings, i.e., pietists, oldfashioned Lutherans, and followers of various lay preachers and revivalists; Grundtvigians were also reckoned among such groups. Concerning the Preface to “Practice in Xnty.”] Entry NB14:34 and the related marginal entry NB14:34.b, in the present volume, are part of the process of composition through which Kierkegaard sought to compose one omnibus preface―or perhaps several identical or several different prefaces―to the three parts of Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2), on which he was working at the time. The other dra� materials for prefaces have been published as eighteen entries in Pap. X 5 B 46–50, 59–72. The Arrangement of the Prefaces to Practice in Christianity] → 367m,2. This entry appears to have been important in the formulation of the final result, inasmuch as it is also found wri�en on a loose sheet of paper; see Pap. X 5 B 66. Piece no. 1 retains the original preface] → 367,31. pieces no. 2 and no. 3] Kierkegaard considered le�ing parts no. 2 (→ 359,36) and no. 3 (→ 359,39) of Practice in Christianity share the same preface because these parts do not include “the poetical element” that appears in no. 1 (see Pap. X 5 B 64). Preface … In this work … kept striving. … S. K.] This dra� preface was the model for the definitive version (see Pap. X 5 B 47–48, 49–50, 67, 71, and 72), namely the “Editor’s Preface” to the first part

1849

641

of Practice in Christianity (→ 354,2), to which the reader is referred in the second and third parts: “In this work, stemming from the year 1848, the pseudonym forces the requirement for being a Christian up to the highest level of the ideal. Yet the requirement must be stated, presented, heard; from a Christian point of view there must be no reduction of the requirement, nor ought it be suppressed―instead of making an admission and confession concerning oneself. The requirement ought to be heard, and I understand what is said as spoken to me alone, so that I might learn not only to take refuge in ‘grace,’ but to take refuge in it with respect to the use of ‘grace’” (PC, 7; SKS 12, 15). see 55, middle, in this journal] See entry NB14:38 in the present volume.

16

368m

Xt has told them in advance what was to happen] Jesus tells his disciples in advance of his sufferings, death, and resurrection (see Mt 16:21–23; 17:22–23; 20:17–19), but here the reference is presumably to Peter’s denial (→ 365,13); see Mt 26:31–33. see p. 55 bo�om of page] See entry NB14:39 in the present volume.

26

368

17

368m

matchstick maker] Idiomatic expression for the lowest-paid type of labor.

17

369

The Sickness unto Death] → 355,11. Though perhaps there ought to have been … postscript have been lying in the desk since then] In the preface to The Sickness unto Death, by Anti-Climacus, it is stated: “Everything Christian must be like a physician’s discourse by a sickbed; even if only the physician is clear about this fact, it ought never be forgo�en that it is by a sickbed” (SUD, 15; SKS 11, 227). At a number of points in the book, which deals with a “sickness of the spirit,” Anti-Climacus points in similar fashion to the work of a physician (see SUD, 22, 23–24; SKS, 11, 138, 139–140). Because Kierkegaard, who appears as editor on the title page of the book, did not want to be confused with the pseudonym, he wrote a number of dra� versions of “Remarks by the Editor” (see Pap. X 5 B 15–23), which for vari-

26

369

27

642

37 38

370

6

370m

1

370

13

15

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 38–41

ous reasons (see NB11:217 in the present volume) were never used in The Sickness unto Death. One such dra� reads: “It is true that this book is as if wri�en by a physician. But he who is the physician is someone who is no one; he does not say to one single person, ‘You’ are sick―thus, neither does he say it to me. He merely describes the sickness while also continually defining ‘faith,’ which he himself appears to believe he possesses to an extraordinary degree―thus the source of his name: Anti-Climacus. Whether one feels oneself touched by this is thus le� to the single individual, to the reader” (Pap. X 5 B 23). ― in the desk: Variant: added. the new pseudonym] → 351,35. also noted in the journal … was in press] It has not been possible to determine which journal Kierkegaard has in mind. The Sickness unto Death was delivered to the printer on June 29, 1849, at which time Kierkegaard was writing in the la�er portion of Journal NB11 (see entry NB11:203 in the present volume), where the work is frequently mentioned. Journal NB12 was begun on July 19, 1849 (see entry NB12:27 in the present volume). Anti-Cl.] Anti-Climacus (→ 351,35). see p. 50 in this journal] See entry NB14:34 in the present volume. Possibility and Actuality … came home] Variant: added. ― see p. 52: See entry NB14:36 in the present volume. Thus Councillor of State Olsen regarded it … when he came home] See journal entry NB7:10, where Kierkegaard tells of an encounter with Terkild Olsen (→ 354,41) at Fredensborg on August 26, 1848: “So I went up to Kold’s again, sat down and dined―then a man walked past the window: it was Councillor of State Olsen. He is the only person with whom I can safely dare to be reconciled, for here there is no danger as there would be with the girl. I was to depart shortly, but took just one turn down Skipper Allé, intending to walk it that once and then, if I did not meet him, to give up the a�empt on that occasion. But indeed I do meet him. I go over to him and say: Good day, Councillor of State Olsen. Let us talk together for once. He took off his hat in greeting,

1849

but then he brushed me aside with his hand and said, I do not wish to speak with you. Alas, there were tears in his eyes, and he spoke these words with stifled emotion. Then I walked toward him, but the man began to run so fast that it would have been impossible for me to catch up with him even had I wanted to. I did, however, manage to say this much, and he heard it: Now I hold you responsible for not listening to me. For the time being nothing more can be done” (KJN 5, 83–84). The 10 Lepers] See Lk 17:11–19. Go to the priests and show yourselves to them] See Lk 17:14.

19

Luther’s doctrine of faith] A central point of difference between Luther and the Roman Catholic Church was his emphasis on faith, based on his fundamental belief that a human being is justified by faith alone (Latin, sola fide), i.e., apart from a person’s works, and that a person who has been justified lives by faith alone, a view Luther had found in Paul’s epistle to the Romans, esp. chaps. 3 and 4, as well as Rom 1:17 (“The just shall live by faith”). the truth of the Middle Ages … entering a monastery, etc.] Kierkegaard emphasizes this same theme in entries NB10:54 in KJN 5, 295 and NB12:177 in the present volume. Kierkegaard refers to the widespread emphasis on Christ as Exemplar and the related notion of the “imitation of Christ” in the Middle Ages, especially in monasticism and mysticism. St. Bernard of Clairvaux (12th century), for example, put great emphasis on imitating Christ in poverty, humility, and suffering. Passion mysticism regarded the suffering Christ as the way to perfection, whereas quietistic mysticism asserted both that the soul should imitate Christ’s death on the cross and that the individual should resemble Christ in striving for virtue, especially for the pure love of God. Thomas à Kempis’s four-volume De imitatione Christi (→ 347,4) did much to spread the idea of the imitation of Christ and had a great impact on 15th-century piety. the doctrine of the Exemplar … faith comes first] Kierkegaard earlier touched on the rela-

1

370

31

9

18

371

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 41–44

19

28

29 37

41

372

16

tion between his own use of the doctrine of the Exemplar (→ 350,23) and the way it had been used in the Middle Ages (→ 371,9), and he had discussed the doctrine of Christ as gi� (see below) in journal entries NB10:76 and 165 in KJN 5, 307 and 348, and in journal entry NB12:162 in the present volume. Then faith comes first, Xt as gi�] Allusion to Luther’s distinction between Christ as Exemplar and Christ as gi�, in which greater importance is a�ributed to the la�er. See “Dr. Morten Luther’s Fortale” [Dr. Martin Luther’s Prologue] in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2) vol. 1, pp. xii–xiv: “For this is the foundation and the main part of the Gospel: that before you take hold of Christ as a pa�ern, you accept and confess him as a present and a gi�, whom God has given you as your property.…If in this way you have Christ as the foundation and the principal good of your salvation, then comes the second part: namely, that you also accept him as a pa�ern and sacrifice yourself in service to your neighbor, just as you see that he has sacrificed himself for you. Therefore, simply look at this! Christ, as a gi�, nourishes your faith and makes you a Christian, but Christ, as an Exemplar, performs your works. These [works] do not make you into a Christian, but they are done by you as soon as you have become a Christian. The difference between gi� and Exemplar is the same as the difference between faith and works.…This double good―gi� and Exemplar―we have in Christ.” restitution has been made] i.e., that the crucified and resurrected Jesus Christ has atoned for the sins of humankind. I am saved by faith alone] → 371,1. this was how I previously understood my own position] See, e.g., entry NB12:162 in the present volume. the doctrine of “grace”] i.e., the Lutheran doctrine that a person’s salvation is dependent solely on God’s grace because one cannot justify oneself vis-à-vis God (→ 371,1). The earnestness of youth] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry.

1849

643

atoning for his sin] → 371,28. Human] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry. honest] Variant: first wri�en “St”, the first two le�ers of Stræben, which is the Danish word for “effort.” Luther says, It is not … who does good works] This fundamental principle of Luther’s doctrine is expressed clearly in his Reformation work Tractatus de libertate christiana [Treatise on Christian Liberty] (1520), where he states that faith is the precondition for good works, not the reverse, and thus that good works do not make a good man, but a good man does good works― and by the same token, that bad works do not make a bad man, but a bad man does bad works. all] Variant: added. according to Luther, one becomes a good man through faith] See the above-mentioned Tractatus de libertate christiana (→ 373,2), where this is asserted.

33

the passage … that the crowd is truth] Refers to the first discourse in The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (→ 374m,36), where Kierkegaard writes that “the world lieth in evil” and that the sad fact is “that gold is virtue, that might is right, that the crowd is truth” in “the world” (WA, 118; SKS 11, 254). ― Heb. 4: See Heb 4:15.

12

373

“Her.”] i.e., Regine Schlegel, née Olsen (1822– 1904), daughter of Regina Frederikke and Terkild Olsen (→ 354,41); engaged to Kierkegaard from September 10, 1840, until October 12, 1841 (→ 373m,1); engaged to J. F. Schlegel (→ 373,18) on August 28, 1843, and married to Schlegel on November 3, 1847. I have wri�en … It was Nov. 19th] The surviving versions of le�ers from Kierkegaard to Regine and J. F. Schlegel, wri�en in the autumn of 1849, are published in LD, 322–337, see esp. pp. 334– 336; B&A 1, 253–264, see esp. 262–263. Schlegel’s reply has not been preserved, but Kierkegaard wrote, “Then I received a moralizing and indignant epistle from the esteemed sir and the

18

373

372

39 1

373

2

5 5

19

644

27 28

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 44

le�er to her, unopened” (LD, 335; B&A 1, 263). ― Schlegel: Johan Frederik Schlegel (1817–1896), Danish jurist and civil servant; university student, 1833; law degree, 1838; worked for a time as a private tutor in the Olsen household and developed tender feelings for Regine. He became engaged to Regine Olsen August 28, 1843, and married her on November 3, 1847. In 1842, he started as an intern in the government’s Office of Customs and Commerce, becoming a head clerk there in 1847, and in December 1848 he was named head of the Colonial Office. In 1854, he was appointed governor of the Danish West Indies (since 1917, the United States Virgin Islands), where he was charged with dealing with the consequences of the recent (1848) abolition of slavery. ― in a packet: See the “Critical Account of the Text of Notebook 15” in KJN 3, 775–780. ― her cabinet: See entry Not15:6 (→ 373m,10): “When I was living on Nørregade, on the second floor, I had a cabinet made of Brazilian rosewood. It was made according to my own design, and this in turn was occasioned by words from her, the lovable, in her agony. She said that she would thank me her whole life long if she were permi�ed to remain with me, even if she had to live in a li�le cabinet. Taking this into account, it was built without shelves.―In it, carefully preserved, is found everything that reminds me of her and that might remind her of me. There are also copies for her of [the writings by] the pseudonyms; there were always only two vellum copies printed, one for her and one for me” (KJN 3, 438). A “chest of drawers made of Brazilian rosewood” and a “chest of drawers made of mahogany” were sold at the auction of Kierkegaard’s personal effects in 1856; see Flemming Christian Nielsen, ed., Alt blev godt betalt. Auktionen over Søren Kierkegaards indbo [Everything Fetched a Good Price: The Auction of Søren Kierkegaard’s Personal Effects] (Viborg, 2000), pp. 22–24. See LD, 335; B&A 1, 262: “The le�er was dated November 19, ’49.” ― It was Nov. 19th: Variant: “It was Nov.” added. ― “19th”: Variant: changed from “20th”. her father’s death] → 354,41. have some data supporting this] Possibly a reference to Kierkegaard’s encounter with Regine

1849

in the Church of the Holy Ghost on the Sunday following the death of her father, when, contrary to her own custom, she followed Kierkegaard’s usual practice of leaving the service immediately following the sermon, which caused them to pass by one another; see entry NB12:29 in the present volume. My conflict was a religious one] See, e.g., entry NB12:105 in the present volume and entry Not15:13 (→ 373m,10) in KJN 3, 442–443. deception about being a scoundrel] See entry Not15:4.l (→ 373m,10), where Kierkegaard writes: “To exit from the relationship as a scoundrel, if possible as a first-class scoundrel, was the only thing that could be done in order to get her afloat, to speed her to a marriage; but it was also exquisite gallantry” (KJN 3, 434–435). See also entry Not15:9, where Kierkegaard relates that he had been told that Regine Olsen was angry with him because of the way in which he had broken the engagement, and he adds, “She forgets that she herself said that if I could convince her that I was a scoundrel she could easily come to terms with the entire business. And now she complains about the manner, presumably ‘the scoundrelly manner.’ And incidentally, if that manner had not been employed, we would probably still be in the process of breaking up. To this extent it is right to complain about ‘the manner,’ since in no other manner could I have succeeded” (KJN 3, 439). See also entry Not15:11.a: “In order to help her, I have put up with being seen as a scoundrel in the eyes of everyone else” (KJN 3, 440). her despairing declaration of love and about wanting to die] See entries NB12:105 and 122 in the present volume and entry NB:210 in KJN 4, 123. According to entry Not15:4 (→ 373m,10) in KJN 3, 433, in the piece “‘Guilty?’ / ‘Not Guilty?’” in Stages on Life’s Way, Kierkegaard provides a “strictly historical” account of the break; the relevant passage in Stages reads: “What happens? My God, she has been to my apartment in my absence. I find a note, composed in passionate despair―she cannot live without me, it will be the death of her if I leave her, she beseeches me for God’s sake, for the sake of my salvation, by the

3

4

6

374

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 44

7 9

11 29 38

377

5 7

373m

1

memory of all that binds me, by the holy name” (SLW, 330; SKS 6, 307). her religious entreaties] See entry NB12:138 in the present volume. entries … in journal NB12] See Journal NB12 in the present volume, which contains relatively many “Regine” entries, namely, entries NB12:28.a, 29, 101, 105, 116, 118, 120, 122–123, 126, 138, 150, 191, and 198. So I took action] i.e., by sending a conciliatory le�er (→ 373,19). I turned to him] → 373,18. impossible] Variant: changed from “difficult”. Now the ma�er is decided] Variant: changed from “But the ma�er has been changed quite a bit”. he has spoken as definitively as possible] → 373,18. Because I have never known the date … a�er my death] Kierkegaard’s a�empt to determine the date on which the engagement with Regine was broken took place in connection with a le�er he sent her (→ 373,19). On a scrap of paper that has been published in Le�ers and Documents (LD, 336; B&A 1, 264), Kierkegaard wrote: “I do not know the date on which I broke the engagement, but on this piece of paper, which is from Nov. 49, I noted the most relevant details I remember, the dates of which I have discovered by reading Fædrelandet [The Fatherland] from that period.” Kierkegaard remembers, “The day it happened, Den hvide Dame [The White Lady―a popular singspiel with libre�o by A. E. Scribe and music by F. A. Boieldieu] was performed at the theater in the evening.” This led Kierkegaard to two possible dates, October 11 or 18, 1841. Two factors testify against the la�er date: first, in a couple of le�ers dated November and December 1841, Kierkegaard himself writes that he remained in Copenhagen for fourteen days a�er the break, departing for Berlin on October 25 (see LD, 96 and 103; B&A 1, 76 and 81); and second, at the end of October 1841, Peter Christian Kierkegaard (→ 396,23) wrote in his diary: “October: On the 10th(?), a�er a long period of struggle and dejection, Sören broke off his connection with Miss Olsen (Regina) … On the 25th [of October] Sören traveled to Berlin, seen off by Em. Boesen

1849

645

and myself” (Bruce H. Kirmmse, Encounters with Kierkegaard [Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1996], p. 144). Kierkegaard had his information for the performance dates of Den hvide Dame from Fædrelandet, no. 665, October 9, 1841, col. 5339, where it is stated, “The day a�er tomorrow, Monday, October 11th, the Royal Theater, Den hvide Dame,” and from the same newspaper, no. 672, October 16, 1841, col. 5395, “The day after tomorrow, Monday October 18th, the Royal Theater, Den hvide Dame.” The performance slated for October 11 was cancelled, however, and a red theater placard stated: “NB: The advertised singspiel Den hvide Dame cannot be presented owing to the indisposition of Mr. Sahlertz.” But the tenor L. F. Sahlertz had recovered by the following day, and the piece was put on the program for October 12, 1841, which all evidence thus suggests was the day on which Kierkegaard in fact broke off his engagement with Regine Olsen. ― the older packet … a�er my death → 373m,13. a book in quarto format … somewhat poetical] Refers to Notebook 15, which bears the heading “My relationship to ‘her.’ Aug. 24th 49. somewhat poetical.” See KJN 3, 427–445, where Kierkegaard gives a retrospective description of his relationship to Regine. a li�le packet … an earlier and similar view of my relationship to her] This material, which had not been stored together with the le�ers and Notebook 15, has not been preserved; see the “Critical Account of the Text of Notebook 15” in SKS 3, 775–780, esp. 775n. ― my desk → 369,27. concerning whom there are also a number of entries in the journals from last year (48)] Kierkegaard kept five journals in the course of 1848, namely Journals NB4–NB8. In Journal NB4 there are only two mentions of Regine (see entries NB4:119 and 152.a in KJN 4, 346–347 and 357). In Journal NB5 there are more entries of this sort (see entries NB5:16, 63, 64, 104, and 126–127 in KJN 4, 377, 399, 400, 415, and 422–423). Journal NB6 contains a single reference to Regine (see entry NB6:66 in KJN 5, 48–49). Journal NB7 contains two such references (see entries NB7:10 and 20 in KJN 5, 83–84 and 90–91). In Journal NB8 there are two references (see entries NB8:33 and 76 in KJN 5, 165–166 and 184).

13

10

13

19

646

21

22

374m

1 6

12

19 24 32 36

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 44–46

and this year (49)] Refers to Journals NB9–13, and possibly also to Notebook 15 (→ 373m,10). Journal NB9 does not contain much about Regine (but see entries NB9:23–24 in KJN 5, 218–219), though Journal NB10 contains somewhat more such material (see entries NB10:82, 121, 179, 185, and 199 in KJN 5, 309–310, 329, 359–360, 362–363, and 375– 377). Two such entries can be found in Journal NB11 (see entries NB11:183 and 192 in the present volume), a great many in Journal NB12 (→ 374,9), and only two in Journal NB13 (see entries NB13:16 and 36 in the present volume). probably in the older ones as well] Notebook 8 (1841), in KJN 3, 217–240, is filled with reflections on the break with Regine; a series of entries from 1843–1844 in Journal JJ also contains reflections of this sort (see entries JJ:107, 115, 145, and 279 in KJN 2, 161, 173–174, and 209); Journal NB from 1846–1847 has three such entries (see entries NB:16, 24, and 210 in KJN 4, 25, 29, and 123); and Journal NB3 from 1847 has several (see entries NB3:20.d and 43–44, in KJN 4, 256 and 268). A copy of my le�er … in one of the two small desk drawers] → 373,19. the Councillor of State’s death … from the beginning] Refers to Kierkegaard’s plan for the omnibus publication (→ 363,7), under his own name, of The Sickness unto Death, Practice in Christianity, and the writings about his work as an author, in which he asserts that his writings were religious from the beginning. He had abandoned the plan and begun the process of publishing The Sickness unto Death pseudonymously when he suddenly received news of Terkel Olsen’s death (→ 354,41). See a scrap of paper lying in journal NB13 … essentially relate to “her.”] Refers to the dedication to Regine Schlegel, published as entry NB13:4 in the present volume. her marriage … to Schlegel] → 373,18. her misuse of religious entreaties] → 374,7. she got engaged so soon therea�er] → 373,18. simultaneously with the Three Discourses … Two Edifying Discourses from 1843] Refers to Kierkegaard’s work, The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays, which was published on November 14, 1849 (WA, 108–144;

1849

SKS 11, 243–280). The preface of this work was constructed around a number of passages that had appeared in the preface to Two Edifying Discourses from 1843 (EUD, 5; SKS 5, 13), to which explicit reference is made (SKS 11, 247). That Kierkegaard had Regine in mind in writing the preface to the first collection of edifying discourses can be seen, e.g., in entry NB10:185: “I am polemical by nature, and I had understood the concept of [‘]the individual[’] from very early on. Nevertheless, when I wrote about it for the first time (in the two edif. Discourses), I was thinking in particular about this: my reader; for this book contained a li�le hint to her and, at the same time, it was an especially deep personal truth that I only sought one single reader. This idea had gradually taken over. But here again, the role of Governance is infinite” (KJN 5, 262 –263). See also Notebook 15 (→ 373m,10), where Kierkegaard writes, “The preface to the Two Edifying Discourses was intended for her, as was much else, the book’s date, the dedication to Father” (KJN 3, 436). a book I know she read at the time] F. C. Sibbern had communicated this to Kierkegaard; see entry NB25:109 in KJN 8). And never] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry. her last request: “to think of her now and then,”] In entry Not15:4 (→ 373m,10), Kierkegaard sketches his final conversation with Regine: “Then she said: Forgive me for what I have done to you. I replied: It is really I who ought to ask for that. She said: Promise to think of me. I did so. She said: Kiss me. I did so―but without passion. Merciful God” (KJN 3, 434). Luther makes a good distinction … what we ought to do] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Lk 7:11–17, the gospel text for the sixteenth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 1, p. 533: “And so it is the task of the Gospel to teach you not what you ought to do, but where you are to find the strength to do what you ought to do.” ― the son of the widow of Nain: See Lk 7:11–17. the doctrine of the Exemplar] → 350,23 and → 371,18.

44

17

377m

25

16

20

377

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 46–53

31

33

378

15

21 23

379

379

6

15

Give me time, give me time] Perhaps an allusion to B. S. Ingemann’s poem “Giv Tid” [Give Me Time], set in frozen winter, in which a li�le bird hums, “Give me time! Give me time!” and in which awaiting “the hour of the Lord” in this manner will be rewarded with God’s “kingdom of beauty.” The poem was published in HuldreGaverne eller Ole Navnløses Levnets-Eventyr fortalt af ham selv [Gi�s of the Wood Sprites, or the Fairy Tale of the Life of Ole Nameless, Told by Himself] (Copenhagen, 1831), pp. 213–214. this is why temporality is called the time of grace] See, e.g., H. A. Brorson’s hymn “Idag er Naadens Tid” [Today Is the Time of Grace] from 1735, published in his Troens rare Klenodie, i nogle aandelige Sange fremstillet af Hans Adolph Brorson [Faith’s Rare Treasure, Presented in Some Spiritual Songs by Hans Adolph Brorson], ed. L. C. Hagen (Copenhagen, 1834; ASKB 199), pp. 148–151, 193–194. In Stages on Life’s Way (1845), Kierkegaard writes: “People emphasize the importance of temporality, its ethical importance; people call it the time of grace, the place of conversion, the due date for the decision that decides for eternity” (SLW, 173; SKS 6, 161; see also EUD, 7; SKS 5, 17, and CD, 268; SKS 10, 287). already decided,] Variant: first wri�en “already decided.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. mother] Variant: added. or when one is God in Heaven] Variant: added. Baader’s Fermenta … Aus der Welt Koth!] Refers to Baader’s Fermenta Cognitionis [Cognition’s Fermentations], 5 vols. (Berlin, 1822–1824; ASKB 394), vol. 5, p. 54, where the poem is cited with no indication of source. ― Baader: (Benedikt) Franz (Xaver) von Baader, 1765–1841, German Roman Catholic physician, civil servant, author of books on philosophy and theology; from 1826, honorary professor of philosophy and speculative theology at the University of Munich. Kierkegaard owned many of Baader’s writings (see ASKB 391–418). to recall a saying of Baader] Refers to Baader’s Fermenta Cognitionis (→ 379,6), vol. 2 (1823), pp. 16–17, where it is stated that “what they [the

1849

647

gods] give us out of ‘grace’ is only an ‘advance payment.’” the thief on the cross] See Lk 23:39–43.

20

grace is free] Free rendering of the classic theological expression gratia gratis data (Latin, “the grace that is given for nothing”), which alludes to Rom 3:24.

24

379

Hamann … “Law” annuls “grace,” … “to believe.”] Refers to a le�er from Hamann to Lavater (→ 432,19) (1778), published in Hamann’s Schri�en [Hamann’s Writings], ed. Fr. Roth and G. A. Wiener, 7 vols. (Berlin, 1821–1825; vol. 8 [index volume in two parts], Berlin, 1842–1843; ASKB 536–544); vol. 5 (1824 [containing le�ers from 1770 to 1777]), p. 277: “certainty annuls faith as Law annuls grace.” ― Hamann: Johann Georg Hamann (1730–1788), German author and antirationalist philosopher, known for his distinctive style. He carried on a wide-ranging correspondence with his contemporaries, including Herder, Jacobi, and Lavater. This is my thesis, of course] At many points in his pseudonymous works Kierkegaard wrote in opposition to the Hegelian notion of faith as an immediacy that was to be explained by speculative knowing, for, according to Kierkegaard, faith cannot be understood. to comprehend that one must not comprehend faith] See, e.g., the first essay, chap. A, no. 7, in Two Minor Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 405,10) (WA, 65–66; SKS 11, 70–71).

3

380

If God is with us, who can be against us] See Rom 8:31. in genuine Lutheran fashion … the whole world can accomplish nothing against us] See, e.g., Luther’s sermon for the Sunday a�er New Year’s Day or for the first Sunday a�er Epiphany in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 2, pp. 94, 101–102. the apostle] i.e., Paul (→ 347,4). The one who is in us is stronger than the one who is in the world] Adapted from 1 Jn 4:4.

12

In the magnificent palace church … and cultured] Refers to Christiansborg Palace Church,

24

5

7

380

13

18 21

380

648

26

28

380

32

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 53–56

situated on Slotsholmen, opposite Højbro Plads (see map 2, B2); it was designed by court architect C. F. Hansen and dedicated in 1826; it served both as a church for the royal court and as a parish church with public access to communion services and vespers. In his memoirs Martensen wrote: “The church was always full as, thank God, it has remained to this day, and among the listeners were both men and women who were among the noblest and most cultured people in the capital. Thus among my listeners were Mynster and A. S. Ørsted,” H. L. Martensen, Af mit Levnet [From My Life], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1882–1883), vol. 2 (1883), p. 86. ― court preacher: Pastor to the court; pastor who preaches at Christiansborg Palace Church. H. L. Martensen had been a court preacher since 1845. J. H. Paulli, Mynster’s sonin-law, had been a court preacher since 1840. J. P. Mynster (→ 354,33) had been a court preacher in the period 1828–1835; he had also preached for the court at the Palace Church in his capacity as royal confessor, since 1828, and as bishop, since 1834. Here Kierkegaard is referring to Martensen; see below. preaches movingly on the words … God chose the lowly and the despised] Refers to a sermon by H. L. Martensen (→ 382,12) on 1 Cor 1:26– 31. See Martensen’s Prædikener. Anden Samling [Sermons: Second Collection] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 227), pp. 65–80; the epistle text cited is not among those assigned for Sundays or holy days of the Church year, and it is not known when in 1848 Martensen delivered this sermon, which Kierkegaard presumably heard. and no one laughs] Presumably an allusion to an unidentified anecdote; see Stages on Life’s Way (1845): “But no one laughs at love―for I am prepared to be placed in the same embarrassing situation as the Jew who, having finished his tale, said, Is there no one who laughs?” (SLW, 37; SKS 6, 41). See also SLW, 47; SKS 6, 49. Goldschmidt] Meïr Aron Goldschmidt (1819– 1887), Danish Jewish journalist and publicist, author of works including En Jøde. Novelle [A Jew: Novella] (by the pseudonym Adolph Meyer, edited and published by M. Goldschmidt)

1849

(Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB 1547). Goldschmidt founded Corsaren [The Corsair] (→ 393,24) in October 1840 and was the journal’s actual editor until October 1846, when he sold it and embarked on a yearlong journey abroad; starting in December 1847, he published the monthly journal Nord og Syd [North and South]. journal for domestic devotions, Christian anthologies, and the like] There were journals that had titles of this sort, e.g., For huuslig Andagt. Et Ugeskrivt [For Domestic Devotions: A Weekly], ed. C. H. Visby (Copenhagen, 1838–1841; ASKB 370– 371) and Christelig Samler. Tidsskri� til opbyggelig Underholdning for Christne af alle Stænder [Christian Miscellany: Journal of Edifying Entertainment for Christians of All Classes] (Copenhagen, 1838– 1854). that temperance priest … for the society] No source for this has been identified. In an undated entry on a loose piece of paper (Pap. VII 1 A 233), Kierkegaard develops the passage into lines that could be used in an opere�a. What Socrates … diverted them from doing so] In the second and third books of Plato’s Republic (376d–398b) there is a discussion of proper upbringing, and poetry is a�acked for its lack of morality; the critique of poetry is taken up again in the tenth book (595a–608b), where the conclusion is that poets are not welcome in the ideal state, both because they do not present the real truth and because they appeal more to feelings than to reason. compared to Socrates, Plato himself was already a misunderstanding] Refers to the assumption that in his early dialogues Plato wanted to reproduce the historical Socrates, which accounts for the vigorous conversations that o�en end without any result. In his later dialogues, on the other hand, Plato was unable to resist the temptation to reduce Socrates to a spokesman for his own philosophical teachings. Kierkegaard discussed the complex relation between Socrates and Plato in On the Concept of Irony (1841); see esp. CI, 27–128; SKS 1, 89–179.

33

6

381

10

381

17

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 56–59 381

27

27

28 30 34

382

2

2

5 11

application] i.e., the part of the sermon in which the explicated biblical text is construed, made actual, and its practical implications emphasized. that You are the one being addressed] In entry NB3:61 (1847), in KJN 4, 274–275, Kierkegaard notes his discovery that in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 1, pp. 16–17, Luther, too, emphasizes an element of “for you” in the appropriation of faith. The awakening of the son of the widow of Nain] See Lk 7:11–17. Xt certainly did not walk … I say to you, arise] See Lk 7:14. Luther says in his sermon … say it to you] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Lk 7:11–17, the gospel text for the sixteenth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 1, pp. 524–534. Here Luther points out that there are two ways of preaching: “the one only touches upon the bier and does not clarify the ma�er. The other lets his voice fall upon the heart, and in so doing the work is brought to completion. The former proclaims to us Christ’s deeds, how they were done for us and given to us for our blessedness. But when the voice is heard in the heart, then he who had recently been dead begins to speak, confessing with his mouth the faith he feels and nourishes in his heart. Thus, when the heart believes, works of love follow―then you speak, then you preach for others, then you thank God for the good deed and the faith he has shown and communicated to you” (p. 534). As I have always said] See, e.g., the section titled “A Glance at a Contemporary Effort in Danish Literature” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846) (CUP, 251–300; SKS 7, 228–273), where Kierkegaard (as Johannes Climacus) provides an overview of his earlier works. and as Anti-Climacus has especially emphasized] i.e., in The Sickness unto Death (→ 355,11). ― Anti-Climacus: → 351,35. This is about me] → 381,27. Xt loves me as does a bridegroom] This theme is developed in Luther’s sermon for the twentieth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 1, pp. 560–561.

1849

649

H. Martensen] Hans Lassen Martensen (1808– 1884), Danish theologian and pastor; theology graduate, 1832; a�er a journey abroad in 1834–1836, Martensen became a privatdocent and university tutor whose students included Kierkegaard; he acquired the degree of licentiate in theology in 1837; lecturer at the University of Copenhagen, 1838; extraordinary professor of theology at the University of Copenhagen, 1840; honorary doctorate from the University of Kiel, 1840; member of the Royal Scientific Society, 1841; ordinary professor at the University of Copenhagen, 1850; appointed court preacher on May 16, 1845; knight of the Dannebrog, 1847. Earlier in the year (July 19, 1849), Martensen had published his major work, Den christelige Dogmatik [Christian Dogmatics], (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 653). J. P. Mynster] → 354,33. consisting, as they say, of millions and millions] See the development of this theme in pt. 1, chap. 1, §3 of Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846) (CUP, 46–49; SKS 7, 52–54). Luther … everything comes to a halt] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Mt 22:1–14, the gospel text for the twentieth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 1, pp. 560–571: “Reason certainly sees and comprehends what a delightful and cheerful metaphor a wedding and a bride’s love can be in and of itself; it certainly must also admit that Christ is a handsome, noble, and faithful bridegroom, and that his Church is a splendid, blessed bride. But when each person is to believe that he, too, belongs to Christ as a member of this body, and that Christ has such a heartfelt love for him―then everything comes to a halt. This is because I see no glory in myself, but on the contrary, see and feel much wretchedness and unworthiness, sheer sadness and melancholia, death and the grave and the worms that are to consume me” (p. 564). ― the king who prepares his son’s wedding banquet: See Mt 22:1–14. almost insanely … abolishes Xnty] → 364,18.

12

Let’s strike him … turns the le� one toward us] Allusion to Mt 5:39.

23

13 17

26

38

383

650

32

32 33 33

384

8

10

384

25

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 59–63

quiet ones] An allusion to “the quiet ones among the people,” an idiomatic expression for those who lead a quiet, withdrawn life; this was applied to various pietistic groups, including members of the Herrnhut movement; see Ps 35:20. “a spectacle unto the world.”] See 1 Cor 4:9. And now] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry. Christendom … Lama worshipers, etc., etc.] Presumably an allusion to the freedom of religion codified in the Danish constitution of June 5, 1849, § 81: “Citizens have the right to form societies for the worship of God in a manner consistent with their convictions, provided, however, that nothing be taught or done that is inconsistent with morality or public order.” I exposed myself to the vulgarity of the mob] Refers to Kierkegaard’s challenge that the satirical weekly Corsaren abuse him, which led to his being harassed on the street (→ 393,24). at that very moment … an edifying work] Possibly a reference to Johann Arndt, Fire Bøger om den sande Christendom. Paa ny oversa�e e�er den ved Sintenis foranstaltede tydske Udgave [Four Books on True Christianity: Newly Translated from Sintenis’s German Edition] (Kristiania [Oslo], 1829 [German, 1610]; ASKB 277). Kierkegaard refers to the work in journal entry JJ:451 (1846), in KJN 2, 268. in Pythagorean instruction, to begin with silence] Presumably a reference to the practice attributed to the Greek mathematician and philosopher, Pythagoras (ca. 570–497 �.�.), in accordance with which his students were to acquire wisdom in silence. See bk. 8, chap. 10 of Diogen Laërtses filosofiske Historie, eller: navnkundige Filosofers Levnet, Meninger og sindrige Udsagn, i ti Bøger [Diogenes Laertius’s Philosophical History, or the Lives, Opinions, and Clever Sayings of Eminent Philosophers, in Ten Books], trans. B. Riisbrigh, ed. B. Thorlacius, 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1812; ASKB 1110–1111), vol. 1, p. 368: “For five whole years they had to keep silence, merely listening to his discourses without seeing him.” English translation from Diogenes Laertius, Lives of the Eminent

1849

Philosophers, trans. R. D. Hicks, 2 vols., Loeb Classical Library (London: William Heinemann, 1925), vol. 2, p. 329. Xt … visited tax collectors and notorious sinners] In the three synoptic Gospels there are a number of reports of Jesus’s visiting tax collectors and sinners, both of which groups were despised. Goethe, and Mynster] Goethe’s harmony-seeking humanism, which venerated cultivation and competence and which above all was to be in the service of life, had a profound impact on Danish intellectual life, not least on J. L. Heiberg (→ 398,16), H. L. Martensen (→ 382,12), and J. P. Mynster (see, e.g., the concluding appeal to Goethe’s authority in Mynster’s “Kirkelig Polemik” [Ecclesiastical Polemics], published in J. L. Heiberg’s Intelligensblade, nos. 41–42, January 1, 1844, pp. 97–114; esp. p. 114). Critiques of this “refined,” self-indulgent view of life, which keeps life’s sufferings at arm’s length, were a recurrent theme in Kierkegaard. See, e.g., journal entry NB5:37, where he says of Mynster, “What is great about him is a personal virtuosity à la Goethe. Therefore he also keeps a certain dignity about him. But rlly his life doesn’t express anything” (KJN 4, 385), and entry NB10:28: “Take Martensen. He’s an example of this Mynster-Goethe-like position of making one’s contemporaries the final authority, but on an even lower plane” (KJN 5, 281–282). See also the presentation of Mynster in pt. 15 of Dansk Pantheon, et Portraitgallerie for Samtiden [Danish Pantheon: A Portrait Gallery for the Present Day] (Copenhagen, 1844), where the anonymous author (actually, P. L. Møller) emphasizes the “irenic” and “harmonizing” tendencies in Mynster’s personality, which is also described as possessing an “unusual worldly wisdom” and a “great talent for se�ing things straight in the established order”: a temperament such as Mynster’s “necessarily [puts one in mind of] Goethe.” ― Mynster: → 354,33.

34

384

7

385

Bishop Mynster] → 354,33. lieth in wickedness] Allusion to 1 Jn 5:19. His Right Reverence’s sermons] Kierkegaard owned a number of collections of sermons by

27

385

36 2

386

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 63

10

Mynster: Prædikener [Sermons], 3 vols., 3rd ed. (Copenhagen, 1826 [1810]; vol. 2, 2nd ed. [Copenhagen, 1832 (1815)]; ASKB 228 and 2192); Prædikener paa alle Søn- og Hellig-Dage i Aaret [Sermons for Every Sunday and Holy Day of the Year], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1823 [3rd ed., Copenhagen, 1837; ASKB 229–230 and 2191]); Prædikener holdte i Kirkeaaret 1846–47 [Sermons Held in the Church Year 1846–1847] (Copenhagen, 1847; ASKB 231); and Prædikener holdte i Aaret 1848 [Sermons Held in the Year 1848] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 232). Over the years, Kierkegaard had o�en heard Mynster preach, and according to a later journal entry, Kierkegaard always went to hear Mynster when he preached in Copenhagen; see journal entry NB28:56 in KJN 9. ― His Right Reverence: The official Danish order of rank and precedence was published annually in the Kongelig Dansk Hof- og Stats- Calender [Royal Danish Court and Government Almanac] and the Veiviser eller Anviisning til Kiøbenhavns, Christianshavns, Forstædernes og Frederiksbergs Beboere [City Directory, or Information on the Residents of Copenhagen, Christianshavn, the Suburbs, and Frederiksberg], in which all persons of rank were listed with the proper forms of address. See also “Titulaturer til Rangspersoner i alfabetisk Orden” (→ 354,41), vol. 1, pp. 49–56. “Reverend” was used in addressing a pastor or another clerical person who was of lower rank or without rank, while those holding positions of authority in the Church, who were classed in ranks 2 through 6, e.g., bishops, court preachers, doctors of theology, were to be addressed as “the right Reverend.” From 1847, Bishop Mynster’s official title was elevated to that of “Eminence” (→ 417,15). How o�en has His Right Reverence … sacrifice his life, his blood, everything] Refers, among other things, to “Den Trang i Menneskets Hierte, som Christus alene tilfredsstiller. Paa anden Juledag” [The Need in the Human Heart That Christ Alone Fulfills: On the Day a�er Christmas], delivered at the Palace Church on December 26, 1848, and printed in Prædikener holdte i Aaret 1848, pp. 150–163. The sermon concludes as follows: “Perhaps we will be confronted with difficult

1849

651

times of apostasy, but even if all abandon you, Lord, I will remain with you! And I know that you will remain with me. But these who so willingly hear the Word, they indeed will not abandon you in the hour of temptation. Yes, I have the hope that this entire people will not let go of the gospel―which it has preserved until now as its honor among the nations―but that from generation to generation this will be heard as a joy to the people of the country: Unto you a Savior is born! Amen.” See also journal entry NB8:105 in KJN 5, 196. worldly glory] Variant: “worldly” added. celebrated in social circles … courtiers, and diplomats] Mynster, the fashionable priest of the age, enjoyed great esteem, especially in cultured circles. to suffer] Variant: added. when it was a ma�er of … consecrate Bishop Monrad] A�er having been a priest for only a couple of years, D. G. Monrad, a leading National Liberal politician, became cultus minister (i.e., minister for Church and educational affairs) in the so-called March Ministry of 1848, which was formed a�er popular unrest and the beginnings of the war over Schleswig. As cultus minister, Monrad was thus Mynster’s (→ 354,33) superior, which caused some indignation in ecclesiastical circles (see entry NB4:129 in KJN 4, 349–350). Monrad did not long remain in his ministerial post, however, and when the so-called November Ministry was formed later that year, he was furloughed. Prime Minister A. W. Moltke had promised him an appropriate post if he lost his position as minister, and to the surprise of many he was appointed bishop of Lolland-Falster on February 13, 1849. There was a great deal of criticism of this in the press and in ecclesiastical circles. Flyve-Posten [The Flying Post], no. 43, February 20, 1849, predicted that the appointment would arouse “no li�le notice,” because the needs of the ex-minister had been a�ended to “in more than proper fashion”; the jump from “country priest” to bishop was “unheard of,” and it was “obvious” that Monrad “possessed no other qualification for this office than that he had been a minister.” A month later, in a lengthy, critical

17 17

20 20

652

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 63

article, the same newspaper (in no. 64, March 16, 1849) asked: “From now on, will it be from among the editors of daily newspapers, from among the speakers at public meetings, that we will chose the personalities into whose hands the people’s most important spiritual affairs will be entrusted, into whose care the Danish Church is to be entrusted in such turbulent times as the present?” A similar critique could be found in Kjøbenhavnsposten [The Copenhagen Post], which did not think much of the clergy in any case: “In all likelihood this appointment will cause great bi�erness among the clergy, inasmuch as Mr. M. [Monrad] will not appear to be in possession of any of the properties that presumably qualify one for an episcopal post.” The most passionate indignation was that expressed by the Grundtvigian priest P. A. Fenger, who published a piece titled “Mag. Monrads Udnævnelse til Biskop” [Mag. Monrad’s Appointment as Bishop], in Dansk Kirketidende [Danish Church Times], vol. 4, no. 24. col. 393, March 11, 1849, in which he voiced the complaint: “Alas, in what an oppressed, indeed, degraded condition must the Church be among us when it has come to the point that its highest office becomes a sort of retirement home or is awarded as payment to a retiring servant of the state?! A country priest appears to be capable of participating in political negotiations, and a�er having been a priest for 1½ years, he gets a seat in the ministry. He holds this post for ½ a year, he resigns, and―is placed on an episcopal throne!” Despite protests, Monrad and another candidate were consecrated as bishops in the Church of Our Lady on April 9, 1849 (the day a�er Easter), by Bishop Mynster, who spoke on the text Judges 1–3, and as a program for the occasion published a booklet containing his essay Om Hukommelsen [On Memory] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 692), to which were appended autobiographies of the two new bishops. The church was filled with a congregation that included cabinet ministers and high-level officials (Berlingske Tidende [Berling’s Times], no. 85, April 10, 1849). According to Kierkegaard’s onetime amanuensis, Israel Levin, Kierkegaard did not like Monrad; see Kirmmse, Encounters with Kierkegaard (→ 373m,1), p. 210.

1849

― doing his best: Variant, added. ― Bishop Monrad: Ditlev Gothard Monrad (1811–1887), cand. theol. 1836; magister 1838; a�er his return from a journey abroad in 1839 he embarked on a political career that made him one of the leading figures in the National Liberal movement; edited Flyvende politiske Blade [Political Flysheets] (1839– 1842); was coeditor of Fædrelandet (1841–1842); and editor of Dansk Folkeblad [Danish People’s Paper] (1843–1846). From 1846 to 1848, he was a priest in Vester Ulslev on the island of Lolland; in 1848 he was cultus minister; and he served as bishop from 1849 to 1886. If this] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry. long life that has coincided with world revolutions] Mynster, who was born in 1775, had “coincided” with the French Revolution of 1789, the Terror of 1792–1794, and the European wars that followed the French Revolution and lasted until 1815. He had experienced Denmark’s involvement in these wars, including the Ba�le of Copenhagen Roads in 1801, the bombardment of Copenhagen in 1807, the state bankruptcy of 1813, the loss of Norway in 1814, and the Congress of Vienna in 1814–1815. He had also “coincided” with the revolution of July 1830 in Paris (and other places, e.g., Belgium), and finally the Revolution of 1848 in France (the February Revolution) as well as the subsequent revolutions in Berlin and other European capitals, including Copenhagen. “episcopal concern” … one single, poor theology graduate] It has not been possible to determine the specific case to which this refers. It could be directed at Mynster’s stony rejection of the theologian Andreas Frederik Beck (1816–1861), who in 1842 had published two essays in which he made it clear he was a Le� Hegelian and who had wri�en a newspaper article in which he aimed a direct, disrespectful assault at Mynster (see explanatory note in SKS K7, 144), the result of which was that Mynster had him barred from posts both at the university and in the Church. Beck admi�ed that he had sacrificed the prospect of making a living for the sake of his convictions and published the relevant documents in Theologiske Tilstande i Danmark i Aarene 1842–46

23 4

11

386m

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 63–68 [The Theological State of Affairs in Denmark in the Years 1842–1846] (Copenhagen, 1847). This book a�racted some a�ention in the newspapers; see Fædrelandet, nos. 64, 70, and 72, March 16, 23, and 25, 1847, and Berlingske Tidende, nos. 232–236, October 5–9, 1847, and Flyve-Posten, no. 235, October 9, 1847. 388

6

388

33

35 38

41

advance payment of grace] → 379,15. a “Christian” state] i.e., a state for which Christianity is the official confession; the Danish state, for example, had been bound through its monarch to the evangelical Lutheran Church and its confessional documents; see Kongeloven [The Royal Law] (1665, published 1709, abolished 1849), § 1, and Danmarks Riges Grundlov [The Constitution of the Kingdom of Denmark], June 5, 1849, § 6. a laborer is worthy of his pay] See Lk 10:7; see also 1 Tim 5:18. receive this pay … what is owed me] Priests did not have a regular salary, but received their income from various sources. In provincial towns citizens had the duty of paying the priest an assessed sum called “priest money,” whereas peasants in rural parishes were to pay the priest a certain percentage of their agricultural yield, especially grain, known as a tithe. The size of these payments was established by the Ministry for Church and Educational Affairs. On holy days, members of the congregation could also pay their priest a voluntary sum of money called an “offering.” Priests had a certain amount of additional income called “perquisites,” i.e., fees for performing such clerical acts as weddings, baptisms, and funerals. See C. C. Boisen, Om Kirken og præstens Forhold til samme [On the Church and the Priest’s Relationship to It] (Copenhagen, 1834), pp. 61–70. If the congregation did not pay the priest money or the tithe that had been assessed, the worldly authorities (the local chief of police) could intervene and take legal measures to collect what was owed. all are Xn] Variant: first wri�en “all are Xn.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence.

1849

653

so that the priest, appointed... with instructions concerning his wages] Each pastoral call had its specific incomes from various sources; a complete overview is found in Bloch Suhr, Kaldslexicon, omfa�ende en Beskrivelse over alle danske geistlige Embeder i alphabetisk Orden [Encyclopedia of Calls, Including a Description of All Danish Ecclesiastical Offices in Alphabetical Order] (Copenhagen, 1851; ASKB 379). the efforts of the clergy … to be paid directly by the state] Kierkegaard is referring to the wish for a radical change in the way in which priests were paid, so that they would go from having a rather uncertain income situation that cost a great deal of time (→ 388,38) to being civil servants of the state who were paid a regular salary. This wish―the fulfillment of which lay in the distant future―was expressed not only by priests but also by many people who were tired of reaching into their pockets every time a clerical act was to be performed. See, e.g., Ludvig Helweg’s discussion of the ma�er in the third article in the series “Kirke- og Underviisnings-Ministeriet for Danmark” [Ministry of Church and Educational Affairs for Denmark], in Dansk Kirketidende, vol. 3, no. 46, July 23, 1848, cols. 733–746. “teachers” of Xnty] In the Danish Church ritual it was explicit that in addition to his priestly office, a priest was also to serve as a teacher.

1

5

388m

God himself indeed has created and sustains this world] See the first article of the Apostles’ Creed; this is emphasized and explained in Luther’s Small Catechism. God is a God of patience] See, e.g., Rom 15:5 and 2:4. Perhaps most] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry.

27

389

19

390

The expression “the authors’ author,” which I myself once came to use] Refers to “A First and Final Declaration” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846), where Kierkegaard asks that he not be confused with his pseudonyms: “From the beginning I have understood very well, and I continue to understand, my personal actuality as an annoyance that the pseudonyms passionately

28

390

389

11

37

654

29

36 37

391

11

12

14

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 68–70

and willfully might wish removed, the sooner the be�er, or made as insignificant as possible, and yet, at the same time, ironically a�entive, might wish to have nearby as a repelling resistance. For my situation is the union of being the secretary and, ironically enough, the dialectically reduplicated author of the author or the authors” (CUP, 627; SKS 7, 571). subsequently adopted by several people] Kierkegaard could here have in mind his brother P. C. Kierkegaard (→ 396,23), who had apparently alluded to Søren Kierkegaard’s writings in using the phrase “nothing is more certain than what ‘the author of the authors’ has said a�er his fashion, when he says that the end of the world will probably come at a moment when people are having a wonderful time ge�ing ready for it and view the whole business as a joke.” Peter Christian Kierkegaard, “Politiske PaaskeBetragtninger 1849” [Political Easter Observations, 1849], in Fortsæ�elser fra Pedersborg [Continuations from Pedersborg], 3 vols. (Copenhagen: Published in signatures, 1848–1853; ASKB 372–375), vol. 1 (1849), p. 304. Martensen] → 382,12. him becoming classical―and me artificial] i.e., Martensen is to be presented as sober-minded and thoughtful and Søren Kierkegaard as affected; an allusion to P. C. Kierkegaard’s lecture (→ 407,5). Luther’s teachings] i.e., both Luther’s doctrine of justification by faith, (→ 371,1, → 373,2, and → 373,5) and his emphasis on the primacy of the Bible (→ 391,14 and → 391,18). He emphasizes Paul one-sidedly and makes less use of the gospels] Presumably a reference to the fact that Luther’s doctrine of salvation by faith (→ 371,1) is based on Paul, and that Luther o�en invokes Paul’s authority when interpreting scripture: see below (→ 391,14). his Bible theory] i.e., Luther’s insistence that Christian doctrine can only be based on Holy Scripture, the Bible; this principle of sola scriptura (Latin, “scripture alone”) means that scripture is the final and decisive authority for all ma�ers of dogma. Luther directed this principle in particular against the Roman Catholic Church’s tradition-bound notion of authority (→ 391,18).

1849

he who rejects the Epistle of James] At the end of his “Preface to the New Testament” (1522), Luther enumerates the New Testament books that must form the basis of the Christian faith, and the epistle of James, which he calls “an epistle of straw,” is not among them; see Luthers Werke. Vollständige Auswahl seiner Hauptschri�en. Mit historischen Einleitungen, Anmerkungen und Registern [Luther’s Works: A Complete Selection of His Principal Writings, with a Historical Introduction and an Index], ed. O�o von Gerlach, 24 vols. (Berlin 1848; abbreviated herea�er as Luthers Werke [vols. 1–10 are a stereotype of the 2nd ed. (Berlin, 1840–1841)]; ASKB 312–316), vol. 20, p. 8. Luther’s argument that the epistle of James did not have its origin in the first generation of Christians can be found in “Vorrede auf die Episteln St. Jakobi und Judä” [Preface to the Epistles of James and Jude], where he emphasizes in particular the contradiction between the epistle of James’s insistence that faith without works is dead (see Jas 2:20–24, where Abraham is cited as an example in this connection) and Paul’s insistence that it was Abraham’s faith, not his works, that made him righteous (Rom 4:1–6). See Luthers Werke, vol. 22, pp. 173–175. in his conflict with the pope … convince him on the basis of scripture] Refers to Luther’s famous reply at the Diet of Worms in 1521. Because Luther had published a series of polemical pieces opposing the teachings of the Catholic Church, the pope tried to get Emperor Charles V to condemn Luther without a hearing, but the emperor summoned Luther to the city of Worms, where he held an imperial assembly, or diet, in 1521. Luther appeared before the assembly and was asked whether he would revoke his a�acks, in response to which Luther asked for a day to consider the ma�er: “Truly, on that day Luther was in no way the surprised, awkward man he had been the day before, but answered the questions with great calm and intellectual clarity. The upshot of it all was the declaration that he would cast his writings into the fire with his own hands and recant everything if he could be convinced, on the basis of the Holy Scriptures, that he had erred. To this, the chancellor responded that this was a

14

18

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 70–74 reply with horns: They had not come to debate with him; the question was whether or not he would recant. ‘Well, then,’ replied Luther, ‘inasmuch as you require that I give you a simple, straightforward answer, I will give you one that has neither horns nor teeth. I believe neither in the pope nor in the councils, for both have often erred and contradicted themselves. I therefore cannot and will not recant anything unless, as mentioned, I am refuted on the basis of Holy Scripture, for it is not advisable to do anything against one’s conscience. Here I stand, I cannot do otherwise. God help me! Amen!” See the section “Rigsdagen i Worms” [The Diet of Worms], in Karl Friedrich Beckers Verdenshistorie [Karl Friedrich Becker’s World History], adapted by J. G. Woltmann, trans. and augmented by J. Riise, 12 vols. (Copenhagen, 1822–1829; ASKB 1972–1983), vol. 6 (1824), pp. 275–279; p. 278). See also N. M. Petersen, Dr. Martin Luthers Levnet [The Life of Dr. Martin Luther] (Copenhagen, 1840), p. 81. 391

26

27

Luther so frequently preaches … and schoolteachers] See, e.g., Luther’s sermon for the fifteenth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 1, pp. 522–523: “Throughout the ages God has willed that this [financial support of the Church’s activities] be confirmed by experience, because he has richly blessed the pious souls who have followed this rule and have worked to build up the kingdom of God, to serve the Church, and to promote the word of God. He has rewarded them many times over for what they have given from their fortunes. We have many examples of this, both from scripture and from world history. When, out of Christian love, pious kings and princes have endowed churches and schools, so far is it from being the case that this has made them poorer, that they have indeed received far more wealth from God and have governed in peace and happiness.” See also Luther’s sermon for the twenty-third Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday in En christelig Postille, vol. 1, p. 592. He does this even in the sermon … from the goats] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Mt 25:31–46, the gospel text for the twenty-sixth Sunday a�er Trinity Sunday, in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2),

1849

655

vol. 1, pp. 622–631, in which Luther complains of the growing selfishness of his times: “Tell me, what city is so strong or so pious that it provides enough for a schoolmaster or a parish priest to live on? Indeed, were it not for the generous alms and endowments provided by our forefathers in ages past, the gospel would long since have been exterminated, and a poor priest would have neither food nor drink” (p. 625). Be Satisfied with My Grace … in Weakness] See 1 Cor 12:9. strong and free] Classical Latin idiom fortis et liber; presumably an allusion to Adam Oehlenschläger’s well-known drinking song “Vil du være stærk og fri” [If You Want to Be Strong and Free] from the singspiel Ludlams Hule [Ludlam’s Cave] (Copenhagen, 1813), pp. 97–98. the thorn might be removed] See 2 Cor 12:7–9.

32

3

392

“What you have not done … you done unto me.”] See Mt 24:45.

19

392

Talleyrand … “You are forge�ing one thing: he ought to be pockmarked.”] In 1790, when Talleyrand was elected chairman of the National Assembly in revolutionary France, his friend Mirabeau―who was in many ways Talleyrand’s equal in temperament and ambition―expressed audible disappointment, which annoyed Talleyrand. Subsequently, when Mirabeau, whose face bore the scars of the smallpox he had contracted as a child, gave a speech enumerating the qualifications a chairman ought to possess, listing as well his own qualifications, Talleyrand stood up and noted “that there was only one quality that Mirabeau had neglected to mention, namely that a chairman also ought to be pockmarked”; see J. F. Bernard, Talleyrand: A Biography (New York: Putnam, 1973), pp. 98–99. Kierkegaard’s source is not known. ― Talleyrand: Charles Maurice de Talleyrand-Perigord (1754–1838), French bishop and statesman; foreign minister, 1797–1807 and 1814–1815; known for his political intrigues and for being a competent and ruthless diplomat. ― Mirabeau: Honoré-Gabriel Riqueti (1749–1791), French statesman.

36

392

391

35

656

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 75–77

393

7

While the air … winter snow’s shivering-cold (Brorson)] Cited from H. A. Brorson’s hymn “Hvad seer min Sulamith” [What Does My Shulamite See], 1st stanza: “The Bridegroom. / What does my Shulamite see, / When the air is still so full of winter snow’s shivering-cold? / Why, then, do you open the window, / And stare continually at the top of the clouds; / Why do you do this so o�en, / My Shulamite? / The Bride. / I am only standing here to see, / When at the crack of doom, the stars, / Have begun to fall, / How will it snow then. / Go away, as the birds fly, / You winter dwelling, enough for me; / I don’t intend to sign a lease on you, / I have my traveling clothes.” No. 49 in Psalmer og aandelige Sange af Hans Adolph Brorson [Hymns and Spiritual Songs by Hans Adolph Brorson], ed. J.A.L. Holm, 2nd ed. (Copenhagen, 1838 [1830]; ASKB 200), pp. 867–869; p. 867. The hymn had first been published in 1765. ― Brorson: Hans Adolph Brorson (1694–1764), Danish pietist theologian, bishop, author of hymns.

393

15

The principle that fear … into a lesser] Presumably an idiomatic expression. In a le�er to Kierkegaard, Rasmus Nielsen (→ 402,14) writes: “The greater danger drives away the lesser” (LD, 244; B&A 1, 193–194).

393

24

My Move against The Corsair] When one of Corsaren’s anonymous contributors, P. L. Møller (→ 393,27), published a critique of Kierkegaard’s work in his aesthetic annual Gæa [Gaea] for 1846, Kierkegaard mounted an ironic countera�ack. He identified P. L. Møller with Corsaren and then asked “to appear in Corsaren,” because he could not accept being the only Danish author who had not yet been abused but only praised by the paper; see the article “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner,” which appeared under the pseudonym Frater Taciturnus in Fædrelandet [The Fatherland], on December 27, 1845, no. 2078, cols. 16653–16658 (COR, 38–46; SKS 14, 77–84). Corsaren responded by carrying a series of satirical articles about, allusions to, and caricatures of Kierkegaard. The first of these appeared on January 2, 1846, no.

1849

276, and others appeared at regular intervals until July 17, 1846, no. 304. The teasing continued even a�er M. A. Goldschmidt’s departure as editor and did not conclude until February 16, 1849, no. 439. A�er the second Corsaren article, which appeared on January 9, 1846, no. 277, Kierkegaard responded, once again under the alias of Frater Taciturnus, in Fædrelandet, January 10, 1846, no. 9, cols. 65–68, with “The Dialectical Result of a Literary Police Action” (COR, 47–50; SKS 14, 85– 89). Kierkegaard was convinced that, as a result of Corsaren’s a�acks, he was abused on the street. ― The Corsair: A satirical and political weekly journal, founded in 1840 by M. A. Goldschmidt (→ 380,32), who was editor and contributor until October 1846 when, in the a�ermath of the dispute with Kierkegaard, he sold the paper to the xylographer A.C.F. Flinch, under whose direction the journal survived until 1855. The journal’s satirical articles were accompanied by drawings by Peter Klæstrup, which helped it gain broad readership; in the mid-1840s it had a press run of about three thousand copies. the Situation] Variant: first wri�en “Forf”, which are the first four le�ers of Forfa�erne (Danish, “the authors”); Kierkegaard chose instead to write Forholdene (Danish, “the situation,” “the circumstances,” or “the relationships”). P. L. Møller] Peder Ludvig Møller (1814–1865), Danish author, poet, and critic, served as editor of the polemical journal Arena in 1843, and in the years 1845–1847 he published the aesthetic annual Gæa. Møller also contributed articles to various journals, including “satirical critiques and poems in Corsaren,” as he himself described his work in T. H. Erslew’s Almindeligt Forfa�erLexicon [Universal Encyclopedia of Authors], 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1843–1853; ASKB 954–969), vol. 2 (1847), p. 406. He published some of his literary pieces in Kritiske Skizzer fra Aarene 1840–47 [Critical Sketches from the Years 1840–1847], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1847). In addition to the critique published in Gæa, he also published a negative review of Concluding Unscientific Postscript in Kjøbenhavnsposten, nos. 73 and 74, March 27 and 28, 1846, under the name “Prosper naturalis de molinasky.” At the end of 1847, he traveled abroad and never returned to Denmark.

26

27

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 77–81

28 32

394

10

393m

1

394m

1

7 9

395

4 14 17

Goldschmidt] → 380,32. a�acked,] Variant: changed from “a�acked.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. he is all the more willing] Variant: deleted preceding this: “the weaker he is”. and indeed … praised.] Variant: This marginal note was begun in the main text column. Of course, I had struck the note of irony] Refers both to Kierkegaard’s magister dissertation On the Concept of Irony (1841), and to the ironic strain in Kierkegaard’s works from Either/Or (1843) to Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846). The Corsair] → 393,24. The Corsair immortalizes him as the master] Presumably an allusion to the fact that Kierkegaard’s pseudonym Victor Eremita, the editor of Either/Or, was immortalized in Corsaren at the expense of Orla Lehmann, a leader of the liberal opposition: “for Lehmann will die and be forgo�en, but Victor Eremita will never die” (Corsaren, no. 269, November 14, 1845, col. 14). of course even the apostles fell away] See Mt 26:56; see also Mt 26:14–16. As I have noted somewhere else in a journal] See entry NB10:54 in KJN 5, 295. would be like cruelty] Variant: “like” added.

395

21

How o�en have I not heard it said “that I have no cause,”] This must refer to spoken remarks.

395

35

396

3

The Epistle for the First Sunday in Advent] i.e., Rom 13:11–14. In 1849, the first Sunday in Advent fell on December 2. To put on Xt] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry; see Rom 13:14 (→ 395,35). the parable of the king who prepared his son’s wedding banquet] See Mt 22:1–14. the expression … it is food] See Jn 4:32. striving] Variant: first wri�en “imitating”. Him] Variant: first wri�en “him”.

4 8 19 21

396

23

Peter] Kierkegaard’s elder brother, Peter Christian Kierkegaard (1805–1888); defended his licentiate degree in theology in 1836; served as tutor for

1849

657

theological students until 1842, when he accepted a call as priest for the parish of Pedersborg and Kinderto�e by Sorø in south-central Zealand; he was a faithful adherent of Grundtvig (→ 408,26), and from July 1844, he was a respected member of the Roskilde Ecclesiastical Convention (→ 396,27). On December 29, 1849, he was elected to the Landsting, the upper house of the newly established Danish parliament, as a representative for the Friends of the Peasantry Society. He published a number of essays and lectures, some in Nordisk Tidsskri� for christelig Theologie [Nordic Journal for Christian Theology] (Copenhagen, 1840–1842), of which he was coeditor, some in Dansk Kirketidende (1845ff.; ASKB 321–325), and others in his own ecclesiastical journal Fortsæ�elser fra Pedersborg (→ 390,29). Well, now Peter is going to speak about my writings] In this and subsequent entries (NB14:95, 97, 102, 107, 108, and 117) Kierkegaard refers to a lecture delivered by his brother, Peter Christian Kierkegaard, at the Roskilde Ecclesiastical Convention (→ 396,27) in Ringsted, Zealand on October 30, 1849. In P. C. Kierkegaard’s diary the entry for October 30, 1849 is quite terse: “In the evening I spoke on 2 Cor 5:13 et al.,” and in midNovember 1849 he wrote in his diary, “began writing up the lecture of 10/30 on 2 Cor 5:13 and Søren vs. Martensen” (see P. C. Kierkegaard’s diary in the manuscript collection of the Royal Library, NKS 2656, 4o, p. 155). The lecture was published in Dansk Kirketidende, December 16, 1849, vol. 5, no. 12, cols. 171–193, and in the introduction P. C. Kierkegaard explains that the text is a reconstruction: “It has not been possible for me to write up the contents of what I presented orally any more exactly than I have done here. And inasmuch as there was no debate about it at the time, I will not go into it any further here. The train of thought and the contents and many of the specific details are here, as best I could remember them” (col. 171). convention] The Roskilde Ecclesiastical Convention (or conventicle), also known as the Roskilde Pastoral Assembly, was founded in 1842 as a forum at which priests and theologians, many of whom were followers of Grundtvig (→ 408,26),

24

27

658

28

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 81

could meet twice yearly (in July and October) to discuss theological and ecclesiastical ma�ers. P. C. Kierkegaard was an active participant in these meetings, the proceedings of which were related in Dansk Kirketidende. Conventicles or pastoral assemblies arose in the early 19th century, e.g., the Southwest Zealand Conventicle of Brothers, founded in 1837, the above-mentioned Roskilde Pastoral Assembly, and the Copenhagen Clerical Assembly, founded in 1843. the prepared lecture could not be used … Martensen and Søren and R. Nielsen] Dansk Kirketidende, December 16, 1849, vol. 5, no. 12, cols. 171–193, prefaced P. C. Kierkegaard’s reconstruction of his lecture with the explanation that he had been granted half an hour’s time by the moderator of the meeting and had spoken “more or less as follows” (col. 171), a�er which P. C. Kierkegaard’s text begins with a lengthy introduction in which he explains that several days earlier, the vice-moderator had “expressed the wish that I would prepare one or another lecture that could be included here if there just happened to be time le� over and which, if that were not the case, could be postponed until another occasion” (col. 171). P. C. Kierkegaard then goes on to explain that he had originally intended to speak on another topic, but had then changed his mind, asking his auditors “to excuse that I now must offer you something that first came to mind yesterday evening and that I prepared in haste” (col. 173). He then proceeds, taking as his starting point 2 Cor 5:13 (→ 407,4), and therea�er presenting that text’s differentiation between ecstatic and sober-minded discourse: “the application that I now intend to make of our passage concerns two notable features of our recent literature, Magister S. Kierkegaard’s well-known works and Prof. Martensen’s Dogmatics and his work in dogmatics generally” (col. 178). In the general discussion of the two authors, Martensen is made into the representative of sober-mindedness (→ 414,17) and Søren Kierkegaard into the representative of ecstasy (→ 414,15), but the speaker explains that it is not his intention to mediate between two polar extremes (→ 409m,1). In the course of the lecture, P. C. Kierkegaard touches on the contradiction in-

1849

herent in the fact that although Søren Kierkegaard addressed only the single individual, he was now in the process of acquiring imitative adherents (→ 411,5), namely Rasmus Nielsen (→ 405,8) and the pseudonym H. H. (→ 405,10). By comparing Martensen, Søren Kierkegaard, and Rasmus Nielsen, P. C. Kierkegaard made his contribution to a wide-ranging debate that had begun with Nielsen’s a�ack on Martensen (→ 403,14) and that in the course of a couple of years swelled to include quite a number of pamphlets and articles. In such a li�le country, where I have not yet even been reviewed] A number of Kierkegaard’s works had not been reviewed at all, e.g., The Concept of Anxiety (1844), A Literary Review (1846), Christian Discourses (1848), The Sickness unto Death (1849), and The High Priest, the Tax Collector, the Woman Who Was a Sinner: Three Discourses at the Communion on Fridays (1849), but most of them had received at least some mention in newspapers or journals, and some had in fact been the subject of lengthy reviews, e.g., Either/Or (1843), Fear and Trembling (1843), Repetition (1843), and Works of Love (1847), even if these reviews typically consisted of summaries of the contents of those works. everyone exploits my writings as an opportunity to get something said] In his journal entries Kierkegaard o�en complained of being plundered or exploited by others, who used his works for their own purposes; see, e.g., entries NB4:60 in KJN 4, 316; NB7:31 in KJN 5, 95–96; NB10:144, in KJN 5, 340; and NB11:5 in the present volume. Kierkegaard might have in mind the above-mentioned lecture by P. C. Kierkegaard (see also entry NB4:63 in KJN 4, 318), or perhaps A. P. Adler (see Pap. VIII 2 B 7,10); Rasmus Nielsen (see, e.g., entry NB11:46 in the present volume); Magnús Eiríksson (see Pap. VII 1 B 87–92); P. L. Møller (see, e.g., Kierkegaard’s article “The Activity of a Traveling Aesthetician and How He Still Happened to Pay for the Dinner” [Fædrelandet, no. 2078, December 27, 1845], COR, 38–46; SKS 14, 77–84); and P. W. Christensen (see, e.g., entry JJ:144 in KJN 2, 173).

38

39

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 82–84 397

9 10

398

7

10

398

16

Christ’s Entry into Jerusalem] See Mt 21:1–11, Mk 11:1–11, Lk 19:28–40, and Jn 12:12–19. As he said about the woman … for my burial] See Mk 14:8. people ascribe dreams to the devil or to demons] It is not possible to determine what Kierkegaard is referring to here. spiritualism] Presumably the cult of reason. A Polemical Comedy … surely by Heiberg] Refers to the satirical closet drama, Hundrede Aar. Polemisk Comedie i fire Decorationer med Forspil, E�erspil og Parabaser [One Hundred Years: A Polemical Comedy in Four Scenes, with a Prelude, a Postlude, and Parabases] (Copenhagen, 1848), which was advertised as “appeared” in Berlingske Tidende, no. 295, December 13, 1849. The piece, in which various issues concerning theatrical ma�ers are debated, is unsigned but was wri�en by the author and dramatist Henrik Hertz (1798–1870), an epigone of Heiberg. The first scene features a character named Petronius who has “a great desire to exercise the much-discussed Socratic art of midwifery” (p. 21), which leads to a discussion of the theatrical public. The same theme is treated in more detail by Sganarel (esp. pp. 57–58) in the second scene, where we also encounter an architect who plans to build a popular theater and therefore turns to Johannes Climacus, who suddenly turns up: “People have advised me to cover the costs by selling shares that everyone could buy. But I have no desire to summon Tom, Dick, and Harry, despite the fact that I daresay I could easily manage the outcome. As I have said publicly, I would most prefer to have one single shareholder, albeit someone solid. Now, I have read in one of your many fine works that you find yourself in a similar situation. Despite the fact that your books could assuredly be read by many people, you wish to have only one single reader, albeit a solid one, of course. And thus my suggestion is that if you will be my only shareholder, I will be your only reader” (pp. 111–112). ― Heiberg: Johan Ludvig Heiberg (1791–1860), Danish author, translator, editor, critic of drama and literature, Hegelian philosopher, and popularizer of

1849

659

Hegelian philosophy. A�er having served as a lecturer in Danish literature at the University of Kiel in the period 1822–1825, Heiberg was appointed titular professor in 1829, and in the period 1830– 1836 he taught logic, aesthetics, and Danish literature at the Royal Military Academy. From 1828 to 1839 he was a playwright and permanent translator at the Royal Theater, where he was appointed director in 1849. Heiberg was the tastemaker of his age and a successful dramatist, though since 1841 he had published only two minor dramatic pieces, namely, Ulla skal paa Bal [Ulla Is Going to the Ball] (Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB U59) and the anonymously published comedy Valgerda [Valgerda] (Copenhagen, 1847; ASKB U60), plus a satirical closet drama Nøddeknækkerne. Et Satyrspil [The Nutcrackers: A Satyr Play], in Urania. Aarbog for 1845 [Urania: Annual for 1845] (Copenhagen, 1845; ASKB U58), pp. 143–208. acts as if he] Variant: added. he thunders against the public and shows how bad it is] Heiberg’s castigation of the public can be found in many of his writings, e.g., in “Hvad man seer, og hvad man hører” [What One Sees and What One Hears] (Kjøbenhavns flyvende Post [Copenhagen’s Flying Post], 1830, nos. 3–5), and especially in the later series of articles “Om Theatret” [On the Theater] in Fædrelandet, 1840, nos. 272, 295, 302, 303, 339, 340, 348, and 359, and in articles that appeared in Intelligensblade (1842–1844; see ASKB U56): “Folk og Publicum” [People and Public] (1842, no. 6); “Tak―Adresse til Publicum” [Address of Thanks to the Public] (1842, no. 8); “Skuespilleren, Publicum og Critiken” [The Actor, the Public, and the Critic] (1843, no. 13); and “Bifalds- og Mishags-Y�ringer i Theatret” [Expressions of Approval and Disapproval in the Theater] (1843, no. 21). both in the vaudevilles and in the theory … the public is the judging authority] Inspired in part by the Parisian theater, with which he was familiar from his stay in Paris from 1819 to 1822, and in part by German vaudeville, which had in turn been inspired by the French genre, J. L. Heiberg introduced the vaudeville to the Royal Theater in 1825. The vaudeville was a comedy of middleclass intrigue with songs set to simple, prefer-

19 20

27

660

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 84–86

ably well-known melodies; the characters were unheroic and frequently whimsical; the dramatic conflict revolved around a local situation containing always-surmountable romantic complications. Between 1825 and 1836, Heiberg wrote a total of eight vaudevilles and a number of vaudeville monologues. To overcome disapproval from reviewers in the press, Heiberg published a critical explanation of the advantages of the new genre, Om Vaudevillen, som dramatisk Digtart, og om dens Betydning paa den danske Skueplads. En dramaturgisk Undersøgelse [On the Vaudeville as a Dramatic Genre, and on Its Importance for the Danish Theater: A Dramaturgical Investigation] (Copenhagen, 1826). Here Heiberg explained that the vaudeville does not really need any defense, “inasmuch as the approval with which the public has greeted the vaudeville has established this poetic genre among us to such an extent that at this point a divergent view of it would no longer be able to repress it” (p. 4). Despite his repeated references to the public as a criterion of success, it was also Heiberg’s view that the public, and especially critics, needed to be taught the criteria that formed the basis of aesthetic judgments. 399

5

7

This is how it is with my name: Søren] See journal entries NB7:109 and especially NB10:99 in KJN 5, 109 and 317–318, where Kierkegaard complains bi�erly of this. At one time … Berlingske Tidende carried … A Night by Bullar Lake] Refers to Emilie Carlèn’s novel En Nat ved Bullar-Søen [A Night by Bullar Lake], trans. from the Swedish by L. Moltke, published serially in Berlingske Tidende, no. 43, February 20, 1847–no. 206, September 4, 1847, therea�er published in book form in three volumes. Originally published in Swedish in 1847. As a university student, the principal character, Justus of Karleborg―like Kierkegaard, o�en titled “Magister”―became entangled in fanatical religious notions. He falls in love with Constance but does not think he can marry her; similarly, he spurns an offer of marriage from Evelyn, the daughter of a wealthy man, because he wants to become a missionary and suffer martyrdom. He then becomes active as a charismatic preacher.

1849

Constance marries Justus’s brother Leonard, and they se�le down at a li�le country place by Bullar Lake, while Evelyn marries a baron. Justus suffers great spiritual torment because of his unrequited love for Constance. A�er trying to overcome this in various ways, he wishes to marry Evelyn, who has by now become a widow. He wants to abandon his calling as a missionary, give up his pastoral gown, and live a happy life as husband and estate owner. The title of the book alludes to the final night, when Justus causes the death of his brother, a�er which Constance despairingly hurls herself and Evelyn over a cliff at the lake, killing both of them. The novel ends: “For many years a madman [i.e., Justus] wandered the shores of Bullar Lake; he had been imprisoned for murder but had been released, because his mental confusion was proof of the fact that the crime could not be blamed on him. He was cared for faithfully and tenderly by an elderly mother and her trusty live-in servant, who never let him out of their sight. The common people called him ‘the mad priest,’ but he did no one any harm and never caused any difficulty, except that he would not leave the shores of the lake. No more than one word ever crossed his lips. That word was: God!” Kierkegaard discussed the novel in previous journal entries; see entries NB2:83 in KJN 4, 174, NB10:173 in KJN 5, 356, and NB10:144, where Kierkegaard writes of the novel: “That it contained many, many allusions to me is certain, but when it was wri�en and whether Nathanson [the editor of Berlingske Tidende] was thinking about that and so on, I’d really liked to have known at the time. As a rule, my particular fate is that every single word that could refer to me is of enormous interest to the market town―but my books? No, they are merely plundered by other writers” (KJN 5, 340). ― Berlingske Tidende: → 422m,2. on the text he himself has chosen … buried their dead, spiritually speaking] Refers to H. L. Martensen’s (→ 382,12) sermon on Mt 8:21–22, “Let the dead bury their dead,” published in H. L. Martensen, Prædikener [Sermons] (Copenhagen, 1847; ASKB 227), pp. 151–165. Martensen explains that in Christ’s time, “spiritually speaking,” the

18

399

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 86–88 people of Israel were “like a dead person who buries his dead. For the higher spirit had indeed fled from the people; the people lived only in remembrance of a bygone glory, in remembrance of the great dead, of David and Solomon, of Moses and the prophets. Instead of the great seers of the past, only blind Pharisees, who went about decorating the graves of the prophets, were now to be seen. Instead of the inspired voices of the prophets, only the dead speech of the scribes was now to be heard. They expounded Holy Scripture, but the spirit was buried in the le�er; they indeed busied themselves with the remains of the great spirits, but the spirit itself was not present. We o�en encounter such dead eras in history, and― Christian listeners―we of course recognize them from our own experience, these eras where spirit and creative power are lacking, and where people only busy themselves with the memory of bygone greatness, gathering and ordering the posthumous works of great spirits, writing biographies of the great dead, erecting the one monument a�er the other for the great men of the past, composing inscriptions that describe their merits, while not doing any great work oneself” (pp. 156–157). ― text he himself has chosen: Such texts are not part of the required lectionary for the Church year. 399

31

He who merely gives the lowliest … will receive it again tenfold] See Mt 10:1–42.

400

3

in the sermon … treats asceticism] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Rom 12:1–6, the epistle text for the first Sunday a�er Epiphany, in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 2, pp. 96–103, esp. pp. 99–102. the cra�y orthodox abolish … tempting God] See the second discourse in the third part of Christian Discourses (1848), in CD, 178; SKS 10, 189, where he elaborates on this: “Ah, we o�en hear false words that would have people believe that voluntary renunciation of worldly goods is supposedly tempting God, that voluntarily venturing into a danger that one in fact could avoid is supposedly tempting God. People think that this is tempting God, and then in condemning the person who exposes himself to danger in this way, they say, ‘It’s

7

1849

661

his own fault.’” ― orthodox: Presumably directed at the Grundtvigians. sometimes Luther, too … the authorities, etc., etc.] Refers to Luther’s embrace of Paul’s views in Rom 13:1–7 on how one ought to relate to the authorities. Did he not voluntarily expose himself to certain danger by opposing the pope] An account of Luther’s clash with the pope can be found, e.g., in N. M. Petersen, Dr. Martin Luthers Levnet [The Life of Dr. Martin Luther] (Copenhagen, 1840), and a more detailed version is available in C.F.G. Stang, Martin Luther. Sein Leben und Wirken [Martin Luther: His Life and Work] (Leipzig, 1838 [1835]; ASKB 790). the theory Peter developed … but not against what is evil] It cannot be determined what Kierkegaard is referring to. to sleep―so as not to sin] Allusion to the proverb, “The person who sleeps does not sin,” recorded in E. Mau, Dansk Ordsprogs-Skat [Treasury of Danish Proverbs], 2 vols. (Copenhagen, 1879); vol. 2, p. 398, no. 9962. As the king was the law and the end of the law] Allusion both to Rom 10:4 and to the position of the Danish king under absolutism; see Kongeloven, art. 2: “Denmark’s…absolute hereditary king shall by his subjects herea�er be held to be, and be respected as, the most excellent and supreme head here on earth, who is above all human laws and acknowledges no head or judge above himself, either in ecclesiastical or in worldly ma�ers, but God alone.” This provision of Kongeloven was abolished with the adoption of the constitution of June 5, 1849. Schleiermacher puts it very well … his own asceticism] Refers to the second discourse, “Ueber das Wesen der Religion” [On the Essence of Religion], in Friedrich Schleiermacher, Ueber die Religion. Reden an die Gebildeten unter ihren Verächtern [On Religion: Speeches to Its Cultured Despisers], 5th ed. (Berlin, 1843 [1799]; ASKB 271), where Schleiermacher writes as follows with respect to the difference between true and false piety: “But we must never confuse it with the well-meant endeavours of pious souls. The difference is easy to discern. Each religious per-

9

12

16

39

4

401

1

400m

662

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 88–90

son fashions his own asceticism according to his need, and looks for no rule outside of himself, while the superstitious person and the hypocrite adhere strictly to the accepted and traditional, and are zealous for it, as for something universal and holy” (p. 75). English translation from Friedrich Schleiermacher, On Religion: Speeches to Its Cultured Despisers, tr. John Oman, foreword by Jack Forstman (Louisville, KY: Westminster/John Knox, 1994), p. 62. ― Schleiermacher: Friedrich Daniel Ernst Schleiermacher (1768–1834), German Reformed theologian, philosopher of religion, and classical philologist, became a priest in Berlin in 1796; from 1804, extraordinary professor at Halle; from 1810, professor of theology at Berlin. 402

14

15

20

R. Nielsen] Rasmus Nielsen (1809–1884), Danish theologian and philosopher; theology graduate, 1837; licentiate in theology, 1840; privatdocent, 1840–1841; from 1841, Poul Martin Møller’s successor as extraordinary professor in moral philosophy, and from 1850, ordinary professor at the University of Copenhagen. He taught speculative and Hegelian philosophy in particular, but in the mid-1840s he came under Kierkegaard’s influence, and they became friends in 1848 (concerning this, see journal entries NB7:6 and NB10:32 in KJN 5, 80–81 and 283). Kierkegaard appears to have brought Nielsen into his confidence concerning the ideas behind his writings. I noticed … 47, or early 48] Rasmus Nielsen’s name is not mentioned in Journal NB4, which Kierkegaard used from December 28, 1847, until mid-May 1848, but entry NB4:72, begins, “Right now, it would probably be easy to find someone to give lectures about my ideas” (KJN 4, 322), and Kierkegaard may have had Rasmus Nielsen in mind. draw him a li�le closer to me] See the dra� of an article “Concerning My Relationship to Hr. Prof. R. Nielsen,” from ca. 1849–1850: “In the middle of the year 1848 a number of considerations, all leading to the same point, made it clear to me that I ought―that it was my duty―to at least make an a�empt to share my views with another person by having a personal relationship with him, all the more so because I had the intention of stop-

1849

ping as an author. I chose Prof. Nielsen, who had already tried to approach me. Since then I have as a rule spoken with him once a week” (Pap. X 6 B 124, p. 164; see Pap. X 6 B 93, p. 102). The relationship between the two men, which became problematic, produced a series of le�ers (see, e.g., entries NB6:2, 67, and 78, in KJN 5, 7, 49, and 60; see also the correspondence published in LD) and conversations during walks on Thursdays. See also journal entries NB6:74 and NB7:6, in KJN 5, 56–57 and 80–81. Hirschholm] Today’s Hørsholm, located about nineteen miles (twenty-six kilometers) north of Copenhagen. at the time I had gained an understanding of myself qua author] i.e., in the la�er half of 1848, when Kierkegaard o�en reflected on his own work; this resulted in On My Work as an Author and The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 351,2). There is information concerning this in the journals from that period] See journal entries NB6:67, 75, 76, and 78, as well as entries NB7:6, 7, and 10 in KJN 5, 49, 57–58, 60, 80–81, and 83–84. his big book] Refers to Rasmus Nielsen, Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed. Forelæsninger over Jesu Liv [The Faith of the Gospels and Modern Consciousness: Lectures on the Life of Jesus] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 700; abbreviated herea�er as Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed), pt. 1. The book was advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 116, May 19, 1849. According to the preface, the lectures that form the basis of the book “were delivered in the university building during the winter of 1848 before a respectable number of listeners of both sexes” (pp. vi–vii). Kierkegaard may have been familiar with the lectures before they were published, because he appears to refer to them in journal entry NB10:13; see KJN 5, 271–272. Nielsen gave Kierkegaard a copy of the book with a gilt-decorated full morocco binding and a dedication dated “Sunday, May 13th 1849” (the book is privately owned). Concerning this, see the journals … N’s Big Book] See journal entries NB11:46, 51, 193, and NB12:129, all in the present volume. See also “the packet” from 1849 with the inscription on

29

34

4

8

403

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 90–91

11

14

19

26

404

3 38

403m

12

405

8

the wrapping “Polemika / R. Nielsen / af / Joh. Climacus / Stiiløvelser i Charakteer, som ikke skulle bruges” [Polemics / R. Nielsen / by Joh. Climacus / Composition exercises in character that are not to be used] (Pap. X 6 B 83–89). ― the desk: → 369,27. I have included him in my relationship to God] See journal entries NB6:76, NB6:78, and NB7:7 in KJN 5, 57–58, and 81. The second book, the review of Cl. and Martensen] i.e., R. Nielsen’s Mag. S. Kierkegaards ‘Johannes Climacus’ og Dr. H. Martensens ‘Christelige Dogmatik.’ En undersøgende Anmeldelse [Mag. S. Kierkegaard’s “Johannes Climacus” and Dr. H. Martensen’s Dogmatics: An Investigative Review] (Copenhagen, 1849; ASKB 701). It was advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 242, October 15, 1849. ― Cl.: (Johannes) Climacus (→ 420,1). ― Martensen: → 382,12. Concerning this, see the journals and a separate packet in the desk] In Journal NB13, which was first used on September 29, 1849, there are only a few references to the work by Nielsen that is mentioned here (→ 403,14); see entries NB13:48, 61, 79, and 86 in the present volume. See also “the packet” from 1849 with the inscription on the wrapping “Various Things Occasioned by Prof. Nielsen’s ‘Investigative Review’ of Joh. Climacus” (Pap. X 6 B 110–120); see also the various papers related to the “Climacus-Martensen” debate (Pap. X 6 B 103–109 and 121–132). pleased with him,] Variant: first wri�en “pleased with him.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. shrewdly] Variant: added. a big book] → 403,4. the second time (the review of Climacus)] → 403,14. when Prof. Nielsen’s name … a Schüler] A reference to Rasmus Nielsen, Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed (→ 403,4), which is marked by an unmistakable stylistic similarity to Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous works―something that reviewers were quick to notice. See the review listed under “Bog–Nyt. (April–Juni)” [Book News: April–June], in Dansk Kirketidende, July 22, 1849, vol. 4, no. 43,

1849

663

cols. 714–718. (The review is anonymous, but the table of contents of the journal indicates that it is by H. F. Helweg.) The reviewer starts by writing: “Prof. R. Nielsen’s voluminous work Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed…[is] a remarkable book in a number of respects, not so much because it opens the reader’s eyes to new insights, as because of the freshness and poetic intuition with which the ideas are advanced, and indeed the book makes an interesting contribution to a portrait of its author. Prof. Nielsen, who had been known earlier as a talented spokesman for the speculative theology of Hegel’s school, though always in such a way that one always sensed in him―both as philosopher and theologian―a deeper religious seriousness and warmth, has now broken entirely with modern scientism, and in this work, in which he for the first time clearly articulates this break, has essayed composition in the manner of Mag. Kierkegaard, though without any particular success” (col. 714). See also, e.g., J.M.L. Hjort’s lengthy review in Nyt Theologisk Tidsskri� [New Theological Journal], vol. 1 (1850), pp. 133–165, where the author remarks, “And in this case, the influence of Mag. Kierkegaard appears to have been so powerful that the author has practically discarded his own individuality and has a�empted to think with Mag. K.’s thoughts and speak with K.’s tongue. But of course this has also been a failure” (p. 137). when … I put H. H. into the world … someone copying me] Refers to Two Minor EthicalReligious Essays, which Kierkegaard published on May 19, 1849 (the preface gives the date of composition as 1847), under the pseudonym H. H. As with Rasmus Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed, the work was discussed in “Bog–Nyt” in Dansk Kirketidende, vol. 4, no. 43 (→ 405,8), and the reviewer passed judgment as follows: “Two Minor Ethical-Religious Discourses by H. H. owe their existence―both the ideas and the way they are expressed―to the reading of Mag. S. Kierkegaard’s writings. Overwhelmed by the wealth unfolded to him there, the author, doubtless someone very young, has credited himself with productive powers, though his work proves nothing other than that he has understood mate-

10

664

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 91–95

rial provided from elsewhere. The first of the two essays strikes the reviewer as the more successful; as a ‘poetic a�empt’ it answers the question ‘Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth?,’ and in his answer the author sees the difficulty implicit in a situation in which someone dares let other human beings become guilty to the extent that they pollute themselves with his blood for the sake of the truth; but throughout the entire work one also notices that the author has acquired his thoughts secondhand” (cols. 718–719). See Kierkegaard’s reaction to this in entry NB12:12 in the present volume. P. C. Kierkegaard also regarded H. H. as an adherent and an imitator of Søren Kierkegaard (→ 411,5), as did the anonymous reviewer in Nyt Theologisk Tidsskri�, vol. 1 (Copenhagen, 1850): “The unknown author reveals himself as a disciple and imitator of Mag. Kierkegaard, and in one of these essays has discussed the question of whether a human being has the right to let himself be put to death for the truth, which, a�er many twists and turns, he poses in the studied form of whether a human being has the right to let his fellow human beings pollute themselves by taking a murder on their conscience―a casus conscientiæ [Latin, “ma�er of conscience”] concerning which a decision is quite dependent on concrete circumstances and cannot be fruitfully discussed as a pure and abstract ma�er. But the work does a�est to thoughtfulness and logical acumen, and one might wish that these talents might be used on more fruitful subjects and in a more natural manner” (p. 384). 406

1

no external point … truly to move something] Presumably an allusion to a saying a�ributed to the Greek mathematician, physicist, and inventor Archimedes of Syracuse (ca. 287–212 �.�.). See Plutark’s Levnetsbeskrivelser [Plutarch’s Lives], trans. S. Tetens, 4 vols. (Copenhagen, 1800–1811; ASKB 1197–1200), vol. 3 (1804), p. 272. The passage in question is found in Plutarch’s treatment of Marcellus, 14,7: “And yet even Archimedes, who was a kinsman and friend of King Hiero, wrote to him that with any given force it was possible to move any given weight; and embold-

1849

ened, as we are told, by the strength of his demonstration, he declared that, if there were another world, and he could go to it, he could move this [world].” English translation from Plutarch, Parallel Lives, trans. Bernado�e Perrin, Loeb Classical Library (London: William Heinemann, 1917), vol. 5, p. 473. 3rd Sunday in Advent (Mt XI:2–10)] See Mt 11:2– 10, which was the gospel text for the third Sunday in Advent, which in 1849 fell on December 16. Jn. The Baptist] John the Baptist. paralogism] A fallacious argument or erroneous logical conclusion. Xt before Pilate] See Jn 18:33–38.

12

Peter’s Remarks at the Convention] → 396,24. that passage in Paul] Refers to 2 Cor 5:13, on which P. C. Kierkegaard based his lecture. and then point out Martensen and me as the two tendencies] A�er citing the scriptural text (see the preceding note), P. C. Kierkegaard continues with a lengthy exegesis of the passage (cols. 173–178), a�er which―prior to his more specific discussion of Martensen and Kierkegaard―he situates his theme in a broad and general perspective: “Everyone who has followed and agreed with the preceding discussion of 2 Cor 5:13 will of course immediately note what the apostle says in it concerning his behavior and especially concerning what he has spoken and wri�en: it is by no means something that concerns him alone or concerns the specific characteristics of his person. On the contrary, it is a generally applicable sketch of the peculiar sort of ebb and flow that characterizes the way in which human beings appropriate Christianity―of the Christian life in the entire congregation and in the individual believer―in accordance with its two poles, the movement inward and upward [or] outward and downward, toward increasing inwardness and concentration or toward dissemination and broad acceptance and appropriation by those farther away, however else one would like to emphasize and describe, partially and in detail, any of the rich contents of the doubleness sketched by the apostle. Except that, when one wants to take note of this and point it out in the

3

406

14 23 32

4 5

407

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 95–97

7

15

individual fellow Christian or in oneself, one must never forget that our Christian life, both in its extent and its strength, is situated very far beneath that of the apostle and that this is precisely why it is never viewed with the clarity and certainty with which he viewed himself. For from this it follows directly that with us [emphasis added] this same doubleness [of ecstasy and sober-mindedness] can easily seem to be replaced by a genuine contradiction between the two sides, so that we acknowledge only the one condition or mode of embracing [Christianity], and on that basis fail to appreciate the other and combat it, [by seeing] ecstasy as something fantastical from its first awakening [or] sober-mindedness as worldliness and hal�eartedness. On the other hand, the applicability of the apostolic description is more easily and certainly perceived and demonstrated when we gaze upon the life of the congregation as a whole and when we then simply bear in mind that the individuals, be they persons or eras, that appear most likely to be excluded by one of those two elements, nonetheless―in keeping with the bond of love that holds them together with the congregation and the congregation together with them―appropriate the other [element] indirectly and, as it were, unconsciously. And unless I am entirely wrong in what I see, we must view both the above-mentioned authors―with their unique characteristics and in their mutual opposition―in the context of this doubleness that has just been emphasized” (cols. 178–179). P. C. Kierkegaard then provides descriptions of Søren Kierkegaard (→ 414,15) and Martensen (→ 414,17). Martensenian-Petrine notion of soundness of mind] See P. C. Kierkegaard’s lecture, which views work on dogmatics as sober-mindedness, Dansk Kirketidende (→ 396,24), cols. 184–187. I make use of pseudonyms … speak in subdued and gentle tones] In describing Søren Kierkegaard, P. C. Kierkegaard’s lecture (→ 414,15) does not take the pseudonyms into account, just as he does not differentiate between the various pseudonymous works, of which Fear and Trembling (1843) is the only one explicitly named, while he vaguely alludes to a couple of others. The edifying works published under Søren Kierkegaard’s own name were not mentioned at all.

1849

665

the difference between … the category … the way in which I use it] In his lecture, P. C. Kierkegaard notes that Søren Kierkegaard continually seeks “the single individual,” but he notes this only in order to contrast it with the circumstance that his brother appeared to be in the process of acquiring adherents (→ 411,5). At many points Søren Kierkegaard reflects on the category “the single individual” or “that single individual,” which appears both in the pseudonymous works as part of a polemical assault on systematic speculative philosophy and in the edifying works, published under Kierkegaard’s own name, in which the Christian and ethical function of the category is emphasized; see the account provided in “A Word Concerning the Relation of My Activity as an Author to ‘That Single Individual’” (→ 351,2). I am, a�er all, 8 years older than my brother] P. C. Kierkegaard was born in 1805 and Søren Kierkegaard in 1813.

18

4th Sunday in Advent] The gospel text for this Sunday, which in 1849 fell on December 23, is Jn 1:19–28; the epistle text for this Sunday was Phil 4:4–7. what Jn. the Baptist says … my joy is fulfilled] See Jn 3:29. And thus] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry. the joys of placability through meekness (v. 5)] See Phil 4:5 (→ 407,30). The most beautiful joy.] Variant: added. the joy of being unworried (v. 6) in prayer (v. 6)] See Phil 4:6 (→ 407,30). The most blessed joy.] Variant: added. The joy that is the peace of God] See Phil 4:7 (→ 407,30). passes all understanding] See Phil 4:7 (→ 407,30). it preserves hearts and minds in Xt Jesus] See Phil 4:7 (→ 407,30).

30

Peter] → 396,23. I have lived qua author for such a long time] i.e., since the publication of Either/Or (→ 409,11). in behalf of the party] i.e., in behalf of the Grundtvigians. enter the lists against R. N.] i.e., to win favor by situating Rasmus Nielsen (→ 402,14) in a bad

16

26

407

33 2

408

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

17 22 24

408

666

26

30 35

409

4

7

11

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 97

light. See P. C. Kierkegaard’s treatment of Nielsen in his lecture (→ 411,5). he, who has been a follower and copier of Grundtvig] P. C. Kierkegaard had been a close associate of Grundtvig since the mid-1830s and was a respected member of his circle. In the early 1840s, P. C. Kierkegaard a�empted, together with J. C. Lindberg and Grundtvig, to produce a historical proof for Grundtvig’s theory that the Apostles’ Creed originated with Jesus himself; see, e.g., Nordisk Tidsskri� for christelig Theologie (→ 396,23). He o�en expressed his Grundtvigian views as an eager participant in the Roskilde Ecclesiastical Convention (→ 396,27) and in pieces he contributed to Dansk Kirketidende. ― Grundtvig: Nikolai Frederik Severin Grundtvig (1783–1872), Danish theologian, priest, author of hymns, historian, and politician; from May 1839, priest at Vartov Hospital Church in Copenhagen. the entire period when I was suffering persecution by the mob] i.e., since early 1846 (→ 393,24). He knows that I have been concerned about my finances] → 352,28. See also journal entry NB5:95, in KJN 4, 413 and its explanatory note. the two tendencies: Martensen―and S. K.] See P. C. Kierkegaard’s descriptions of Martensen (→ 414,17) and Søren Kierkegaard (→ 414,15). he only wants to exploit these two tendencies] A�er providing an exegesis of 2 Cor 5:15, P. C. Kierkegaard himself says that from here on he will apply the biblical text to the two literary phenomena (→ 407,5). Toward the end of his lecture he writes: “But, we must return again to the principal figures and to how I enjoy and employ them― not exactly because I want either to propose a theory about how this best could and ought to be done, or in order to put myself forward as an example to be imitated―but, inasmuch as scarcely any of us has excluded one of these authors (not to mention both of them) from the things he reads and thinks about, talk of enjoying and employing them is really res populi [Latin, “a public ma�er”] and is of general interest to the present circle of people and to the present time” Dansk Kirketidende, no. 219 (→ 396,24), col. 191. 7 years’ work] Kierkegaard usually dated the beginning of his writing career from the publication of Either/Or, which appeared on February 20,

1849

1843, and on which he worked from October 1841 until January 1843; see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Enten ― Eller in SKS K2–3, 58. a half hour] i.e., the amount of time P. C. Kierkegaard was granted for his lecture; see Dansk Kirketidende (→ 396,28), col. 171. He cautiously covers himself … at the last minute] → 396,28. see p. 158 bo�om in this journal] See entry NB14:102 in the present volume. does not want to mediate between two sinful hum. beings] A�er providing descriptions of Kierkegaard and Martensen, P. C. Kierkegaard’s lecture continues by stating: “And a�er these expositions, you probably expect that I will now proceed to criticize both the authors I have discussed, and in particular point out the degree to which the temptations lying closest to their opposed standpoints have been too much for them. But that is not my intention at all. I have never yet criticized anyone, and I will not do so now, either. So, do I perhaps want to mediate between the two of them, doing so―en passant―to my own glory, so that I can quickly sketch a new system while standing on their shoulders? That is even less my intention. It is certainly true that I regard the art of mediation as a good, old art that I am happy to recognize and acknowledge, even under its Hegelian name. Indeed, I know well that Christian knowledge, theology, and especially dogmatics have always developed in reply to questions and as solutions to difficulties that arise for thought when it dwells on the particulars of the Word of the Lord and places them in relation to one another―always presupposing that both particulars are true and are capable of being united in the thought of the congregation as well as in that of the Lord … But for all that, I nevertheless have absolutely no desire to mediate between the authors cited. Or, be�er: precisely because I have my eye on the task―which is never fully discharged until the end of time―of seeing the unity within the contradictions in the divine Word: precisely for this reason, I have not the time to search for it [the unity] between the theories or paradoxes of two erring human beings. And even less in the present case, for as one of our

11

13 3

408m

1

409m

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 97–102

409m

8

409

31

32

37

proverbs says: Why would a sparrow dance with cranes, or an owl among crows? ―and even less because, if it truly succeeded, mediating between them would of course only become a new system, in opposition to which a new protest from the side of life and transcendence would demand a new mediation, a movement that would continue until the end of the world, even without me. On the other hand, what I do want to do can thus be expressed in a few words: I want to express my outspoken wonder about a phenomenon with respect to the effect that seems to be emanating from Søren Kierkegaard’s efforts. And then I will confide in you here, sub rosa, concerning the manner in which I, for my part, enjoy and employ the two famous authors―especially the one of whom I first spoke [i.e., Søren Kierkegaard]” Dansk Kirketidende [ → 396,24], cols. 187–189). I do not think … illusion-makers] Variant: this marginal note was begun in the main text column. So now … the notion … to form a school] Kierkegaard is referring to the reception accorded Rasmus Nielsen’s Evangelietroen og den moderne Bevidsthed (→ 405,8) and to the debate that ensued a�er the publication of Nielsen’s Kierkegaardian critique of Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 382,12) as well as to the reception of Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous piece Two Minor Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 405,10). This is supposed to be an objection against me] See, e.g., P. C. Kierkegaard’s discussion of the situation (→ 411,5). profited by borrowing from me] → 396,39.

410

1

what I have always said … in Denmark] See journal entry NB10:166 in KJN 5, 349.

410

11

If only I had physical strength] Kierkegaard complains about his physical health at a number of points; see, e.g., journal entry NB6:74 (1848) in KJN 5, 56–57.

410

17

H. H.] → 405,10. simplicity of immediacy;] Variant: first wri�en “simplicity of immediacy.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence.

19

1849

667

all the Hegelian business … arriving at certainty] Refers to the philosophical requirement that one remain skeptical or that one doubt received principles in order thereby to arrive at a firm, self-evident foundation on which a true philosophy can be constructed systematically. This requirement stems from the French philosopher René Descartes (1596–1650), and in his own way the German philosopher Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel (1770–1831) developed it further, a trend that was continued by the Danish Hegelians. Kierkegaard touches on this theme at many points in his pseudonymous works, e.g., in Philosophical Fragments; see PF, 81; SKS 4, 281.

29

Peter] → 396,23. Peter came down in the month of December] It is not known exactly when the visit took place. In a le�er he wrote to his brother, presumably from the la�er half of December 1849, Søren Kierkegaard raises a number of complaints about his brother’s well-intended article; see LD, 337–338; B&A 1, 264–265. he had given a lecture in which he had spoken about Martensen and me] → 396,24. he had actlly spoken against R. Nielsen and a certain H. H.] In the published version of the lecture, P. C. Kierkegaard writes: “But even if Søren Kierkegaard’s own life is perhaps in many ways like that of a hermit in the midst of a bustling crowd, even if he himself indeed always seeks ‘the single individual,’ he seems to be finding something quite different. He indeed seems to be at the point of finding adherents who admire his advice to stick to life and not to theory, and who out of sheer admiration―indeed, do not do likewise, but write about it. And thus even now we are able to detect harbingers of the strange spectacle of people who make the protest of life against theory into a new theory―the spectacle of this: that the essential difference between them and their opponents becomes this: that the one group regards knowledge as privileged and is therefore tempted to forget life; the other group, on the other hand, regards knowledge as not privileged, and then, with respect to knowledge and

1 2

3 5

411

668

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 102

the development of knowledge, becomes equally theoretical; instead of being practical, it protests and refutes by means of a press in a publishing house―instead of deeds, of the ordeal by fire in which a person’s life is at stake. In my judgment, this is in fact the tendency of Professor Rasmus Nielsen’s lecture on the relation between faith and modern consciousness [ → 405,8]. And if they listen to his voice, perhaps it will seem to more people than me that it is as though they were seeing a brand new, third truth spring forth, the contents of which is the theory that are two truths, each of which is equally correct, equally consistent, within its own sphere: that of faith, and that of unbelieving speculation. But of course, if such a discovery were actually to develop into a conscious and definite message, I would scarcely ever agree with it. For I am decidedly altogether of the conviction that a lie always refutes itself, more or less as did the false witnesses whom Caiphas paid to testify against the Lord [Mt 26:57–68]; and indeed a principal part of the calling of Christian scholars and teachers is to point out to believers and to unbelievers how all unchristian knowledge entraps itself in its own self-contradictions. And it seems to me that H. H.’s ethical essays are moving in this same direction. For even though at many points both of them include tendencies from Søren Kierkegaard’s works, and even though in their modes of expression and their preference for dialectical tricks they are strikingly similar to his style, in my view they lack the stamp of genuine passion. Indeed, if I remember rightly, when the first of them repeats the not ungrounded assertion concerning the energy of silence, the person who speaks it is not practicing it, and vice versa―so I find it quite proper that within ecstatic literature this principle be placed á cheval [French, “on horseback”] at the point of the paradox’s razor edge; but then I do not understand what relation this entire essay is supposed to have to the question of the extent to which a person dare saddle other people with the responsibility they assume by making him a martyr. For, at least to me, it appears that a person who was vividly aware of such a situation would necessarily remain silent, and that the person who debated about it (and,

1849

indeed, probably even consciously avoids the obvious way out) has―in the midst of the protest about life [i.e., as opposed to theory]―gone over to the side of theory” (Dansk Kirketidende [→ 396,24], cols. 190–191). ― R. Nielsen: → 402,14. ― H. H. → 405,10 and → 411,12. first I have to write up the lecture] According to his diary, P. C. Kierkegaard began writing up the lecture in mid-November 1849 (→ 396,24). Well, he said very li�le about H. H. … a striking resemblance to S. K.] P. C. Kierkegaard’s view of the pseudonym H. H. (→ 411,5) was probably influenced by the widespread opinion that H. H. had plagiarized Kierkegaard; see the review in Dansk Kirketidende (→ 405,10). recently taken up … “All are yours,” … used in the lecture] Allusion to 1 Cor 3:21–23. P. C. Kierkegaard used the biblical passage in the preface to the first volume of his journal Fortsæ�elser fra Pedersborg (→ 390,29), vol. 1, p. 7, and he concludes his lecture with the words: “And thus, as you will easily appreciate, both of these honored gentlemen are quite to my liking, if I merely bear in mind in lively fashion that all things are ours when we are Christ’s (1 Cor 3:22–23). Thus I have absolutely nothing against the speculative tendency, whoever its spokesman may be, when it repeatedly induces me to experiment in the sphere of knowledge. And this in spite of the fact that I well know that as soon as I have entered that territory, puffed-up knowledge, the Hercules of concepts and ideas, immediately begins to take me, like all mortals, into its embrace, to li� me up off the earth, and then to smother me in the air―and that the beginning of the affair is just as seductive as the conclusion is dangerous. But therefore I have even less against having an ecstatic monastery brother who, when danger is at hand, does not call out to me with a clever expression on his face, saying, ‘Nachbar, mit Rat’ [German, “Be careful, my friend”]―which could easily make the temptation even more tempting―but who, with all necessary ingenuity, trips me up in order that I might sink to my knees. Because on our knees and on our faces we are all invincible to that Hercules, just as was Antaeus of old” (Dansk Kirketidende [ → 396,24], col. 193).

11

12

18

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 103–107 411

26

the words of John the Baptist: [“]I am a voice.[”]] See Mt 3:3.

411

34

Thomas a Kempis … shall remember him] Refers to bk. 4 (“On the Holy Sacraments”), chap. 6 (“Reply” [to the question of how one ought to prepare oneself for communion]), pt. 4 in Thomas a Kempis, om Christi E�erfølgelse (→ 347,4): “For you cannot bring God a sacrifice more pleasing than this, and there is nothing be�er than this to gain the forgiveness of sins, than to devote oneself entirely to God when receiving the sacrament. When a human being does what he can, and honestly repents of the evil he has done, then [‘]Whenever he turns to me, praying for grace and forgiveness, I will assure him,[’] says the Lord, ‘that as certain as it is that I live, I shall not will the death of sinners; instead―if he turns about on his path―I shall will that he might live; none of his sins shall remember him, all will be forgiven him[’] (Ezek 33:11–16)” (p. 193). Gnrlly, this is read differently: None of his sins shall be remembered] The authorized Danish translation of the OT in Kierkegaard’s time was similar to the NRSV, which translates the relevant portion of Ezek 33:16 as “None of the sins that they have commi�ed shall be remembered against them.”

35

412

2

3

6 7

7

16

Christmas Day] Or “Christ’s Birthday” in the Danish order of service; the gospel text for the vesper service was Lk 2:1–14; see below. Today a Savior is born unto you … when he was born] Allusion to Lk 2:10–11. ― it was night: Variant: first wri�en “it was night.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. when God says, [“]Today[”],] See Lk 2:11, where these words are spoken by an angel (→ 412,3). ― [“]Today[”],: Variant: first wri�en “[“]Today[”].”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. books that are published [“]in this year.[”]] Refers to early popular books and broadsheet ballads, which bore the inscription “published this year” in order to make them appear up-to-date. forgo�en,] Variant: first wri�en “forgo�en.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence.

1849

669

give away all his wealth to the poor … love his neighbor] → 353,26. Xt’s words: If anyone … he shall experience etc.] It is not clear what is being referred to here.

8

H. H.] → 405,10. Peter finds it inconsistent that … someone is saying it] In the introduction to Two Minor EthicalReligious Essays (→ 405,10) Kierkegaard has the pseudonym H. H. make the following argument: “Silence and the capacity to act correspond precisely to one another. Silence is the measure of the capacity to act; a person never has more capacity to act than he has silence. Everyone understands very well that taking action is something much greater than talking about doing so; therefore if he himself is sure that he can do it, and he has decided that he will do it, he does not talk about it” (LD, 56; SKS 11, 62). P. C. Kierkegaard comments on this passage in his lecture (→ 411,5). in the book itself … for the truth] Refers to the first essay, “Does a Human Being Have the Right to Let Himself Be Put to Death for the Truth? A Posthumous Work of a Solitary Human Being: A Poetical Venture by H. H.” in Two Minor EthicalReligious Essays (→ 405,10), where Kierkegaard writes in chap. D, no. 3: “Furthermore, psychologically and dialectically, it is certainly remarkable to consider that it is not at all inconceivable that a human being could be put to death simply because he defended the notion that a human being does not have the right to let himself be put to death for the truth. Thus, if he lived at the same time as a tyrant (be it an individual human being or the crowd), the tyrant would perhaps mistakenly regard this as a satire directed at himself and become so indignant that he put him to death―him, the very person who had defended the notion that a human being does not have the right to let himself be put to death for the truth” (LD, 85; SKS 11, 89). All this and much more … published. H. H.] Refers to Journal NB11, which contains almost a score of entries dealing with concerns raised by the publication of Two Minor Ethical-Religious Essays (→ 405,10). See entries NB11:8ff., 33ff., 53, 112, 141, 193, and especially 64, all in the present volume.

21

413

15

22

28

37

413

670 414

5 15

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 108

Peter’s Remarks at the Convention] → 396,24. but he goes out … immediately into ecstasy] Refers to P. C. Kierkegaard’s lecture in which Søren Kierkegaard is made the representative of “ecstasy” (→ 396,28). In his description of Søren Kierkegaard, which takes up three columns, P. C. Kierkegaard writes: “What Søren Kierkegaard investigates with the warmth of a lover and speaks about with the enthusiasm of a poet certainly does not include the work of redemption―and only in part does it include apostolic majesty. On the contrary, he really concerns himself only with one part of the order of salvation, with faith, and exclusively with faith as subjective, indeed with this subjective faith almost only to the extent that it contains within itself the subjection of thought to the authority of the Word, the subjection of danger to trusting confidence (see Jn 7:46, 2 Cor 10:5, and Mt 14:31, Rom 14:18–21, Heb 11:17ff.). But naturally, all these limitations of the territory claimed by his argument change nothing whatsoever with respect to the quite distinctive characteristics of that territory’s climate and soil types. There is no one portion of the work of redemption, no one portion of the order of salvation, that is transcendent in relation to all human thought in such a way that the remainder [of the work of redemption, of the order of salvation] is capable of being understood by flesh and blood and being cut up into digestible tidbits in usum delphini [Latin, “for the use of children”], more or less in the way that an enfeebled supernaturalism divided the mysteries into the transparent and the inconceivable. [The appropriate expression for] that which exceeds all thought and all of nature, for that in things which is incommensurable with human knowledge: [the appropriate expression for] this, both as an element in and a property of all of God’s works, for us and in us―that is, for creation as redemption, for faith as confidence, for faith as constancy, and for faith as a bride’s devotion (honor and faithfulness)―in brief for Christianity, both in the objective and the subjective sense, from beginning to end―is the ecstatic. Consequently, it [the ecstatic] is also present in that element in the concept faith that has excited him. And furthermore, one cannot easily fail

1849

to appreciate that his treatment of the subject approaches the ecstatic in the manner in which Paul has instructed us to understand this concept in a Christian fashion. As everyone here surely can remember, in the temptation of Abraham amid ‘fear and trembling’―thus, in the highest most exciting struggle―he (for here I am of course speaking of the writer, not the person) fastens his gaze on faith. And the passionate power of his visions and his eloquent words inform us immediately that what we have here is not theatrical tension and dramatic phrases. Therefore this image is present for him everywhere, and confronted with this, he is tempted to want to chase away―like fog and mirages, moving delusively between him and his goal―everything that lacks the energy associated with the greatest sort of tension. The situation is similar with respect to faith’s independence from compelling proofs. Its [faith’s] inner decisiveness and unshakableness, ‘hoping against hope’ (Rom 4:18) for the future―and of course, as a counterpart to this, its [faith’s] repose in the facts of the redemption, regardless of whether or not the acta Pilati [Latin, “The Acts of Pilate,” an apocryphal text from the 2nd–5th centuries, purporting to contain documents relating to the trial, crucifixion, burial, and resurrection of Jesus] and a meticulous cross-examination of the authors of the gospels agree with this, whether or not accounts of this sort make every thinker feel faint or bankrupt―this is what he has his eye and his heart set upon. And from this time on, he carried out, in a good sense, something that was wri�en in Faust’s books in an uneasy sense: [‘]Auf, bade, Schüler, unverdrossen / Die ird’sche Brust im Morgenroth[’] [German, “Arise, student, bathe your mortal breast undaunted in the red of dawn,” Goethe, Faust, I. v. 445–446]. He will not leave that vision; rather, he plunges anew every day into the sea of light and fullness he has found there, always afraid that, like the son of Thetis [i.e., Achilles], he will retain a tiny dry spot on his heel, where he could be wounded by the arrow of speculation and the poison of doubts and proofs, so that he would die the death of spiritlessness. Faith has within itself the energy of choice and decision, and is opposed by the world’s power and

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 108

9

the world’s wit, its swords and staves, the strongholds of logism and the snares of method (2 Cor 10:4–5 and Eph 6:11; see 4:14). He has sensed this, and therefore not only does he refuse to tolerate any belief because one understands, but absolutely no ‘belief because’―indeed, he therefore does not even have any use for an understanding, because one believes. An opportunity of this sort must seem to him much more like Sganarel’s journey to the land of philosophy or Ulysses von Ithacia’s journey to Troy [both are allusions to comedies by Ludvig Holberg]―an undertaking that fails worst when it succeeds best, because faith, like the youthful bride of one’s heart, is si�ing there all the while like a widow or is presenting one with a divorce petition. Faith is tried in ba�le and is strengthened in danger. He has sensed this. And therefore he is glad to cool off now and again (especially when the blood rises to his head and the thoughts within crisscross one another with dizzying speed) by a leap from the mainmast of speculation in order to swim in ‘seventy thousand fathoms of water.’ And, moved by sheer sympathy for our well-being, he gladly makes us take the plunge at the same time. In vain do we try to insinuate as politely as possible that just as we are still not yet able to serve only one master, so would we prefer to try mediating a li�le, uniting the refreshing qualities of swimming with the security of a safety belt. He splits hairs as well as we do, if not be�er, and he flings us out into the water as the gymnastics instructor does the naval cadet, salving his conscience with the thought that when we were on land or wearing our safety belts we were, a�er all, shamming―and if we are to be saved we must let everything depend upon [the possibility of] drowning. The believer is ‘someone in love,’ he says. The defense of this proposition is his cause. But then, what must he not think when we wish to win people for the faith by means of proofs? Moreover, marriages of convenience do not have the best reputation. And, of course, all these things are pure gems in the crown of paradox. And as you know, he indeed says this as a man who well knows how to appraise these jewels and the rainbow garland of paradoxes they produce when expertly placed in

1849

671

proximity to one another. And he values all this not merely as an intellectual game but (in order to push the paradox to its u�ermost point) as the immanent categories of the faith of the simple person, as elements of the struggle to which everyone is called―even if only a very few choose to engage in that struggle―the struggle for life and peace, the struggle for a garland that will never wither” (Dansk Kirketidende [→ 396,24], cols. 179–182). Martensenian sober-mindedness] When P. C. Kierkegaard presents Martensen (→ 382,12) as the representative of sober-mindedness, he does so with some reservations, because he is only considering Martensen’s Den christelige Dogmatik (→ 382,12) as opposed to his earlier, inconsistent ventures into speculation (→ 418,31). Furthermore, P. C. Kierkegaard maintains, work in the field of dogmatics, which is an expression of sobermindedness, presupposes, first of all, the contents of faith and faith’s appropriation, and next, that the new life gained thereby is a renewal of that which originally was present in us, and, especially, that the new person is the same in everyone: “But certainly no proof is needed to show that in Professor Martensen’s latest work he has at any rate intended to work within these presuppositions and that to some extent he himself has expressly declared this” (Dansk Kirketidende [→ 396,24], col. 186). half an hour’s preparation] → 396,28. a professor who has a career at a university] i.e., such as Martensen (→ 382,12). actually seems] Variant: first wri�en “seems that”. nonsensical mediator] Even though P. C. Kierkegaard declares in his lecture that he does not want to “mediate” between the two authors (→ 409m,1), he nonetheless arrives at a convenient compromise, so that a�er having read the one author for a while, one can come to equilibrium by reading the other, and vice versa: “Thus, Professor Martensen, like every other theologian, essentially ought to serve me simply as a goad―made necessary by concern for the congregation, for whose sake all the specific gi�s of grace exist―in the search for new acquisitions in the area of knowledge, in service to life. But he is most o�en a temptation to me, just like all the others whose voices

17

23 27 30 33

672

35

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 108–112

tend to awaken in my own breast pretensions of the vision and knowledge of a speculative dogmatist, for the sake of that vision and knowledge itself. And when this pretension awakens and truly begins to make its presence known, the blood rises to my head, if not in the physical, then in the spiritual sense; then old dreams hover before my eyes in new forms, then I wave away all objections quickly and with great superiority, surmounting all difficulties, seeing truths I had never previously suspected. But then―despite the fact that I continually tell myself that all this grows only in the soil of faith, drawing its nourishment only from the dew of the heavenly Word―I immediately begin to depend, bit by bit, upon this knowledge as a legitimately acquired possession that I can assert and defend. I begin to forget that the faith I had last year or yesterday, [the faith] from which my knowledge arose―[I begin to forget] that I must have that faith now, now, or else the whole thing is a castle in the air. Thank God, I am reminded of this―even though many times it is against my will―by the seriousness of life, by the trials of faith during which the entire army of concepts flees as soon as the first shots are fired, just like the troops of Jakob von Thybo [in Ludvig Holberg’s eponymous comedy]. But I have been delighted to discover in Søren Kierkegaard’s writings a means by which I can remind myself of all this before it is too late, a medicine that protects against conceptual dizziness before the most stringent of cures must be employed. An hour of reading those writings has, in fact, almost exactly the same effect upon me that a shower used to have upon my physical constitution. For a moment it is as though the life in me were gasping for air, and then I am breathing deeply and freely once again in the fresh breezes of faith, while the legions of the intellect retreat to their subordinate position as the servants of life, and the head is once again satisfied with being a head instead of being the entire person. And thus, as you will easily be able to appreciate, both of the honored gentlemen [i.e., Martensen and Søren Kierkegaard] are entirely to my liking” (Dansk Kirketidende [ → 396,24], cols. 192–193). Grundtvig] → 408,26.

1849

While the air is still … Brorson] → 393,7. see NB 12 p. 171] See journal entry NB12:132 in the present volume.

18

415

1

415m

During the time Xns were persecuted … illuminate ceremonial occasions] When large areas in Rome were consumed by fire in the year 64, Emperor Nero (37–68; emperor, 54–68) was accused of having set the fires himself, but he cast the blame on the Christian congregation of the city, who were severely punished: “All Christians were imprisoned and executed in the most frightful fashion. The unfortunate individuals were put into woolen sacks that were stuffed with tow, sewed shut, and then smeared with pitch. Then these living mummies were half buried in the earth in long rows, like pilings, and ignited as torches along the racetrack at night,” Beckers Verdenshistorie (→ 391,18), vol. 3 (1823), p. 716. See also Tacitus, Annals, 15, 44; Kierkegaard owned Caius Cornelius Tacitus, af det Latinske med de fornødenste Anmærkninger, især for Ustuderede [Caius Cornelius Tacitus, from the Latin, with the Most Necessary Notes, Especially for Those Who Have Not Studied Latin], trans. Jacob Baden, 3 vols. (Copenhagen, 1773–1797; ASKB 1286–1288).

9

416

Stilling] Peter Michael Stilling (1812–1869), philosopher, abandoned his studies of theology shortly before his examinations but later was granted a dispensation and earned the magister degree in philosophy with the dissertation Den moderne Atheisme eller den saakaldte Neohegelianismes Conseqvenser af den hegelske Philosophie [Modern Atheism, or So-called NeoHegelianism as a Consequence of Hegelian Philosophy] (Copenhagen, 1844; ASKB 801). In the early 1840s, Stilling was a spokesman for a conservative version of Hegelianism; at the end of the decade he fully rejected this position. A�er a study tour he worked as a privatdocent in the period 1846–1850. your spouse] On December 1, 1846, P. M. Stilling had married Frederikke Marie Larsen, who died a year later, on December 22, 1847, at the age of thirty-three. one’s time] Variant: first wri�en “one’s life”.

17

416

20

25

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 112–117 417

5

For a moment, I thought I would write … the li�le book against Martensen] The passage Kierkegaard cites is the original conclusion of the le�er to P. M. Stilling (published in dra� form in LD, 338–339; B&A, 1, 265), where it has been shortened to read: “thus I in turn refer you to her, and thus I, someone entirely unknown to her, have occasion to think of her.” In the note to this entry Kierkegaard refers to a work by Stilling, Om den indbildte Forsoning af Tro og – Viden, med særligt Hensyn til Prof. Martensens “christelige Dogmatik”. Kritisk-polemisk A�andling [On the Imagined Reconciliation of Faith and Knowledge, with Particular Reference to Prof. Martensen’s Christian Dogmatics: Polemical Essay] (Copenhagen, 1850; ASKB 802), which had been strongly influenced by Kierkegaard; it was advertised as “appeared” in Berlingske Tidende, no. 303, December 22, 1849. Kierkegaard’s own copy of the book has the following dedication: “To Hr. Magister S. Kierkegaard, in deep gratitude and respect, cordially, the author”; see ASKB, p. 56. ― Martensen: → 382,12.

417

15

His Eminence] According to the Danish system of rank and precedence, starting in 1847 the bishop of Zealand, J. P. Mynster (→ 354,33), was ranked number thirteen in the first class and was the only person to be referred to as “His Eminence.” the star of his knightly order] As a clerical knight of the Order of the Great Cross of the Dannebrog, Mynster (→ 354,33) was to bear a gold cross suspended from a ribbon around his neck, and on his le� breast a large cross decorated with silver rays forming a star. even if everyone abandoned Xt … I would nonetheless] → 386,10. too li�le] Variant: first wri�en “too li�le.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence.

16

18 23

418

7

14

Now they say that I supposedly have acquired adherents and so on] See, e.g., P. C. Kierkegaard’s lecture (→ 411,5). But if] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry.

1849

673

then Peter comes, too … was no thinker] A reference to P. C. Kierkegaard’s lecture in which Martensen, who supposedly represents sobermindedness (→ 414,17), is described as follows: “Next, with respect to Prof. Martensen, it is of course only with many reservations, and only in a certain sense, that it would occur to me to portray him as an author whose theological efforts in the service of the congregation present us with sobriety and cautiousness. Indeed, this is not because I am in agreement with the idea and the manner of speaking that characterizes his first years as a docent as a strictly speculative systematist. For when one has had occasion, as I have had, to keep a constant eye on the course of his development, then one knows that right from the beginning, he―and here I am of course speaking of the docent and not of the person―had the habit of cu�ing off the threads of his own thinking at certain points and of breaking with his own assumptions so as not to get involved in a conflict with various parts of the contents of the Christian faith that he would not sacrifice to the owls of dialectic or the eagles of intuition to which he otherwise burned incense in the vestibule of the temple of the System, declaring them to be the guardian spirits of the place. Indeed, then one also knows something that during my time as a tutor I had ample occasion to see for myself and at times to point out to others―that inconsistencies of this sort simply were not noticed by the public at large for three reasons: first, because when he began, theology students in this country did not exactly have the clearest notion of what the word ‘speculation’ means and what constitutes consistent thinking; next, because every time he stood at the crossroads and embraced an article of faith while his objective logic made ugly grimaces, he concealed his inconstancy from himself and from others, either by means of clever circumlocutions or with the ambiguity that is the hallmark of Hegelian dialectic; and finally, because those who, following Fichte’s counsel, depended wholly on pure thought and maintained an iron consistency in developing the germ of life of the Hegelian-Martensenian system, came to such tangibly unchristian results that every heart that could not dispense with all faith―

31

418

674

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 117–120

and that nonetheless did not want to break with speculation―was compelled to conclude that this sort of thing had to be ‘illegitimate’ speculation, that the sort of consistency that led to despairing results ought to be called a distortion, an intellectual blind alley, in brief, inconsistent. But despite the fact that it is far from my view that Prof. Martensen ever put himself forward as a consistent and decisive proponent of a speculation that is independent of faith, nonetheless a large portion of his earlier works was strongly influenced by that sort of speculation. Indeed, it places so much emphasis on that sort of speculation that in my view it absolutely cannot be included when one speaks of an exposition of Christianity that is to be in the service of the congregation. And thus it is only the form that his system has begun to assume in recent years―or where it has not yet assumed this form, or expressly declared itself as such, even if it has not yet assumed it―that I have in mind when I here single him out as the most recent Danish theologian who appears to be joining the countless legion of those who, for eighteen hundred years now, have indeed worked for the growth of the congregation in its knowledge of our Lord Jesus Christ (see 2 Pet 3:18)” (Dansk Kirketidende [ → 396,24], cols. 183–184). ― I said it right from the start: See, e.g., journal entry BB:32 (1837) in KJN 1, 115. 419

1

this single word of Luther … humbled himself] Refers to Luther’s sermon on Phil 2:5–11, the epistle for Palm Sunday, in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 2, pp. 190–197, esp. p. 195, where Luther sets forth the first point in his exegesis of the circumstance that Jesus came in the form of a humble servant: “He humbled himself; that means that he presented himself as if he had put aside his divinity and did not want to make use of it.…Therefore, he [Paul] does not say that someone has humbled him, but that he has humbled himself, just as a wise man, who does not put aside his wisdom or his wise conduct in an outward sense, but does in fact put both of them aside in such a way that in doing so he serves the fools who might reasonably be expected to serve him. A person such as this is also someone who humbles

1849

himself in the midst of his wisdom and the form of his wisdom.” there was no one in heaven … he humbled himself] See Phil 2:10 (→ 419,1). qualitatively, it is also infinitely] Variant: the words “qualitatively” and “infinitely” have been added.

4 10

“seek first the kingdom of God”] See Mt 6:33.

14

419

The day before yesterday I went for a walk with Nielsen] Kierkegaard and Rasmus Nielsen regularly took walks together, generally on Thursdays (→ 402,20); the last Thursday in 1849 was December 27. entire change of course] i.e., that Nielsen had turned against Martensen (→ 403,14). He felt himself shunted aside … that was supposed to be his] The Royal Scientific Society was founded in 1742 for the purpose of furthering “the sciences” (i.e., scholarship) in four categories: history, physical sciences, mathematics, and philosophy. Every member in a given category could propose a new member in the same category, and if the candidate’s scholarly qualifications were in order, and the members in that category voted in favor―and therea�er the rest of the society voted in favor―he could become a member for life. Professor of philosophy Poul Martin Møller had never become a member because he had not published scholarly essays. In the interval between Møller’s death in 1838 and Rasmus Nielsen’s appointment as professor of philosophy in 1841, instruction in moral philosophy at the university had been entrusted to H. L. Martensen, who had been appointed lecturer in theology in 1838 and in 1840 had been promoted to extraordinary professor of theology. In the autumn of 1841, J. P. Mynster, who had been a member since 1819, suggested that H. L. Martensen be made a member of the society; Martensen became a member on December 3, 1841. The society’s membership list indicates that Martensen had been included under the title “professor of philosophy,” which was in fact the vacant position to which Rasmus Nielsen was appointed during the same period. See the society’s membership lists and

25

419

27 29

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 120–124

419m

1

420

1

4

420

16

regulations in Christian Molbech, Det kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs Historie i dets første Aarhundrede 1742–1842 [The History of the Royal Danish Scientific Society during Its First Century, 1742–1842] (Copenhagen, 1843), pp. 520–532, 590– 596. Nielsen did not become a member of the society until 1876. R. Nielsen] → 402,14. the usual talk … subjectivity, etc.] Refers to the reception of Concluding Unscientific Postscript, a work in which subjectivity (inwardness, personal appropriation) is strongly emphasized as opposed to “objective” observations. ― Joh. Climacus: Johannes Climacus is the pseudonymous author of Philosophical Fragments (1844) and Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846). The name Climacus is presumably a reference to the Greek theologian and monk Johannes Klimax (Greek, “ladder”) (ca. 525–616), who lived for forty years as a hermit at Mount Sinai and was the author of the work Κλίµαξ τοῡ παραδείσου also known in Latin as Scala paradisi [Ladder of Paradise]. See also the more detailed note in SKS K4, 197. in one of the final sections … is the How of “faith.”] A reference to the subdivision titled “Becoming a Christian Is Defined Subjectively in the Following Way,” in Concluding Unscientific Postscript, pt. 2, sec. 2, chap. 5, “Conclusion,” in CUP, 610–616; SKS 7, 554–559, where a note states: “All lovers have the ‘how’ of love in common, and then the single individual must add the name of his beloved. But with respect to having faith (sensu strictissimo [Latin, “in the strictest sense”]) it is the case that this ‘how’ only applies to one object. If someone says, ‘Yes but then of course a person can in turn learn the “how” of faith by rote and ra�le it off,’ the reply must be, ‘That cannot be done, for the person who says it directly contradicts himself because the substance of the statement must constantly be reduplicated in the form, and the isolation that is a part of the definition must reduplicate itself in the form’” (CUP, 613–614n; SKS 7, 557n). The Happy Capsize … the goody-goody maiden, etc.] A reference to Ludvig Holberg’s (→

1849

675

422,16) comedy Det lykkelige Skibbrud [The Happy Capsize] (published 1731), in which a prostitute who is to be married has paid Magister Rosiflengius (a name which means “praising everything”), the town’s professional writer of occasional verse, to produce a poem for the wedding. The title of the verse is read out in act 3, sc. 3: “The Lily Entwined with the Rose,” and in the dedication the bride is referred to as “the noble, goody-goody maiden.” See Den Danske SkuePlads [The Danish Theater], 7 vols. (Copenhagen, 1758 or 1788 [1731–1754]; ASKB 1566–1567), vol. 4. The volumes have no date of publication and are unpaginated. The piece was performed eight times at the Royal Theater during the 1840s, most recently on April 24 and 25, 1847. when G. made the transition … proper respectability] → 380,32. Goldschmidt] → 380,32.

20 2

420m

rightly taught that no one is saved by good works … by faith] Reference to the Lutheran doctrine that a person does not become deserving of God’s grace by doing good works, but only through faith (→ 371,1). fatalistic understanding of election by grace] i.e., the dogma of predestination, which has assumed various forms in the Church’s history and maintains that God (either from all eternity or since the Fall) has predestined every individual human being either for eternal salvation or eternal damnation. So they added … which I must pray] Refers to the Lutheran doctrine of faith as a gi� from God (→ 371,19).

32

420

5

421

Berlingske Tidende trumpets … the finest phrases of the most cultivated urbanity] Hans Christian Ørsted’s book drew much a�ention in Berlingske Tidende (→ 422m,2), which ran a notice informing the readers of a review that would appear subsequently: “For the time being, we take the liberty of directing a�ention to the recently published book, Aanden i Naturen [The Soul in Nature], by Denmark’s famous scientist, the physicist H. C. Ørsted, because we view the work as very important” (Berlingske Tidende, no.

22

421

38

676

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 124

303, December 22, 1849). A bit less than a week later the paper published the review to which Kierkegaard refers, freely citing or paraphrasing a number of passages: “Aanden i Naturen. Almeenfa�elige Bidrag til at belyse Naturens aandelige Indhold [The Soul in Nature: A Contribution to Illuminating the Spiritual Content of Nature to the General Reader], by H. C. Ørsted, published by A. F. Høst. That which ought to be the true purpose of every branch of knowledge―to produce, as its final fruits, increasingly bountiful contributions toward a clear view of the world and of life―is something that this hero of natural science has done in such full measure as to satisfy even the most stringent requirements. And he has done so in such an elegant form that even in the book’s polemical passages, where erroneous views of nature are rebu�ed, the author continues to use the finest phrases of delightful urbanity, subjecting nature to such a solid investigation that it would seem that the intellect could not require anything more; making the innermost laws of the universe the object of an investigation that is so meticulous and so filled with quiet love, that one’s heart cannot avoid being captivated; and nature, with all its visible manifestations, reveals itself as a great, a mighty parable, which, while it does itself bear the sensory stamp of actuality, is nonetheless also the transparent veil through which God’s kingdom and the eternal ideas of the universe reveal their objective truth. In our time, when science and faith are pi�ed against one another and there are many people who term their mutual reconciliation a paradox, a problem that one must feel anxiety about resolving, this book is of great significance. Those people for whom faith―in spite of the fact that they insist it is absolute―seems to be so weak and feeble that they will not tolerate, for any reason in the world, that it come in too close contact with natural science, in order that it not be sha�ered by rough treatment at the hands of science, not even if science modestly declares that its intention is only to be of service to the Christian faith by working for its glorification, by cleansing and purifying it of all the accretions of all human superstition, by placing it in the critical flames of science, so that what is finite and hu-

1849

man might be burned away and the pure gold of divine truth might remain―and those to whom natural science is of significance only to the extent that they assert that when it is placed in harmony with faith, it would necessarily either lead to materialism or to rationalism, with their consequences, and who therefore regard natural science as a wild lion that must nonetheless be held in chains by a child, in order that with all its tendencies toward freedom it may not move or unse�le the childlike notions that Holy Scripture contains regarding natural phenomena; that it may not be so daring as to deny that on the fourth day God created the sun, the moon, and all the stars, mighty in their size and infinite in their numbers, merely in order to illuminate our delicate li�le earth; that it may not dare assert that the sun stands still while the earth rotates, because Joshua, the man of God, indeed commanded the sun to stand still at Gibeon: you see, we will give those people Aanden i Naturen to read so that they might learn from Ørsted that in the end, true natural science stands in the service of God’s kingdom, that they might feel the necessity, for the good of humanity, of taking a li�le portion of their absolute faith and sacrificing it on the altars of science, for from beginning to end, in the least of its judgments and conclusions, science has need of faith in the most profound sense of the term. But, finally, for those who are overwhelmed by the many trivial things of life, who are busy dealing with political and worldly ma�ers, this book beautifully calls to mind the one thing needful and asks that they at least once in a while sit quietly at the feet of nature and listen a li�le to the kingdom of God in the universe. We should not a�empt to use passages torn out of context to present an inadequate notion of the importance of the book, all the less because the book―despite its presentation, which is accessible to the general reader―for the most part reaches its conclusions by means of rigorous logical arguments that cannot be truncated midway; we will therefore simply refer to the book itself, which is to be regarded as one of the author’s most valuable gi�s to Danish literature. As is well known, in Alexander [von] Humboldt’s Kosmos [Cosmos] German literature possesses an

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 124–125 analogue to this book by Ørsted, which has the same goal: to make a contribution to a clearer view of the world by providing a brilliant understanding of nature; we scarcely need to add that despite their similar goals, these two books are infinitely different in the ways they a�ain them” (Berlingske Tidende, no. 306, December 28, 1849). ― Ørsted: Hans Christian Ørsted (1777–1851), Danish physicist; from 1806, extraordinary professor and from 1817, ordinary professor of physics at the University of Copenhagen, where he served as rector in 1825–1826, 1840–1841, and 1850–1851; from 1829, rector of the Polytechnic Institute. He collected a number of his philosophical essays, lectures, and dialogues in Aanden i Naturen, 2 vols. (vol. 1 with the subtitle “A Contribution to Illuminating the Spiritual Content of Nature to the General Reader”) (Copenhagen, 1850; ASKB 945); the work was advertised as “appeared” in Adresseavisen, no. 297, December 18, 1849. 421

35

“Science” is defended by Flyveposten and Berlingske Tidende] Reference both to the review of P. M. Stilling’s Om den indbildte Forsoning af Tro og – Viden (→ 417,5) that appeared in Flyve-Posten (→ 422m,1) and the review of H. C. Ørsted’s Aanden i Naturen that appeared in Berlingske Tidende (→ 421,22). In Flyve-Posten the issue is not natural science but theological scholarship: “Om den indbildte Forsoning af Tro og – Viden med særligt hensyn til Prof. Martensens “christelige Dogmatik.” Kritisk-polemisk A�andling af Mag. P. M. Stilling. The author of this polemic says that he is not like the naive layman who neither le� nor ever dared leave the precincts of immediacy; nor is he like the person who has been well-traveled in the ways of human knowledge, who has traveled away and has returned, who has completed his going hence and his coming hither―rather, he must be compared to someone who, having entered upon a pilgrimage of reflection, is still wandering restlessly and unsteadily up and down the road from which he anxiously turns back toward home only when the storm begins to rage, and he therefore believes―to remain with our metaphor―that he is best suited to be a sort of fellowtraveling inspector to keep his eye on travelers.

1849

677

The judgment he pronounces on the Dogmatics, which he criticizes from his standpoint, is that its actual category is the category of the composite, the category of eclecticism that wants to have the advantages of being everything, and precisely because of this is hindered from being anything decisively. Throughout the entire volume of dogmatics, he says, dogmatic knowledge limps along, dragging itself forward by supporting itself alternately on the leg of human knowledge, and then on the leg of faith. In contrast to his earlier standpoint, the author believes that Christian dogma is basically and fundamentally a cross for the intellect, and he then seeks to demonstrate that even if Prof. Martensen had succeeded in intellectualizing the dogma and in annulling all crosses for the intellect, this sort of certainty on the part of intelligence would abolish the certainty of faith and hope, ‘for a hope that is visible is no longer any sort of hope.’ But this is not in fact what has happened. On the contrary, with Martensen, reflection only manages to confirm dogma by not giving a full hearing to witnesses for reflection’s case or by not permi�ing them to state their case. As mentioned, previously the author [Stilling] had taken a different view of things―at that time he understood very well how to mediate between faith and knowledge; whether he has abandoned that standpoint because he now no longer has a ‘friendly’ relationship with Prof. Martensen or because Mag. Kierkegaard has caused him to abandon his standpoint, is something we will not decide. Furthermore, we will gladly let the author keep his ‘noble’ coat of arms, ‘Absurdum,’ trusting that even if Martensen’s dogmatics might be flawed on a number of points, it is still possible to come to a profound intellectual appropriation of Christianity by means of human knowledge, just as both the possibility and the necessity of ‘coherent theological thought, indeed theological speculation’ cannot be denied” (Flyve-Posten, no. 303, December 28, 1849). it is a�acked by Prof. Nielsen] i.e., in Nielsen’s two most recent works (→ 403,4 and → 403,14). and Magister Stilling] → 416,17 and → 417,5. goody-goody, maiden bride] → 420,16. divorced spouse of The Corsair] → 393,24.

36 37 7 8

422

678

9

422m

1

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 125–126

seems not disinclined … “Christian science.”] It is not clear what Kierkegaard is referring to, but it may be an allusion to Goldschmidt’s article describing the great celebration on the occasion of Adam Oehlenschläger’s seventieth birthday, November 14, 1849: “Poesie― Videnskab―Religion. Øehlenschlæger-Festen” [Poetry―Science―Religion: The Oehlenschläger Celebration], in Nord og Syd (→ 380,32), vol. 1, November 1849, pp. 369–383. Goldschmidt’s point of departure was Martensen’s (→ 382,12) speech at the celebration, in which Martensen had expressed the wish that Danish scholarship might move closer to Danish poetry; a�er a lengthy account of this, Goldschmidt concludes: “At the celebration for Oehlenschläger, the man who expressed that wish for the union of scholarship and science appears himself to belong to the school that wants to bring about a reconciliation of faith, knowledge, and poetry―in which ecclesiastical dogma will unite the authority and naive immediacy of faith with free philosophical thought and mystical poetical intuitions. Some people raise objections to this on grounds of faith, but we think it proper for us to stop here. The speech returned to its starting point, honoring Oehlenschläger generally as a great poet, not only because he draws aside the curtain shrouding the past, sings joyously and invigoratingly to his contemporaries, and shines a beam out into the future ‘which even illuminates scholarship,’ but because―in our view―he at the same time li�s the spirit of the people toward eternity, providing an assurance that there must be an immortality concerning which religion has the last word with every individual” (p. 383). Kierkegaard might also have had in mind a column in Nord og Syd in which readers were informed that among the literary works for the Christmas season, H. C. Ørsted’s Aanden i Naturen (→ 421,22) was particularly deserving of emphasis, which was why the journal was planning to review the work (which, however, it did not); see Nord og Syd, vol. 2, December 1849, p. 104. the business-oriented Flyvepost] i.e., Flyveposten, a conservative daily founded in 1845 by Eduard Meyer, who also served as its editor until 1852;

1849

the newspaper had broad circulation as a popular source of news and entertainment, with about seven thousand subscribers in the period 1848– 1850; see Je�e D. Søllinge and Niels Thomsen, De danske aviser 1634–1989 [Danish Newspapers, 1634–1989], 3 vols. (Odense, 1988–1991); vol. 2 (1989), pp. 114–115. the bumbling Berlingske Tidende] Den Berlingske politiske og Avertissements-Tidende [Berling’s Political and Advertisement Times], generally referred to as Berlingske Tidende, was founded in 1748; starting in January 1845, it appeared twice a day, carrying political material, news, reviews, business information, a literary supplement, and advertisements. Until 1848 the paper had a royal monopoly on publishing political news. In Kierkegaard’s day Berlingske Tidende and Adresseavisen were the only newspapers permi�ed to accept paid advertising. The German-DanishJewish businessman and economist Mendel Levin Nathanson (1780–1868) was editor of Berlingske Tidende from 1838 to 1858 (and subsequently in 1865–1866). Meyer] Goldschmidt’s first name, Meïr (→ 380,32). The Lily Entwined with the Rose] → 420,16. Nord og Syd’s] → 380,32. Holberg’s comedy] Ludvig Holberg (1684–1754), Danish-Norwegian writer, philosopher, and historian, professor at the University of Copenhagen from 1717. His thirty-three comedies made him the most read and most performed writer in Denmark; his comic tales of Peder Paars (1719) and Niels Klim (1741) were also extremely popular. an old man fears being made a cuckold] Allusion to Holberg’s comedy Barselstuen [The LyingIn Room] (1724), in which the seventy-year-old Corfitz, whose young wife is lying in childbed with their newborn baby, suffers most pitiably under the notion that he is not the father of the child and desperately seeks certainty that he in fact is. See Den Danske Skue-Plads (→ 420,16), vol. 2. The play was performed seventeen times at the Royal Theater in the 1840s, most recently on December 18 and 20, 1848.

2

4 5 7 16

25

422

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 126–128

31

35

423

26

27

423

30 31

the sort of wit characterized by a Troels] Allusion to Corfitz’s impudent servant in Holberg’s Barselstuen. Troels is the confidant who is supposed to help his tormented master, Corfitz, find out if he has been cuckolded, but he delights in making a bad situation worse. you, you noble one] Refers, as do the subsequent expressions “this noble irony,” “noble, simple man!,” and “noble wise man,” to Socrates, who displays his special comical powers in conversations with the Sophists, particularly in the dialogues of Plato (→ 381,17). Christmas only arose in the 4th century] See F. G. Lisco, Das christliche Kirchenjahr. Ein homiletisches Hül�uch beim Gebrauche der epistolischen und evangelischen Pericopen [The Christian Church Year: A Homiletic Manual for Use in Connection with the Epistolary and Gospel Texts], 2 vols., 3rd ed. (Berlin, 1843 [1834]; ASKB 629–630); in vol. 1, § 17, p. 9, “Up to the year 325 there are only very obscure and uncertain traces extant pertaining to this festival, but a�er the middle of the fourth century, under the reign of the Roman bishop Liberius, it makes its appearance, and it was in fact in the Roman Church, i.e., in the West, that it was first a universally acknowledged and highly celebrated festival.” See journal entry NB:50 in KJN 4, 47–48. in this respect the orthodox … the first 3 centuries] Presumably an ironic allusion to Grundtvig (→ 408,26) and his adherents, including P. C. Kierkegaard (→ 396,23), who tried to prove that the Apostles’ Creed can be traced in an unbroken line of transmission directly back to words spoken by Jesus Christ. ― orthodoxy: i.e., Grundtvigianism. Dr. Kierkegaard] → 396,23. Gedske in The Lying-In Room … without crying] Refers to Gedske Klokkers, a woman from Copenhagen who is a character in Holberg’s Barselstuen (→ 422,25); in act 2, sc. 12, she visits the new mother, and, crying and weeping, gives an account of all the minor and major troubles with which she has been plagued.

1849

679

as in Troy (see Ulysses von Ithaca) … trills and tremolos] Allusion to act 2, sc. 2, of Holberg’s comedy Ulysses von Ithacia, Eller En Tydsk Comoedie [Ulysses of Ithaca, or a German Comedy] (published 1725), in which Ulysses’s faithful servant, Chilian, asks a Trojan about the customs of his people: “Chilian: ‘What are your operas like?’ Trojan: ‘Rather peculiar, for when, for example, a lord wants to ask his servant to bring him his boots, he does so in song and with tremolos [singing], “Listen, Claus, bring me my boots,”’ Chilian: ‘It’s the same with us.’” See Den Danske Skue-Plads (→ 420,16), vol. 3. The work had not been performed at the Royal Theater since March 21, 1835. “When we gaze … one vaguely discerns, etc.”] A Grundtvigian passage of this sort has not been found in the writings of P. C. Kierkegaard. a clever mind] P. C. Kierkegaard had a reputation as a brilliant thinker and a fierce debater; as early 1829, he acqui�ed himself so well in the defense of his dissertation at Tübingen that he acquired the nickname “Der Disputierteufel aus Norden” [The Debating Devil from Scandinavia]. In the preface to the first volume of Fortsæ�elser fra Pedersborg (→ 390,29) (1849), he writes: “At times, people have been polite enough to describe me as a bit of a dialectician, and more than a few times people have also rather impertinently indicated, both to myself and to others, that I am supposedly the worst sophist on Zealand, apart from my brother” (p. 3). copying of Grundtvig] → 408,26. as Joh. Climacus … merely jesting] Reference to pt. 2, sec. 2, chap. 4, Division 2, B (“The Dialectical”) of Concluding Unscientific Postscript, where there is a parody of Grundtvigian gazing, glimpsing, and vague discernment. “Ordinarily, the inclination to discern vaguely and to point fingers is tempting only to a certain class of limited and fanciful people; every more competent and serious person strives to know what is what, whether it is something that can and must be understood, and then he will not glimpse; or is something that cannot and should not be understood: then he will not glimpse, either, nor―something that is the same thing in this case―[will he] jest.

32

37

9

11 13

424

680

23

424

31

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 128–135

For despite the serious expressions and raised eyebrows, this glimpsing is only fun and games, even if Hr. Knud, who is doing it, believes that it is pure and genuine earnestness” (CUP, 563–564; SKS 7, 512–513). ― Joh. Climacus: → 420,1. the caraway pretzel that Niels Klim lost … assumed a posture imitating N. K.] Allusion to chap. 1 of Holberg’s (→ 422,16) anonymously published comical tale Nicola Klimii Iter subterraneum [The Subterranean Journey of Nicholas Klim] (1741), published in Jens Baggesen’s Danish translation as Niels Klims underjordiske Reise [The Subterranean Journey of Niels Klim] (1789). Here Niels Klim recounts what happened to him shortly a�er his fall into the abyss: “It occurred to me, however, that I had a pretzel in my pocket; I took it out simply in order to see whether I could taste anything under these circumstances, but with the very first mouthful I immediately noticed that all earthly food had become disgusting to me, and I therefore threw it away as an unnecessary burden. Then I was very surprised when the castaway pretzel not only remained suspended in the air, but―oh, how strange!―even began a circular orbit around me. From this I acquired a notion of the true laws governing motion in accordance with which all bodies that are placed in a state of equilibrium must move in a circle.” Jens Baggesens danske Værker [The Danish Works of Jens Bagger], edited by the author’s sons and C. J. Boye, 12 vols. (Copenhagen, 1827–1832; ASKB 1509–1520), vol. 12, pp. 165–524; esp. p. 180. Grundtvig gazes so deeply into history] Kierkegaard o�en emphasizes this characteristic of Grundtvig (→ 408,26), though he was not the only person among Grundtvig’s contemporaries to notice this. See, e.g., the 22nd installment of Dansk Pantheon, et Portraitgallerie for Samtiden [Danish Pantheon, a Portrait Gallery for the Times] (Copenhagen, 1844), where Grundtvig is described as “an u�erly unique and matchless example of a prophet in ‘the time of the New Year’ [allusion to the title of a poem by Grundtvig]” with “a gaze that has looked deeply into the world of history and of the spirit” (unpaginated).

1849

have been the objects of persecution by the rabble] Refers to Corsaren’s a�ack on Kierkegaard and the consequences of that a�ack, namely, that Kierkegaard was harassed on the street (→ 393,24).

34

424

the Master] Frequently used appellation for Jesus in the NT. His] Variant: changed from “his”. they must suffer degradation precisely because of their relationship to oneself] See, e.g., Mt 10:17–18. a couple] Variant: added.

10

426

In a sermon Luther … who the person is] See, e.g., Luther’s sermon on 1 Pet 4:7–11, the epistle for the sixth Sunday a�er Easter, in En christelig Postille (→ 353,2), vol. 2, pp. 278–291; pp. 289–290. Paul so vehemently insist that he is an apostle ουϰ απ᾽ ανϑρωπων ουδε δι᾽ ανϑρωπου] Refers to Gal 1:1. In another connection Paul … all being of Xt] See 1 Cor 1:10–13.

34

religiousness (… in more rigorous edifying writings) … longing for death as something pious] Refers to the fact that the more rigorous edifying writings (especially pietistic works) present the longing for death as an expression of piety because death is regarded as deliverance away from the emptiness, sin, wretchedness, and evil of this world and into eternal life and eternal glory in God’s kingdom; see, e.g., bk. 2, chap. 57 of Johann Arndt, Vier Bücher vom wahren Christenthum [Four Books on True Christianity] (Magdeburg, 1605– 1610). See also Sämtliche geistreiche Bücher Vom Wahren Christenthum, Welche handeln Von heilsamer Buße herzlicher Reue und Leid über die Sünde wahrem Glauben auch heiligem Leben und Wandel der rechten wahren Christen [All Insightful Books on True Christianity, Which Treat of Healthy Repentance, Heartfelt Regret, and Remorse over Sin, True Faith, as well as the Holy Life and Doings of the Genuinely True Christian], 2nd ed. (Tübingen, 1737 [1733]; ASKB 276), pp. 639–649.

23

12 17

31

426

6

9

427

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 136–142 427

36

428

14

14

29

33

429

429

4

12

Jesuit] Member of the Roman Catholic order of monks founded in 1534 by the Spanish Basque Ignatius Loyola. The Jesuit order was founded in reaction to the Reformation and sought both to win believers back to the Roman Catholic Church and generally to preserve the pope’s authority over the Church. According to the stereotypes of many Protestants, the Jesuits used aggressive tactics, including slander, intrigue, and the use of force, to compel non-Catholics to submit to the Jesuit order and to the Church. The tactics a�ributed to the Jesuits came to be associated with the saying “the end justifies the means.” the one who was lost … the one who was recovered] The expressions allude to Jesus’ parable of the Prodigal Son (→ 434,15). was recovered,] Variant: first wri�en “recovered.”, followed by a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry. This has now been made impossible for me … remind a person of one thing] Refers to the ridicule of Kierkegaard that had been initiated by Corsaren (→ 393,24). I had previously had the consolation … to the countryside] Refers to the fact that ever since the publication of Either/Or (1843), Kierkegaard, in addition to taking frequent carriage rides to rural destinations, had considered stopping his career as a writer and seeking appointment as a priest in a rural parish. See, e.g., journal entries JJ:415 (KJN 2, 257) and NB:7, NB:57, and NB2:136 (KJN 4, 12–18, 50 –51, and 193–194). See also chap. 3, “Governance’s Part in My Writings,” in the second part of The Point of View for My Work as an Author (→ 351,2) (PV, 86; SV2 13, 611). a provincial town] Kierkegaard’s expression here is Kjøbstad, literally a market town, an ironic reference to Copenhagen, which according to the census of 1845 had 126,787 inhabitants. See Kjøbenhavn, dens ældre og nyere Historie [Copenhagen, Its Earlier and More Recent History], ed. L. J. Flamand (Copenhagen, 1855), p. 189. braggarts at conventions and national assemblies] Presumably a reference to Grundtvigian priests

1849

681

and theologians, including, e.g., Kierkegaard’s brother, Peter Christian Kierkegaard, who spoke grandly of Denmark’s renown at various conventions and at the national assembly. ― conventions: (→ 396,27). ― national assemblies: i.e., the constitutional convention that assembled on October 23, 1848, and remained in session until June 5, 1849, when it produced the final version of a constitution for the Danish monarchy. The first elections for the first ordinary parliament or national assembly (Danish, rigsdag) had just been held on December 4, 1849 (for the folketing or lower house), and December 29, 1849 (for the landsting or upper house), but the parliament did not actually assemble until January 30, 1850. Christ as Exemplar] → 350,23. the words of mockery … if God will have him.”] Freely cited from Mt 27:43. being forsaken by God] Allusion to Jesus’ words on the cross; see Mt 27:46. Nemesis] Nemesis was the Greek goddess who preserved balance in things, the goddess of revenge and punishment, of punitive justice directed against undeserved happiness and pride.

18

rid of a great deal of suffering] Variant: first written “much happier”.

36

430

When Xt is compared with the bridegroom and the believer with the bride] Thus, e.g., in Luther (→ 382,26).

17

431

The Sunday between Christmas and New Year, Epistle: Gal 4:1–7] In 1849, this Sunday fell on December 30. or Our Upbringing by God.] Variant: added. slaves under the Law] The chapter heading for Gal 4 in the authorized Danish version of the New Testament from 1819 used by Kierkegaard was “Those who believe in Christ are not slaves under the Law.” then children who cry, Abba, Father] See Gal 4:6 (→ 431,36); “Abba” is Aramaic for “Father.” See also Rom 8:15–16. co-heirs with Christ] See Gal 4:7 (→ 431,36) and Rom 8:17.

36

431

429

23 2

430

3

39 1

2

2

432

682

10 10

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 142–146

It is as I] Variant: first wri�en a hash mark (#), apparently indicating the end of the entry. in another journal … the infinite distance] See journal entry NB13:5 in the present volume.

432

19

Lavater draws a nice parallel … sword through her heart] The source has not been identified. ― Lavater: Johann Caspar Lavater (1741–1801), Swiss priest and author, founder of physiognomy, i.e., the theory that the external appearance of a person, and especially the face, expresses one’s moral and spiritual disposition. He was especially known for his work Physiognomische Fragmente zur Beförderung der Menschenkenntnisz und Menschenliebe [Physiognomic Fragments for the Promotion of the Knowledge and Love of Humanity], 4 vols. (Leipzig and Winterthur, 1775–1778; ASKB 613–616).― Paul had to have a thorn in the flesh: → 365m,1. ― Maria had a sword through her heart: Refers to Lk 2:34–35.

432

24

433

6

“That there are certain things that one can indeed understand would drive a man mad―but not other things.”] No source for this has been identified. as a servant, as the lesser, in the form of a servant] Allusion to Phil 2:7 (→ 419,1).

433

12 13

18 21

33

434

1

2

(Poetical).] Variant: added. “Jesus’ Name”] See J. P. Mynster’s (→ 354,33) sermon for New Year’s Day 1850, “Bønnen i Jesu Navn til vor Fader, som er i Himlene” [Prayer in Jesus’ Name to Our Father, Who Is in Heaven], published in Prædikener holdte i Aarene 1849 og 1850 [Sermons Given in the Years 1849 and 1850] (Copenhagen, 1851; ASKB 233), pp. 135–146. would almost] Variant: “almost” added. Xt’s name,] Variant: first wri�en “Xt’s name.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. fear and trembling] → 361,9. the divergence in the newest philosophy] i.e., the disagreement between Hegelian and antiHegelian philosophy. Trendelenburg rightly points out that we ought to begin with ϰινησις] Presumably a reference

1849

to F. A. Trendelenburg, Logische Untersuchungen [Logical Investigations], 2 vols. (Berlin, 1840; ASKB 843); see especially the chapters titled “Die dialektische Methode” [The Dialectical Method], “Die Bewegung” [Movement], and “Kategorien aus der Bewegung” [Categories of Movement] in vol. 1, pp. 23–99, 110–122, 278–322, where the logical categories are derived from the concept of “movement.” Kierkegaard had earlier mentioned Trendelenburg in his critique of Hegel; see, e.g., Concluding Unscientific Postscript (CUP, 109–111; SKS 7, 106–107). ― Trendelenburg: Friedrich Adolph Trendelenburg (1802–1872), German philosopher and philologist; from 1833, extraordinary professor, and from 1837 until his death, ordinary professor at Berlin. Kierkegaard owned a number of Trendelenburg’s works: Platonis de ideis et numeris doctrina ex Aristotele illustrata [Plato’s Doctrines of Ideas and Numbers, Illustrated with Reference to Aristotle] (Leipzig, 1826; ASKB 842); Logische Untersuchungen [Logical Investigations] (Berlin, 1840; ASKB 843); Elementa logices Aristotelicae [Elements of the Logic of Aristotle] (Berlin, 1842; ASKB 844); Erläuterungen zu den Elementen der aristotelischen Logik [Explanation of the Elements of Aristotelian Logic] (Berlin, 1842; ASKB 845); Die logische Frage in Hegel’s System. Zwei Streitschri�en [The Logical Question in Hegel’s System: Two Polemical Pieces] (Leipzig, 1843; ASKB 846); Niobe. Einige Betrachtungen über das Schöne und Erhabene; mit zwei Steinzeichnungen [Niobe: Some Observations on the Beautiful and the Sublime, with Two Lithographs] (Berlin, 1846; ASKB 847); and Geschichte der Kategorienlehre [History of the Doctrine of Categories] (Berlin, 1846; ASKB 848). ― ϰινησις: Refers in particular to Aristotle’s emphasis on the concept of ϰινε σισυδ as a transition from possibility to actuality; see Aristotle’s Physics, bk. 3, chap. 1 (201a 10–11); see also Trendelenburg, Geschichte der Kategorienlehre, pp. 136–137, 160–161, 170–171. In § 1 of the “Interlude” in Philosophical Fragments (1844), Kierkegaard provides an account of his understanding of the Greek concept as it is expounded by Aristotle, namely, as the transition from not-being to being, from possibility to actuality; see PF, 73–75; SKS 4, 273–275, with ac-

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 146–148

4

8 10

434

15 19

22 23 25

436

13

companying notes. See Concluding Unscientific Postscript, CUP, 342–343; SKS 7, 313. whether one ought to begin with being or with becoming] Refers to Hegel’s speculative logic, which begins with “pure being,” i.e., the most extreme abstraction from everything, in order then to go over into the category of “nothing”; the union of “being” and “nothing” is the category “becoming” (coming-into-being, movement; in German, werden). See Hegel, Wissenscha� der Logik [Science of Logic], ed. L. von Henning, 2 vols. (Berlin, 1833–1834 [1812–1816]; ASKB 552–554); vol. 1,1, in Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel’s Werke. Vollständige Ausgabe [George Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel’s Works: Complete Edition], vols. 1–18 (Berlin, 1832–1845); vol. 3, ed. by L. von Henning (1833 [1812]; ASKB 552), pp. 77–79. As time went by, there was increasingly harsh criticism of Hegel for beginning with “being”; Trendelenburg, in particular, makes this criticism, because “being” does not appear to contain the “movement” that is to drive the dialectic to the next category; see e.g., Concluding Unscientific Postscript, CUP, 80; SKS 7, 80, and accompanying notes. Seyn] The philosophical category of “pure being” with which Hegel’s speculative logic begins. at any point,] Variant: first wri�en “at any point.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. “The Prodigal Son” ― “The Father” ― “The Brother”] Refers to Lk 15:11–32. diversion] Variant: added. (light reading)] Variant: parentheses added in pencil. Let us … beginning is:] Variant: added. he is bored … hearing the same things] Variant: added. It is an old story] Variant: added. Allusion to a well-known poem by the German poet Heinrich Heine, “Ein Jüngling liebt ein Mädchen” [A Youth Loved a Maid], in Buch der Lieder [Songbook] (Hamburg, 1827), p. 144: “It is an old story, but it is ever new.” he spent his money … ended up herding swine] See Lk 15:13–16 (→ 434,15).

1849

683

“He came … a different way.] Variant: added. fathers are certainly] Variant: first wri�en, instead of “certainly” the Danish abbreviation msk, which means “perhaps.” Then the son demands that the father divide the estate with him] See Lk 15:12 (→ 434,15). make use of this gospel on Sunday] In Kierkegaard’s time, the parable of the Prodigal Son, Lk 15:11–32, was not a part of the required lectionary for the Church year, but it could of course be brought into a Sunday sermon. the parable of the two brothers … and did his father’s will] See Mt 21:28–32. about love,] Variant: first wri�en “about love.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. a�er having received “his” share of the father’s estate, he travels abroad] See Lk 15:11–13 (→ 434,15).

20

flagellation in monasteries] Refers to the asceticism that consisted of whipping oneself, which was practiced during the Middle Ages by monks, Christian hermits, and especially by the so-called flagellants (13th and 14th centuries). Self-flagellation was regarded as a special form of penance that recalled how Christ had permi�ed himself to be whipped for humanity. when one is the King of Kings: to clothe oneself in the form of a poor servant] See Phil 2:7 (→ 419,1). really asceticism,] Variant: first wri�en “really asceticism.”, with the period apparently indicating the end of the sentence. the doctrine … that Xnty is enjoyment of life] The complaint that Mynster (→ 354,33) did not present Christianity with its most rigorous requirements but instead toned it down out of concern for humanity (→ 385,7) was something Kierkegaard repeated at many points in the later journals; see, e.g., entries NB6:82 in KJN 5, 64; NB11:80 (“Ah, Mynster, Mynster, where did you get permission to transform Christianity into such an almost effeminate leniency!”), NB11:224, and NB13:8, all in the present volume. In the next journal, NB15, Kierkegaard writes, with respect to Grundtvig (→ 408,26): “Grundtvig, who has al-

35

22

437

14

438

40 3

434m

8

436m

4

439

9

12

15

684

18

33

440

6

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 148–150

ways been a hater of discipline and rigor, has also formulated the theory that the true Christian participates in everything” (entry NB15:27 in KJN 7). As I have shown in another journal … to enjoy himself in life] Kierkegaard may be referring to entry NB9:64, in KJN 5, 247–248, or to entry NB13:25 in the present volume. R. Nielsen … “It makes an infinite difference … what is purchased.”] Kierkegaard’s remark has not been found documented in his journals or letters; it presumably is something he said during one of his conversations with Rasmus Nielsen (→ 402,20). ― 100 rd: i.e., 100 rix-dollars. The rix-dollar, properly rigsbank dollar (rigsbanksdaler), was divided into six marks, each of which was further divided into sixteen shillings; thus there were 96 shillings in a rix-dollar. A judge earned about 1,200–1,800 rix-dollars a year; a middle-level civil servant earned about 400–500 rix-dollars a year; a qualified artisan would receive 200 rix-dollars a year plus free board and lodging from his master; a maidservant received at most 30 rix-dollars plus board and lodging. Four hundred rix-dollars were considered sufficient to maintain a family for a year. A pair of shoes cost three rix-dollars and a one-pound loaf of rye bread (the staple of the day) cost between two and four shillings. doctrine of “essence” in logic ... “the concept” existence] In Hegel’s speculative logic, which forms the first part of his complete philosophical system, the immanent conceptual dialectic goes through the “doctrine of being,” “the doctrine of essence,” and “the doctrine of the concept.” In “the doctrine of the concept,” in which the so-called reflective concepts are developed, “the movement” proceeds from “essence as the ground of existence,” or “the pure category of reflection,” through “the manifestation” to “actuality,” and Hegel’s category of existence is situated as the second moment under “the essence as the ground of existence” or as the first moment under “the manifestation.” See § 123 in Hegel, Encyclopädie der philosophischen Wissenscha�en im Grundrisse [Encyclopedia of the Philosophical Sciences in Outline], ed. L. von Henning, 3 vols. (Berlin, 1840–1845 [1817]; ASKB 561–563), (vol. 6 in Hegel’s Werke), pp. 250–253;

1849

see also the sections on “Die Existenz” [Existence] in Wissenscha� der Logik (→ 434,4), vol. 1,2 (in Hegel’s Werke, vol. 4), pp. 120–144. With respect to the presentation of “the categories of existence” in Danish Hegelianism, see J. L. Heiberg, Ledetraad ved Forelæsningerne over Philosophiens Philosophie eller den speculative Logik ved den kongelige militaire Højskole [Guide to the Lectures on the Philosophy of Philosophy, or Speculative Logic, Held at the Royal Military Academy] (Copenhagen, 1832), §§ 91–94, pp. 48–50; Rasmus Nielsen, Den speculative Logik i dens Grundtræk [Fundamental Characteristics of Speculative Logic], nos. 1–4 (Copenhagen, 1841–1844), § 25, pp. 157–179; and A. P. Adler, Populaire Foredrag over Hegels objective Logik [Popular Lectures on Hegel’s Objective Logic] (Copenhagen, 1842; ASKB 383), § 26, pp. 140–148. Spinoza can be right: essentia involvit existentiam] Refers to the first and the seventh of the definitions in the first part (“De Deo” [Of God]) of Spinoza’s Ethica [Ethics], which Kierkegaard underlined in his copy of Benedicti de Spinoza opera philosophica omnia [Complete Philosophical Works of Benedict de Spinoza], ed. A. F. Gfrörer (Stu�gart, 1830; ASKB 788), pp. 287, 288. Spinoza uses the more complete wording cujus essentia involvit existentiam (“whose essence includes existence”), which Kierkegaard notes in the dra� of Philosophical Fragments; see the “Critical Account of the Text” of Philosophiske Smuler in SKS K4, 188n1. But in another sense Kant is right … to a concept] Summary of Kant’s refutation of the ontological proof of God’s existence; Kant argues that existence is not a property. See the argument in the section “Von der Unmöglichkeit eines ontologischen Beweises vom Daseyn Go�es” [On the Impossibility of an Ontological Proof of God’s Existence], in Critik der reinen Vernun� [Critique of Pure Reason] 4th ed. (Riga, 1794 [1781]; ASKB 595), pp. 620–630, and the corresponding section of the work Der einzig mögliche Beweisgrund zu einer Demonstration des Daseyns Go�es [The Only Possible Ground of Proof for a Demonstration of God’s Existence] (1763), published in Imanuel [sic] Kant’s vermischte Schri�en [Immanuel Kant’s

11

13

J O U R N A L NB 14 : 150 1849

440m

1

10

21 23

Miscellaneous Writings], ed. J. H. Tie�runk, 3 vols. (Halle, 1799 [a 4th vol. appeared in Königsberg, 1807]; ASKB 1731–1733); vol. 2, pp. 67–107, esp. pp. 69–78. The Leibnitzian principle: If God is possible, he is necessary] See, e.g., Leibniz’s le�er from 1678, “Epistola ad Hermannum Conringium de Cartesiana Demonstratione Existentiae Dei” [Le�er to Hermann Conring on the Cartesian Proof for the Existence of God], in which he writes, “If in any possible way he can be assumed to exist, God exists with necessity”; see God. Guil. Leibnitii opera philosophica, quæ exstant [The Extant Philosophical Works of Go�fried Wilhelm Leibniz], ed. J. E. Erdmann, 2 vols. (Berlin, 1839– 1840; ASKB 620); vol. 1 (1840), p. 78. See also F. A. Trendelenburg, Logische Untersuchungen (→ 434,2), vol. 2, pp. 111–112. as was taught as early as Aristotle, existence … is not subsumed into the concept] See, e.g., Aristotle’s Posterior Analytics (86 a 29–30), excerpts of which Trendelenburg includes in his Elementa Logices Aristotelicae [Elements of Aristotle’s Logic], 2nd ed. (Berlin, 1842; ASKB 844); in his own copy, Kierkegaard underlined § 6, p. 3, ll. 5–6; see Pap. V C 11,3. The very way … eternity of “the concepts.”] Variant: added. that it does not believe in the immortality of the individual] Refers to the widespread debate in the 1830s concerning the degree to which Hegel’s system denied belief in individual immortality. See, e.g., journal entry CC:25 in KJN 1, 200–201; Concluding Unscientific Postscript (CUP, 34n, 171; SKS 7, 40n and 158); Christian Discourses, 204; SKS 10, 213, and accompanying explanatory notes.

685

MAPS Map 1, Copenhagen, 1839, by Severin Sterm 688

Map 2, Copenhagen Locator Map 690

Map 1

A

|

B

|

|

1

|

2

|

3

4

Map 2

C

|

D

E

|

F

|

G

|

H

1

| 2

| 3

| 4

CALENDAR For July 1, 1849, through December 31, 1850 695

Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

8th S a Trinity

7th S a Trinity

6th S a Trinity

5th S a Trinity

The Visitation

4th S a Trinity

July W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 12th S a Trinity

11th S a Trinity

10th S a Trinity

9th S a Trinity

August Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 17th S a Trinity

St Michael

16th S a Trinity

Ember Day

15th S a Trinity

14th S a Trinity

13th S a Trinity

September M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 21th S a Trinity

20th S a Trinity

Moving Day

19th S a Trinity

18th S a Trinity

October Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 25th S a Trinity

24th S a Trinity

23th S a Trinity / St Martin

22th S a Trinity

All Saint’s Day

November Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

1st S a Christmas

Christmas Day St Stephen

4th S in Advent

Ember Day

3rd S in Advent

2nd S in Advent

1st S in Advent

December

C A L E N D A R 1849 695

1849

Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2nd S in Lent

St Peter’s Chair

Ember Day

1st S in Lent

Shrove Tuesday Ash Wednesday

Quinquagesima

5S e H 3K

Candlemas Sexagesima

F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 M Tu 3rd S in Lent W Th F Sa Su M 40 Martyrs Tu 4th S in Lent W Th F Sa Su M Tu W 5th S in Lent Th F Sa Su M Tu Palm Sunday W The Annuciation Th F Sa Maundy Thursday Su Good Friday M Tu Easter Day

March 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 4th S a Easter

Great Prayer Day

3rd S a Easter

Moving Day

2nd S a Easter

1st S a Easter

Easter Monday

April W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Sa Su M Tu 5th S a Easter W Th F Sa Ascension Day Su M Tu 6th S a Easter W Th F Sa Su M Tu Pentecost W Pentecost Monday Th F Ember Day Sa Su M Tu Trinity Sunday W Th F Sa Corpus Christi Su

May 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

5th S a Trinity

7 Sleepers

4th S a Trinity Birth of John Bapt

3rd S a Trinity

2nd S a Trinity

1st S a Trinity

June

AND

Septuagesima

F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th

February

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS

2nd S a Epiphany

1st S a Epiphany

Epiphany

New Year’s Day

January

696 N OTEBOOKS

1850

M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

9th S a Trinity

8th S a Trinity

7th S a Trinity

6th S a Trinity

The Visitation

July Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13th S a Trinity

12th S a Trinity

11th S a Trinity

10th S a Trinity

August

M

Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su

14th S a Trinity

Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu 15th S a Trinity W Th F Sa Su M Tu 16th S a Trinity W Th Ember Day F Sa Su M Tu 17th S a Trinity W Th F Sa Su M Tu 18th S a Trin / St Michael and W 30 Th all Angels

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

September 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 22th S a Trinity

21th S a Trinity

Moving Day

20th S a Trinity

19th S a Trinity

October F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 26th S a Trinity

25th S a Trinity

24th S a Trinity St Martin

23th S a Trinity

All Saint’s Day

November Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu W Th F Sa Su M Tu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

1st S a Christmas

Christmas Day St Stephen

4th S in Advent

Ember Day

3rd S in Advent

2nd S in Advent

1st S in Advent

December

C A L E N D A R 1850 697

1850

CONCORDANCE From Søren Kierkegaards Papirer to Kierkegaard’s Journals and Notebooks 701

701

Concordance Pap.

KJN

Pap.

KJN

Pap.

X 1 A 295 X 1 A 296 X 1 A 297 X 1 A 298 X 1 A 299 X 1 A 300 X 1 A 301 X 1 A 302 X 1 A 303 X 1 A 304 X 1 A 305

NB11:1 NB11:2 NB11:3 NB11:4 NB11:5 NB11:6 NB11:7 NB11:8 NB11:9 NB11:10 NB11:11 NB11:11.a NB11:11.b NB11:12 NB11:12.a NB11:13 NB11:13.a NB11:13.b NB11:14 NB11:15 NB11:16 NB11:17 NB11:18 NB11:19 NB11:20 NB11:21 NB11:22 NB11:23 NB11:23.a NB11:24 NB11:25 NB11:26 NB11:27 NB11:28 NB11:29 NB11:30 NB11:31 NB11:32 NB11:33 NB11:33.a NB11:33.b

X 1 A 329 X 1 A 330 X 1 A 331 X 1 A 332 X 1 A 333

NB11:33.c NB11:34 NB11:35 NB11:36 NB11:37 NB11:37.a NB11:38 NB11:38.a NB11:38.b NB11:39 NB11:40 NB11:40.a NB11:41 NB11:42 NB11:43 NB11:44 NB11:45 NB11:46 NB11:47 NB11:48 NB11:49 NB11:50 NB11:50.a NB11:51 NB11:52 NB11:53 NB11:54 NB11:55 NB11:56 NB11:57 NB11:58 NB11:59 NB11:60 NB11:61 NB11:62 NB11:63 NB11:64 NB11:65 NB11:66 NB11:67 NB11:68

X 1 A 367 NB11:69 X 1 A 368 NB11:70 NB11:70 a X 1 A 369 NB11:71 X 1 A 370 NB11:72 X 1 A 371 NB11:73 X 1 A 372 NB11:74 X 1 A 373 NB11:75 NB11:75 a NB11:75.b X 1 A 374 NB11:76 X 1 A 375 NB11:77 X 1 A 376 NB11:78 X 1 A 377 NB11:79 NB11:79 a NB11:79.b X 1 A 378 NB11:80 X 1 A 379 NB11:81 X 1 A 380 NB11:82 X 1 A 381 NB11:83 X 1 A 382 NB11:84 X 1 A 383 NB11:85 NB11:85 a X 1 A 384 NB11:86 X 1 A 385 NB11:87 X 1 A 386 NB11:88 X 1 A 387 NB11:89 X 1 A 388 NB11:90 X 1 A 389 NB11:91 X 1 A 390 NB11:91 a X 1 A 391 NB11:92 X 1 A 392 NB11:93 X 1 A 393 NB11:94 X 1 A 394 NB11:95 X 1 A 395 NB11:96 X 1 A 396 NB11:97 X 1 A 397 NB11:98 X 1 A 398 NB11:99 X 1 A 399 NB11:100 X 1 A 400 NB11:101 X 1 A 401 NB11:102

X 1 A 306 X 1 A 307 X 1 A 308 X 1 A 309 X 1 A 310 X 1 A 311 X 1 A 312 X 1 A 313 X 1 A 314 X 1 A 315 X 1 A 316 X 1 A 317 X 1 A 318 X 1 A 319 X 1 A 320 X 1 A 321 X 1 A 322 X 1 A 323 X 1 A 324 X 1 A 325 X 1 A 326 X 1 A 327 X 1 A 328

X 1 A 334 X 1 A 335 X 1 A 336 X 1 A 337 X 1 A 338 X 1 A 339 X 1 A 340 X 1 A 341 X 1 A 342 X 1 A 343 X 1 A 344 X 1 A 345 X 1 A 346 X 1 A 347 X 1 A 348 X 1 A 349 X 1 A 350 X 1 A 351 X 1 A 352 X 1 A 353 X 1 A 354 X 1 A 355 X 1 A 356 X 1 A 357 X 1 A 358 X 1 A 359 X 1 A 360 X 1 A 361 X 1 A 362 X 1 A 363 X 1 A 364 X 1 A 365 X 1 A 366

KJN

Pap.

KJN

X 1 A 402 X 1 A 403 X 1 A 404 X 1 A 405 X 1 A 406 X 1 A 407 X 1 A 408

NB11:103 NB11:104 NB11:105 NB11:106 NB11:107 NB11:108 NB11:109 NB11:109 a NB11:110 NB11:111 NB11:111 a NB11:112 NB11:113 NB11:114 NB11:114 a NB11:115 NB11:116 NB11:117 NB11:118 NB11:118 a NB11:119 NB11:120 NB11:121 NB11:122 NB11:122 a NB11:123 NB11:123 a NB11:123.b NB11:124 NB11:125 NB11:125 a NB11:126 NB11:126 a NB11:127 NB11:128 NB11:129 NB11:129 a NB11:130 NB11:131 NB11:132 NB11:133

X 1 A 409 X 1 A 410 X 1 A 411 X 1 A 412 X 1 A 413 X 1 A 414 X 1 A 415 X 1 A 416 X 1 A 417 X 1 A 418 X 1 A 419 X 1 A 420 X 1 A 421 X 1 A 422 X 1 A 423 X 1 A 424 X 1 A 425 X 1 A 426 X 1 A 427 X 1 A 428 X 1 A 429 X 1 A 430 X 1 A 431 X 1 A 432

702 X 1 A 433 X 1 A 434 X 1 A 435 X 1 A 436 X 1 A 437 X 1 A 438 X 1 A 439 X 1 A 440 X 1 A 441 X 1 A 442 X 1 A 443 X 1 A 444 X 1 A 445 X 1 A 446 X 1 A 447 X 1 A 448 X 1 A 449 X 1 A 450 X 1 A 451 X 1 A 452 X 1 A 453 X 1 A 454 X 1 A 455 X 1 A 456 X 1 A 457 X 1 A 458 X 1 A 459 X 1 A 460 X 1 A 461 X 1 A 462 X 1 A 463 X 1 A 464 X 1 A 465 X 1 A 466 X 1 A 467 X 1 A 468 X 1 A 469 X 1 A 470 X 1 A 471 X 1 A 472 X 1 A 473 X 1 A 474 X 1 A 475 X 1 A 476 X 1 A 477 X 1 A 478 X 1 A 479 X 1 A 480 X 1 A 481

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS NB11:134 NB11:135 NB11:135.a NB11:136 NB11:137 NB11:138 NB11:139 NB11:140 NB11:141 NB11:142 NB11:143 NB11:144 NB11:145 NB11:146 NB11:147 NB11:148 NB11:149 NB11:150 NB11:151 NB11:152 NB11:153 NB11:154 NB11:155 NB11:156 NB11:157 NB11:158 NB11:159 NB11:160 NB11:161 NB11:162 NB11:163 NB11:164 NB11:165 NB11:165.a NB11:165.b NB11:166 NB11:167 NB11:168 NB11:169 NB11:170 NB11:171 NB11:171.a NB11:172 NB11:173 NB11:174 NB11:175 NB11:176 NB11:177 NB11:178 NB11:179

X 1 A 482 X 1 A 483 X 1 A 484 X 1 A 485 X 1 A 486 X 1 A 487 X 1 A 488 X 1 A 489 X 1 A 490 X 1 A 491 X 1 A 492 X 1 A 493 X 1 A 494 X 1 A 495 X 1 A 496 X 1 A 497 X 1 A 498 X 1 A 499 X 1 A 500 X 1 A 501 X 1 A 502 X 1 A 503 X 1 A 504 X 1 A 505 X 1 A 506 X 1 A 507 X 1 A 508 X 1 A 509 X 1 A 510 X 1 A 511 X 1 A 512 X 1 A 513 X 1 A 514 X 1 A 515 X 1 A 516 X 1 A 517

X 1 A 518 X 1 A 519 X 1 A 520 X 1 A 521 X 1 A 522 X 1 A 523 X 1 A 524

NB11:180 NB11:181 NB11:182 NB11:183 NB11:184 NB11:185 NB11:186 NB11:187 NB11:188 NB11:189 NB11:190 NB11:191 NB11:192 NB11:192 a NB11:192.a.a NB11:193 NB11:193 a NB11:193.b NB11:194 NB11:194 a NB11:194.a.a NB11:195 NB11:196 NB11:197 NB11:198 NB11:199 NB11:200 NB11:201 NB11:202 NB11:203 NB11:204 NB11:204 a NB11:204.a.a NB11:205 NB11:206 NB11:207 NB11:208 NB11:209 NB11:209 a NB11:209.b NB11:209.c NB11:210 NB11:211 NB11:212 NB11:212 a NB11:212.b NB11:213 NB11:214 NB11:215 NB11:216

AND

N OTEBOOKS

X 1 A 525 NB11:217 NB11:217 a NB11:217.b X 1 A 526 NB11:218 X 1 A 527 NB11:219 X 1 A 528 NB11:220 NB11:220 a X 1 A 529 NB11:221 NB11:221 a NB11:221.b X 1 A 530 NB11:222 NB11:222 a NB11:222.b X 1 A 531 NB11:223 NB11:223 a X 1 A 532 NB11:224 NB11:224 a X 1 A 533 NB11:225 NB11:225 a X 1 A 534 NB11:226 NB11:226 a X 1 A 535 NB11:227 NB11:227 a X 1 A 536 NB11:228 NB11:228 a NB11:228.b X 1 A 537 NB11:229 X 1 A 538 NB11:230 X 1 A 539 NB11:231 X 1 A 540 NB11:232 NB11:232 a X 1 A 541 NB11:233 NB11:233 a X 1 A 542 NB12:1 X 1 A 543 NB12:2 X 1 A 544 NB12:5 X 1 A 545 NB12:6 X 1 A 546 NB12:7 X 1 A 547 NB12:8 NB12:8.a X 1 A 548 NB12 9 X 1 A 549 NB12:10 X 1 A 550 NB12:11 X 1 A 551 NB12:12 NB12:12.a X 1 A 552 NB12:13 X 1 A 553 NB12:14 NB12:14.a X 1 A 554 NB12:15 X 1 A 555 NB12:15.a

NB12:15.b X 1 A 556 NB12:16 NB12:16.a X 1 A 557 NB12:17 X 1 A 558 NB12:18 X 1 A 559 NB12:19 X 1 A 560 NB12:20 NB12:20.a X 1 A 561 NB12:21 X 1 A 562 NB12:22 X 1 A 563 NB12:23 X 1 A 564 NB12:24 X 1 A 565 NB12:25 X 1 A 566 NB12:26 X 1 A 567 NB12:27 X 1 A 568 NB12:28 X 1 A 569 NB12:28.a X 1 A 570 NB12:29 NB12:29.a X 1 A 571 NB12:30 X 1 A 572 NB12:31 X 1 A 573 NB12:32 X 1 A 574 NB12:33 X 1 A 575 NB12:34 X 1 A 576 NB12:35 X 1 A 577 NB12:36 X 1 A 578 NB12:37 NB12:37.a X 1 A 579 NB12:38 X 1 A 580 NB12:39 X 1 A 581 NB12:40 X 1 A 582 NB12:41 NB12:41.a X 1 A 583 NB12:42 NB12:42.a X 1 A 584 NB12:43 X 1 A 585 NB12:44 X 1 A 586 NB12:45 X 1 A 587 NB12:46 X 1 A 588 NB12:47 NB12:47.a X 1 A 589 NB12:48 X 1 A 590 NB12:49 X 1 A 591 NB12:50 X 1 A 592 NB12:51 X 1 A 593 NB12:52 X 1 A 594 NB12:53 X 1 A 595 NB12:54 X 1 A 596 NB12:55 X 1 A 597 NB12:56

CONCORDANCE X 1 A 598 X 1 A 599 X 1 A 600 X 1 A 601 X 1 A 602 X 1 A 603 X 1 A 604 X 1 A 605 X 1 A 606 X 1 A 607 X 1 A 608 X 1 A 609 X 1 A 610 X 1 A 611 X 1 A 612 X 1 A 613 X 1 A 614 X 1 A 615 X 1 A 616 X 1 A 617 X 1 A 618 X 1 A 619 X 1 A 620 X 1 A 621 X 1 A 622 X 1 A 623 X 1 A 624 X 1 A 625 X 1 A 626 X 1 A 627 X 1 A 628 X 1 A 629 X 1 A 630 X 1 A 631 X 1 A 632 X 1 A 633

NB12:57 NB12:58 NB12:59 NB12:60 NB12:60.a NB12:61 NB12:62 NB12:62.a NB12:62.b NB12:63 NB12:64 NB12:64.a NB12:65 NB12:66 NB12:67 NB12:68 NB12:69 NB12:70 NB12:70.a NB12:70.b NB12:71 NB12:72 NB12:73 NB12:73.a NB12:74 NB12:74.a NB12:75 NB12:75.a NB12:75.b NB12:76 NB12:76.a NB12:77 NB12:77.a NB12:78 NB12:78.a NB12:79 NB12:79.a NB12:80 NB12:81 NB12:82 NB12:83 NB12:84 NB12:85 NB12:85.a NB12:86 NB12:86.a NB12:87 NB12:88 NB12:89 NB12:90

X 1 A 634 NB12:91 X 1 A 635 NB12:92 X 1 A 636 NB12:93 NB12:93.a X 1 A 637 NB12:94 X 1 A 638 NB12:95 X 1 A 639 NB12:96 X 1 A 640 NB12:97 X 1 A 641 NB12:98 X 1 A 642 NB12:99 NB12:99.a X 1 A 643 NB12:100 X 1 A 644 NB12:101 X 1 A 645 NB12:102 X 1 A 646 NB12:103 X 1 A 647 NB12:104 X 1 A 648 NB12:105 NB12:105.a X 1 A 649 NB12:106 X 1 A 650 NB12:107 X 1 A 651 NB12:108 X 1 A 652 NB12:109 X 1 A 653 NB12:110 X 1 A 654 NB12:111 X 1 A 655 NB12:112 X 1 A 656 NB12:113 X 1 A 657 NB12:114 X 1 A 658 NB12:115 NB12:115.a NB12:115.b X 1 A 659 NB12:116 NB12:116.a X 1 A 660 NB12:117 NB12:117.a X 1 A 661 NB12:118 NB12:118.a NB12:118.b X 1 A 662 NB12:119 X 1 A 663 NB12:120 NB12:120.a X 1 A 664 NB12:120.b X 1 A 665 NB12:120.c X 1 A 666 NB12:121 NB12:121.a X 1 A 667 NB12:122 NB12:122.a NB12:122.b X 1 A 668 NB12:123 X 1 A 669 NB12:124 NB12:124.a

X 1 A 670 X 1 A 671 X 1 A 672 X 1 A 673 X 1 A 674 X 1 A 675 X 1 A 676 X 1 A 677 X 1 A 678 X 1 A 679 X 1 A 680 X 1 A 681 X 1 A 682 X2A1 X2A2 X2A3 X2A4 X2A5 X2A6 X2A7 X2A8 X2A9 X 2 A 10 X 2 A 11 X 2 A 12 X 2 A 13 X 2 A 14 X 2 A 15 X 2 A 16 X 2 A 17 X 2 A 18 X 2 A 19 X 2 A 20 X 2 A 21 X 2 A 22 X 2 A 23 X 2 A 24 X 2 A 25 X 2 A 26 X 2 A 27 X 2 A 28 X 2 A 29 X 2 A 30

703 NB12:125 NB12:126 NB12:127 NB12:128 NB12:129 NB12:129.a NB12:130 NB12:131 NB12:131.a NB12:132 NB12:132.a NB12:132.b NB12:133 NB12:134 NB12:135 NB12:136 NB12:137 NB12:3 NB12:4 NB12:138 NB12:138.a NB12:138.b NB12:138.c NB12:139 NB12:140 NB12:141 NB12:142 NB12:142.a NB12:143 NB12:143.a NB12:144 NB12:145 NB12:146 NB12:146.a NB12:147 NB12:148 NB12:149 NB12:150 NB12:151 NB12:152 NB12:153 NB12:154 NB12:155 NB12:156 NB12:157 NB12:158 NB12:159 NB12:160 NB12:161 NB12:162

X 2 A 31 X 2 A 32 X 2 A 33 X 2 A 34 X 2 A 35 X 2 A 36 X 2 A 37 X 2 A 38 X 2 A 39 X 2 A 40 X 2 A 41 X 2 A 42 X 2 A 43 X 2 A 44 X 2 A 45 X 2 A 46 X 2 A 47 X 2 A 48 X 2 A 49 X 2 A 50 X 2 A 51 X 2 A 52 X 2 A 53 X 2 A 54 X 2 A 55 X 2 A 56 X 2 A 57 X 2 A 58 X 2 A 59 X 2 A 60 X 2 A 61 X 2 A 62 X 2 A 63 X 2 A 64 X 2 A 65 X 2 A 66 X 2 A 67 X 2 A 68 X 2 A 69 X 2 A 70 X 2 A 71

NB12:163 NB12:164 NB12:165 NB12:165 a NB12:165.b NB12:166 NB12:167 NB12:168 NB12:168 a NB12:169 NB12:170 NB12:170 a NB12:171 NB12:172 NB12:173 NB12:174 NB12:175 NB12:176 NB12:177 NB12:178 NB12:179 NB12:180 NB12:180 a NB12:181 NB12:181 a NB12:182 NB12:183 NB12:184 NB12:185 NB12:186 NB12:187 NB12:188 NB12:188 a NB12:189 NB12:190 NB12:191 NB12:191 a NB12:192 NB12:193 NB12:194 NB12:195 NB12:196 NB12:196 a NB12:197 NB12:198 NB12:198 a NB13:1 NB13:3 NB13:2 NB13:2.a

704 X 2 A 72 X 2 A 73 X 2 A 74 X 2 A 75 X 2 A 76 X 2 A 77 X 2 A 78 X 2 A 79 X 2 A 80 X 2 A 81 X 2 A 82 X 2 A 83 X 2 A 84 X 2 A 85 X 2 A 86 X 2 A 87 X 2 A 88 X 2 A 89 X 2 A 90 X 2 A 91 X 2 A 92 X 2 A 93 X 2 A 94 X 2 A 95 X 2 A 96 X 2 A 97 X 2 A 98 X 2 A 99 X 2 A 100 X 2 A 101 X 2 A 102 X 2 A 103 X 2 A 104 X 2 A 105 X 2 A 106 X 2 A 107 X 2 A 108 X 2 A 109 X 2 A 110 X 2 A 111 X 2 A 112 X 2 A 113 X 2 A 114

K IERKEGAARD’S J OURNALS NB13:5 NB13:6 NB13:6 a NB13:7 NB13:8 NB13:9 NB13:10 NB13:11 NB13:12 NB13:13 NB13:14 NB13:15 NB13:16 NB13:16 a NB13:17 NB13:18 NB13:19 NB13:20 NB13:21 NB13:21 a NB13:21.b NB13:21.c NB13:22 NB13:23 NB13:24 NB13:25 NB13:26 NB13:27 NB13:28 NB13:29 NB13:30 NB13:31 NB13:31 a NB13:32 NB13:33 NB13:33 a NB13:34 NB13:35 NB13:36 NB13:36 a NB13:37 NB13:37 a NB13:38 NB13:39 NB13:40 NB13:41 NB13:42 NB13:43 NB13:44 NB13:45

X 2 A 115 X 2 A 116 X 2 A 117 X 2 A 118 X 2 A 119 X 2 A 120 X 2 A 121 X 2 A 122 X 2 A 123 X 2 A 124 X 2 A 125 X 2 A 126 X 2 A 127 X 2 A 128 X 2 A 129 X 2 A 130 X 2 A 131 X 2 A 132 X 2 A 133 X 2 A 134 X 2 A 135 X 2 A 136 X 2 A 137 X 2 A 138 X 2 A 139 X 2 A 140 X 2 A 141

X 2 A 142 X 2 A 143 X 2 A 144 X 2 A 145 X 2 A 146 X 2 A 147 X 2 A 148 X 2 A 149 X 2 A 150 X 2 A 151 X 2 A 152 X 2 A 153 X 2 A 154 X 2 A 155

NB13:46 NB13:47 NB13:48 NB13:49 NB13:50 NB13:50 a NB13:51 NB13:52 NB13:53 NB13:54 NB13:55 NB13:55 a NB13:56 NB13:57 NB13:58 NB13:59 NB13:60 NB13:61 NB13:62 NB13:63 NB13:64 NB13:65 NB13:66 NB13:67 NB13:68 NB13:69 NB13:70 NB13:71 NB13:72 NB13:72 a NB13:72.b NB13:72.c NB13:72.d NB13:73 NB13:74 NB13:75 NB13:76 NB13:77 NB13:78 NB13:79 NB13:80 NB13:80 a NB13:81 NB13:82 NB13:83 NB13:84 NB13:84 a NB13:85 NB13:86 NB13:86 a

AND

X 2 A 156 X 2 A 157 X 2 A 158 X 2 A 159 X 2 A 160 X 2 A 161 X 2 A 162 X 2 A 163 X 2 A 164 X 2 A 165 X 2 A 166 X 2 A 167 X 2 A 168 X 2 A 169 X 2 A 170 X 2 A 171 X 2 A 172 X 2 A 173 X 2 A 174 X 2 A 175 X 2 A 176 X 2 A 177 X 2 A 178 X 2 A 179 X 2 A 180 X 2 A 181 X 2 A 182 X 2 A 183 X 2 A 184 X 2 A 185 X 2 A 186 X 2 A 187 X 2 A 188 X 2 A 189

N OTEBOOKS NB13:86.b NB13:86.c NB13:86.d NB13:86.e NB13:86.f NB13:86.g NB13:86.h NB13:87 NB13:88 NB13:88.a NB13:89 NB13:89.a NB13:89.b NB13:89.c NB13 90 NB13 91 NB13 92 NB13 92.a NB13 92.b NB14:1 NB14:2 NB14:3 NB14:4 NB14:5 NB14:5.a NB14:6 NB14:7 NB14:8 NB14:8.a NB14:8.b NB14 9 NB14:10 NB14:11 NB14:11.a NB14:12 NB14:13 NB14:14 NB14:15 NB14:16 NB14:17 NB14:17.a NB14:17.b NB14:18 NB14:19 NB14:20 NB14:21 NB14:22 NB14:23 NB14:24 NB14:24.a

X 2 A 190 NB14:25 X 2 A 191 NB14:26 X 2 A 192 NB14:27 NB14:27.a X 2 A 193 NB14:28 X 2 A 194 NB14:29 X 2 A 195 NB14:30 NB14:30.a X 2 A 196 NB14:31 X 2 A 197 NB14:32 X 2 A 198 NB14:33 NB14:33.a X 2 A 199 NB14:34 NB14:34.a NB14:34.c X 2 A 200 NB14:34.b X 2 A 201 NB14:35 X 2 A 202 NB14:36 NB14:36.a X 2 A 203 NB14:37 X 2 A 204 NB14:38 NB14:38.a NB14:38.b X 2 A 205 NB14:39 X 2 A 206 NB14:40 X 2 A 207 NB14:41 NB14:41.a X 2 A 208 NB14:42 X 2 A 209 NB14:43 X 2 A 210 NB14:44 NB14:44.e X 2 A 211 NB14:44.h NB14:44.h.a X 2 A 212 NB14:44.c X 2 A 213 NB14:44.a X 2 A 214 NB14:44.b X 2 A 215 NB14:44.d X 2 A 216 NB14:44.f X 2 A 217 NB14:44.g X 2 A 218 NB14:45 X 2 A 219 NB14:46 X 2 A 220 NB14:47 X 2 A 221 NB14:47.a X 2 A 222 NB14:48 X 2 A 223 NB14:49 X 2 A 224 NB14:50 X 2 A 225 NB14:51 X 2 A 226 NB14:52 X 2 A 227 NB14:53 X 2 A 228 NB14:54

CONCORDANCE X 2 A 229 NB14:55 X 2 A 230 NB14:56 X 2 A 231 NB14:57 NB14:57.a NB14:57.b NB14:57.c X 2 A 232 NB14:58 X 2 A 233 NB14:59 X 2 A 234 NB14:60 X 2 A 235 NB14:61 X 2 A 236 NB14:62 X 2 A 237 NB14:63 NB14:63.a NB14:63.b X 2 A 238 NB14:64 X 2 A 239 NB14:65 X 2 A 240 NB14:66 NB14:66.a X 2 A 241 NB14:67 X 2 A 242 NB14:68 X 2 A 243 NB14:69 X 2 A 244 NB14:70 X 2 A 245 NB14:71 X 2 A 246 NB14:72 X 2 A 247 NB14:73 X 2 A 248 NB14:74 X 2 A 249 NB14:75 X 2 A 250 NB14:76 X 2 A 251 NB14:77 NB14:77.a X 2 A 252 NB14:77.b X 2 A 253 NB14:78 X 2 A 254 NB14:79 X 2 A 255 NB14:80 X 2 A 256 NB14:81 NB14:81.a NB14:81.b X 2 A 257 NB14:82 NB14:82.a X 2 A 258 NB14:83 X 2 A 259 NB14:84 X 2 A 260 NB14:85 X 2 A 261 NB14:86 NB14:86.a X 2 A 262 NB14:87 X 2 A 263 NB14:88 X 2 A 264 NB14:88.a X 2 A 265 NB14:89 NB14:89.a NB14:89.b

X 2 A 266 NB14:90 NB14:90.a NB14:90.c X 2 A 267 NB14:90.b X 2 A 268 NB14:90.d X 2 A 269 NB14:91 X 2 A 270 NB14:92 X 2 A 271 NB14:93 X 2 A 272 NB14:94 X 2 A 273 NB14:95 NB14:95.a X 2 A 274 NB14:96 NB14:96.a X 2 A 275 NB14:97 NB14:97.a NB14:97.b NB14:97.c NB14:97.d X 2 A 276 NB14:98 X 2 A 277 NB14:99 X 2 A 278 NB14:100 X 2 A 279 NB14:101 NB14:101.a X 2 A 280 NB14:102 NB14:102.a X 2 A 281 NB14:103 X 2 A 282 NB14:104 X 2 A 283 NB14:105 X 2 A 284 NB14:106 X 2 A 285 NB14:107 NB14:107.a X 2 A 286 NB14:108 X 2 A 287 NB14:109 NB14:109.a X 2 A 288 NB14:110 X 2 A 289 NB14:111 X 2 A 290 NB14:112 NB14:112.a NB14:112.b X 2 A 291 NB14:113 X 2 A 292 NB14:114 X 2 A 293 NB14:115 X 2 A 294 NB14:116 X 2 A 295 NB14:117 X 2 A 296 NB14:118 X 2 A 297 NB14:119 X 2 A 298 NB14:120 NB14:120.a X 2 A 299 NB14:121 NB14:121.a

X 2 A 300 NB14:122 NB14:122.a X 2 A 301 NB14:123 X 2 A 302 NB14:124 X 2 A 303 NB14:125 NB14:125.a NB14:125.b NB14:125.c X 2 A 304 NB14:126 X 2 A 305 NB14:127 X 2 A 306 NB14:128 NB14:128.1 X 2 A 307 NB14:129 X 2 A 308 NB14:130 X 2 A 309 NB14:131 X 2 A 310 NB14:132 X 2 A 311 NB14:133 X 2 A 312 NB14:134 X 2 A 313 NB14:135 X 2 A 314 NB14:136 NB14:136.a X 2 A 315 NB14:137 X 2 A 316 NB14:138 X 2 A 317 NB14:139 X 2 A 318 NB14:140 X 2 A 319 NB14:141 X 2 A 320 NB14:142 X 2 A 321 NB14:143 X 2 A 322 NB14:144 X 2 A 323 NB14:145 NB14:145.a X 2 A 324 NB14:146 X 2 A 325 NB14:147 NB14:147.a NB14:147.b NB14:147.c NB14:147.d NB14:147.e NB14:147.f X 2 A 326 NB14:148 NB14:148.a X 2 A 327 NB14:149 X 2 A 328 NB14:150 NB14:150.a

705